Capilano College www.capcollege.bcca NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS and Administrative Offices 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, BC V7J 3H5 604 986 1911 Fax 604 984 4985 TDD (for deaf and hard of hearing) 604 990 7848 SECHELT CAMPUS 5627 Inlet Avenue PO Box 1609 Sechelt, BC VON 3AO 604 885 9310 In the Vancouver area: 604 986 1911, ext. 5900 Fax 604 885 9350 SQUAMISH CAMPUS 1150 Carson Place PO Box 1538 Squamish, BC VON 3G0 604 892 5322 In the Vancouver area: 604 986 1911, ext. 5800 Fax 604 892 9274 C M Capilano t wm College Table of Contents Maps 5,7,9 Frequently C a l l e d Numbers 11 About Capilano College 13 GENERAL INFORMATION Career Planning Information Career Resource Centre 51 Campus Activities Athletics and Recreation 51 Student U n i o n 52 Academic Schedule 19 A d m i s s i o n and Readmission 20 The Capilano R e v i e w 52 21 Student Newspaper 52 Application Dates Campus Publications A d m i s s i o n Requirements 21 Transfer Credit 24 Bookstore 53 26 Student S t o r e — C a p Corner 53 Right to Register 26 Parking 53 Instructional Y e a r 26 Lost and Found 54 Math Placement Test ( M P T ) 26 Food and Beverage Service 54 English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) 27 College Policies 55 Add/Drop/Withdrawal Procedures 27 Governance and Administration 65 Registration General Campus Services Course Overload 29 Course Challenge 29 PREPARATORY Fees 30 General Information 69 Graduation 32 Pre-College L e v e l Courses 69 A c a d e m i c Policies and Procedures 36 Career Access Centre 69 Student Services College Success Strategies Credit Courses 70 Educational Advice A d u l t Basic Education 70 72 The A d v i s i n g Centre 43 Alternative Career Training Registrar's Office 43 English as a Second Language 73 43 First Nations College Preparation Program 74 44 Speech Assisted Reading and W r i t i n g ( S A R A W ) 76 Disability Services First Nations Student Services Learning Support Services , UNIVERSITY TRANSFER Library 44 Learning Specialist 45 Writing Centre 46 The Mathematics Learning Centre 46 International Student Centre International Exchanges Student Financial Support 46 46 Employment Centre for Students 47 Financial A i d and Awards 47 Alternative Learning Formats Distance Education 48 Co-operative Education 48 Personal Support Services 2 PROGRAMS Counselling 49 C h i l d Care 50 Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r 50 Health Services and Sports M e d i c i n e C l i n i c 50 Security 51 General Information 79 Anthropology 83 Art History 83 Biology 84 Chemistry 85 Chinese 85 Commerce 86 Computing Science 87 Criminology 88 Economics 88 Engineering 89 English 91 French 92 Geography 93 Geology 93 German 94 History 94 Japanese -.95 Kinesiology 95 Legal Secretarial 160 Linguistics 96 M e d i a Program 161 Mathematics and Statistics 96 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 163 M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor of 99 M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor o f 164 Philosophy 101 Office Assistant 166 Physics J 02 Online Publishing 167 Political Studies 102 Outdoor Recreation Management 168 103 Special Education Teacher Assistant 170 Psychology • Sociology 103 Studio A r t 171 Spanish 104 Textile Arts 173 Thai 104 Theatre 175 Women's Studies 105 T o u r i s m Management 178 General Information 109 Art Institute Accounting Assistant 110 A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative 184 Accounting Support 111 Environmental Science 186 Administrative Assistant 111 Latin American Management 187 A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) 112 W r i t i n g Practices 188 Arts and Entertainment Management 114 Business Administration 116 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS Bachelor o f Business Administration Degree (BBA) 120 183 CONTINUING EDUCATION Continuing Education 191 Community M u s i c School 191 120 Eldercollege 191 Advanced Diploma 121 Certified Financial Planner Program 191 Business Computing C o - o p D i p l o m a 123 F i l m Studies 192 D i p l o m a Programs — T w o - y e a r 123 Educational Travel 192 Retail Marketing C o - o p 125 Contracts and Educational Partnerships 192 125 Custom-Designed Programs 192 Accelerated Business Administration D i p l o m a 126 Provincial Rafting Exams 192 Professional Accounting Transfer 127 International Programs 192 Computer Specialist D i p l o m a 128 Certified Financial Planner 128 C o - o p Education D i p l o m a Evening Certificate Programs L o c a l Government Administration Professional Certificate 129 Network Specialist Certificate 129 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 197 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 201 INDEX 310 Technical Computer Professional Certificate ... 130 Business Fundamentals 131 Commercial Animation 131 Communications 133 Digital A n i m a t i o n 134 Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education 135 F i l m Studies 138 Fisheries and Forestry Science 141 Graphic Design and Illustration 142 H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant 144 H o m e Support/Resident Care Attendant 146 Jazz Studies 147 Labour Studies 155 Landscape Horticulture 156 Legal Assistant 157 2000 - 2001 Capilano College Calendar Published by: Community Relations Design and Layout: Media Production Services Cover Design: Jana Hotkova Changes to Curricula, Regulations, and Services Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes in the College Calendar as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services, without liability for any resulting loss or damage. Although every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the time of printing, the statements in the Calendar do not constitute an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. 3 T H I N K L CINDY POULIN, I K E a virtual I N D Y . CGA PACIFIC RIM COMMUNICATIONS "As C consultant, g r o u n d i n e-commerce, opens up a w o r l d Virtual Consultant I'm p a r t o f t h e new the i n t e r n e t of opportunity. economy, and a c c o u n t i n g . It'sdefinitely career p o r t f o l i o . " breaking My CGA new designation t h e s t r e n g t h o f my ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ C G A . T H I N K C G A The C e r t i f i e d G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t s A s s o c i a t i o n of B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a offers u n p a r a l l e l e d c a r e e r o p p o r t u n i t i e s in f i n a n c i a l m a n a g e m e n t . Top p o s i t i o n s , b i g r e s p o n s i b i l i t i e s a n d m a x i m u m e a r n i n g p o w e r . COMBINE YOUR DIPLOMA W I T H T H E POWER OF A C G A DESIGNATION. Call 1-800-565-121 I or (604) 732-1211 or visit: w w w . c g a - b c . o r g Information sessions are held every Tuesday 1:30 - 2:30 pm in the Association's office, 1555 West 8th Avenue, Vancouver. How To Find Us Campus Address: Capilano College, 2055 Purcell Way, North Vancouver, B.C., V7J 3H5 Take Exit 22 off the Trans-Canada Highway. Proceed up the hill on Lillooet Road to main entrance on Purcell Way. STRACHAM COMPUTER bowl to the minic & diico-lype litei SOLUTIONS LTD. film * *• • m theatre * S u n . & W e d . 9pm - 1 2 238 Lonsdale Ave. FREE SHOE RENTAL North Vancouver, B.C. when you purchase 3 games. Just show your Cap College student ID * Canada V7M 2G1 PARK ROYAL LANES Tel: (604) 984-8500 1080 S. Park Royal, West Vancouver V7T 1A1 925-0005 sales@strachan-computers.bc.ca television Canada's source for Industry software plays • Budgeting • Scheduling • Screen Writing books 136 East Cordova St. software Vancouver, B . C . Canada V 6 A 1K9 ph: 6 0 4 6 6 9 6431 accent tapes fax: 6 0 4 6 6 9 6432 bizbooks@telus.net etc *Ask about our student discounts FOR STUDENTS ONLY Subscribe to The Globe and Mail now and save The stereotypical accountant, the number cruncher, is history. The future belongs to those with agility, vision and leadership. If you're geared for numbers, can think 'big picture,' apply concepts and integrate information, then the Certified Management Accountant path is your logical career choice. • Get Canada's best daily information package delivered Monday through Saturday - plus - at no extra cost, C M A s earn their professional designation by completing the Strategic Leadership Program — a rigorous and highly specialized accreditation process. It is the only professional development program that completely integrates the best of Report on Business Magazine monthly • Your choice of 13, 26 or 52 week term. contemporary and emerging management techniques, rock-solid accounting expertise and interpersonal development. Why C M A ? Because agility, vision and leadership is what C M A is all about. Thats why. To subscribe and pay 28% CMA Shaping the Future Information sessions are held every Thursday at 1:30 p.m. at the of the regular price, call now: C M A office. To order an information package, call (604) 687-5891 604-687-4435 or 1-800-387-5400. or 1-800-663-9646 or visit our web site: www.cmabc.com. CMA Canada - British Columbia P.O. Box 11548 1575-650 West Georgia St., Vancouver, BC V6B4W7 THE GLOBE AND MAIL C A N A D A ' S N A T I O N A L v : ' * - • * • ' www.theglobeandmail.com 7 BC Open University OPEN TO YOU Thinking of starting, completing, or adding to your university degree? Looking for credit courses and programs available year-round, delivered where you live? BC Open University combines theflexibilityyou need with the recognized credentials you want. Phone: (604) 431-3300 (BC Lower Mainland) 1-800-663-9711 (Toll-free) Email: studentserv@ola.bc.ca Website: www.ola.bc.ca/bcou \QJ BCOU V,. f * Diviiion of t i e Oper> Learnn ig Ageccy BCOU is a fully accredited BC public university and a member of the Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada. Attention C a pCollege students! As a Capilano College student taking credit courses you are eligible to purchase educationally-priced computer hardware and software. The Simon Fraser University Microcomputer Store has great student prices on computers, printers, software, and a wide range of computer products. Here are just a few examples - visit our Store or Web site for more. Software Package Educational Price Reg. Retail Price Adobe Acrobat (Mac or Win) Adobe GoLive! (Mac or Win) Inprise (Borland) C++ Builder Pro (Win) over $350 The basics of a social life is to $135 $189 $135 about $500 Simply Accounting Windows $60 about $160 Corel Office 2000 Standard Windows $75 about $425 FileMaker Pro (Mac or Win) Macromedia Dreamweaver or Flash $239 $149 about $400 including voice mail and personal about $450 greeting. You wouldn't miss Microsoft Office 2000 Standard (Win) $200 over $650 a good class, so w h y would you miss Microsoft FrontPage 2000 Windows $99 over $200 a good party? Call 1-800-668-8338 for Visual C++ Pro, Visual Basic Pro or J++ Pro $135 over $700 a TELUS Mobility dealer nearest you. about $800 be sociable. Get this sexy little Nixxo pager from TELUS Mobility with 6 months of numeric service for just $99.95. Plus, there's no contract. You also get unlimited messages (products and prices subject to change) MICROCOMPUTER STORE MBC 2000 We also provide repairs and upgrades for most computer equipment. Room M B C 2000 (near the Bookstore) at the SFU Burnaby campus Monday-Friday, 10 am - 4:30 pm p h o n e : 291-3098 fax:291-4783 Web: http://microstore.ucs.sfu.ca e-mail: micro store@sfu.ca ^^TELUS" Mobility www.telusmobility.com Pre-payments non-refundable Activation fees and taxes extra. North Vancouver Campus North Vancouver Campus ra Capilano C S College HORTICULTURE -^1 C a r Pool P a r k i n g (curbside) C a l l 983-7526 for a wheelchair access map. 9 JEREMY FULL SERVICE ART SUPPLIES CUSTOM FRAMING OF 10% OFF TO CAP COLLEGE STUDENTS* DIPLOMAS & CERTIFICATES $69 POSTER FRAMING ART CARDS, BOOKS DALTON, M L A 3& PROVINCE OF Xcov>>* (West Vancouver- Capilano) Province of British Columbia THE LOWEST PRICE ON NORTH SHORE & MUCH MORE L Room 201, Parliament Buildings Victoria, BC, V8V 1X4 Phone: (250) 356 3070 Fax: (250) 356-7109 Suite 306, 1497 Marine Drive West Vancouver, BC V7T 1B8 Phone: (604) 925-1611 Fax: (604) 925-9658 •some items exempt Ostersons Framing & A r t 1301 St. Georges • North Van • 9 8 8 - 8 1 0 2 HOLIDAY ADDI&ON INSURANCE cotes' 13 Days 1$ Days 15 Days See us for insurance on Cars, Homes, Boats, Business, Travel, Special Events 3010 EXPERIENCE! true, m MALA Kuala Lampur E Malacca I Penan? PenanjE lanykawi Kota Kinabalu £ Kuchin? u p UP Call us hi fieat student airfares, budget hostels an StLKWAY TKAVBL - Ast^ email: addison@istar.ca $167; & $1763 $2585 & Prices include roundtrip air, hotel, transfer, tours, and four nights stopover in Singapore L o n s d a l e S t r e e t (at Q u e e n s ) website: www.addison-insurance.com YSIA! (Hijhlijhts of Borneo) North Vancouver, B.C. V 7 N 3 J 5 Tel. 983-3323 j specialists website: www.silkway.com • Tel: 656-1000 Email: info@silkway.com Find more than a job. Find a future. UBC BCom Each year, more than 400 secondary school graduates choose to attend UBC's prestigious four-year BCom program. Like you, they have set their sights on a top-calibre university education. They want to impress future employers with their credentials. And they want to develop the skills and confidence to work inside and beyond the world of business. U B C Commerce Forfurther information contact: UBC Undergraduate Program Office Faculty of Commerce and Business Administration 103 - 2 0 5 3 Main Mall Vancouver B.C. V 6 T IZ2 Phone 6 0 4 . 8 2 2 . 8 3 3 3 Discover what the UBC Bachelor of Commerce or visit our website program can do forjourfuture. F A C U L T Y O F C O M M E R C E A N D BUSINESS A D M I N I S T R A T I O N U N I V E R S I T Y O F B R I T I S H C O L U M B I A www.commerce.ubc.ca Frequently Called Numbers General Information 986-1911 Web Site: www.capcollege.bc.ca A College/Community Partnerships 984-4924 Science & Media Technology 984-1748 Accounting Assistant Program 984-4959 Programs Accounting Support Program 984-4959 Digital Animation Program 990-7854 Administrative Assistant Program 984-4959 Disability Services 983-7526 Adult Basic Education 983-7578 E Adult Special Education 990-7869 Early Childhood Care & Education Advising Centre 984-4990 Program 984-4960 Alternative Career Training 984-1711 Eldercollege 984-4906 Alumni Relations 983-7566 English as a Second Language (ESL) 984-4971 Applied Business Technology Programs.... 984-4959 Environmental Science Program 983-7562 Applied Information Technology (Infotec) F Program Art Faculty Association 984-4911 Film Studies 990-7868 Financial A i d 984-4966 First A i d 984-1772 984-4911 Athletics and Recreation 984-4948 First Nations College Preparatory Program 983-7573 Asia Pacific Management Co-op Program 984-1749 984-1727 Arts and Entertainment Management Program Student Services & Foundation 984-4981 First Nations Student Services 984-4977 Fisheries Science - Sechelt 984-4972 Foundations Initiatives 984-1762 (toll free) 987-1535 or (604)885-9310 B Bookstore G Business Administration General Information Co-op Education Business Fundamentals Program 984-1759 984-4960 Graphic Design & Illustration Program 984-1735 H 990-7820 or 983-7557 Health Programs 984-4960 984-4959 Health Services 984-4964 C Home Support/Personal Care Attendant Capilano College Foundation Program 984-4983 984-4960 Home Support/Resident Care Attendant Capilano Review 984-1712 Career Access Centre 984-1784 Cashiers' Office 984-1786 Humanities Division Child Care Centre 984-4950 I Program 984-4960 984-4957 Commercial Animation Program 990-7820 Impark 983-7593 Communications 983-7515 International Student Advisor 983-7539 984-1729 International Student Centre 990-7863 Computer Services 984-4952 International Student Counsellor 983-7535 Computer Specialist Program 990-7871 J Conflict Resolution Advisor 983-7547 Jazz Studies Continuing Education 984-4901 L Counselling 984-1744 Labour Studies Program 984-4954 984-4949 Landscape Horticulture Program 984-4960 D Latin American Management Program 990-7881 Deans' Offices Legal Assistant Program 983-7594 Legal Secretarial Program 984-4959 Community Relations Courier Newspaper Arts. 984-1747 984-4951 Library Business, Human Services & International Education ! 984-4923 Circulation 984-4944 11 Reference 984-1769 Local Government Administration Professional Certificate Program 984-4960, ext. 2340 or 983-7570, ext. 2340 M Media Program 984-4940 Medical Office Assistant Program 984-4959 Music Therapy Program 984-4951 Music Transfer Program 984-4951 N Network Specialist Program 990-7871 0 Office Assistant Program 984-4959 Online Publishing Program 990-7819 Outdoor Recreation Program 984-4960 P Peer Support Centre 986-1911, ext. 2229 President's Office 984-4987 Prior Learning Assessment 984-1788 Pure & Applied Sciences Division 984-4955 R Registrar's Office 984-4900 Retail Marketing Co-op Program 984-4960 S SARAW 983-7552 SAVINGS ON TRANSIT Sechelt Campus (604) 885-9310 (To call from Vancouver, dial 986-1911, ext. 5900) Security 984-1763 Social Sciences Division 984-4953 Special Education Teacher Assistant Program 990-7802 Sports Medicine Clinic 984-4964 Sportsplex 984-1737 Squamish Campus (604) 892-5322 (To call from Vancouver, dial 986-1911, ext. 5800) Student Employment Centre 984-4965 Student Union 984-4969 Studio Art Program 984-4911 T Technical Computer Professional Program 990-7871 Television Lab 986-1911, ext. 2171 Textile Arts Program 984-4911 Theatre Box Office 990-7810 Manager 984-1775 Program Information 984-4911 Tourism Management Program 984-4960 V Vice President, Academic Affairs 984-1738 Visual and Performing Arts Division 984-4911 ALL Just ALL-ZONE TRAVEL FOR PUBLIC DAY, ANY DAY Tray POST-SECONDARY STUDENTS FastTrax Makes the Grade Using FastTrax on buses, SkyTrain and SeaBus makes travel to and from Capilano College fast, easy and affordable. Best of all, there's no parking to consider. Many campus bound routes are also wheelchair lift-equipped. And each time you use public transit, you are helping to preserve our environment. FastTrax - The Smart Choice The FastTrax strip is available to full-time students attending (qualified) post-secondary institutions in the Lower Mainland. Simply pick up the FastTrax strip at your student association office and attach it to your student ID card. You may be charged a $2.00 fee by your university or college for the FastTrax strip. When combined with your One Zone monthly FareCard, the FastTrax strip allows you to travel all day, any day, throughout TransLink's system (one, two or three zones) for the price of One Zone fare travel. Remember to always carry your One Zone monthly FareCard and your student ID card, with attached FastTrax strip. Information at Your Fingertips • Bus numbers are listed on the bus stops at the College. Free timetables are available at the student association and many other campus locations. Schedules on-line: www.translink.bc.ca Call Talking Yellow Pages at 299-9000, local 2233 for pre-recorded transit information. Call Customer Information: 521-0400 or West Vancouver 985-7777. Tickets and monthly passes are available at FareDealer outlets throughout the Lower Mainland. 12 IS^LINI About Capilano College In 1968 Capilano College opened its doors to just over 700 students. Since then, it has grown steadily to become one of British C o l u m b i a ' s most outstanding colleges, with enrolment nearing 7,000 students. The College is a dynamic source o f leadership within the communities it serves. The main campus is in North Vancouver, nestled i n a natural setting on the slopes of the North Shore mountains. Regional campuses in Squamish and Sechelt provide educational opportunities to students in the communities o f H o w e Sound and the Sunshine Coast. Approximately 40 per cent o f student enrolment comes from the rest o f the L o w e r M a i n l a n d , British C o l u m b i a , Canada and around the world. Capilano College has earned a reputation for teaching excellence and innovation. Faculty members are experts in their fields and bring extensive knowledge to the classroom. In support of a wide range of educational goals, the College offers a quality learning experience in a variety o f program areas: University Transfer Capilano College provides a solid academic foundation that can lead to many educational and career opportunities. The College offers a wide range of courses which are transferable to universities in British C o l u m b i a and elsewhere in Canada. Capilano College offers several options, including: • • • Associate degrees in Arts or Science Bachelor degrees, offered in partnership with the Open University: Bachelor of M u s i c i n Jazz Studies, Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor of Business Administration, and Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management Post-baccalaureate programs in Environmental Science, A s i a Pacific Management, Latin American Management and Art. Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety o f employmentoriented programs leading to certificates, diplomas and degrees. They are constantly reviewed to ensure that students are taught the latest techniques and skills required in today's workplace. A d v i s o r y committees, composed o f business and community leaders and employers, advise on the content o f all career and vocational programs. • Preparatory Courses The College offers a full range o f preparatory courses to assist students in meeting their educational and career goals. After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students may seek employment or move into a career program or university transfer courses. International Education Capilano College is an active participant in the international community. Its multicultural character is enhanced by international students from more than 40 countries. Capilano College partners with institutions, governments and organizations worldwide, in countries such as Japan, Thailand, C h i n a , Vietnam, C o l u m b i a , and Lebanon. Continuing Education Each year, thousands of students enrol in non-credit courses, seminars, workshops and lectures for personal and professional development, or just for pure enjoyment. Contract Services Capilano College specializes in flexible, customized, short-term training, adapted for the classroom, conference room or computer lab, and offered on-campus or at the worksite. MISSION AND VALUES A t Capilano College our mission is to enable student success i n current and continuing studies, in a chosen career, in the pursuit of knowledge, and i n contributing effectively as responsible citizens in a rapidly changing and diverse global community. T o accomplish its mission, Capilano College strives to produce a dynamic and secure learning environment committed to excellence in education and to equity of access. It seeks to offer, either selectively within its own resources, or more broadly in partnership with others, high-quality and flexible preparatory, academic, career and vocational programs that provide opportunities for a wide range o f students. It does so in the context of the following values: Students Student needs are the first concern o f Capilano College. The College values the diverse backgrounds and cultures from which our students come and strives to provide curricula and support services that w i l l sustain all students' personal growth and cultural enrichment. It believes that students should leave the College with the knowledge, skills and attitudes that w i l l enable them to become independent learners and thinkers; with enhanced skills in literacy, numeracy, and critical thinking, and with a positive attitude toward learning. The College expects and values the commitment o f students to the learning process and to the maintenance of secure and supportive learning conditions. 13 Community Accountability The College is an important resource in the educational, economic and cultural life of all the communities it serves. The College is accountable fiscally, educationally, and socially. It commits itself to allocating resources fairly to ensure that students receive an education suited to their needs; to explaining its policies and achievements to the public; and to exercising its influence within the community in a thoughtful and ethical way. T o this end it establishes policies and procedures that reflect the best standards o f financial management, graduate assessment, personnel practice, and environmental stewardship. It recognizes the unique needs of its regional centres, and o f the diverse populations served by its programs. The College offers its expertise and leadership by actively helping all its communities anticipate future problems and opportunities, and actively seeking partnerships to meet those needs which are identified. The College serves as a model for its community by providing equality o f access to its services, its facilities and its employment opportunities. Employees The College values everyone involved in the teaching and learning process. It regards its employees as its greatest assets i n providing excellent programming and services. The College recognizes that faculty, staff and administrators serve as active models o f citizenship, scholarship and professionalism, and expects that they w i l l work together in a responsive, equitable, and collegial manner. The College strives to establish and maintain exemplary teaching, learning, and working conditions. LEGENDARY Innovation The College encourages rigorous, continuing analysis and evaluation o f its o w n effectiveness. It supports those wishing to develop instructional methods and curricula to improve the teaching o f present programs and to meet the emerging needs o f students and the community. It supports the use o f appropriate partnerships and technologies to meet these needs. The College accepts the reality o f constant change and the need for planning and flexibility to meet the demands of change. PLACE. LEGENDARY TASTE. white spot Park & Tilford 1100 - 333 Brooksbank North Vancouver 988-4199 14 TED NEBBELING, )Av\atd\A Souv\al< 5 Lonsdale Ave. M.L.A. (West Vancouver - Garibaldi) North Vancouver North Vans Pest Souvlaki Since 1985 Open for lunch and dinner 7 days a week Reservations 985-9853 "Always open for Room 201, Parliament Buildings Victoria, BC, V8V 1X4 Phone: (250) 387-2618 Fax: (250) 387-2731 © discussion" Suite 102, 2232 Marine Drive West Vancouver, BC V7V 1K4 Phone: (604) 926 2815 Fax: (604) 981-0010 ted.ncbbeling@leg.be.ca Bring in your Student ID to receive 20% OFF POOL DANIEL JARVIS, M.L.A. (North Vancouver-Seymour) 4, 1501 Lynn Valley R o a d North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 2B1 Phone: (604) 984-2692 Fax: (604) 775-1061 Parliament Buildings Victoria, B . C . V 8 V 1X4 Phone: (250) 356-3078 Fax: (250) 387-2497 Bank of Montreal © Join us for lunch and play pool for free (30 min) ffl POOL me ewe POOL TINE CAFE AND BILLIARDS 990-9498 #101 - I55O Marine Drive, North Vancouver MILESTONE'S GRILL nn ig[!]rjB " & BAR • cool, urban style • handshaken ® cocktails • • worldwide hods & flavours • high volume • • casual upscale environment* If these words describe the restaurant and bar you want to make your mark in, we have a world of opportunity for you. STUDENTS OF Capilano College The Brain Money® Program is a special package of financial products and services to nelp you pay for your education. For more information Contact your nearest branch of the Bank of Montreal Milestone's stands out as a leader in the casual upscale dining segment with consistent year-on-year sales growth and an aggressive expansion plan. We offer outstanding training and development programs, career development opportunities, a comprehensive compensation package and a culture that supports professional growth. If you think you are a fit with our team, we want to meet you! Forward your resume to: Debby Machell General Manager Milestone's Park Royal South Fax:(604)925-8776 Email: dmachel@spectragroup.com Good food is only part of the story. Or call 903-3007 Park + Tilford ...the very finest in BC Microbrews ...stellar food & services in a turn-of- MEDICAL CENTRE Unit 1005 - 333 Brooksbank Ave. North Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3S8 the-century Craftsman style home URGENT CARE & OUT OF HOURS CARE ...student friendly all-season patio BLACK BEAR NEIGHBORHOOD PUB Phone: (604) 990 8880 (open daily 11 am to midnight) Fax:(604)990 8860 1177 Lynn Valley Road, North Vancouver, BC Hours: 9 am - 9 pm - 7 days a week Phone: (Conveniently located beside the Lynn Valley Shopping Centre.) ICBC Auto Plan No Appointment Necessary Tel: (604) 988-9974 983-2442 Toll Free 1-877-GUITAR-6 MUSICAL INSTRUMENT SALES, RENTALS, REPAIRS & LESSONS "We're not just playing around Travel & Home Owner Insurance Mon-Wed 9 - 6 Thur & Fri 9 - 7 Sat 10 - 5 Sun 12 - 5 www.fawcettinsurance.com Tel. 929-3494 106 - 1169 Mt. Seymour Road, North Van. MUSIC 1757 Capilano Road North Vancouver, BC ©ottmaii We have a reputation for being a leader in our industry. TRANSMISSION RM S I N C E I9C2 RHHRR Your Transmission Physician Now here's your chance. For 28 years we've operated restaurants and bars known for mouthwatering steaks and great people. We offer an extensive training package, opportunity for growth, comprehensive benefits and competitive wages. If you're interested in joining our winning team, let us know. We service all: • Automatic & Standard Domestic & Imports • Clutches • 4x4 • Axles • Differentials AnENTION STUDENTS: All Capilano College students and their families are entitled to a ® 25% discount on any internal transmission repair Discount has no cash value. Must be presented at time of sale. Limit one coupon per customer. Send your resume to: Ask about our very competitive prices for clutch replacements Human Resources Keg Restaurants Ltd. 295 The West Mall Suite 420, Etobicoke M9C 4Z4 Fax: 416-695-2401 S e r v i n g North & West V a n c o u v e r HOURS: Mon - Fri 8am - 6pm • Sat 8am - 1pm 860 West 15th Street North Vancouver BBB BBB Tel: 604-987-8687 1 ra fcr 1 s? tiK 2000 2001 JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH JANUARY S M T W T F SS U T W T F SS M T W T F S 1 1 6 15 3 4 10 11 5 12 17 18 23 24 25 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 2 9 16 30 6 7 8 13 14 15 6 13 7 14 3 4 5 10 11 12 17 18 19 2 9 16 23 24 25 26 MAY 7 8 9 4 10 11 21 27 28 30 31 5 6 12 13 3 3 1 2 1 2 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 26 29 30 31 4 5 6 7 itjio iy1 n APRIL 25 26 MAY JUNE S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 AA te 17 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 1 8 2 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 6 7 12 13 14 1 8 2 9 3 4 5 10 t1 12 1 2 1 <\ 1ft 17 * Q i Q on n i 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 103 114 125 136 147 158 169 1II1 1It9 1TO 1 14 ic IO IO 1/ AUGUST MARCH 1/ e\jnr\ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ic 17 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 JUNE S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S JULY 3 4 10 11 2 9 1l*j io io 22 23 24 25 29 1 8 7 1\£9. 1IO 1 114 C 17 4 11C0 1fO 1/ io10 26 APRIL 6 19 20 31 3 1 2 5 FEBRUARY S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S 6 7 io io 1/ io i y d\j 22 23 24 29 30 SEPTEMBER 25 26 27 28 20 21 27 28 JULY 22 23 24 29 30 31 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 AUGUST 25 SEPTEMBER S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1fl 11 15 1T *A 1C 1C 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1K it Ifl 1Q ta 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 31 27 28 29 30 31 1 8 2 11 11A4 11* 0 IO 17 1 CJ lU ll 1£ U OCTOBER NOVEMBER 1£ 22 29 9 4 10 11 16 17 18 23 24 25 30 4 11 5 6 7 12 13 14 OCTOBER 6 7 1 2 8 9 3 4 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOVEMBER DECEMBER S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 16 1 7 18 1 9 20 21 22 26 29 30 31 25 26 27 26 29 30 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NORTH I 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 23 24 25 26 27 28 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 30 DECEMBER 3 2 3 10 13 1IDfi 171/ ID I1SQ O/l <:1Ol 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IS ID S M T W T F SS M T W T F SS M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 6 7 8 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 12 13 14 16 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 19 20 21 22 29 30 31 26 27 28 29 2 9 I VANCOUVER ® RECREATION COMMISSION We've got Leagues and Learn-To-Play! Evening Student Hockey Leagues at Karen Magnussen and Lonsdale recCentres run Sept - March • Men's and Women's Learn-To-Play Hockey programs • Drop in Hockey IT Call 987-PLAY (7529) for more information 18 Academic Schedule 2000 - 2001 2000 FALL TERM 2001 SPRING TERM J U L Y 10 - A U G U S T 4: Registration for selected Career/Vocational programs. J A N U A R Y 4 - 10: University Transfer & Business A U G U S T 7: B . C . D a y . College closed. A U G U S T 1 6 - 2 5 : University Transfer & Business Administration In-person Registration (This date under review and subject to change). Administration In-person Registration (This date under review and subject to change). J A N U A R Y 15: Classes commence. Note: Career/ Vocational courses commence on various days. Consult your program coordinator for further information. S E P T E M B E R 4: Labour D a y . College closed. J A N U A R Y 1 5 - 2 6 : A d d / D r o p period. S E P T E M B E R 5: Classes commence. Note: Career/ Vocational courses commence on various days. C o n sult your program coordinator for further information. J A N U A R Y 26: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from audit to credit or from credit to audit. Students w i l l be invoiced for full fees S E P T E M B E R 5 - 1 8 : A d d / D r o p period. after this date. SEPTEMBER J A N U A R Y 29 - F E B R U A R Y 23: Withdrawal period. 18: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from audit to credit or from credit to audit. Students w i l l be invoiced for full fees During this period, withdrawals w i l l be noted on the permanent student record as a " W " . after this date. F E B R U A R Y 23: Last day to withdraw from a course SEPTEMBER 19 - O C T O B E R 16: Withdrawal period. During this period, withdrawals w i l l be noted on the and final date for payment o f tuition fee balance for 2001 Spring term. permanent student record as a " W " . F E B R U A R Y 22 - 23: Reading Break. O C T O B E R 6: Last day to submit application for program evaluation for 2000 Fall Convocation. A P R I L 12: Last day o f classes. Note: Some courses/ programs continue on until the last day of the examina- O C T O B E R 9: Thanksgiving D a y . College closed. tion period. Consult your program instructor for O C T O B E R 16: Last day to withdraw from a course and further information. final date for payment of tuition fee balance for 2000 A P R I L 1 3 - 1 6 : Easter break. College closed. Fall term. A P R I L 17 - 27: Examination period, 2001 Spring N O V E M B E R 13: In lieu o f Remembrance D a y . term, (may include Saturday, A p r i l 28). College closed. N O V E M B E R 23: Fall Convocation, Sportsplex, 7:30p.m. N O V E M B E R 15 - D E C E M B E R 15: Early registration 2001 SUMMER TERM for 2001 Spring term for Career/Vocational programs, D A T E T B A : Registration for 2001 Summer term. "open" Career courses, and A r t , M u s i c , A s i a Pacific M A Y 7: First day of Summer term, Session I Management, Environmental Science (coordinator signature required). D E C E M B E R 1: Last day o f classes. Note: Some M A Y 21: V i c t o r i a D a y . College closed. M A Y 24: Spring Convocation, Sportsplex, 7:30 p.m. courses/programs continue on until the last day o f the J U L Y 2: In lieu o f Canada D a y . College closed. examination period. Consult your program instructor J U L Y 3: First day of Summer term, Session II. for further information. D E C E M B E R 4 - 1 5 : Examination period, 2000 Fall term, (may include Saturdays). J U L Y 9 - A U G U S T 3: Registration for selected Career/Vocational programs for 2001 Fall term. A U G U S T 6: B . C . D a y . College closed. D E C E M B E R 22 - 26: Christmas break. College closed. D E C E M B E R 27 & 28: College is closed to public. D E C E M B E R 29 - J A N U A R Y 1: N e w Y e a r ' s break. College closed. 19 Admission and Readmission BECOMING A CAPILANO COLLEGE STUDENT 1. Read the Calendar for more information on your area of interest The table of contents and index will be helpful in finding particular subjects in the Calendar. Contact Advising at 984-4990 to see if there are information nights available for the program you are interested in — information sheets are available. The College's Web site is a useful source of information as well: www.capcollege.bc.ca 2. Submit an application Your application must include: • Application for Admission form • high school and post-secondary transcripts • a $20 application fee (plus an additional $25 evaluation fee if your post-secondary transcript is from outside British Columbia) or a $100 application fee for international students (document evaluation fee is included) Submit your application in person or by mail to: Registrar's Office, Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B C V7J 3H5 There may be other documents or procedures required. See Admission Requirements. Notices of acceptance are issued by Admissions, Registrar's Office 3. Register University Transfer Students: The Registrar's Office will send you complete information on how and when to register, as well as a timetable of all the courses to be offered in the coming term. This information will arrive a month prior to the beginning of term. Career/Vocational Students: If you have been accepted into a specific Career/Vocational program, consult the department for your timetable and registration procedures. 4. Pay your tuition A non-refundable deposit is due on the day you register. The remainder of the tuition is due by the sixth week of each term; check your timetable for the specific date. Note regarding medical insurance: 1. Students are not covered by Workers' Compensation while attending Capilano College. Students are responsible for acquiring their own Medical Services Plan (MSP) and accident insurance coverage. 2. International students must have medical insurance while studying at the College. Medical insurance for the first 90 days in British Columbia is available at the cost of approximately $115 Cdn. After the first 90 days, international students are eligible to subscribe to the government-operated Medical Services Plan of B.C. This plan costs approximately $40 Cdn per month, single person rate. Contact the International Student Centre for information (604) 983-7544. General 20 Information —Admission APPLICATION DATES Generally, applications for admission to the College may be submitted at any time. However, early applica- If the College then decides you need additional instruction in English you w i l l be asked to take an English examination suitable to the program area in which you wish to enrol. tion deadlines have been established for specific Specific testing requirements for admission: programs and terms. Acceptance of applications after University Transfer, Career or Vocational Programs the deadlines may not be possible. TOEFL Term 220 (560 paper-based score) Early Application Date Acceptance ELA 145 Deadline Mailed IELTS 6.5 overall, and no one score less than 6 Fall M a r c h 31 M a y 15 Spring September 30 as processed Summer January 31 as processed Applicants from other countries who require a student E n g l i s h as a Second Language ( E S L ) Program E S L Placement Test TOEFL 97 (400 paper-based score) OR: ELA authorization (student visa), must submit their applica- 55-144 tions at least two months prior to the commencement o f the term in order to be considered for admission to that term. ADULT BASIC EDUCATION PROGRAMS Applicants to the Adult Basic Education program should be at least 18 years o l d and have been out o f the ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS public school system for at least one year. Exceptions w i l l be made only with departmental approval. ENGLISH L A N G U A G E REQUIREMENT W h i l e there is no educational prerequisite for entering A l l students must have a level o f English sufficient to an assessment of writing and mathematical skills. the A B E program, placement in courses is based upon write assignments, understand class lectures, and take part in class discussions. UNIVERSITY TRANSFER PROGRAMS If English is not your first language, or you have • British C o l u m b i a Secondary School Graduation received your education in another language, you are (Grade 12) or equivalent with English 12 and three required to submit, along with your application, one o f academic Grade 12 courses selected from: the following: Applied Geometry 12 Mathematics 12 German 12 guage) A p p l i e d Physics 12 History 12 Contact: Educational Testing Service, B o x 898, B i o l o g y 12 Information Technology 12 Princeton, N e w Jersey U S A 03540 Calculus 12 Japanese 12 Chemistry 12 Latin 12 T O E F L Score (Test o f English as a Foreign L a n - OR: Comparative E L A (English Language Assessment Test) L a w 12 C i v i l i z a t i o n 12 Contact: Vancouver C o m m u n i t y College, K i n g Mandarin 12 Computer Science 12 Mathematics 12 Economics 12 Physics 12 E d w a r d Campus, 1155 East Broadway F o r students a p p l y i n g only f o r E S L : E S L Placement Test, contact: E S L Department, Capilano College, (604) 986-1911, ext. 2971 for testing appointment. English Literature 12 Probability & Statistics 12 French 12 Spanish 12 Francais-Langue 12 Survey M a t h 12 N o t e : If you have written the I E L T S this w i l l also be Geography 12 Western C i v i l i z a t i o n 12 acceptable. Geology 12 W r i t i n g 12 The College reserves the right to also give consideration to the following: • The number of years of secondary school or postsecondary education (e.g. college or university) and if English was the language of instruction • • H o w long you have lived in an English-speaking country • OR: A secondary school or post-secondary degree or British Columbia Adult Dogwood Graduation Diploma, or • General Education D i p l o m a ( G E D ) , or • Mature Student Status Additional admission requirements are noted i n the individual program descriptions in this publication. diploma, the grades received and the level o f English used. General Information Admission 21 Concurrent Admission Chemistry, Francais A or B , French or other languages or Physics Secondary students with superior academic records may apply for limited admission w h i c h w i l l allow A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on E n g l i s h A 3 0 , B 3 0 enrolment in one or two university transfer courses and the three best courses in group two. while still attending secondary school. N o t e : English is a double course so this average is The application must be co-signed by the applicant's over five courses but only four subject areas. parent or legal guardian and must be accompanied by a letter o f recommendation from the school principal or Manitoba designate, and an official copy of the secondary school academic record. Inquiries should be directed to Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f an academic program w h i c h w i l l lead to graduation and Admissions, Registrar's Office. includes at least four courses selected as follows: Mature Student and Discretionary Admission Status Applicants who lack the m i n i m u m admission require- 1. E n g l i s h 4 0 G or 40S (except Language and Technical Communication); and 2. at least three additional courses selected from B i o l o g y 40S, Chemistry 40S, Computer Science ment may apply as mature students provided they have 40S, History 40S, Language 40S, Mathematics 4 0 G not attended secondary school for at least two years. or 40S, Physics 40S. Written requests for admission as a mature student w i l l N o t e : Mathematics be considered by the Admissions Office. Applicants 45A may not be used. should provide details o f other qualifications or A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on E n g l i s h 4 0 G or experiences and an academic transcript of education 40S and the three best courses in group two. completed. A n interview may be required. Ontario Other Canadian Provinces Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of the The admission average is calculated on the required O S S D (or O S S H G D ) including four O A C s and senior English course or courses (i.e. group require- including the following: ment #1) and on the three best academic courses 1. one O A C English (Language and Literature recom- offered in the other course groups as shown below. mended) or O A C Francais; and 2. at least three additional O A C courses selected from Alberta and Northwest Territories English, Francais, other languages, A l g e b r a and Applicants must supply evidence of academic grade 12 Geometry, Calculus, Finite Mathematics, B i o l o g y , completion leading to graduation and include at least Chemistry, Computing Science, Physics, Geogra- four courses, selected as follows: phy, History, Economics or L a w . 1. E n g l i s h 30; and A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on O A C E n g l i s h or 2. at least three additional courses selected from Frangais and the three best courses in group two. among: B i o l o g y 30, Chemistry 30, Language 30, Language 31, M a t h 30, M a t h 31, Physics 30, Social Quebec Studies 30, Science 30, W o r l d Geography 30 C E G E P : Applicants from a C E G E P must present either A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 30 and the a completed D E C or at least one year of an approved three best courses in group two. academic program. Grade 12: Applicants from Quebec Grade 12 must Saskatchewan present the following: Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of 1. E n g l i s h 12 or Francais 12; and academic level three (grade 12) leading to graduation, 2. at least three additional university preparatory grade including at least five academic subjects selected as 12 courses selected from Mathematics, Sciences, follows: Languages, Literature, Social Sciences, History, 1. E n g l i s h A 3 0 and B 3 0 ; and Geography 2. at least three additional 30 numbered courses selected from among: Algebra, B i o l o g y , Calculus, General 22 Information —Admission A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on one course from group one and the three best courses in group two. New Brunswick 2. any three of B i o l o g y 3201, Chemistry 3202, Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f an Geology 3203, Physics 3204, Mathematics 3201 or academic (i.e. college preparatory) program which w i l l 3203, Geography, History or languages at the 3000 lead to graduation and includes at least four courses as level. follows: A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English and the 1. English 12, 121 or 122 (or Francois 121 or 122); and three best courses in group two. 2. at least three additional grade 12 academic (college Other Countries preparatory) courses selected from among B i o l o g y , International students are eligible for admission i f they Chemistry, Computer Science, English, Francais, have completed the equivalent of secondary school French, Geography, History, Mathematics, Physics. graduation (Grade 12) in British C o l u m b i a . A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 120, 121 or 122 and the three best courses in group two. Examples of Equivalence: China Senior M i d d l e School D i p l o m a Prince Edward Island France Applicants must supply evidence o f completion o f an Baccalaureate (2ieme partie) (Series A - E ) academic or advanced academic program which w i l l Germany and Austria lead to graduation and includes at least four academic Reifezeugnis or Abitur and/or advanced academic subjects selected as follows: Hong Kong 1. English 621 or English 611; and 2. at least three additional courses numbered 621 and/ Passes i n five G C E / H K C E E subjects, two o f which must be at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Indonesia or 611 selected from among B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Sekolah Menengah Atas ( S M A ) Leaving Certificate Fran§ais, French, Geography, History, other Japan languages, Physics, or Mathematics (621 or 611). Grade 12 D i p l o m a from K o t o G a k k o A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 621 or 611 and the three best courses i n group two. Korea H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a Malaysia Nova Scotia S P M / S T P M or C O S C / C O H S C Singapore Applicants must supply evidence o f completion of an academic (i.e. university preparatory) program which w i l l lead to graduation, including at least four subjects selected as follows: Singapore-Cambridge General Certificate o f Education ( G C E ) with two A d v a n c e d level subjects Taiwan H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a 1. English 441 or English 541; and United Kingdom and Commonwealth 2. Passes in five G C E subjects, two of which must be at least three additional courses numbered 441 and/ or 541 selected from among the following subjects: B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computer Science, Francais, French, History, M a t h , other languages, Physics or M a t h 442, E c o n o m i c s , Geography or L a w . A d m i s s i o n average w i l l be based on English 441 or 541 and the three best courses in group two. at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS British C o l u m b i a secondary school graduation (grade 12) or equivalent. Additional admission requirements are noted in the individual program descriptions in this publication. Newfoundland Applicants must supply evidence of completion of an academic program which w i l l lead to graduation and includes at least 13 credits as follows: 1. Language 3101 and either E n g l i s h 3201 or 3202; and General Information — Admission TRANSFER CREDIT Computer Science - those completing A P Computer Science A w i l l receive credit for C O M P 120. Economics - those completing A P Economics w i l l A l l public B . C . colleges accept each other's credit upon transfer i f applicable to a program at the admitting college and i f there is suitable equivalency. receive credit for Economics (6) unassigned. English - those completing English Language/Composition w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). Those Transfer credit may be granted for courses completed completing English Literature/Composition w i l l at other post-secondary institutions. receive credit for E N G L 103 (3). In addition, the Students seeking transfer credit must complete the "Request for Transfer Credit" form, attach official transcripts, i f not already submitted, or note that transcripts w i l l be sent from another institution, and submit all to the Registrar's Office. F o r courses completed at out-of-province institutions, detailed course outlines must also be submitted. A l l approved transfer credit is noted on the permanent student record. W h i l e the credit awarded does not affect the grade point average, the credit w i l l be included i n the total number of credits completed and may be used to complete certificate or diploma requirements i f applicable. Limit of Transfer Credits E D T requirement w i l l be waived. Mathematics - those completing Calculus A B w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3). Those completing Calculus B C w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3) and M A T H 126 (3). Physics - those completing Physics B w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). Those completing P h y s i c s ' C (Mechanics) w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 114 (3). Those completing Physics C (Electricity) w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 115 (3). Note: Transfer credit granted for International Baccalaureate and Advanced Placement courses will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not accept these courses for transfer credit. For diplomas and certificates, 50 percent o f the credit required must be completed while in attendance at INTERNATIONAL BACCALAUREATE Capilano College. (This may vary for some programs. COURSES See Graduation section of this Calendar for more information.) Applicants who have completed the International Baccalaureate D i p l o m a w i l l receive credit or waivers For students who are no longer residents of the College for some higher level subjects passed as follows: region and lack one or two courses for certificate or diploma completion, credit may be granted for an additional one or two courses from another institution. This arrangement must be made i n consultation with the Registrar's Office in advance o f enrolment at Anthropology -students presenting a mark of 4 w i l l receive credit for A N T H 121 (3). B i o l o g y - students presenting mark o f 6 w i l l receive credit for BIOL 110 (3) and BIOL 111 (3). Chemistry - students presenting mark o f 4 or better another institution. For the Associate degrees, at least 30 of the 60 credits must be completed at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding o f the degree. (See Associate Degree information under the Graduation section of this Calendar.) w i l l receive credit for C h e m 110 (3) and C h e m 111 (3). Computing Science - students presenting mark o f 4 or better in Computing Science A w i l l receive credit for C O M P 120. Economics - students presenting mark o f 4 or better in Economics w i l l receive credit for Economics (6) ADVANCED PLACEMENT Applicants who have passed an A d v a n c e d Placement Examination administered by the College Entrance Examination Board, with a mark of 4 or better w i l l receive credit as follows: English Language A w i l l receive credit for E N G L 103 (3). Students presenting a mark of 6 or better for English Language B w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). In addition, the E D T requirement is waived for B i o l o g y - those completing A P B i o l o g y w i l l receive credit for B I O L 110 (3) and B I O L 111 (3). Chemistry - those completing A P Chemistry w i l l those with a mark of 6 or better on English Language A or B . Mathematics - students presenting a mark of 6 or better receive credit for C H E M 110 (3) and for Higher Level Mathematics w i l l receive credit for C H E M 111 (3). M A T H 116 (3). Students presenting a mark of 6 or General 24 unassigned. English - students presenting a mark o f 6 or better for Information —Admission better for Further Mathematics w i l l receive credit for M A T H 116 (3) and M A T H 126 (3). Physics - students presenting a mark of 6 or better will receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). PRIOR LEARNING ASSESSMENT A n innovative process is available at Capilano College whereby students may receive college credits for learning acquired in formal and informal situations. This process, called Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) , w i l l be o f immense benefit to mature students who have work and life experiences that equate to courses offered at the College. For example, i f you have on-the-job work experience in computers you may be able to receive credits offered in one or more office or business administration courses. Y o u w i l l need to prove that you have acquired the knowledge, skills and values required in the formal course y o u are requesting credit for. T h i s is done by providing evidence o f what you have learned. This might include any one or combination of the following: a work site visit, documentation, interview and oral presentation, portfolio. A t present only the following program areas offer P L A credits: A p p l i e d Business Technology, Business Administration, Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education, H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant, H o m e Support/YResident Care Attendant, Jazz Studies, Labour Studies, Legal Assistant, M u s i c Therapy (prerequisite courses only), Tourism Management. M o r e courses w i l l be assessed as the number o f individual inquiries increases. For more information, contact the C o l l e g e ' s P L A Office at 984-1735. Registration RIGHT TO REGISTER MATH PLACEMENT TEST (MPT)* A student who has not maintained satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that program in a subsequent term. Indi- The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers vidual programs may require a G P A higher than that placement tests as alternative admission instruments stated i n the Probation Policy to continue enrolment. for students who lack the prerequisites for the entry level courses listed in the table below. For each placement test there is a study guide which provides suggested review material and lists the scheduled test INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR dates. W i t h the exception o f the placement test for admission into M A T H 091 students are not allowed to The instructional year is comprised o f three terms: rewrite the same level of placement test within a twelve F a l l : September through December month period. The waiting period to rewrite the placement test for entry into M A T H 091 is one month S p r i n g : January through A p r i l or longer. For more information please contact the A d v i s i n g Centre or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences Summer: D i v i s i o n , or visit the Mathematics and Statistics Session #1: M a y through June Department web site at http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/ Session #2: July through August dept/math. Full Term: M a y through August N o t e : A limited number of courses are offered Students wanting to enrol in an entry level course listed during in the table below must write a placement test i f they the Summer term. do not satisfy the prerequisite requirements for the course. Note that MATH 096, 105, 107, 108, 116, and 124 require that the prerequisite be completed within twelve months prior to the starting date of the course. Mathematics and Statistics Department — Prerequisite Grid for Entry Courses Minimum Grade Requirement — Any one of the Courses Listed C a p i l a n o Princ. Princ. Applic. BMTH BMTH MATH MATH MATH MATH 12 12 045 046 090 or 091 095 or 096 105 107 Within Period Course 11 091 C- C- 096 C+ C+ c+ B- 12 101 C C C- c- N/A N/A 105* C B c+ 12 107* C B c+ 12 108 B C- C- 116 A** C- C- 12 124 A** c- C- 12 190 c C B B C- C- 12 N/A * Students who have completed within the last twelve months MATH 095 or 096 with a "C-" or "C" grade are permitted enrol in MATH 105 or 107 only if they enrol in MATH 096 concurrently ** or at least a "B" grade in both Principles General 26 Information — of Math 12 and Calculus 12 Registration to Complete Withdrawal Procedure ENGLISH DIAGNOSTIC TEST* For complete withdrawal before classes commence, a course change form listing all the courses to be dropped must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. A The E D T (or the L P I ) is required before registration in copy o f the course change form listing the complete any English course at the College, unless the student withdrawal w i l l be forwarded to the career or voca- has achieved one o f the following which allows tional department by the Registrar's Office. exemption: " A " i n English 12, or A D D / D R O P PERIOD " A " i n Literature 12, or 4 or higher in A . P . English Composition, or Add/Drop Period: 1st through the 10th day of each term for regular, full-term fall and spring courses. 4 or higher in A . P . English Literature, or Add/Drop Procedure 6 or higher in I . B . English A or B , or 1. Students wishing to add or drop a course(s), change " A " i n B E N G 042, or " B - " or better in an English transfer course from from credit to audit, or change from audit to credit, another college or university, or must complete a Course Change form, and take the a degree from an English-speaking university. form to the instructor for approval and signature. Note: Successful qualify 010 completion of ESL a student to directly or English 099 does enter a regular 2. W i t h the instructor's signature appearing on the not English Course Change form, students must then submit the form to the Registrar's Office. Forms w i l l be 100. accepted until 7 p.m. on the 10th instructional day o f Students who wish to enrol i n any university transfer English course who do not qualify for an exemption must submit the results o f the Language Proficiency Index Test (LPI), or must sit the Capilano College English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) prior to registration. E D T schedules w i l l be printed in the timetable. the term. 3. Instructors may indicate a 48 hour deadline for submission o f the Course Change form, in order to allow other students to gain entry to the class during this period. 4. Course drops w i l l not be noted on the student transcript during this period; however, a record for * Note: Students MPT, through campus. may register the Registrar's Students for Office, may also register Squamish sittings A writing fee is charged both the EDT North for Sechelt of the EDT through for both those and Vancouver or campuses. exams. drops w i l l be maintained on the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. 5. If a course change is requested by the instructor or student to a lower or less difficult level o f instruction i n a subject, the course change form must bear the signatures o f the instructor o f each course. 6. If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request A D D , DROP, WITHDRAWAL PROCEDURES w i l l be granted with the signature o f the instructor of each course. Note: Failure course ** See also: procedure and procedure for for Summer condensed courses/terms term in this section ** BEFORE CLASSES C O M M E N C E to attend classes drop. Students course(s) will be assessed student record. student 1. Students may drop or add courses or change sections the College was unaware policies Requests for simply of or neglected and will not (F) will be noted on the late drops will not be granted Course Change Procedure a drop a tuition fees, refunds be made, and a grade of Fail permanent does not constitute who do not formally late adds because to comply or the with, procedures. following their registration appointment and until the first day o f classes. A course change form must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. 2. Faculty signatures are not required before classes commence. 3. Drops w i l l not be printed on the official transcript, but w i l l be maintained in the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. General Information — Registration COURSE CHANGE PROCEDURES (ADD, DROP/WITHDRAWAL) ALLOWED TO CHANGE BETWEEN DROP/ REQUIRES FACULTY APPEARS ON TRANSACTION FEE** REFUND** PERIOD ADD WITHDRAW CREDIT AND AUDIT SIGNATURE TRANSCRIPT before classes start yes yes not applicable no no no partial 1st to 10th day of term yes yes yes yes no yes partial 11th to 30th day of term no yes no yes yes yes no 31st until end of term no no* no no yes not applicable no * check "WE", Grading System section. ** please refer to Fees section. 2. the student transfers to a lower level o f the same WITHDRAWAL PERIOD course by instructor request. In this instance, only Withdrawal period: 11th through the 30th day of each term (third week through the end of the sixth week) for regular, full-term fall and spring courses. the final course o f enrolment w i l l show on the official transcript. A record o f the change w i l l also be maintained on the permanent student record; 3. exceptional circumstances, usually for medical Withdrawal Procedure: 1. During this period, with the signature of the appro- reasons. Official documentation is required to priate instructor(s) on the Course Change form, substantiate all claims o f such circumstances and students may withdraw from a course(s). should be submitted on the Request for Course 2. The Course Change form must be submitted to the Withdrawal form available from the Registrar's Registrar's Office no later than 7 p . m . o f the 30th Office. This form must be supplemented with instructional day (sixth week) of each term. official documentation such as a typed letter from 3. A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the permanent the physician, an official copy o f an accident report, or official documentation of a family emergency, student record. death certificate, and so forth. 4. Complete Withdrawal: If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request w i l l be granted i f the Course Change form bears the signature o f each faculty member instructing each course o f withdrawal. Note: A completed Course Change form is required for (1), (2) or (3) listed above. - The Course Change form listing the request for Procedure complete withdrawal must be submitted to the Regis- 1. Students who wish to apply for special status under trar's Office no later than the end of the 30th instruc- (3) above must submit the Request for Course tional day (end o f the sixth week) o f term. Withdrawal form with a letter explaining the circum- - A withdrawal ("W") w i l l be noted on the official stances leading to withdrawal, and the Course transcript and the permanent student record. Change form, to the Registrar with official documentation. If, in the opinion of the Registrar, the request AFTER THE WITHDRAWAL PERIOD does not fall under (3) above, or the documentation is insufficient to support the request, the request w i l l After the 30th day (or after the end of the sixth week) be denied. If the request is granted, the Registrar w i l l of the term, and until the end o f the term, course inform the student's instructors of the " W E " status. withdrawals or complete withdrawals are not permitted 2. The permanent student record w i l l be annotated as withdrawal for extenuating circumstances ( " W E " ) . except for the reasons listed below: 1. the student record is incorrect as the result of an 3. Withdrawal with extenuating circumstances w i l l not be granted for lack o f academic performance on the error by the College; part o f the student. General 28 Information — Registration AFTER THE ELEVENTH WEEK OF 3. If a course add increases the number of credits, the CLASSES INCOMPLETE GRADE "I" student w i l l be responsible for the non-refundable 1. If the student believes an exceptional circumstance exists which prevents him/her from completing the course during the regular time frame, the student may petition the course instructor for an incomplete ("I") grade. 2. A n incomplete ("I") grade may be given where, i n the judgment o f the instructor, the student should have reasonable expectation o f passing the course, m i n i m u m payment o f the deposit at the time o f the addition. 4. However, i f the deposit is paid before June 30 for F a l l term and/or November 30 for Spring term, students may have the deposit refunded by withdrawing from the College on or before June 30 or November 30. Those who pay this deposit after June 30 or November 30 are not eligible for any refund o f deposit. but has not completed the required work. 3. A n incomplete is assigned only when the instructor and student have arranged for the work to be COURSE OVERLOAD completed by a specified date w h i c h is noted on the grade sheet class list. If the student does not c o m plete the work by the specified date, the instructor w i l l automatically assign a predetermined grade reflecting the work not completed. 4. If the student completes the work by the specified time, the instructor w i l l assign the final grade. 5. If this incomplete procedure cannot be applied in the opinion o f the instructor, the instructor is directed to contact the Registrar directly for resolution o f the issue. 1. Registration in more than five academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a career program constitutes a course overload. 2. Students may choose to register for a course overload (up to a total o f 21 credits) as long as they have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor or advisor and the Course Change form bears the counsellor's or advisor's signature. Science students, however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credits, as long as the total credits do not exceed 21 credits and does not arise from registration in more than five courses. PROCEDURE FOR CONDENSED COURSES/TERMS 3. Students may not register for a course overload until after the in-person registration period. Deadline w i l l be prorated to the duration o f the intensive courses. PROCEDURE FOR S U M M E R TERM Same process as above, with the following restrictions: 1. F o r Summer courses seven or eight weeks in length: a) The A d d / D r o p Refund Period is five instructional days. b) The Withdrawal Period ends on the 10th instructional day. 2. F o r Summer courses 12 to 15 weeks in length: a) The regular Add/Drop/Refund/Withdrawal policies apply. REFUNDS — A d d / D r o p / W i t h d r a w a l Periods 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at the same time and on the same course change form, COURSE CHALLENGE Registered students may request a course challenge whereby an examination for achievement may be awarded for a very specific and limited selection o f courses at the institution. Certain courses may not be challenged. Students interested in this procedure should contact their instructor. The regular tuition fee must be paid for a challenged course. A course challenged successfully w i l l be recorded on the permanent student record. Note: Creditfor courses challenged successfully will apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not grant credit or transfer credit for credit received by course challenge. the deposit w i l l be applied to the course added, provided the number of credits remains the same. 2. If the number o f credits falls below the original number o f credits o f enrolment, the difference o f the deposit fee for the course dropped w i l l be retained and the m i n i m u m deposit w i l l not be refunded. General Information — Registration 29 Fees listed in this Calendar are those in effect at the TUITION A N D RELATED FEES time o f publication and are subject to change subsequent to the printing of this publication. Tuition fees are generally $42.50 per credit. A typical full-time student who enrols in 15 credits w i l l pay fees APPLICATION FEE - ADMISSION A N D of $711.25 per term or $1,422.50 for a two-term RE-ADMISSION academic year. A $20 ($100 for international students) non-refundable The table below includes some examples of tuition fees application fee is payable by all applicants. plus incidental fees for the students' union, student newspaper and application/enrolment fees. Some TERM ENROLMENT FEE program or course tuition fees w i l l vary from those A $20 non-refundable term enrolment fee is payable by stated above. all students registering. INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS D O C U M E N T EVALUATION FEE A s o f September 2000, international student tuition This non-refundable fee is assessed for applicants fees are $275 per credit hour. whose academic records originate outside B . C . and are required for admission, transfer credit or advance standing. The fee is waived i f the documents originate from a secondary school located in Canada. FEE Canadian & International Landed Immigrant Students Students EXAMPLES Application: admission/re-admission $20.00 $100.00 no fee (included above) Document Evaluation (tuition and related fees) $25.00 English Diagnostic Test $25.00 $25.00 Math Placement Test $ 10.00 $10.00 Registration (term enrolment) $20.00 $20.00 Late Registration Penalty (past 10th day o f term) $45.00 $45.00 $3.00 (minimum $25.00) $3.00 (minimum $25.00) Tuition ($/credit) $42.50 $235.00 Graduation $20.00 $20.00 Letters, forms to be completed and signed by the Registrar $10.00 $10.00 Course Change Transaction (per form) $10.00 $10.00 Grade Appeal $42.50 $42.50 Student Card Replacement $5.00 $5.00 T 2 2 0 2 A Education Deduction F o r m Replacement $10.00 $10.00 Transcript Fee (each transcript) $5.00 $5.00 Student U n i o n Fees ($/credit) $3.67 (max $36.70) $3.67 (max $36.70) Student Paper (Capilano Courier) 0.75 (max $10.00) 0.75 (max $10.00) Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) ($/credit) $42.50 $235.00 Diploma/Certificate Replacement $20.00 $20.00 Late Payment Penalty ($/credit) Refunds A l l fees are non-refundable unless specified as "partial refund" i n the Course Change Procedures section. Partial refund = course fee minus deposit. Deposits retained for the purpose of refunds = $16.00/credit for Canadian and landed immigrant students and $90/credit for international students. Refunds on non-base funded courses vary. C h e c k with the Cashiers' Office. General 30 Information — Fees TUITION FEES REFUNDS The standard tuition fee for most programs is $42.50 Students who officially withdraw within the first 10 per credit hour with no maximum. days of the fall or spring term (or within the first five The following programs or courses have varying tuition fees: days o f the summer term) w i l l receive a refund o f • day in fall or spring (or after the 5th day in summer Early Childhood Education, Fisheries Science, $26.50 per credit. Students withdrawing after the 10th Landscape Horticulture, Legal Secretarial, M e d i c a l term) are not eligible for a refund o f tuition or tuition- Office Assistant, Home Support/Personal Care related fees and are responsible for all fees incurred. Attendant, H o m e Support/Resident Care Attendant, all Office Technology programs: $42.50 per credit to a m a x i m u m of $637.50 per term. • Refunds for non-base funded courses vary. C h e c k with the Cashiers' Office. Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy and Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies: $42.50 per credit with a possible fee m a x i m u m o f $1,225 per term. • Business Administration 300 and 400 level and all Evening courses: $75 per credit. • • Private M u s i c Instruction: $43 per instructional hour Senior Citizens: Persons 60 years and older, providing proper identification may enrol in most courses on a tuition-free basis. There are exceptions, and these include all A r t Institute courses, Private M u s i c Instruction and courses where the standard tuition fee exceeds $42.50 per credit. • Students' U n i o n Fees: A compulsory fee of $2.75 per credit, to a m a x i m u m o f $41.25 per term, is payable by all North Vancouver campus students. This fee is optional for students at other campuses. • Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee: A compulsory fee of $.75 per credit to a m a x i m u m o f $10 per term is payable by all students. • Graduation Fee: A graduation fee o f $20 is payable by all students in their final term o f enrolment and must be submitted with their application for program evaluation at registration or within the first 30 days of term. • • Laboratory Fee: The College may assess additional laboratory or materials fees in specific courses or programs. Students w i l l be notified o f these fees. Late Payment Fee: A fee o f $25 or $3 per credit, whichever is greater, is charged to all students paying tuition fees later than the fee deadline dates established by the College. General Information — Fees 31 Graduation Convocation ceremonies are held in the Spring and Fall average o f 3.75, with no grade lower than a C + in the terms. Diplomas and certificates are issued only at program requirements, w i l l be awarded Graduated with these two ceremonies. Students completing all Distinction. coursework before the ceremonies w i l l have their permanent student records and transcripts annotated as DIPLOMAS Program Requisites complete. The date that the diploma or certificate is awarded w i l l then be placed on Capilano College offers a variety o f diplomas upon the permanent student record and transcript at the date completion of two years o f study at the university of the appropriate graduation. transfer level. Students who believe they w i l l complete their program N o t e : A previously-awarded of study by the end o f their current semester o f enrol- ploma may be exchanged for an Associate Degree in ment must submit a Request for Program Evaluation Arts or Science as appropriate, form to the Registrar's Office, together with the $20 degree meets all the requirements for the program evaluation fee at registration (See Fee Sched- Degree. This includes the five-year requirement ule), or no later than the following deadline: is applied to the date of exchanging Associate Application deadlines: Fall Graduation in November: September 15 Academic Studies Di- provided that the Associate which a diploma for an Degree. ASSOCIATE OF ARTS DEGREE Spring Graduation in M a y : February 15 To be eligible for the Associate o f Arts Degree, a MINIMUM DURATION A N D NUMBER OF CREDITS REQUIRED FOR CERTIFICATES A N D DIPLOMAS student must have: 1. completed 60 credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100level or higher at the University o f British C o l u m bia, S i m o n Fraser University, the University o f Diploma: requires at least two academic years or four terms and completion o f 60 credits, O R at least one academic year, or two terms, and 60 credits, with 30 credits and the final 5 0 % taken at Capilano College and following completion o f a prior credential and/or the granting o f one or more of: V i c t o r i a , or the University o f Northern British Columbia; 2. completed at least 30 o f these 60 credits within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree; 3. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding of • Transfer Credit • Prior Learning Assessment (under review) • Challenge Credit the degree, o f which at least 12 credits are i n courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; • Equivalence to another Capilano College program 4. completed at least six credits i n courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at Certificate: requires at least one academic term and the 100-level in English; 5. completed at least 18 credits i n Arts courses (other completion o f 15 credits. than English) that have assigned or unassigned Citation: requires six to 14 credits. university transfer credit at the 100-level; at least six of these credits must be in the Humanities, and at Statement of Completion: offered for particular least six o f these credits must be in the Social courses in Labour Studies, and other contract courses Sciences, and no more that six credits shall be in any to fulfil Ministry and business requests, and where one subject area; documentation other than a transcript is required. W i t h D i s t i n c t i o n D e s i g n a t i o n : A student completing university transfer, career, vocational, adult basic education, or English as a second language program with a m i n i m u m program cumulative grade point General 32 Information — Graduation 6. completed at least 18 credits i n Arts courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher, these credits must be i n at least two different subject areas; 7. completed at least nine credits in Science courses, including at least three credits in Mathematics or Computing Science or Statistics (i.e. any statistics course that transfers to a university as a 100-level or higher Science course) and at least three credits in a Laboratory Science course (i.e. any course in the Science's list worth three credits or more and with a lab of at least two hours, but excluding any course in Applied Science or Computing Science); 8. completed at least nine credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned transfer credit at the 100level or higher; credits may be for university transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Communications, Media); 9. achieved a grade of at least "C-" in each course counting towards the 60-credit requirement, and a cumulative grade point average of at least 2.00 over all of the courses counting towards the requirement. Note: History courses are considered as Humanities credits for the purpose of the Associate Degree. General Course Requirements for Associate of Arts Degree Courses/Programs Credits Conditions English 6 100 Level 6 Arts Courses Humanities Social Sciences Social Sciences or Humanities 6 6 100 Level - excludes English - only six credits max. in one subject area 6 18 Arts Courses 200 Level or Higher - credits must be in at least two subject areas 18 Science Courses Mathematics or Comp. Science or Statistics Laboratory Science* Science Course 3 3 3 9 Electives** 9 9 Total 60 100 Level or Higher - *requires min. two-hr. lab and excludes any course in Applied or Computing Science ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE To be eligible for the Associate of Science Degree, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits of courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100level or higher at the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University, the University of Victoria, or the University of Northern British Columbia; 2. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits within five years preceding the awarding of the Associate Degree; 3. completed at least 30 of these 60 credits at Capilano College within five years preceding the awarding of the degree, of which at least 12 credits are in courses which have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; 4. completed at least six credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level in English; 5. completed a least six credits from the following Capilano Calculus courses: Mathematics 108, 109, 110, 111, 116, 117, 126, 127, 230, or 231; 6. completed at least 18 credits in Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; no more than six credits shall be in one subject area; 7. completed at least 18 credits in Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; these credits must be in at least two subject areas; 8. completed at least six credits in Arts courses at the 100-level or higher, excluding English and excluding any course that has university transfer credit in both Arts and Science (e.g. Mathematics); 9. completed at least six credits in courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level or higher; these credits may be for university transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses in other subjects (e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Communications, Media); 10. achieved a grade of at least "C-" in each course counting towards the 60-credit requirements, and a cumulative grade point average of a least 2.0 over all the courses counting towards the requirement. 100 Level or Higher **May be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Communications, Media with university transfer credits. General Information — Graduation General Course Requirements for an Social Sciences: Associate of Science Degree Anthropology Courses/Programs Credits Conditions English 6 100 L e v e l Mathematics 6 - from Mathematics 108, 109, 116, 126, 230 or 231 Science 18 100 L e v e l - only six credit max. in one subject area Science 18 Arts Elective Electives** _6 Criminology Economics Geography (Human) (100, 101, 102, 106, 108, 200, 2 0 1 , 2 0 2 , 205) Political Studies Psychology Sociology W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 102, 110, 113, 122, 140, 220) SCIENCES A p p l i e d Science 200 L e v e l or Higher Biology - must be in at least Chemistry two subject areas Computing Science 100 L e v e l or Higher Geography (Physical) (112, 114, 214, 221) - excluding E n g l i s h Geology and courses that Kinesiology have transfer credit Mathematics & Statistics in both Arts and Physics Science (e.g. M a t h - Note: Some courses in the subjects listed above may ematics) not carry transfer credit and/or satisfy major require- 100 L e v e l or Higher ments at a particular university. Please consult the B.C. Transfer Guide, university calendars, or the 60 Advising Centre. * * M a y be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, C o m m u n i c a tions, M e d i a with university transfer credits. Classification of Subjects for Associate Degrees DIPLOMA IN ACADEMIC STUDIES T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a in A c a d e m i c Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits, 50% o f w h i c h must be c o m pleted at Capilano College; For the purpose of the above requirements, Capilano 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or better; 3. Successfully completed at least 45 credits from the following subject areas (List A and B ) , including at least six credits from English (100-level or higher), at least six credits from subjects in L i s t A ; and at least 15 credits selected from 200-level courses; College courses are categorized as follows: 4. A l l courses must be university transferable courses. O n l y those Capilano College courses with university transfer credit at the University of British C o l u m b i a , Simon Fraser University, the University of V i c t o r i a , or the University of Northern British C o l u m b i a w i l l count towards the Associate Degree. A ARTS B A p p l i e d Science Anthropology Linguistics Biology A r t History Music A r t History Japanese Chemistry Chinese Philosophy Chinese Linguistics Computing Commerce Political English Philosophy Science Criminology Studies French Geography Economics Psychology German Spanish W o m e n ' s Studies (100, 104, History 106, 130) Geology English French Sociology Spanish Kinesiology Mathematics Geography (Human) Thai Physics German Theatre History Women's Humanities: (Physical) Japanese General 34 Information Graduation Studio A r t Studies DIPLOMA IN GENERAL STUDIES T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a in General Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits at the 100 level or higher, 5 0 % of which must be completed at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. DIPLOMAS IN CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational program diploma, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 50% o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano C o l l e g e ; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. CERTIFICATES IN CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or higher. DIPLOMAS/CERTIFICATES IN ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/ESL T o be eligible for a diploma or certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 50% o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. General Information — Graduation 35 Academic Policies and Procedures EXAMINATION PERIOD ATTENDANCE Students are expected to attend all classes, seminars, The last two weeks o f each instructional term is labs in which they are officially registered, as evalua- designated as an examination period. If a final exami- tion o f progress i n any course is cumulative and based nation is to be given, it w i l l take place during the on class assignments, participation and examinations. examination period and w i l l be up to three hours i n duration. For some Career/V ocational programs, classes w i l l ENROLMENT STATUS continue as regularly scheduled throughout the examination period. In addition, a special examination Full-time status: A student registered in a m i n i m u m schedule may be set. Detailed information is available of 12 credits is classified as a full-time student. from instructors or program coordinators. Generally, for provincial and federal financial aid The examination schedule w i l l be posted each term by purposes, a student registered in a m i n i m u m o f nine the end o f the eighth week o f instruction. credits w i l l be considered to have met the enrolment requirement for financial aid. STUDENT RECORDS Audit: A n audit enrolment indicates the student has registered in and w i l l attend a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, 1. A l l official permanent student records are kept i n etc. F u l l fees are required for audit enrolment. Attend- the Registrar's Office, and are considered confiden- ance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. H o w - tial. The information on file for a student is always ever, for those students who do not meet the attendance available to that individual. Information w i l l not be requirement, their permanent student record and given to any agency or person other than the student, transcript w i l l be annotated with the comment A U D I T unless the student has given their permission i n D E N I E D . A u d i t status i n a particular course is not writing, or for institutional research projects ap- calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, proved by the College. and may not be used toward completion o f a diploma, certificate, associate degree, or degree. Students are permitted to register for audit status in a particular course only after the last day o f in-person registration, on a space available basis, with the 2. Grade statements: • Grade statements are mailed out by the Registrar's Office at the end o f each session; 3. Transcripts: • instructor's signature. Students may change their registration i n a course from credit to audit or audit to mailed directly to the institution or agency or to the credit on or before the last day o f the two week A d d / student i n a sealed envelope. The cost o f each D r o p Period with the instructor's approval and signature. transcript produced is $5. • noted below: Unofficial transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office at the request o f the student. Second Year Standing: Second year standing is based on the number o f credits completed within a program as Official transcripts are issued by the Registrar's Office, only at the request o f the student, and are 4. The records o f First Nations students (including registration, transcripts and grades) held by the i) University Transfer: successful completion o f 24 Registrar's Office may be released to the sponsoring credits in that program; band or the Capilano College First Nations A d v i s o r ii) Career programs: successful completion o f 5 0 only i f a release has been signed by the student. A percent o f the total credits required for a two-year copy o f this release must be o n file i n the Registrar's diploma i n a specified program, or 30 credits. Office. Alternatively, a band may submit a copy o f a release signed by the student, together with their request for information. Requests must be received in writing and shall be responded to by letter from the Registrar or the Registrar's designate. Requests General 36 Information — Academic Policies and Procedures w i l l not be received by telephone. Band officials are requested to direct their inquiries to designated College representatives, including the Registrar and/ or project coordinator. USE OF PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NOTIFICATION EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION, SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT A l l requests for equivalence, exemption, substitution or transfer credit must be submitted to the Office M a n ager, Registrar's Office, on the Transfer Credit Request form. A decision w i l l be made with the recommendation o f an appropriate program coordinator, i f applica- Personal information contained on your student record w i l l be used to verify your Personal Education Number ( P E N ) or to assign one to you. The main uses o f the ble. The credit or action w i l l be noted and approved by the Registrar's Office. Students w i l l be notified in writing o f the final decision. P E N w i l l be for measuring participation in post- E q u i v a l e n c e : A n equivalence indicates two courses secondary education and for student registration within the institution deemed to be practically equal in purposes. A s w e l l , the P E N w i l l be used for program content and credits, although they may be offered i n research and evaluation but any personal information two different program areas under different course disclosed for these purposes w i l l be in non-identifiable numbers. form. These uses have been reviewed and approved by E x e m p t i o n : A n exemption indicates a student is not the Information and Privacy Commissioner. Students required to complete a particular course(s) i n a pro- are required to supply this information to complete gram because o f successful completion of a combina- their registration in courses or programs at the institu- tion o f post-secondary courses which, overall, consti- tion. tute equal content. If you have any questions about the use of P E N please S u b s t i t u t i o n : A substitution indicates a Capilano contact the Freedom of Information coordinator in course used in lieu o f another Capilano course to writing at: complete a program requirements. Credit must be vcochran@capcollege.bc.ca equal. or T r a n s f e r C r e d i t : Transfer credit is credit given for V . Cochran work successfully completed at another institution. The 2055 Purcell W a y transfer credits reduce the total number of credits North Vancouver BC required to complete a certificate, diploma, or associate V7J3H5 degree. A p p r o v e d transfer credit is noted on the Permanent Student Record as type one, two or three credit, as per the B . C . Transfer Guide. W h i l e grades are PROTECTION OF PRIVACY AND ACCESS T O INFORMATION noted on the student record system, they are not included in the calculation of the G P A , nor are they printed on an official Capilano College transcript. Capilano College gathers and maintains information used for the purposes o f admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member of the Capilano College community and attending a public post-secondary institution in British C o l u m b i a . In signing an application for admission, graduation, or registration form, all applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record w i l l be protected and used in compliance with the B . C . Freedom o f Information and Privacy Protection A c t (1992). General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures Grade Point Average (GPA) GRADING SYSTEM Grade performance is expressed in terms o f a grade point average ( G P A ) . G P A s are reported on each The College employs a letter grade system. permanent student record. T o find the term G P A , the grade point value for each grade is multiplied by the Grade Point credit hours to produce a number o f grade points for Letter Value Classification A+ 4.33 A 4.00 A- 3.67 B+ 3.33 B 3.00 B- 2.67 C+ 2.33 C 2.00 C- 1.67 D 1.00 M i n i m a l Pass F 0.00 Fail each course. F o r example: an " A " received i n a threecredit course would become, for purposes o f the calculation: Excellent A = 4.00 x 3cr = 12 grade points T o find the term G P A , the sum o f the grade points is then divided by the number o f credit hours taken in one term only. Similarly, the cumulative G P A recorded is Good the sum o f total grade points for a l l terms, divided by the number o f credits for all terms o f enrolment. The m i n i m u m grade point average for graduation is 2.00. Satisfactory Audit A n audit indicates the student has registered in and attended a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. A n A u d i t status is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, and may not be used toward completion of a diploma, certificate, associate degree or degree. Non-Grade Designation CIP* - Course i n Progress CR* - Credit Granted Withdrawal from a course after the end o f the with- NC* - N o Credit Granted drawal period given for circumstances usually related NGR* - N o Grade Reported I* - Incomplete W* - Withdrawn WE* - Withdrawal — Withdrawal — Extenuating Circumstances to a medical situation. C R or N C Grade Extenuating Circumstances AUD* - Audit ADN* - Audit Denied The grades " C R " or " N C " are assigned to courses i n which a level of mastery is required for successful completion but is not included in the G P A calculation. F Grade A l l Fail or " F ' grades recorded on the student's * not calculated i n grade point average transcript are assigned a value o f zero in the calculation of a student's term and cumulative G P A . I Grade A n " I " grade or Incomplete may be assigned in exceptional circumstances when the student can achieve a passing grade by completing one or more units o f the course. It is the student's responsibility to determine from the instructor what must be done to complete the course. If an Incomplete is not cleared within four months, the grade w i l l be changed to the evaluation attained at the time the " I " was assigned. General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures GRADE APPEALS REPEATED TERMS Students must take immediate action for a grade Students who enrol but withdraw from all courses i n appeal. Students must contact a counsellor no later than two consecutive terms w i l l be ineligible to re-register two weeks after receipt o f grades or Change o f Grade for one term, F a l l or Spring. Students who receive Notification. The counsellor w i l l discuss the grade and grades o f " F " (fail), " W " (withdraw), or a combination appeal procedure with the student and with the instruc- of these grades in all courses o f enrolment in two tor, w i l l provide the student with a " F i n a l Grade consecutive terms shall be ineligible to re-register for A p p e a l " form, and w i l l submit a report to the Appeals one term, F a l l or Spring. If following a third term o f Committee. enrolment, students who receive grades o f " F " , " W " , or If the student wishes to pursue the appeal, he/she must a combination of these grades in all courses o f enrol- complete the " F i n a l Grade A p p e a l " form and submit it ment, w i l l not be allowed to enrol for two terms, F a l l to the Appeals Committee, along with a fee o f $42.50 and Spring. for each grade to be appealed, within 14 days after the Students who must withdraw from all courses i n two counsellor's report has been received by the Appeals consecutive terms due to medical reasons may appeal Committee Secretary. Failure to meet this timeline w i l l to the Registrar for a permit to re-enrol. be grounds for dismissal o f the appeal. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired by one o f the College deans. The Committee ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE consists o f representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. D u r i n g the appeal process a l l term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. In all cases the students are informed in writing o f the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the fee is refunded. Students at Capilano College are expected to maintain acceptable standards of scholarship. Specifically, they are expected to maintain a m i n i m u m 1.80 C G P A (cumulative grade point average). A student who does not maintain this m i n i m u m C G P A w i l l be considered O n l y those appeals that follow the above process w i l l be considered. to be performing unsatisfactorily. The following procedures w i l l apply for evaluating the student performance i n accordance with policy governing continuance, withdrawal and readmission. REPEATED COURSES 1. A c a d e m i c performance w i l l be evaluated on courses for which Capilano College grades have been A course may be repeated for the purpose of improving assigned. (Assigned grade w i l l include grades A + a grade, but no more than once. The grade for each through D , F , but w i l l exclude W , C R and A U D ) . attempt w i l l be recorded with the higher grade used in N o course may be taken more than twice i f the student 2. F o l l o w i n g admission, no formal assessment w i l l take place until the student has completed a m i n i mum of nine credits o f assigned grades. has received two failures, or made two withdrawals or 3 . Students who were admitted to the C o l l e g e with an the computation o f the cumulative G P A . any combination o f failure and withdrawal. Subse- admission average below 1.80, and who have quently, a student w i l l not be allowed to enrol in a third attempted nine credits at a previous post-secondary attempt unless all o f the following have been satisfied: institution, w i l l be admitted on academic probation. a. a term G P A o f 2.5 or better is achieved; b. the signature o f the instructor and the faculty ACADEMIC PROBATION coordinator responsible for that subject is entered on the registration form. Students who have received assigned grades for at least The Repeated Courses Policy also applies to courses nine Capilano College credits with a G P A o f less than deemed to be equivalent, have a similar curriculum, 1.80 based on the four-point scale, w i l l be placed on and the same subject material; for example, B i o l o g y academic probation. Students w i l l be notified in 106 and 107, and B i o l o g y 110. writing o f their status and may be advised to book an appointment with an advisor or counsellor prior to reregistering. General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 39 Students permitted to register w i l l be limited to enroll- A C A D E M I C APPEALS POLICY ing i n nine credits or a m a x i m u m o f three courses. F o l l o w i n g completion of the nine credits or three courses, the student records w i l l be reassessed. If, at the end of the probation period: If a student is considering appealing a final grade, it is • the term G P A on assigned grades during the proba- recommended that, i f at all possible, a student first tion period and the cumulative G P A are 1.80 or contact his/her instructor for discussion and clarifica- higher, the student w i l l be returned to good aca- tion o f the grounds/rationale for the assigned grade. demic standing; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the proba- 1. tion period is 1.80 or higher, but the cumulative G P A is less than 1.80, the student w i l l continue on academic probation; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period is less than 1.80, the student w i l l be required to withdraw from the College for at least Policy The purpose o f the A c a d e m i c Appeals P o l i c y is to provide a process that ensures students have recourse to an independent, impartial body to review policy application i n the following areas: 1.1 one term (fall or spring). The Purpose of the Academic Appeals Final Grades* (Grades throughout the term can only be appealed to the A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee after final course grades have been assigned and inasmuch as in-term grades form REQUIRED T O WITHDRAW Students who have been Required to Withdraw ( R T W ) , part o f the final grade). 1.2 Probationary continuance, restricted enrolment, or may not apply for readmission for one full term. W e discontinuation o f a student i n a program/ strongly advise students to contact an advisor or a course(s). counsellor before submitting an application for re- * The word "grade" is used to mean either a per- admission. centage or a letter grade. Human errors and Students who have been required to withdraw must omissions i n the Statement o f Grades w i l l be make application for readmission. Permission for corrected as soon as identified without appeal or readmission w i l l be granted by the Registrar or desig- cost to the student and are not the subject o f nate in consultation with the appropriate department consideration by the A c a d e m i c Appeals C o m m i t - and an advisor or counsellor, i f necessary. If admitted, tee. the nine credit enrolment limit w i l l apply, as consistent 2. with the probation policy. Responisibility for D e v e l o p m e n t of A c a d e m i c P o l i c y a n d Its A p p l i c a t i o n Required to Withdraw students granted readmission in 2.1 A l l instructors are responsible for informing the original program o f registration or a new program students o f the basis for the assignment of final must achieve a grade point average of 2.00 or better on grades in courses. those credits attempted. Students who do not achieve this level w i l l be required to withdraw from the College 2.2 The College Policy, which clarifies the c i r c u m - for one full year and may only be readmitted by stances and procedures for putting students on application to, and with the approval of the Admissions probationary status in the program, restricting a student's enrolment, or discontinuing a student's A p p e a l Committee. enrolment may be supplemented by written p o l i c y Note: Some Career/Vocational programs reserve the right to review performance after each term. This review could result in denied permission to register. developed by departments/divisions. 3. The Academic Appeals Committee 3.1 MANDATE The A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee w i l l consider appeals i n the areas specified by the A c a d e m i c Appeals Policy. 3.2 COMMITTEE MEMBERSHIP The A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee is comprised of the following members: General 40 Information — Academic Policies and Procedures • The Dean responsible for Student Services — Chair; 6.1.2 advocate. The role o f the Counsellor is to • A Counsellor selected by the Counselling Depart- guide the student in the Appeals process ment for a one year term that is renewable; and give information. • T w o faculty representatives selected by the C C F A 6.1.3 for a one year term that is renewable; the mediation process, the Counsellor w i l l for a one year term that is renew- provide the student with information able. 3.3 about the adjudication process. CONFLICT O F INTEREST 6.1.4 For final grade appeals, the Counsellor If a member o f the Committee is either an appel- w i l l provide the student with a Final lant or respondent in an appeal, he/she w i l l be Grade Appeal Form. replaced by an alternate during that particular 6.1.5 appeal process. 4. If the student is not satisfied that the concerns raised have been addressed in • T w o student representatives selected by the Student U n i o n The Counsellor does not act as a student F o r appeals under 1.2, the Counsellor w i l l provide the student with information about how to develop a letter to the Grounds for Appeal A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee that A student may make an appeal under the A c a - presents the grounds for appeal. demic Appeals P o l i c y on the following grounds: 6.1.6 • failure by the instructor to follow the evaluation The Counsellor w i l l prepare for the profile, grade assignment and operational details Committee a Counsellor's report that as stated in the Course Outline. Students must be reviews the Counsellor's interview with notified i n writing of any changes to the distrib- the student and provides information uted course outline; about the mediation attempts. W i t h i n two weeks, the Counsellor's report w i l l be • failure o f the instructor to treat the student with submitted to the Chair of the A c a d e m i c fairness or the degree of equity extended to other Appeals Committee for filing or use i n the students in the class; adjudication process. • 5. 5.1 failure by the instructor or departments/divisions to follow approved college policies and proce- 6.2 dures. The Appellant's Role and Responsibility Deadlines for Initiating and Resolving Appeals ADJUDICATION 6.2.1 If a student wishes to appeal a final grade, the student must complete and m a i l the Grade Appeal F o r m to the A c a d e m i c A student wishing to appeal a final grade must contact a Counsellor within two weeks after Appeals Committee Chair within 14 receipt o f grades or Change o f Grade notification. calendar days o f the date of receipt o f the Grade Appeals F o r m from the Counsellor. 5.2 F o r appeals under 1.2, the student must contact a Counsellor within two weeks after being advised in writing that a policy is being applied. 5.3 In adjudication processes, the A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee shall attempt to resolve the appeal as soon as possible and by no later than the end o f the following term. 6. The Appeals Process 6.1 MEDIATION 6.1.1 6.2.2 For appeals under 1.2, the appellant must write and mail a letter outlining the nature and reasons for the appeal to the A c a demic Appeals Committee Chair within 14 calendar days after the completion o f the mediation process. 6.2.3 W i t h the Grade Appeal F o r m or appeal letter, students should submit the fee o f the amount specified in the College calendar. For grade appeals, the fee is In all appeals, attempts may be made to applicable on a per course basis. mediate the situation. T o this end, Counsellors w i l l refer students first to the instructor, and then to the Department Coordinator and D i v i s i o n Chair. 6.2.4 Failure either to meet the above timetable or to submit the fee with the Grade Appeal F o r m is grounds for dismissal o f the appeal. General Information — Academic Policies and Procedures 41 6.2.5 If the final grade is changed, the fee for 6.2.14 F o r final grade appeals, the Committee may request that all course material be the grade appeal w i l l be refunded. submitted by the appellant for review by the Committee. The Respondent's Role and Responsibility 6.2.6 After receiving a copy o f the student's 6.2.15 F o r final grade appeals, the Committee Grade Appeal F o r m (or appeal letter) and shall not consider the appellant's grades i n the Counsellor's Report, the respondent other courses. (instructor or departments/divisions) is required to complete the Faculty Report 6.2.16 In the event that the Committee decides a final grade should be revised, it may: F o r m (for final grade appeals) or provide a • request the instructor to re-evaluate the letter o f response for the Academic material that is the subject o f the appeal; Appeals Committee. • i n exceptional circumstances, seek a reThe Academic Appeals Committee's Role and evaluation o f work i n dispute by another Responsibility — General 6.2.7 discipline expert chosen by the C o m m i t tee; The A c a d e m i c Appeals Committee shall review the Grade Appeal F o r m (or appeal • base the new grade on a proportionate letter), Faculty Report (or respondent's weighting o f those graded components letter), and the Counsellor's Report. 6.2.8 appellant or the respondent to appear before the Committee. If the Committee asks either one to appear, the invitation must be extended to the other. The appellant and respondent shall not appear before the Committee at the same time. 6.2.9 that are not in question, excluding i n part or in entirety those that are i n question. The Committee may request either the 6.2.17 The Committee w i l l only change final grades for the following reasons: • failure by the instructor to follow approved college policies and procedures; • failure by the instructor to follow the Except i n exceptional circumstances and evaluation profile, grade assignment and on request o f the Committee, neither operational details as stated in the Course appellants nor respondents may appoint Outline. Students must be notified i n representatives to appear for them before writing o f any changes to the distributed the Committee. course outline; 6.2.10 The C h a i r o f the Committee shall notify the appellant and respondent in writing informing her/him of the outcome o f the Committee's decision. • failure o f the instructor to treat the student with the degree o f equity extended to other students in the class. 6.2.11 The decision of the Committee is final. The Chair w i l l provide a written rationale of the appeal within one week to both the student and the respondent. 6.2.12 U p o n a request to the Chair of the A c a demic Appeals Committee, the student w i l l be provided with a copy o f the Faculty Report or letter of response and the Counsellor's Report. The Academic Appeals Committee's Role and Responsibility -— Final Grade Appeals 6.2.13 F o r final grade appeals, the Committee may request that the instructor's grade book be submitted for review by the Committee. General 42 Information — Academic Policies and Procedures Student Services EDUCATIONAL ADVICE pertinent to those areas. In addition, all semester and examination timetables and official course articulation and graduation is coordinated by the Registrar's Office. THE ADVISING CENTRE T e l : 604-984-4900 Admissions Advising/ Educational Planning/ High School Liaison Fax: 604-984-1798 A n n a L e e B O U L T O N , Supervisor, B A (Alberta) Jean B E R R Y , A c a d e m i c A d v i s o r and International Student A d v i s o r , B . S c . (Wisconsin) DISABILITY SERVICES Faculty Jolene B O R D E W I C K , B . S c . (Ed) (Idaho), M . E d . Rosemary M E E C H , A c a d e m i c A d v i s o r , B . E d . ( U B C ) (UBC), P D P (SFU), C A R P ; R R P Suzanne N O R M A N , A c a d e m i c A d v i s o r , B A (McMaster) — Office of Educational Planning Lucas F O S S , B A (Carleton), M A Counselling P s y c h o l - M a r n i B U S H , B . C . Standard Teaching Certificate, ogy, (Adler School o f Professional Psychology), Educational Planning Assistant The A d v i s i n g Centre • easy and successful transition into college provides on-going educational planning for students on campus • • • — Learning Specialist Jan S H I E L L , M . E d . ( U B C ) , R R P , — Assessment Specialist organizes admission and course planning workshops on campus to help prospective students make an • A l i s o n P A R R Y , B A ( Y o r k University), assists students and prospective students in making course selections consistent with their career goals • rence), M . E d . (Counselling, U . V i c . ) — in process provides prospective students with educational planning consistent with their career goals • R C C , A R W — Office o f Educational Support Dave S Y M I N G T O N , B A (Queen's), B S T (St. L a w - Support Staff Sandra C O O P E R , Secretary Intake services for students with disabilities are pro- assists students in planning their transfer to other vided in the Office of Educational Planning for Stu- institutions dents with Disabilities ( B i r c h 284). Admitted students provides the general public with information on w i l l be referred for on-going technical equipment, Capilano College programs through the telephone classroom accommodations, assessments and learning visits high schools in the lower mainland to provide support services. The Office o f Educational Support information on College programs and to assist (Birch 272) and the Learning Specialist ( B i r c h 278), students in their transition from high school to both in the Counselling Department, as w e l l as the college. Assessment Specialist ( B i r c h 285) are all available to support students with disabilities. Appointments may be made at the A d v i s i n g Centre in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 238 or by calling the A d v i s i n g Hotline at 984-4990. Drop-in advising is also available. Contact in the Office o f Educational Planning must be E m a i l : advising@capcollege.bc.ca needs can be arranged in a timely fashion. F o l l o w i n g made up to F O U R months prior to classes beginning. This w i l l ensure that equipment and accommodation admission and receipt o f current documentation, a REGISTRAR'S OFFICE Itidal S A D E K , Registrar, B . A r c h , B . S c . (Egypt) Barbara R O B E R T S O N , Associate Registrar, B.Ed.(UBC) C h e r y l H E L M , Office Manager, B A ( U B C ) The Registrar's Office is responsible for admission, maintenance o f all permanent student records, registration procedures for all prospective and continuing students, and administration of College policies variety of services may be made available for students: • transition and educational planning • college orientation and access information • registration assistance • instructor notification for classroom accommodation • exam invigilation • individualized equipment and technical support • equipment funding facilitation • taped and enlarged font texts • interpreting services General Information — Student Services • • notetakers L D assessments K e l l y M U L L I N , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services • exit planning C a r o l N O O N A N , Technical Services Anne M O Y E , Secretary Jennifer N O R D S T R O M , Circulation Services Faculty are available M o n d a y through Thursday. For N o l a O ' B R I E N , Technical Services more information about Disability Services call Sandra A n n e O L S E N , Technical Services Cooper at 983-7526 for an appointment. G a i l O W E N , Circulation Services Edna S A K A T A , M e d i a Production Services FIRST NATIONS STUDENT SERVICES K a r y n S C H M I D , Circulation Services Joanna S P U R L I N G , Circulation Services Faculty Judy S T E A R , Circulation Services Peggy S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations Deborah S W I G A R T , Circulation Services Jocelyn V A N N E S , A u d i o V i s u a l Services Advisor The First Nations Student A d v i s o r provides direct services to First Nations students in a variety o f ways: Library Hours North Vancouver Campus assistance with course selection and registration; M o n d a y - Thursday 8:00 am • 10:30 pm information concerning College resources; advisor for Friday 8:00 am 4:30 p m Saturday - Sunday 1:00 p m 5:00 p m 10:30 p m special programs; liaison with First Nations B a n d education officers and college instructors; consultation regarding personal and educational matters. The Audio Visual Services advisor also acts as a resource to the student-based M o n d a y - Thursday 8:00 am First Nations Issues Committee. Friday 8:00 am - 4:30 p m Media Production Services The A d v i s o r is located on the North Vancouver M o n d a y - Friday 9:30 a m - 4 : 0 0 p m campus, B i r c h B u i l d i n g , third floor, R o o m 327. Squamish Campus Internal calls 1762, external calls 984-1762. M o n d a y - Thursday 9:00 am - 7:00 p m Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 p m Sechelt Campus LEARNING SUPPORT SERVICES M o n d a y - Thursday 9:00 am - 7:00 p m Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 pm Collections LIBRARY Students have access to a book collection o f over Administration 100,000 volumes, periodical and newspaper collections Carol M c C A N D L E S S , Dean, Science and M e d i a Technology D i v i s i o n of 750 current titles, and collections o f videos, C D R O M and online databases, maps, government docu- Faculty ments, annual reports and pamphlets. Reference Karin H A L L , B A , M L S ( U B C ) computers provide access to the I N N O P A C online David L A M B E R T , B A ( U of A ) , M L S ( U B C ) catalog, online periodical indexes, full-text databases, Annette L O R E K , B A , M L S ( M c G i l l ) the Library Homepage, the Internet, and other on-line George M O D E N E S I , B A , M L S ( U B C ) information resources. F o r instructions on how to Sidney M Y E R S , B A ( U B C ) , M L S (Western) access the catalogue from outside the Library, see the Maureen W I T N E Y , B A (Trent), M L S ( U o f T ) "Library Guide for Students" available in the Library. Staff Kathleen C O S G R O V E , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Research Assistance and Instruction Sharon F E Y E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Students receive a library orientation and basic re- G l e n G R E E N L Y , Technical Services search methods class during the first year of English, Jana H O T K O V A , M e d i a Production Services Psychology, and Communications courses. Other June H U N T E R , M e d i a Production Services courses often include a class in the use o f library Karen K L A V E R , Circulation Services materials specific to the subject area. Individual Dianella K N I G H T , M e d i a Production Services research assistance and Internet research classes are James K W O K , Circulation Services General 44 Information — Student Services Sechelt and Squamish also offered. Guides to resources and services are available in print and electronically through the Library Homepage. The primary library collection is housed at the main Capilano College L i b r a r y in North Vancouver and only limited library resources are available at the Sechelt Circulation Services and Squamish campuses. Sechelt and Squamish students have full access to the main library collection Students are required to present current Capilano through the online library system and inter campus College I.D. to borrow library materials. I.D. cards must be renewed each term. For loan periods and other lending. policies see the "Library Guide for Students" available LEARNING SPECIALIST in the library. N o t e : Fines materials. whether are charged Hourly on all overdue and daily charges the item is on reserve, loan. Please and return recalled, or on note the due date on each item materials Faculty library vary depending on time. Failure registration (transcripts is are withheld to return and Alison, P A R R Y , B A (York) regular borrowed materi- als and pay all fines at the end of each term will in debt listing on result further prohibited). The office o f the learning specialist offers the following services to Capilano College students who wish to improve their learning efficiency: 1. Scheduled study skills workshops on topics such as T i m e Management, Lecture Notetaking, Textbook Reading, E x a m Preparation/Exam W r i t i n g , and Audio-Visual Services A variety o f audio-visual software and equipment is available for use in the library or may be booked for classroom presentations. F i l m s , videos, records, cassette tapes, and C D ' s are listed in the library's catalogue. Projectors, video players, cassette recorders, C D players and record players are available for individual use at library study carrells or for small group use in the library's preview room. Overhead acetates, video and audio tapes can be purchased. Computer Learning Centre The Computer Learning Centre provides instructional services to students in a microcomputer lab setting. These services include an introduction to word processing, the setting up of e-mail accounts, solutions to hardware and software problems and the provision o f general information about computing resources at the College. The Centre is located on the main floor o f the Library and assistance is available during posted hours. G i v i n g Oral Presentations. 2. Credit courses, team taught with counsellors, that help students adopt attitudes and methods that promote student success. 3. Individual assistance to students with specific academic concerns and difficulties. 4. Support to students with documented learning disabilities in the form o f classroom and exam accommodations, individual learning strategies instruction, and peer tutoring. For more information about the study skills workshops, the Student Success course or to make an appointment to see the learning specialist at the North Vancouver campus, visit the Counselling Department ( B i r c h 267) during regular office hours or call 984-1744. F o r information on the services offered by the learning specialists at the Sechelt and Squamish campuses, please contact the local College receptionist in Squamish at 986-3515 (toll free from North V a n c o u ver) or 892-5322 (local) and in Sechelt, call 987-1535 (toll free) or 885-9310. Media Production Services Assistance in the design, preparation, and production of audio-visual materials is provided. Selected equipment is available for laserprinting, laminating, photography, video and audio production on a self-help basis. M e d i a Production Services is located in the Centre for N e w Media. General Information — Student Services 45 appropriate career goals, and personal growth. Serv- WRITING CENTRE ices include educational counselling, career counselA l l students registered at the College may visit the W r i t i n g Centre (FR402) for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not ling, and personal counselling. T e l : (604) 983-7535. Capilano College encourages all international students to participate in the International C l u b to meet a proofreading service but aims to help students Canadian and other international students and to develop their writing ability. participate in a variety o f activities, on and off campus. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet Contact Ethelyn M c l n n e s - R a n k i n for details. T e l : (604) space, a collection of reference books, information 983-7535. sheets and exercises, and computers with word The Peer Support Centre offers a number o f programs processing and printing facilities. including a Conversation Corner w h i c h allows the The W r i t i n g Centre is staffed by faculty members from students to improve their English, and an international the English, E S L and A B E Departments. Hours of buddies program w h i c h pairs an international student operation are posted. with one o f the student volunteers. T e l : (604) 9841744. THE MATHEMATICS LEARNING CENTRE Students studying mathematics at Capilano College benefit from one o f the most comprehensive learning centres in the province. The Mathematics Learning Centre ( M L C ) is located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES 289. During scheduled hours students may obtain The College has been active for a number of years i n individual assistance from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The M L C also contains an extensive collection o f learning materials including software, promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and other agencies outside Canada. Students from Capilano College and Japanese institutions have exchanged as videos, and reference texts. have faculty from Rajamangala Institute o f T e c h n o l ogy, Thailand, and Open University of H o C h i M i n h C i t y i n Vietnam. INTERNATIONAL STUDENT CENTRE Capilano College and A i c h i Gakusen College o f Toyota C i t y , Japan established a special relationship in 1983 which provides for the annual exchange o f Gary H E N K E L M A N N , Manager, B . E d . ( U of Alberta) students between the two colleges. Ursel B R O W N , Support Staff U p to three Capilano College female students study and work at A i c h i Gakusen from late September until mid-winter. Each student is provided with a scholarship o f Y 7 5 0 , 0 0 0 (approx. $7,500 Cdn.), a VancouverT o k y o - N a g o y a round trip ticket and free tuition i n a special program o f studies specifically tailored to the The Centre provides information concerning student authorizations (visas), Canada's immigration regulations and policies, medical insurance, orientation, homestay needs, and so on. The International Student Centre is located on the third floor of the B i r c h B u i l d ing, R o o m 337, T e l : (604) 990-7863. O r contact G a r y Henkelmann, T e l : (604) 983-7544 or Ursel B r o w n , T e l : (604) 990-7863. individual student. The total value o f the scholarship is approximately C d n . $20,000 C d n . for each student. Formal agreements have been signed with other post- Jean Berry, the International Student A d v i s o r , assists secondary educational institutions in C h i n a , M a l a y s i a , international students both prior to and after their Thailand, Japan and other countries o f the Pacific R i m admission to the College and w i l l provide specific which w i l l continue to enhance opportunities for assistance to students with program questions, student exchange. visa requirements, homestay accommodation, social A special exchange agreement with Kushiro Public and special programs, educational advising, and University in Japan provides for faculty exchange orientation. T e l : (604) 983-7539. annually. The International Student Counsellor, Ethelyn A s a member o f a number o f international education M c l n n e s - R a n k i n , provides a variety o f counselling training associations in Canada and the United States, services designed to promote and support students' the College is able to provide a variety of opportunities academic success, identification and achievement of for students and faculty to study, travel, or work overseas. General 46 Information — Student Services Programs Administered by the Financial A i d and Awards Office STUDENT FINANCIAL SUPPORT (Funds may be limited. Early application is recom- mended) EMPLOYMENT CENTRE FOR STUDENTS • Location: B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 270 Dave S H A R R O C K , A d v i s o r (604) 984-4965 or • L y n n e S O M E R V I L L E , A d v i s o r (604) 986-1911 Ext. 2392, E m a i l : lsomervi@capcollege.bc.ca A d u l t Basic Education Student Assistance Program (ABESAP)* Canada Study Grants for H i g h - N e e d Part-Time Students ( H N P T - C S G ) * • Training Assistance Benefits ( T A B ) * • Other government programs as they become avail- Fax (604) 990-7866 The Student Employment Centre provides valuable able employment coaching and strategies for students and alumni. Support is provided in the areas of: • Internal scholarships and awards Deadlines: • posting and resume dissection techniques • practical self-assessment before you start the "search" Fall T e r m October 1 Spring T e r m January 31 • learning to focus • company research • resume and cover letter critiques • tips on interviewing Services Provided by the Financial A i d and Awards Office • basic "money matters" (Early • ongoing support and encouragement throughout all • phases o f the work search process application is recommended) Information and applications for British C o l u m b i a Student Assistance Programs* A l l incoming "employment opportunities" (full-time, -BCSAP part-time, seasonal, casual, pick-up) are posted on a ~ Loan Remission central job board located in B i r c h 276 — the Career - W o r k Study Resource Centre. These same positions are also posted • on the Student Employment Centre W e b site (password and I D available at the Centre). • The Centre is a drop-in service, with individual student appointments easily available. Students are encouraged to visit the Centre early i n the semester, to establish an on-going connection o f • • Information on other sources o f educational funding Emergency A i d (limited). Includes emergency loans and emergency bursaries • • FINANCIAL AID A N D A W A R D S Location: B i r c h B u i l d i n g R o o m 238 Applications for the student assistance programs o f other provinces support for employment concerns throughout the duration o f their studies. Assistance in preparing reassessments or reviews for B C Student Assistance Programs* Emergency individual financial counseling Workshops and information sessions on financing an education, and budgeting • Application forms for external assistance and awards • N o t e : Government D o u g C A M E R O N , Financial A i d Officer Iris C U N N I N G H A M , Financial A i d Assistant Valerie K E N D R I C K , Financial A i d Clerk tended to assist students available Direct Telephone: (604) 984-4966 Fax: (604) 983-7563 loan/grant to pay for programs resources the basis for funding. may be required The amount of money student costs associated with post-secondary education. It is that students create a financial plan are expected for each educational to have arranged finances form a cover their funds in to the entire will not necessarily budget resources Student and, will receive expected in- who do not have the their education. some cases, family are and year. prior Students to registration. General Information — Student Services 47 Publications • • "Financial A i d and Awards - A Student G u i d e " Government and internal pamphlets and brochures ALTERNATIVE LEARNING FORMATS related to student financial aid • DISTANCE EDUCATION External pamphlets and brochures Capilano College offers a variety o f courses by dis- Scholarships, Bursaries, and A w a r d s tance education. Some courses are offered on line. T o obtain a list o f courses currently offered, students can Various awards which recognize achievement, and/or find the information at financial need are available through general and courselistings. html. http://merlin.capcollege.bc.ca/ individual application forms. A detailed listing of these awards is contained in the free booklet: "Financial A i d and Awards - A Student G u i d e " and available Other distance education courses are offered v i a video conferencing with our regional campuses. Such courses are part of our regular course offerings. for review on the College web site, (http:// www.capcollege.bc.ca/services/financial_aid) Fish Culture Technician Program The F i s h Culture Technician program is available i n ' Scholastic A w a r d s distance learning format only. Students may register i n The following notations and awards are determined by one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is the Registrar's Office based on criteria as noted: awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for Dean's List individuals who are currently working or seeking Full-time students completing a term and meeting the employment in the fish culture field and wish to Deans' List criteria w i l l receive a congratulatory letter upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized from the College recognizing their achievement. programs may be available. To be eligible for the Deans' List, the student must have a 3.67 or higher grade point average, have no Incompletes, no Credit Granted or F a i l grades and Legal Assistant Certificate On-Line Program completed a m i n i m u m o f 12 credits for that term. The part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program is Merit List available i n distance learning format for students l i v i n g Part-time students with a cumulative grade point average o f 3.67 or higher upon the completion of 30 or 60 credits w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. outside the L o w e r M a i n l a n d . Students must be employed as a legal secretary while completing the program and have at least two years o f such experience before starting the program. The content o f this program is identical to the content o f the part-time The Governor-General's Collegiate Bronze Medal Legal Assistant Certificate program. Please refer to this program in the calendar for a course listing. F o r more This award is presented to a diploma graduate from a information, or to receive a brochure, call the L e g a l two-year program who has achieved the highest Assistant Department at 983-7594 local 2361, or visit cumulative grade point average, and who has attained the W e b site at: this grade point average on a m i n i m u m o f 15 credit legal_assistant/ hours per term, or full program load as outlined i n the or send e-mail to: www.capcollege.bc.ca/programs/ de-lgas@capcollege.bc.ca. Calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION The Lieutenant Governor's Silver Medal A w a r d e d for academic excellence and contribution to the College and community to a graduate in a Career/ Vocational program o f less than two years' duration. Co-operative education integrates a period of classroom learning with periods o f work experience to enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students alternate periods o f full-time study with periods o f paid employment in business, industry, government and non-profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. General 48 Information — Student Services Employers may use co-op students to assist in building a work force that meets the short-term needs of their organization. Students can undertake special projects and provide relief for permanent staff who may be undertaking other tasks. In the longer term, employers have a cost effective means o f evaluating potential PERSONAL SUPPORT SERVICES COUNSELLING future employees. Faculty The co-op experience provides students with a supe- Daniel F R A N K E L , B A (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) rior, well-rounded education enriched by the practical Y v o n n e M c C O L L , B A (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) application of their skills. They obtain valuable "hands- Ethelyn M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B A (University of on" experience and are able to evaluate their career choices. The College receives immediate feedback on the quality and relevance o f the program areas and on the quality o f the students. C o - o p education also helps the Winnipeg), M A ( U B C ) Susan M I T C H E L L , B . S . E d . ( N . Illinois), M A ( U V i c ) Karen P E A R D O N , B A ( U n i v . o f Regina), M A ( U B C ) Sukhi S O H I , M A ( U B C ) Suzanne W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) College develop contacts with the business community Support Staff in general. L y n n e H A M I L T O N , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant The following are co-operative education programs at Betty G E R E L A , Receptionist Capilano College: A s i a Pacific Management Business Administration General Information The counsellors at Capilano College are professionals Accounting trained to provide a variety o f counselling services Computing designed to promote and support students' academic General Management success, identification and achievement o f appropriate Marketing career goals, and personal growth. Latin American Management Program Retail Marketing T o u r i s m Management A t present, the Counselling Department offers the following services to Capilano College students: Details on these programs are available i n the appropri- Educational ate program area of this Calendar. F o r detailed infor- plan their college education according to their interests, Counselling mation please contact the co-op education office at aptitudes and career goals. is available to help students 604-983-7557 or co-op@capcollege.bc.ca. V i s i t our Students are advised to consult with a counsellor when website at www.capcollege.bc.ca/co-op. experiencing academic difficulties. Students m u s t see a counsellor before registering for an overload or when considering filing a formal grade appeal. Career Counselling offers help to students who are having trouble deciding on a career, who perhaps feel unsure, confused, or lacking motivation. Counselling and testing can help students make realistic career plans based on their interests, abilities and values. Personal Counselling is available to help students w h o are experiencing personal difficulties which affect their ability to succeed i n college. Counsellors can help students to clarify issues, overcome obstacles and find effective ways o f dealing with their problems. Counsellors can also refer students to community agencies for further assistance. Workshops and Outreach Programs designed to help students succeed are offered throughout the term i n such areas as career exploration, goal-setting, test anxiety, procrastination, stress management, c o m m u n i cation skills, assertion training and emotional intelligence. General Information — Student Services 49 C S S . 100, College Success Strategies, is a three credit, The advisor also offers presentations and workshops on full term course co-taught by a counsellor and the campus on many topics, including harassment, conflict Learning Specialist. resolution, anger management, dating violence, cross- The Counselling Department is located in R o o m 267 of the B i r c h B u i l d i n g . Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the receptionist, or by calling 984 -1744. Appointment times are available M o n d a y through Friday, from 9 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. D r o p - i n gender communication, and assertiveness training. The advisor and her resource library are available to all student researchers with questions about harassment, conflict resolution and related topics. The advisor is located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m counselling is also available to accommodate students 329. Appointments may be arranged by calling in crisis or emergency situations, or for short consulta- 990-7863. tions. A l l counselling is confidential. Those living i n the Pemberton - H o w e Sound region requiring the assistance o f a counsellor should contact the Squamish campus. Appointments may be arranged by calling 892-5322. HEALTH SERVICES A N D SPORTS MEDICINE CLINIC Dr. B i l l M A C K I E , B . S c , M D ( U B C ) , C C F P , D i p . Sport M e d . , Director o f M e d i c a l Services Dr. A n n e D A R R A G H , M D , C C F P Sunshine Coast region residents should call the Sechelt D r . F . V . D E N H O E D , M D , F R C S (C) Plastic Surgeon campus, 885-9310. D r . Debbie C O L L I N S , B S R , M D , C C F P , D i p . Sport Med. Peer Support Centre Dr. M o n a L E E , M D , C C F P Members o f the Counselling Department are responsi- Located in the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 249. ble for the training and supervision o f Peer Support General medical services are available to students at no Centre volunteers. These volunteers are students who charge on Tuesdays and Thursdays during the Spring can assist other students by providing information and and F a l l terms. Appointments may be made through the through supportive listening. In addition, the Centre is receptionist. Internal calls 4964, external calls 984- engaged in a number o f outreach activities designed to 4964. support student success and to foster a sense o f c o m munity at Capilano College. The Centre is supported by the Capilano Students' U n i o n . Physiotherapy Paige L A R S O N , B . S c . (PT), B P E , M C P A , Sports CHILD CARE Capilano College offers child care for infants, toddlers and 3 - 5 year olds. Some part-time spaces are available. Priority is given to Capilano College students. Applications for child care are available at the C h i l d Care Centre or by calling 984-4950. Physiotherapist Denise M O R B E Y , B . S c . (PT), M C P A A n n e S T E V E N S O N , B . S c . (PT), M C P A Suzanne B A K E R , B . S c . (PT), B A (Hons. P E ) , M C P A Located in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 2 4 9 A . Physiotherapy appointments may be made through the receptionist. Hours are: M o n d a y - Friday 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Internal calls 7851, external calls 984-4964 or CONFLICT RESOLUTION ADVISOR 990-7851. Janet K E E , B A , L L B ( U o f T) The primary work o f the Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r First A i d is to assist campus members to informally resolve First A i d is administered through the Facilities Depart- disputes, including sexual harassment and other ment. Internal calls 1772, external calls 984-1772. harrassment issues. This work can include discussing First A i d Services are available on campus 24 hours a effective responses, facilitating communication day, seven days a week. between the concerned individuals, and helping complainants initiate a formal complaint under the College Sexual Harassment Policy (see Policies and Procedures in this Calendar). General 50 Information — Student Services SECURITY CAMPUS ACTIVITIES Capilano College is concerned with the safety and security o f students, faculty, staff and visitors on ATHLETICS A N D RECREATION campus. Security at the North Vancouver campus is provided by uniformed officers. These officers are available to escort any member of the College community. A d - Administration Joseph I A C O B E L L I S , B P E , M P E ( U B C ) , Manager vance notice is appreciated, but not required. Campus Faculty security may be reached at 984-1763. M i l t o n W I L L I A M S , B P E ( U B C ) , Programmer A security awareness orientation is provided to every Support class at the beginning of each term. Faculty, particu- John B R A I T H W A I T E , Weekend Attendant Staff larly those teaching evening classes, promote and Dianne C O T T R E L L , Program Assistant actively encourage the buddy system. Students are M i c h a e l F R A N K O W S K I , B P E ( U o f C ) , Senior advised to walk with a friend or, i f possible, travel in Attendant groups to parked cars or to other locations, or get a ride Matthew H A R R I S O N , Attendant to their vehicle i f they are parked some distance away T o m S M I T H , Evening Attendant from others. Athletics Capilano is a full member o f the British C o l u m b i a CAREER PLANNING INFORMATION Colleges' Athletic Association, which is the governing body for all intercollegiate athletics in the province. Provincial championships are determined annually, with winners advancing to national finals. This affords CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE our C o l l e g e ' s highly skilled student athletes an oppor- The Counselling Department assists students consider- tunity to meet with and compete against the best ing career options by providing information and college athletes in Canada. reference materials on a wide variety o f occupations. Intercollegiately, Capilano Blues teams compete i n The Career Resource Centre is located i n the B i r c h soccer, basketball, volleyball, and badminton both for B u i l d i n g , R o o m 267. It houses a collection of self-help men and women. Each year, our many exceptional books, vocational literature and information on labour athletes, working with the experienced Blues coaching market trends. The Centre also contains calendars from staff and managers, have combined to produce both Canadian and foreign universities and colleges, and provincial and national championship teams. Capilano free informational brochures on campus and c o m m u - College is proud o f the accomplishments o f its student nity resources. Copies o f past and current course athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic outlines for Capilano College are available for refer- excellence. F o r athletes seeking information about ence in choosing courses and instructors. In addition, their sport status, call the Athletic Director, Joe there is a computer located i n the Career Resource Iacobellis at 983-7553. Centre to allow students to find career and occupational information on the Internet. F o r assistance, contact the Counselling Department receptionist. The Career Resource Centre is open from 8:30 a.m. 4:30 p.m. M o n d a y through Friday. Campus Recreation The department offers an expanding intramural program, utilizing the C o l l e g e ' s Sportsplex facility and the Weight Training Centre, together with recreation and fitness programs, which are available during F a l l and Spring terms. Some examples of the scheduled activities are: co-ed volleyball, basketball, indoor soccer, yoga, badminton, aerobics, Tae K w o n D o , rowing, weight training and many more. The Sportsplex is located in the south east corner o f the south campus parking lot across from B i r c h B u i l d i n g . For detailed g y m schedule and game times call 9841737. F o r intramurals, recreational programming call General Information Student Services 51 M i l t W i l l i a m s at 983-7532. F o r general information The activities of the Students' U n i o n are coordinated please call Dianne Cottrell at 984-4977. The fax on a day-to-day basis by an elected Executive C o m m i t - number is 984-1736. tee. Elections o f all vacant and expiring positions on the U n i o n ' s Executive Committee are held during the Sportsplex and Fitness Centre first five weeks o f each College semester. One member The Sportsplex is one o f the finest multipurpose Executive o f the Canadian Federation o f Students. of the Executive Committee sits on the provincial facilities i n the province. It houses the intramural programs, athletics, gymnasium-based programs, extension courses in sports and recreation as w e l l as general activity drop-in programs for those requiring For more information about the U n i o n , or a copy o f the U n i o n ' s Constitution and B y l a w s , please stop by the U n i o n office, R o o m 116 in the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . scheduling flexibility. E a c h o f these programs offer a variety o f activities w h i c h w i l l satisfy the recreational CAMPUS PUBLICATIONS needs of the student body. Facilities include a 14,500 sq. ft. gymnasium with seating capacity for 1,700, suitable for basketball, volleyball, badminton, indoor soccer, wrestling, martial arts and many other activities; a 2,400 sq. ft. aerobics gym; weight and fitness centre; dressing rooms and sauna. A wide range o f services including towel service, locker rentals, first aid, laundry service and equipment loans are available. THE CAPILANO REVIEW The Capilano Review is a tri-annual magazine of the arts, publishing poetry, fiction, visual art and drama from all over Canada and the world. Since its inception in 1972 in the Capilano College Humanities D i v i s i o n , the magazine has been recognized seven times for excellence by the National M a g a z i n e awards, three Current hours o f operation during the term (September times by the Western Magazine awards, once by the to A p r i l ) are: Journey Prize Awards, and been cited by the Canadian M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:30 a.m. to 11 p.m. Studies Association. Its distribution spans nine Friday: 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m. countries. The Capilano Saturday/Sunday: Please call 984-1737 for Capilano Press Society; it receives support funding schedule from the Canada C o u n c i l , the B . C . Arts C o u n c i l , Review is published by the Capilano College, and the B . C . G a m i n g C o m m i s s i o n . Subscriptions are $25 for one year (three issues) or $45 STUDENT UNION for two years. The student rate for one year is $15. The The Capilano Students' U n i o n is an organization comprised of all registered full- and part-time students at the College. Membership in the U n i o n commences at registration, upon payment of the Union membership fee, and ceases at the end o f the last semester of study. Capilano Press Society welcomes donations to its Friends and Benefactors Program and its endowment fund, both o f w h i c h are tax deductible through The Capilano College Foundation. Write to: The Capilano Review c/o Capilano College. Telephone: (604) 984- In 1981, a referendum was held at Capilano College in 1712. Fax: (604) 990-7837. w h i c h students voted by a 90.4% majority in favour o f W e b site: joining the Canadian Federation o f Students, a national Email: www.capcollege.bc.ca/dept/TCR tcr@capcollege.bc.ca alliance of college and university students' unions. Provincial and national Federation fees* are calculated STUDENT NEWSPAPER per credit per semester. The student newspaper at Capilano College is the O n campus, the Students' U n i o n works to protect the Capilano rights and advocate for the interests o f its members. Courier is run by an independent staff o f student The U n i o n appoints student representatives on College committees, providing student perspectives i n the Courier, published every other week. The volunteers, autonomous from the student society and College administration. College decision-making process. The U n i o n also organizes on-campus social and cultural activities, and Since the Courier is written, organized, and laid out on provides a variety o f services to its members. Provin- campus, there is always a need for help. Students are cially and nationally, the U n i o n works through the encouraged to take part in news and feature writing, Federation to positively affect government and post- reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, secondary education policies i n such areas as tuition desktop publishing, graphic design, and advertising. fees and student financial assistance. The newspaper is not a "class project" and therefore General 52 Information — Student Services offers the chance for all students to participate in the democratically-run collective staff. The Courier welcomes input from the entire College Please Note: Parking on Purcell W a y is reserved for the residents of Purcell W a y . community. Classified ads (which are free to students, Northwest Boarding Kennels pay parking L o t is a staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other private entity. Tickets/permits purchased from their lot contributions can be submitted to their offices. are not valid for parking on College property and Capilano College tickets/permits are not valid on their property. GENERAL C A M P U S SERVICES The following areas are not owned by the College and vehicles may park for free: • East side o f Monashee, just north of Northwest Kennels is on District land and not under the BOOKSTORE College's pay parking program. Located in the southwest corner o f the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , • Gravel road north o f Parking L o t 4 (east to west the Bookstore offers required and recommended texts, between Monashee and upper Lillooet Road). stationery, clothing and sundry items. • S m a l l area between Lillooet Road Entrance 2 and The first six weeks o f classes, the Bookstore is usually Parking L o t 3. open 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m., M o n d a y through Thurs- • Some areas of Lillooet Road allow parking. day; and 8:30 a.m. to 4 p.m. on Fridays. After six weeks, closing time changes to 6:30 p.m. but remains Observe signage in areas near driveways. 4 p.m. on Fridays. Summer session hours are 8:30 a.m. The administration and operation of pay parking to 4 p.m., M o n d a y through Friday. The Bookstore including permit sales, equipment, parking violation accepts cash, V i s a , MasterCard, Interac and cheques notices, courtesy notices and towing is handled by with proper I D . Imperial Parking L t d . For information regarding used books, please contact Phone: 983-7593 the Capilano Students' U n i o n . Fax: 990-7887 STUDENT STORE — CAP CORNER Fees for Pay Parking The student store, located in the Library building, is • $2/day: D a i l y tickets are purchased from meters located throughout the campus (2 x $1 coins or 1 x operated by the Retail M a r k e t i n g students. $2 coin) The store serves as a teaching aid allowing students to put into practical use the skills they learn while in the classroom. The store sells Capilano College sweatwear, school supplies, common pharmaceutical items, gifts, candy, snacks and cold drinks. • $30/month (first day - last day) • $ 100/term (four calendar months) • $180/twelve months (September - August) M o n t h l y , term and yearly permits are purchased from Imperial Parking L i m i t e d located in the Arbutus B u i l d i n g , R o o m 030 (basement level). Special sweatwear orders for clubs, organizations, and various athletic teams can be arranged. Hours of operation are M o n d a y to Thursday from Pay parking permits are sold during the following times: 10:15 a.m. to 4:15 p.m. Sept. 9 - Dec. 2 and Jan. 18 Each month during the first and last five business days: thru A p r i l 15. Occasionally the store is closed due to M o n d a y through Friday 10:15 - 10:45 a.m., fieldtrips or exams. 12:15 - 12:45 p.m., and 2:15 - 2:45 p.m. O n all other days during the month: PARKING Pay parking is in effect 24 hours a day, seven days a week, all year. Pay parking applies to all parking spaces at the North M o n d a y through Friday 12:15 - 12:45 p.m. Additional extended hours w i l l be available and advertised during rush periods at the beginning o f F a l l and Spring terms. Vancouver campus, including all those on College roadways, and is strictly enforced. General Information — Student Services 53 Car Pooling = Free Parking Persons wanting to take advantage o f car pooling may obtain application forms from the Purchasing Department located i n Arbutus B u i l d i n g , R o o m 018 (basement level). Registered groups o f three or more individuals arriving and unloading at the same time, in one vehicle, i n the designated parking area, w i l l be provided with free parking. LOST A N D FOUND Students may inquire about lost or found items in the Capilano Students' U n i o n office, located in the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . There is also a Library lost and found in the Library at the Circulation counter. FOOD A N D BEVERAGE SERVICE The Food Court (located main floor, B i r c h Building) Hours of Service: M o n d a y to Thursday: 8 a.m. - 8:30 p.m. Friday: 8 a.m. - 3:00 p.m. Saturday: 8 a.m. - 2:30 p.m.* The Specialty Coffee Bar (located in the F o o d Court) Hours of Service: M o n d a y to Thursday: 7:00 a.m. - 2:30 p.m. Friday: 7:00 a.m. - 1:30 p.m. Cedar Building Kiosk (Cedar B u i l d i n g , 1st floor) Hours of Service: (when classes are i n session) M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:00 a.m. - 1:30 p.m. Friday: Closed Fir Building Kiosk (Fir B u i l d i n g , 2nd floor) Hours of.Service: (when classes are i n session) M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:00 a.m. - 3:30 p.m. Friday: 8:00 a.m. - 3:00 p.m. Maple Building Kiosk (Maple Building) Hours o f Service: (when classes are i n session) M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:00 a.m. - 1:30 p.m. Friday: Closed Vending services are available throughout the campus. Catering services for meetings or other on-site occasions are also available. Contact the Director of Food Services at 984-4970. * May be altered with notice. General 54 Information — Student Services College Policies STUDENT RIGHTS A N D RESPONSIBILITIES Student Responsibilities It is your responsibility to acquaint yourself with course outlines, content, evaluations and methodology. Y o u are also responsible for conducting Capilano College recognizes a set o f student rights and yourself in a reasonable manner and i n accordance holds students responsible for their understanding and with College policies as set out in the Calendar. Y o u conduct i n view o f College policies, rules and regulations. are responsible for: Student Rights 1. inquiring into the availability o f your instructors (time and place). Y o u are entitled to have your rights respected by fellow 2. communicating with instructors and/or counsel- students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons lors i n order to solve any of the problems that associated with the College. In addition to your rights you may encounter. guaranteed under the Canadian Charter o f Rights, you have the right to: 1. a healthy and safe learning environment free from harassment and discrimination. 2. the confidentiality o f information regarding all student records and grades unless you consent in writing to its disclosure. Y o u also have a right to ethical behaviour from College personnel who have access to your student records. 3. seek redress through appropriate College committees for any potential infringement o f your rights, according to the procedures in effect at the College. 4. access to documents contained i n your student records, and to add pertinent comments or documents as appropriate. 5. be informed i n advance o f the basic content and general procedures of a course and to be sure that the course w i l l not change substantially after registration. Y o u also have the right to receive at the beginning o f a course a written outline and to receive written notification of changes in the course outline. The course outline normally w i l l include course objectives, teaching methods, evaluation system, and due dates and late penalties for major assignments. 6. reasonable access to information on program and 3. attending classes and being punctual. 4. submitting your assignments i n the required format to your instructors within the deadline; or, i f you cannot do so, for making other arrangements with the agreement of the concerned instructor. 5. being familiar with the information contained i n the course outlines and for seeking from your instructors clarification o f any areas o f concern. 6. undertaking to complete course requirements as described in the course outline and to observe deadlines and schedules contained therein. 7. discussing any dissatisfactions with the instructor concerned before attempting further redress through appropriate College channels. 8. respecting the rights o f students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the College. 9. respecting other people's health and their right to security and dignity. 10. adhering to College policies including: a) cheating and plagiarism; b) improper behaviour; c) sexual harassment. graduation requirements, academic regulations, and university admission. 7. be notified of class cancellations as soon as possible and to expect that classes w i l l start and end on time. 8. be informed o f your performance on occasions spaced throughout the semester. 9. have your instructor keep designated office hours. 10. review any o f your examinations and major course assignments up to the beginning o f the following semester. 11. retain intellectual property concerning your assignments, essay, theses, and other written work. General Information — College Policies 55 b) Development of an Educational Plan ACCESS A N D A C C O M M O D A T I O N POLICY FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES AT CAPILANO COLLEGE I. The Office o f Disability Services, i n collaboration with the A d v i s i n g Centre, helps applicants to select courses and programs i n which they have a reasonable opportunity to succeed. c) Development o f an A c c o m m o d a t i o n Plan The Office o f Disability Services, i n collaboration with faculty i n various program areas, PREAMBLE assists applicants to develop an accommodation Capilano College recognizes the importance of provid- plan which w i l l serve them when they are ing access to learning opportunities for all. T o this accepted as students. end, the College endeavours to provide access to courses and programs for applicants with disabilities and/or special education needs. III. Capilano College is also committed to supporting the successful learning o f students after they have been ELIGIBILITY FOR AN ACCOMODATION AND SERVICES 1. admitted. F o l l o w i n g admission, the College w i l l strive Eligibility for Accommodation a) E l i g i b i l i t y for an accommodation is based upon to provide, within reasonable time and resource limits, the assumption that each student w i l l be able to access to a range o f appropriate services which w i l l demonstrate an ability to benefit from the assist students to meet their educational goals. accommodation and services provided for h i m The approach chosen by Capilano College is one o f or her; attempting to ensure that such accom- self-advocacy and one in which each student takes modation and services do personal responsibility for meeting his or her o w n tage over other students. needs. W h i l e primary responsibility for the provision not offer an advan- b) T o be eligible for an accommodation through of services to students with disabilities rests with the the Office o f Disability Services, students are student and the Student Services and Foundation required: Programs D i v i s i o n , the supportive physical, academic, i) and social environment is the responsibility of the to be a qualified student who meets college eligibility and admissions criteria entire College. ii) to self-disclose the disability or condition for w h i c h accommodation is being re- II. INTAKE PROCEDURES FOR APPLICANTS WITH DISABILITIES 1. The Office of Disability Services is the identified first point of contact for all applicants with disabilities. quested, and iii) to provide evidence o f the specific disability, through current psycho-educational or medical documentation, prior to an accommodation or service being arranged. T i m e l y contact with the Office o f Disability Services 2. cation to be in place when classes begin. Applicants Identification of a Reasonable Accommodation or Service with disabilities must meet College and program a) Through a consultative process, Disability w i l l allow for an accommodation or classroom modifi- admissions and eligibility criteria and provide current Services seeks to identify and meet individual documentation to receive services as outlined in student needs and, i n a timely fashion, to college calendars. arrange for a reasonable 2. appropriate services. accommodation and Applicants may be assisted with the following: b) A l t h o u g h past recommendations provided i n a) Completion o f the Application process. intake documents w i l l be considered,the The Office o f Disability Services provides information about the completion and submission of application forms and admissions procedures. College reserves the right to decide w h i c h classroom accommodation is most reasonable and appropriate based upon: i) evidence i n the documents provided, ii) the course or program i n which the student is registered General Information — College Policies 56 iii) evidence o f current service and accommodation needs • Development of a community based on civility and mutual respect • Respect for diversity and free intellectual inquiry c) A classroom accommodation, and any modifications or services w i l l be determined by • Respect for property Disability Services personnel i n consultation • Maintenance of individual safety. with the student and various faculty in specific departments and/or program areas. 1.2 T o ensure that violations o f this P o l i c y are dealt with i n an equitable, unbiased and timely manner. d) Once classes begin, students w i l l be referred within the college for direct services and technical equipment provision. This policy does not cover behaviour w h i c h is subject of a complaint under the Sexual Harassment Policy or the A c a d e m i c Policies o f the College. 3. Appeals Process for an Accommodation a) The Office o f Disability Services w i l l inform students that an accommodation review process is available. 2. Appropriate Conduct The College recognizes that most students make considerable sacrifices to be able to attend classes. T o b) A t any point during the first six weeks o f classes, students may request an accommodation review by the Office o f Disability Services. c) If a student and the Office o f Disability Services cannot agree upon an appropriate accom' modation, the Dean of Student Services and Foundation Programs w i l l establish a review panel i n keeping with College guidelines. enhance their opportunities for success, the College expects everyone to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their common goals. One of the most important o f those goals is to develop the s k i l l o f critical thinking through the free expression and exploration of a wide range of ideas. This may involve challenges to students' and faculty's strongly held beliefs and values. A s long as such challenges are d) The review panel w i l l be comprised of one clearly directed at ideas, and are not merely personal representative selected from each o f the attacks on those who hold them, the College accepts following: C C F A , O P E I U , Students' U n i o n , and encourages them as part o f the learning process. and the Administration. e) The review panel w i l l be chaired by the Dean of Student Services and Foundation Programs, Nothing in this policy shall be construed as to prohibit peaceful assemblies and demonstrations or reasonable expressions of free speech. who w i l l cast the vote to break ties. The decision of the review panel is final. 3. Improper Behaviour Improper behaviour is defined as either disruptive behaviour or as threatening and dangerous behaviour. STUDENT CONDUCT POLICY 4. To enhance their opportunities for educational success, the C o l l e g e expects all students to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors in achieving their c o m m o n goals. Disruptive Behaviour Some kinds o f expression and behaviour do not further the learning process; they may become disruptive to all concerned and may hinder the C o l l e g e ' s basic purpose: to foster both learning and a constructive, positive attitude toward learning. Therefore, the College w i l l 1. Aims of this Policy not accept disruptive behaviour in any College- The College regards certain forms o f conduct as sponsored activities whether conducted on or off improper and unacceptable and w i l l deal with such campus. behaviour following processes which regard both the Disruptive behaviour may include but is not limited to: rights and safety o f the C o l l e g e community. The purposes o f this policy are: 1.1 T o facilitate: • Speech or action that seriously distracts others from the task at hand, or the hindrance of others' work by failure to complete one's o w n work; • Creation o f an environment conducive to learning and teaching General Information — College Policies 57 • Speech or action that is clearly not part o f a 6.2 learning process and that creates an atmosphere o f observe serious examples o f improper behaviour hostility, intimidation, ridicule, or anxiety among outside o f class should report these incidents with other students, staff or instructors; as much information as possible, including the names o f witnesses, to the Dean responsible for • A c t i o n that impedes the delivery of College Student Services who w i l l deal with the incident services; and inform the complainant o f any outcomes. • Falsification o f identification or provision o f false information to any College employee or repre- 6.3 sentative in the performance o f his/her duties; In minor examples o f improper behaviour i n class the instructor may consult with or refer the situation to the Coordinator, the D i v i s i o n Chair, a • A c t i o n that abuses College property and services Counsellor or the Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r . by using them for unauthorized purposes; • Excessive and unreasonable demand for attention The instructor may also immediately employ the or special treatment from faculty or staff, to the sanction described in article 7.1 of this policy. detriment of other students; 6.4 • Actions which are arguably violations o f the B . C . If there are repeated minor examples o f improper behaviour (i.e., after a student has been given two H u m a n Rights C o d e or municipal bylaws; 5. A l l members of the College community who explicit warnings) i n class or a major example o f • A i d i n g , inciting, abetting or acting as an accom- improper behaviour i n class, the instructor should plice in the commission of any o f the foregoing report the incident(s) to the Coordinator, D i v i s i o n acts. Chair, and to the Dean responsible for Student Services. Threatening and Dangerous Behaviour A l l members of the College community are expected to 6.5 In incidents o f improper behaviour reported to the show respect for the C o l l e g e and its students and Dean responsible for Student Services, he/she w i l l employees. Behaviour that is threatening or dangerous investigate the situation and may have recourse to to others is unacceptable and w i l l be dealt with quickly the services o f the Counselling department for and firmly. The C o l l e g e w i l l protect its students and mediation purposes or may request the aid o f the employees against such conduct. Conflict Resolution A d v i s o r . Threatening or dangerous behaviour may include but is 6.6 issue are apology, restitution or community • Assaulting, threatening, physically or verbally service. abusing or intimidating another member o f the College community; 6.7 • A c t i n g i n a way which endangers the health, safety or well-being of others; • Damage, misuse, or threat to, or the unauthorized removal of, C o l l e g e property or the property o f students or College employees; • Actions which are arguably violations of the 6.8 W h e n an incident o f improper behaviour is particularly serious or when danger may exist to students or others, an instructor or supervisor o f a College-sponsored activity has the prerogative to cancel the class or activity i n progress. If the Dean responsible for Student Services does not believe the incident(s) o f improper behaviour C r i m i n a l Code o f Canada; can be successfully mediated or subject to conflict • A i d i n g , inciting, abetting or acting as an accom- 6. A m o n g the recourses available to achieve a mediated settlement o f an improper behaviour not limited to: resolution, he/she may apply any o f the sanctions plice i n the commission of any of the foregoing outlined i n articles 7.2 through 7.6 or recommend acts. that the President apply the sanction outlined i n Procedures — Student Improper Behaviour article 7.7 College employees are governed by the Human 6.9 In determining a sanction to be applied, the Dean Resources policies o f the College. The following responsible for Student Services w i l l consider procedures and sanctions apply to students. whether a student has been previously involved i n 6.1 A t their own discretion, employees who observe improper behaviour should intervene and deal with the situation. In class, the instructor may make such determination as appropriate. incidents o f improper behaviour at the College. 6.10 W h e n an incident o f improper behaviour is particularly serious or when danger may exist to the student or others, the student may be i m m e d i ately excluded from all classes and C o l l e g e services pending further investigation and resolution of the case. General 58 Information — College Policies 7. Sanctions 7.1 8.3 Students who wish to appeal the Dean's imposition o f sanction 7.4, 7.5 or 7.6 must make a Exclusion from a class — Requirement that a written appeal to the Student Behaviour Appeals student immediately leave class. Committee within five working days after the 7.2 Written reprimand — The student is advised in imposition o f the sanction. writing that further incidents o f improper behaviour may result in more severe sanctions. Written 8.4 The Committee is composed o f one academic administrator plus one faculty member, one staff reprimands w i l l be kept on file by the Dean member and two students, elected by their responsible for Student Services. respective unions, who each serve a one-year 7.3 Probation — Conditional permission for a student term. The committee is chaired by the A c a d e m i c to enrol or re-enrol in a course or courses. The Vice-President. terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 8.5 Students who wish to appeal the President's imposition of sanction 7.7 must make a written 7.4 A c t i v i t y / A c c e s s Restriction — Restriction or appeal to the C o l l e g e ' s Board within ten w o r k i n g exclusion of a student from certain College days after the imposition o f the sanction. activities; restricted, or denial of, access to certain areas o f the College or to the use o f certain facilities or equipment. The terms o f this measure SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication, but should not be designed to inhibit a student's ability to complete course requirements. 1. 7.5 working and learning environment that is free from one or more courses. The terms of this from sexual harassment. F o r the purpose o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a policy, members o f the College community written communication. 7.6 include students, staff, faculty, and administrators. Capilano College abides by the Human Rights A c t Refusal to enrol or re-enrol — Refusal o f the of British C o l u m b i a and the Canadian Human College to enrol or re-enrol a student in a course, Rights A c t and considers sexual harassment to be courses or a program. The terms of this measure one o f the eight prohibited grounds for discrimi- w i l l be provided to the student in a written nation under the B . C . statute. Actions contraven- communication. 7.7 Capilano College is committed to providing a Expulsion — Immediate exclusion o f a student ing this policy may constitute grounds for a Suspension from the College — Immediate disciplinary response. A l l members o f the exclusion of a student from all classes and College College community have a responsibility to services. In future, the student w i l l not be permit- ensure awareness of, and adherence to this policy. ted to re-enrol in any course or program or take advantage o f any College-sponsored activity or service. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 8. Appeal Procedure Individuals who wish to appeal may do so and be assured that the principles o f natural justice w i l l be observed, including the right for representation at all hearings. 8.1 A l l written communications informing the students o f sanctions w i l l outline the possible appeal procedure. 8.2 There is no appeal to the Dean's imposition of sanctions 7.2 and 7.3 or an Instructor's imposition of sanction 7.1. 2. Sexual harassment is comment or conduct o f a sexual nature, including sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, suggestive comments or gestures, or physical contact when any one o f the following occurs: a) the conduct is engaged i n , or the comment is made by, a person w h o knows, or ought reasonably to k n o w , that the conduct or comment is unwanted or unwelcome; b) the conduct or comment has the effect o f creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive environment, and may include the expression of sexist attitudes, language and behaviour; c) the conduct or comment exploits the fiduciary relationship between students and employees o f the college; General Information — College Policies law, under statute or under any other College d) the conduct or comment is accompanied by a reward, or the express or implied promise of a policy or collective agreement to which the reward, for compliance; College is a party. e) the conduct or comment is accompanied by reprisal, or an express or implied threat of reprisal, for refusal to comply; f) the conduct or comment is accompanied by the actual denial of opportunity, or the express or PROCEDURES FOR ALLEGATIONS INVOLVING EMPLOYEES OF THE COLLEGE AND/OR STUDENTS OF THE COLLEGE 1. implied threat of the denial of opportunity, for A member of the College community who failure to comply. believes that she/he has a complaint of sexual harassment is encouraged to make a direct request This policy is not intended to infringe upon the of the harasser that the offensive behaviour or ability of instructors to academically discuss actions cease. If the request is unsuccessful, or if issues of harassment, sexism and sexuality. 3. Complaints it is considered inappropriate, or uncomfortable to The College shall appoint a Sexual Harassment make such a request, the complainant may seek Policy Advisor: the confidential advice of the Sexual Harassment a) to serve as the first official College contact in Policy Advisor allegations of sexual harassment; and 2. Consultation with Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor 2.1 The Sexual harassment Policy Advisor will assist b) to provide a confidential advisory/information service to the parties involved in sexual harassment allegations; and all parties involved in allegations of sexual c) to make appropriate recommendations to the harassment, in determining the basis, if any, for a President's Advisory Committee on Sexual complaint of sexual harassment; in formulating Harassment; and the complaint and/or response; and by explaining the options available through College policy or d) to provide the College Community with information on the issue of sexual harassment collective agreements. With the written agree- and to lead the effort to educate the campus ment of the complainant, the Advisor may discuss community on the Sexual Harassment Policy. the complaint with the alleged harasser (the respondent) in an effort to reach a mutually 4. A President's Advisory Committee on Sexual acceptable resolution without recourse to formal Harassment comprised of representatives from the procedures. C C F A , O T E U , Student Union and Capilano 2.2 College administration shall: Following consultation with the Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor the complainant has the a) review, from time to time, the effectiveness of following options: the sexual harassment policy and procedures; a) to proceed to mediation; and b) make appropriate recommendations to the b) to proceed to formal administrative action; President; and c) not to take further action. c) be available to the President for consultation 5. regarding the selection of the Sexual Harass- If the complainant decides to take no further ment Policy Advisor, and the development of a action, the Advisor will not proceed and the list of mediators. matter will be closed. Notwithstanding this policy and its corresponding 2.3 If the matter becomes the subject of any other procedures, the complainant shall, at his/her problem resolution procedure, including the option, continue to have access to any applicable subject of a charge laid pursuant to the Criminal grievance and problem resolution procedures Code of Canada, the Advisor shall not take any approved by the Board, or included in collective further action until the other process has been agreements, as appropriate; but a complainant concluded and further action is requested by the may not concurrently pursue a particular sexual complainant. harassment complaint through these sexual harassment procedures if he/she pursues any other problem resolution procedure whether at common General Information — College Policies 3. Mediation If a complainant wishes to proceed to informal mediation, the following shall occur: 3.1 4.2 If formal administrative action is invoked the following shall occur: 4.2.1 written complaint to the President who written complaint giving details o f the alleged w i l l forward it to the appropriate senior sexual harassment as defined i n Section 2 o f the administrator. Sexual Harassment Policy, including dates, times, places, names o f individuals involved i n the 4.2.2 W i t h i n five w o r k i n g days o f the action i n 4.2.1 above the senior administrator shall incident(s), names of any witnesses and any other inform both parties, i n writing, o f the relevant information. 3.2 The A d v i s o r shall forward a copy o f the The complainant must provide the A d v i s o r with a receipt o f the complaint, provide a copy o f W i t h i n five working days from the date o f receipt the written complaint i f it has not already of the written complaint, the A d v i s o r shall inform been made available pursuant to the the respondent of the allegation(s) and shall informal mediation procedure, and invite a provide the respondent with a copy of the written written response from the respondent complaint. within ten working days. The complainant shall be invited to deliver a written 3.3 W i t h i n ten working days o f the action i n 3.2 reply to the response within five working above, the A d v i s o r shall, i f the respondent agrees, days after a copy o f the response has been select a mediator from a list o f potential mediators received by the complainant. and shall receive agreement o f the choice o f mediator from both the complainant and the 4.2.3 complaint or arrange for such review by unbiased and independent o f both parties. The list an experienced fact finder. T h i s process of mediators shall be established by the President shall involve interviews with the c o m - following consultation with the President's plainant and with the respondent and, i f A d v i s o r y Committee on Sexual Harassment and required, with any witnesses. If a fact the Sexual Harassment P o l i c y A d v i s o r . 3.4 The senior administrator shall review the respondent. The mediator chosen must be finder is chosen he or she shall report to the senior administrator concerned. T h i s W i t h i n a period of thirty working days from the process shall be completed within 15 date o f appointment of the mediator under 3.3 working days o f receipt of the documents above, the mediation process shall be concluded. under 4.2.2 above. The options for resolution shall be o f a voluntary or informal nature and shall not include the power 4.2.4 The complainant and the respondent may of formal administrative action such as discipline. each be accompanied by a person o f their If resolution is achieved as a result o f mediation, a choice when interviewed by a fact finder. written copy o f the resolution shall be signed by the complainant and the respondent. A copy of 4.2.5 W i t h i n ten w o r k i n g days o f the conclusion of the review under 4.2.3, the senior the written complaint, the mediators report and the administrator w i l l submit a report on the resolution shall be maintained by the A d v i s o r i n a allegation to the Director o f Employee confidential file for a period o f six years from the Relations. Such report may include the date o f mediation and shall be destroyed thereafter senior administrator's conclusions as to 4. Formal Administrative Action whether sexual harassment has occurred. 4.1 The complainant or the respondent may proceed Copies of that report w i l l be provided to to formal administrative action in the following the complainant and the respondent. circumstances, and within the time limits indi- W i t h i n ten working days o f receipt o f the cated, by notifying the A d v i s o r in writing: report o f the senior administrator the Director o f Employee Relations w i l l a) i f the respondent or the complainant does not submit a recommendation to the President. agree to participate i n informal mediation, Such recommendation may range from within ten working days o f the rejection of complete exoneration o f the respondent to mediation; disciplinary action in accordance with established policies and procedures and b) i f informal mediation does not resolve the dispute, within ten working days o f completion may include proposals for remedial or of the mediation process. preventive action. General Information — College Policies 61 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 5. Within 20 working days of receipt of the recommendation of the Director of Employee Relations the President will make a decision and shall advise the parties in writing with copies to the Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor and senior administrator involved. In cases where a senior administrator is accused of sexual harassment the President will act as the appropriate senior administrator as contemplated in 4.2.1. Reasonable efforts will be made to protect the complainant from any subsequent harassment, discrimination, or reprisal which might arise as a result of the complaint. Records 5.1 The Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor shall maintain his/her records, including the President's final decision, under this procedure in the strictest confidence. 6. Other Policies and Agreements 1. Amendments 7.1 No changes will be made to the Sexual Harassment Policy and Procedures without consultation with the appropriate faculty, staff, administrative and student organizations. Definitions 1. I Cheating is an act of deceit, fraud, distortion of the truth, or improper use of another person's effort to obtain an academic advantage. 1.2 Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's or source's words and/or ideas as if they were one's own. It ranges from an entire assignment which is not the student's own work to specific passages within an assignment taken from a source without acknowledgement. 2. Responsibility for Knowledge of Proper Academic Practice 2.1 Students are responsible for ensuring that they understand and follow the principles of proper documentation and scholarship. If in doubt about these matters, students should consult their instructor, the Writing Centre or the Library. 3. 6.1 The application of the Sexual Harassment Policy and Procedures may be modified in specific instances, as is reasonably necessary, by the terms of existing College employment policies and collective agreements. 7. CHEATING AND PLAGIARISM POLICY Responsibility for Development and Administration of Policy 3.1 Departments or divisions may develop their own sanction forfirstcases of cheating and plagiarism or may refer students to college policy (See this Policy 5.1,5.2). Departments or divisions must inform students of the applicable sanctions. 3.1.1 Departmental or division policies on cheating and plagiarism will be reviewed by the Education Council. 3.2 Second incidents of cheating or plagiarism, or first incidents deemed by a department/instructor to be particularly serious, will be dealt with according to the College policy. 4. Informing Students 4.1 Students will be provided with a copy of the College Policy on Cheating and Plagiarism. 4.2 All course outlines must provide students with a clear definition of cheating and plagiarism and a statement of sanctions for cheating and plagiarism which the department/instructor may apply. 5. Procedure 5.1 Before assigning a grade to an assignment which is suspected as resulting from cheating or plagiarism, and instructor may require the student to take an oral examination on the content of the assignment. General 62 Information — College Policies 5.2 If an instructor or department determines that a 5.6.5 ate exclusion o f a student from all classes may impose a sanction ranging from a failing and college services. In future, the student grade for the assignment to a failing grade for the w i l l not be permitted to re-enrol in any course. 5.3 course or program or take advantage of any college-sponsored activity or service. If it is determined that cheating or plagiarism has The terms of this measure w i l l be pro- taken place, the instructor w i l l inform the student vided to the student in a written communi- in writing o f the reasons for applying sanctions cation. and w i l l indicate that the Dean responsible for Student Services w i l l be informed o f the instruc- 5.7 tor's decision. 5.4 or for a second or subsequent incident, the student A record o f all cheating or plagiarism cases, with involved w i l l be interviewed by the Dean before a decision is made. office of the Dean responsible for Student Services for five years. 5.8 Dean may invoke sanctions 5.6.1 through 5.6.4 or review the case of all students who are reported to may recommend that the President invoke sanc- have cheated or plagiarized on a second or tion 5.6.5. subsequent occasion or i n first incidents deemed serious. 5.6 impose or recommend imposition o f the following sanctions, singly or in combination, for a first incident deemed to be particularly serious or for a second or subsequent incident: Notice o f the incident(s) placed in the student's file. The length o f time such a record is to be maintained in the file w i l l be specified. 5.6.2 5.9 Appeals o f the Dean's decision to impose sanctions 5.6.1 through 5.6.4 for cheating or plagia- The Dean responsible for Student Services may 5.6.1 For a first incident deemed to be particularly serious or for a second or subsequent incident, the The Dean responsible for Student Services w i l l by a department/instructor to be particularly W h e n the Dean proposes to invoke a sanction for a first incident deemed to be particularly serious appropriate documentation, w i l l be kept in the 5.5 Suspension from the College — Immedi- student has cheated or plagiarized, the instructor Probation — Conditional permission for a rism must be made in writing to the College A c a d e m i c Vice-President within ten working days after the imposition o f the sanction. 5.10 Appeals o f the President's sanction 5.6.5 must be made by written appeal the College's Board within ten working days after the imposition o f the sanction. 5.11 Appeals made under 5.9 or 5.10 may include the imposition o f a sanction and/or the extent o f a sanction. student to enrol or re-enrol in a course or courses. The terms of this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 5.6.3 E x p u l s i o n — Immediate exclusion o f a student from one or more courses. The terms o f this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. 5.6.4 Refusal to enrol or re-enrol — Refusal o f the College to enrol or re-enrol a student in a course, courses or program. The terms of this measure w i l l be provided to the student in a written communication. General Information — College Policies 63 COPYRIGHT POLICY 5. The library will accept copies of periodical articles, excerpts from books, or sound cassettes for the reserve collection, but will immediately request permission from the copyright holder to do so. If refused, the article will be removed and returned to its requestor. Where available, publishers' reprints will be purchased. 6. The library will not record off-air any program for which permission to do so has not been obtained. Faculty may not use in a classroom setting video or audio programs taped off-air at home or rented from a home-use video outlet. 7. All material to be included in an audio-visual production will be free of copyright restriction or permission will be secured. This includes the use of print, graphic and audio material as well as the recording of a performance of a work covered by copyright. 8. Employees shall not use unlawfully duplicated computer programs for instructional or administrative purposes. Terms 1. Capilano College will seek to ensure that its employees are aware of the terms of the Canadian Copyright Act and will take all reasonable steps to ensure that its employees do not violate the law. 2 Printed matter, computer software, television programs, or any other copyrighted or patented material for which the rights are not owned by the College or a College employee or for which the rights are not in the public domain shall not be reproduced without the written permission of the owner of those rights unless the use falls into the "fair dealing" category of the Canadian Copyright Act. It is understood that the reproduction of all or a substantial portion of any copy righted work is not permissable under the "fair dealing" clause even for private study, research, criticism, review, or educational purposes. 3. College equipment, services, or other resources shall not be used to support infringement of copyright. Procedures 1. Employees wishing to reproduce copyrighted materials shall be responsible for obtaining, in writing, permission to do so. 2. Upon request the library will undertake to negotiate copyright clearance on behalf of departments for materials to be used in the classroom. Costs associated with the clearance and a service fee of $20.00 per request will be charged back to the requesting department. 3. A 'Request for Copyright Waiver" form shall be submitted to the library for each such request. Upon completion of the services the library will notify the requestor of the results and a "Requisition for Library Services" form itemizing costs will be sent to the department's coordinator for authorization of funds transfer from the requesting department to the library. 4. The authorizing signature for materials to be printed or duplicated by the College's Print Shop will certify that the material is free from any copyright infringement. Permission notices will be included where applicable. General Information — College Policies MISUSE OF COMPUTER SYSTEM POLICY The misuse of a computer system (such as unauthorized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized use of system software) is not only unfair to other students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, in suspension of the offender's computer access in a course, which may result in an "F" grade. Repeated offences may result in a permanent revoking of all computer privileges. Governance and Administration CAPILANO COLLEGE BOARD Two-Year Terms, Faculty The Board of the College, established in conformity Two with the College and Institute A c t , consists o f 20 D a v i d A . Jones members, including 12 appointed by the Minister o f Frank Harris vacancies Advanced Education Training and Technology, four Pat Hodgson elected from the College community, one ex-officio Paul M i e r (Chair) member drawn from the administrative group, one ex- Ruth Scheuing officio member drawn from the exempt group, the Cam president o f Capilano College, and the chair o f the D o u g Tait College's Education C o u n c i l . These members serve as Yolande Westwell-Roper Sylvester trustees of the College. The Board is responsible for governing the College, and in that capacity determines the policy by w h i c h the College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the Board meets monthly to fulfil its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. One-Year Term, Students One vacancy D a w n Greer Geoffrey Rosen Ben Williams Two-Year Terms, Support Staff A n i t a Roach Bob W a l k e r N a o m i Yamamoto, Chair Donnaleen M i l l e r , V i c e - C h a i r Richard B a n d Diane Blaney Education Administrators James C o o k e Jim C o o k e L i n d a Denley B i l l Gibson Shari Graydon Itidal Sadek Dal Hothi John Waters Barbara H o w a r d W . G o r d o n Lancaster Ex-Officio Members Greg Lee Richard Band Paul M i e r Karina Garcia Frances Moorcroft Wayne Henry Alexandra N i b l o c k Greg Lee Jennifer Nordstrom Geoffrey Rosen Ernie Tjensvold CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION Tarn Tran The Capilano College Foundation was formed in 1970 Sam W e l l e r to build community support for Capilano College. A s a Ben Williams volunteer community organization established under the Societies A c t , the Foundation raises and administers funds to assist students and enhance the develop- EDUCATION COUNCIL ment o f a well-balanced learning environment. Education C o u n c i l , established in conformity with the For information, or to make a tax-deductible contribu- College and Institute A c t , is the advisory body to the tion, contact: Capilano College Foundation, Capilano College Board on major institution-wide issues and College, 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . educational policy. V o t i n g members on Education V 7 J 3 H 5 . Telephone: (604) 984-4983; Fax: (604) C o u n c i l include 10 faculty members (elected by 990-7880; E - m a i l : fdn@capcollege.bc.ca. faculty), four students (elected by students), two support staff (elected by support staff), and four education administrators appointed by the C o l l e g e president. General Information — Governance and Administration ADMINISTRATION President Financial Services Greg F. Lee, B.Sc., M . S c , P h . D . Mark Vernon, B A , C A C h i e f Financial Officer and Bursar Vice-President, Academic Affairs Alan Ng, B . S c , C G A W i l l i a m Gibson, B A , P h . D . , D i p . E d Comptroller Dean of Arts Greg Gates, M C S D , C M A John Waters, B A (Hons.), M A . Manager, Financial ReportingAVorkload Systems Dean of Business, Human Services, and International Education Carole Selig, C A John Potts, B A , M P A Manager, Project Accounting Dean of College/Community Partnerships Human Resources Stephanie Forsyth, B A , M . E d . Valerie Cochran, L L . B . Executive Director Dean of Science and Media Technology C i n d y Rogers Carol McCandless, B A , M A Manager Dean of Student Services and Foundation Programs International Projects James E . Cooke, B A , M A G a i l Keary, B A , M A Director International Student Centre Athletics and Recreation Gary Henkelmann, B . E d . Joseph Iacobellis, B P E , M P E Manager Manager Planning and Institutional Research College Foundation A l a n P . D . Smith, B A , M A Lana Robinson, B A Director, Development Executive Director Registrar's Office Executive Director, Capilano College Foundation Itidal Sadek, B . A r c h . , B . S c . Computer Services Registrar Steve Gallagher, B A Barb Robertson, B . E d . Associate Registrar Director TBA Manager Supply and Services Continuing Education D a v i d Brewer, R C P P Director L y n n Jest, M . E d . Director Facilities Ian Robertson Director, Buildings and Grounds General 66 Information — Governance and Administration Preparatory Programs Many students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial Level (Grade 12 equivalent standing Diploma). Students who have been out of school for a number of years and want to resume their education often find that the Adult Basic Education program best meets their needs. Most courses in the program are self-paced and may be taken on a part-time basis. Full-time students attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside of class. The level of courses in the Adult Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (Grade 12) level. Many of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part of a larger program of studies, will meet entry requirements for University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. The pre-college level courses which are offered by a number of departments at the College are designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs. Many of these courses are taught in two-hour classes that meet twice a week for an academic term (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is required outside of the formal instruction period. There are also some flexible self-study courses available in Math. Either the Adult Basic Education program or the preparatory courses offered in the University Transfer departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should refer to the Adult Basic Education section of the Calendar or contact the program coordinator. For information on other preparatory courses consult the Advising Centre at 984-4990 (Birch Room 238). PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES For students who do not have some of the course prerequisites for University Transfer or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible selfstudy courses. Courses C H E M 030 — E N G L 010 — M A T H 009— M A T H 091 — M A T H 096 — Introduction to Chemistry Language Skills Arithmetic Introductory Algebra Intermediate Algebra with Functions CAREER ACCESS CENTRE Instructional Faculty M . A C I M O V I C , B A (Belgrade), T E S L Cert. (George Brown College), M.Ed. (OISE/UT) J. B E N N E T T , B A (SFU) (Sechelt) J. B R O O K S , B A (SFU) M . FEIST (Squamish) C. H O P P E N R A T H , B A , M.Ed. (UBC) C. JUNG, B A , T E S L Cert., M A (UBC) S. M U R R A Y , B.Ed. (TESL), M A (Applied Linguistics) (Concordia) J. M A C D O N A L D , E C E Diploma J. ROSE, B A (Western), B.C. Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) D. TWISS, B A , B.Ed., M A D. VOLLBRECHT, BA (Regina), Prof. B.C. Teacher's Cert. (UBC) S. W A L L S T E R , M.Ed. (Montana) General Information The Career Access Centre is a learning and resource centre for students on B C Benefits. Its purpose is to help B C Benefits recipients access college services and receive support during their time on campus. The program provides continuous intake tutoring and support for both full and part-time learners to begin their upgrading in a self-paced setting with English, math, computer, transition planning, and student success strategies. For those students who are parents of young children, the Family Focus program is available. Through the C A C students can bridge into Preparatory Programs 69 the program o f their choice as efficiently as possible and receive continued support as they move through their college program. ADULT BASIC EDUCATION Offerings and procedures at the Sechelt campus and Squamish campus are slightly different. Contact the local ABE coordinator. Please note: The Sechelt and Squamish campuses offer programs tailored to their particular needs. F o r information, contact the campus directly and ask for the I B T Project Manager. Instructional Faculty D . J . A T H A I D E , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Contact: B . C . Teacher's Cert. North Vancouver Campus: 983-7573 A . B E H M A R D , B . S c . (Hons.) U B C Sechelt Campus: 885-9310 ( T o l l Free: 987-1535) A . B E L S H A W , B . S c , U B C , M A (Princeton) Squamish Campus: 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) D. B E N T L E Y T.R. B R A N D , B.Sc.(SFU), B.Ed.(UBC), B . C . Teacher's Cert. Registration M . C . C A I R N S , B . S c . (Math) (Calgary), A l t a . Teach. Students are referred to the Project Manager before Cert. registration to establish an educational plan and D. C A P O N confirm eligibility for the program. F o r more D . D H A M M I , B . S c . (Hons.) Chemistry & Energy information, contact 983-7573. Studies ( U . o f Brighton), Cert. Teacher Training, England. COLLEGE SUCCESS STRATEGIES CREDIT COURSES B . D R U R Y , B . S c . (Brock) J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (University o f Queensland) V . G I E S B R E C H T , B A (Western Washington U . ) , Instructional Faculty R . D ' H O L L A N D E R , B . C . Teacher's Cert., B . E d . , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , C A S (Harvard) D . F R A N K E L , B A (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) Y . M c C O L L , B A (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) E . M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B A (Univ. o f Winnipeg), M A M . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. H I N D , B A (1st Class Hons.) ( S F U ) , M A ( U B C ) P. H O D G S O N , B A (Hons.), B . E d . (Queen's) M . E d . (UBC) L . J E N S E N , B . S c , B . E d . (Calgary), B . C . Teaching Certificate C. B. M A C L E A N , B.Ed. (SFU), M . E d . (UBC), B . C . (UBC) S. M I T C H E L L , B . S c . E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A , ( U V i c ) S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . (TESL)(Concordia), M A ( A p p l i e d Linguistics) (Concordia) A . P A R R Y , B A (York) K . P E A R D O N , B A ( U n i v . o f Regina), M . E d . ( U B C ) S. S O H I , M A ( U B C ) S. W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) Teacher's Cert. G . N E W M A N , B A (Hons.), Post-graduate Certificate of Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. P A S S , B A ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. J. R I T C H I E , B A , M A , A d u l t Education (St. F . X . ) J. R O S E , B A (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . (UBC) General Information College Success Strategies courses are intended for students who wish to increase their learning efficiency and develop attitudes and skills that w i l l help them to be successful students. G . B . R U D O L P H , B . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) C . S C H O E N , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , B A (Carleton) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B A , M.Sc. (UBC), B . C . Teacher's Cert. S. T R U D E L , B . S c . (Hons.), M . E d . ( U . o f Ottawa) R . W E D E L , B A ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. Courses D . E . Y O U N G , B A ( S F U ) , S R N . (London), S C M . C S S . 092 — Success Strategies for the College Classroom C S S . 100 — C S S F 105 CSSF110 — — A c a d e m i c and Personal Success Strategies Reading and Study Skills Reading Dynamics (Scotland), D i p . T . N . (London), M F A . ( U B C ) General Information The A d u l t Basic Education ( A B E ) program enables you to upgrade your knowledge o f English, mathematics, biology, chemistry, earth sciences, physics, geography, history, social studies and computers. Y o u Preparatory 70 Programs Contact: sdrzazgo @ capcollege. be. ca North Vancouver Campus: 983-7578 Sechelt Campus: 885-9310 (Toll Free: 987-1535) Squamish Campus: 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) may select from one to five subjects, depending upon your educational and occupational goals. Y o u can pursue any of the following goals: • preparation for employment • personal desire to upgrade or refresh mastery o f a subject • Admission Requirements secondary school qualifications demanded by employers Students should be at least 18 years old and preferably • vocational training (including apprenticeships) • career training • technical training • academic studies (including college and university out o f the public school system for a m i n i m u m o f one year. Exceptions w i l l only be made with departmental approval. Students should apply at least three months prior to anticipated date o f entry. programs) The program operates year-round, offering instruction in two-hour classes. B o t h self-paced and term-paced Registration Students are interviewed before registration in order to classes are offered. Placement i n courses is based on determine the course(s) or program which best meets pre-registration assessment of academic background. their educational goals. Regular attendance and M a n y students benefit by enrolling in A B E courses satisfactory progress are conditions for re-registration while registered in university transfer or career/ in A B E courses. Students may be directed to other vocational programs at the College. programs i f their attendance and performance i n A B E Students who need more than four months to complete does not match their stated educational goals. a course may re-register i f they are attending and progress is satisfactory. Students who finish a course ABE Certificates & Diploma before the end o f the term may immediately register for The A B E program offers courses at four levels as outlined in the table: the next higher course in the given subject. H i g h enrolment may necessitate limiting students to a The B.C. Adult Dogwood Graduation Diploma, m a x i m u m o f three classes in a subject area. issued by the Ministry of Education, Skills and TrainClass times are as follows: ing, provides an alternate route for adults to achieve a M o r n i n g classes: 8:30 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. Grade 12 standing to post-secondary institutions i n B . C . Afternoon classes: M o n d a y and Wednesday—12:30 p.m. and 2:30 p.m., Tuesday, and Thursday-2:30 p.m., Intermediate & Advanced Certificates are issued by Capilano College and provide prerequisites for career F r i d a y - 1 : 3 0 p.m. and vocational programs throughout the province. Evening classes: 7 p.m. Fundamental level instruction provides basic reading and writing skills and number skills. Courses Fundamental Intermediate Advanced Provincial Level BENG 021* 031* 040 or 0 4 1 * 042* BSCI 021 021* 032* 041 or 045* 046 041 041 042 BMTH BCHM 031* BESC BPHY — *Choose 2 041 BBIO 042 041 or 042 042 BGEO 042 BHST 042 BSOC 031* 041 BCMP 031 041 *Choose 3 or any 2 PLUS an advanced Social Science course. _ 042 o r 0 4 3 _ * Required for Certificate or D i p l o m a A d v a n c e d math is a prerequisite for B . C . A d u l t D o g w o o d Graduation D i p l o m a For further details please arrange an assessment/interview by phoning 984-4971. Preparatory Programs 71 A B E certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as transfer credit toward A B E certificates and the Provin- ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING cial D i p l o m a . The program also offers instruction for students preparing for the General Education Development (Grade 12 equivalency) tests. Foundations Program Instructional Faculty Terry B Y R N E S , M A ( U . V i c . ) Advanced and Provincial level A B E courses may also Ron be used for transfer credit towards a B . C . A d u l t Senior Jann G I B B S , R S W . Secondary School Graduation Certificate. Priscilla S T A N B U R Y , B A ( U B C ) , Cert, o f E d . Courses Laverne T H O M P S O N , M . E d . (Lesley College) DAMON (London) R S A Literacy Cert. (London) ENGLISH BENG Oil — Basic Literacy L e v e l English B E N G 021 — Fundamental L e v e l English: Essential W r i t i n g Skills, Spelling and W o r d Attack Intermediate L e v e l English: Mechanics, Basic Skills and ParagraphWriting A d v a n c e d L e v e l English: Short Report Writing A d v a n c e d English: A d v a n c e d Report Writing Provincial L e v e l English: Critical Reading and Essay W r i t i n g B E N G 031 — B E N G 040 — B E N G 041 — B E N G 042 — General Information The Alternative Career Training Foundations program is an employment exploration program with a unique focus and approach. The program is based on a developmental perspective and is committed to w o r k i n g with young adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities o f independent l i v i n g as young adults, as w e l l as the demands o f competitive entry-level employment, and w i l l be able to address social or emotional issues which could act as barriers to employment. The A C T program combines in-class instruction with practical work experience, SOCIAL STUDIES B S O C 031 — B S O C 041 — B G E O 042 — BHST042 — COMPUTER B C M P 031 — B C M P 041 — B C M P 042 — B C M P 043 — Intermediate L e v e l Social Studies A d v a n c e d L e v e l Social Studies Provincial L e v e l Geography Provincial L e v e l History STUDIES Intermediate L e v e l Computer Studies A d v a n c e d L e v e l Computer Studies Provincial L e v e l Computer Science Provincial L e v e l Computer Studies B M T H 046 — Fundamental L e v e l Mathematics Intermediate L e v e l Mathematics A d v a n c e d L e v e l M a t h - Algebra & Trigonometry Provincial Level M a t h - A l g e b r a & Trigonometry B P H Y 041 — B P H Y 042 — Preparatory 72 meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan that best fits their needs. Personal goals w i l l be set and monitored throughout the year. Contact: Tern' Byrnes, Coordinator 984-1711 Student Profile Students who w i l l find the A C T program beneficial are individuals who have physical disabilities that still allow them to meet employment requirements. In addition, they may present any or all o f the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) SCIENCES B S C I 021 — B S C I 032 — B B I O 041 — B B I O 042 — B C H M 041 — B C H M 042 — B E S C 041 — which may be used in employment situations. Students learning or developmentally delayed, as well as MATHEMATICS B M T H 021 — B M T H 031 — B M T H 045 — emphasizing the development or maintenance o f skills Fundamental L e v e l General Science Intermediate L e v e l General Science Advanced Level Biology Provincial L e v e l B i o l o g y A d v a n c e d L e v e l Chemistry Provincial L e v e l Chemistry A d v a n c e d L e v e l Earth and E n v i r o n mental Sciences A d v a n c e d L e v e l Physics Provincial L e v e l Physics Programs b) persons with a disability. Students who w i l l obtain the most benefit from the A C T program are those who have reached a moderate level of independence (i.e. they are responsible for selfcare; they travel independently locally; they have had some work or volunteer experience; they can articulate several areas o f interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Admission Requirements The A C T Foundations program is in session for eight months (two terms). Classes are offered for nine weeks, with community work/volunteer practicums offered for an additional six weeks in the fall term. During the spring term, classes w i l l be held for six weeks with an additional nine weeks o f work/volunteer practicums. Entry is by referral and interview. Students may combine their in-class work with self-selected volunteer or employment training sites based upon aptitude, attitude, ability and interest. C. H O P P E N R A T H , B A , M.Ed. (UBC) W . H U G H E S , B I S (Waterloo), M F A . ( U B C ) , T E S L Cert. ( V C C ) D . J O H N S T O N E , B A , M A , T E S L (American U n i v e r sity in Cairo) C . J U N G , B A , T E S L Cert., M A ( U B C ) L . P O L L A R D , B A , M A ( U T ) , T E S L Cert. (George B r o w n College) M . R E A G H , B A (Dalhousie U . — K i n g ' s College), M A T E S O L . (SIT Vermont), Vermont Professional Teaching Certificate J. R I T C H I E , B A , M A A d u l t Education (St.F.X.) Each candidate is interviewed by the program faculty, A . S E D K Y , B A , M A , P h . D . ( A i n Shams University) and a m a x i m u m o f 13 students w i l l be admitted. Some H . S L O A T , B A (Queen's), T E S L Cert. ( U V i c ) , M A — students may elect to take the program part-time, and T E S L (Concordia) students may be accepted for a second year by faculty A. SOUZA, BA, M A (UBC) permission. E . W I T K O W S K I , M A (Jaqiellonian), B . C . Appointments for interviews take place between January 15 and A p r i l 15, with interviews and letters to the successful candidates sent by M a y 30. — A C T P 002 — A C T P 005 — A C T P 006 A C T P 007 A C T P 008 A C T P 009 B C / A l b e r t a Professional Teaching Cert. English as a Second Language ( E S L ) courses offer Courses A C T P 001 Professional Teaching Cert. L . Z H A N G , B A , M A , (Nanjing), M . E d . ( U . of Alta.), — — — — landed immigrants and international students a variety Job Search and Maintenance Techniques Occupational Preparation and Safety in the Workplace V i s u a l and Print Communication Skills Leisure Education Consumer Preparation Interpersonal Communications W o r k Experience ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE Instructional Faculty M . A C I M O V I C , B A (Belgrade), T E S L Cert. (George B r o w n College), M . E d . ( O I S E / U T ) J. A C O S T A , B A ( U C , Berkeley), E . S . L . Cert. (San Francisco State U . ) , Ontario Professional Teaching Certificate D . B O U V I E R , B A (London School o f Economics), of Intermediate, Advanced and College Preparatory English courses to help them improve their competency in E n g l i s h for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, grammar, speaking and listening skills. E S L courses are offered part-time and full-time. Contact: 984-4971 Fax: 984-1718 Admission Procedures/Requirements Application Application for A d m i s s i o n forms are available from the Registrar's Office. Applications and supporting official transcripts and documents should be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, by the following dates: F a l l Term (Sept. to D e c ) : July 1 Spring T e r m (Jan. to A p r . ) : October 1 Summer Term ( M a y to A u g . ) : February 1 Address all applications to: P G C E Postgraduate Certificate in Education ( L o n - Registrar's Office don University), M A ( U C S D ) , B . C . Professional Capilano College Teaching Certificate 2055 Purcell W a y E . C H A N G , B A (Calgary), M . E d . ( U B C ) North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada N . J . C O L L I N S , B A (London), M A , Professional Telephone: (604) 984-4900 Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) Fax (604) 984-1798 J. F A R N A N , B A (Hons.) E n g l i s h ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( B . C . Professional Teaching Cert. ( S F U ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) S. H A L S A L L , B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( M c G i l l ) Preparatory Programs 73 Documents and Official Transcripts Courses Offered — Intensive Program Official records (grade reports, transcripts, etc.) o f all These full-time courses are mainly intended for secondary, post-secondary or equivalent education International students. Other students w i l l be allowed must be submitted with the application, whether or not to register i f space is available. the course o f study has been completed. These records Upper Beginners ESLF020 (15 credits) should indicate the individual courses studied and the L o w e r Intermediate ESLF030 (15 credits) marks or grades received. If your records are i n a Upper Intermediate ESLF040 (15 credits) language other than English, please provide certified Lower Advanced ESLF050 (15 credits) English translations and the original documents. Upper A d v a n c e d ESLF060 (15 credits) Replaceable documents submitted i n support o f your application become the property o f the College and w i l l not be returned. Other documents w i l l be returned, upon request. ' These are full-time intensive E S L courses w h i c h cover all skills: speaking, listening, pronunciation, grammar, writing, reading and vocabulary building. Students attend class 20 hours a week. If any document is i n a name different to that under which application is made, proof o f change o f name Courses Offered -- Regular Program Speaking & Reading & Writing & Listening Vocabulary Grammar Lower Intermediate Upper Intermediate ESL. 031 ESL. 041 E S L . 038 ESL. 048 E S L 039 E S L 049 Lower Advanced Upper Advanced ESL. 051 ESL. 061 ESL. 058 E S L . 068 E S L 059 E S L 069 ESL. 071 College Prep Level I College Prep Level II ESL. 081 College Prep Level III — E S L . 078 E S L . 088 E S L . 098 E S L 079 E S L 089 E S L 099 (marriage certificate, court order, etc.) is required. Application Fee Canadian citizens or permanent residents: A nonrefundable fee of $20 and a $25 document evaluation fee must accompany your Application for A d m i s s i o n . International students: A non-refundable fee of $100 (Canadian funds) must accompany your Application for Admission. TOEFL Admission Once all documents and records have been received, *ESL.066 *ESL.076 — — T O E F L Preparation I T O E F L Preparation II we w i l l consider your application. If you are admitted, the College w i l l send you an official letter of * These courses are funded solely by tuition fees and admittance by mail. w i l l only be offered i f there are enough students. English Language Requirements Canadian Citizens and Landed Immigrants Once students are accepted, they w i l l be contacted by the E S L Department to come in and write the E S L placement test. Students who wish to enrol in E S L as For detailed information about each course, see Course Descriptions in the last section o f this Calendar. FIRST NATIONS COLLEGE PREPARATION P R O G R A M well as other courses in University Transfer, Career, Vocational, or A d u l t Basic Education courses should refer to the General Information - A d m i s s i o n section in this Calendar. For the English as a Second Language ( E S L ) program the College requires one of the following: a valid English Language Assessment ( E L A ) test score o f 5 5 - 144 O R • Faculty G . N E W M A N , B A (Hons.) Post-graduate Cert, o f International Students • Instructional D. B E N T L E Y the E S L Department Placement Test. Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's Cert. S. M U R R A Y , B . E d . ( T E S L ) (Concordia), M A ( A p plied Linguistics) (Concordia) S. T R U D E L , B . S c . (Hons.), M . E d . , University o f Ottawa J. R O S E , B A (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . (UBC), Coordinator International students are strongly encouraged to Advising register i n the full-time E S L program described below P. S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations A d v i s o r in order to obtain the utmost benefit from their experience at Capilano College. Preparatory 74 Programs General Information coordinators and College faculty i n predicting success The First Nations College Preparation program has and providing academic supports. been developed at Capilano C o l l e g e ' s North V a n c o u ver campus in cooperation with the First Nations o f the H o w to Apply College's region. A l l students must complete an Application for The objective o f the program is to improve the participation and success rates o f First Nations students who are making the transition to post-secondary institutions. A d m i s s i o n form, available from the Registrar's Office at the North Vancouver campus. F o r application information, contact: The design and content o f the program offers a holistic Judy Rose, Coordinator educational experience that integrates social and Foundation D i v i s i o n , Capilano College educational aspects o f successful college preparation. B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 344 The program helps students to gain confidence at 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 college by developing college life skills while gaining T e l : (604) 983-7578 or 983-7573; Fax: (604) 984-1718 academic qualifications. Applications must be submitted, together with the $20 Contact: Judy Rose, 983-7573; Fax: Coordinator 983-7578 or 984-1718 COURSE CONTENT — Core Program See course descriptions for further information. FALL TERM application fee and official copies o f secondary and/or post-secondary transcripts to: Registrar's Office Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada V 7 J 3H5 C S S F 100 — 3 credits English — 3 credits Three multi-level classes per week i n the A B E ' s Registration Students must participate i n an assessment interview Intermediate (031), A d v a n c e d (041) or Provincial (042) before registration in the program. This interview English. offers an opportunity to plan the program which w i l l Mathematics — 3 credits Three multi-level classes per week in the A B E ' s best meet the student's educational goals. F o l l o w i n g the interview, the Coordinator w i l l contact education coordinators to arrange registration. Fundamental (021), Intermediate (031), Advanced (045) or Provincial (046) Mathematics. Computer Studies — 2 credits T w o classes per week to improve keyboarding skills, gain experience with D O S and learn M S W o r d for W i n d o w s for credit i n A B E ' s A d v a n c e d (041), or Provincial (043) Computer Studies. SPRING TERM Attendance Due to the intense nature o f the program, regular attendance is essential. The Coordinator distributes attendance and progress reports to education coordinators twice each term in order to provide both the students and the funding agents with ongoing feedback. Fees C S S F 110 — 3 credits Fees are paid at the beginning of each term at English — 3 credits registration. Mathematics — 3 credits Computer Studies — 2 credits Admission Requirements Applicants should be at least 18 years o f age, be of First Nations ancestry and have Grade 10 or equivalent. Placement in A B E courses is done through assessment and interview with the Coordinator. A Basic Skills Assessment is also required to assist education Preparatory Programs 75 SPEECH ASSISTED READING A N D WRITING Students registered in the class w i l l have a complete S A R A W computer station installed in their residence. S A R A W can also be installed into a student's existing computer, provided it is a compatible system. This Instructional Faculty J. B E N N E T T , B A ( S F U ) system w i l l be on loan from Capilano College to the students for the length o f their registration in the class. D. B E N T L E Y The S A R A W program uses trained tutors to assist L . F O S S , B A (Carleton), M A Counselling Psych. students with the completion of course work as as- (Adler School o f Professional Psychology) signed by the instructor. A s the type of tutorial assist- D . K I R K B Y , B . E . D . (Winnipeg) ant required by S A R A W learners is unique, the R . W E D E L , B A ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. department reserves the right to appoint specifically General Information class. trained tutors to work with students registered i n the The S A R A W program, offered by the Foundations for Students are encouraged to act i n a mature, independ- Independent L i v i n g Department, offers literacy upgrad- ent manner regarding decision making, transportation ing to students who have physical disabilities, limited and completion o f assignments. Transportation ar- or no speech and rely on the use of l o w technological rangements are the responsibility o f the student. communication devices such as Cannon communica- Contact: Coordinator, 983-7552 tors, Blissymbolic boards etc. Speech Assisted Reading and Writing ( S A R A W ) offers an unprecedented range of opportunities to explore and address the literacy needs o f this unique group of learners. S A R A W classes at Capilano College's North V a n c o u ver campus enable students to upgrade their literacy level using computers with adaptive, voice synthesized technology. Admission Requirements Students interested in enrolling in S A R A W classes must first arrange an interview with the department. They should be able to demonstrate a firm knowledge of the alphabet and the sounds related to each letter. They should also be able to articulate a goal for literacy upgrading. Students w i l l be asked to produce a short Students set goals for each semester which are evalu- writing sample to identify strengths and weaknesses in ated on an ongoing basis. Some examples of goals set reading and writing. by students are: 1. to learn to read personal correspondence independently 2. to improve the reading and understanding o f employment related print material 3. to achieve high school equivalency. These goals are personal i n nature and represent the individual's o w n needs for literacy achievement. The accumulation of individual achievements may lead to formal higher education such as that offered by an Adult Basic Education program. The classes are held over two semesters (fall and spring), offering students self-paced instruction in various time slots. Students must attend a m i n i m u m o f 20 hours per week. Graduates have accomplished this through various combinations of 1. in-lab instruction at the College 2. in-residence instruction 3. in-residence tutorials 4. independent in-residence time 5. independent lab time at the College. Preparatory 76 Programs University Transfer University transfer courses at Capilano College provide Pure and Applied Sciences Division (984-4955): students with a variety o f options. Students can select a B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Computing Science, Engineering, full program o f study equivalent to the first two years Environmental Science (post-baccalaureate program), of university (see note on Course Selection and A d v i s - Geology, Kinesiology, Mathematics and Statistics, ing), and can enrol on a full-time or part-time basis. Physics University transfer courses are o f interest both to students who plan to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level studies. Visual and Performing Arts Division (984-4911): Textile Arts, Studio A r t , Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Jazz Studies, Theatre, Arts and Entertainment Management For those students who need extra help i n basic skills, Capilano College offers preparatory courses and academic support services (see W r i t i n g Centre, the Learning Specialist and the M a t h Learning Centre in the Services section o f this Calendar). Students interested i n special fields o f study such as Canadian Studies, Environmental Science, W o m e n ' s Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative Associate in Arts and Science Degree Capilano College offers Associate Degrees i n Arts and in Science for two years o f university-level study in accordance with the requirements outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates section o f the Calendar. programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). A c a d e m i c instruction at Capilano College is both Diploma in Academic Studies disciplinary and inter-disciplinary and is o f a high Students who have completed the requirements o f any intellectual calibre. The C o l l e g e carefully reviews the four-term College program may receive a D i p l o m a in content and the delivery methods o f its university A c a d e m i c Studies, provided they have fulfilled the transfer courses to ensure that those courses are current conditions as outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas and that they continue to meet university standards. and Certificates section o f the Calendar. Students in university transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside o f class for Transfer every hour o f class time. F u l l information on transfer o f specific courses is All courses require basic literacy in written and spoken available from A d v i s i n g or Counselling, and in the pertinent instructional division. English. That is, students must be able to understand the texts and other written materials, and the instructor's Transfer to other institutions: The Arts and Sciences spoken words, and must be able to write assignments in D i v i s i o n maintains transferability o f its courses with correct English. Students who are not sure their Englishother post-secondary institutions. The C o l l e g e ' s is good enough should talk to the instructor or an advisor representatives meet regularly with those o f other before taking the course. institutions to ensure that C a p i l a n o ' s first and second The College offers a library collection and full media year courses are fully transferable as university and reference services to complement the courses o f courses. study. Transfer from other institutions: There is agreement The Arts and Science D i v i s i o n offers a range o f among all public B . C . colleges to accept each other's courses in various disciplines w h i c h are grouped in credits upon transfer, i f applicable to a program given four divisions as follows: in the admitting college, and given suitable equiva- Humanities Division (984-4957): A r t History, C h i nese, English, French, German, Japanese, Linguistics, lency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credit. Philosophy, Spanish Transfer credits are granted to students on admission humanities @ capcollege.bc.ca for acceptable work done at other institutions; the Social Science Division (984-4953): Anthropology, Commerce, C r i m i n o l o g y , E c o n o m i c s , Geography, History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, W o m e n ' s Studies transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate, diploma, or Associate Degree. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to University Transfer 79 the Registrar's Office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Self-Study Courses In keeping with the C o l l e g e ' s policy for development of alternative instructional modes, the Mathematics and Transfer information accurate to the time o f printing is Statistics Department offers a limited number o f self- to be found in the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano study courses. College Transfer Guide. Students are urged to read this guide when establishing their programs o f study. The B . C . Transfer Guide is available on the Internet at www.bccat.bc.ca/menutg.html. The Capilano College Transfer Guide is available in paper format at the Bookstore at a cost o f $2. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with the aid o f study guides, videotapes and computerassisted instruction, are designed for students who are unable to maintain regular attendance at the North Vancouver, Sechelt or Squamish campuses. They are also available to students who are attending any of these campuses, providing them with a viable alterna- University Transfer Course tive to the usual classroom lecture/tutorial instructional Descriptions format. F u l l descriptions o f all university transfer courses can be found i n the alphabetical listings in the course description section o f this Calendar. Students are urged to carefully read the general discipline information included in each section. Students are responsible for being familiar with the special information needed to select university transfer courses. R e g i s t r a t i o n Priority In some courses with high demand, registration priority w i l l be given to students who have not attempted the course previously at Capilano College. Students who have attempted the course within the last year may not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Course Selection a n d A d v i s i n g Registration procedures for A r t and M u s i c programs A d v i s i n g and Counselling assist students i n selecting are detailed i n the Calendar section for the particular the best program of studies. The final responsibility for program. course selection, however, rests with students. A l l university transfer students are advised to see an Lab/Course Relationship advisor or a counsellor to plan their courses of study. M a n y courses require that students complete a lab and/ English Entrance Requirements or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these Students who wish to enrol in English courses may be required to write a placement test, B E F O R E R E G I S TERING IN A N Y ENGLISH COURSE. components. Students should note that it is necessary See the Registration section of this Calendar for for lab manuals and some field trip costs. to pass both labs and lectures. The cost o f the lab is included i n the tuition fee, except information about the E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . SPECIAL PROGRAMS M a t h Entrance Requirements 1. W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s P r o g r a m Students wanting to enrol in M A T H 091, 096, 101, A W o m e n ' s Studies program, consisting o f a variety o f 105, 107, 108, 116, 124 or 190 must write a placement university transfer credit, college credit and credit-free test i f they do not satisfy the prerequisite requirements courses, has been developed at Capilano College. for these courses. These courses are taught from a perspective and with a Please refer to the Mathematics section of the Calendar methodology developed within Women's Studies. for the direct entry and placement test requirements for In addition to the W o m e n ' s Studies program courses, each o f these courses. there are career and university transfer courses i n other See the Registration section o f this Calendar for disciplines o f special interest to women. information about the M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) . University 80 Transfer 2. W r i t i n g A c r o s s t h e C u r r i c u l u m Sections Course descriptions appear under the appropriate In the fall term, a small number o f E N G L 100 (Compo- A P P L Y T O T H E R E G I S T R A R to have the Specialty sition) sections are paired with a section o f another added to your diploma at the time o f graduation. discipline. course. Students planning to take E N G L 100 (CompoW r i t i n g Across the C u r r i c u l u m sections as identified i n 4. E t h n i c a n d C r o s s - C u l t u r a l R e l a t i o n s Program the course timetable. Instruction i n the two courses w i l l The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program is a sition) should consider enrolling in one o f these be coordinated, with the writing assignments in the two-term, multidisciplinary program. It studies ethnic English course growing out o f the content o f the other relations developed in the context o f the multicultural course. Students w i l l receive the full three credits for and polyethnic nature o f Canadian society. It also both courses, and w i l l benefit from having two o f their explores the cross-cultural interaction among First subjects connected with each other. Nations, the founding E n g l i s h and French Canadian Please consult the English Department for information people, and the various immigrant groups that constitute on the paired sections for Fall 2000. the Canadian "mosaic." These all help to shape the national character and the culture of this country. 3. C a n a d i a n S t u d i e s S p e c i a l t y The program includes the various disciplines involved Students who wish to concentrate their studies on in ethnic studies: history, geography, anthropology, Canadian content courses can choose courses from the sociology, political studies and urban studies, religious list below. A l l courses (except some Labour Studies studies, communications, language and literature. There courses) hold full transfer credit and transfer into the are no special criteria for student selection, although Canadian Studies program at S F U . T o qualify for a students must formally register for the two-term Ethnic Canadian Studies Specialty, complete a College and Cross-Cultural Relations Certificate, which w i l l be diploma with at least 24 credits from the following list. awarded upon completion of the program. Choose these credits from courses i n at least three different departments. O f the 24 credits you choose, at least six must be numbered 200 or above. F o r a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to a General Studies D i p l o m a , an English or Communications course is required. Fall A N T H 204, 208 B I O L 204 T o complete the program, a student needs to earn 30 credits. Specialized courses in ethnic relations and two E n g l i s h courses are required; the rest can be chosen from a variety of electives. A l l the program's courses (except Labour Studies) have transfer credit to the provincial universities where the student can work towards a degree in Ethnic Studies. Simon Fraser University also has recently developed a graduate program in this field. E N G L 202 Capilano C o l l e g e ' s Continuing Education Department F R E N 270 may offer additional courses during the evenings for G E O G 106, 108 people already working i n job-related fields. H I S T 110, 111,205 L S P . 100, 110, 111, 115, 117, 119, 142, 170, 181, 182, 210 P O L . 104 S O C . 200 Spring FIRST TERM REQUIRED: E N G L 100 — C o m p o s i t i o n (or other English course i f approved). A N T H 204 — Ethnic Relations A N T H 205, 206 B I O L 105, 205 ELECTIVES: E N G L 203 P O L . 104, 202, 204 Language: French, German, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese. A N T H 200 — Intermediate Social Anthropology or P S Y C 200 — Social Psychology or G E O G 100 — Human Geography: People, Places, and Cultures G E O G 106 — British C o l u m b i a : A Regional Analysis or S O C . 201 S O C . 200 F R E N 271 G E O G 108 G E O L 111 H I S T 110, 1 1 1 , 2 0 8 , 2 0 9 L S P . 101, 110, 111, 116, 131, 140, 181 — Canadian Society or University Transfer 81 H I S T 111 — Canada since Confederation or P O L . 104 — Canadian Government SECOND TERM Science Students Capilano College Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers a first and second year university transfer program in biology, chemistry, computing science, REQUIRED: E N G L 103 ii. — Studies in Contemporary Literature A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism mathematics & statistics, and physics, and first year university transfer programs i n engineering, geology and kinesiology. In addition, the Pure and A p p l i e d ELECTIVES: Second term of the language course taken i n first term. in the following: pre-Medicine, pre-Veterinary, pre- A N T H 206 — First Nations of British C o l u m b i a Dentistry, Oceanography, Forestry, Agriculture, A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples of North A m e r i c a Pharmacy, H o m e Economics, Rehabilitation M e d i c i n e , G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography and Dental Hygiene. L S P . 119 — C i v i l Rights and the Workplace L S P . 131 — Race and Ethnic Relations G E O G 201 — Urban Studies or S O C . 211 — Sociology o f the T h i r d W o r l d or G E O G 108 — Canada: A Nation o f Regions Sciences D i v i s i o n offers science transfer requirements iii. Engineering Program Capilano College offers a first year university transfer program in engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f study at H I S T 205 — British C o l u m b i a U B C , S F U , or U . V i c . F o r additional information, S O C . 201 — B . C . Society or consult the Engineering program section o f this P O L . 202 — Calendar. 5. Government and Politics o f B . C . Pure a n d A p p l i e d Sciences General Information The following options are available from a wide range of pure and applied sciences. iv. Kinesiology Program Capilano College offers a first year university transfer program in kinesiology designed for students planning to transfer to the Kinesiology Program at S F U for their second year. F o r additional information, consult the A. University Transfer Courses Kinesiology program section o f this Calendar. i. Non-Science Students B. are advised to consider the following courses to fulfil Post-Baccalaureate Diploma Programs Students planning to continue studies at a university i. their science requirement. It should be noted that transfer credit for a number of these courses is limited Asia Pacific M a n a g e m e n t Cooperative Post-Baccalaureate Diploma Program to non-science students. Students should refer to individual discipline areas in this Calendar. B I O L 104, 105, 113 C H E M 101 Refer to the A s i a Pacific Management Co-operative Program i n this Calendar. ii. C O M P 101 Environmental Science Program G E O L 110, 111 Capilano College offers a one-year Post Baccalaureate G E O G 112, 114 D i p l o m a program i n environmental science for stu- M A T H 101, 102, 105, 107, 108, 109 dents who have already completed a degree i n science P H Y S 104 or engineering and who are interested in further Please check the prerequisites given i n the individual practical studies i n environmental fields. F o r additional course descriptions. information, refer to the Environmental Science program in the Post-Graduate section o f this Calendar. Note: BIOL 104 and CHEM 030 or CHEM 101 fulfil biology entrance requirements for the Nursing proiii. Latin American M a n a g e m e n t Program gram at BCIT. Completion of BIOL 104 and BIOL 113 permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences Refer to the Latin A m e r i c a n Management Program at BCIT) to receive creditfor BHSC 105. section in this calendar. University 82 Transfer ANTHROPOLOGY ART HISTORY Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty C . B I L L , B A (Hons.) ( U . V i c . ) , M A (Trent), P h D J. J U N G I C , B A , M A ( U B C ) (Tulane) D . N E A V E , B A (Manchester), M A ( U . V i c . ) G . C R O W T H E R , B . S c . (Hons.) (London), M . P h i l . , Ph.D (Cambridge) P. S I N G E R , B A (George W i l l i a m s ) , M F A (Concordia) General Information K. LIND, B A ,M A (UBC) Art History concerns itself with visual culture both past R. M U C K L E , B A , M A ( S F U ) and present. V i s u a l art is explored and analyzed i n General Information order to understand how it is composed and con- Anthropology is the study o f humankind, offering views on the human condition from evolutionary and comparative perspectives. B y developing an understanding and appreciation o f cultural and biological diversity, courses i n anthropology should be beneficial structed and how it functions as a carrier and producer of meaning within society. A n a l y t i c a l tools that promote the critical decoding o f images, so relevant in today's world, are emphasized in all A r t History courses. to all students. Students w h o have career aspirations as For further anthropologists may find work i n teaching, research, or 984-4957 information or email please contact at humanities® Humanities at capcollege.bc.ca museum studies. They may also work as consultants to governments, corporations, and native groups. University Transfer Credit M a j o r branches o f anthropology include Social Anthro- A l l A r t History courses offered at Capilano College are pology, Archaeology, and Physical Anthropology. transferable to U B C , S F U , and U . V i c . Please check the Students intending to major or minor i n anthropology B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer or archaeology should take Anthropology 121 and one Guide for further information. or both o f Anthropology 123 and 124. Students interested in a Canadian Studies Specialty should consider Anthropology 204, 206, and 208. The Ethnic Courses and Cross-Cultural Relations program requires Anthro- A H I S 100 — The History o f A r t I pology 204 and 205. A H I S 101 — The History o f Art II For further information please at 984-4953 or email at socsci® contact Social Sciences capcollege.be.ca University Transfer Credit A l l Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. A H I S 104 — Introduction to V i s u a l Culture I A H I S 105 — Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II A H I S 106 — Introduction to Pre-Columbian, African and Northwest Coast Art A H I S 107 — Introduction to the A r t of India, Japan and C h i n a A H I S 210 — History o f Modern A r t (19th Century) A H I S 211 — History o f Modern A r t (20th Century) A H I S 220 — Early Renaissance Art in Italy A H I S 221 — Courses H i g h Renaissance and Mannerist A r t in Italy A H I S 231 — History o f Textile A r t I A N T H 121 — Introduction to Social Anthhropology A H I S 232 — History of Textile A r t II A N T H 123 — Introduction to Archaeology A N T H 1 2 4 — H u m a n Origins A N T H 200 — Intermediate Social Anthropology A N T H 202 — Anthropology and the Environment A N T H 204 — Ethnic Relations A N T H 205 — Multiculturalism A N T H 206 — First Nations o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a A N T H 208 — Indigenous Peoples o f North A m e r i c a A N T H 241 — Archaeology Field School A N T H 249 — Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology W M S T 122 — W o m e n in Anthropology University Transfer 83 BIOLOGY determine the specific B i o l o g y and other courses they require. N o t all second year courses are offered each year. Instructional Faculty C . B E R E Z O W S K Y , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (Sask.), P h D (Guelph) R . G . C A M F I E L D , B . S c . (Hons.) (Monash), P h D (UBC) M . D E J O N G - W E S T M A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (UBC) A l l biology courses except B I O L 200, B I O L 201 and B I O L 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips. L a b manuals for those courses requiring them must be purchased. Some courses also have field trips, w h i c h have extra costs associated with them. Some courses may have materials costs associated with them. M . F I T Z - E A R L E , B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c , P h D (Toronto), C o o r d i n a t o r o f B i o l o g y N . A . R I C K E R , B A (Calif.), M . S c , P h D ( U B C ) University Transfer Credit L . K . W A D E , B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC), PhD A l l biology courses transfer to all B . C . universities. (Austral.Nat. U . ) Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians C . B E A T S O N , B . S c . (Waterloo), M . S c . (Western), Laboratory Supervisor University Transfer Program in Biology FIRST YEAR J. C A N N I N G , B . S c , B . C . Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor C . H A R R I S O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U . V i c . ) , Laboratory B I O L 106/107 or 110, and B I O L 111 C H E M 110/111 P H Y S 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 Technician Z . H A S H A M , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Technician M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U . V i c . ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , R . P . English (six credits) B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor C . S A N D E R S O N , B . S c . (Hons.) (Durham), Laboratory SECOND YEAR A complete selection o f second year courses which are Supervisor transferable to all B . C . universities is available. Consult the B i o l o g y Department for the specific requirements General Information Capilano College B i o l o g y Department offers courses to transfer into third year at the university o f your choice. to meet a variety o f educational needs. The B I O L 104/ 105 and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science Courses requirements for Arts students as w e l l as general B I O L 104 — H u m a n B i o l o g y I interest biology courses. B I O L 105 — Environmental B i o l o g y Students planning a major in B i o l o g y or another life B I O L 106 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y I science, such as Botany, C e l l B i o l o g y , Ecology, B I O L 107 — Basic Introductory B i o l o g y II Genetics, Marine B i o l o g y , M i c r o b i o l o g y , Physiology, B I O L 110 — Introductory B i o l o g y I Oceanography or Z o o l o g y , should enrol in B I O L 106/ B I O L 111 — Introductory B i o l o g y II 107 or 110, and B I O L 111. B I O L 113 — Human B i o l o g y II Students lacking a " C + " i n B I O L 12 (or B B I O 042) and/or Chemistry 11 should enrol in B I O L 106/107 rather than B I O L 110. A complete selection o f second year courses is available which meet the credit transfer requirements o f all B . C . universities. Some of these courses may be included in the requirements for pre-professional programs, and for specific life science programs. Students who intend to enter professions such as B I O L 200 — Genetics I B I O L 201 — Genetics II B I O L 204 — E c o l o g y I B I O L 205 — E c o l o g y II B I O L 206 — Ecology of the Western Pacific B I O L 210 — M o r p h o l o g y o f Vascular Plants B I O L 212 — Invertebrate Z o o l o g y B I O L 213 — Vertebrate Zoology B I O L 214 — C e l l B i o l o g y Agriculture, Dentistry, M e d i c i n e and Pharmacy should B I O L 215 — M i c r o b i o l o g y I consult the institutions offering the programs to B I O L 221 — M i c r o b i o l o g y II University 84 Transfer M A T H 200 and 230 CHEMISTRY Instructional Elective Science elective from math or physics Faculty M . E . E V A N S , B . S c . (South Wales), P h D (London, U K ) P . C . L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c . (Auckland), P h D Students planning to pursue a major or honours program in chemistry should consult a faculty member as requirements differ with individual universities. (Calif.) T. C U S A N E L L I , B . S c , P h D ( S F U ) J. L O W E , B . S c , P h D ( S F U ) Courses K . G . T Y E R S , B . S c (Hons.), M . S c . (Western Ontario), C H E M 030 — Introduction to Chemistry Ph. D . ( S F U ) , C o o r d i n a t o r o f C h e m i s t r y , G e o l o g y C H E M 101 — Fundamentals o f Chemistry and Physics C H E M 110 — Bonding and Structure C H E M 111 — Chemical Dynamics and Energetics Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians B . A D D I S O N - J O N E S , B . S c . (Hons.) (Manitoba), C H E M 151 — C h e m i c a l Dynamics and Energetics C H E M 200 — Organic Chemistry I Laboratory Supervisor K . B . H A C K , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor C H E M 201 — Organic Chemistry II B . J . M O I R , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , Laboratory Technician C H E M 204 — Introduction to Physical Chemistry D . F . S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , P h D ( U B C ) , Laboratory C H E M 205 — Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry C H E M 206 — Introduction to Analytical Chemistry Supervisor I. S M I T H , H N C . (Aberdeen), Senior Laboratory Supervisor CHINESE General Information A l l chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost o f the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. Students are required to have and wear Instructional Faculty T. Z . C H O W , B A (Hons.), (Beijing Foreign Studies U.), M A ( S F U ) Y . Q U , B A (Shandong Teachers' U ) , M A (Beijing Foreign Studies U ) , P h D ( U B C ) safety glasses in all laboratory periods. C H E M 030 and C H E M 101 fulfil the entrance chemistry requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . Language Associate F u , Z h i a i , B A (Beijing Language Institute) Y a n g , Joan, B A , (Central U . for Nationalities, Beijing), M A (Oregon State) University Transfer Credit A l l chemistry courses, except 030, carry transfer credit General Information to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Trans- A l l University Transfer courses in Mandarin Chinese fer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for consist weekly o f four hours o f lecture, one hour o f further information. conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on University Transfer Program in Chemistry a drop-in basis (involving approximately 45 minutes). Students with a competence i n the language beyond the FIRST YEAR level of the course in w h i c h they are registered w i l l be C H E M 110/111 required to withdraw. F o r example, native speakers o f P H Y S 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 Mandarin and/or other Chinese dialects and those who M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 have taken Mandarin courses i n high school are not English (six credits) allowed in the first year courses. Students with some Elective (six credits) knowledge of Chinese must consult with an instructor N o t e : CHEM ematics Chemistry possible 110 and 111: students prerequisites instructor prerequisite or corequisites prior who lack should to registration waivers. to math- see a discuss for placement. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid misunderstanding, students are invited to discuss SECOND YEAR these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. C H E M 200/201 and 204 or 205 or 206 Students who are not sure o f their language level must consult an instructor. P H Y S 210/218 and 222 University Transfer 85 d) Four electives: any four university transfer courses; University Transfer Credit • M o s t o f the Chinese courses at Capilano College transfer to U B C , S F U and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Commerce students should N O T take M a t h 101 or 102. Year II U p o n completion o f Y e a r I, students must A P P L Y for admission to the Commerce program by completing a Courses "Commerce Program A p p l i c a t i o n " w h i c h can be C H I N 100 — Beginning Chinese I obtained from the Social Sciences D i v i s i o n . There are C H I N 101 — Beginning Chinese II 36 seats available in Y e a r II and preference is given to C H I N 150 — Spoken Mandarin I* — Spoken Mandarin II* T A K E T H E E N T I R E Y E A R II P R O G R A M with the C H I N 151 students with the best Y e a r I records who want to — Intermediate Chinese I — Intermediate Chinese II intention o f transferring to U B C . Applications to the * For speakers of other Chinese dialects. late spring once the Y e a r I courses are complete and C H I N 200 C H I N 201 Commerce program should be made immediately in grades received. Students who wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. COMMERCE In the fall term students admitted to Y e a r II take: C O M M 290, 292, 293, E C O N 211 and one university Instructional Faculty transfer elective. I.E. S A Y R E , B S , B A (Denver), M A (Boston) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) A fall term Grade Point Average ( G P A ) o f 2.67 with J. W A T E R S , B A (Hons.) M A , P h D ( S F U ) no grade below " C - " must be achieved to continue into J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A the spring term, when four o f the following courses are M . Y A S E R I , B A (Hons.) (Thames), M A (Sask.) taken: C O M M 291, 294, 297, 392, 396 and one university General Information transfer elective. The College offers a two-year transfer package to U B C For further information contact the Commerce C o n - consisting o f Y e a r I and Y e a r II as follows: venor in Social Sciences at 984-4953. Year I Transfer to University of British Columbia Students do not need to apply to the Commerce Department to enter the first year. S i m p l y apply to the University Transfer program through the Registrar's Office and ensure that the following courses are taken: The current policy o f U B C is to automatically admit into Y e a r III all students who complete Capilano C o l l e g e ' s Y e a r II program (in one year) with a G P A in Y e a r II of 3.2 or higher. a) E C O N 111 and 112; b) E N G L 100 followed by O N E o f E N G L 103, 104, Transfer to Simon Fraser University or University of Victoria 105, 106; c) M A T H 108 and 109 • the prerequisite to M A T H 108 is the M a t h Place- Some courses in the U B C transfer package do not ment Test ( M P T ) O R completion in the past year o f transfer to S F U or U . V i c . Students wishing to transfer M a t h 12 with a " B " grade or better, or M A T H 105, to either of these institutions are, therefore, strongly M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " urged to consult an advisor in the A d v i s i n g Centre to grade. • determine an alternative course o f action. Students not ready for M A T H 108 w i l l take M A T H 107, followed by M A T H 108 and 109. Students not ready for M A T H 107 should see an advisor at the • Courses College's A d v i s i n g Centre to plan a preparatory C O M M 290 — Quantitative Methods for Business year. C O M M 291 — Applications o f Statistics in Business C O M M 292 — Principles of Organizational Behaviour C O M M 293 — Financial Accounting C O M M 294 — Managerial Accounting N o t e : MATH 116/117 tuted for MATH oriented University and 126/127 108/109, more toward may be substi- but this combination science than Transfer 86 ) business; is C O M M 297 — Capital Markets and Institutions C O M P 125 — C O M M 392 — Labour Relations C O M P 127 — Principles o f Computer Science C O M M 396 — Introduction to Marketing C O M P 210 — Data Structures and Abstraction C O M P 211 — Computer Design and Architecture I Fundamentals o f Computer Science C O M P 212 — Computer Design and Architecture II COMPUTING SCIENCE Instructional Faculty C O M P 213 — Introduction to Software Engineering DIPLOMA IN COMPUTING SCIENCE J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h D (Waterloo) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons.) (Sheffield), M . S c , P h D (UBC), Coordinator T. D A K I C , B . S c , M . S c . (Zagreb) E. K U T T N E R , B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC) J. M A D A R , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) Capilano College has identified the need to offer formal recognition for the completion o f a certain set of courses in Computing Science. The D i p l o m a in Computing Science provides both part-time and fulltime students an opportunity to obtain an understanding o f the fundamentals o f computers and programming, enabling students to secure many of today's General Information The Computing Science Department offers computing science courses at the first-year and second-year computing career opportunities. Requirements: Completion of 60 credit hours of course work (the final university level. Students enrolled in these courses 30 credits taken at Capilano College) with a m i n i m u m have excellent access to the C o l l e g e ' s computing grade point average of 2.00. Courses must include the facilities. Students planning to major in computing following: science and science students fulfilling computing English: 6 credits science elective requirements normally take C O M P 120 and either 125 or 127 i n their first year. Other students wishing an introduction to computers and E N G L 100 Credits Composition 3.0 E N G L 103 or E N G L 104 or E N G L 105 or E N G L 106 3.0 programming normally take C O M P 101. Computing courses are continuously being updated. Math: 10 credits Please contact the Computing Science Department for M A T H 116/117 Calculus I/Applications of Calculus I current course offerings and transfer status, or see our W e b page at www.capcollege.bc.ca. M A T H 124 3.0/1.0 Discrete Mathematics I 3.0 M A T H 126/127 Calculus II/Applications o f Calculus II University Transfer Credit 3.0/1.0 or Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano M A T H 224 Discrete Mathematics II 3.0 College Transfer G u i d e for further information. Communications: 3 credits Prerequisites The Computing Science Department requires at least a " C - " grade i n a prerequisite before allowing a student C M N S 250 Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g 3.0 Computing Science: 19 credits C O M P 120 Introduction to Computer Science 3.0 C O M P 125 Fundamentals of Computer Science or 3.0 C O M P 127 Principles of Computer Science 3.0 C O M P 210 Data Structures and Abstraction 3.0 C O M P 211 Computer Design and " C - " grade or better. C O M P 212 Computer Design and Courses C O M P 213 Introduction to Software to proceed with a subsequent course. Students should note that while a " C - " is the m i n i m u m required to proceed, a better grade is recommended to ensure the best chance o f success in the subsequent course and a satisfactory G P A for transfer to a university. Students w i l l not be allowed to retake a prerequisite once they have completed a subsequent course with a Architecture I Architecture II C O M P 101 — Computers and their Applications Engineering 3.0 3.0 4.0 C O M P 120 — Introduction to Computer Science University Transfer 87 Notes: • The remaining that transfer credits must be made up of to at least one of the following ties: UBC, SFU, UVic, • Students • or experience to take both COMP 127 may apply credits from towards the towards have completed a subsequent Students to take a the diploma course credits from tion may not accumulate credits courses prerequisite once they with a "C-" better. transferring in Computing Instructional Faculty N . A M O N , B A , (Hons.) (Kent), M A ( S F U ) K . W . M O A K , B A , M P A (U.Vic.) A . J . M O R R I S , B A , (Hons.) (Manchester), M A ( S F U ) , A C I S (U.K.) will not be allowed or 125 and both ECONOMICS Z. F R O M M , B A , M A (SFU) diploma. course for credit grade may waived. COMP Students • electives 250 requirement wanting universi- UNBC. Those with equivalent have the CMNS • courses another more than 22 Science towards institu- transfer the diploma. J.E. S A Y R E , B S , B A (Denver), M A (Boston) M . Y A S E R I , B A (Hons.) (Thames), M A (Sask.) General Information Economics is the social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption o f goods and services. E C O N 100 is an introductory course which raises and explores the kinds o f issues that economists deal with. CRIMINOLOGY Instructional It therefore serves both as a survey course for those students planning to major i n other areas o f the social Faculty sciences and as an introduction to the discipline for C. H A T H A W A Y , B A ( S U N Y ) , M A (Wash U.) those who are undecided about their future plans. Students who plan to major i n Economics must c o m - General Information Criminology is the study of all aspects of crime from an interdisciplinary and integrative approach. The goal of Criminology is to reveal the complexities o f c r i m i nal behaviour and society's reaction to crime. C r i m i nology also offers both theoretical and practical knowledge of the Canadian criminal justice system. For further information please contact Social Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca who plan to major in economics at S F U are also advised to complete their second year economics requirements from E C O N 250, 252, 290 or 291. E C O N 250 and 252 are designed both for students majoring i n Economics and for other second year social science plement their studies, e.g. Political Studies. Students who plan to enter the Commerce program must take E C O N 111 and 112 in their first year. For further information please contact Social Sciences Courses at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca C R I M 101 — Introduction to C r i m i n o l o g y ogy year courses at the College or the universities. Students students who need economic history courses to c o m - C R I M 101 transfers to S F U , U B C , arid U . V i c . N o t e : PHIL plete E C O N 111 and 112 before proceeding to second 140 and 141 transfer courses. to SFU as criminol- University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all Economics courses transfer to the universities. Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses E C O N 100 — Introduction to Economics E C O N 111 — Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c Theory E C O N 112 — Principles of Macroeconomic Theory E C O N 207 — Managerial Economics E C O N 210 — M o n e y and B a n k i n g E C O N 211 — Intermediate M i c r o e c o n o m i c A n a l y s i s E C O N 212 — Intermediate Macroeconomic A n a l y s i s University Transfer 88 E C O N 250 — E c o n o m i c History o f the Pre-Industrial Era E C O N 252 — E c o n o m i c History o f the Industrial E r a E C O N 290 — P u b l i c Policy I E C O N 291 — Public P o l i c y II course in Basic Electronics Engineering to allow for direct entry into semester three o f the Engineering Science common core. Transfer to University of Victoria The Faculty o f Engineering at U . V i c , offers programs ENGINEERING leading to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.Eng.) degree in Electrical, Mechanical and Computer Engineering. Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h D (Waterloo), C o n v e n o r o f E n g i n e e r i n g General Information Capilano College offers a full first-year university The B . E n g . degree consists o f eight academic and six work terms. Students who complete first-year engineering at Capilano College with a grade point average o f at least 2.5 may be eligible for admission to second year at U.Vic. transfer program in Engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f Admission study at U B C , S F U or U . V i c . General Transfer to University of British Columbia ments for the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this The Capilano College first-year Engineering program is engineering program itself by submitting an "Engineer- In addition to satisfying the general admission requireCalendar), students must apply for admission to the modelled after that o f U B C . Students who complete ing Program Application", available from the Regis- first-year Engineering are eligible to be considered for trar's Office or the A d v i s i n g Centre. This form, together admission to second-year Engineering at U B C provided with official transcripts and other pertinent documents, they have obtained an overall grade point average of at should be received by the Registrar's Office before the least 2.5. end o f M a r c h . Students who elect to take the program part-time are Enrolment is limited to 36 students, and students are selected on the basis o f their academic record. Students w h o apply to the engineering program after M a r c h risk having their applications denied due to lack of available spaces. required to have completed all o f the courses in the first year core program to be considered as Engineering Transfer students on transfer to U B C . The Faculty o f A p p l i e d Science at U B C offers programs leading to the Bachelor of A p p l i e d Science Note that students may be required to achieve an ( B A S c . ) degree in the following areas o f engineering: acceptable grade in a diagnostic test before enrolling in C h e m i c a l , C i v i l , Electrical, G e o l o g i c a l , Integrated some courses in the Engineering program (e.g. E N G L Mechanical, Metals and Materials, M i n i n g and M i n e r a l 100, M A T H 116). Please see the individual department Process, and Engineering Physics. Students w i l l sections o f the Calendar for details. normally complete the B A S c . degree with three additional years o f study at U B C , except for Engineering Physics, which requires four additional years. Prospective students are encouraged to take these tests early to avoid delays in acceptance and/or registration. Admission from Secondary School Transfer to Simon Fraser University The School o f Engineering Science at S F U offers fouryear programs leading to a Bachelor of A p p l i e d Science ( B A S c . ) degree in Electronics Engineering, Computer Engineering, Engineering Physics, B i o m e d i c a l E n g i neering and Systems Engineering. Students who complete first-year engineering at Students entering the engineering program directly from secondary school must satisfy the general admission requirements o f the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this Calendar) and have B . C . Grade 12 graduation (or equivalent) with at least a " B " in M a t h 12 and at least a " B " average in Chemistry 12 and Physics 12. H i g h school students are encouraged to graduate with E n g l i s h Capilano College with a grade point average o f at least 12 and Calculus 12 i f they intend to study Engineering. 3.0 may be eligible for admission to second-year Poor performance in English and M a t h hinders a engineering. Eligible students must contact S F U ' s student's ability to complete the program and ultimately School o f Engineering Science to arrange for a summer to obtain employment as an engineer. University Transfer 89 Admission from First Year Science Transfer to University Students may apply for admission to the Engineering U p o n completion o f the first year, students require a G P A Transfer program after completion o f some or all of of at least 2.5 to be eligible for admission into second-year first-year science. A m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transferable engineering at U B C and U . V i c , and a G P A o f at least 3.0 courses is required to be eligible. Exemptions w i l l be for S F U . Since admission to engineering programs is very given from some first-year engineering courses i f the competitive, students should realize that the above m i n i - student achieved a grade o f at least " C " in the equiva- mum G P A values do not guarantee a d m i s s i o n , and that lent science course. In that case, the student would then specific engineering options may require values well i n typically take a m i x o f first-year engineering and excess o f the m i n i m u m . second-year science courses. Admission as Part-Time or M a t u r e Student Students who have been out of school for a number o f Curriculum First Year Core (for direct entry from secondary school) years and those who wish to begin their studies towards Credits an Engineering degree on a part-time basis are encour- FIRST TERM aged to apply. Applicants w i l l be considered on an A P S C 120 Introduction to Engineering 1.0 individual basis. Prospective students who have not A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics 3.0 studied Math, Physics or Chemistry for several years, C H E M 110 B o n d i n g and Structure 3.0 or who lack grade 12 equivalency i n any of these C O M P 120 Introduction to Computer Science 3.0 E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 current mark in grade 12 equivalent M a t h course must M A T H 116 Calculus I 3.0 write the Math Placement Test. M A T H 117 Applications o f Calculus I 1.0 P H Y S 114 Fundamental Physics I subjects, are encouraged to upgrade their background before applying. A l l students who do not have a good Admission in January 3_0 20.0 A limited number of places in the program are avail- Credits able for the spring term. Students must have success- SECOND TERM fully completed M A T H 116/117, C H E M 110 and C H E M 151 C h e m i c a l Dynamics and Energetics 3.0 courses, to be considered for admission. W i t h comple- M A T H 126 Calculus II 3.0 tion of Engineering courses usually offered in the M A T H 152 Linear A l g e b r a & Differential P H Y S 114, with a m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A in transferable first-year Engineering program before the following fall term. 3.0 Equations Fundamental Physics II summer at other colleges, it is possible to complete the 3.0 P H Y S 115 Fundamental Physics III P H Y S 116 Complementary Studies Elective 3.0 3_0 Registration 18.0 Qualified candidates are notified o f their acceptance and continues through the summer until all places i n First Year Core (for students transferring from first-year science) the program are taken. Students have two weeks from Students who have completed first-year science into the program by mail. Acceptance begins i n M a y , the date o f the acceptance letter to reply, submitting a successfully may be exempted from certain Engineer- non-refundable deposit, to ensure a seat in the E n g i - ing courses i f they have achieved a grade o f " C " or neering Transfer program. Students who complete Advanced Placement ( A P ) better i n the equivalent Science courses. A typical course load may be: courses with sufficiently high grades are eligible for advanced credit, and may choose to complete other FIRST TERM electives instead of the A P credit course. Please see the A P S C 120 Introduction to Engineering 1.0 Admissions section o f the Calendar for more details. A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics 3.0 M A T H 200 Linear A l g e b r a 3.0 M A T H 230 Calculus III 3.0 Second Term Registration Students require a G P A o f at least 1.8 in the transferable courses o f the first term o f the Engineering program to remain in the program for the second term. University 90 Transfer Electives Credits 6_0 16.0 SECOND TERM Credits M . QUARTERMAIN, BA, LLB, M A (UBC) C M N S 250 Introduction to Technical W r i t i n g 3.0 J. R E A D , B A , M A ( U B C ) M A T H 231 Calculus I V 3.0 W . G . S C H E R M B R U C K E R , B A (Capetown), M A T H 235 Introduction to Differential 3.0 R.G. SHERRIN, BFA, M F A (UBC) 3.0 G . S T A N L E Y , B A , M A , (San Francisco State U . ) P.Grad.Cert. i n E d . (London), M A , P h D ( U B C ) Equations P H Y S 116 Fundamental Physics III Elective 3J) S. T H E S E N , B A , M A ( S F U ) 15.0 K. W A L L , B A , M A (SFU) A . W E S T C O T T , B A (Alberta), M A (Queens), P h D Notes: 1. The above science transfer the student has obtained equivalent science curriculum maximum courses. assumes exemption Other course that for mixes courses: Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, exemption CHEM 101) 6 3. The electives studies" will consists 110/111; 127; PHYS114/115; COMP University Transfer Credit are possible. 2. Maximum (Toronto) of the MATH COMP all E n g l i s h courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . following 116/117 100 LEVEL and 126/ (EXCEPT credits. usually Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. For first-year English transfer credit to the universities, be (i.e. non-science) "complementary electives. Scholarships students must take two courses of: a) E N G L 100, 103, 104, 105, or 106. For second-year English transfer credit to the universities, English majors should take English 200/201; a l l A number of scholarships administered by the College other second year students can take any two second- are available to Engineering students. There are year level English courses. scholarships for both i n c o m i n g h i g h school students and students entering from first-year Science. These scholarships include tuition waivers, textbooks, calculators, as w e l l as scholarship grants. Please refer to the Financial A i d Department. ENGLISH Instructional Faculty T. A C T O N , B A (Victoria), M A , P h D (Calgary) J. C L I F F O R D , B A , M A ( U B C ) , P h D ( Y o r k ) P.L. C O N N E L L , B A , M A , PhD (UBC) R . C O U P E , B A (Tasmania), P h D ( U B C ) P.L. C O U P E Y , B A (McGill), M A ( U B C ) M . L . F A H L M A N R E I D , B A ( U B C ) , M A (Toronto) G.N . FORST, B A , PhD (UBC) S.R. G I L B E R T , B A ( U . V i c . ) , M A ( U B C ) W . G O E D E , B A (Wisconsin), M A (Edinburgh), P h D English Diagnostic Test (EDT) Those students who wish to enrol in E n g l i s h courses must submit the results o f the Language Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s English Diagnostic Test (EDT). Students with any one o f the following are exempt from this requirement: 1. a final grade o f " A " or higher i n E n g l i s h 12 or English Literature 12, or 2. a final grade o f 4 or higher in an A d v a n c e d Placement course i n English C o m p o s i t i o n or E n g l i s h Literature, or 3. a final grade o f 6 or higher in the International Baccalaureate English A or E n g l i s h B , or 4. a final grade of " A " in B E N G 042, or 5. a final grade of " B - " or higher in an E n g l i s h transfer course from another college or university, or 6. a degree from an English-speaking university. (California) M . H I N D M A R C H , BA, M A (UBC) E D T s are scheduled monthly throughout the year. C. H U R D L E , B A , M A (U.Vic.) During registration periods, E D T s are scheduled almost D . H . J A N T Z E N , B A ( U B C ) , M A (York) daily. The times for these sittings are published i n the R. K N I G H T O N , B A , M A ( S F U ) timetables. Students wishing to write the E D T must H . L E U N G , B A (Oxford), M A (Wisconsin) pay the exam fee in advance at the Cashier's Office K . L E W I S , B A (Queens), M A ( U B C ) , P h D ( U . V i c . ) D . M U N T E A N U , M A (Bucharest), M A ( U B C ) R. N I C K O L I C H U K , B A (Carleton), M A ( U B C ) and bring receipts to the appropriate test sitting. If you need further information, please contact the Humanities D i v i s i o n (984-4957). J. P E N B E R T H Y , B A (Univ. o f Natal), M A , P h D (UBC) University Transfer : 91 English as a Second Language FRENCH See listing i n the Preparatory Programs section. Instructional Writing Centre A l l students registered at the College may come to the W r i t i n g Centre for advice on work i n progress or help Faculty L . C A N T I N O R R - E W I N G , B A (Montreal), M A ( S F U ) L . G A R E A U , B A (Laval), M A ( S F U ) A . S I M P S O N , B.Ed., M A , PhD (UBC) with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofread- Instructional Associates ing service, but aims to help students develop their J. G A C I N A , B A , P D P ( S F U ) writing ability. H . L A C O U R S E , D i p . Court Interpreting ( V C C ) , D i p . The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet Conflict Resolution (Mediation), Justice Institute space, a collection o f reference books, handout sheets (B.C.) and exercises, and computers with word processing, Summary of Programs outlining, and editing programs. The W r i t i n g Centre is located i n F R 4 0 2 . It is staffed by faculty members from the English, E S L , and A B E departments. Open hours are posted. Courses E N G L 010 — Language Skills E N G L 100 — C o m p o s i t i o n E N G L 103 — Studies i n Contemporary Literature E N G L 104 — Fiction E N G L 105 — Poetry LEVEL Beginning French ( 0 - G r a d e 11) COURSES U n i v . Preparatory French (Grade 12) FREN 120/121 1st year U n i v . French FREN 170/171 2nd year U n i v . French FREN 270/271 F R E N 100/101 General Information E N G L 106 — D r a m a A l l courses i n French consist weekly o f four hours o f E N G L 190 — Creative W r i t i n g lecture, one hour of conversation, and assignments in E N G L 191 — Creative W r i t i n g the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving E N G L 200 — E n g l i s h Literature to 1660 approximately 45 minutes). E N G L 201 — E n g l i s h Literature Since 1660 Students with a competence in the language beyond the E N G L 202 — Canadian Literature - Beginnings to Modernism level o f the course i n which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students with an enhanced E N G L 203 — Canadian Literature - M o d e r n i s m and Beyond speaking ability should register i n the appropriate E N G L 205 — M o d e r n A m e r i c a n Literature Students who are not sure of their language level E N G L 208 — Studies in Fiction (The Novel) should contact an instructor. section o f F R E N 170 or 171 or i n F R E N 270 or 271. E N G L 209 — Studies i n Poetry E N G L 210 — Studies in D r a m a University Transfer Credit E N G L 211 — Studies i n Short Fiction E N G L 212 — Traditions in Western Literature E N G L 213 — Readings in W o r l d Literature E N G L 290 — Creative W r i t i n g - Poetry E N G L 291 — Creative W r i t i n g - Fiction A l l French courses are transferable to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. W M S T 104 — W o m e n Writers and Feminist C r i t i c i s m W M S T 106 — Contemporary American W o m e n Writers University 92 Transfer Courses F R E N 100 — Beginning French I F R E N 101 — Beginning French II F R E N 120 — University Preparatory French I F R E N 121 — University Preparatory French II F R E N 170 — First Y e a r University French I F R E N 171 — First Year University French II F R E N 270 — Second Y e a r University French I F R E N 271 — Second Year University French II GEOGRAPHY Instructional Faculty G E O G 205 — A s i a Pacific Geography G E O G 214 — Our Atmospheric Environment G E O G 221 — M a p and Airphoto Interpretation K . E W I N G , B A , M . S c . (Michigan) C. G R A T H A M , B . S c , M.Sc. ( U B C ) C . G R E E N B E R G , B A , M A , ( U . o f Manitoba), P h D (UBC) GEOLOGY Instructional Faculty S. M A C L E O D , B A , M A , P h D ( U B C ) B. M C G I L L I V R A Y , B A , M A (UBC) J. M I K I T A , B A , M A ( S F U ) S. R O S S , B . S c , M . S c ( U B C ) D . J . A . A T H A I D E , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teacher's Cert. A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B A , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teacher's Cert. General Information General Information Geography courses are offered for students who are Geology courses are designed for students planning a interested in pursuing a career in geography as w e l l as university degree program i n the geological sciences or for those students desiring both A r t s and Science i n the arts, humanities or social sciences. G E O L 110 electives, or for those who wish to have a better and 111 are especially appropriate for students i n need understanding of the cultural and physical landscapes. of a laboratory science. They provide an understanding The study of geography opens the doors for men and o f the origin, structure, composition and history o f the women i n a wide variety Of fields including: teaching, earth. urban planning, forestry, resource management, tourism, recreation, economic consulting, mining, fisheries, geographic information systems, meteorology, and map making. The focus o f geography is on the environment in which we live. These courses i n geography w i l l give y o u a whole new perspective on Courses include weekly laboratory investigations and several field trips, both local and distant (overnight). L a b tuition fees are included in the course fee, however students must purchase a lab manual and testing kit, and share some field trip costs. the world. University Transfer Credit For further information please contact Social Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca University Transfer Credit A l l Geology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. A l l Geography courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U . V i c Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Geological Sciences (including G E O P H Y S I C S , G E O C H E M I S T R Y , GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, ENVIRONMENT A L STUDIES A N D OTHER E A R T H SCIENCES) Courses G E O G 100 — Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures FIRST YEAR ONLY G E O G 101 — Environmental Geography: Perception and Change P H Y S 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 C H E M 110/111 M A T H 116/117 a n d 126/127 E N G L (six credits) G E O G 102 — Environmental Geography: G l o b a l Concerns G E O L 110/111 G E O G 106 — British C o l u m b i a : A Regional Analysis G E O G 108 — Canada: A Nation o f Regions Courses G E O G 112 — Introduction to Earth Environments G E O L 110 — Physical G e o l o g y G E O G 114 — Weather and C l i m a t e G E O L 111 — Historical G e o l o g y G E O G 200 — Technology and E c o n o m i c Environments G E O G 201 — Urban Studies G E O G 202 — Urban F i e l d Studies University Transfer 93 The student wishing to major in German fulfils depart- GERMAN ment requirements with U B C G E R M 310, which may be taken in the second year i f the student has first class Instructional Faculty standing in G E R M 200 or third year by permission o f B . H A N K I N , B A ( U B C ) , M A (Wash.), Teach. D i p . the department. (UBC) Instructional Associate Courses R. F R E I B E R G , B . E d . (Gottingen University, Germany) G E R M 100 — Beginning German I G E R M 101 — Beginning German II General Information G E R M 200 — Intermediate German I G E R M 201 — Intermediate German II A l l courses in German consist weekly o f four hours of lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments i n the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving HISTORY approximately 45 minutes). Native speakers o f German are not allowed in first year Instructional courses; those who wish to take a second-year German R. C A M P B E L L , B A (California), M A ( U B C ) , P h D course must consult with a German instructor first. Faculty (SFU) University rules governing such students differ within R. F U H R , B A ( U B C ) , M A ( M c G i l l ) departments, but the Language Department has corre- H . J O N E S , B A (Hons.), M A ( U B C ) spondence dealing with matters relevant to credit M . L E G A T E S , B A (Wash.), M A , M . P h i l . , P h D (Yale) transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any D . S U T H E R L A N D , B A ( U B C ) , M A (Memorial), P h D misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss (SFU) these problems with the department prior to enrolment. Students with a German Abitur are not permitted to General Information Students with a competence i n History teaches an understanding o f the past that helps the language beyond the level o f the course in which people cope with the present and suggests possibilities they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. for the future. Critical thinking and analysis form the Students who are not sure o f their language level core o f this discipline and are essential skills i n a should contact an instructor. rapidly changing society. University Transfer Credit least four History courses at the College. These can be enrol in the courses. Students planning to major in History should have at A l l German courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. A N Y four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling o f courses i n Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major in History at S F U should take six History courses in the first two years. For U B C the requirement is four History courses. Students planning to take honours should S F U : Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate non- pursue further courses in German are reminded o f the English language. present equivalency standards. Transfer and course challenge credit i n German w i l l be given at S F U for Capilano College German courses to a total of 11 For further information please contact Social Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca semester hours. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results o f a placement test or other assessment procedure. University Transfer Credit A l l History courses at Capilano (including W M S T 220) transfer to S F U , U B C , U N B C and U . V i c , and count as U B C : In the case of U B C , present equivalent standards Humanities provide transfer credit on the following basis: check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College credit for the Associate Degree. Please Transfer Guide for further information. Capilano College UBC G E R M 100 and 101 (3 credits each) G E R M 100 (6) G E R M 200 and 201 (3 credits each) G E R M 200 (6) University 94 Transfer Courses Students with competence in the language beyond the H I S T 100 — History o f the Ancient W o r l d level o f the course in which they are registered w i l l be H I S T 102 — Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f H I S T 103 — Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries H I S T 108 — Issues and Themes i n U . S . History: 1607-1877 H I S T 109 — Issues and Themes in U . S . History: 1865 - Present their language level should contact an instructor. Courses JAPN 100- Beginning Japanese I J A P N 101 - Beginning Japanese II H I S T 110 — Canada Before Confederation J A P N 200 - Intermediate Japanese I H I S T 111 — Canada Since Confederation J A P N 201 - Intermediate Japanese II H I S T 205 — British C o l u m b i a H I S T 207 — Europe i n the M i d d l e A g e s and Renaissance H I S T 208 — Canadian-American Relations H I S T 209 — History o f the Native Peoples o f Canada W M S T 220 — W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey KINESIOLOGY Instructional Faculty M . W A L S H , BPE, M P E (UBC), PhD (SFU) General Information The Capilano College Department of Kinesiology JAPANESE offers first-year university courses in kinesiology, designed for students planning on transferring to Simon Instructional Faculty K. MITO, B A , M A (UBC) Fraser University for second year for completion o f a major or a degree in the subject. For more information regarding the Kinesiology Instructional Associates T. B E R W I C K , B A ( K o b e Gaidai) program please contact the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 984-4955. Y . S H I N B O , Associate o f Arts (Obirin) A . T A K E I , B S W , Japan W o m e n ' s U . (Tokyo) General Information A l l courses i n Japanese consist weekly o f four hours o f lecture, one hour of conversation, and assignments in the multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (taking approximately 45 minutes). In order to provide for the most appropriate student placement, students with Japanese 9, 10 or Beginners 11 credit should register in J A P N 100; students with Japanese 11 credit should register in J A P N 101, not J A P N 100. Students with a Japanese 12 credit should register in J A P N 200. Students who have studied Japanese elsewhere cannot register i n J A P N 100. Transfers to the University of British Columbia Human Kinetics program Capilano College Kinesiology courses transfer to the U B C Department of Human Kinetics, which offers four areas of concentration: (1) Exercise Science, (2) Health and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and Sport Management. Transfers to the University of Victoria The University o f V i c t o r i a Faculty o f Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer of Kinesiology courses from Capilano College. T o determine which courses are transferable, advisors at U . V i c , and/or Capilano College should be consulted. The instructor is available for consultation regarding placements. Contact the department prior to registration i f you are not sure of your placement. University Transfer Credit Transfers to Simon Fraser University Kinesiology Program The Kinesiology program at S F U offers four different areas of concentration: (1) A c t i v e Health, (2) Health The following Japanese courses at Capilano College and Physiological Sciences, (3) H u m a n Factors/ transfer to U B C , S F U , U . V i c , and all post-secondary Ergonomics, and (4) H u m a n Movement Sciences. institutions in B . C . Please check the B . C . Transfer Please check the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. University Transfer 95 General Information Courses K I N . 140 — Contemporary Health Issues The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers first- K I N . 142 — Introduction to Kinesiology and second-year university level courses i n mathemat- K I N . 143 — Exercise Management ics and statistics as well as preparatory courses. Entry Courses LINGUISTICS For the prerequisite requirements for each o f the following entry courses check the Mathematics Place- Instructional Faculty D. G A R D I N E R , B A , M A , PhD (SFU) ment Test ( M P T ) section and the individual course listing. 1. Preparatory Courses L I N G 100 — Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure L I N G 101 — Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use M A T H 009 is an individualized study course for students needing a basic arithmetic refresher. M A T H 091 is a one credit course designed for students who need to refresh basic algebra. It serves as a prerequisite for M A T H 096 (Intermediate MATHEMATICS A N D STATISTICS A l g e b r a with Functions), M A T H 101 (Introduction to Statistics), and M A T H 190 (Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers). M A T H 096 is a two credit course that continues the development o f Instructional Faculty I. A F F L E C K , B.Sc. (Hons.) (Regina), P h D in progress (SFU) M . A N D E R S O N , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) A . E . T . B E N T L E Y , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M A , P h D (Missouri), Coordinator of Mathematics R . C . B R E W S T E R , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c ( U . V i c . ) , P h D algebra and introduces the concept o f a function. It is possible to complete both M A T H 091 and 096 i n a single term. The combined M A T H 091/096 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a Principles o f M a t h 11 equivalent. M A T H 091/096 replaces the previous algebra course sequence M A T H 090/095. 2. Precalculus (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B . S c (Hons.) (Sheffield), M . S c , P h D (UBC) M A T H 107 is a precalculus course specifically designed for students planning to pursue a business L.F. HARRIS, B A , M A , (UBC), PhD or commerce program, whereas M A T H 105 (Austral. Nat. U . ) R. H A U S C H I L D T , B . S c . (Hons.) (Queen's), M . S c focusses more on scientific applications. (UBC) J. J O H N S T O N , B . M a t h (Waterloo), B . E d . (Toronto), M . M a t h (Waterloo) L . L A J E U N E S S E , B . M a t h (Hons.) (Waterloo), M . S c (Carleton) C . M O R G A N , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c , P h D (Memorial) S. N O V O C E L S K I I , M . S c , P h D ( M o s c o w U ) M . S A J N A , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U o f Ljubljana), M . S c , PhD (SFU) K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) R.H. V E R N E R , B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (EWSU), B.C. Prof. Teachers' Cert. Laboratory Supervisor W . L Y N N , B . S c . (Carleton), M . A . S c . (Waterloo) Although each o f M A T H 105 and 107 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a Principles o f M a t h 12 equivalent, it is c o m m o n for students even with Principles o f M a t h 12 completion to take one of these precalculus courses in preparation for calculus. B o t h 105 and 107 receive individual transfer credit at S F U and U . V i c . A t U B C transfer credit is granted for a combined precalculus ( M A T H 105 or 107) and calculus ( M A T H 108 or 116) package (except those faculties at U B C w h i c h require Principles o f M a t h 12 for admission). Based on their Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) results, some students w i l l be allowed to enrol i n M A T H 105 or 107 only i f they enrol i n M A T H 096 concurrently. 3. Calculus I M A T H 108 is.a calculus course designed primarily for students planning to pursue a business or commerce program, whereas M A T H 116 and the associated applications course M A T H 117 are University 96 Transfer oriented to the sciences. A s enrolment permits Math Placement Tests (MPT) separate engineering, life science and physical The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers science streams o f M A T H 116/117 w i l l be offered with each stream covering the same core content but emphasizing examples relevant to the associated placement tests as alternative admission instruments for students who lack the prerequisites for the entry level courses listed in the table below. For each applications area. placement test there is a study guide which provides 4. Introductory Statistics suggested review material and lists the scheduled test M A T H 101 is an introductory statistics course dates. W i t h the exception o f the placement test for designed primarily for non-science students wanting admission into M A T H 091 students are not allowed to to fulfil a science elective requirement. rewrite the same level of placement test within a twelve month period. The waiting period to rewrite the 5. Discrete Mathematics placement test for entry into M A T H 091 is one month M a t h 124 is a discrete mathematics course for or longer. F o r more information please contact the computing science. A strong mathematics back- A d v i s i n g Centre or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences ground is recommended for students taking this as D i v i s i o n , or visit the Mathematics and Statistics an entry course. Department web site at http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/ 6. Mathematics for Elementary Teachers dept/math. M A T H 190 is a course designed for future elemen- Students wanting to enrol in an entry level course listed tary school teachers. This course is intended to in the table below must write a placement test i f they transfer to S F U ' s M A T H 190 and to many university colleges' education programs. This course is not do not satisfy the prerequisite requirements for the course. Note that MATH 096, 105, 107, 108, 116, and normally available for credit to students in science 124 require programs. that the prerequisite twelve months prior to the starting be completed within date of the course. Mathematics and Statistics Department Prerequisite Grid for Entry Courses Minimum Grade Requirement — Any one of the Courses Listed Capilano Princ. Course 11 Princ. 12 Applic. 12 BMTH 045 BMTH MATH MATH 046 090 or 091 095 or 096 MATH 105 MATH 107 Within Period 091 C- C- 096 c+ c+ C+ B- 12 101 c c c- C- N/A N/A 105* c B C+ 12 107* C B C+ 12 108 B C- C- 116 A** C- C- 12 124 A** C- c- 12 190 c c B B C- C- 12 N/A * Students who have completed within the last twelve months MATH 095 or 096 with a " C - " or " C " grade are permitted to enrol in MATH 105 or 107 only if they enrol in MATH 096 concurrently ** or at least a "6" grade in both Principles of Math 12 and Calculus 12 University Transfer 97 Specific Program Requirements Graphing Calculator Students should use the following three sections as The Mathematics and Statistics Department believes guidelines for selecting math courses at the first-year that the graphing calculator greatly enhances math- level. Due to the specialized needs o f some programs at ematics instruction and learning. Students enrolling in the universities, the Mathematics and Statistics Depart- M A T H 091/096 or any first year course, M A T H 102 or ment advises students to consult the university calen- higher, are required to have a graphing calculator. Specific recommendations on make and model w i l l be dars and to seek guidance from a College advisor or math instructor for appropriate course selection. . available during the registration period. 1. Science, Forestry, Engineering Courses Students planning to pursue science or science related M A T H 009 programs are required to take M A T H 116/117 and M A T H 091 Introductory A l g e b r a 126/127. Engineering students should consult the M A T H 096 Intermediate A l g e b r a with Functions Engineering section in the Calendar. Students planning M A T H 101 Introduction to Statistics to pursue mathematics or statistics at U B C should take M A T H 102 Statistical Methods in their first year: M A T H 105 Precalculus Mathematics M A T H 107 Precalculus for Business and Social M A T H 108 M A T H 116 Calculus I for Business and Social Sciences Calculus II for Business and Social Sciences Calculus I M A T H 117 Applications o f Calculus I M A T H 124 Discrete Mathematics I M A T H 126 Calculus II M A T H 127 Applications o f Calculus II Linear A l g e b r a and Differential Equations Mathematics for Elementary Teachers Linear A l g e b r a M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 P H Y S 114/115 CHEM Sciences 110/111 C O M P 120/127 M A T H 109 E N G L (6 credits) 2. Arts, Social Science T o fulfil a one-year science elective requirement nonscience students typically take M A T H 101/102 or 101/ 190, although any o f the precalculus/calculus combinations also meet this requirement. Students planning to pursue a psychology program at S F U are required to take M A T H 107 i f they have not completed Principles of M a t h 12. M A T H 152 M A T H 190 M A T H 200 M A T H 204 Probability and Statistics for Applications M A T H 205 Introduction to Probability and Statistics M A T H 215 Introduction to Analysis M A T H 224 Discrete Mathematics II M A T H 230 Calculus III M A T H 231 Calculus I V M A T H 235 Introduction to Differential Equations 3. Commerce, Business, Economics Students planning to pursue a commerce, business or economics program are required to take M A T H 108 (and M A T H 107 i f the prerequisite requirements for 108 are not met; transfer credit w i l l be given for M A T H 107). In addition M A T H 109 is required for students planning to transfer to the commerce program or economics at U B C . F o r a detailed description o f commerce courses and program requirements see the Calendar section titled Commerce. University Transfer Credit Except where explicitly noted, all math and statistics courses numbered 101 or higher transfer to S F U , U B C , U N B C , and U V i c . Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. University 98 Transfer Arithmetic BACHELOR OF MUSIC TRANSFER PROGRAM • first two years toward a M u s i c degree leading to a career i n M u s i c Education or Performance University Transfer Instructional Faculty Capilano College offers the first two years o f a B a c h - G . A L C O C K , A R C T (Toronto) elor of M u s i c Degree. A l l courses in the Bachelor o f M . A R M A N I N I , A R C T (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . M u s i c Transfer program are transferable to School o f (UBC) M u s i c at the University of British C o l u m b i a and to the D. A S T O R , B A ( U B C ) Faculty o f M u s i c at the University of V i c t o r i a . Stu- J. B E R A R D U C C I , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M A ( W . Wash.) dents wishing to transfer to the Faculty o f Arts at U B C , J. B E R K M A N , B . M u s . (Oberlin), M . M u s . (Jiulliard) S F U , or U . V i c , with a major in M u s i c should take N . B O H N A , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) M U S . 100/101, 112/113, 120/121 i n their first year, S. B O S W E L L , A R C M (Royal College o f M u s i c , and M U S . 200/201, 212/213, 220/221 i n their second London) year. O u r students have also received transfer credit to S. D E N R O C H E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) the following universities: Alberta, Calgary, N . D I N O V O , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UT) Dalhousie, Regina, Brandon, Y o r k , Guelph, Western L . F A L L S , A R C T (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) Ontario, M c G i l l and Western Washington. B. F E D O R U K , B.Mus. (UBC) W . G R A N T , B . M u s . (Leth.), M A , P h D ( U . V i c . ) H . H A Y , B . M u s . (Queens), M . M u s . (San Francisco Conserv.) Admission Requirements Entering students should have a basic knowledge o f P. H U T T E R , B . M u s . , Perf. Cert. (Eastman) music rudiments (approximately at the level o f Toronto L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.), Conservatory Rudiments II). Coordinator Students entering on piano must be at a grade 10 level D. M C C O Y , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students who require a G. M C N A B , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) qualifying term may enrol i n other courses. K. M O O R E , B.Mus. (UBC) N. NICHOLSON T. N I C K E L S , B A ( U C L A ) D. O K E , B.Mus. ( U B C ) D. O V E R G A A R D , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC), D M A (USC) Students entering in composition must have a working knowledge o f diatonic harmony. Students entering in voice or instruments other than piano must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. G . R A M S B O T T O M , Principal Clarinet, C B C V a n c o u ver Orchestra Admissions Procedure S. R E B A N E , D M A (Kentucky) P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) A l l applicants must: D. V A N D E R E Y K , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) 1. C o m p l y with the general admission requirements o f Capilano College and the specific admission requirements for University Transfer. S. W O O D Y A R D , B . M u s . (Victoria) General Information Capilano C o l l e g e offers four music programs: a twoyear D i p l o m a of M u s i c from the Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer program, a two-year D i p l o m a in Jazz Studies, a four-year Degree i n Jazz Studies and a four-year Degree i n M u s i c Therapy. 2. Participate i n a private interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test and take an ear test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this w i l l consist o f two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight reading. T W O YEAR DIPLOMA A N D TRANSFERABILITY T O THIRD Y E A R 5. Write the Capilano College E D T (English Diagnos- UNIVERSITY tic Test) or the Provincial L P I . See the E D T infor- Career Opportunities Please try to have your E D T or L P I mark before • Private M u s i c Teacher - with the completion o f the two year diploma program your audition and interview. mation in the Registration section in this Calendar. University Transfer 99 6. Submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official copies o f SECOND TERM E N G L 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 Credits 3.0 C h o i r Ensemble II E N S M 150 or E N S M 160 Orchestra II transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary education. Early application is advised. 7. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests are M U S . 101 M u s i c Theory II M U S . 113 Ear Training and Sight Singing II 1.5 * M U S . 115 Class Piano II 1.0 held i n M a y and August. Auditions w i l l involve the presentation o f two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration o f the stu- 1.0 3.0 3.0 M u s i c History II L y r i c Diction: French and Italian 1.0 M U S . 123 3.0 or Arts elective M U S . 121 1 dent's instrumental technique and sightreading ability. 2 2X) PMI.2xx Level Registration 15.5- 17.5 1. Returning students may pre-register during the THIRD TERM E N G L 200 or 212 or Arts elective month o f A p r i l . 3.0 3 2. N e w students demonstrating sufficient instrumental and/or theoretical accomplishment i n their placement test may preregister during M a y and early August to ensure their enrolment. C h o i r Ensemble III E N S M 200 or E N S M 210 Orchestra III 1.0 3.0 M U S . 200 M U S . 212 M u s i c Theory III * M U S . 214 Class Piano III 1.0 M U S . 220 M u s i c History III 3.0 Ear Training and 1.5 Sight Singing III 3. Students may register during in-person registration. Graduation Requirements M U S . 122 1 L y r i c Diction: E n g l i s h and or Arts elective fully completed to receive a D i p l o m a i n M u s i c Trans- 2 3.0 P M I . 3xx L e v e l fer. 1.0 German The complete program requirements must be success- 2_) 15.5-17.5 Special Fees and Expenses FOURTH TERM E N G L 201 or 2 1 3 or Arts elective The fees for Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I . ) w i l l be C h o i r Ensemble I V E N S M 250 or E N S M 260 Orchestra I V 3.0 3 announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f the fall term. M a x i m u m tuition for full-time study for the 1999/2000 1.0 M U S . 201 M u s i c Theory I V 3.0 M U S . 213 Ear Training and Sight Singing I V 1.5 this m a x i m u m tuition are the costs o f all required * M U S . 215 Private M u s i c Instruction. Class Piano I V M u s i c History I V 3.0 M U S . 221 L y r i c Diction: French and Italian 1.0 M U S . 123 3.0 or Arts elective academic year was $1,225 per semester. Included i n 1.0 1 2 Program Content FIRST Credits TERM E N G L 100 Composition E N S M 100 C h o i r Ensemble I 15.5-17.5 3.0 1 or E N S M 110 Orchestra I M u s i c Theory I M U S . 100 2X) P M I . 4xx L e v e l A m i n i m u m o f 60 credits are required to graduate 1.0 with a D i p l o m a i n M u s i c . V o i c e Concentrators are 3.0 required to have two or three additional credits from M U S . 112 Ear Training and Sight S i n |n n g l 1.5 the required course L y r i c D i c t i o n M U S . 122 and M U S . * M U S . 114 Class Piano I 1.0 123 or an Arts elective. T h i s course is offered i n M U S . 120 M u s i c History I 3.0 alternating years. M U S . 122 1 L y r i c Diction: E n g l i s h and German or Arts elective 2 2 T a k i n g Arts electives is strongly recommended. 1.0 However, a student must have a m i n i m u m G P A of 3.5 3.0 in order to be allowed into these electives. 21) PMI. l x x Level 3 15.5-17.5 In order to graduate, Arts electives may be substi- tuted for E N G L 200, 201 and 212, 213. University 100 Transfer Other courses which may be taken as electives with P M I . 3xx L e v e l approval of the Coordinator are Class Strings M U S . P S Y C 204 2.0 Developmental Psychology 10 110, 111; Class Brass M U S . 218; Class Percussion 17.5 M U S . 219; Class W o o d w i n d s M U S . 210, 211; and FOURTH K o d a l y / O r f f Methodology M U S . 360, 361. TERM E N S M 250 C h o i r Ensemble I V *If the student is a piano major, then he/she may take a or E N S M 260 Orchestra I V secondary P M I instead of Class Piano. M U S . 201 M u s i c Theory I V M U S . 213 Ear Training and Sight Singing I V 1.5 * M U S . 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY COURSE STREAM Students planning on going into the Bachelor o f M u s i c M U S . 221 M u s i c History I V P M I . 4xx Level Therapy program in the third year w i l l take the follow- P S Y C 205 1.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 The Psychology o f A g i n g 10 ing program for the first two years. 14.5 Students completing this program w i l l receive a * If the student is a Piano Major, then he/she may take diploma in M u s i c . They may then choose to transfer to a secondary P M I instead o f Class Piano. university to finish a Bachelor o f M u s i c or apply to the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano ** It is recommended that students take P S Y C 101 during the summer between second and third term. College. For a description of the M u s i c Therapy program, see FIRST TERM E N G L 100 Credits Composition E N S M 100 C h o i r Ensemble I 3.0 or E N S M 110 Orchestra I M U S . 100 M u s i c Theory I 3.0 M U S . 112 Ear Training and Sight Singing I 1.5 * M U S . 114 Class Piano I 1.0 M U S . 120 M u s i c History I 3.0 P M I . l x x Level 1.0 2XJ 14.5 SECOND TERM Instructional Faculty M . B A T T E R S B Y , B A (NYU), PhD (UBC) J. D I X O N , B A , P h D ( U B C ) S. G A R D N E R , B A (Hons.) ( M c G I L L ) , B . P h i l . (Oxford), P h D (Concordia) • (Western Ontario) 3.0 E N S M 150 C h o i r Ensemble II or E N S M 160 Orchestra II 1.0 M U S . 101 M u s i c Theory II 3.0 M U S . 113 Ear Training and M A , E d D ( U B C ) , D.Phil. (Oxford) University Transfer Credit 1.5 1.0 M u s i c History II 3.0 2.0 * * P S Y C 100 Intro to Psychology or P S Y C 101 Theories o f Behaviour S. P E R S K Y , B A , M A ( U B C ) Y. WESTWELL-ROPER, Sight Singing II Class Piano II P M I . 2xx L e v e l 10 17.5 THIRD PHILOSOPHY W . H E N R Y , B A (Hons.) (U.Vic.), M A ( U B C ) , P h D E N G L 103, 104, 105, or 106 * M U S . 115 MUS.121 the M u s i c Therapy program section o f the Calendar. A l l Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . Critical thinking is taught in all philosophy courses. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. TERM B I O L 104 Human Biology I E N S M 200 C h o i r Ensemble III 3.0 P H I L 101 — Introductory Philosophy: Ethics P H I L 102 — Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality Ear Training and P H I L 110 Critical T h i n k i n g I Sight Singing III P H I L 120 Critical T h i n k i n g II Class Piano III P H I L 140 Philosophy and L a w : Canadian L a w M u s i c History III P H I L 141 Philosophy and L a w : C r i m i n a l Justice P H I L 150 History o f Philosophy I • or E N S M 210 Orchestra III 1.0 M U S . 200 M u s i c Theory III 3.0 M U S . 212 * M U S . 214 M U S . 220 Courses University Transfer 101 P H I L 151 — History o f Philosophy II P H I L 200 — Political Philosophy P H I L 201 — Political Philosophy P H I L 202 — Introduction to F o r m a l L o g i c P H I L 207 — Business Ethics P H I L 208 — Environmental Ethics P H I L 209 — B i o m e d i c a l Ethics Philosophy i n Literature P H I L 221 — Existentialism in Literature P H I L 222 — Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) P H I L 240 — FIRST YEAR P H Y S 114/115 (preferred) or 110/111 or 108/111 C H E M 110/111 M A T H 116/117 and 126/127 E N G L (six credits) P H I L 210 — Metaphysics and Epistemology I P H I L 211 — Metaphysics and Epistemology II P H I L 220 — Recommended Sequence for Major in Physics Philosophy and Gender Relations Non-science Elective or G e o l o g y , B i o l o g y or Computing Science (six credits) SECOND YEAR P H Y S 200/201, 210/211, 218/222 M A T H 200, 230, 2 3 1 , 2 3 5 Elective (six credits) Students interested in honours physics should consult Physics instructors. PHYSICS Instructional Courses Faculty M . F R E E M A N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( C a l . Tech.), P h D ( U B C ) S. G R E E N S P O O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , P h D (Waterloo), Convenor of Physics F . P A R V A Z , B . S c (Tehran), M . S . D i p . (San D i e g o State) Laboratory Supervisors and Technician K . F U L L E R , B . S c ( S F U ) , Laboratory Technician P H Y S 104 — Principles of Physics P H Y S 108 — Basic Physics P H Y S 110 — General Physics I P H Y S 111 — General Physics II P H Y S 114 — Fundamental Physics I P H Y S 115 — Fundamental Physics II P H Y S 116 — Fundamental Physics III P H Y S 200 — Thermal Physics and Waves B . S I M S O N , B . S c ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor P H Y S 201 — Electricity and Magnetism P H Y S 210 — Physics Laboratory I Research P H Y S 211 — Physics Laboratory II P H Y S 218 — Computational Physics V . M O E N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor Associate M . C R E N S H A W , B . S c . (Kansas State), B A P H Y S 222 — Mechanics (Evergreen), Physics Holography Research L a b General Information POLITICAL STUDIES A l l first-year physics courses except P H Y S 116 include a weekly two-hour laboratory period. The cost o f the Instructional labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab EM. L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L B ( U B C ) , M A (Duke) Faculty P. M I E R , B A ( S F U ) , M A (Toronto) manuals. T. S C H O U L S , B A (Hons.) (Alberta), M A (Toronto) University Transfer Credit A l l physics courses at Capilano carry transfer credit. C . S Y L V E S T E R , B A (Gonzaga), M A (Notre Dame) D . W I N C H E S T E R , B A (Hons.) (Concordia), M A (UBC) Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e for further information. General Introduction Students with Physics 12 planning to transfer to UBC should take PHYS 114 or PHYS 114 and 115, depending on their plans. Consult the UBC Calendar for specific program requirements. W o m e n and men preparing for careers in journalism, law, business management, international banking, market research, arbitration, urban and regional planning, the foreign service, consulting, labour negotiations, international development, and education enrol i n Political Studies courses. So too those hoping to bring about change i n their own communities i n such areas as health, education and the environment, University 102 Transfer choosing politics as their vocation. That's because Political Studies is concerned with power — what it is and who gets it, how it is used and how it is abused. A l o n g with understanding power and the role it plays locally, nationally, and internationally, Political Studies students graduate with excellent research skills and University Transfer Credit A l l Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C , and U . V i c . Please refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. effective oral and written communication skills — all very much in demand in the new global economy. For further information please contact Social Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca Courses P S Y C 100 — Introduction to Psychology P S Y C 101 — Theories o f Behaviour P S Y C 200 — Social Psychology University Transfer Credit P S Y C 201 — Group Dynamics P S Y C 203 — A l l Political Studies Courses at Capilano are transfer- P S Y C 204 — Developmental Psychology able to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Please check the B . C . P S Y C 205 — Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide P S Y C 206 — Adolescent Psychology for further information. P S Y C 212 — Research Methods in Psychology P S Y C 213 History o f Psychology The Psychology of A g i n g — Statistical Methods in Psychology Courses P S Y C 220 — Theories of Personality P O L . 100 Introduction to Politics and G o v e r n ment P S Y C 222 — A b n o r m a l Psychology P S Y C 225 — Biopsychology o f Behaviour — P O L . 102 — Comparative Government P S Y C 230 — Cognitive Psychology P O L . 104 — Canadian Government W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology P O L . 110 — Introduction to Western Political Thought P O L . 111 — Contemporary Ideologies P O L . 201 — International Relations P O L . 202 — Government and Politics of British Columbia G . B A I L E Y , B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , P h D (Oregon) N . G A Y L E , B A (Hons.) ( Y o r k ) , M A (Western), P h D SOCIOLOGY Instructional Faculty P O L . 203 — International Organizations P O L . 204 — Canadian Public P o l i c y P O L . 206 — Scope and Methods o f Political Analysis C . H A T H A W A Y , B A ( S U N Y ) , M A (Wash U . ) P O L . 207 — Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory A . R O J A S , M A , P h D (York) (UBC) R. I S O L A , B A , M A ( S F U ) * R. V A N W Y N S B E R G H E , B A , M A ( U . o f Western Ontario, P h D (Ohio) PSYCHOLOGY Instructional Faculty P. A V E R Y , B A ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto) E . B O Y L E , B A ( U . Chicago), P h D ( U B C ) R . H A W R Y L K O , B A (Hunter), M A ( S F U ) M . M A C N E I L L , B A (Alberta), M A (Manitoba), P h D (Calgary) S. M O E , B A , M A ( M e x i c o ) R. S N O W , B A (Hons.) M A , P h D ( S F U ) J. W A T E R S , B A , M A , P h D ( S F U ) C. Z A S K O W , B A (UBC), M A , PhD (SFU) General Information A l l courses in Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events in a relevant and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the student in his/her endeavour to cope with our increasingly complex society. A major in Sociology leads to work in the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial sociology, communications, media, government research and related areas. For further information please contact S o c i a l Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca For further information please contact Social Sciences at 984-4953 or email at socsci@capcollege.bc.ca University Transfer 103 University Transfer Credit University Transfer Credit A l l Sociology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , A l l Spanish courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C U B C and U . V i c . A l l 200 level courses w i l l provide the and U . V i c . S F U transfer student with assigned credit toward second-year courses. The U B C transfer student w i l l be provided with unassigned credit towards a major. S F U : Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses in Spanish are reminded o f the present equivalency standards. Elective credit w i l l be given at S F U f o r all Capilano College Spanish courses. Courses Exemption from and placement i n higher courses are determined by the results o f a placement test or other S O C . 100 — Social Structures S O C . 101 — Concepts and Theories o f Society assessment procedure. A s a result o f the placement S O C . 200 — Canadian Society test, area credit may be granted w h i c h w o u l d count S O C . 201 — British C o l u m b i a Society S O C . 210 — Current Social Issues S O C . 211 S O C . 222 — Sociology of the T h i r d W o r l d Sociology of the Arts U B C : A t U B C , present equivalent standards equate S O C . 223 — M e d i a and Society S P A N 100 and 101 with S P A N 100; S P A N 200 and toward a major in Spanish. Courses which do not qualify toward a major w i l l be awarded elective credit only. 201 with S P A N 200. The student who plans to major in Spanish may enter U B C ' s Spanish program when SPANISH Instructional the student completes the Capilano courses. Faculty Courses E. PEREIRA, B A (UBC), M A (UBC) C . S A N T A E L L A , B A (Venezuela), M A , P h D ( S F U ) Instructional Associates S P A N 100 — Beginning Spanish I S P A N 101 — Beginning Spanish II S P A N 200 — Intermediate Spanish I J. G A C I N A , B A ( S F U ) , P D P ( S F U ) K . M A T T S O N , B A ( S F U ) , Licenciatura (Barcelona) General Information S P A N 201 — Intermediate Spanish II THAI A l l courses in Spanish consist of four hours o f lecture, one hour o f conversation, and assignments i n the Instructional multimedia lab on a drop-in basis (involving approxi- J. P L A C Z E K , B A (Windsor), M A ( U B C ) , P h D ( U B C ) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B A (Thammasat University) B a n g k o k mately 45 minutes). » Native speakers of Spanish are not allowed in first year Faculty courses. If they wish to take second year courses i n Spanish, they must consult with the Spanish instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any misunderstandings, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. Students with a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n which they are registered w i l l be Students with a competence in the language beyond the level o f the course i n which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. The following Thai courses carry university transfer. Please refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses required to withdraw. Students who are not sure of T H A I 100 — Beginning Thai I their language level should contact an instructor. T H A I 101 — Beginning T h a i II University 104 Transfer W O M E N ' S STUDIES Instructional Faculty N . G A Y L E , B A ( Y o r k ) , M A (Western), P h D ( U B C ) R . H A W R Y L K O , B A (Hunter), M A ( S F U ) P. L E C O U T E U R , B . S c . , M . S c , (Auckland), P h D (Calif.) M . L E G A T E S , B A (Wash), M A , M . P h i l . , P h D (Yale) K. LIND, BA, M A (UBC) S. M O E , B A , M A ( M e x i c o ) D . N E A V E , B A (Hons.) (Manchester), M A ( U . V i c . ) N . S H A R M A , B A , M A (SFU) P. S I N G E R , B A (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M F A (Concordia) M . Y A S E R I , B A (Hons.) (Thames), M A (Saskatchewan) For further information at 984-4953 or email at please contact Social Sciences socsci@capcollege.bc.ca University Transfer Credit Students who wish to pursue further courses in W o m en's Studies are advised that U B C , S F U and U . V i c , have programs in W o m e n ' s Studies. Please refer to the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for further information. Courses W M S T 100 — Introduction to W o m e n ' s Studies W M S T 102 — Political E c o n o m y o f W o m e n W M S T 104 — W o m e n Writers and Feminist Criticism W M S T 106 — Contemporary A m e r i c a n W o m e n Writers W M S T 110 — W o m e n and Psychology W M S T 113 — W o m e n in Politics W M S T 122 — W o m e n in Anthropology W M S T 130 — W o m e n and A r t W M S T 140 — W o m e n , Science and Technology W M S T 220 — W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey University 106 Transfer Career/Vocational Programs Admission Dates Capilano College offers a variety o f employmentrelated programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students are taught the latest techniques and skills. A d v i s o r y committees, composed o f employers, review and recommend Enrolment is limited due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance are encouraged to apply early. A p p l i cants may be required to have an interview with the content of all programs. Program Coordinator prior to admission. A d m i s s i o n is limited and applicants are considered on the criteria established for each program area. In Unsuccessful applicants should contact an advisor to determine an appropriate educational alternative. general, Grade 12 standing is required for students applying to two year D i p l o m a Programs, although others may be admitted on the basis o f their experience Practicums and abilities. Due to the timely nature of these pro- For some practicums, students may be required to have grams, requirements and profiles may change. a C r i m i n a l Records check. Contact the individual program areas for current Co-operative Education information. All courses English. require basic in written spoken spoken Some Career programs include a co-op education option. Co-operative education integrates a period o f the instruc- classroom learning with periods o f work experience to words, and must be able to write assign- enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. ments in correct their English and understand the texts and other written tor's literacy That is, students must be able to English. materials, Students and who are not is good enough should tor or an advisor before taking the talk to the sure Students alternate periods o f full-time study with instruc- periods o f paid employment in business, industry, course. government and non-profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume Graduate Employment Employment opportunities for graduates are excellent; however, the College does not guarantee jobs for its graduates. productive jobs. Student Course and Work Load Full-time programs are designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not Transfer to and from Other Institutions to undertake other activities that require large time commitments, including employment, while undertak- There is agreement among all public B . C . colleges to ing full-time studies. accept each other's credits upon transfer, i f applicable, to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the Degree Completion Options right to review individual course credits. Opportunities for degree completion through the Transfer credits are granted to students O N A D M I S - British C o l u m b i a Open University are available to S I O N for acceptable work done at other institutions. students who have finished diplomas at Capilano Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable College in the following areas: documentation to the Registrar's office for considera- Business Administration (Bachelor of Business tion. F u l l information on transfer o f specific courses is available from the advisors and in the program area. Administration) Jazz Studies (Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies) M u s i c Therapy (Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy) Outdoor Recreation Management (Bachelor of T o u r i s m Management) T o u r i s m Management C o - o p (Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management) For more information, please contact British C o l u m b i a Open University's Education Information Services at (604) 431-3300 or 1-800-663-9711. Career/Vocational 109 ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM The Program The Accounting Assistant program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. T h i s program provides students with training i n manual and This program is presently under review detailed listing of courses and course changed by the time the program ber computerized accounting, general office procedures, and the content is offered may be and computer applications. A two-week work Septem- practicum is included in this training program. in 2000. E-mail: Instructional Faculty M . C R A G G , B A L a w (Durham), B . C . Teaching Cert. C . C R A M , B A , M A , Ont. Prof. Teaching Certificate L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M B A ( N . Eastern Tel: abt@capcollege.bc.ca 984-4959 Admission Requirements • Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T E B S A (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M A ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) • Interested students w i l l attend an informal meeting and a personal interview. S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) Program Content N . P O W E R , B A , (Concordia), L a b Supervisor C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor FIRST TERM Credits K . V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C G A B T E C 111 Business English I G . W A U G H , B A (Reading), M A ( U B C ) , Standard B T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 B T E C 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 B T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I 6XJ Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist 3.0 15.0 Support Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant N o t e : Students in BTEC must achieve 117 to continue SECOND a minimum in this of a B grade program. TERM Credits Career Opportunities B T E C 149 Microcomputer Business Applications 4.5 The Accounting Assistant program provides students B T E C 211 Business W r i t i n g 3.0 with an understanding o f both manual and computer B T E C 217 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II 3.0 accounting systems and the ability to apply this B T E C 220 B T E C 252 Accounting Procedures U I Organizational Behaviour 3.0 3,0 knowledge to business situations. Students are introduced to other computer applications and general 16.5 office procedures. Graduates are finding employment as accounting THIRD assistants, accounts receivable or payable clerks, B T E C 149 TERM Microcomputer Business Applications (continued) CIP* perform accounting functions i n their own businesses. B T E C 215 Computerized A c c o u n t i n g 3.0 In addition, graduates o f this program may ladder into B T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 15 accountants for small and medium-sized firms, or they Credits 4.5 the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. Students who achieve a m i n i m u m grade o f " B " in the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business Administration: • B T E C 252 is equivalent to B A D M 106 • B T E C 217 is equivalent to B F I N 141 • B T E C 146 & 149 are equivalent to B C P T 121 & 122. Career/Vocational 110 Certificate Requirements: * C I P — course in progress 36.0 ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM Admission Requirements • student status. • Instructional Faculty Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature Interested students w i l l attend an informal meeting and a personal interview. L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U of Conn.) M B A ( N . Eastern Program Content Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B S A (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M A ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) FIRST TERM Credits B T E C 111 Business English I 3.0 B T E C 112 Language S k i l l Development 1.5 B T E C 115 Business Systems and B T E C 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 B T E C 124 Microcomputer Applications 6.0 B T E C 217 Accounting Procedures IT 3_0 D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor N . P O W E R , B A , (Concordia), L a b Supervisor C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor B . S M I T H , B A ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teaching Cert., T E S L Cert. Procedures 3.0 19.5 G . W A U G H , B A (Reading), M A ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered N o t e : Students Psychologist in BTEC 117 to continue SECOND TERM Support Staff must achieve a minimum with this of a "B" grade program. Credits Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant The Program The A c c o u n t i n g Support program is a full-time, six- B T E C 215 Computerized A c c o u n t i n g 3.0 B T E C 217 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II CIP* B T E C 218 A c c o u n t i n g Comprehensive Project 1.5 B T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience I . L5 6.0 month program offered from January to June. This program provides training in manual and computerized Total Program Credits: 25.5 accounting, general office procedures and computer applications. The A c c o u n t i n g Support program also C I P — course i n progress includes a two-week supervised practicum. E-mail: Tel: abt@capcollege.bc.ca 984-4959 ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable or accounts payable clerks, and accountants for small and medium sized firms, or they perform accounting functions in their own businesses. In addition, g r a d a t e s of this program may ladder into the Business Administration program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. Students who achieve a m i n i m u m o f " B " i n the Instructional Faculty D . B L A N E Y , ID ( U B C ) , C P S , M . E d . ( S F U ) M . C R A G G , B A L a w (Durham), B . C . Teaching Cert. C . C R A M , B A , M A , Ont. Prof. Teaching Certificate M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B S A (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M A ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A G. G R I E V E S , B.Ed. ( U B C ) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor following courses w i l l receive credit from Business S. H O R N , I D ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) Administration: N . P O W E R , B A , (Concordia), L a b Supervisor • B T E C 217 is equivalent to B F I N 141 C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor • B T E C 124 is equivalent to B C P T 121 & 122 K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed,, Lic.Acct. (UBC), C G A G . W A U G H , B A (Reading), M A ( U B C ) , Standard Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Career/Vocational 111 Support Staff THIRD TERM Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist Credits B T E C 230 Keyboarding S k i l l and Speed B T E C 233 Development Document and W e b Page Design W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Career Opportunities 1.5 M 4.5 The Administrative Assistant in today's office provides 36.0 Certificate Requirements: a high level o f technological and administrative support to management. Graduates o f this program are finding employment i n a wide range of technological support positions including office, administrative and executive assistants, office managers, and computer applications trainers. The Program Instructional The Administrative Assistant program is a full-time, ten-month program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in English grammar and composition skills, interpersonal skills, computer applications and much more. A valuable week practicum i n a business organization. Tel.- M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr College of A r t & Design) B . C A L V E R T , B A (Sask) S. K A R M A L I L . S A V A G E , B A ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) D. T A I T abt@capcollege.bc.ca L . W U , D i p . C o m m e r c i a l M u s . (Capilano) 984-4959 C o o r d i n a t o r : Shirin K a r m a l i Admission Requirements • Faculty D. R A N K I N , B F A (SFU) component of the training that students receive is a two- E-mail: APPLIED INFORMATION T E C H N O L O G Y (INFOTEC) PROGRAM Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature L a b S u p e r v i s o r s : L . W u , M . Anderson, D . R a n k i n , T . Fountaine student status Staff: Cathy Cole, 984-1727 General Information Program Content The A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) Pro- FIRST TERM Credits gram at Capilano College was established in 1990 with B T E C 111 Business English I 3.0 a mandate to provide students with the skills and B T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 knowledge to act as developers in the emerging world B T E C 117 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 of interactive and computer-based communications. B T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I (LQ 15.0 N o t e : Students "C" in BTEC who do not achieve 111 and BTEC permission from the program continue in the program. SECOND a minimum 146 must receive convenor constantly evolves to accommodate new directions in written technology and theory. Students are provided with an "T environment that forsters the discipline and skills necessary to communicate effectively and creatively Credits with an ever-expanding global information base. E-mail: B T E C 118 Introduction to Computerized B T E C 147 Microcomputer Applications II 4.5 B T E C 148 Administrative Applications 3.0 B T E C 211 Business Writing 3.0 B T E C 252 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 B T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 15 Accounting multimedia and online production, the program of a to be able to TERM W i t h a foundation in the development o f interactive infotec@capcollege.bc.ca 1.5 16.5 Admission Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent with E n g l i s h 12 • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate • Personal interview N o t e : Applications for Admission, official and other pertinent transcripts be submitted Career/Vocational 112 to Admissions, together Registrar's with documents Office. must Special Fees and Expenses SECOND TERM—Exploration • Personal computer system capable o f performing January 2 - April 20, 2001 Credits tasks required in this program. (See program I N F O 139 Digitized Sound brochure, for further information) I N F O 148 Time-Based Data Integration II 1.5 • Texts, software, cartridges I N F O 155 Interactive Communications II 1.5 • B B S online fees/program fees I N F O 160 Self-Marketing 1.5 I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management 1.5 I N F O 172 Technical Support: Concentration 3.0 I N F O 177 Professional Development CIP* I N F O 180 Computer Mediated I N F O 185 3 D Production for M u l t i m e d i a I N F O 196 A p p l i e d Design 1.5 I N F O 198 Educational Technology 0.75 Important Note This is a general view o f the Infotec program. W h i l e we have made every effort to describe courses and requirements accurately as o f Fall 2000, we work i n a rapidly changing field; new releases in hardware and software may require changes in course content, credit and scheduling, and required equipment. 1.5 Communications 3.0 1.5 March / April DIPLOMA PROGRAM The D i p l o m a program is a 10-month, full-time program with a class limit o f 20 students. Please contact the Infotec Department for application details and program information. I N F O 148 Time-Based Data Integration II I N F O 158 Interactive Communications III 1.5 I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management CIP* I N F O 172 Technical Support: Concentration C I P * I N F O 177 Professional Development I N F O 180 Computer Mediated Communications Diploma Program Profile FIRST TERM—Foundation Credits September 5 - December 15,2000 CIP* CIP* CIP* I N F O 192 A p p l i e d Database Technology 1.5 I N F O 193 Systems, Tools, Utilities II 1.5 I N F O 197 Scripting for the W e b Browser 1.5 C M N S 125 Communication Theory 1.5 C M N S 165 Technical Presentations 3.0 THIRD TERM — Professional Development I N F O 150 Contemporary Issues I 1.5 April 30 - June 22,2001 I N F O 151 Interactive Communications I 1.5 I N F O 138 Advanced Graphics 0.75 A p p l i e d Production Management CIP* CIP* I N F O 166 A p p l i e d Telecommunications 1.5 I N F O 171 I N F O 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities 1.5 I N F O 177 Professional Development 3.0 I N F O 180 Computer Mediated 0.75 I N F O 192 A p p l i e d Database Technology CIP* I N F O 194 Cross-Platform Conversion 0.75 I N F O 195 Interactive Graphics I N F O 199 Interactive Project Planning and Design Communications CIP* C M N S 165 Technical Presentations 3.0 (Nine credits awarded for pre/post-graduate work or experience) I N F O 145 Internet Tools and Techniques 1.5 * C I P — course in progress. I N F O 156 Technical Support: Foundation 1.5 November / December I N F O 161 Project Management 1.5 I N F O 167 Systems, T o o l s , Utilities CIP* I N F O 173 Technical Support: Augmentation 1.5 I N F O 177 Professional Development 4.5 I N F O 195 Interactive Graphics CIP* M D I A 142 Computer Managed Learning and Training 1.5 Career/Voca tional ARTS A N D ENTERTAINMENT M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM In the second year o f the program, students w i l l share classes with students in the A d v a n c e d Certificate Program. During the second year students gain an overview o f all aspects of arts and entertainment management including marketing, resource develop- (formerly Performing Arts Management) ment, computer applications, financial and tour management in both the commercial and non-profit cultural A . T W O YEAR DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. sectors. Practicum placements are an essential part o f this EIGHT-MONTH A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE PROGRAM program. Through both internal and external placements the students gain practical experience and develop successful relationships with one or more Instructional cultural organizations in the community. Faculty L . B A X T E R , B A (Hons) (Queens), M B A ( U B C ) Diploma Program Curriculum F. B L A C K , B F A (SFU), B A (UVic) D. M O O R E , B F A (UVic), M A (WWU), Coordinator 60 D. PRICE, B A (SFU), M F A ( U B C ) FIRST TERM credits C. S T E R N , B.Comm., B.Ed. ( U B C ) A E M . 140 Arts & Entertainment I J. S T E T T N E R , Cert. Arts A d m i n . (Banff), B . ( U . o f A E M . 142 Arts & Entertainment Introductory A E M . 144 Computer Applications i n Arts Credits Arizona), M B A ( U B C ) Practicum I Arts and Entertainment Management offers two skill-sets, the job experience, and the contacts necessary to gain employment i n the industry. The Management Diploma is a two-year 1.5 & Entertainment Administration programs o f study w h i c h provide students with the in Arts and Entertainment 3.0 1.5 V i s u a l and Performing Arts (Jazz Studies,. M u s i c , Studio A r t , Textiles, Theatre) or F i l m Studies course 3.0 program designed for high school graduates. The E n g l i s h 100 or Communications (Writing) 3.0 Advanced Elective 3.0 Management Certificate in Arts and Entertainment is an eight-month program for students with two or more years of post-secondary education or equivalent work experience. Both programs offer students a unique blend of course SECOND TERM A E M . 141 Arts & Entertainment II A E M . 143 Arts & Entertainment Introductory Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre which hosts a variety of arts and entertainment events including live 3.0 Practicum IT work and practicum experience. Students do internal practicums working in various capacities i n the Credits 3.0 V i s u a l and Performing Arts (Jazz Studies, M u s i c , Studio A r t , Textiles, Theatre) or F i l m Studies course 3.0 theatre, jazz, and popular music. In external practicum English or Communications (Writing) 3.0 placements students get on-the-job experience work- Elective 3.0 ing for professional arts and entertainment organizations. Past placements have included The Arts C l u b THIRD TERM Theatre, Ballet B . C . , Vancouver Playhouse, Gateway A E M . 240 Internal Practicum in Arts A E M . 242 Management Seminar and External A E M . 244 Computer Applications i n Arts & A E M . 245 Public Relations, Marketing and A E M . 248 Arts A d v o c a c y , Grantsmanship Theatre, Coastal Jazz and Blues Society, Lucas Talent Agency, and N e w M u s i c West. Credits & Entertainment Management I Practicum I A . DIPLOMA PROGRAM This two-year program offers a preparatory year during Entertainment Administration Promotion which students acquire general study, writing, and research skills; become familiar with basic computer literacy applicable to the industry; and gain familiarity with one or more of the cultural areas represented by departments in V i s u a l and Performing Arts or F i l m Studies. Career/Vocational 114 and Fundraising 4.5 6.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 FOURTH TERM Credits A E M . 241 Internal Practicum in Arts & A E M . 243 Management Seminar and External A E M . 246 Organizational Structures i n Arts Entertainment Management II A E MI. 249 Company and Tour Management Total Credits: A E M . 343 Management Seminar and External & Entertainment Management II 4.5 Practicum II Organizational Structures i n Arts A E M . 347 Financial Management for Arts A E M . 349 C o m p a n y and T o u r Management & Entertainment 1.5 1.5 60.0 B. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This eight-month A d v a n c e d Certificate program offers 6.0 A E M . 346 1.5 & Entertainment Credits Internal Practicum in Arts 6.0 & Entertainment Financial Management for Arts TERM A E M . 341 4.5 Practicum II A E M . 247 SECOND & Entertainment Total Credits: 1.5 1.5 _L5 30.0 Admission to Full-Time Studies in the Diploma and Advanced Certificate Programs students with prior education or work experience a Students entering either program on a full-time basis unique blend of course work and practicum experience should arrange for an interview by contacting the in the arts and entertainment industry. Students gain an V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f M a r c h overview of all aspects of arts and entertainment (for August) or the end o f October (for January). Prior management including marketing, resource develop- to the interview, students should forward to the Depart- ment, computer applications, financial and tour man- ment their transcripts and a resume, and should c o m - agement i n both the commercial and non-profit cultural plete an application to Capilano College. sectors. Practicum placements are an essential part of this program. Through both internal and external placements the students gain practical experience and develop successful relationships with one or more Students may wish to take more time than scheduled to cultural organizations in the community. The course work for the program is concentrated i n a three-week intensive period at the beginning o f each o f the two terms. This is followed each term with both an internal and external practicum. Internal Practicum in Arts & A E M . 342 Management Seminar and External Entertainment Management I 6.0 Computer Applications i n Arts & Entertainment Administration 1.5 Public Relations, Marketing and A E M . 348 Arts A d v o c a c y , Grantsmanship Promotion and Fundraising ing in the field who want to upgrade their skills. Fees A E M . 340 A E M . 354 schedule. This is particularly suitable for those work- 4.5 A d v a n c e d Certificate Program Curriculum A E M . 344 may be possible to design an individualized completion Credits skill-set, the job experience, and the contacts necessary to gain employment in the industry. Practicum I complete their program studies. If seats are available it Students may register in individual courses subject to availability o f seats and a successful interview. Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office to arrange for an interview. Prior to the interview, students not currently enrolled at the College should forward to the Department their transcripts and a resume, and should c o m plete an application to Capilano College. U p o n completion of the program, students have the FIRST TERM Admission to O p e n Courses and PartTime Studies in the Diploma and Advanced Certificate Programs Fees for 2000/2001 are estimated at $60 per credit for the first year o f the diploma and $80 per credit for year two o f the diploma and for the advanced certificate. 1.5 1.5 Career/Voca tional 115 D e p a r t m e n t C h a i r : Charlene H i l l BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMS Instructional Faculty J.S. B R O W N L E E - B A K E R , B B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( A s i a Pacific International Institute) A. B. C. D. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE COMPLETION PROGRAM (OPEN UNIVERSITY) BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — ADVANCED DIPLOMA PROGRAM BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) B . C A M P B E L L , (Seneca), C N I A . C A R T E R , B . S c , M B A ( U of A , C i t y U ) , C N A W. E N W R I G H T , B F A , M F A (UBC), L L B (McGill) G . F A N E , D i p . Tech., B . S c , M B A , C M A ( B C I T , C i t y U., UBC) G . F A R R E L L , M B A , C M A , F C M A (SFU) D. GOODWIN, M B A F. G R U E N , B . M g t . Eng., M . A . S c . (RPI, Waterloo) C . H I L L , B A (Santa Clara) P. H O L D E N , B A , L L B , M B A ( U B C , U . of Ottawa, UBC) G . H U G H E S , B . A p . S c . ( U of T ) , C G A , M B A ( A s i a E. F. G. DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — TWO YEAR FULL TIME STUDIES RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE PROGRAM EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS - Business Administration Certificate - Advanced Business Administration Certificate - Business Computing Certificate H. ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS - Accelerated General Management - Accelerated Accounting Management - Accelerated Marketing Management I. J. PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE COMPUTER SPECIALIST PROGRAM (CSP) Pacific Institute) S. I B A R A K I , ISP, C N I , C N E , M S S B , B E T A T E A M , NETeam, DpSc (CIPS, N O V E L L , M I C R O S O F T , IBM, OUC) W . I N G L I S , B A , D i p . M k t g . ( U B C , U . Montreal) W . I N K S T E R , C G A , (Canada), A C S M (Capilano), CNI C. K I L I A N , B A , M A (SFU) J . D . L O B L A W , B A (U ofT) R . L O N G W O R T H , B . S c , M . E d . (Concordia, St. Michaels), ISP T. M A C K A Y , B A ( S F U ) , C A A P (Institute of Canadian Advertising, Toronto) J. M A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) C A R. M C B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U o f A ) C . M C K T E , B.Comm., M B A , P T C ( U B C , City Univ.) L . M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U of A ) L.E. MILNER, M B A , C G A J. M O L E N D Y K , B . T e c h . ( B C I T ) B . M O S E L E Y , B A , M B A (Univ. of Cal) R . C . N I C H O L S , B . C o m m . , C M A ( U of A ) G . N I K O L O V , U D E (Sophia), P h D ( U of London) K. L. CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER'™' PROGRAM LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE PROGRAM M . NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM N. TECHNICAL COMPUTER PROFESSIONAL P R O G R A M J. N O W L A N , B A (Trent University) N . N O W L A N , B A (Queen's University), M A C o m m u nity and Regional Planning ( U B C ) , M . E d . Counselling Psychology ( U B A ) R. O ' C O N N O R , B . A d m i n . (Ryerson), ISP, M C P , M C T D . O ' L E A R Y , B A E d . (Memorial), D i p . A d u l t E d . (Alberta), M . E d . ( U B C ) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (N.Dakota) H . P L U M E , C M A , A C S M (Capilano) A. R A J W A N I , B.Comm. (UBC), C A J. S A R R E A L , B . S c , M . S c , P h D , A C S M , ( U . of Philippines, U . of Florida, N . Carolina U . , Capilano) D. S A U E R , B A , M B A (SFU, U B C ) G. S I M O N , B.Sc, M . S c (UBC) C. S T E P H E N S , C N I , C N E , C T T M . T A Y L O R , B.Sc. ( U o f A ) Career/Vocational 116 L . T E E T Z E L , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M P A (Queens) • Entrepreneur T. T O W I L L , C M A (Certified Management Accounts • Event Producer Society of Canada), M B A ( A s i a Pacific Interna- • Financial Analyst tional Graduate School o f Management) • Financial Planner M . V A N H O R N , B . E d . ( U o f A ) , A C S M (Capilano), • Lending Officer MCP • Network Administrator A . H . V I C K , B.Comm. (UBC) • Operations Manager K . V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lie. Acct. ( U B C ) , C G A • Production Manager A . W A T S O N , B A ( U of C ) , A I B C , M B A ( A s i a Pacific • Promotion Manager International Institute) • Retail Specialist J. W A T S O N , B . A d m i n . (Brock University), C M A • Research Coordinator G . W A U G H , B A , M A - Reading, ( U B C ) • Sales Representative/Sales Manager R. W E I Z E L , B P E . , B . C o m m . ( U of M ) , M B A • Store Manager/Owner (McMaster), C M A J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A R. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) H . B. Y A C K N E S S , B.Comm., M B A (SFU), C A D . Y A S I N S K I , B F A ( U of M ) • Systems Analyst In the past, many of our graduates have developed careers with large corporations such as K e l l o g g ' s , Hershey's, Chevron, L C . B . C , B B D O Advertising, The Future Shop, Labatt Breweries, Brights Wines, B . C . Tel, B . C . Ferries, and B . C . H y d r o . The entrepreneurial Support Staff skills gained in the program have also led many Carmen Orton, D i v . Assistant graduates to administrative jobs in smaller firms. These John B o y l a n , C o - o p Assistant include M i n e r v a Technologies, Seanix Technology Nancy Findlater, Receptionist Inc., Western System Controls, Sierra Consulting and Colleen Liptaj, Learning Assistant many other small and medium sized businesses. Jan M e r r i c k , Learning Assistant Arlene M i l l e r , Clerical Assistant Lorraine Sikavish, Receptionist Wendy Corriveau, Receptionist — Sylvan Testing Centre Christina M o g h r a b i , Receptionist — Sylvan Testing Contact: Telephone: E-mail: busadmin® Web site: 984-4960, Fax: 984-1734 capcollege.be.ca http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/badm Admission Requirements • Centre Grade 12 or equivalent with a m i n i m u m o f C + in English 12, or be eligible to enroll in English 100, and a C i n "academic" M a t h 11, or General Information • Mature student status with successful completion o f testing in English and/or M a t h skills. The Department of Business Administration at Capilano College stresses a balanced combination o f classroom learning and hands-on business education. A l l our faculty have first hand business experience and remain active in their specialties. • W e continually review and update our programs Additional program admission requirements are found according to market needs so that our graduates have in the specific program descriptions. Submission o f the Capilano College Application for A d m i s s i o n , together with official transcripts to Admissions, Registrar's Office. • Students currently enrolled in Grade 12 w i l l be considered on the basis o f interim grades. the skills employers demand. A recent review o f our programs by our A d v i s o r y Board, graduates, students and faculty led us to accentuate our training i n problem-solving, written and verbal business presentations, and team work. This gives our graduates an edge i n today's highly competitive j o b market, and gives them the expertise to succeed in the workplace o f the future. Our graduates proceed to occupations such as: • Accountant • Advertising A c c o u n t Manager • Computer Programmer Ca reer/Vo ca tiona I 117 Articulation Agreements Program Flexibility Secondary Schools Whether you choose part-time or full-time studies i n Business Administration, you w i l l be able to accumu- Formalized agreements have been articulated with the late credits toward a certificate, diploma or degree. W e Burnaby, Coquitlam, Vancouver, North and West have designed our programs to suit your needs as w e l l Vancouver, and Sunshine Coast school districts whereby: as the needs of employers. The flexibility o f our Students attaining a " B " or better in Accounting 11 and programs allows you to start with Capilano, b u i l d your Financial Accounting 12 can apply for dual credit for own educational package today and continue to learn B F I N 141. A p p l i c a t i o n forms are held by high school with us in the future. This "laddering" concept proves counsellors and require high school instructor signa- your education can be adapted to fit your changing tures. environment and those o f industry. The Business Administration Department at Capilano University (other than the Open University) offers a variety o f programs from a Bachelor o f A block transfer agreement of 60 credits exists, for Business Administration ( B B A ) degree (in partnership students who have completed the Business Administra- with B . C . ' s Open University), to C o - o p and A d v a n c e d tion diploma program, with the following universities: Diplomas, to General Business and Accelerated R o y a l Roads University, University o f Northern British Diplomas, to numerous certificates. M a n y courses are C o l u m b i a , Athabasca University, University o f transferable from one credential to another, making it Lethbridge. For further information contact Richard easier for students to advance to higher levels. Longworth in the Business Administration department. Articulation Agreements in the Business Administration Department at Capilano College Secondary School Districts Burnaby, Coquitlam, North Vancouver, Sunshine Coast, Articulation Vancouver Business Administration Department Block Transfer Individual West Vancouver | Athabasca U. (BBA) Articulation Royal Roads (BComm) Diploma Block Transfer Articulation U of Lethbridge (BMgt) Business UNBC (BBA) Technology Programs Master's of Business ' Administration 1 Programs | For example: | SFU 1 UBC 1 UVic 1 Individual College) Courses SFU (BBA) WWU (BBA) Evening Certificate . Retail Marketing Certificate 118 and 1 Athabasca U. (Capilano Career/Vocational ' Post-Graduate Diploma Courses Business Applied Open University (BBA) Available in partnership with Capilano College UNBC (BBA) WWU Nova | Southeastern Business Aministration Department Offerings OU BBA Degree Completion Co-op and/or Advanced Diplomas General Business and Accelerated Diplomas Professionalism at Capilano Our graduates have achieved an excellent reputation based on professional performance and positive attitude. O u r classes stress the importance o f maintaining that reputation. A s future leaders and business Certificates administrators, students must be prepared to model appropriate professional behaviour while engaged in Level 4 30 credits Level 3 30 credits 30 credits Level 2 Up to 60 30 credits 30 credits Level 1 credits 30 credits 30 credits College and College-related activities. This is the type of behaviour expected from a professional manager or leader. Block Min. 120 credits Costs Students should be prepared for extra costs other than 60 credits textbooks in some courses. These may include calcula- I Accounting Computing General Mgt. Int'l Business Marketing tors, computer software or specialized course-related | CONCENTRATIONS Retail Mkt. Co-op Cert. 33 cr. kits. Retail Mkt. Cert. 30 cr. Timetables Advanced Even. Cert. 24 cr. individual course descriptions when planning their Even. Cert. Even. Computing Cert. 18cr. Students should not rely on the (F,S,Su) indicators by personal timetable. They should use the Registrar's published timetable for the term or other timetable information from the department. 18 cr. Local Gov't Admin. Cert. 18 cr. English Requirement A l l Business Administration diploma students must complete the English 100 course, or equivalent, to Transferability Students w h o have already completed degrees or taken graduate. T o be eligible for English 100 you must have an " A " i n E n g l i s h 12 or attain a suitable mark i n the Language Proficiency Index (LPI) or the college other university or college courses may apply to have administered English Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) . See the those credits transferred towards the Capilano College E D T information in the Registration section in this Business Administration programs. T o ensure a smooth Calendar. It is preferred that you take the English 100 transition, please provide the Registrar's Office with course in the F I R S T T E R M or prior to completing your transcripts and course outlines when y o u apply. A first year as it is a general prerequisite for all second student must complete at least 50 percent of the level courses. program requirements at Capilano College to receive a Capilano College certificate or diploma. Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) The Business Administration Department is committed Accounting/Finance Designations M a n y o f the courses offered in the D i p l o m a and Degree programs are transferable to the Chartered Accountant ( C A ) , Certified General Accountant to the recognition o f prior learning. Prior learning ( C G A ) , and Certified Management Accountant ( C M A ) assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning accreditation programs. See information included with for credits which have been acquired through life or specific course descriptions and refer to the B . C . work experiences. Y o u can obtain P L A credits for all Transfer Guide and the Capilano College Transfer first-level Guide for more information. courses. F o r further information contact the P L A Coordinator at Capilano College. There is a fee for P L A assessment equal to the regular course costs. Career/Vocational A. BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (BBA) DEGREE COMPLETION PROGRAM (BRITISH COLUMBIA OPEN UNIVERSITY) B. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM W h a t is Co-operative Education? Co-operative (Co-op) Education is a program that Capilano College business diploma graduates have the integrates classroom study with related on-the-job option of pursuing the B . C . Open University's B a c h - work experience. On-campus study alternates with elor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree. periods of paid work experience. The first w o r k term Through a partnership arrangement, courses required to takes place during the M a y to A u g u s t term; the second meet degree requirements are offered at the College. term from January to A p r i l . Graduates may be eligible for a transfer of up to 60 credits toward the B B A degree. In addition, most 300 level business courses transfer to the B . C . Open Co-operative program concentrations include Accounting, Business Computing, General Management, Marketing and Retail Marketing. University for upper level credit. The block transfer is available to recent graduates. Students who graduated prior to 1993 w i l l have their programs individually reviewed and may need to take additional courses to make up for any deficiencies i n the block transfer. Students may also have to make up W h a t are the benefits of Co-op Education? C o - o p i education is a three-way partnership among students, employers and the College, with benefits for each partner. some courses i f they received exemptions in the Capilano College program or do not meet grade The Student requirements as listed below. • T o be eligible for the full block transfer of 60 credits toward the Bachelor o f Business Adminstration, graduates must meet the following requirements: • • • courses in economics and statistics • completion of specific course requirements within the diploma program Develops a network o f contacts to enhance future The Employer • Gains a highly motivated employee with good general and specialized skills. • D i p l o m a holders with an overall G P A o f less than 2.67 or who have graduated seven or more years ago may Is exposed to different jobs integrating classroom employment possibilities. • a m i n i m u m diploma G P A of 2.67 (70% or B - ) • a m i n i m u m grade o f 6 0 % or C - for introductory Earns a salary to help with educational costs. study with on-the-job experience. • an appropriate Capilano College business administration diploma Gains up to eight months o f valuable work experience. Is able to evaluate a co-op student as a potential employee. • Provides input to the College, helping it to keep also apply to the B . C . Open University for entry into current and responsive i n today's constantly chang- the degree completion program. These students may ing market place. receive a reduced block transfer. Degree completion requirements may be met by taking approved business courses at Capilano College, The College • Gains valuable input from business, industry and university transfer courses at Capilano College, and/or government that is used to maintain program courses offered by the B . C . Open University. A l l excellence.. transfer credit is subject to the B . C . Open University's transfer credit policies. H o w are students selected for the Co-op Diploma Program? F o r more information, contact the B . C . Open U n i v e r s i ty's Education Information Services at (604) 431-3300 or 1 -800-663-9711 or obtain a detailed program brochure from Capilano College's Business A d m i n i s tration department. Selection of students for the C o - o p D i p l o m a program in A c c o u n t i n g , Management or Marketing is based on: 1. Completion of a m i n i m u m of first year general business (30 credits). Courses completed at other institutions may be acceptable. 2. A m i n i m u m cumulative grade point average o f 2.67 calculated on Business Administration program courses. Career/Vocational 120 3. References from two Business Administration H o w to A p p l y instructors. 4. A n interview with the C o - o p Education Placement Officer. Students apply to the C o - o p program after completion of the first 30 credits of the Business Administration program. Selection is competitive and space in the C o - o p For more information or to request an application kit contact: program is limited. Business Administration Department W h a t is the Co-op time pattern? C o - o p Education Office The C o - o p D i p l o m a program takes 22 months to Cedar B u i l d i n g , Office 311 or 338 complete. It commences in September and includes Capilano College two work terms and four academic terms. The table 2055 Purcell W a y below shows the sequence o f study and work periods: North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 Academic Term 1 Academic Term 2 Work Term 1 Sept-Dec Jan-Apr May-Aug (4 mos.) (4 mos.) (4 mos.) C o - o p Coordinator David O'Leary Tel: (604) 984-1735 Fax: (604) 984-1734 E - m a i l : doleary@capcollege.bc.ca Academic Term 3 Work Term 2 Academic Term 4 C o - o p Assistant Sep-Dec Jan-Apr May-June John B o y l a n (4 mos.) (4 mos.) (2 mos.) Tel: (604) 983-7557 F a x : (604) 984-1734 E - m a i l : jboylan@capcollege.bc.ca (Currently under review.) Internet: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/co-op/ W h a t happens after a student is admitted to the Co-op Diploma Program? Students admitted to the C o - o p D i p l o m a program in C. BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — A D V A N C E D DIPLOMA PROGRAM September w i l l be eligible to participate in a work Students wanting more concentrated business k n o w l - placement the following summer ( M a y to August). edge may complete the A d v a n c e d Business D i p l o m a . Prior to registering in a work term, students must: Y o u w i l l establish your area o f specialization and gain 1. Attend the pre-employment seminar series offered specific training pertinent to management practices in General Management, Accounting or Marketing. by the C o - o p Education office. 2. M a i n t a i n a m i n i m u m o f 2.67 G P A . A n Advanced D i p l o m a requires 30 credits in addition 3. Have completed 60 credits in the Business A d m i n i s - to a Business Administration D i p l o m a . T o obtain an tration program including the following prerequi- Advanced D i p l o m a you must complete the courses sites: Accounting Option identified below and an appropriate number o f Marketing Option General Management Option B F I N 244 electives for a total of 30 credits. Electives offered in this program can be any business course or any course required to complete the B a c h elor's Degree ( B B A ) . If you also plan to pursue the B F I N 249 B M K T 161 B F I N 341 B M K T 261 Business Administration Degree, you should carefully B F I N 342 B M K T 263 choose your electives to fit the B . C . Open University B M K T 360* requirements. Contact the appropriate degree comple- * Currently under review. Obtaining a C o - o p work placement is a joint effort by the students and the C o - o p Education office. A d m i s - tion convenor in the Business Administration Department at Capilano College or the B . C . Open University Business Advisor. sion to the C o - o p diploma program does not guarantee work placement. Every effort is made to secure placements for eligible C o - o p students. Career/Vocational 121 C O U R S E S REQUIRED FOR A L L A D V A N C E D A D V A N C E D INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS DIPLOMAS DIPLOMA Credits Strategic Management IBUS International Business can qualify for the Advanced D i p l o m a in International or Business by completing the following courses: IBUS 321 334 3.0 Capilano College Business students who have a B A D M 304 Capilano Business diploma (60 credits) or equivalent Communication and Culture in International Business _3_i) Required 6.0 IBUS 321 International Business Credits IBUS 334 Communication and Culture in International Business 3.0 IBUS 340 International Trade L a w 3.0 GENERAL M A N A G E M E N T A D V A N C E D DIPLOMA 3.0 Credits IBUS 357 International M a r k e t i n g 3.0 Management Accounting 3.0 IBUS 399 International Trade Opportunities 3.0 B A D M 301 Operations Management 3.0 A c a d e m i c elective 3.0 B A D M 302 Human Resource Management 3.0 A c a d e m i c elective 3.0 6.0 Business electives BFIN 244 Plus two approved electives Plus three additional electives 9.0 24.0 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING DIPLOMA Credits Required: BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I 3.0 6J0 27.0 A Second Option For Advanced Diplomas Y o u may complete a second option for any A d v a n c e d Business Administration D i p l o m a in the following Plus any six of the following courses, at least four o f ways: which must be taken in Y e a r 3: 1. Complete the Core courses required for all advanced BFIN BFIN 249 341 diplomas, plus all the courses required as requisites Accounting Microcomputer for both options requested*. Indicate on your Applications 3.0 Cost Accounting I 3.0 Request for Evaluation F o r m , that you w i s h to be BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II 3.0 evaluated for two options, and state what the options BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II 3.0 are. If you have successfully completed all courses, BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III 3.0 your diploma w i l l then read: "Business A d m i n i s t r a - 3.0 3.0 tion A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . B o t h options you have 3.0 addition, your permanent student record and tran- BFIN 350 Advanced Financial Management BFIN 351 Taxation Plus one elective completed w i l l be listed immediately below. In script w i l l bear this information. ADVANCED MARKETING DIPLOMA 2. Complete an A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a . A t a subsequent Credits time, you decide to complete the additional courses Required: (minimum 15 credits) in another option. Y o u B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 complete these courses, then submit your Request B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 for Evaluation together with your original diploma. B M K T 360 Marketing Research 3j) Y o u r diploma w i l l then be reissued to read: " B u s i - 9.0 ness Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . The options completed w i l l be listed immediately below, Plus any three o f the following courses: for example: " A c c o u n t i n g and Marketing Options." B M K T 362 Event Marketing & Management 3.0 B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 B M K T 365 Marketing Strategies & Decisions 3.0 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s International Marketing 3.0 3.0 B M K T 367 IBUS 357 Plus two electives 6.0 Note: At least three of the six marketing courses should be taken in year three. Ca reer/Voca 122 tional * Y o u must complete at least 15 additional credits for the second option. TERM 5 - SPRING D. BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) B A D M 399 Co-op Placement II Credits 3_0 3.0 TERM 6 - This three-year program combines co-operative workplace practicums with an innovative curriculum that starts with the first year of the regular Business Diploma program. Job placements for qualifying SUMMER B A D M 304 Strategic Management 3.0 BCOP 325 Network III 3.0 BCOP 333 Network VI 3_Q 9.0 students are full-time for a four-month term and are made through arrangements between the College and Total Program Credits 60.0 employers. Students, in their second and third years, work closely with an advisor to gain the best possible In the dynamic world of computing, nothing is static! placement. Upon completion of their four academic As a result, we are constantly improving and updating terms and two work terms, graduates receive a Busi- the Business Computing Co-op program in a balanced manner. We strive to blend the mainstream of informa- ness Diploma with Co-op designation. tion processing with the leading edge of the emerging technologies. Therefore, the components of the pro- Career Opportunities gram and the details of the courses are subject to Contact: Riley O'Connor, Instructor change. This is especially true of the Networking and Tel: (604) 986-1911, local 2055 Business Computing courses. Email: roconnor@capcollege.bc.ca E. Program Content Prerequisite: First Year Business Administration Diploma Program or equivalent (30 cr.) TERM 7 — FALL BCOP 131 Credits Introduction to Programming & Programming Logic 3.0 BCOP 171 The Developmental Tools of Information Systems 3.0 BCOP 206 Accounting for Managers 3.0 BCOP 215 Network I BCOP 240 Computer Hardware & Software 3.0 3.0 15.0 TERM 2 — SPRING BCOP Credits 204 Business Computing III 3.0 B C O P 214 B C O P 231 B C O P 305 C M P T 184 Business Computing IV Data Management Network II Visual Basic 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 TERM 3 — SUMMER B A D M 299 Co-op Placement I Credits DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — TWO YEAR — FULL-TIME STUDIES (60 CREDITS) Students graduating with a Capilano College Diploma will have the skills and knowledge required to be effective managers. Courses are taught by instructors with practical, up-to-date business knowledge. Many of the faculty hold full or part-time positions in their area of specialty. Class sizes are approximately 36 students, and the faculty are in direct contact with all their students. A full-time course load provides a minimum of 20 instructional hours weekly. We suggest at least 40 hours weekly of outside studies and preparation time will be required. The first year has a common curriculum*. In the second year, students may concentrate on a particular area of specialization that will allow them to continue their studies beyond the two-year diploma. This includes the option to obtain a business degree (Bachelor of Business Administration, [BBA]) at Capilano College through the B.C. Open University. 3_0 Diploma graduates may also be eligible to obtain up to 3.0 a 60 credit block transfer toward undergraduate degrees TERM 4 — FALL at the following universities: University of Northern BCOP 205 Applied Statistics for Business 3.0 B.C., Royal Roads, University of Lethbridge and BCOP 304 Business Computing V 3.0 others. Contact the department for more detailed C M P T 230 Operating Systems 3.0 information. C M P T 289 Systems Implementation 3.0 BCOP Network IV 3.0 329 15.0 * Students planning to pursue the Finance/Accounting option should take the BFIN 142 in year one and the B A D M 107 in year two. Career/Vocational 123 FIRST YEAR — FALL Credits designing your education. Y o u can use the Business BADM 101 Management 3.0 electives to commence specialization in any o f these BADM 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 management areas: BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 • Accounting BFIN 141 Accounting* 3.0 • General Management • Finance ENGL 100 Composition 3.0 • Marketing • International Business 15.0 Credits SPRING • Computing The following is a partial list of Business elective courses. Students planning to continue their studies FIRST YEAR — BADM 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 beyond the two-year D i p l o m a should consult a coordi- BADM 107 3.0 nator to ensure they choose the appropriate electives. BCPT 122 Business L a w I* Business Computing II BMKT 161 3.0 CMNS 220 Marketing* Advanced Business W r i t i n g 3.0 Credits B A D M 301 Operations Management 3.0 B A D M 302 Human Resource Management 3.0 3.0 15.0 B A D M 303 Industrial Relations 3.0 B A D M 304 Strategic Management 3.0 B A D M 310 Quantitative Methods III 3.0 BCPT 221 Business Computing Presentation BFIN 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I 3.0 BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I 3.0 BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II 3.0 BFIN 350 Advanced Financial Management 3.0 BFIN 351 Taxation 3.0 and Editing * Students planning to concentrate their studies in accounting must take B F I N 142 Financial Accounting I in place of B A D M 107 Business L a w I in the spring term. Business L a w ( B A D M 107) w i l l then be taken in the second year. Students not planning to take B F I N 142 may take Marketing ( B M K T 161) in the first term and Accounting ( B F I N ) in the second term. Note: For the daytime general BADM diploma pro- Graphics 3.0 gram: Students must have completed either, all Level 1 B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 courses prior to taking Level 2 courses, or, complete B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 in the term that B M K T 360 B M K T 364 Marketing Research 3.0 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 B M K T 365 Marketing Strategies and Decisions 3.0 all their Level 1 courses concurrently they start their Level 2 courses. In special stances a prerequisite SECOND circum- waiver can be applied. Credits YEAR 3.0 IBUS 321 International Business IBUS 334 Communication and Culture in International Business 3.0 IBUS 340 International Trade L a w 3.0 357 International Marketing 3.0 201 Business Systems 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 BFIN ECON Finance For Managers Principles o f M i c r o E c o n o m i c 3.0 IBUS Theory Business Elective 3.0 3.0 We strongly recommend that the two general electives Business Elective 3.0 (non-business) be university transfer courses from Business Elective Capilano. Students should consider courses in Geography, Business Elective 3.0 3.0 A c a d e m i c Elective 3.0 English 100; however, most non-business courses at or A c a d e m i c Elective 3.0 above the 100 level w i l l be acceptable. Students should 30.0 check with a coordinator to be sure. Students consider- BADM 241 111 Total Diploma Credits 60.0 Economics, Sociology or any language course other than ing the option of obtaining the B . C . Open University's B B A degree should choose courses that carry transfer credit to the B . C . Open University and fulfill B . C . O . U . Concentrate Your Studies With Business Electives general education degree requirements. Please check the B . C . Transfer Guide and B B A program brochure or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. The Capilano College Business D i p l o m a allows you to choose courses that interest you. S i x o f the 10 secondyear courses are electives. Y o u can use the electives to concentrate your studies, focus on career goals or broaden your education. N o other two-year business diploma program gives you so much flexibility in Ca reer/Voca 124 tional Calculus is a requirement in the Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree; therefore it is recommended that you take M A T H 107 Pre-Calculus for Business and Social Sciences as a general elective in your second year, i f you have not obtained at least a "B" grade in MATH 12. (See the Math Placement Test section of this calendar for further details on prerequisite requirements.) F. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE (RMCP) PROGRAM Manufacturer's Sales Representative Manufacturer's Agent Marketing Research-Field Operator Sales Manager Buyer and Central Buyer Sales Representative Consumer Products Marketing Assistant General Information Admission Requirements 1. After successfully completing the course requirements of this program a student will receive a Retail Marketing Certificate or Retail Marketing Co-op Certificate. 2. Upon successful completion of the eight-month Certificate program, courses will be transferable to the Business Administration Diploma program. Students are encouraged to go on to complete the Diploma requirements. • Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to applicants with a minimum of C+ in English 12 and C in Math 11, or • Mature student status • An interview may be required • Submission of the Capilano College Application for Admission together with official transcripts to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Program Content 3. This exciting Retail Marketing Co-op program offers the opportunity to earn your tuition and more while you study the dynamic world of retail marketing. 4. Students get a hands-on business education with numerous opportunities to work in the dynamic world of retail marketing. To receive the Co-op designation, indicating 33 credits (11 courses) completed, the student will participate in a 200 hour paid work placement in industry from early December to mid-January. Many other related career training courses are offered such as Retail Event Management, Retail Buying and Creative Retail Strategies. The strength of this program is in the combination of real world work experience with the appropriate curriculum to support these areas of interest. A Retail Marketing student who completes a Business Administration Diploma with a minimum GPA of 2.67 (70%) may be eligible for a transfer of up to 54 credits toward the Open University's Bachelor of Business Administration Degree (BBA). Students wishing to complete their degree requirements may do so through Capilano College and the Open University. For more information on the Open University degree program please refer to the complete description in the College Calendar. Contact: Marilyn Taylor, 990-7814 Career Opportunities Managing your own business Store Manager—independent, chain or R.C.O. Department Manager Wholesale Sales Representative FIRST YEAR — FALL Credits BADM 101 BCPT 121 CMNS 152 RMCP 164 RMCP 172 Management Business Computing I Report Writing Creative Retail Strategies Retail Technology/ Store Management I Instructional Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3^0 15.0 CO-OP PLACEMENT — December - January RMCP 190 Co-op Work Placement FIRST YEAR — SPRING 3.0 Credits BMKT 161 BMKT 263 RMCP 155 RMCP 173 Marketing Professional Selling Skills Retail Event Management Retail Finance/ Store Management II RMCP 181 Strategic Retail Buying Instructional Credits Total Instructional Credits Total Co-op Work Credits G. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 M 15.0 30.0 3.0 EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The courses in these programs, beginning in September, January, May and July each year, will teach the student basic managerial skills that are of practical value in a wide variety of jobs. Classes are conducted by Department faculty and industry specialists and offered Monday to Thursday evenings. Those enrolled in the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number of credit courses from both the fulltime Diploma programs and the part-time Certificate programs are offered in the evenings during the spring, Career/Vocational 125 summer and fall terms. A limited number o f senior REQUIRED (300 level) courses may be available in the May/June B A D M 201 Business Systems* and July/August terms. BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BCPT 122 Business Computing II 3.0 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE 3.0 * Please contact the convenor for possible substitute for this course. Not all courses are offered each year. A Certificate in Business Administration w i l l be OPTIONAL awarded after successful completion o f the two required courses and a choice o f any four Credits additional Credits 3.0 three-credit courses chosen from the Business A d m i n - BADM 101 Management 106 Organizational Behaviour istration evening or daytime offerings. BADM 107 Business L a w I 3.0 Substitution may be allowed at the discretion o f the BMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 evening program coordinator. BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BFIN 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I REQUIRED BADM Credits B A D M 101 Management 3.0 BMKT Marketing 3.0 161 OPTIONAL B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 B A D M 103 Supervisory Skills 3.0 B A D M 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B A D M 201 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Systems Business Statistics B A D M 268 Entrepreneurship/Small Business 3.0 3.0 3.0 Other courses are offered by the Business Administration Department. H. ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS These 12-month programs are designed to offer business training for mature students. Students have the opportunity to gain a clear understanding of business principles and to refine and add to the on-the-job experience they have previously acquired. B A D M 307 Advanced Business L a w II 3.0 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 tration D i p l o m a is the credit given for work experience BCPT 122 Business Computing II 3.0 through the Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) process. BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 (For complete details refer to the P L A section under 3.0 General Information — Admissions section in this Management BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I A unique feature o f the Accelerated Business A d m i n i s - Calendar). F o r a diploma, students must attain 60 O r other courses offered by the Business Administration Department. credits, of w h i c h up to nine P L A credits are assigned for a m i n i m u m work experience o f seven years. The ADVANCED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE remaining credits are earned from satisfactory completion o f Business Administration courses. Students who do not have the m i n i m u m work experience are required A second or advanced certificate w i l l be awarded following successful completion o f an additional four three-credit courses. These must be chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. to take additional courses so that they graduate with 60 Note: A student must attain a 2.00 GPA or better to certain courses offered by the Department may be qualify for either credits. To allow for the particular educational needs o f students who may have diverse working backgrounds, substituted for others in the second and third term. The certificate. coordinator's approval must be obtained. BUSINESS COMPUTING CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business Computing w i l l be awarded after successful completion of the three required courses and a choice o f any three additional three- credit courses chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. Admission Requirements • Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • M i n i m u m o f seven years business experience in industry, government or private business or an undergraduate degree and three years of experience. • Personal interview conducted February to m i d - A p r i l with final acceptance based on the applicant's work experience, maturity and aptitude for the program. Career/Vocational 126 • A personal resume. SPRING • Submit the Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for Business Statistics 3.0 A d m i s s i o n together with official transcripts and B A D M 210 B F I N 342 Cost Accounting II 3.0 resume to Admissions, Registrar's Office. BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III 3.0 BFIN 249 Accounting Microcomputer Applications BFIN 350 ACCELERATED GENERAL M A N A G E M E N T SUMMER (Classes start early May) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods Credits 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I 3.0 BCPT 122 Business Computing II 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 B M K T 161 Marketing 3.0 FALL 3.0 3.0 A d v a n c e d Financial Management Business Elective* Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours 3.0 &0 60.0 * Please see convenor i f a signature is required. ACCELERATED MARKETING MANAGEMENT • Credits B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 BFIN Credits 241 B M K T 263 Finance for Managers Professional Selling Skills 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level SPRING 3.0 3.0 6.0 Credits SUMMER (Classes start early May) B C P T 121 Business Computing I BFIN Credits 3.0 141 Accounting 3.0 B M K T 161 Marketing 3.0 B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 B C P T 122 Business Computing II 3.0 FALL Credits B A D M 302 H u m a n Resource Management 3.0 B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B A D M 304 Strategic Management 3.0 B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 BFIN 244 Management Accounting 3.0 B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 IBUS 321 International Business B M K T 360 Marketing Research 3.0 or Communication and Culture i n B M K T 365 Marketing Strategies and IBUS 334 International Business 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level 3.0 Decisions 3.0 1 Business Elective at the 200 or 300 level 3.0 6.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent 9XJ SPRING Total credit hours 60.0 B A D M 304 241 3.0 B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s 3.0 Communication and Culture i n International Business 1 Business Elective* 3.0 3.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours 9£ 60.0 BFIN ACCELERATED ACCOUNTING MANAGEMENT IBUS SUMMER (Classes start early May) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B A D M 201 Business Systems BCPT 121 Business Computing I BFIN BFIN 141 142 Accounting Financial A c c o u n t i n g I * C M N S 220 A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing FALL Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Credits Credits Strategic Management Finance for Managers 3.0 334 * Electives can be any appropriate Business A d m i n i s tration course o f 3 credits. I. PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 BFIN 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I 3.0 accounting associations. Students can start taking the BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II 3.0 courses in any term and work towards a designation at Marketing 3.0 their own pace. It is very important to take B F I N 141 B M K T 161 Business Elective* 3.0 A l l o f the courses listed below transfer to professional and 142 at the beginning because they are prerequisites for many courses. Career/Vocational For more detailed information, call 984-4960 and C a l l the Business Administration Department for a request the Professional Accounting Transfer informa- brochure and details. Appointments for interviews are tion package. conducted from M a r c h through January. In order to receive a certificate, diploma or degree, Contact: Collen Liptaj, Learning Assistant Tel: (604) 990-7871 or see our Web Site for current information: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/badm/ cmpt.csp.html students must take other courses. It is crucial that courses are taken in the proper sequence to receive a diploma or de gree. B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods B A D M 106 Organizational Behaviour B A D M 107 Program Content Credits TERM 1 January - February BCOP 215 Network I 3.0 BCOP 305 Network II 3.0 3.0 BCPT 121 Business L a w I Business Computing I BCPT 122 Business Computing II CMPT 180 Microcomputer Applications I BFIN 141 Accounting CMPT 182 Introduction to Systems BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I CMNS 170 Public Speaking Presentation Skills TERM 2 March - April ECON 111 Principles of M i c r o e c o n o m i c Theory BCOP 231 Data Management 3.0 ECON 112 Principles of Macroeconomic Theory 3.0 100 Composition 329 155 Network I V ENGL BCOP CMPT Quantitative Methods for Managers 3.0 B A D M 201 Business Systems CMPT 222 Microcomputer Applications II 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics 3.0 12.0 12.0 BFIN 241 TERM 3 BFIN 249 Finance for Managers Accounting Microcomputer May - June BCOP 325 Network III 3.0 Applications BCOP 331 Network V 3.0 CMNS 220 Advanced Business W r i t i n g and Editing CMPT 152 Structured Programming 3.0 B A D M 310 Quantitative Methods III CMPT 191 Accounting for Managers I 3.0 BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II TERM 4 July - August BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II BCOP 333 Network V I 3.0 BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III BMKT 160 Marketing 3.0 BFIN 350 Advanced Financial Management CMPT 223 Microcomputer Applications III 3.0 351 Taxation CMPT 224 Microcomputer Applications I V 3.0 BFIN 12.0 12.0 J. COMPUTER SPECIALIST PROGRAM Capilano College has developed this unique business TERM 5 September - October BCOP CMPT Network V I I Systems Implementation 335 289 6.0 computing program to address the challenge of emerging electronic commerce through microcomputers, business information systems, database management, networking, and web page design. 3.0 3.0 P L A Credits m T O T A L CREDIT HOURS 60.0 Each year, starting in January, Capilano College w i l l offer this ten-month computer program leading to a two-year diploma in Business Administration. The program is offered in two-month segments to enable K. CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER™ PROGRAM you to concentrate more intensely over a shorter period o f time. A b o u t the Program Capilano College is certified by Microsoft and N o v e l l . Developed by the Canadian Institute of Financial A l l certified courses are taught by our Microsoft and Planning specifically for individuals who w i s h to N o v e l l certified instructors. Students are advised to become qualified professional financial planners, the write Microsoft and N o v e l l certified exams to attain program covers the full spectrum of financial products, further certification. services and strategies. Capilano College now offers the Certified Financial Planner™ Program ( C F P ) on the institute's behalf, with the approval of the Financial Career/Vocational 128 Planners Standards Council of Canada. After completing the program, students with two years work experience can write the professional proficiency examination in order to receive the CFP™ certification mark. This non-credit program is offered in partnership with the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning and the Capilano College Business Administration Department. The CFP programs are offered at various start dates throughout the year. For further information, contact the Continuing Education Department at 984-4901. Program Content Personal Financial Planning — An Introduction to Personal Financial Planning Wealth Accumulation — The Fundamentals of Investment Planning Controlling the Future — Creating Financial Security Strategic Investment Planning — Understanding Investment Products and Investment Strategies Risk Management and Estate Planning — The Role of Insurance,and Estate Planning in Personal Financial Management Professional Practice — Comprehensive Financial Planning and Professional Ethics ™ Trademarks of the Certified Financial Planner Board of Standards, Inc., used under licence. Neither the Canadian Institute of Financial Planning nor Capilano College award the rights to use the marks CFP™, Certified Financial Planner™ and CFP. The right to use the marks is granted under licence by the FPSCC to those persons who have met its educational standards passed by the FPSCC Professional Proficiency Examination, satisfied a work experience requirement and agreed to abide by the Code of Ethics. L. LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M This program is designed with and for professionals currently employed by Municipalities, First Nations Governments, Regional Districts, Improvement Districts, or supporting agencies in British Columbia. The purpose of the program is to provide opportunities for participants to gain increased knowledge of the political and organizational realities of local governments in B.C. as well as identifying opportunities for change within these systems. It is expected that participants will be more effective managers, leaders and change agents as a result of their involvement in the program. The Education Committee of the Municipal Officers' Association (M.O.A.) of British Columbia and the Provincial Board of Examiners has sanctioned several courses of study offered through the college and university systems in British Columbia which, when supplemented by work experience in B.C. local government, will lead to Provincial Certification. The four courses described below are recognized by the M.O.A. and Board of Examiners as being transferable for credit toward the Intermediate Certificate in Municipal Administration. (For more details about the Board of Examiners/M.O.A. Certificate Programs, contact David Morris, Executive Director, Municipal Officers' Association, Victoria at 250-383-7032.) On completion of the following four PADM courses (Local Government Administration, Local Government Services, Municipal Law, and Municipal Finance in British Columbia), plus two other courses, successful candidates will be eligible to receive a Capilano College Professional Certificate in Local Government Administration. Contact: Linn Teetzel, 984-4960, ext. 2340 or 983-7570, ext. 2340, fax: 990-7878 E-mail: Iteetzel @ capcollege. bc.ca COURSES Credits PADM 300 Local Government Administration in B.C. 3.0 PADM 301 Local Government Services in B.C. 3.0 PADM 302 Municipal Finance in B.C. 3.0 PADM 303 Municipal Law in B.C. 3.0 Two BADM, University Transfer or other courses approved by the Department. (L0 18.0 M . N E T W O R K SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M (NSP) This program is for people interested in a long-term computing career in the hottest employment market available — networking. The Network Specialist Certificate Program is designed to train computing candidates in cross-platform networking and to meet the specific needs of the local market. All certified courses are taught by our Novell and Microsoft certified instructors. Capilano College is the only college or university certified by both Novell and Microsoft in Western Canada. We are also accredited by CIPS, the Canadian Information Processing Society. Contact: Colleen Liptaj, Learning Assistant Tel: (604) 990-7871 Career/Vocational 129 Program Content Program Content TERM* Credits TERM1 March-April TCPP182 Introduction to Systems Credits 3.0 3.0 NSCP NSCP 305 Network II 325 Network III 3.0 3.0 TCPP215 Network I NSCP 329 Network I V 3.0 TCPP240 Computer Hardware and Software 3.0 T C P P 305 Network II — Network NSCP 331 Network V 3.0 NSCP 333 Network V I 3.0 N S C P 335 Network V I I Self Study Networking Essentials 3.0 Administration 3.0 TERM II May - June T C P P 152 Structured Programming 3.0 T C P P 231 Data Management 3.0 *Note: The Network Specialist Certificate Program T C P P 325 Network III — NetWare 3.0 begins every September, October, January and March, T C P P 329 Network I V — N T C o r e 3.0 (Microsoft designation) 18.0 Credits with every intake following the same sequence of courses as listed above. Each course is two months in TERM III July-August duration and is offered on evenings and weekends. T C P P 230 Operating Systems 3.0 In the dynamic w o r l d o f computing nothing is static! T C P P 233 Server-Based Data Management 3.0 A s a result, we are constantly improving and updating T C P P 252 V i s u a l Basic Programming 3.Q the Network Specialist Program i n a balanced manner. T C P P 331 Network V — N T Enterprise 3.0 Credits Therefore, components o f the program and the details TERM IV September NEW W i n d o w s 2000 Foundation N. TECHNICAL COMPUTER PROFESSIONAL PROGRAM (TCP) T C P P 300 Work Term TERM V November The Technical Computer Professional program is for T C P P 333 Network V I — T C P / I P people seeking to enhance their abilities with a range o f NEW V i s u a l Basic Programming II advanced technical skills that are in high demand. T C P P 335 Network V I I — N T W e b Server NEW Data Warehousing TBA Credits of the courses are subject to adjustment without notice. B u i l d i n g on the success o f the Computer Specialist program, the T C P program includes computing core courses, networking, distributed computing, electronic business, IT management and a two-month work term. Upon completion o f this in-depth 12-month diploma program, graduates w i l l possess strong general k n o w l edge and skills i n the field o f business computing. Augmented by self-study, graduates w i l l be eligible for the following industry certifications: • Microsoft Certified Professional ( M C P ) • Microsoft Certified Professional Plus Internet ( M C P + Internet) • Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer ( M C S E ) • Certified N o v e l l Administrator ( C N A ) • Microsoft Certified Solution Developer ( M C S D ) • Microsoft Certified Data Base Administrator (MCDBA) • Certified Network Professional ( C N P ) • Capilano College Technical Computer Professional ( T C P ) and Network Specialist Professional ( N S P ) . Career/Vocational 130 - October . - December Credits TBA 6.0 Credits 3.0 TBA 3.0 TERM VI January - February T C P P 289 Systems Implementation T C P P 306 Object Oriented Programming NEW e-commerce TBA NEW W i n d o w s 2000 A d v a n c e d TBA T C P P 200* IT Management Total Credits: 3.0 3.0 6.0 69.0 * T C P P 200 is included as a series o f seminars throughout the program. V i e w our website for current information at: www.capcollege.bc.ca/badm/tcp or call 990-7871 for more information. BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS PROGRAM COMMERCIAL ANIMATION PROGRAM Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty D. B L A N E Y , ID (UBC), CPS, M.Ed. (SFU) J. D E L A N E Y , Head o f Layout & Design, Delaney & M . C R A G G , B A L a w (Durham), B . C Teaching Cert. L . C R O W E , B.Sc. ( U of Conn.) M B A ( N . Eastern Univ.) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B S A (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M A ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) Friends Cartoon Productions M . G H O R E I S H I , D i p . Animation/Television (Algonquin), Instructor's Cert. (Iran), Theatre Stage Design (Iran) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor K . K O H A T S U , Independent animator/animation C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) designer S. H O R N , I D ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) D . M A R J A N O V I C , B A (Sarajevo), Theatre, F i l m and N . P O W E R , B A (Concordia), L a b Supervisor T V Direction (Middlesex Polytechnics i n London) C . S C H N U R R E N B E R G E R , L a b Supervisor D . P E R R O , D i p . F i l m A n i m a t i o n ( E m i l y Carr College K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C G A of A r t & Design), Cert. Teacher Development Program (Ontario) Support Staff E . S A L L O C H , D i p . Classical Animation (Sheridan Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist College) Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant E . T E I C H R O E B , Cert. Vancouver Vocational Institute W. V A N L U V E N , BA, M F A (UBC) The Program The Business Fundamentals program is a four-month program that may be taken on a full-time or part-time basis during the fall or spring semester. The Business Support Staff D . Holmes, Program Assistant Fundamentals program has been designed for students General Information who require basic business skills training or who need In the past 10 years, animation has exploded onto to upgrade their skills. M a n y students take this program motion picture and television screens around the world. as a stepping stone to a more advanced program o f There has been an increasing demand for skilled studies. Graduates o f this program may ladder into animation artists caused by the continued success o f Business Administration to take more advanced courses both limited animation television series and major film leading towards a degree. productions. C o m m e r c i a l animation companies in Students who receive a m i n i m u m o f " B " in the following courses w i l l receive credit from Business A d m i n i s - British C o l u m b i a have been approached by both American and European animation producers to provide services and/or co-produce animation projects. tration: The only limitation on the industry to respond to these • B T E C 146 is equivalent to B C P T 121 opportunities has been the shortage of commercially- • B T E C 124 is equivalent to B C P T 121 and 122 trained animators. Contact: Applied E-mail: Business Technology: 984-4959 Contact: abt@capcollege.bc.ca 983-75J6; E-mail: toons@capcollege.bc.ca The Program Admission Requirements • Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status The Commercial Animation program prepares students for employment in the animation industry, specifically • Eligible students w i l l attend an information meeting and personal interview. in the area of classical (character) animation. This intense program focuses on drawing skills and studio procedures in the production of animated commercials, Program Profile B T E C 111 television series, computer game design and feature Credits films. The program works closely with producers o f Business English I 3.0 traditional and computer animation, establishing and B T E C 115 Business Systems & Procedures 3.0 evolving the curriculum to meet the industry's need for B T E C 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 skilled animators and animation designers. N e w B T E C 124 Microcomputer Applications o r B T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I Certificate R e q u i r e m e n t s students are admitted each September in a class o f 22. 6XJ 15.0 Career/Vocational 131 Part-Time Evening Courses Part-time, non-credit animation courses are offered through the Continuing Education Department. Courses are designed for prospective applicants who Prospective students should contact the A n i m a t i o n Department directly to receive the current admissions package which contains everything necessary to apply for admission to the C o m m e r c i a l Animation program. want to find out what a career i n commercial animation is like before they commit to a full-time animation Information Meetings program. Courses in L i f e D r a w i n g and Computer Information meetings w i l l be held between September Animation are also available. Part-time courses are and A p r i l . Please contact the department at 983-7516 taught by faculty in the full-time program. Contact for dates and times. Continuing Education, 984-4901 for details. Special Fees and Expenses Animation Fundamentals Summer Institute This eight week, full-time program provides students Students may expect to pay approximately $4,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the twoyear program. with a broad foundation o f skills related to the animation industry. It is designed for individuals seeking a career in animation who want to further develop their skills and portfolio prior to entering either the full-time Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the C o m m e r c i a l Animation Digital Animation or C o m m e r c i a l Animation Pro- program, the student must successfully complete all the grams. Twenty-four students are accepted each sum- component courses. mer. The program runs during June and July. The four areas of study are: D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n ; Design; Animation Principles and T i m i n g ; and Digital A n i m a tion. Contact the Animation Department for further information. Professional Standards A l l C o m m e r c i a l Animation students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and professional behaviour. Admission Requirements and Procedures FIRST TERM 1. A n Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, A N I M 111 Animation D r a w i n g I 6.0 together with official transcripts o f all secondary and A N I M 112 Animation Design I 2.25 post-secondary courses to Admissions, Registrar's A N I M 113 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n I 3.0 Office. A N I M 114 History o f Character A n i m a t i o n 2.25 C M N S 115 Communications for A n i m a t i o n 31) 2. Requisites: Program Content Credits 16.5 • • 18 years of age Grade 12 completion or equivalent SECOND TERM • Strong drawing skills A N I M 121 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g II Applicants must include five 8-1/2" x 11" drawings A N I M 122 A n i m a t i o n Design II 1.5 with their Application for A d m i s s i o n which must be A N I M 123 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n II 3.0 sent to the Registrar's Office by m i d - A p r i l . The A N I M 124 Anatomy for A n i m a t i o n 1.5 drawings should demonstrate an ability to draw A N I M 126 Layout Design I 1.5 accurately from life. Applicants deemed acceptable M D I A 120 F i l m Studies for A n i m a t i o n L5 and subject matter and demonstrate the applicant's aptitude for cartoon animation design. During the portfolio reviews, applicants w i l l complete a drawing exercise consisting o f a still life rendered realistically. The five drawings, portfolio, and drawing exercise w i l l be graded, and the top 22 applicants w i l l be accepted into the program. The remaining acceptable applicants w i l l be offered a place on a waiting list, ranked according to their respective scores. Ca reer/Voca 132 tional 6.0 15.0 w i l l be invited to present a portfolio o f drawings in person. The portfolio should show a diversity o f style Credits THIRD TERM Credits A N I M 231 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g III 4.5 A N I M 232 Storyboard D e s i g n 3.0 A N I M 233 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n III 3.0 A N I M 234 Computer A n i m a t i o n 3.0 A N I M 236 Layout Design II 3,0 16.5 FOURTH TERM A N I M 241 Animation Drawing IV Credits cants who wish to enrol only in the open Communica- 3.0 tions courses must also submit an Application for A N I M 242 Major Projects 3.0 Admission. Specify the program as Career — Commu- A N I M 243 Life Drawing for Animation IV 3.0 nications courses only. All applicants must be admitted A N I M 245 Colour and Media 3J) to the College before registration can be completed. 12.0 Diploma Requirement 60.0 University Transfer Courses Some Communications courses are eligible for full or COMMUNICATIONS partial university transfer credit. Please check the B.C. Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more information. Instructional Faculty C. KILIAN, B A (Columbia), M A (SFU) B. REID, B A (Alberta) Special Fees and Expenses L. S A V A G E , B A (McGill), Dip.Ed., M.Ed. (Alberta) Some C M N S classes require special fees. Consult the A. S E D K Y , B A , M A , PhD (Ain Shams, Cairo) convenor if you have any questions about such fees in G. W A U G H , B A (Reading), M A (UBC), Standard your course. Special fees may apply to some courses. Teaching Credentials (UK), B.C. Registered Please contact the department for information Psychologist W. V A N L U V E N , B A , M F A (UBC) M. W I T T M A N , B A (Toronto), M A (UBC) The Communications (CMNS) Department provides training in writing and speech for students in University Transfer and Career/Vocational programs, as well as those wishing to apply specific skills to the world of work. C M N S offers courses in business and technical writing, public speaking, freelance writing, and English Courses C M N S 080 — Career Program Communications C M N S 110 — Standard English Usage C M N S 111 — Administrative Writing C M N S 115 — Communications for Animation Preparation for E S L Students C M N S 120 — Effective Writing and Speech C M N S 125 — Communication Theory C M N S 130 — Introductory Media Communications C M N S 136 — Introduction to Film & T V Contact: CrawfordKilian, Convenor, 983-7585 E-mail: ckilian@thehub.capcollege.bc.ca C M N S 137 — Elements of Film and Television Career Opportunities C M N S 138 — Workshop in Film and T V C M N S 145 — Writing for the Worldwide Web basics. Scriptwriting in Canada Scriptwriting In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset in any career. Many career program C M N S courses offer components on effective job search techniques, including resume writing and interviewing. Courses for freelance writers equip students with the basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. Admission Requirements Scriptwriting for Canadian Markets C M N S 146 — Introduction to Web Writing C M N S 152 — Report Writing C M N S 153 — Communications and the Arts C M N S 154 — Communications in Outdoor C M N S 159 — Communications for the Legal C M N S 165 — Technical Presentations Recreation and Tourism Secretary Students wishing to enrol in a specialized career pro- C M N S 170 — Public Speaking Presentation Skills gram C M N S course must meet the admission standards C M N S 179 — Legal Communications of that particular program. In some cases students may C M N S 190 — Magazine Article Writing wish to take the C M N S component before enrolling in C M N S 220 — Advanced Business Writing and the rest of the program. Such students will require Editing permission of the coordinators of both C M N S and the C M N S 250 — career program in question. C M N S 280 — Marketing Commercial Fiction Students wishing to enrol in open sections of C M N S C M N S 354 — Advanced Communications for C M N S 356 — Advanced Media Communications Tourism Management must meet general College admission standards. Applications for Admission to individual programs must Introduction to Technical Writing be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Appli- Career/Vocational 133 Admission Requirements and DIGITAL ANIMATION PROGRAM Procedures 1. A n Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, together with official transcripts o f all secondary Instructional and post-secondary courses to Admissions, Regis- Faculty C . H O L U B , D i p . A n i m a t i o n for Television (Algonquin) A . S A L E , Cert. Softimage Instructor L e v e l 2 0 T & 3 0 1 , Cert. 3 D Animation & Digital Effects (Vancouver F i l m School) trar's Office. 2. Requisites: • 18 years o f age • Grade 12 completion or equivalent • Strong D r a w i n g and Design Skills C . S I M M O N S , D i p . Digital A r t & Design, D i p . Fine • Traditional Animation Skills (See C o m m e r c i a l Arts (University C o l l e g e o f the Cariboo), Cert. A n i m a t i o n in the College Calendar) Instructor Development (New Brunswick) General Information Consumer demand for high quality animation and Applicants who have successfully graduated from the Commercial Animation program at Capilano College will be allowed direct entry into the Digital Animation program. visuals has fueled the growth of the computer animation industry. V i s u a l artists with excellent character anima- A l l applicants are encouraged to have two years tion skills and a firm understanding o f computer professional art experience or have completed a post- animation technology are in demand worldwide. W i t h secondary diploma i n a related discipline such as the assistance o f new computer animation technologies, C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n , Graphic Design, Illustration, skilled animators are producing stunning visuals for F i l m , Television, Computer Graphics and Fine or computer games, multimedia, web, television and V i s u a l Arts before entering the program. A s w e l l , feature film. applicants should have a w o r k i n g knowledge o f computer systems and software. Contact: 990-7854; E-mail: animation®capcollege.be.ca Applicants must also submit the following items with their Application for A d m i s s i o n to the Registrar's i Office by M a r c h 31st: The Program • a current resume The goal of the Digital Animation program is to prepare • a letter o f intent describing reasons for applying talented artists for a successful career in the computer to the Digital Animation program and long-term animation field. This intensive 32-week training career interests / goals program is designed for accomplished artists and animators wishing to develop the artistic and technical • a portfolio o f artistic work ( 1 0 - 1 5 drawings and designs - photocopies or duplicates only). skills necessary to work i n the computer animation Successful applicants w i l l display excellent drawing, industry. This production-oriented approach to training design and creative problem solving abilities. C a n d i - prepares students for a successful animation career i n dates shortlisted on the basis of portfolios w i l l be asked the entertainment industry. to attend a personal interview and portfolio review, The program is focused on developing students' after which a final selection o f 16 applicants w i l l be creative and artistic skills i n the areas o f drawing, made. design, character animation, and storytelling. U s i n g leading edge software tools, students w i l l develop their 3 D modeling, texturing and animation expertise. Successful graduates w i l l complete a professional quality demo reel showcasing their 3 D design and Information Meetings Information meetings w i l l be held on a monthly basis. Please contact the Digital Animation program at (604) 990-7854 for dates and times. computer animation abilities. P r o g r a m Start D a t e : A m a x i m u m of sixteen candidates w i l l be selected for admission each September. Special Fees and Students may expect to pay approximately $6,500 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the 32week program. Career/Vocational 134 Expenses Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the Digital A n i m a t i o n Program, the students must successfully complete all EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION P R O G R A M the component courses. A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M S B. INFANT A N D TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM C. SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Professional Standards A l l Digital A n i m a t i o n students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and professional behaviour. Program Content Instructional Faculty FIRST TERM Credits DIGI311 3 D Character A n i m a t i o n I 6.0 DIGI312 3 D Design I 4.5 DIGI313 D r a w i n g & Design I 2.25 DIGI314 A n i m a t i o n Principles 2.25 DIGI315 A n i m a t i o n Production I 3.0 18.0 SECOND TERM 3 D Character A n i m a t i o n II DIGI322 3 D Design II 4.5 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g & Design II 2.25 DIGI325 (Ryerson) A . C A R R , M A ( S F U ) , D i p . E d . (London) J. C L A R K , R N (Regina General Hospital), Teaching D i p . (Sask.) K . K U M M E N , M . E d . ( U . of Manitoba), E C E Cert. J. M O S E S , B A , B S W (McMaster), M . E d . ( U B C ) , E C E Cert., C o o r d i n a t o r DIGI321 DIGI323 DIGI324 R. A N N E , B . S c . ( C o l u m b i a Pacific), D i p . E C E 6.0 A n i m a t i o n Principles II 2.25 A n i m a t i o n Production II ' 3.0 18.0 36.0 Certificate Requirements D . O ' K R A I N E T Z , B . E d . ( U B C ) , E C E Cert. T. S M I T H , M A (Pacific Oaks College), E C E D i p . Support Staff Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Lorraine Sikavish — Receptionists Diane M i l l s — Program Assistant N o t e : Changes in this curriculum in accordance outline may be made with industry and college requirements. Our society is recognizing the importance o f the early years in children's development. There is an increasing need in communities for child care services, and for •trained staff who can ensure that all children's interests and needs are met in a variety o f programs. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education program prepares students to work in various settings, including preschools and daycare centres. Contact: 984-4960 Email: ecce@capcollege.bc.ca Career Opportunities Graduates o f the programs have found rewarding careers working in licensed preschool and daycare centres, in schools as Special Education Teaching Assistants, as Community Care L i c e n s i n g Officers, in management positions in childcare organizations and as consultants. The placement record for our graduates is excellent. Career/Vocational 135 Credentials A w a r d e d courses: E N G L 100, A N T H 121, A H I S 100, B I O L A. Early Childhood Care and Education Certificate W M S T 100. 104, P H I L 101, P S Y C 100, 101, S O C . 100, 101, This is awarded to students who successfully complete the full-time or part-time basic program. Application Procedure 1. Complete and submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n B. Infant & Toddler Certificate directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts for secondary and post- F o l l o w i n g successful completion of the Early C h i l d - secondary education. hood Care and Education Certificate program and the Infant & Toddler program, the student is awarded an 2. Attend the Information M e e t i n g in Spring, 2001. Infant & Toddler Certificate from Capilano College. C a l l 984-4960 i n January, 2001 for the date o f the information meeting. After the Information Meeting, you w i l l schedule a group interview time. C. Special Needs Certificate F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d - 3. A t the interview, you must submit a resume, three hood Care and Education Certificate program and the letters o f reference, and complete a writing assign- Special Needs program, the student is awarded a ment. Special Needs Certificate from Capilano College. 4. A Reading Assessment w i l l be required. E C C E Diploma A diploma in Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education is Upon Acceptance granted by Capilano College to students who have Submit a completed medical report on a form provided successfully completed the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and by the College, plus evidence o f absence o f active Education Certificate and both the Infant & Toddler tuberculosis. and Special Needs Certificates. The Early Childhood Care and Education Certificate Continuation in the Program and successful completion of the required 500 hours Continuation into each term o f the programs is depend- work experience enables students to register as an ent upon the demohstration o f satisfactory interper- Early Childhood Educator in British C o l u m b i a by sonal, academic and teaching/guiding skills. " C - " is the applying to the Manager of Early C h i l d h o o d Programs m i n i m u m acceptable grade in all courses. Practicum at the Community Care Facility Branch. Certificates i n grades must be " C " or higher. Infant & Toddler Education and Special Needs Educa- , tion may also be acquired through the C C F B . Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $1,200 Admission Requirements on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be i n - Enrolment in the Early Childhood Care and Education curred for a First A i d course and transportation to Certificate programs is limited to 25 students. practicums. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age, be a high school graduate, have college-level writing and academic skills and have 40 hours experience as an employee or volunteer in a licensed early childhood A. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS setting within the last two years. A commitment to young children and their families and evidence of . The North Vancouver campus offers both a full-time interpersonal and life skills are also essential. A p p l i - 10-month program and a part-time program which may cants should be aware that a criminal record check is be completed within two years. Sechelt and Squamish now required by practicum placements and employers. campuses may offer part-time programs. D u e to the intensity of the full-time program, it is These programs are based on the "Competencies i n recommended that applicants have at least one year o f Early C h i l d h o o d Education," and are approved by the college or university experience. Community Care Facilities Branch of the M i n i s t r y o f Health. The foundation o f the E C C E programs is the In preparation for applying to the program, prospective students may choose to take some o f the following Career/Vocational 136 study of development from birth to school-age. The history and current philosophies of early childhood education are examined. A n interrelated series of courses focus on the care and education o f young children from an anti-bias perspective. Students also study program planning, curriculum content, health and nutrition, interpersonal skills and family-centre relationships. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program. Students have practical experience i n three practicum centres under the Program Content — North Vancouver Campus Part-time — First Year FALL TERM Credits E D U C 166 C h i l d Development I 2.25 E D U C 170 Interpersonal S k i l l s 1.5 E D U C 171 C a r i n g & Learning 1.5 Environments guidance of qualified Early C h i l d h o o d Educators. In practicum centres students adhere to the Early C h i l d - SPRING TERM hood Educators o f B . C . ' s Code o f Ethics. Credits E D U C 167 C h i l d Development II 2.25 Courses are presented in a manner w h i c h promotes E D U C 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I 1.5 active participation through demonstrations, oral E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I 1.5 reports, group projects, role play and discussions. SUMMER TERM*** Credits Program Content — North Vancouver Campus E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I CIP* E D U C 177 Observing and Recording 4.5 Due to possible licensing changes, courses may be re- * C I P — Course in Progress structured. *** A l l students must have E N G L 100 or C M N S 111 Full-time to graduate. C M N S 111 is offered in the spring term in the evening, one night per week. FALL TERM Credits E D U C 155 C h i l d h o o d Development 4.5 E D U C 170 Interpersonal S k i l l s 1.5 E D U C 171 C a r i n g and Learning 1.5 Environments E D U C 172 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n I 1.5 E D U C 173 C u r r i c u l u m Development I 1.5 E D U C 175 Observing and Recording 1.5 E D U C 176 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m I 10 15.0 SPRING TERM Credits Part-time — Second Year FALL TERM Credits E D U C 220 Health, Safety and Nutrition 1.5 E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g Children II 1.5 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 E D U C 276 4.0 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m II SPRING TERM Credits E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 E D U C 270 Introduction to W o r k i n g E D U C 220 Health, Safety & Nutrition 1.5 with Families 1.5 E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II CIP* E D U C 256 Children in Inclusive Settings E D U C 272 G u i d i n g Y o u n g C h i l d r e n II E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 1.5 E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - P r a c t i c u m III 4.0 1.5 SUMMER Credits ftQ E D U C 256 C h i l d r e n i n Inclusive Settings E D U C 271 Introduction to Centre E D U C 276 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m II 13.0. SUMMER TERM*** E D U C 277 TERM*** 1.5 Organization 1.5 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m III C I P * E D U C 270 Introduction to W o r k i n g with Families 1.5 * C I P — Course in Progress Organization 1.5 Program Content — Squamish E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II CIP* Please check Squamish calendar. E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y — P r a c t i c u m III 4£ 7.0 Program Content — Sechelt E D U C 271 Introduction to Centre Please check Sechelt calendar. Career/Vocational 137 B. C. INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE PROGRAM SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM SPRING TERM E D U C 352* E D U C 354 Credits Centre Operations (Spring '01) Program Planning for Special 2.0 Needs (Spring '02) 1.5 E D U C 358 Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum 15 These evening part-time programs are for the student 6.5 who is certified as an Early Childhood Educator or is in the process o f completing the required 500 hours work *These courses apply to b o t h the Infant/Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. experience. Each program consists o f seven courses including two practicums. Courses are scheduled i n the evenings and Saturdays. Practicums are scheduled on an individual basis to meet students' needs. Students must be enrolled in Infant/Toddler or Special Needs courses or be in the process o f completing the certificate(s) in N o t e : EDUC 350, 351 and 352 are core courses and are therefore, components of both the Infant and Toddler and Special Needs Certificate programs. Due to possible licensing changes, courses may be restructured. order to register in the post basic practicums. Courses in these programs are scheduled on a two-year Transfer Credits rotation. Students may begin at any time in the se- Transfer credits w i l l not automatically be given for quence. There are three core courses which are part o f courses taken at other institutions. Students w i l l be both programs. required to demonstrate current knowledge before course exemption w i l l be granted. Courses taken before Infant & Toddler Certificate Program Program Content FALL TERM E D U C 350* Requests for transfer credit must be submitted on the Credits 2.0 E D U C 351* F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y (Fall '01) E D U C 355 Physical Care & Safety E D U C 356 E D U C 357 (Fall 2000) Infant and Toddler Practicum Infant and Toddler Practicum 2.0 1.5 1.5 L5 8.5 SPRING TERM "Request for Transfer Credit" form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. Advanced C h i l d Development (Fall 2000) 1990 w i l l be considered stale and w i l l not be granted exemption (at the discretion of the department). Credits FILM STUDIES P R O G R A M A. PROFESSIONAL FILM STUDIES PROGRAM B. ACTING FOR THE C A M E R A PROGRAM Program Manager: Bob Morris E D U C 352* Centre Operations ( S p r i n g ' 0 1 ) 2.0 E D U C 353 Program Planning (Spring '01) 1.5 E D U C 356 Infant and Toddler Practicum 1.5 Instructional 15 6.5 M . B E R R Y , D i p l o m a (Royal A c a d e m y of Fine A r t , E D U C 357 Infant and Toddler Practicum Faculty London) K . C U T L E R , Instructor Special Needs Certificate Program J. L E W I S , F i l m D i p l o m a (Chicago A c a d e m y of Fine Arts) Program Content B. M U R D O C K , B F A (UVic), M F A (UBC) Credits FALL TERM E D U C 262 Special Education (Fall '01) E D U C 350* A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development E D U C 351* (Fall 2000) F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y 2.0 E . P E T U R S O N , M A (University o f Alberta) J. S T I L L , D i p l o m a (National Theatre School o f C . W I L L I A M S , M e d i a Resources'Specialist (Capilano Canada) (Fall '01) 2.0 Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum 15 9.0 138 D . N E U F E L D , Instructor 2.0 E D U C 358 Career/Vocational J. N A B L O , M A (San Diego) College) A. PROFESSIONAL FILM STUDIES PROGRAM produced by the applicant, an essay outlining reasons for wanting to work i n film, proof o f volunteer work i n film or video, proof o f c o m - Career Opportunities The film production sector is facing a shortage of skilled, experienced and properly trained workers to support the service industry and develop our local film production capability. F i l m production i n the L o w e r pleting related courses, etc. It is strongly recommended that at least an essay be included. This documentation w i l l be helpful to the selection committee members when making their decision. 2. A n application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, M a i n l a n d has grown by an average o f 21 percent each together with official transcripts o f all secondary and year for the past 10 years, with no end in sight. This post-secondary courses to Admissions, Registrar's makes film production one o f the fastest growing Office. In addition, a non-refundable $20 applica- industries in the province. tion fee ($100 for international students) must accompany your application. Applications for the The Program The Professional F i l m Studies Program is a two semester program o f twelve weeks per semester, that Fall intake w i l l be accepted at any time prior to A p r i l 14. Applicants w i l l be notified o f their admission status by M a y 15. gives students an introduction to the film industry and 3. The Program tuition fee is $4,500. The first semes- the variety of jobs available in f i l m production. It also ter fee o f $2,250 must be forwarded to the Regis- offers students an opportunity to explore industry trar's Office by the date indicated in the letter o f employment options hands-on. acceptance. The tuition fee o f $2,250 for the second The first semester provides a theoretical introduction and includes a series o f guest lectures by industry professionals and courses that the film industry rates as mandatory and recommended. The second semester semester is due at the time o f registration for that semester. 4. Students requiring F I L M 110 w i l l pay an additional tuition fee of $700. offers specific information and hands-on experience with virtually all craft areas involved in the making of a movie and includes work on a film-making project. Students who complete the program w i l l receive a certificate and can either apply for entry-level positions in the film industry or continue their education and training. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $250 per term on textbooks and supplies. Program Content Corequisite FIRST TERM Students planning to enrol i n the Professional F i l m F I L M 100 Credits F i l m Development and Production Studies Program w i l l be required to take F I L M 110 in 2.0 4.5 1.5 the first term or have permission from the Program F I L M 101 W o r k i n g In F i l m Crafts Manager to waive. F I L M 102 F i l m Post Production F I L M 103 Screenplay A n a l y s i s and Admission Requirements and Procedures F I L M 104 The Business o f F i l m Production 2^0 1. Applicants must meet the following admission SECOND TERM Breakdown 2.0 12.0 requirements: F I L M . 105 Understanding F i l m Crafts • F I L M 106 The Directors: Roles o f the F I L M 107 Cinematography-Roles o f • 18 years o f age Grade 12 completion or equivalent or mature student status • Personal interview • Official copies o f English Language Assessment Assistant Directors the Camera Assistants 4.5 4.5 4.5 13.5 ( E L A ) Test or Test o f English as a Foreign COREQUISITE Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable F I L M 110 Lighting and Camera for F i l m 2.0 • Aptitude for working in the film industry • Please enclose any relevant materials with the project and include project pre-production, production application form such as copies o f a video and post-production. The above courses involve work on the student major Career/Vocational 139 B. PROFESSIONAL ACTING FOR THE C A M E R A PROGRAM 2. A n application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary courses to A d m i s s i o n s , Regis- Career Opportunites The B . C . film industry provides numerous opportunities for skilled, experienced and properly trained performers to support both the service industry as w e l l as the independent production sector. It is imperative, however, that actors be familiar with the specific skills associated with acting in front of a camera i n order to access these opportunities. trars Office. In addition, a non-refundable $20 application fee ($100 for international students) must accompany your application. Applications for the F a l l intake w i l l be accepted at any time prior to M a y 31. Applicants w i l l be notified o f their admission status by June 30. 3. The Program tuition fee is $4,500. The first semester fee o f $2,250 must be forwarded to the Registrar's Office by the date indicated in the letter of acceptance. The tuition fee o f $2,250 for the The Program second semester is due at the time of registration for The Capilano College Program in Professional A c t i n g for the Camera is specifically designed to train actors that semester. for work in the growing B . C . film industry. It is two semesters long and not only includes a series of acting Special Fees and Expenses courses but also features courses in technical and In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can camera applications and screenplay analysis to help the expect to spend approximately $150 per term on actor understand the f i l m production process and feel textbooks and supplies. more comfortable and confident working in f i l m ' s technical environment. A c t i n g students work closely with students in other film studies courses and w i l l Program Content have numerous opportunities to perform i n film FIRST projects. T H T R 212 Film Acting I A C T S 101 The W o r k i n g A c t o r A C T S 100 W o r k i n g with the Director (Introduction) 2.0 F I L M 110 L i g h t i n g and Camera for F i l m 2.0 F I L M 103 Screenplay A n a l y s i s and Admission Requirements and Procedures 1. Applicants must meet the following admission SEMESTER (Introduction) requirements: Breakdown Credits 3.0 2.0 2.0 • 18 years o f age • Grade 12 completion or equivalent or mature student status. • Personal interview SECOND SEMESTER T H T R 213 F i l m A c t i n g II Credits 3.0 A C T S 102 A C T S 103 History of A c t i n g i n F i l m W o r k i n g with the Director 2.0 (Advanced)* The W o r k i n g A c t o r 6.0 A C T S 104 (Advanced)* 6.0 • Official copies o f English Language Assessment ( E L A ) Test or Test o f English as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable • Aptitude for working in the film industry. • Please enclose any relevant materials with the *Four hours per week o f "The W o r k i n g A c t o r " and application form such as copies o f a video in " W o r k i n g with the Director" w i l l involve practical which the applicant performed, an essay outlin- acting sessions in F i l m Program productions. ing reasons for wanting to work in film, proof of volunteer work in f i l m or video, proof o f c o m pleting related courses, etc. It is strongly recom- scheduled by the production teams and may occur mended that at least an essay be included. This during non-regular hours. Students are advised that documentation w i l l be helpful to the selection extra-curricular activities w i l l have to be kept to a committee members when making their decision. m i n i m u m during this semester to enable the students to A n audition w i l l be included as part o f the be available for project work. selection process. Career/Voca 140 Preparation, rehearsals and shooting o f projects are tional APPLIED FISHERIES & FORESTRY SCIENCE Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. A n information package and application w i l l then be forwarded. A. FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE — DISTANCE LEARNING FORMAT B. WATERSHED RESTORATION TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE Program Content Credits F S C I 100 Introduction to Salmonid B i o l o g y 3.0 POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE F S C I 101 Fish Culture I 3.0 F S C I 102 Fish Culture II 3.0 F S C I 103 Water Quality 3.0 D. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING F S C I 105 Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding E. FISHERIES AND FORESTRY WORKSHOPS & Growth 3.0 F S C I 106 F i s h Health 3.0 Sechelt Campus F S C I 120 Computers i n Fisheries 3.0 F S C I 140 Field Practicum I 3.0 Instructional Faculty F S C I 141 F i e l d Practicum II C. D . J. B A T E S , D i p . T e c h . ( B C I T ) , B . S c , M . S c . ( S F U ) , R.P.Bio. • E . J. F I E L D , B . S c . ( U . V i c . ) , P h D (U.Qld.) K . R E I M E R , B.Sc. (U.Vic.) J. S U T H E R S T , B . S c . ( U . V i c . ) R. W A Y T E , A s s o c . Arts ( O L U ) , N o v e l l Cert. J. W I L S O N , A s s o c . L i b . Arts (Malaspina) Contact: Dave Bates, 987-1535 or 885-9310 A. 3XJ 27.0 FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE — DISTANCE LEARNING FORMAT B. WATERSHED RESTORATION TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE The Program This two semester program gives participants the skills required to work as fisheries technicians on fisheries management and aquatic rehabilitation projects i n B C . Instruction in this program emphasizes the practical aspects o f salmonid habitat and population assessments and rehabilitation methodology, by guiding participants through working projects modeled from existing Career Opportunities stream and riparian assessments. The assessment Graduates o f the program may find challenging careers ( R I C ) standards and rehabilitation methods are M E L P - with either the private or public fish culture sector. W R P accepted techniques. Instruction w i l l take place techniques follow the Resource Inventory Committee This includes the commercial aquaculture industry, in the field as participants are guided through working government contracts with fisheries agencies, and examples of actual stream and riparian assessments and consulting firms. restoration projects. A Fish Culture Technician, while w o r k i n g under the supervision of a manager, is responsible for the well Admission Requirements being o f intensively reared salmonids. Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or The Program The F i s h Culture Technician program is available i n by writing to the Sechelt campus. Students seeking advance credit for particular courses must apply i n writing and submit the appropriate documentation for a distance learning format only. Students may register in Prior Learning Assessment ( P L A ) . C a l l the Sechelt one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is campus for the appropriate contact person. awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. Applicants must also submit with their application, The distance learning program has been designed for transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary courses individuals who are currently working or seeking taken previously (except Capilano College). employment in the fish culture field and who wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. Career/Vocational Graduation Requirements E. T o receive a Fisheries Technician certificate from Capilano College, students must successfully complete all Fisheries Technician courses or their equivalents (33.0 credits). Note that at least 50% o f these credits must be obtained v i a courses at this College. FISHERIES A N D FORESTRY WORKSHOPS The A p p l i e d Fisheries and Forestry Science Department develops and delivers workshops and seminars for government, industry and public groups on a wide range o f related topics. These workshops cover such topics as riparian ecology and aquatic habitat assess- Program Content Credits ment to introduction to computer use i n the resouce management field. Instructors are experienced practi- F S C I 100 Introduction to Salmonid B i o l o g y 3.0 F S C I 120 Computers i n Fisheries 3.0 F S C I 150 Streamkeepers 3.0 Groups looking for assistance in developing extension R E C . 163 Wilderness First A i d I 3.0 workshops or requiring delivery o f workshops on F S C I 190 Fisheries Techniques I 4.5 specific topics should contact the Department directly. tioners with specialities in the subject area. F S C I 191 Fisheries Techniques II 4.5 Existing workshops include: F S C I 192 Aquatic Habitat Rehabilitation 3.0 N S C 36211 (Continuing Education) F S C I 140 F S C I 141 Field Practicum I 3.0 Field Practicum II 3.0 C M N S 152 Report W r i t i n g 3.0 • — Electro-fishing Use and Safety F S C I 050 — Fish Habitat Assessment W o r k s h o p F S C I 211 — R i v e r Hydraulics and Habitats 33.0 Workshops are offered on a demand basis. C. POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE A post-degree program i n the applied aspects o f fisheries management is currently under development. GRAPHIC DESIGN A N D ILLUSTRATION P R O G R A M Courses available for future credit towards the postdegree program or undergraduate academic transfer to Simon Fraser University include: Credits F S C I 200 B i o l o g y of Salmonids 3.0 F S C I 210 Intensive Salmonid Culture 3.0 This program is a department within the Media Technology Division. Other Art programs in this Calendar include Studio Art, Textile Arts and Commercial Animation. Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr College o f A r t & Design) D. STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING C . D A H L , D i p . (Vancouver School o f A r t ) The Streamkeepers Training helps citizens protect and K . D I C K I N S O N , B A (Hons.), F A ( W . Surrey College preserve freshwater habitats. Development pressures of A r t & Design) from our expanding populations threaten these environ- J. E D G E , Alberta College o f A r t ments. J. E D W A R D S G R I F F I N , B A (University o f Alberta) The Streamkeepers Training encourages good watershed practices through productive, hands-on involvement. C o m m u n i t y stewardship is essential for longterm protection of our environment. F . F O R S T E R , Alberta College o f A r t H . G R I B L I N , B A ( U B C ) , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr Institute o f A r t & Design) M . H I C K S , California State University o f L o n g Beach K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) Workshops provide intensive training in methods used K . J A G E R , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr Institute o f A r t & Design) to survey and map streams, as well as to make assess- S. K I N A K I N , Capilano College ments of stream health based on habitat complexity, D. M A C L A G A N , A O C A , IDC, F C A water quality, insect and fish populations. Streamside R . M A R T I N , B A ( U . o f Washington) planting methods are also covered. P. M I L E L L I , Alberta College of A r t Workshops are scheduled throughout the province as L . S A V A G E , B A ( M c G i l l ) , M . E d . ( U of A ) demand arises. P. S I N G E R , M F A (Concordia University) Credits F S C I 150 Streamkeepers Career/Vocational 142 3.0 D . T A I T , E m i l y Carr, D i p . V . S . A . ( E C C A D ) D. Y A S I N S K I Portfolios are reviewed by an Admissions Committee The Program The Graphic Design and Illustration program is an intensive, three year full-time commitment. Students are expected to achieve and maintain the highest standards working independently and as a team member, developing time management and organizational skills. on the basis of drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards of the program are called for interviews and testing on M a y 8 and 9. Final decisions on the make-up o f the new class are made by M a y 21, 2000. The curriculum encompasses historical, social, ethical and evolutionary developments in the visual communications industry. Students are engaged in acquiring Portfolio Requirements skills and sensitivity in various media and becoming There is no formula for an acceptable portfolio. In effective in the creative and production process. general, you should submit your best and most recent Instruction encourages imaginative conceptual thinking, work. There should be a m i n i m u m o f 10 and a maxi- technical and business analysis, and expertise. mum o f 15 original samples produced, drawn, de- Courses are taught by practising, professional artists and design consultants. Classes include projects, demonstrations, lectures and critiques, as well as scheduled professional and industrial presentations and tours. signed, or photographed by the applicant representing their current abilities. Imaginative and experimental design and drawings in any medium and representing your personal interests and abilities are welcome additions to the portfolio. Samples must be flat, not rolled; they should not be framed or glassed. Graduates are prepared to practise independently or collaboratively and in a variety o f employment opportunities such as design studios, illustration, computer graphics, multimedia, animation, f i l m , advertising and public relations agencies. Capilano College produces illustrators and designers prepared to shape the future of We will not accept portfolios larger than 20" x 26" (50 cm x 66 cm). Photographs or slides of larger work or 3-D projects may be sent; however, they do not replace the required m i n i m u m of 10 samples o f original work. visual communication, utilizing traditional and current The applicant's name and address must be on the electronic mediums. outside o f the portfolio in large letters. M a r k the back Contact: of each portfolio piece with your name. Please be sure 990-7820 Admission Requirements to include the completed "Program Information Sheet". If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost o f return postage. D o not send This program requires a high level of maturity and any portfolios by bus system as they are not delivered integrity. Students with life experience following high to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured, A i r Parcel school are usually more knowledgeable and mature in Post insured or prepaid courier service is usually the their choice of direction and better prepared; however, best way to have portfolios sent and returned. highly motivated high school graduates can succeed here, and we encourage those students to apply. Capilano College cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the College by M a r c h 31, 2000. Program Content No late applications accepted. Credits Major Program Requirements • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission 102.0 General Education Requirements 12.0 114.0 • Secondary and post-secondary transcripts • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test FIRST TERM ( E L A ) or Test o f English as a Foreign Language A H I S 104 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture I 3.0 ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech 3.0 G R P H 152 Life D r a w i n g I 3.0 G R P H 154 General D r a w i n g I 3.0 G R P H 155 Mediums and Techniques I 3.0 G R P H 156 Principles o f V i s u a l 3.0 N o t e : All applications for admission must be submitted to the Registrar's Office. Official transcripts and other documents should be attached. Portfolio submission dates are A p r i l 25, 26 and 27, 2000. N o portfolio w i l l be reviewed i f proper documentation has not been received at the College by M a r c h Credits Communications I G R P H 158 Design I 10 21.0 31, 2000. No late portfolio submissions accepted. Career/Vocational 143 SECOND TERM Credits A H I S 105 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II G R P H 157 Principles o f V i s u a l G R P H 159 M e d i u m s and Techniques II 3.0 G R P H 164 General D r a w i n g II 3.0 Communications II 3.0 3.0 G R P H 170 Studio Production I 3.0 G R P H 178 Design II 3.0 G R P H 184 L i f e D r a w i n g II 3Cj 21.0 Note: Students who wish to substitute English courses for CMNS 120 may do so with the Communications Convenor's approval. THIRD TERM Credits HOME SUPPORT/ PERSONAL CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM EIGHT-MONTH, 30-CREDIT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B A (Toronto), M S W ( U B C ) L . C U T H B E R T S O N , B . H . S c . ( O T ) (McMaster), M . E d . (Brock), R e g . O . T . ( B C ) M . D A Y A N , M H A ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist P. D e S O U S A , R N , B S c N J. G I B B S , R S W , Sp.Ed. ( W W U ) , C o o r d i n a t o r C M N S 153 Communications & the Arts 3.0 Support G R P H 231 Typography I 3.0 Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Receptionists Staff: G R P H 232 Graphic Design I D r a w i n g for Illustration I 3.0 Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant G R P H 233 G R P H 234 A p p l i e d Design I 3.0 G R P H 235 Painting for Illustration I 3.0 G R P H 236 Computer Applications 3.0 The H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant program G R P H 237 L i f e D r a w i n g III 3.0 prepares students to work with people of all ages who 24.0 have physical and/or developmental disabilities. Credits variety of community settings so that the individual 3.0 General Information Students are trained to give clients directed support in a FOURTH TERM G R P H 241 Typography II 3.0 may achieve the fullest possible participation i n G R P H 243 Drawing for Illustration II 3.0 society. G R P H 244 A p p l i e d Design II 3.0 G R P H 245 Painting for Illustration II 3.0 G R P H 352 Three Dimensional Graphic G R P H 353 Illustration M e d i a I Design 3.0 3.0 18.0 FIFTH TERM Jann Gibbs, Coordinator Credits G R P H 242 Graphic Design II G R P H 354 G R P H 355 A p p l i e d Design III Advertising Illustration I G R P H 356 Studio Production II G R P H 363 Illustration M e d i a II SIXTH Contact: Tel: (604) 984-4960 Fax: (604) 984-4993 Email: pcad@capcollege.bc.ca TERM 3.0 3.0 Program Description The objective o f the program is to provide students 3.0 with the basic knowledge and skills required to be 3.0 effective facilitators o f independent living for people 3.0 with physical and/or developmental disabilities. This 15.0 full-time, eight-month certificate program prepares Credits students for a career in the health and human services field. Integrating theory with practice, the program G R P H 246 V i s u a l Communications III 3.0 G R P H 361 Advanced Typographic Design 3.0 G R P H 364 A p p l i e d Design I V 3.0 G R P H 365 Advertising Illustration II 3.0 The H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant program G R P H 366 Business o f Design 10 ensures that students acquire knowledge and master 15.0 skills necessary to deal with the functional, emotional, offers practicum experiences i n a variety o f community settings. social and health implications of disabilities. Services offered by the graduate attendant promote independent living for persons with physical and/or developmental disabilities and differ from the traditional medically-modelled services in many ways: Career/Vocational 144 • • • Service goals are defined by the user, client or and are required to complete a medical report on a Services are oriented towards promoting maximum form provided by the College, plus evidence o f the independence for the client in all aspects o f life. absence o f active tuberculosis. Some practicum Services are directed towards enhancing an individual's present strengths and abilities, and enabling • 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, individual, not the medical service provider. placements require a C r i m i n a l Record Check. 5. Students need a valid First A i d Certificate (which the development o f future strengths. includes C . P . R . ) . The student is responsible for Services may be provided in a variety o f settings obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator (home, work, recreational setting, school, etc.) before the first day o f classes. The St. John's Emergency L e v e l Safety Oriented First A i d Certifi- Graduates receive the following certificates: cate or Residential Care Workers First A i d 1. Personal Care Attendant is acceptable. 2. H o m e Support L e v e l II 3. W H M I S (Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System) 6. Complete F o o d Safe course before entering the program. The program includes core courses from the Home Support/Resident Care Attendant program (see R C A P and H S A courses under Program Content). Students in the H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant program may pursue a Special Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) certificate by taking additional courses and completing a project or practicum. H o w to Apply A l l students must complete an Application for A d m i s sion form, available from the Registrar's Office at the main campus in North Vancouver, or at the regional campuses in Sechelt and Squamish. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted along with the $20 application fee, official transcripts and other pertinent Career Opportunities documents to: In response to the trend for people with disabilities to Admissions, Registrar's Office, Capilano College live in the community rather than in an institution, the 2055 Purcell W a y , North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 Home Support/Personal Care Attendant program T e l : (604) 984-4900; Fax: (604) 984-1798 prepares students to work with clients o f all ages in a variety o f community settings. Graduation Requirements Graduates find employment in many areas, including group homes, private homes, recreation programs, schools and community agencies. Because graduates must be prepared to work effectively within the full continuum o f available settings, Attendance: The Personal Care Attendant Program courses are intensive; regular attendance is essemtial. Students must obtain a m i n i m u m " B - " average (2.67 G P A ) with completion of all courses in the program. the H o m e Support/Personal Care Attendant program prepares students to assist persons with disabilities i n a Fees and Expenses broad range o f activities o f daily l i v i n g . The fees are in accordance with the College calendar for a 30-credit program. The student can expect to Admission Requirements spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. 1. A l l prospective students are required to attend an Additional costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course, information meeting and have a student/instructor transportation for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l interview prior to acceptance into the program. Record Check. Interviews are held in m i d - M a y . Further interviews Financial aid is available to eligible students. See the may be held in mid-August, i f spaces i n the pro- Finanacial A i d section o f this calendar. gram are available. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and have a genuine desire to work with physically disabled people in the health and human services field. T w o Length o f Program: 30 weeks Start Date: September references are required. 3. The m i n i m u m educational prerequisite is Grade 10 or equivalent, with Grade 12 preferred. Program Content Students Finish Date: A p r i l Number of College Credits Received: 30 may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. Career/Voca tional 145 FIRST TERM H S R C 101 Credits Health and Healing: Concepts for Practice P C A D 013 3.0 Introduction to Physical Disabilities 3.0 Career Opportunities The number o f people needing continuing health care and home care in our community is increasing, and there is an ever-growing demand for qualified men and women to work full-time or part-time i n this field. P C A D 014 Ethics and Values i n Health Care 1.5 P C A D 019 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum I 1.5 Graduates o f this full-time program are qualified to P C A D 022 H u m a n Relations II 1.5 work with clients/residents i n various continuing care P C A D 049 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b for 2.0 care facilities and H o m e Support Agencies. T h e 1.5 potential for employment is good. L5 Employers may require a C r i m i n a l Record check. Personal Assistants I R C A P 100 Health: Lifestyles and Choices R C A P 102 Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications Total settings, such as extended care facilities, intermediate 15.5 The Program SECOND TERM H S A . 110 Credits W o r k Role: Concepts in H o m e Support recognized throughout B . C . , designed to provide 1.5 H S A . 112 Special Needs in Home Support 1.5 P C A D 023 G r o w t h and Development 1.5 P C A D 024 A d v a n c e d Physical Disability P C A D 029 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum II P C A D 059 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b Concepts Personal Assistants II Total Total College Credits The College offers a full-time certificate program students with the opportunity to qualify to work with continuing care clients and residents in many different settings. The program integrates health care theory with prac- 3.0 tice. Students learn the basics in physical care with a 6.0 focus on the spiritual and emotional well-being o f the L0 continuing care facilities and home support agencies. 14.5 30.0 gram must attend an information meeting and have an resident. C l i n i c a l experiences take place in a variety o f A l l students who are interested in the H S / R C A prointerview with an H S / R C A instructor. Part-time Courses T w o programs are offered each year from August to Part-time courses are available. February, and January to June. In the 2000/2001 academic year, the August 2000 program w i l l be Prior Learning offered in North Vancouver and the January 2001 Credit may be granted for prior learning. program w i l l be offered at the Sechelt campus. Applications are considered in October for the January program, and in A p r i l for the August program. H O M E SUPPORT/RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM TWENTY-THREE WEEK CERTIFICATE PROGRAM See also: Home Support/Personal Care Attendant program. Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B A (Toronto), M S W ( U B C ) P. D e S O U S A , R N , B S c N S. E N G E L B E R T , B A , R N , Coordinator K. T A Y L O R , R N Support Staff Nancy Findlater, Arlene M i l l e r , Receptionists Diane M i l l s , Program Assistant Graduates o f the program may transfer some H S R C courses to the Licensed Practical Nurse program. Contact: 984-4960 Admission Requirements 1. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work with families and seniors in the health field. T w o written references are required. 3. The m i n i m u m educational prerequisite is Grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a Career/Vocational 146 form provided by the College, plus evidence of JAZZ STUDIES PROGRAM absence o f active tuberculosis. 5. Applicants must have current First A i d and C P R (level C ) certificates. These must be presented to the coordinator on the first day o f classes. 6. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM B. BACHELOR OF MUSIC IN JAZZ STUDIES DEGREE PROGRAM directly to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together Instructional with official transcripts o f secondary and post- M . A L L E N , M.Mus. (McGill) Faculty secondary education. F. A R D I E L , B A (SFU) M . J . B I S H C O F F , M . M u s . (Georgia State) 7. A current C r i m i n a l Record C h e c k is required.* B. C O O N D . D U K E , B.Mus. ( U B C ) , M A (U. of North Graduation Requirements Carolina), P h D ( U . V i c . ) Attendance: The Home Support/Resident Care Attend- J. E M E R Y , B . M u s . Jazz Studies ( O U / C a p i l a n o College) ant courses are intensive; regular attendance is essen- L . F A L L S , A R C T (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) K. H A M M E T - V A U G H A N tial. Students must obtain a " B - " average (2.67 C G P A ) , with completion o f all courses in the program. If the A. HAWIRKO F. H O U L E , B . M u s . ( M c G i l l ) , M . M u s . (Yale) average theory grade is lower than a B - the student w i l l S. K A R P , B A (Calif. State U . ) be unable to complete the last five-week clinical L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.) course, H S R C 113. L. K E L L E T T N . K O L E S N I K O V , B A (Gnessin's M u s i c a l College) I. K U K U R U D Z A Fees and Expenses A. L A C H A N C E The fees are in accordance with the College Calendar. S. M A D D O C K , D i p . (Peel School o f the Arts) The student can expect to spend approximately $300 R. M A R O I S , B . M u s . (Laval) on books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be i n - R. M C K E N Z I E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . ( U B C ) curred for a first aid course, transportation for clinical G. M C N A B , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UBC), practice, and for a criminal record check. Coordinator Financial aid is available to eligible students. Contact the Financial A i d office in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , T e l : 984- K. M O O R E C. N E L S O N T. N I C K E L S , B A ( U C L A ) 4966. P. O L F R E Y , B . M u s . ( U . Manitoba), M . M u s . (Ithaca) M . R E V E L E Y , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , D i p l o m a (Berklee * C l i n i c a l placements require a C r i m i n a l Record Check. The student must present this to the coordinator School of M u s i c ) D. R O B B I N S , M.Mus. (McGill) before the first day of classes. R. S A M W O R T H C. SIGERSON Program Content FIRST TERM H S R C 101 Health and Healing: Concepts HSRC for Practice W o r k Role: Introduction to 110 Continuing Care B . T U R N E R , B . M u s ( W . Wash.), M . M u s . ( N . Texas) D. V A N D E R S C H Y F F 1.5 B. W I C K J O R D A . W O L D , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , A R C T (Toronto) K. W A Y , M.Mus. (UBC) C l i n i c a l Skills 7.0 Health: Lifestyle and Choices 1.5 R C A P 102 Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications R C A P 112 Special Needs in Resident Care C . T A R R Y , B . M u s . (Berklee) 3.75 R C A P 100 HSRC 111 R. T A G G A R T Credits General Information 1.5 10 Capilano College offers four music programs: a two- 18.25 year D i p l o m a in Jazz Studies, a two-year Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer program, and four-year degrees i n Jazz SECOND TERM H S R C 113 Credits H o m e Support/Resident Care Attendant Practicum Total Program Credits Studies and M u s i c Therapy. The degree programs are offered in co-operation with the Open Learning A g e n c y 4.75 ( O L A ) with degrees granted by the Open University. 23.00 Career/Voca tional 147 Jazz Studies Program Mission and Goals Faculty The Jazz Studies program prides itself in the number The Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies is an applied and quality o f specialized faculty it has on staff. M o s t academic degree. The program's mission is to produce instructors are also top professional musicians w h o graduates with a broad-based academic background bring extensive practical experience to their classes. and comprehensive abilities in music with jazz as the main focus. A s j a z z is an eclectic art form that draws upon influences from many different musical genres, graduates w i l l have been exposed to music from Admission Requirements for First Year (Diploma) diverse cultural sources, historical periods and media. A l l applicants must: Jazz is an applied art form; therefore, the achievement 1. Have Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. of specific high standards in vocal and/or instrumental performance, improvisation, composition, and arranging are fundamental goals o f the program curriculum. Demonstration o f ability in these areas is a qualifying requirement for all graduates. 2. Demonstrate an adequate knowledge o f theory rudiments through a department test. 3. Display a sufficiently high level o f performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). Career Opportunities The two-year Diploma program is intended to provide its students with the skills necessary to develop 4. Pass a simple aural aptitude test involving pitch and rhythm matching. 5. Submit two letters o f recommendation from music professionals or instructors. careers as self-employed professionals i n the contem- The four-year Degree program provides a curriculum Admission Requirements for Transfer/ Returning Students (Diploma) which balances and integrates the instruction of jazz, A l l applicants must: traditional music, and general academic electives to 1. Meet the general admission requirements o f porary music industry. provide an enriched education at the degree level. It is an attractive option for those who wish to pursue music Capilano College. 2. Display a sufficiently high level o f performance and as self-employed professionals, for those who wish to sight-reading ability on their concentration instru- continue their musical development as part o f a liberal ment (see Auditions). arts education before pursuing other careers, and for 3. Take an aural test to determine their basic accept- those interested in teaching music i n the public school ability and placement within the ear training system. Majors in V o c a l Performance, Instrumental sequence (see Transfer o f Credit). Performance, Arranging/Composition, and General 4. Take a keyboard proficiency test to determine their Studies with an Education Stream are available. Those placement within the class keyboard sequence (see interested in teaching would enrol in the Education Transfer o f Credit). Stream o f the General Studies program. 5. Submit two letters o f recommendation from music professionals or instructors. Facilities The auditioning instructor w i l l make recommendations A s recording experience has become an essential part regarding acceptance, eligibility and placement i n some of today's musical training, the Jazz Studies program has now integrated multi-track recording into the performance classes, placement i n Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I ) , and required remedial work. curriculum. V o c a l , instrumental, and arranging/ composition students all make use o f our multi-track facilities. Composition and arranging students w i l l work with electronic instruments i n our M i d i Studio. Admission Prerequisites for Fourth Year Degree Program U p o n completion o f the two-year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Computer labs are available to students for supplemen- Studies, students may register as a third-year student i n tal help in ear training, sight reading, and other basic one o f the degree options. Permission to enrol i n any music skills, as well as the printing and recording o f major w i l l be based on completion o f prerequisite theory and arranging assignments. requirements, and the recommendation o f the faculty concerned. Continuation in the V o c a l Performance, Instrumental Performance and Arranging/Composition majors is subject to review at the end o f the third year Career/Vocational 148 of studies. Students may be accepted into some upper Transfer o f concentration performance instrument level courses before the completion o f their diploma on course, keyboard and ear training credit w i l l only be a part-time or probationary basis with the permission o f possible up to the placement level determined by the the instructors involved, but official acceptance into the auditioner and keyboard and ear training test results. degree program is necessary before any opportunity to graduate should be anticipated. Since the Capilano program emphasizes j a z z studies and most other Canadian music degree programs Transfer students should not anticipate immediate provide a study of traditional music, block transfer o f acceptance into the degree program, as there are courses to other institutions is not available. Several normally some lower level music courses and/or individual courses have, however, been accepted by general electives that must be completed before this institutions with similar offerings. can take place. Official acceptance into a major of the degree program can be applied for once the requirements for the two-year Jazz Studies diploma have been Special Fees and Expenses met. (See Graduation Requirements, T w o - Y e a r The fees for private music instruction ( P M I ) w i l l be Diploma.) announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f the fall term. Admission Procedures: In 1999-2000 the fees for P M I were $430 ($215 per 1. Submit the Application for A d m i s s i o n to A d m i s - credit) for the Jazz Studies program and are subject to sions, Registrar's Office, together with official change without notice. P M I lab fees are $30. transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary education. 2. Information meetings, auditions and placement tests are held i n M a y . Please call (604) 984-4951 for meeting times and audition appointments. Auditions Satisfactory Standing Students considered to be i n "Satisfactory Standing" are entitled to pre-register in the next term o f the program. A student who has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied Auditions are required for all entrants. L i v e audition permission to register in that program in a subsequent and testing is preferred. (Contact the Jazz Studies term, or be required to re-audition. program for specific audition requirements.) To maintain satisfactory standing, all Jazz Studies Entrance into the Jazz Studies program is competitive students must be enrolled i n a full-time course o f study as seats are restricted. Applicants are ranked in c o m - (at least nine credit hours) that includes a reasonable parison with others who audition on the same concen- number o f courses specific to their major (normally tration instrument with the entrance year applied for three) and must achieve a grade point average above taken into consideration. Providing that all other 1.8. entrance requirements have been passed, students w i l l The grade o f " D " in a course, although a minimal pass, be admitted in the order of their ranking until the seats is not sufficient to fulfil prerequisite requirements. available for that instrument have been filled. Students should refer to the section on academic Separate auditions are held for the College Singers, Jazz Choirs, Stage Bands, and Studio V o c a l Performance Class. Acceptance into the program does not guarantee acceptance into these ensembles. It is the student's responsibility to sign up for and attend these auditions. performance in the College Calendar for further information on " A c a d e m i c Probation". In addition, to qualify and continue in the specialized majors, Jazz Studies Degree students are expected to achieve a m i n i m u m grade o f " B - " i n all courses directly related to that major. These courses are: Transfer of Credit The Jazz Studies program accepts credits from other post-secondary institutions i f they are applicable and have suitable equivalency. Because o f the wide variations that exist in approach and emphasis in various Arranging/Composition Concentration P M I (Composition) A l l required Theory courses Arranging I, II, III, I V Rhythm Section W r i t i n g music programs, the Jazz Studies program reserves the right to examine for competency according to o u r course requirements before transfer credit is approved. Ca reer/Voca tional Instrumental Performance J A Z Z 170 History of Jazz 3.0 Concentration P P M I P M I . 145 Jazz V o i c e M 16.0 Improvisation I, II, III, I V A l l S m a l l Ensembles Credits SPRING A l l Large Instrumental Ensembles * E N G L 1Q3, 104, 105 or 106 3.0 Vocal Performance J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g Concentration P P M I J A Z Z 106 Traditional Harmony and 1.5 V o c a l Master Class I, II J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and Composition I 1.5 Studio V o c a l Performance I, II, III, I V J A Z Z 115 Class'Piano II 1.0 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I, II, III, I V J A Z Z 137 V o c a l Jazz Master Class II 1.5 J A Z Z 185 Sight Singing/Ear Training II 1.5 Composition Improvisation I, II A l l V o c a l Ensembles 1.5 1.0 Large Ensemble " C " grades (C-, C , C+) in these courses can only be Jazz V o i c e P M I . 245 10 14.5 applied for credit toward the Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies with the permission of the Jazz Studies Grade Appeals Committee. W h e n unusual circumstances have resulted in lower than expected grades in a student's first semester o f a continuing course, instructors may recommend to the Committee that the student be given probationary acceptance into the next semester of the course. If the student fails to achieve a m i n i m u m o f " B - " in the next level of the course, no credit for either course can be applied toward the specialized degree. A. JAZZ STUDIES DIPLOMA PROGRAM SECOND YEAR Credits FALL 3.0 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and Composition II 1.5 J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III 1.0 J A Z Z 236 Studio V o c a l Performance I 1.5 J A Z Z 238 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I 1.5 J A Z Z 284 Sight Singing/Ear Training III 1.5 1.0 Large Ensemble * * J A Z Z 271 M u s i c History I P M I . 345 Jazz V o i c e .3.0 20 16.0 T W O - Y E A R DIPLOMA Students w i l l be awarded a two-year diploma in Jazz Credits SPRING *Gen. Elective Studies upon completion o f the first two years of requirements for either the vocal or instrumental concentrations as outlined below. The General Elective credits are only required o f those planning on continuing toward a four-year degree. F o r the purposes o f the diploma, J A Z Z 271 and 273 may be replaced by six credits o f Jazz, M u s i c or i f approved by the coordinator, General Electives. 3.0 J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III : 1.5 J A Z Z 215 J A Z Z 237 Class Piano I V Studio V o c a l Performance II V o c a l Jazz Master Class II 1.0 Sight Singing/Ear Training I V 1.5 J A Z Z 239 J A Z Z 285 1.5 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 " J A Z Z 273 M u s i c History II Jazz V o i c e 3.0 P M I . 445 U p o n demonstration o f sufficient piano skills a student 20 16.0 may be given advanced placement in Class Piano. These required credits may be replaced with credits INSTRUMENTAL CONCENTRATION from any Jazz, M u s i c or General Electives. FIRST YEAR Credits FALL Program Content * E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 J A Z Z 103 The Language o f M u s i c 3.0 V O C A L CONCENTRATION J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I 1.0 FIRST J A Z Z 170 History of Jazz 3.0 Credits J A Z Z 184 Sight Singing/Ear Training I 1.5 Small Ensemble I 1.5 YEAR FALL * E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 J A Z Z 194 J A Z Z 103 The Language of M u s i c 3.0 Large Ensemble 1.0 J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I 1.0 PMI. lxx 20 J A Z Z 136 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I 1.5 J A Z Z 184 Sight Singing/Ear Training I 1.5 Large Ensemble Career/Vocational 150 1.0 16.0 SPRING Credits * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g J A Z Z 106 Certain courses in the third and fourth years of the 3.0 degree program are offered on a rotational basis every 1.5 two years. B e sure to consider the year that these Traditional Harmony and courses are due to be offered when planning your Composition 1.5 course load for the year. The placement o f these rotating courses in your schedule w i l l not necessarily J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and Composition I J A Z Z 115 Class Piano II 1.5 1.0 J A Z Z 185 Sight Singing/Ear Training II 1.5 take every precaution to ensure that you have all the J A Z Z 195 S m a l l Ensemble II 1.5 necessary prerequisites in place when you plan to take Large Ensemble 1.0 them. The courses offered on a rotational basis are P M I . 2xx 1Q subject to change, but presently are J A Z Z 410/411, 14.5 J A Z Z 460, J A Z Z 370, J A Z Z 470, J A Z Z 336/337, SECOND J A Z Z 310, J A Z Z 300, M U S . 210/211 and M U S . 218/ YEAR FALL conform to the semester plans presented below. Please Credits 219. *Gen. Elective 3.0 JAZZ Jazz Theory and Composition II 1.5 J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III 1.0 THIRD J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I 1.5 FALL J A Z Z 284 Sight Singing/Ear Training III 1.5 * G e n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 294 S m a l l Ensemble III 1.5 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I 1.5 * * J A Z Z 271 3.0 2XJ J A Z Z 336 Studio V o c a l Performance III 1.5 J A Z Z 338 V o c a l Jazz Master Class TU 1.5 16.0 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 203 M u s i c History I P M I . 3xx SPRING Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 MAJOR IN V O C A L PERFORMANCE YEAR Credits 1.5 2.0 Large Ensemble P P M I 545 10 Performance 15.5 J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III 1.5 SPRING JAZZ 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 *Gen. Elective JAZZ 283 Improvisation II 1.5 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint 1.5 J A Z Z 285 Sight Singing/Ear Training I V 1.5 J A Z Z 283 Improvisation II 1.5 J A Z Z 295 S m a l l Ensemble I V Credits 3.0 1.5 J A Z Z 337 Studio V o c a l Performance I V 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 J A Z Z 339 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I V 1.5 * * J A Z Z 273 M u s i c History II 3.0 J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 P M I . 4xx 2CJ 16.0 *See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. Large Ensemble P P M I 629 or 645 2.0 Performance 1Q **Degree students must complete J A Z Z 271, 273 to fulfil their traditional M u s i c History requirement. 15.5 FOURTH YEAR FALL B. BACHELOR OF MUSIC IN JAZZ STUDIES DEGREE PROGRAM Credits *Gen. Elective Arranging I J A Z Z 172 3.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Students must complete all courses outlined in one o f J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations in M u s i c 1.5 the following major areas o f study to be eligible for the J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I Bachelor of M u s i c in Jazz Studies degree from the Large Ensemble British C o l u m b i a Open University. P P M I 745 FOUR-YEAR DEGREE 1.5 1.5 2.0 3,0 Performance 15.5 These major areas o f study may include Jazz or M u s i c electives which should be chosen in consultation with the Coordinator of the program. Ca reer/Voca tiona I SPRING Credits J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble V I I I 1.5 *Gen. Elective 3.0 Jazz/Music Electives 1.5 J A Z Z 272 Arranging II 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 P P M I 8xx J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble V I I I 10 15.5 Total Credits 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 845 Performance 3J) Total Credits 124.5 124.5 * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements 15.5 MAJOR IN ARRANGING/COMPOSITION THIRD * See Academic Course Requirements YEAR FALL Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 MAJOR IN INSTRUMENTAL PERFORMANCE J A Z Z 370 THIRD Large Ensemble 1.0 Credits J A Z Z 271 M u s i c History I 3.0 3.0 P M I . 544 Composition I 2.0 * * P M I . 5xx Secondary Requirement Jazz Electives YEAR FALL *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and Analysis 1.5 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 J A Z Z 382 Improvisation III 1.5 J A Z Z 394 S m a l l Ensemble V 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 5xx 10 SPRING *Gen. Elective 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 372 Arranging III 1.5 Credits J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 3.0 P M I . 644 Composition II 2.0 * * P M I . 6xx Secondary Requirement 1.5 1.5 J A Z Z 383 Improvisation I V 1.5 J A Z Z 395 S m a l l Ensemble V I 1.5 J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 FOURTH YEAR FALL Credits 3J) 15.5 J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations i n M u s i c J A Z Z 472 Arranging I V YEAR Credits 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Jazz Electives 3.0 Large Ensemble P M I . 744 Composition III 2.0 1.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations i n M u s i c 1.5 J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I 1.5 SPRING 1.5 *Gen. Elective 2.0 J A Z Z 411 10 Jazz/Music Electives 4.5 15.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 Credits P P M I 844 Performance * * * P M I . 8xx Secondary Requirement 3.0 L0 Jazz/Music Electives Large Ensemble P P M I 7xx SPRING 1.5 10 16.0 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 2.0 • 3.0 J A Z Z 300 1.0 Counterpoint *Gen. Elective *Gen. Elective 3.0 Arranging II FALL Credits SPRING M u s i c History II J A Z Z 272 P P M I 6xx 10 14.5 J A Z Z 273 J A Z Z 241 Large Ensemble 1.5 3.0 Large Ensemble 15.5 FOURTH Jazz Styles *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 * * * P M I . 7xx Secondary Requirement Credits Conducting II 152 3.0 1.5 14.0 Total Credits * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. Career/Vocational 10 16.0 123.0 * * A r r / C o m p students are expected to complete the equivalent o f sixth term P M I . on their principal instrument through completion o f four terms o f secondary P M I . and a jury at a 600-level concentration o r through completion o f concentration P M I . at the 500 and 600 level o r complete four semesters o f P M I . secondary piano. M A J O R IN GENERAL STUDIES - EDUCATION STREAM THIRD YEAR FALL Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 172 Arranging I J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 1.5 1.5 ***Students wishing to pursue the Arranging/Compo- J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 sition option w i l l replace J A Z Z 271/273 in the second ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 year o f the D i p l o m a program with J A Z Z 240, 172 and **Jazz/Music Electives 1.5 J A Z Z 241, 272. M U S . 210 1.5 M A J O R IN GENERAL STUDIES THIRD Class W o o d w i n d s I Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 5xx 2XJ • 16.5 YEAR FALL Credits SPRING Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 1.5 J A Z Z 272 Arranging II 1.5 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 6.0 1.5 **Jazz/Music Electives 4.5 M U S .211 Class Woodwinds II 1.5 Large Ensemble P M I . 5xx 1.0 J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 2Jj Large Ensemble P M I . 6xx 15.0 SPRING Credits *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 241 J A Z Z 272 3.0 Counterpoint Arranging II **Jazz/Music Electives J A Z Z 470 World Music Large Ensemble P M I . 6xx 1.5 1.5 6.0 1.5 1.0 2XJ 16.5 FOURTH 18.0 FOURTH YEAR FALL 3.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 M U S . 218 1.5 3.0 J A Z Z 310 1.5 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I **Jazz/Music Electives 1.5 3.0 ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives Large Ensemble 3.0 1.0 P M I . 7xx SPRING Class Brass * * * * M U E D 302/303 Credits *Gen. Elective Credits *Gen. Elective YEAR FALL 1.0 2CJ Instrumental/Choral 4.0 Techniques 4.0 P M I . 7xx 2XJ 18.5 SPRING *Gen. Elective M U S . 219 Class Percussion Credits 6.0 1.5 3.0 2JJ J A Z Z 300 J A Z Z 411 15.0 **Jazz/Music Electives 1.5 Large Ensemble P M I . 8xx 1.0 Credits *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 20th Century Theory Conducting II 1.5 2XJ 16.5 Total Credits 130.0 **Jazz/Music Electives 1.5 ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 **Jazz/Music Electives: In the General Studies Major, Large Ensemble 1.0 at least six credits must be numbered 300 level or P M I . 8xx Total Credits 2XJ above to fulfil graduation requirements; in the Educa- 15.0 tion Stream at least two credits must be numbered 300 124.0 level or above. Ca reer/Voca tional 153 A semester profile requiring two credit hours o f ***Jazz/Music or N o n - M u s i c Electives: General Studies program students may fulfil these requirements ensemble is met by enrolment in two separate ensem- through any general, Jazz, M u s i c O R M u s i c Education bles. elective acceptable to the program. Students terminating in the two-year diploma program * * * * M U E D 302/303 are taken at U B C . Substitution may meet their ensemble requirements through the may occur on advisement by U B C M u s i c Education. completion o f any four ensemble courses. Secondary Music Teaching program are required to complete a combination o f Students enrolled i n the four year Jazz Studies degree Instrumentalists in the Education Stream who wish to enter secondary music teaching should include at least one year of a vocal ensemble and one year of secondary Private Music Instruction (PMI.) in voice in their programs. Suitable V o c a l Ensembles would include the Capilano College Community Choir, Capilano Singers, traditional and j a z z ensembles to complete their requirements. The required combinations are as follows: Instrumental Performance Ensemble Requirements Jazz Choir, and Jazz V o c a l Ensemble. Students whose Two semesters o f traditional ensembles: These can be major is a woodwind instrument may substitute second- met by enrolment i n the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y ary vocal P M I instruction for Class Woodwinds; brass C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in majors may similarly substitute secondary vocal P M I for another approved community ensemble. Class Brass, and percussion majors for Class Percussion. Pianists may substitute secondary voice P M I for the four credits of Class Piano normally required for the degree. Eight semesters of jazz ensemble: Including: Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105), Instrumental Ensemble ( E N S J 136) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level and above. Elementary Teaching (Note the Guitar/Bass Ensemble I/II, while a prerequi- Students interested in elementary teaching should be sure to include three credits o f laboratory science, three site, is not acceptable for large ensemble credit i n the degree program). credits of mathematics and three credits o f history or Two additional semesters o f either j a z z or traditional geography. O f all general electives completed, six ensembles. credits should be in Canadian Studies. Piano, guitar and bass performance majors can sometimes substitute other courses to complete their ensem- SPECIFIC R E Q U I R E M E N T S ble requirements. This is done through special arrangement with the coordinator o f the program. Academic Course Requirements *General Education Requirements Credits E N G L 100, and 6.0 103, 104, 105 or 106 6.0 Humanities Social Sciences 6.0 3.0 Science/Math Elective (must be an academic course from 10 one o f the above areas.) f 24.0 It is expected that all English requirements w i l l be Percussion students are expected to complete two semesters of traditional ensemble, four semesters o f j a z z ensemble, and eight semesters o f percussion ensemble. Three o f these percussion ensembles can replace the normal improvisation requirement ( J A Z Z 282/283). Percussion students wishing to take J A Z Z 282/283 must gain permission of byth instructors to audition. Arranging/Composiuon Ensemble Requirements V completed before entrance into the third year o f the T w o semesters o f traditional ensembles, four semesters program. Note that the education stream requires 30 of jazz ensembles, and two additional semesters o f credits of general electives. either jazz or traditional ensembles. (See Major in General Studies for lists o f appropriate Ensemble Requirements A l l large ensembles, regardless of the actual number o f weekly hours o f attendance required, have an assigned unit value of one credit. C a reer/Voca 154 tional traditional and jazz ensembles.) Vocal Performance Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of concert choir: Capilano College Community Choir or the Capilano Singers. ( E N S M 100/ 150) D . G I B S O N , B A ( M c G i l l University), M A (Institute of Social Studies, The Hague) F. K E N N E D Y L . K U E H N , B A , M A (Reed College) E . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L B ( U B C ) , M A (Duke) L. L E C L A I R Four semesters of jazz choir: Nite Cap or Capital Jazz. ( E N S J 105) L . M C G R A D Y , B A (Toronto), L L B (Man.), Four semesters o f Jazz V o c a l Ensemble: ( E N S J 306) J. O ' B R I E N , B A ( U B C ) T w o additional semesters o f either Jazz or Traditional ensembles. M e m b e r of the B . C . B a r S. O ' L E A R Y , B A , L L B (Queen's), M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar J. P A T T E R S O N , B A , M A ( Y o r k ) , L L B ( U B C ) , Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation in M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r J. P R I C E , P h D ( U B C ) S. R U S H , Q . C . , B A ( W . Ontario), L L B ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r J. S A Y R E , B A ( U . o f Chicago), L L B (Toronto), M e m b e r of the B . C . B a r another approved ensemble. L . S P E R L I N G , B A ( U . o f Wisconsin) Four semesters of jazz ensemble, including Jazz J. S T E E V E S , B A , L L B ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level or (McMaster), P h D ( M c G i l l ) above. T w o additional semesters of ensembles: for instrumentalists these may be Jazz or Traditional ensembles, for vocalists these w i l l be E N S J 305 and 306. Percussionists must also participate in four semesters of percussion ensemble; three o f these courses can replace J A Z Z 282, 283, Improvisation. Major in General Studies (Education) Ensemble Requirements Instrumentalists: Four semesters each o f traditional and j a z z ensembles. Vocalists: T w o semesters o f traditional ensembles, two semesters o f E N S J 305/306, four semesters of jazz ensembles. (See Major in General Studies for lists of appropriate traditional and jazz ensembles.) LABOUR STUDIES PROGRAM Instructional Bar, Member of the Y u k o n Bar B . S T R I N G E R , B A ( S F U ) , R N (Regina), M . S c . Faculty C . A S K E W , B A ( W . Ontario), L L B ( U B C ) , M e m b e r of the B . C . B a r (Faculty on leave) G . J A M I E S O N , B A ( U . Winnipeg), L L B ( U . M a n i toba), L L M ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r B . M E R R A L L , (Diploma) Labour College o f Canada S. O ' D O N N E L , B A , M A ( U B C ) Research Project C. L I V I N G S T O N E , B A (SFU), M A (York Univ.) R. F O X General Information The Labour Studies program is committed to meeting the special education needs o f B . C . workers, their organizations and the labour movement in general. C l o s e relations with the labour movement are maintained through the Users' A d v i s o r y Committee which is open to representatives o f unions who use the program. This hard-working group o f representatives actively engages in promoting and developing the program. Bursary The George North Fund was established by friends in memory o f this outstanding member o f the trade union movement. The award is available to assist with K . B R A I D , B A (Mount A l l i s o n U n i v . ) , M A ( S F U ) registration costs for union members who wish to T. B Y R N E , M A ( U B C ) attend courses in the Labour Studies program. U n i o n G . C O U S T A L I N , B A ( U B C ) , L L B ( U B C ) , Member of the B . C . B a r G . F I O R I L L O , L L B ( U V i c ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r members are first expected to seek sponsorship from their union i f they are eligible, before applying for a bursary. Career/Vocational 155 Labour Studies Certificate L S P . 180 The Labour Studies Certificate is awarded upon L S P . 181 L S P . 182 completion of 15 credits o f study. Offered on a part- — Stewards' Training Collective Bargaining U n i o n L o c a l Administration time basis, courses are available in each o f three L S P . 190 — Contract Costing semesters: September to December, February to A p r i l L S P . 191 — Introduction to Pension Plans and M a y to June. Students seeking a certificate may L S P . 192 Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits choose from any of the course offerings listed below. Credit courses are available to any student wishing to enrol i n : L S P . 212 — A d v o c a c y Before Labour Tribunals L S P . 216 — Workers' Compensation Appeals L S P . 226 — Advanced W o r k e r s ' Compensation - Intermediate L e v e l Courses - A p p e a l Preparation L S P . 100 — Introduction: Economics for Trade L S P . 101 — L a b o u r Economics: Alternatives & Unionists Options L S P . 105 — Corporate Financial Statement Analysis L S P . 109 — Legal Research Skills None-Credit Courses Each fall and spring the Labour Studies Program offers non-credit courses to support and enhance the work o f the labour movement and B . C . workers. Courses are scheduled in the evenings and on selected M o n d a y s , Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays. Brochures describing L S P . 110 — B . C . Labour L a w the courses to be offered are issued twice a year. LSP. I l l — Canada Labour C o d e Brochures are available by contacting the Labour L S P . 112 — Arbitration L a w Studies Department. Contact: 984-4954. L S P . 113 — P u b l i c Service Staff Relations A c t L S P . 114 — Employment Standards A c t L S P . 115 — Occupational Health and Safety L S P . 116 — W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n A c t and the WCB L S P . 117 — H u m a n Rights L a w L S P . 119 — C i v i l Rights and the W o r k Place L S P . 120 — Politics: Government Bureaucracy L S P . 122 — Politics: Labour P o l i c y i n Canada L S P . 130 — Sociology of W o r k L S P . 131 — Race and Ethnic Relations L S P . 140 — History and the Labour Movement in Canada — U n i o n Story: A Course in Practical History L S P . 142 — PROGRAM Introduction to U I C Procedures L S P . 118 — L S P . 141 LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE History of the Labour M o v e m e n t i n B.C. ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty L . K O S K I T A L O , B . S c . ( U of M ) , P h D ( U B C ) R. W E L S H , D i p . Landscape Tech. ( B C I T ) L . S C O T T , Cert. Landscape Horticulture (Capilano College) Support Staff Sharon Miletec, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant L . Scott, L a b Supervisor Career Opportunities L S P . 150 — W o m e n in the W o r k Force Graduates of the Landscape Horticulture program find L S P . 151 — Leadership Skills, Assertiveness and employment in many areas o f horticulture including: Advocacy municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commer- L S P . 155 — Indian L a n d C l a i m s and U n i o n Movement L S P . 160 — M e d i a for Trade U n i o n Education and cial landscape installation and/or maintenance, garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations, movie and film industry, arboriculture. Organization W o r k i n g with Mass M e d i a The Program W o r k i n g Culture and History o f The objective o f the Landscape Horticulture program is Labour Arts to provide individuals with the basic skills and k n o w l - L S P . 163 — M e d i a Workshop edge prerequisite to beginning a career i n landscape L S P . 170 — Communications: Public Speaking gardening and landscape-related industries. L S P . 161 — L S P . 162 — Career/Vocational 156 This full-time, eight-month certificate program integrates horticultural theory with practice; the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical applications. Program Content FIRST TERM Credits H O R T 101 Introductory Horticulture 5.0 Due to the popular nature of the program, and its H O R T 102 Plant Materials I 5.0 limited enrolment, prospective students are advised to G r o w i n g M e d i a & Fertilizers 2.0 contact the Horticulture department by early A p r i l to H O R T 103 H O R T 105 Plant Production 2.0 arrange to attend an early M a y I N F O R M A T I O N H O R T 107 Park & T i l f o r d Gardens Practicum I 0.0 H O R T 115 Basic Landscape Drafting 15 M E E T I N G . Student/instructor interviews can be arranged at the conclusion o f this meeting. Contact: Email: 15.5 984-4960. landscape®capcollege.be.ca SECOND Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 completion with Grade 12 preferred. Students without proficiency in basic mathematics and English may be required to take an upgrading course. 2. A l l applicants must attend an in-person interview. TERM Landscape Irrigation H O R T 108 Landscape Design 1.5 H O R T 109 Plant Materials II 4.0 H O R T 110 Turfgrass Management 3.0 HORT111 Business Practices 1.0 H O R T 112 Landscape Installation & Maintenance 5.0 H O R T 114 Park & T i l f o r d Gardens and Drainage Interviews are held in mid-May. Further interviews may be held in mid-August, i f spaces i n the program Credits H O R T 106 are available. Applicants unable to attend during the 2.0 Practicum II scheduled interview period may contact the program OO 16.5 coordinator to make alternative arrangements. • 3. M u s t be 19 years o f age or older. 4. A genuine interest i n and desire for commencing or LEGAL ASSISTANT PROGRAM continuing a career in horticulture. 5. Reasonable health and physical condition. A. T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA B. LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Special Fees and Expenses C. In addition to the program tuition, students w i l l incur further expenses o f approximately $1,700 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, field trip, conference and membership fees. LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M (DISTANCE EDUCATION) Instructional 6. Successful applicants w i l l demonstrate evidence o f development o f interpersonal skills and emotional health. Faculty L . B A K E R , B A ( U B C ) , L L B ( U B C ) Teaching Cert. (SFU) B. B E V E R I D G E , B A , L L B (UBC), C T E L F A , L L M Graduation Requirements Due to the intense nature of the program, regular full- D . C O C H R A N , B A , L L B ( U B C ) , Cert. E d . , M . A . E d . (SFU) attend and participate in all classes and program W. E N W R I G H T , B F A M F A (UBC), L L B (McGill) J. F A I R L D 3 , B . M u s . L L B ( U B C ) activities. Students with poor attendance w i l l be C . M A T T H E W S , B A ( U B C ) , L G A S Diploma required to withdraw. Participation in all field trips, including the three-day orientation field trip, is c o m - D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Certificate, M A Liberal Studies ( S F U ) , Co-ordinator pulsory. M . SPENCE, B.Sc, L L B (UBC) time attendance is crucial. Students are expected to Students must attain a m i n i m u m cumulative G P A o f Support Staff 2.0, pass all courses, must possess a valid B . C . pesti- F . U l k e r , C l e r k Typist cide dispenser or applicator certificate, and attain a W . Weberg, Divisional Assistant m i n i m u m 6 0 % standing in H O R T 102 and H O R T 109, to successfully complete the program. CareerlVoca tional 157 Career Opportunities A legal assistant, while working under the supervision of a lawyer, is capable o f originating work and making decisions. This person has knowledge of both procedural and substantive law. Some examples o f work functions are: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, Members of the A d v i s o r y Committee include representatives from the L a w Society o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian B a r Association, private law firms, a government agency, and crown corporations. Admission Requirements w i l l s , probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; The successful applicant to the Legal Assistant pro- legal research; file management; assisting in trial gram should have: preparation. 1. two years post-secondary university transfer educa- Graduates o f the program w i l l find challenging careers working as legal assistants in law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. The program has been i n operation since 1976 and has tion or equivalent prior learning experience 2. work experience in an office setting (highly recommended) 3. good working knowledge o f computers. a 90% placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for any one graduating class depending on the economy.) Applications, together with official post-secondary transcripts must be submitted to Admissions, Regis- Programs trar's Office. Incomplete applications w i l l not be processed. There are two legal assistant programs offered at Prospective applicants may begin the application Capilano College. process by telephoning 983-7594. Names w i l l be 1. The Legal Assistant D i p l o m a program. This is a recorded and applicants w i l l receive the formal admis- two-year, full-time program designed for people sion procedure outline. Information meetings may also without current legal experience. be held. The coordinators w i l l then review all applications for the 36 seats available in the program. A p p l i - *2. The Legal Assistant Certificate program. T h i s evening program is designed for people who are cants who meet the program requirements w i l l be invited to have a personal interview. presently working i n a law office with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience. * The Legal Assistant Certificate program is available as a distance education program. E-mail: lgas@capcollege.bc.ca Tel: 983-7594 Academic Standards The Legal Assistant program requires students to maintain a cumulative 3.0 grade point average over the four terms. In addition, any student whose grade point average falls below 2.0 w i l l not be permitted to continue in the program. T o be eligible to go out on practicums, students must maintain a cumulative 3.0 A. T W O YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA U p o n completion o f the two-year program, students GPA. Special Fees and Expenses must complete a six-month practicum under the The student can expect to spend approximately $ 1,200 supervision o f a lawyer. Students are paid during this per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since practicum by their employer. A t the end o f a successful practicum, the student is eligible for graduation. Faculty work closely with regular use o f a law library is necessary for research purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. students and with the legal community to assist in obtaining successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts with the legal commu- T w o Year Legal Assistant Diploma Program Content nity, and several faculty members are practising FIRST lawyers. A s well, support is provided by an external L G A S 115 A d v i s o r y Committee, which provides information on recent developments in the legal community, and offers advice on topics ranging from curriculum changes to graduate placements. Career/Vocational 158 Credits TERM L G A S 150 Legal Document Processing Introduction to the Study of L a w 1.5 3.0 L G A S 152 Litigation Procedures I 3.0 L G A S 153 Basic Corporate Procedures 1.5 L G A S 170 Legal Research 3.0 L G A S 252 Torts I 10 15.0 SECOND TERM Credits L G A S 151 Evidence 3.0 L G A S 164 Litigation Procedures I V 1.5 L G A S 180 Contracts I 3.0 L G A S 254 Torts II 3.0 L G A S 256 Family L a w 3.0 C M N S 179 Communications for L e g a l Credits L G A S 155 Conveyancing Procedures 1.5 L G A S 157 W i l l s & Probate Procedures 3.0 L G A S 179 L e g a l Interviewing 3.0 L G A S 181 Contracts II 3.0 L G A S 255 Real Property 3.0 L G A S 264 Insurance L a w I 10 16.5 FOURTH TERM L G A S 172 In order to attain the Legal Assistant Certificate students must successfully complete 30 credits. These credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant courses. Students are required to maintain a cumulative G P A of 2.66 to graduate. Legal Assistant Certificate Program Content COURSES Introduction to the Study of L a w 3.0 3.0 * + L G A S 151 Evidence 3.0 3.0 * + L G A S 170 Legal Research 3.0 3.0 L a w Office Procedures 1.5 L G A S 199 Certificate Requirements * + L G A S 150 Creditors' Remedies L G A S 265 w h i c h have been acquired through life or work experiences. For further information contact the P L A coordi- 3.0 L G A S 182 L G A S 262 ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits Credits Legal Drafting I L G A S 215 L G A S 253 recognition o f prior learning. Prior learning assessment 10 16.5 TERM The Legal Assistant Department is committed to the nator at Capilano College. Assistants THIRD (PLA) Prior Learning Assessment Company L a w Litigation Procedures III 10 L G A S 172/174 L e g a l Drafting I & II 16.5 L G A S 179 Legal Interviewing 3.0 * L G A S 180/181 67.5 L G A S 182 Creditors' Remedies L G A S 252/254 Torts I & II L G A S 253 Company L a w 3.0 L G A S 255 3.0 L G A S 256 Real Property Family Law L G A S 264/265 Insurance I & II 3/3.0 L G A S 268 Criminal L a w 3.0 L G A S 271 Administrative L a w 3.0 Insurance L a w II Career Practicum D i p l o m a Requirement: Credits B. LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM This is a part-time evening program designed for students with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience who are presently working in a law office. Those without a legal background or the two years experience may be admitted to a particular course only after consultation with the coordinator. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the contact with the coordinator prior to registration. Acceptance into a particular course does not mean a student has been accepted into the program as a whole. Contracts I & II 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 3/3.0 3.0 * Courses marked with an asterisk are required courses and must be taken before a student is eligible to receive a certificate. + Students wishing to enter the program must first take L G A S 150 and then L G A S 170 before they w i l l be admitted to any course except L G A S 151. Transfer Credits Transfer credits w i l l not automatically be given for The Legal Assistant Certificate program courses courses taken at other institutions. Students w i l l be usually start i n September, although occasionally they required to demonstrate current knowledge before may also start in January. Contact the L e g a l Assistant course exemption w i l l be granted. Requests for transfer program area at 983-7594 for registration deadline credit must be submitted on the "Request for Transfer information. Credit" form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. The requirements for the certificate must be completed within five years o f commencing the courses. T h e fiveyear period may be extended for one year i n exceptional circumstances. C. LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM (DISTANCE EDUCATION) See Capilano College website for further details or email: de-lgas@capcollege.bc.ca Career/Vocational 159 A Capilano College certificate is granted upon success- LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM ful completion of the program. Contact: 984-4959; Instructional Applied Business E-mail: Technology Division, abt@capcollege.bc.ca Faculty D. B L A N E Y , ID (UBC), CPS, M.Ed. (SFU) M . C R A G G , B A L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. Admission Procedures Students are admitted to the program twice a year, i n (UBC) D . G U S P I E , Instructor September and January. D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Cert., M A ( S F U ) Applications for A d m i s s i o n may be submitted at any K . Y I P , B A , L L B ( U B C ) , Legal Systems time to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with Support Staff official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist T o ensure your name is on the list for the Information W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Meetings held throughout the year, call the Department of A p p l i e d Business Technology at 984-4959. Career Opportunities The exacting field o f law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. Interested applicants are invited to attend an information meeting. A n evaluation of keyboarding speed and E n g l i s h language proficiency w i l l be conducted at this time. During the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview may be arranged. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as w e l l as legal procedural courses including: C i v i l litigation, w i l l s and probate, corporate law, conveyancing and mortgaging, family and legal office procedures. U p o n completion of the program, students find employment in specialized, as well as general, law offices. M a n y graduates o f the L e g a l Secretarial program proceed to the Part-time Legal Assistant Certificate program. D u r i n g your interview, you w i l l have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and career goals. Y o u r test results w i l l be reviewed with y o u at this time. The objective o f the personal interview is to assist in selecting applicants who w i l l be most suited to the career o f legal secretary. Admission Requirements • The Legal Assistant program requires Option students to have two years work experience as a legal secretary Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • English language proficiency as demonstrated by the Business E n g l i s h Competency test results. prior to enrolling i n the first course. L e g a l Secretarial program graduates who have achieved a cumulative • Keyboarding at 45 w p m . " B " average and who have obtained employment i n a Please submit the following material prior to or during law firm, government law department or corporate law the pre-admission interview: department are now eligible to enter the Legal Assistant Part-time program. This allows them to further their education in the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience in the legal support field. (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and work experience. (b) Transcripts from all educational institutions you have attended The Program (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. This nine-month vocational program covers five main areas o f law providing a fundamental understanding o f Prior Learning Assessment (PLA) the legal system in B . C . Students are trained in legal The A p p l i e d Business Technology Department is terminology and procedural rules. They w i l l review committed to the recognition o f prior learning. Prior relevant legislation, and acquire necessary skills in the learning assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated formatting and handling o f legal documents. T y p i n g , learning for credits which have been acquired through legal office procedures, hands-on computer technology life or work experiences. F o r further information and a two-week legal office work practicum are contact the P L A coordinator at Capilano College. i included i n the curriculum. Career/Vocational 160 Special Fees and Expenses J. W E S T E N D O R P , B F A ( U B C ) In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,500 on textbooks and supplies. • L . M C L E A N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , L a b Supervisor Support Staff E r i c a Brant, D E C Prof. Theatre (Dawson), Program Assistant Program Content FIRST TERM A l a n Hovden, Program Assistant Credits Scott Watts, B A ( S F U ) , Program Assistant L G S T 108 F a m i l y L a w Procedures 1.5 L G S T 109 B a s i c Litigation 3.0 Technical L G S T 116 Introduction to the Legal System 1.5 B r y a n Christie L G S T 123 L e g a l Document Processing Brian Goldstone, D i p . M e d i a Resources (Capilano) on the Microcomputer 4.5 L G S T 124 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 C M N S 159 Communications for Legal 10 16.5 TERM L G S T 105 Career Opportunities In 30 years o f operation, the M e d i a Program has Secretaries SECOND Staff graduated over 450 students. The majority o f these graduates are employed as producers, directors, editors, writers, camera and audio operators, production Credits Keyboarding Speed and S k i l l 1.5 Development assistants and equipment managers in video, film, audio, photography, and multi-media production formats. They work for educational institutions and L G S T 107 Legal M a c h i n e Transcription 3.0 L G S T 110 Corporate Procedures 3.0 organizations. In addition, a number o f graduates have L G S T 112 Basic Conveyance & Mortgage 3.0 set up their o w n independent production companies. L G S T 114 W i l l s & Probate Procedures 1.5 L G S T 117 ' L e g a l Office Procedures 1.5 L G S T 119 Practicum 1.5 L G S T 122 Computer Applications 18.0 THIRD TERM Credits Practicum - Total Program Credits: CIP* 34.5 * C I P — Course in Progress. MEDIA PROGRAM A. MEDIA P R O G R A M - DIPLOMA B. MEDIA P R O G R A M - CERTIFICATE Instructional A. DIPLOMA PROGRAM F I L M , P H O T O G R A P H Y , V I D E O , A U D I O and M i n the L e g a l Office L G S T 119 private production companies as w e l l as non-profit Faculty J . V . B I Z Z O C C H I , B A (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan), V i d e o Production (Banff Centre) C O M P U T E R S are vital components o f the media m i x used in all levels o f educational, instructional, and entertainment communication. The M e d i a Program is a two-year program training students for current and developing applications o f media technologies. In areas of education, commercial and entertainment media, there is an increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster learning, growth, and social interaction. Capilano C o l l e g e ' s M e d i a Program prepares students for work and leadership in these growing media fields. The core o f the program is production training. Students are taught standards o f excellence and effectiveness i n all forms o f educational production work. Basic technical skills are taught i n all media areas, and a large number o f projects are completed by students during their training. In this way students are prepared M . D O W D I N G , D i p . M e d i a Resources (Capilano) for a wide range o f practical work possibilities, rather P. K E L L I N G T O N , F i l m Studies ( U B C ) , A . A . S . M e d i a than simply a proficiency in theory. Spec. Cert. (Capilano) The program teaches students more than the necessary A . K L A V E R , A . A . S . D i p . (Capilano) technical skills. Students learn the critical process o f B . R E I D , B A (Alta.), A d v a n c e d Theatre (Banff Centre) how to work a production through from concept to S. R O G E R S , B A A (Ryerson) completion. This involves understanding learning K . W A T T , B A (Trent) theory and instructional design as well as understanding the particular advantages of each medium. Career/Vocational 161 A major skill that the M e d i a Program emphasizes is Graduation Requirements that o f w o r k i n g effectively i n groups. Students i n this In order to graduate from the M e d i a Program, the program w i l l have worked i n a large number of production groups i n a variety of production formats by student must successfully complete all the component courses. the time they graduate. The program's instructional design reflects its practical Professional Standards goals. Workshop methods, hands-on training and field trips are used throughout the program. A l l M e d i a students are required to adhere to high standards of academic performance and professional The C o l l e g e ' s training facilities are w e l l equipped. They include a photography studio and lab, an audio behaviour (as described i n the booklet Media Department Program Guidelines). recording studio, a television studio, computer and editing workstations and audiovisual production equipment that students can access through the Depart- Program Content ment's equipment check-out facility. FIRST Introductory M e d i a M D I A 100 Communications Introduction to V i d e o Production M D I A 105 Project Design 1.5 M D I A 181 3.0 M D I A 183 Basic A u d i o Production Theory and Application of Photographic Production 3.0 M D I A 186 Computers i n M e d i a Production 3.0 M D I A 195 Photography Documentary Scriptwriting 15 The M e d i a Program consists o f four terms of study. N e w students are admitted each September in a class o f 26. Contact: Web: 984-4940 FAX: www. capcollege. be. 984-4946 ca/magic/media Admission Requirements 1. 18 years of age or older. Credits TERM C M N S 130 M D I A 250 3. Applicants may wish to take some or all o f the M e d i a Program Certificate courses. These courses are designed to give the student an introduction to media and to the M e d i a Program. 4. Completion of E D T or equivalent. 5. Attendance at an information meeting held once per month from November through M a r c h is required. 6. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and postsecondary education. 7. Completion of Department Application. Deadline is 1.5 SECOND TERM Introduction to A n i m a t i o n M D I A 150 V i d e o Technology I M D I A 172 3.0 1.5 M D I A 173 Educational M e d i a Applications: M D I A 182 Audio A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production 3.0 M D I A 185 M D I A 200 A d v a n c e d Photography 3.0 Intermediate V i d e o I 3.0 M D I A 202 Intermediate V i d e o II 10 18.0 3.0 M D I A 271 Digital V i d e o Post - Production Educational Television Systems M D I A 300 A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production 6.0 M D I A 304 Educational M e d i a Applications: THIRD 1.5 TERM M D I A 231 M a r c h 15. Interviews for selected applicants begin Computers in A p r i l , and all applicants w i l l be notified o f their admission status in writing by the end of M a y . 3.0 19.5 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 3.0 3.0 10 15.0 experience, previous work, education, interest in TERM A d v a n c e d M e d i a Communications 3.0 1.5 Production Resources M D I A 263 and commitment to the M e d i a Program. M D I A 299 Major Projects M D I A 303 M e d i a Specialist in Education 8. A d m i s s i o n is based on general ability, noteworthy FOURTH C M N S 356 and Training Special Fees and Expenses year program. Career/Vocational 162 10 9.0 Students may expect to pay approximately $7,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two- 1.5 Total Program Credits 61.5 B. CERTIFICATE PROGRAM • Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic procedures This is a 15-credit, part-time certificate that consists of • the following courses offered in the Spring T e r m : Credits M D I A 065 M e d i a Studies 3.0 M D I A 101 N e w M e d i a Literacy 3.0 M D I A 102 Introduction to Photography 3.0 M D I A 156 Computers in M e d i a A c a d e m i c Elective Financial record keeping and computerized medical billing 3.0 3.0 15.0 Students may take one or more o f these courses. • A two-week work practicum in the medical field Contact: Applied Business Technology: 984-4959 E-mail: abt@capcollege.bc.ca Admission Requirements Applicants must meet the following admission requirements: • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status • MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Instructional Faculty J. C L A R K , R N (Regina G e n . Hosp.), L A . Teaching D i p . (Univ. o f Sask.) S. H O R N , I D ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) S. L I V I N G S T O N E , R N , M A M S (London, Eng.) A . S E D K Y , B A , M A , P h D ( A i n Shams, Cairo) 35 w p m keyboarding speed • Personal interview • Aptitude for working i n a medical setting • Appropriate English conversation and writing skills • St. John's Standard First A i d Enhanced Certificate (16 hours) or St. John's Standard First A i d for Industry (16 hours). A l l Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents. B . S M I T H , B A , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) , T E S L Special Fees and Expenses Cert. Support Staff Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,000 on textbooks and supplies. Career Opportunities Program Content Faye Ulker, C l e r k Typist The health care industry is one o f the largest industries in Canada, and the M e d i c a l Office Assistant is a valued allied health professional. Graduates o f this program have the specialized training required to work in a number of medical settings: receptionist or medical assistant i n an office or clinic, or in a hospital as an admitting clerk or department stenographer. The Program This M e d i c a l Office Assistant program offers preservice, specialized education for prospective students which includes: FIRST TERM Standard English Usage M O A . 105 M e d i c a l Administrative M O A . 107 Procedures I C l i n i c a l Procedures I M O A . 109 Anatomy, Physiology M O A . 111 M O A . 121 M e d i c a l Terminology I 3.0 M e d i c a l Document Processing 11 15 M e d i c a l Document Processing I SECOND TERM 3.0 Credits M e d i c a l ethics M O A . 103 M e d i c a l M a c h i n e Transcription M e d i c a l transcription M O A . 106 M e d i c a l Administrative M O A . 108 C l i n i c a l Procedures II and M O A . 110 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology II Speed Development Pharmacology Procedures II M e d i c a l office procedures 1.5 3.0 0.75 Pharmacology Preparation, assisting and follow up o f patient for medical examinations 3.0 1.5 18.0 Keyboarding S k i l l & Aseptic techniques 3.0 and Pathology I M O A . 102 M e d i c a l terminology and anatomy and physiology Credits 3.0 C M N S 110 M O A . 100 1.5 3.0 Career/Vocational 163 M O A . 112 M e d i c a l Terminology II 3.0 M O A . 115 Directed W o r k Experience 1.5 M O A . 122 Computers in Health Care L_5 15.75 Total Program Credits: 33.75 Career Opportunities Graduates o f the program work with all age groups, with a wide range o f physiological, cognitive and emotional disorders, in a variety o f clinical settings or in private practice. They are trained to work as part o f a health care team. MUSIC THERAPY PROGRAM Instructional Faculty P. A V E R Y , B A ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto), Registered The Program The M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano offers the third and fourth years leading to the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy granted by the Open University. This degree Psychologist S. B A I N E S , B . M u s . (Calgary), B M T (Wilfrid Laurier), M A (NYU), M T A E . B O T M A N , B . S c . (PT) ( M c G i l l ) , M . E d . (Manitoba) J. B R O D E U R , B . M u s . (Vincent dTndy), M A , P h D program is designed so that students may enter third year with a variety o f backgrounds: music, general arts, education, or nursing etc. A l l four years may be c o m pleted at Capilano College. This program provides students with the opportunity to (P.U.), M T A K . B U R K E , B A (Antioch), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), M T A gain knowledge and develop competencies in such areas R. G U R R as music therapy and practice; clinical disorders; M . H O W A R D , B M T (OUBC), M T A assessment, planning and intervention; improvisation N . M C M A S T E R , B A ( U B C ) , D i p . M . T . (Nordoff & and music o f many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills Robbins), M A ( N Y U ) , F A M I , M T A E. MOFFTTT, B.Mus. (McGill), M A (CPU), Dip.M.T. (Capilano), F A M I , M T A and group dynamics; basic research, and documentation. The program blends academic and experiential course work. Students deepen their experience o f music, K. NICHOLSON, B M T , M M T (OUBC), M T A creative expression and the role o f the arts. They are S. S U M M E R S , B P E , B . E d . , D i p . S p . E d . (Calgary), encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and D i p . M . T . (Capilano), M M T ( O U B C ) , M T A communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness J. W A T E R S , B A , M A ( S F U ) , P h D ( S F U ) in the field. They have field work in a different setting W. WATTS, B M T (OUBC), M T A for each o f the four terms, in w h i c h they are given S. W I L L I A M S , B . M u s . (Toronto), M C A T (Hahnemann), M T A , C M T , P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r Support increasing responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their own treatment programs, under clinical supervision. Staff T i m Coffey, Stores C l e r k Carol Paskaruk, Receptionist John M c M u r r a y , Stores Clerk Janice Capoeman, Secretary Continuance in the M u s i c Therapy program w i l l be contingent upon an adequate level o f personal, academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each semester by the M u s i c Therapy faculty. M u s i c therapy is a helping profession in which music therapists work BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY — OPEN UNIVERSITY with clients who are in a state o f disability. In the therapist/client relationship, there is an assumption that the therapist is in a well enough state o f health and w e l l - Graduates o f the Capilano College M u s i c Therapy program receive a Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy from the being to mediate client difficulties with an appropriate clinical approach. In other words, the therapist must British C o l u m b i a Open University. function in clinically suitable ways, be emotionally M u s i c therapists use the creative process inherent in stable and able to respond generally vis-a-vis the client's musical participation to assist individuals and groups to needs. The therapist is the helper. The role o f the M u s i c improve their mental, physical and emotional function- Therapy program, in addition to student education, is to ing. M u s i c therapists work with deep emotions in safeguard the standards o f practice o f the professional special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance music therapy community through monitoring student programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and readiness to work with members o f the community-at- music appreciation groups as they contribute to large who are at risk because o f disability, disease, therapeutic goals. M u s i c therapy is increasingly cultural and social deprivation, and otherwise disadvan- identified by health care professionals as an effective taged. Safety o f clients is essential. catalyst for client motivation, stimulation and communication. Ca reer/Voca 164 tional Contact: 984-4951 E-mail: mtherapy @ capcollege. be. ca Admission Requirements to the Third Year Accreditation This course work fulfills the educational requirements N . B . For admission requirements to the first year, for professional accreditation by the Canadian Associa- consult the entrance requirements to the M u s i c Depart- tion for M u s i c Therapy. ment. A n interview w i l l also be required with the M u s i c Therapy faculty, however acceptance to the first year does not guarantee acceptance to the third year. A supervised internship is also required before graduation, to fulfil the accreditation requirement for clinical work. A l l students entering the t h i r d year of the M u s i c Therapy program must: Program Content 1. C o m p l y with the general College entrance requirements (see A d m i s s i o n and Readmission section o f FIRST this calendar) and submit an Application for M . T . 320 Improvisation I 1.5 A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, M . T . 330 Basic C l i n i c a l Skills 3.0 together with official copies of all secondary and M . T . 350 The Influence of M u s i c 3.0 post-secondary education (if not already on file with M . T . 360 M u s i c Therapy I the College). 2. Participate in an interview with members o f the TERM M . T . 364 3.0 Disabling Conditions — Adulthood3.0 M . T . 380 Interpersonal Skills for M u s i c Therapists 1.5 P M I . 100 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument M u s i c Therapy faculty. Interviews are held in A p r i l and M a y . 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instru- Credits musical sensitivity in two contrasting pieces at an SECOND advanced level of proficiency. M . T . 361 4. Have completed one full year at the university level LQ 18.0 ment, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and TERM Credits M u s i c Therapy II 3.0 Disabling Conditions — C h i l d h o o d 3 . 0 Practicum II 6.0 M . T . 370 of M u s i c History, M u s i c Theory, Ear Training and M . T . 391 Sight Singing. M . T . 420 Improvisation II — Guitar 1.0 P M I . 200 Concentration Instrument 2.0 5. Have successfully completed at least two years o f course work at the university level, including at PMI. Secondary Instrument 1.0 least six credits of English (Literature & C o m p o s i - P S Y C 222 Abnormal Psychology 10 tion), 12 credits of Psychology* (including Intro- 19.0 ductory Psychology, Developmental Psychology and Psychology Elective 200 level or higher), three THIRD credits o f Sciences/Math (preferably H u m a n M . T . 340 M i d i Synthesis Technology 1.5 B i o l o g y ) , three credits o f M u s i c Pedagogy, six M . T . 450 The Influence o f M u s i c II credits o f Humanities and three credits o f electives. M . T . 460 M u s i c Therapy III 1.5 3.0 M . T . 490 Practicum III 6.0 P M I . 300 PMI. Concentration Instrument Secondary Instrument 2.0 1.0 P S Y C 201 Group Dynamics 6. Have some experience with people with special needs. 7. B e able to demonstrate a high level o f maturity, integrity, a clinical suitability and readiness to train TERM Credits as a therapist. 8. Have basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level o f FOURTH University Class Piano. M . T . 451 9. Have word processing skills. M . T . 461 M . T . 462 * A b n o r m a l Psychology is offered within the M u s i c Therapy program. Graduation Requirements TERM Credits M u s i c & the Creative Arts M u s i c Therapy I V 1.5 3.0 3.0 Principles o f Research M . T . 480 Improvisation III 1.5 M.T.491 Practicum I V 6.0 P M I . 400 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument LQ T o obtain the Bachelor of M u s i c Therapy degree candidates must fulfill the admission requirements to 10 18.0 is n i o.U Total 73.0 third year, complete the 73 credits in the courses outlined below as well as the post basic requirements of the nine-credit internship. Career/Vocational 165 Post Basic Program M . T . 510 Career Opportunities Requirements Internship 9.0 (Compulsory upon completion of all above courses.) Graduates are finding employment in entry-level positions w h i c h include general office assistants, receptionists, accounts payable and receivable clerks. Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements The Program CHILDREN The Office Assistant Program is a full-time, nine- North Vancouver School Board month program offered from September to M a y . T h i s B o b B e r w i c k Preschool program provides students with training in general office skills, computer applications, accounting, and PSYCHIATRY English speaking, listening, grammar and composition Riverview Hospital skills. Students are required to complete a work Westside Community Care Team practicum as part o f their training program. GERIATRICS Contact: Applied Business Technology: U B C Extended Care E-mail: 984-4959 abt@capcollege.bc.ca Yaletown House Admission Requirements PALLIATIVE CARE L i o n ' s Gate Hospital E S L students who wish to take this program must have St. Paul's Hospital a personal interview with the Program Convenor and C O M M U N I T Y SETTING Greater Vancouver Community Mental Health Services must meet these admission criteria: • Mount Pleasant Neighbourhood House Burnaby Parks and Recreation student status. • and interview. audition and application information, is available from • T e l : (604) 984-4951. M i n i m u m of College Prep E n g l i s h language skills as demonstrated by S L E P Test results, writing sample, N o t e : A complete information package, including the M u s i c Department office. Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature Competent conversational English. FIRST OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM* Advanced Speaking and E S L . 067 A d v a n c e d Reading and Listening for Business Vocabulary for Business Business English and Communications Introduction to Microcomputer B T E C 113 *This is a program for ESL students. This program is presently under review; the detailed Credits TERM ESL.062 B T E C 143 Applications listing of courses and course content may be changed SECOND Faculty D. B L A N E Y , ID ( U B C ) , C P S , M . E d . (SFU) M . G I O V A N N E T T I , B S A (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L Cert., M A ( T E S L ) ( S F U ) S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) D . G U S P I E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor S. H O R N , I D ( U B C ) , M . E d . ( S F U ) B T E C 119 TERM Accounting Procedures Support Staff Faye Ulker, Clerk Typist _ « Wendy Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant 166 15 Credits 4.5 Administrative Procedures 1.5 B T E C 144 Microcomputer Applications 4.5 B T E C 211 Business W r i t i n g or B T E C 212 Business English II B T E C 251 Interpersonal Skills 1.5 B T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 15 3.0 16.5 THIRD Credits TERM B T E C 118 Introduction to Computerized B T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience Accounting Certificate Requirements Career/Vocational 4.5 B T E C 140 N . P O W E R , B A (Concordia), L a b Supervisor A . S E D K Y , B A , M A , P h D ( A i n Shams, Cairo) 3.0 15.0 by the time the program is offered in September 2000. Instructional 3.0 1.5 1.5 33.0 * C I P — Course in Progress Admission Requirements Students who receive a m i n i m u m o f " B " i n the follow- 1. 18 years o f age or older. ing courses w i l l receive credit from Business A d m i n i s - 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. tration: B T E C 143 and 144 are equivalent to B C P T 121 and B C P T 122. 3. Submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n to the Registrar's Office. 4. Class size is limited to 15 students. ONLINE PUBLISHING CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Application Procedure Complete and submit an Application for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , D i p . ( E m i l y Carr College o f A r t & transcripts for secondary and post-secondary education. Contact the Program Convenor to register for courses. Design) K . B A R B O U R , D i p . M e d i a Program (Capilano College) Program Contact C. G R A T H A M , B . S c , M.Sc. ( U B C ) Sandi Rogers, P r o g r a m C o n v e n o r T. J U R I M A E , D i p . Infotec (Capilano) Phone: 604-990-7819 S. R O G E R S , B A A (Ryerson) E - m a i l : srogers@capcollege.bcca W e b address: www.capcollege.bc.ca/magic/onlinepub Career Opportunities The Online Publishing Certificate program is designed Program Content to keep pace with the rapidly changing W e b Publishing N o t e : not all of these courses are offered each semes- industry. W e offer you access to a wide range o f . ter; check the timetable. Credits courses, all taught by professionals with extensive teaching and industry experience. The program covers all aspects o f creating and managing a W e b site, including design, production, and administration. U p o n completion o f the certificate students can expect to find work in all areas of W e b Publishing. The Certificate Program The Online Publishing Program consists o f a number of part-time courses leading to a 15-credit certificate in Web Publishing. The program follows a modular format allowing students to build a program that suits their needs. Students may choose to take a single course or work towards the certificate. Students may also specialize in one specific area — design, production or administration — or build a foundation based on all three. Fees M T E C 101 M a c Operating System .80 M T E C 102 W e l c o m e to the Internet* .80 M T E C 103 W e b Design Fundamentals* .80 M T E C 104 Planning a W e b Site* .40 M T E C 105 Interface D e s i g n * .80 M T E C 106 Introductory W e b Site Production .80 M T E C 108 Intermediate W e b Design .80 M T E C 109 Photoshop for the W e b .80 M T E C 110 H T M L Authoring .80 M T E C 112 Web Animation .40 M T E C 113 Embedded M e d i a Sound for the W e b .80 M T E C 115 W e b Site Administration .80 M T E C 116 W e b Site M a r k e t i n g * .80 M T E C 117 Javascript .80 M T E C 118 Advanced Photoshop for the W e b .80 M T E C 119 Advanced H T M L .80 * These courses taught online on the Web. N o t e : N e w courses are added during the semester; Students can expect to pay approximately $3000 for please check the current brochure. tuition and online costs to complete the certificate program. Courses are priced individually at $186 for a .80 credit course and $90 for a .40 credit course. Career/Vocational 167 O U T D O O R RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM for qualified, well-trained managers in the field of outdoor recreation is expanding rapidly. The Outdoor Recreation Management diploma program meets this demand by offering an Outstanding curriculum blend- Instructional Faculty * C . B O N I F A C E , B . S c , P G C E (Birmingham), M . S c . ( S F U ) , Convenor, Outdoor Recreation C . F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor Rec. M g m t . (Capilano), ing outdoor education and business management Nestled on the forested slope o f the North Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean shoreline, and mountain back country, the C P R Instructor, C I S S R Wilderness Emergency College is ideally suited for the challenging two-year Response Instructor, B C R C A L a k e Water Instructor program. S. F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor R e c . M g m t . (Capilano), C P R The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and Instructor, C I S S R Wilderness Emergency Response informal; however, we set and maintain high academic Instructor, B C R C A L a k e and M o v i n g Water and outdoor leadership performance standards. Stu- Instructor dents w i l l appreciate the individual attention College G . G J E R D A L E N , B A M R M (SFU), A P M C P faculty are able to provide. (Capilano) C . K I L I A N , B A (Columbia), M A ( S F U ) Career Opportunities D. L O B L A W , B A (U ofT) R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U . o f Alberta) J. R O U S E , D M A T P , B . S c . ( M t . A l l i s o n U ) , Cert. Tourism M g m t . (Capilano), Coordinator B . W H I T E , D M A T P , B A (Hons.), M A , P h D ( S F U ) , Convenor, Tourism Degree The well-established Outdoor Recreation Management program provides excellent training for a wide range o f careers in federal, provincial and regional parks, resorts, social service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental education. Careful practicum placements and an increasing variety o f career opportunities Bachelor of Tourism Management Degree A Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management degree is offered ensure that graduates readily find employment in the field. through the British C o l u m b i a Open University in The Program collaboration with Capilano College. The intent of the The curriculum includes several trips into B . C . ' s degree is to provide the most up-to-date knowledge, wilderness areas, including backpacking experiences in innovations, technologies, and management techniques the Coast Mountains, and West Coast environmental for administrators and entrepreneurs in the tourism and cultural studies. industry. The degree requirements include core business and tourism foundation courses, general education requirements, specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a number o f defined elective credits. The academic credentials earned in the Outdoor Recreation Management diploma satisfy most core Our program has earned an excellent reputation for its' top-quality management and technical skills and employment contacts. Over the past two decades, we have expanded our network o f practicum placements, keeping us in touch with the latest developments and providing access to career prospects. business and tourism foundation courses, and elective requirements. Subject to approval from the Open University, Capilano College w i l l be offering all the Contact: 984-4960; Fax: 984-1761 E-mail: outdoor®capcollege.bc.ca necessary courses to earn a B . C . Open University Bachelor of T o u r i s m Management Degree. For a Admission Requirements detailed brochure about the degree, please contact • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student • Personal interview Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or fax (604) 9841761. status • TWO-YEAR OUTDOOR RECREATION M A N A G E M E N T DIPLOMA B . C . ' s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor Attendance at orientation meeting. Orientation meetings and interviews are scheduled in February and M a r c h . Phone the department for dates and times. • Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age at the recreation, and with the growing tourism business and date o f entry into the program, should have good increase in leisure time for many people, the demand reading and writing skills, have previous relevant Career/Vocational 168 outdoor experience, and must be physically and THIRD psychologically prepared for the challenges o f the B M K T 163 TERM S m a l l Bus. M g m t . II Selective Skills • 3.0 no credit program and the demands o f the industry. Students REC.120 applying for admission should be aware that attitude, R E C . 178 Human Relations in Recreation field performance and participation are taken into R E C . 243 Business L a w in Outdoor Recreation 3.0 Prior to the start of the program, a doctor's certificate R E C . 252 Environmental Stewardship II 3.0 of health w i l l be required. T O U R 233 Cross Cultural Tourism account i n the departmental evaluation process. • Credits 3.0 3.0 15.0 A l l students need to be well equipped with outdoor gear and must be prepared to pay additional costs for • field trips. FOURTH Students must obtain a 3.00 ( " B " ) cumulative G P A R E C . 255 TERM Credits Outdoor Recreation Practicum in the first three terms and be 21 years of age in order to be considered for a practicum outside Canada. Admission Procedure 9.0 63.0 Total Selective Skills The Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office, together with official During their time in the Outdoor Recreation Management program, students are required to pursue two transcripts and other pertinent documents. skills activities in their particular area o f interest. These Please bring the following documentation to your selective skills help our graduates to find work i n the interview: outdoor recreation, adventure travel and eco-tourism • A t least two letters of reference industries. • A resume o f past experiences Wilderness Leadership Program Program Content FIRST TERM C M N S 154 The fourteen week Wilderness Leadership Certificate Credits Communications i n Outdoor Recreation and Tourism leadership skills and activity instruction in mountain 3.0 Outdoor Recreation Delivery R E C . 143 Program offers a combination of essential outdoor travel, water travel and winter travel. Students w i l l gain the background and experience necessary to continue Systems 3.0 R E C . 152 Environmental Stewardship I 3.0 R E C . 156 Introduction to Environmental Studies 3.0 Management diploma program and T o u r i s m Manage- R E C . 157 A p p l i e d Field Skills 3.0 ment degree. R E C . 169 Landscape Interpretation 3.0 R E C . 139 Computer Applications I for Outdoor Recreation • SECOND TERM 10. 21.0 For more information: Phone: 984-4960 E-mail: outdoor®capcollege.be.ca Website: www.capcollege.bc.ca Credit B M K T 164 S m a l l Business Management I Selective Skills R E C . 144 Outdoor Recreation Program R E C . 151 The Outdoor Recreation Environment 3.0 R E C . 163 Wilderness First A i d I 3.0 R E C . 239 Computer Applications II T O U R 111 T o u r i s m : Industry Perspective for Outdoor Recreation tourism as qualified and accredited leaders, or to continue their schooling with the Outdoor Recreation R E C . 120 Planning on with|a career in outdoor recreation or adventure 3.0 no credit 3.0 3.0 _3J) 18.0 Ca reer/Voca tional 169 SPECIAL EDUCATION TEACHER ASSISTANT PROGRAM W h o Should Apply? Successful S E T A applicants have an aptitude for working with children or adolescents, are patient, interested i n education and learning, consider schools Instructional to be interesting and exciting places, and show initia- Faculty S. A L T M A N , M A , B A tive while working i n a world of rapidly changing J. G I B B S , R S W , Sp.Ed., W W U ideas. D. K O C H , B.Ed., M . E d , Coordinator Admission Requirements R. P E A R S O N , B . E d . , M . E d . A. S T E V E N S , B.Ed., M.Ed., E D D Applicants are required to attend an information session and w i l l be assessed on the basis of an inter- General Information view with faculty, past academic experience and The Special Education Teacher Assistant ( S E T A ) program prepares students to work in inclusive educational settings with children and adolescents, Kinder- relevant experience working with children and adolescents. • Prospective applicants must have completed Grade garten to Grade 12, who have diverse learning needs. 12 (transcript required) or equivalent work experi- S E T A students are trained to support children with ence. special needs so that these children can participate fully • as members of a community o f learners. Registrar's Office. Special Education Teacher Assistants ( S E T A ' s ) work under the direction o f classroom teachers or resource • volunteer or paid employee. Applicants w i l l be physical, learning or emotional needs by: asked to submit letters from employers or responsi- implementing individualized or group instruction in ble persons in the community certifying this experi- communication skills, life skills, behaviour manage- ence. ment techniques and adaptive physical education. • assisting i n the modification o f curriculum, assign- Applicants are required to demonstrate successful experience working with children/adolescents, as a teachers and give special attention to students with • A Capilano College Application for A d m i s s i o n form and official transcripts must be submitted to the • Applicants must demonstrate the ability to c o m m u nicate effectively i n spoken and written English. A ments and tests to accommodate students' special short diagnostic English test w i l l be administered needs during your interview session. • attending to and providing personal assistance to students in toileting, positioning, mobility, feeding, transferring and assisting students to and from wheelchairs, desks, special equipment and work areas • A personal interview with the program faculty is required. grooming and dressing • • supporting all students i n classroom environments This program prepares students for a variety of para- Graduation Requirements T o qualify for the practicum placement and S E T A credit certificate, students must have a current Standard First A i d and C P R Certificate, criminal record check and T B test. professional duties in school, and includes theoretical studies and practical applications for w o r k i n g with U p o n successful completion of all S E T A requirements, children and adolescents who need extra support. a credit certificate w i l l be awarded at the C o l l e g e ' s Contact: Diane Mills, Program convocation. Assistant Room CE373; Tel: 990-7802 Courses or Diane Koch, Coordinator Fall Term Room CE353; Tel: 986-1911, local 2209 S E T A 100 History, Philosophy and Issues S E T A 101 W o r k i n g in Schools S E T A 105 Developmental Challenges for S E T A 106 Technology for S E T A ' s Email: seta®capcollege.be.ca Credits in Special Education SETA's Career/Vocational 170 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.5 Spring Term S E T A 102 acceptance to the advanced art and design programs of their choice. Graduates of the Studio A r t program Interpersonal Skills for Teachers' Assistants 1.5 usually complete their education at university, art S E T A 103 Challenging Behaviours 1.5 school or in a college design program. S E T A 104 C h i l d G r o w t h and Development The Studio A r t program provides studio experiences i n 1.5 for S E T A ' s S E T A 107 Instructional Strategies I 3.0 S E T A 108 Instructional Strategies II 1.5 2-D Studies, 3-D Studies and D r a w i n g and courses i n Visual Literacy, A r t History, and English. Through exposure to a broad range o f concepts, * S E T A 109 Practicum 6.0 22.5 materials, techniques, and processes, students are assisted in developing personal interests, directions, and creative maturity. The emphasis of the program is *The 120-hour practicum is taken once all theoretical on preparing students to function effectively within the coursework has been completed and is offered in both context of current thought and practice within the fine terms. arts, while preparing them for further studies in art and Certificate requirements equal 22.5 credits at 450 design-related fields. Because the program also hours. exposes students to creative thinking and problemsolving, it may also serve as a foundation for further general education. STUDIO ART P R O G R A M Contact: Art Department, Studio Art is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. Other art programs in this Calendar include Textile Arts, Graphic Design and Illustration, and Commercial Animation. Instructional 984-4911 Part-time Courses There are a limited number of positions open in many of the credit courses offered in Studio A r t . These Faculty courses may be credited toward either a D i p l o m a in M . B O W C O T T , A O C A (Ontario), M A ( R C A London) Studio A r t , a D i p l o m a in A c a d e m i c Studies or a N . B O Y D , B A (Waterloo) D i p l o m a in General Studies, depending on the stu- B . C O G S W E L L , N D D (Hammersmith) ( R C A ) dent's educational objectives. For diplomas other than W . E A S T C O T T , Sr.Cert. ( V S A ) ( R C A ) Studio A r t , see Graduation section in this Calendar. J. J U N G I C , B A , M A ( U B C ) Students taking Studio A r t courses must be available S. K W A N , ( E C C A D ) for the labs attached to Ceramics, Sculpture and T. M U L V I H I L L , M F A ( U . of Calgary), M A ( U . of Printmaking which take place on the afternoon o f Idaho), B F A (Idaho) scheduled classes. Students must ensure that courses D . N E A V E , B A (Hons.) (Manchester), M A ( U . V i c . ) taken outside of Studio A r t w i l l not conflict with these . G. R A M M E L L , (ECCAD) labs. General Information Studio A r t offers a program of studies leading to a twoyear diploma. The Department encourages students to take both terms of any given discipline (i.e. both D r a w i n g I and II) in the interests of effective university transfer status. The program w i l l try to pre-register returning students into spring term courses. Studio A r t has a limited number o f openings in many of its courses for part-time study and in advanced ceramics. It also offers individual credit courses in A r t Career and Educational Opportunities Institute advanced studies. See Art Institute in the Post- The fields of further study listed below lead to specific graduate programs section of this career or job opportunities. It is recommended that an Calendar. education in these specific careers should follow a high The Program quality broad art foundation such as that offered by The Studio A r t program at Capilano College provides a the province to pursue these educational goals. Studio A r t . Students may find they need to study out of thorough, high quality foundation i n the fundamentals of art. It enables students to make informed decisions F I N E A R T S : sculptor, printmaker, painter regarding future career choices and enables them to G A L L E R I E S A N D M U S E U M S : curator, restorer, prepare high quality portfolios to aid them in gaining illustrator Career/Voca tional 171 I N D U S T R Y : industrial, interior, furniture designer Application Procedure C R A F T S : ceramic, textile, jewellery artist, Prior to the portfolio interview, all applicants must I L L U S T R A T O R : fashion, medical, advertising, supply the following documentation to the R e g i s t r a r ' s publishing Office b y the e n d o f A p r i l : A R C H I T E C T U R E : model maker, Tenderer, restorer E D U C A T I O N : instructor, art therapist, consultant • • Secondary and post-secondary transcripts (indicating 6 credits E n g . 100 i f applicable). Students who study full-time or part-time and acquire either a D i p l o m a in Studio A r t or a D i p l o m a in A c a - Completed Capilano College Application for Admission • Certificate o f English Language Assessment test demic Studies (including art courses) should find that ( E L A ) or Test o f English as a Foreign Language educational opportunities exist in these and other ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable. fields. APPLICANTS MUST PHONE T H E ART D E P A R T M E N T A T 984-4911 B E F O R E T H E E N D Admission Requirements Students interested i n study w i t h the S t u d i o A r t p r o g r a m s h o u l d contact the A r t D e p a r t m e n t at 9844911 o r write to: T h e A r t D e p a r t m e n t , C a p i l a n o OF APRIL TO A R R A N G E A PORTFOLIO INTERVIEW FOR EARLY M A Y . Please return your Studio Art questionnaire to the Art Department Office (AR 202) prior to your interview. College, 2055 P u r c e l l W a y , N o r t h V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V7J 3H5 FULL-TIME STUDENTS Special Fees and Expenses Although the Studio A r t Department can supply some of the materials required for the courses, the student Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature can expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, student status required. as indicated in the course outlines. Applicants are admitted on the basis o f an interview and portfolio presentation. The candidate decides on University Transfer the nature and scope o f work presented, but should A l l Studio A r t courses are university transferable to provide a representative picture of past and current many other institutions. Please check the B . C . Transfer artistic activities. Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide for more In addition to completed work and sketchbooks, information. research material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible. Slides, photographs or any Program Content other supporting evidence may also form part of the portfolio. It is not necessary for prospective students to Credits Major Program Requirements 60 mount work for the portfolio, since the quality of work is more important than the presentation. PART-TIME STUDENTS Applicants may be eligible to take courses where space is available. A few places are available for part-time students in all courses. Before the end of A p r i l , interested applicants should contact the A r t office at 9844911 regarding portfolio interviews. Students wishing to register into the open D r a w i n g classes may do so during the normal registration period, space permitting. Career/Vocational 172 FIRST TERM Credits A H I S 104 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture 3 S A R T 150 Drawing I 3 and 3 o f the following: S A R T 163 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t I (3) S A R T 167 3-D Studies: Sculpture I (3) S A R T 171 2 - D Studies: Painting I (3) S A R T 182 2 - D Studies: Printmaking I (3) 9 _ 15 English Requirement SECOND TERM Credits A H I S 105 Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II 3 S A R T 151 D r a w i n g II 3 and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* S A R T 165 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t II (3) S A R T 172 2 - D Studies: Painting II (3) S A R T 174 3-D Studies: Sculpture II (3) S A R T 183 2 - D Studies: Printmaking II (3) 9 Six credits of English are required as prerequisite to Studio A r t , and therefore to receiving a Studio A r t D i p l o m a . A student accepted into the program without the English requirements must complete the two English courses prior to applying for a Studio A r t Diploma. _ 15 Students who complete all o f the major program requirements but fail to take English w i l l be granted a D i p l o m a in General Studies. THIRD TERM Credits Advanced Courses S A R T 300 A r t Institute I — Sculpture & S A R T 301 A r t Institute II — Sculpture & 3 - D Studies: Sculpture III (3) S A R T 310 A d v a n c e d Ceramic Studies 3 S A R T 273 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t III (3) S A R T 311 A d v a n c e d Ceramic Studies II 3 S A R T 282 2 - D Studies: Printmaking III (3) A H I S 210 History of M o d e r n A r t 3 (19th Century) S A R T 262 D r a w i n g III and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* S A R T 250 S A R T 257 9 TERM Credits History o f M o d e r n A r t S A R T 263 Drawing I V 3 3 and 3 o f the following (with prerequisites):* 9 (20th Century) 2 - D Studies: Painting I V (3) S A R T 265 3-D Studies: Sculpture I V (3) S A R T 274 3-D Studies: Ceramic A r t I V (3) S A R T 283 2 - D Studies: Printmaking I V (3) TEXTILE ARTS PROGRAM The Textile Arts Program is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. Other art Programs in this Calendar include Studio Art, Graphic Design and Illustration, and Commercial Animation. Instructional Faculty N . B O Y D , B A (Waterloo) _ 15 * 12 _ A H I S 211 S A R T 255 12 Printmaking 2 - D Studies: Painting III (3) 15 FOURTH Printmaking 3 Where scheduling permits, second-year students may elect to drop one o f their three selected disciplines, then pick up both terms of the first year discipline not previously studied. E . H A N N A N , B F A ( U . o f Manitoba) K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg.School of Art) A . M A L L I N S O N , (Westdean College, Sussex, England) L . R I C H M O N D , Teach. Cert. (Trent Park, L o n d o n , Eng.) M . A r t E d . ( W . W a s h . U . ) R. S C H E U I N G , B F A ( N o v a Scotia College o f A r t & Design) Acceptance into Second Year Courses Due to space limitations in the second year, completion of first-year courses does not guarantee acceptance into individual second-year courses. W h e n more students require a course than space allows, acceptance in the P. S I N G E R , B A (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M F A (Concordia) Y. W A K A B A Y A S H I , B.Ed., M.Ed. (UBC) General Information course w i l l be based on the grades received in the pre- The Textile Arts program offers a full-time, two-year requisite course. program leading to a D i p l o m a . It also offers a one-year A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certifi- A l l studio courses include slide/lectures, demonstra- cate program. tions, individual and group critiques, field trips and Occasional evening part-time courses are also offered. guest artist speakers. For non-credit courses i n Textile Arts, please contact Continuing Education at 984-4901. Contact: Ruth Scheuing, Coordinator, ext. 2008 986-1911, (rscheuin@capcollege.bc.ca) Ca reer/Voca tional 173 The Program Students learn about textile arts by exploring many different processes and by studying historical and contemporary works. Prospective students are admitted on the basis o f an interview. N o previous experience in textile arts is required. Students should bring up to 20 pieces o f work to the interview. A n y combination o f media are accepted, such as textiles, painting, photographs, The core content o f W e a v i n g and Textile Surface ceramics, drawing etc. Slides or photographs can be Design is complemented by courses in Drawing, shown instead of actual works. Design, V i s u a l Literacy, Communications and Textile History. N e w courses i n "Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts" and "Precision D y e i n g " Students without previous art background, but with suitable academic experience w i l l also be considered. provide students with information and hands-on experience that w i l l facilitate entering a professional career. A critical and analytical approach to their o w n work w i l l enable graduates to be proficient in a range of professional activities. A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certificate Program A two year D i p l o m a in V i s u a l Arts or equivalent studies with courses in the following areas for a combined total o f 24 credits: Painting, Photography, Gallery and studio visits, as well as guest lectures by Printmaking, Sculpture, Ceramics, W e a v i n g , Surface visiting artists and other professionals working in Design and Fashion Design. textiles or related areas, augment regular teaching In addition, six credits in each o f the following areas sessions. They show distinct approaches to an artist's are also required: Design, D r a w i n g , A r t History or work and also provide practical information on how V i s u a l Literacy, English or Communications. careers are built. Students also need to show a portfolio and come for an Practicums with artists, crafts people, related busi- interview to be admitted. N o previous experience in nesses or organizations take place as part o f the course textile arts is required. in "Professional and Business S k i l l s " . They provide a useful work experience for students in the Textile Arts program. Students who miss some prerequisites may be admitted into the advanced program on condition that they take the missing courses before graduating. Career Opportunities Past graduates are working professionally as artists, Application Procedures crafts people or designers in fashion or interior design. Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Department to Some graduates have found employment in film or arrange an interview. Interviews are held in M a y and theatre productions or work for arts organizations or some additional interviews may be scheduled i n related businesses. August, space permitting. E v e n i n g interviews are The Textile Arts program can also be a stepping stone toward further studies in degree granting programs and previous students have transferred to institutions across available. Send the following documentation to the Registrar's Office, prior to M a y 1: • Canada and the U S A to pursue studies i n V i s u a l Arts, Completed Capilano College Application for Admission Design, Fashion, Textile Conservation and Aboriginal • Secondary and post-secondary transcripts Arts. Options also exist to combine Textile Arts with • Official copies o f English Language Assessment studies in academic areas such as Anthropology and ( E L A ) Test or Test o f English as a Foreign L a n - Art History. guage ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable Textile Arts form an important aspect o f the cultural • Questionnaires life i n any community and many ways exist to apply the skills learned and build a professional career. Transfer Credits Courses marked with an asterisk (e.g. A H I S 105*) Admission Requirements Textile Arts Diploma Program carry transferability to U B C , S F U , U . V i c , and other academic degree-granting institutions. Other courses can be transferred to programs which include textile Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature arts in their curriculum. M a n y students have success- student status. fully transferred credits towards B F A degrees at N o v a Scotia College o f A r t and Design, Alberta College o f Art and other out-of-province schools. Career/Vocational 174 Students should understand that advanced standing in Advanced Textile Arts Certificate any institution is usually based on an interview and a Credits portfolio submission, as well as credits. Please check Major Program Requirements the B . C . Transfer Guide or the Capilano College General Education Requirements 24.0 60 Transfer Guide or contact the V i s u a l and Performing 30.0 Arts Department for more specific information. FIRST Special Fees and Expenses Some materials needed for the courses are supplied and are covered by a supply fee. In addition, students Textile Surface Design V 4.5 T X T L 367 Weaving V 4.5 A H I S 231 History of Textile A r t I should expect an outlay for midterm, final projects, T X T L 290 basic supplies, and textbooks. General Education Requirements SECOND Introduction to V i s u a l Culture I C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech Credits 4.5 42.0 T X T L 368 Weaving V I 4.5 18.0 A H I S 232 History of Textile A r t II or A r t History* or T X T L 340 3.0 T X T L 158 Design I 3.0 T X T L 160 Textile Surface Design I 3.0 T X T L 168 Weaving I 10 15.0 3.0 Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts 3.0 or a 100-level E n g l i s h course TERM Credits Textile Surface Design V I Credits A H I S 104* SECOND 3.0 TERM T X T L 230 TERM 3.0 Precision D y e i n g T X T L 385 60.0 FIRST or A r t History* 15.0 Program Content Major Program Requirements Credits TERM T X T L 384 3 D Fibre Constructions III 3.0 15.0 * N o t e : Students with a Textile Arts Diploma require another Art History (beyond AHIS 104/105, 231/232). All other students require History of Textile Art I and II. Credits A H I S 105* Introduction to V i s u a l Culture II 3.0 T X T L 178 Design II 3.0 THEATRE P R O G R A M T X T L 154 Introductory D r a w i n g I 3.0 T X T L 161 Textile Surface Design II 3.0 A. DIPLOMA IN THEATRE T X T L 169 W e a v i n g II 10 B. THEATRE INSTITUTE 15.0 Instructional THIRD TERM Credits Faculty S. A T K I N S , B A , M F A ( S F U ) A H I S 231 * C M N S 153 History of Textile A r t I Communications & the Arts 3.0 F. B L A C K , B F A ( S F U ) , B A ( U . V i c . ) T X T L 267 T X T L 284 T X T L 290 or a 100-level English Course W e a v i n g III Textile Surface Design III Precision D y e i n g 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 P. C O N N E L L , B A , M A , P h D ( U B C ) T. F O R R E S T , B F A ( B C O U ) P. G E R E N C H E R FOURTH TERM K. BOTHEN Credits D. M O O R E , B F A ( U V i c ) , M A (WWU) B . M U R D O C H , B F A (U.Vic.), M F A ( U B C ) D. P R I C E , B A (SFU), M F A ( U B C ) D. W I N S T A N L E Y A H I S 232* History of Textile A r t II 3.0 T X T L 240 3 D Fibre Constructions II 3.0 General Information T X T L 268 Weaving I V 3.0 The Theatre Department offers a two-year D i p l o m a T X T L 285 Textile Surface Design I V 3.0 program. They also offer a one-year Certificate pro- T X T L 230 Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts gram through the Theatre Institute. Theatre has 3.0 openings in some of its courses for part-time study. 15.0 Career/Vocational 175 Mission a n d Goals a) Part-time Non-diploma Thorough grounding in all aspects o f Theatre training Part-time students are encouraged to register i n the for students is the goal of the Theatre Department. The courses and to participate i n department productions. Department values academic and professional training They w i l l be included i n the same classes as full-time with practical application in acting, technical, and program students. Seats available to part-time students management laboratory situations. Competence, are listed in the timetable. The goal is to foster literacy adaptability, and leadership are the values the depart- in the art o f theatre. ment instils in its emerging Theatre artists. b) Part-time Diploma Studies Facilities Some seats are available for part-time study leading to the Theatre D i p l o m a . The goal is to provide the same Performance classes are held in the Arbutus Studio adjacent to the Capilano College Performing Arts comprehensive training i n theatre as for full-time students, but spread over a longer period o f time. Theatre, which houses the Department's season o f plays. The theatre is complete with a rehearsal hall, University Transfer Credit changing rooms, costume and technical workshops, a fly-tower, and a 376-seat house. D i p l o m a courses transfer to universities and universitycolleges. Please consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e for Students i n Theatre enjoy exceptional access to these the most recent transfer information. Students may facilities, and assist in running the theatres i n a hands- have to audition for placement i n other programs, and on, educational experience. should consult with the specific institution regarding these requirements. Productions Each year, Capilano College Theatre produces a season Admission a n d Registration Procedures of full length plays i n the Performing Arts Theatre and A l l students must meet the admission requirements for in the Arbutus Studio. Auditions are open to A d v a n c e d post-secondary programs. For Theatre, a student's Certificate and D i p l o m a program students, the College Grade 12 Fine Arts grades w i l l also be considered. community, alumni, and members o f the community at Prospective full-time and part-time D i p l o m a students large. These productions also offer students practical must contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by experience i n technical theatre and design, as well as the end of A p r i l to set up an audition/interview time. exposure to guest directors and designers. N o n - Late applicants w i l l be considered i f space permits. program students may participate i n productions by registering in a practicum course. Students who wish 1. Students must submit the results o f the Language to participate in productions should not register in non-theatre courses which are scheduled Monday Friday, 4:30 - 10:30 p.m. or Saturdays, 10:00 a.m 6:00 p.m. Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test (See Registration section of this Calendar) to register i n an English course. Do not delay obtaining these results. 2. Students applying for first year w i l l be asked to A . DIPLOMA IN THEATRE submit a letter outlining why they want to study theatre and an interim transcript showing high The Theatre D i p l o m a program provides a two-year, school courses and marks. A letter of recommenda- comprehensive training in theatre, with experience in a tion from a theatre professional or instructor is an full range o f theatre specialties, in a pre-professional optional submission. program. Students may choose to focus on either 3. Students wishing to enter the second year directly, performance or technical courses. U p o n graduation, and those applying to study for the Diploma students w i l l have successfully participated in acting time, w i l l be assessed for admittance on an indi- part- and other studio courses, technical theatre, theatre vidual basis, subject to the availability o f places i n history, criticism and dramaturgy, as well as perform- the program and a successful audition/interview. ance. They w i l l be able to transfer to a university or university college and pursue a further, more specialized degree in theatre, or apply their theatre skills to further study in Arts or Education faculties. Graduates are also eligible to apply for a place in the Theatre Institute. Career/Vocational 176 4. D i p l o m a students w i l l be pre-registered on a specific date. AH other students may register during Inperson Registration in any Theatre Department course with seats available. Special Fees Technical Theatre classes are assessed a lab fee of $30 each. T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches II T H T R 250 Senior Production T H T R 251 Senior Production 3.0 Responsibilities I Some courses are non-base funded. Consult the 1.5 1.5 Responsibilities II timetable. Fees for these courses are not refundable T H T R 252 Advanced Lighting and Sound I 1.5 after the first day of classes. T H T R 253 T H T R 254 Advanced Lighting and Sound II Technical Theatre/Design I 1.5 4.5 T H T R 255 Technical Theatre/Design II 4.5 T H T R 260 Analysis for Directing and Design Diploma Program Curriculum 60 credits, including English 100 and one other 100level English course. 3.0 6.0 Electives 3O0 FIRST TERM (both Performance Technical/Design Stream) Stream and THIRD AND FOURTH Credits T H T R 100 Acting I 3.0 T H T R 120 Elements o f Theatre I 3.0 T H T R 150 Introduction to Production and TERMS (Performance Stream) M i n . 24 credits in Theatre plus six credits o f electives. Required i Credits Courses T H T R 200 Script and Stage 3.0 Design I 3.0 T H T R 201 Acting IV 3.0 E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 T H T R 205 Bodywork 3.0 Elective (students are advised to take 3.0 T H T R 207 V o c a l Communication I 3.0 T H T R 220 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I 3.0 T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches II 3.0 T H T R 260 Analysis for Directing and Design 3.0 electives which fulfil transfer requirements) and/or: T H T R 190, 191, 192 Practicums (may be taken as an 3.0 plus two course selected from: Senior Production T H T R 250 elective or to replace T H T R 100 or 150. A p p r o v a l required.) Responsibilities I 150 SECOND TERM (both Technical/Design Performance Stream and Stream) Credits T H T R 101 A c t i n g II 3.0 T H T R 121 Elements o f Theatre II 3.0 T H T R 151 Introduction to Production and Design II 3.0 English Literature 3.0 Elective 3.0 (students are advised to take electives w h i c h fulfil transfer T H T R 251 Senior Production T H T R 252 Advanced Lighting and Sound I T H T R 253 Advanced Lighting and Sound II Responsibilities II and/or: 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.0 Electives 3O0 B. THEATRE INSTITUTE (formerly Advanced Certificate in Theatre) Instructional requirements) 1.5 Faculty D. M O O R E , B F A ( U V i c ) , M A ( W W U ) T H T R 193, 194, 195 3.0 B. M U R D O C K , B F A ( U V i c ) , M F A ( U B C ) Practicums (may be taken as an D. P R I C E , B A (SFU), M F A ( U B C ) elective or to replace T H T R 101 D. W I N S T A N L E Y or 151. Approval required.) L50 THIRD AND FOURTH Design Stream) TERMS (Technical Theatre/ General Information The Theatre Institute is a one-year certificate program which is unique in the college system. It is designed for , theatre students who have previous theatre training but M i n . 24 credits in Theatre plus six credits o f electives: desire the opportunity to practice their skills i n produc- Required tion and performance; for students with training i n T H T R 220 courses: Credits Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I related performance arts who want exposure to 3.0 C a reer/Voca tional 177 traditional theatre practice; or for students with experience but little formal training. The program can Acting FIRST TERM accommodate actors or directors as w e l l as stage T H T R 372 managers and production specialists. The Theatre Institute is open to students who have SECOND graduated with a theatre diploma from Capilano T H T R 373 Credits Theatre Institute I — A c t i n g TERM 12.0 Credits Theatre Institute II — A c t i n g 12.0 College or an equivalent program at another institution, or students who have equivalent performance experience but no formal certification. Students are given the opportunity to work on Theatre Production, Stage M a n a g e m e n t FIRST TERM Credits T H T R 374 Theatre Institute I — Production 12.0 Department's productions and in its facilities. Each year the department mounts productions i n the 376-seat SECOND Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre and also in T H T R 375 its well equipped, flexible studio theatre. Directors include experienced faculty, renowned guest artists, and directing students in the program. Each student w i l l receive guidance through semi-private instruction or seminars, and practical experience in productions. The Capilano College Theatre Department enjoys a working relationship with the Arts C l u b Theatre who audition program students yearly and consider them for TERM Credits Theatre Institute II — Production 12.0 T o t a l C r e d i t s per s p e c i a l i z a t i o n : 24.0* * Students may have to take additional courses i f there are educational deficiencies in the area o f speciality. Fees Fees for 2000/2001 are estimated at $1,000 per term. supporting roles in one o f their season plays or to assist one o f their directors or stage managers. Students must apply separately for these placements which are subject to availability and approval by both the Theatre Department and the Arts C l u b Theatre. Completion o f the Theatre Institute program signifies an intensive year o f performance, directing, or produc- TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP PROGRAM A. TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP DIPLOMA P R O G R A M B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T DEGREE C. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE IN TOURISM STUDIES tion experience. Outcomes w i l l vary depending on the student's ability at entry but all students can expect an intensive exposure to the craft and the opportunity to develop personal s k i l l . Admission Requirements Instructional Students are selected by audition and/or interview. Contact the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office by the end o f A p r i l for admission to the program which starts in August. Faculty C . B O T T E R I L L , B.Soc.Sc. (Waikato), M A (Hons.), (Canterbury, N . Z . ) P. B R A N D , B A , M A (Alberta) D . C A T R O U N , B A (Concordia), C H S , C F M , C F B E , DMATP Theatre Institute Curriculum R. D A V I E S Students concentrate on one of three specialized areas: G . F A N E , B . S c . (City U . ) , M B A ( U B C ) , C M A directing, acting or production/stage management. G . G J E R D A L E N , B A ( S F U ) , A C M C P (Capilano), M R M (SFU) S. H A L S A L L , B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( M c G i l l ) Directing FIRST TERM T H T R 370 SECOND T H T R 371 Credits Theatre Institute I — Directing TERM Theatre Institute II — Directing 12.0 Credits 12.0 W . I N G L I S , B A ( U B C ) , D i p . Marketing ( U o f M ) C . K I L I A N , B A (Col.), M A ( S F U ) R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) L . M O R A N , Hospitality D i p l o m a (Ryerson), D M A T P D . O ' L E A R Y , B A E d . (Memorial), D i p . A d u l t E d . (Alberta), M . E d . ( U B C ) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c . ( N . Dakota), Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba), Tour. M g m t . Cert. (Capilano), D M A T P Career/Vocational 178 H . P L U M E , C M A , D i p . Accelerated Computer Systems Management (Capilano) requirements, specified and elective courses at the upper level, and a number of defined elective credits. T. P O W E R , B A (St. M a r y ' s ) , L L B , M P A (Dalhousie) The academic credentials earned in the T o u r i s m J. R O U S E , B . S c . ( M t . A . ) , Tour. M g m t . Cert., Management C o - o p D i p l o m a and the Outdoor Recrea- (Capilano College), D M A T P , C o o r d i n a t o r tion Management D i p l o m a satisfy most core business L . S A V A G E , B A ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) and tourism foundation courses, and elective require- C . W A T T S , D M A T P , B A (SDSU), D i p . Tourism ments. Managment (Capilano) Upper level course requirements include the courses B . W H I T E , B A (Hons.), M A ( S F U ) , P h D ( S F U ) , D M A T P , Coordinator Support listed under the advanced certificate in tourism studies curriculum plus T O U R 440, the graduating seminar. Courses subject to approval by the British C o l u m b i a Staff Open University. Sharon M i l e t i c — Program Assistant Capilano College offers all the necessary courses to Contact: 984-4960; Fax: 984-1761 E-mail: tourism @ capcollege. be. ca A . TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM Capilano College's accelerated T o u r i s m Management earn a British C o l u m b i a Open University Bachelor of Tourism Management Degree. For a detailed brochure about the degree and an B . C . Open University application form, please contact Capilano College at (604) 984-4960 or fax (604) 9841761. Co-op program is on the leading edge o f tourism education. Our mission is to train students in the management skills necessary for the successful opera- Admission Requirements for the Diploma tion of travel generators, including resorts, adventure In order to be considered, applicants should have sound tourism, attractions, conferences, and special events. reading and writing skills, and ideally some tourism Marketing, research and entrepreneurial skills in industry work experience. Previous post-secondary tourism business are also emphasized. Recognition of education is a definite asset. C a l l the T o u r i s m Depart- our curriculum by the Pacific R i m Institute of T o u r i s m ment in August or September for dates o f the informa- provides access to industry certification. tion meetings and follow-up interviews. Intensive technical skills courses, contact with the industry, and a four and a half month supervised co-op work term encourages a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business approach combined with creative teaching promises a rewarding educational investment for students. Capilano College T o u r i s m Management offers top Interview Procedure Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • A t least two letters of reference • H i g h school or post-secondary education transcripts • A resume o f past experiences quality faculty, a beautiful campus, and an exciting learning environment. Program Content If you are actively considering a career in tourism and TERM think you have what it takes to be successful as a C M N S 154 1 (January to April) Credits Communications in Recreation professional in the field, give us a c a l l ! and T o u r i s m T O U R 100 3.0 Tourism C o - o p Preparation T O U R 111 1.5 Tourism: A n Industry Perspective 3.0 T O U R 112 Tourism M a r k e t i n g T O U R 113 Human Resource Management through the British C o l u m b i a Open University in T O U R 131 Tourism Product Development collaboration with Capilano College. The intent of the T O U R 139 Computer Applications in B. BACHELOR OF TOURISM M A N A G E M E N T DEGREE A Bachelor o f T o u r i s m Management degree is offered in T o u r i s m degree is to provide the most up-to-date knowledge, innovations, technologies, and management techniques Tourism II Total 3.0 3.0 3.0 30 19.5 for administrators and entrepreneurs in the tourism industry. The degree requirements include core business and tourism foundation courses, general education Career/Vocational 179 TERM 2 (May to T O U R 130 September) Credits Co-op W o r k T e r m Total Core Courses Advanced T O U R 421 for Tourism Management Organizational Leadership in 3.0 T O U R 422 People Management — 3.0 T O U R 423 Tourism Planning and Policy 3.0 10.5 TERM 3 (September to December) T O U R 116 Financial Planning in Tourism I T O U R 118 Special Events — Tourism Credit C M N S 354 Credits Communications 3.0 Tourism 3.0 Human Relations in Tourism Generators 3.0 T O U R 120 Adventure and E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 T O U R 424 Entrepreneurship in Tourism T O U R 123 Tourism Advertising 3.0 T O U R 425 Financial Management in Tourism 3.0 3.0 T O U R 127 Tourism Resource and Community T O U R 426 Cultural and Community Issues 3.0 3.0 T O U R 427 Marketing Research for Tourism 3.0 Credits T O U R 428 International Tourism Marketing 3.0 Planning T O U R 239 Advanced Computer Applications 10 Specialty 18.0 T O U R 441 Advanced Tourism Product Credits T O U R 442 Environmental Stewardship Tourism 3.0 T O U R 443 Cultural Tourism Management T O U R 125 Financial Planning in Tourism II 3.0 T O U R 444 International T o u r i s m T O U R 143 Business L a w in Tourism 3.0 T O U R 232 International Tourism in T o u r i s m Total Courses Credit Development Term 4 (January T O U R 114 to March) Organizational Behaviour in for Tourism P o l i c y and Planning T O U R 233 3.0 3.0 Cross Cultural Tourism 3.0 Management 3.0 3.0 Total credits required for certificate: 18.0 * T O U R 440 Graduating Seminar 3.0 10 Total 15.0 Program Total 63.0 * Tourism 440 is a graduate seminar that is completed once all the upper level course requirements have been fulfilled. C. A D V A N C E D CERTIFICATE IN TOURISM STUDIES The Tourism Professional Development Program A high proportion of tourism industry managers lack the time and/or prerequisites to successfully complete the requirements for the Bachelor of Tourism Management degree. Ongoing professional development is critical to maintain the international competitiveness of British C o l u m b i a as a tourism destination. The Tourism Professional Development Program provides an accessible professional development opportunity for full-time industry managers by offering evening courses downtown, and on weekends at the North Vancouver campus. Students w i l l select six from the following core courses, or one specialty course may be substituted for one of the core courses. Career/Voca 180 tional , Post-Graduate Programs ART INSTITUTE The A r t Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Submissions 1. Resume — to include pertinent travel and other life experiences. Printmaking, is a one-year, post-graduate certificate 2. Portfolio — original works where possible; how- program unique in the college system. Comparable to ever, slides, photographs or other printed material w i l l artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the advanced studies to artists with several years experi- coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement ence i n sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, may be waived. university or art school graduates. Members o f the Institute have access to well-equipped studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists and faculty who are professionals in their fields. W i t h the permission of the instructor, and at no additional cost, members may also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. A major component of the Institute experience is the interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement o f work in progress, or exposure to new materials. A l o n g with providing the artist with studio space, the Institute offers the exper- 3. Proposal — an outline of the anticipated directions of work. This should be as specific as possible. Submissions should be addressed to: The A r t Department Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3H5 T e l . 984-4911 Fees The 1999/2000 tuition fees for the A r t Institute were $678 per term. Total fees were $743.20. There are two terms per year. tise o f special speakers and workshop experiences. Although the normal shop supplies are provided, The atmosphere is stimulating and supportive o f the students can anticipate charges for materials directly individual's aesthetic development. involved with the production o f work. Contact: Art Department, 984-191J Admission Requirements Completion o f art school d i p l o m a or B F A studies are required to enter this program. Exceptional students with equivalent work experience may be accepted at the discretion o f the instructors. Note that it is not absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient in the chosen area o f study. Parallel experience w o u l d be considered, i.e. painting to printmaking. A d v a n c e d Options Courses Credits S A R T 300 A r t Institute I - Sculpture and S A R T 301 A r t Institute II - Sculpture and Printmaking Printmaking 12.0 12.0 Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are M a y and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Phone 984-4911 by the end o f A p r i l for an interview i n early M a y . Post-Graduate Programs 183 ASIA PACIFIC M A N A G E M E N T COOPERATIVE PROGRAM Instructional Joan Y A N G , B A (Central University for Nationalities), M A (Oregon State U ) , Chinese Language Karen Y I P , B A ( U B C ) , L L B ( U B C ) , Legal Systems General Information Faculty N i g e l A M O N , B A (Kent), M A ( S F U ) , Economics This diploma program has been developed to offer Chris B O T T R I L L , B . S o c . S c i . ( U o f Waikato), M A ( U training to Canadians who are considering careers i n of Canterbury), Marketing Research T o n g C H O W , B A (Beijing Foreign Studies U ) , M A ( S F U ) , Chinese Language Tuyet C O L L A C O T T , B A ( U . o f Ottawa), Vietnamese Charles G R E E N B E R G , B A , M . A . (Manitoba), P h D ( U B C ) , Development Issues Barbara H A N K I N , B A ( U B C ) , M A ( W A S H . ) , D i rected Studies, Language Convenor Tineke H E L L W I G , B A , M A , P h D Indonesian Literature (Leiden U . ) , Indonesian Francis K I E M , B B A , P h D E d . (Jakarta), Indonesian A s i a . It is a joint-venture in educational programming, bringing employers together with students and the College to form a unique blend o f experiential and academic training. The emphasis is on Canada's relationships with A s i a n countries and the potential to extend our linkages through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. Contact: Scott MacLeod, 984-4981; Fax: 984-4992 E-mail: smacleod@capcollege.be.ca Language M i t r a K I A M A N E S H , M . E n g . A r c h (National University o f Iran), M A S A r c h ( U B C ) , Project Manage- ment/Business Development E r y n K . K R I E G E R , B A (Bishops), M A ( U o f Water- loo), .Research Program Developer Scott M a c L E O D , B A , M A , P h D ( U B C ) , E c o n o m i c Geography, Program Coordinator L l o y d M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B.Ed., M . E d . ( U of A ) , Personal Presentations Terry M I L L S , C I T T , B G S , M . E d . ( S F U ) , Trade Logistics The Program Students who are interested i n a career in the A s i a Pacific region w i l l follow an integrated program o f study. Each student w i l l take the core courses i n A s i a n Studies and International Management, Trade and Finance. In addition, students w i l l choose an A s i a n language such as Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian, Vietnamese or T h a i . After nine months o f study, eligible students w i l l K a z u k o M I T O , B A , M A ( U B C ) , Japanese Language Roberta N E A U L T , B . E d . ( U B C ) , M A ( S F U ) , P h D Candidate ( S F U ) , Career Counsellor T o m P E T E R S E N , B A ( A U , Washington, D C ) , M B A (Monterey Inst, o f Int'l Studies), Business Con- venor Jim P L A C Z E K , BA(Windsor), M A ( U B C ) , PhD ( U B C ) Thai Language Pontip P L A C Z E K , B A (Thammasat), Thai Language Daniel P O N T A L T I , B A (University College o f the Okanagan), D i p . T E S L ( U B C ) , Teacher's Certification ( S F U ) , M . E d i n progress ( U B C ) Charles P R I E S T E R , F C B A B . C o m m . , M A ( U B C ) , International Finance complete a work internship. This co-op work term is 12 months in duration. Students w i l l be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this w i l l become part o f the student's permanent record. During their 12-month internship i n A s i a , associates are expected to carry out credit course work while in the field. This work w i l l equate to 9 credits (approx. four courses) per year. It w i l l involve submitting required reports, electronic work with faculty, and meetings such as the mid-term conference. Every effort w i l l be made to secure co-op internships for students. Jobs w i l l be sought in A s i a n countries and in international Canadian organizations. The work Esther R A U S E N B E R G , B A Communications ( S F U ) , term w i l l finish with debriefing and re-entry sessions. D i p l o m a ( A P M C P ) , Alumni/Program Outreach Career targets o f the current class include areas such as Leslie S A V A G E , B A ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta), Writing H u m a n Resources, Development, Journalism, Urban Y a y o i S H I N B O , Associate Arts (Obirin T a n k i Daigaku), Japanese Language C a m S Y L V E S T E R , B A (Gonzaga), M A (NotreDame), Public Policy Analysis, Convenor Anne W A T S O N , B A ( U . o f Calgary), M B A ( A P I U , N e w Zealand), Marketing Post-Graduate 184 Finance, Marketing, Trade, T o u r i s m , Communications, Programs L a n d Development, Government and Non-Government organizations. Inquiries for application/information packages should be directed to the A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, fax 9844992. Admission Requirements Applications for the program are invited from: a) Those who have completed an undergraduate degree. OR J A P N 111 — Basic Japanese II J A P N 202 — Introduction to Japanese III J A P N 203 — Introduction to Japanese I V — Introduction to Japanese V J A P N 281 — eligible for company sponsorship into the program. T H A I 100 — Beginning Thai I Sponsorship may come from a wide range o f T H A I 101 — Beginning Thai II business and development organizations which have T H A I 102 — T H A I 103 — Introduction to Thai II the common factor o f wanting their employees trained for international work. • - Introduction to Japanese II — Basic Japanese I J A P N 280 b) Those who are currently employed and who are • J A P N 103 J A P N 110 Introduction to Japanese V I Introduction to T h a i I V I E T 102 — Introduction to Vietnamese I A d m i s s i o n m a x i m u m is 32 students per year. V I E T 103 — Introduction to Vietnamese II Students are selected on the basis o f their academic V I E T 110 — Basic Vietnamese I record, relevant work and A s i a n experience, a V I E T 111 — Basic Vietnamese II written submission and an interview. • Successful applicants w i l l have strong written, mathematical and interpersonal communication skills. • Applicants who demonstrate proficiency in language acquisition and who have solid business experience w i l l have preference. • Applications for A d m i s s i o n , together with offical transcripts for all post-secondary education, must be submitted to Admissions, Registrar's Office. Courses A P M C 503 — International Career Management A P M C 505 — C o - o p W o r k T e r m A P M C 515 — Directed Studies A P M C 518 — International Finance I A P M C 519 — Introduction to International Business and Trade A P M C 520 — E c o n o m i c Geography I A P M C 524 — Business Development Project A P M C 525 — International Management I A P M C 531 — International Finance II A P M C 532 — E c o n o m i c Geography II A P M C 533 — International Business and Trade A P M C 534 — International Management II A P M C 540 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives I A P M C 541 — A s i a Pacific Perspectives II A P M C 550 — A P M C 560 — C H I N 110 — Cross Cultural Communication Workshops Basic Chinese I C H I N 111 — Basic Chinese II C H I N 202 — Introduction to Chinese III C H I N 203 — Introduction to Chinese I V I N D O 102 — Introduction to Indonesian I I N D O 103 — Introduction to Indonesian II I N D O 110 — Basic Indonesian I I N D O 111 — Basic Indonesian II J A P N 102 — Introduction to Japanese I Post-Graduate Programs 185 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE PROGRAM ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE POST- BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA ethics. Completion o f an in-depth assignment involving work placement or directed studies is also required. Admission Requirements The normal requirement for admission is a degree in a science or engineering discipline. Volunteer or paid work related to environmental issues is also an asset. Inquiries for admission and further information should Successful applicants w i l l have strong written and be directed to the Environmental Science program, interpersonal communication skills and w i l l be selected Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 983-7562. on the basis o f academic record, relevant experience and a personal interview. The m a x i m u m enrolment is Instructional Faculty 26 full-time students per year. Some opportunities for D . P . B E R N A R D , B . S c . ( U . Alberta), M . S c . ( U B C ) , part-time studies also exist as space permits. Coordinator of Environmental Science T o apply for the program, students must submit two J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h D application forms: (1) a general College admission (Waterloo) form (see " A d m i s s i o n " section in this calendar), and A . D U F F Y , B A (Hons.) (Guelph), M C S (Calgary) (2) Environmental Science program application form. S. G R O V E S , A B (Radcliffe), P h D ( U B C ) , Forms are available through the Environmental Science Coordinator of Environmental Science office or the Registrar's Office. B . L O C K H A R T , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U . o f Manitoba), M . S c (Alberta), L L B ( U B C ) , L L M (Merit) ( U . These applications, together with the official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by London) L . H . N I K L , B . S c , M . S c (SFU), R P Bio. the Registrar's Office by M a r c h 31. R. K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . (Washington), J D (California), L L M . (London School of Economics) FALL A . R O J A S , M A , P h D (York) G . S E A G E L , B . S c . ( U . London), M . S c . ( U . Alberta) D . F . S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , P h D ( U B C ) , P. E n g . A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. (UVic), M.Sc. (UBC), R P Bio. S. W I L K I N S , B A , M . S c . (McMaster) Laboratory Supervisors and Program Content Credits TERM E N S C 500 Applied Ecology 4.5 E N S C 502 A p p l i e d Environmental Ethics 3.0 E N S C 503 Environmental L a w 3.0 E N S C 507 Computer Applications in E N S C 508 Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science Environmental Science I Technicians D i p l . Env. S c i . (Capilano) cate ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician General Information 10 16.5 J. B R U N O , B . S c . (Hons.) ( S F U ) , R e g . M e d . Tech., J. E . C A N N I N G , B . S c , Professional Teaching Certifi- 3.0 SPRING Credits TERM E N S C 501 Environmental T o x i c o l o g y & E N S C 504 4.5 Waste Management Environmental Planning & Project E N S C 505 Management Environmental Impact Assessment The D i p l o m a program in Environmental Science is intended for students who have already completed a E N S C 506 Ecosystem Sustainability degree in science and who wish to acquire the E N S C 509 Seminar: Selected Topics i n Environmental Science II knowledge and practical skills necessary for dealing 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 16.5 with environmental issues and projects in the workplace. SUMMER This is a full-year program designed to prepare students to accept positions o f responsibility in environmental problem solving through a combination o f academic studies and field assignments. Areas of emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, law, and Post-Graduate 186 Programs TERM Credits E N S C 510 Field Studies 4.5 E N S C 511 Practicum 15 9.0 LATIN AMERICAN M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAM (LAMP) The Program L A M P consists o f an eight-month academic period on our North Vancouver campus, followed by a one-year paid work placement in Latin A m e r i c a . Students take core courses such as Latin A m e r i c a n Instructional Faculty Perspectives, Strategic Planning, International Finance, Human Resource Management, International Manage- Paz B U T T E D A H L , B A , M . S c , P h D (Florida State University), Canadian Perspectives, Latin American Perspectives Paul C U B B O N , B A (Oxford), M B A ( S F U ) Int'l Marketing, Int'l Business Development and Entrepreneurship ment Tools, L a t i n American Legal Systems, and Canadian Perspectives. In addition, students choose to study either business Spanish or Portuguese. The fulltime, intensive coursework includes a combination o f lectures, seminars, workshops, projects, case studies, and field trips. A l a n D O N A L D , B . E n g . ( U . Andes), M B A (Berkeley), Program Developer, Strategic Planning, Int'l Trade The second phase is a one-year, paid co-op placement. Gretchen F E R G U S O N , B A (Concordia), M A ( U B C ) , Jobs are sought in private sector, government or non- NGO Outreach, Latin American Perspectives profit organizations throughout the region. During this Jared F I N E S M I T H , B A (University o f N e w Y o r k ) , Technology in Management Rita I S O L A , B A , M A ( S F U ) , Latin American Perspectives Mitra K I A M A N E S H , M.Eng. Arch., M . A . S . Arch. ( U B C ) Negotiating Across Cultures, Int'l Project year, students are registered i n a parallel academic course equal to 9 credits in w h i c h they participate i n online learning activities and attend a ten-day conference in Latin A m e r i c a . Inquiries for application/information packages should be directed to the Latin A m e r i c a n Management Management, Int'l Business Development and Program office, telephone (604) 990-7881, fax (604) Entrepreneurship 984-4992, email: lamp@capcollege.bc.ca Isabel M A Y O , B A ( I T A M , M e x i c o ) , Spanish Conversation Regina M E L L O , B A (Brazil), Business Portuguese Admission Requirements Charles P R I E S T E R , F C B A B . C o m m . , M A ( U B C ) , The program requires: International Finance T o m P E T E R S E N , B A ( A U , Washington, D C ) , M B A (Monterey), Strategic Planning Cristina S A N T A E L L A , B A ( C U N Y ) , M A ( U M A S S ) , P h D (SFU), Business Spanish M a r i a - L u i s a S I N C L A I R , ( E S A N , Peru), Human Resource Management B i l l V A N L U V E N B A , M F A ( U B C ) , Effective Communications Karen Y I P , B A , L L B ( U B C ) , Latin American Legal Systems General Information • • a university bachelor degree an intermediate level o f Spanish or Portuguese (English T O E F L level o f 560 paper-based score or 220 computer-based score for international applicants) Professionals are selected on the basis o f their academic record, relevant work and international experience, a written submission, and an interview. The m a x i m u m number o f students admitted per year is 32. Successful applicants w i l l demonstrate strong interpersonal and written communication skills, plus commitment to the Latin American region. Previous work experience and international exposure are desirable. The Latin American Management Program ( L A M P ) is Individuals who are currently employed and who are a post-graduate management d i p l o m a program. It is eligible for company sponsorship into the program are designed to train professionals in the relevant manage- also invited to apply. Sponsorship w o u l d come from ment tools, regional context knowledge, cultural business, government or non-profit organizations that sensitivity and communication skills to enable them to want their employees trained for international work. perform effectively i n any country in the Americas. L A M P seeks to train leaders who are capable o f considering both the business and the socio-economic development issues from a management perspective. Courses L A M P 500 Latin A m e r i c a n Perspectives L A M P 501 International Finance L A M P 502 International Management Tools Post-Graduate Programs 187 L A M P 505 — Strategic Planning L A M P 506 — Canadian Perspectives L A M P 507 — International Marketing I Admission Requirements T o enter this program students should have a Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor o f Fine Arts degree. Exceptional L A M P 520 — Latin American Perspectives II students with equivalent writing experience may be L A M P 522 — International Management Tools II accepted at the discretion o f the program faculty. L A M P 523 — Latin American Legal Systems L A M P 524 — International Human Resource Management Application Procedures L A M P 525 — International Project Management Application for places in the W r i t i n g Practices program L A M P 526 — International Trade Principles and must be submitted before each F a l l and Spring term. Logistics L A M P 527 — International Marketing II L A M P 528 — International Business Development & Entrepreneurship L A M P 550 — Workshops I L A M P 551 — Workshops II Applicants w i l l be accepted on the basis of their prior education ( B A , B F A , or equivalent), record of writing achievement (publications), portfolio submission, and statement of intent (project proposal). First time applicants w i l l be given priority over participants who have previously completed T C R I 300 and 301 with the Institute. L A M P 560 — C o - o p W o r k - T e r m L A M P 570 — C o - o p Parallel A c a d e m i c Activities P O R T 510 — Intermediate Portuguese for Managers I P O R T 511 Submission Requirements • — Intermediate Portuguese for Managers II S P A N 510 — Intermediate Spanish for Managers I S P A N 511 — Intermediate Spanish for Managers II S P A N 521 — A d v a n c e d Business Spanish C V or Biography: A summary of education, publications, awards, scholarships, travel, etc. • Portfolio: A twenty page selection of previously published or unpublished work in any genre. • Project Proposal: A written statement o f intent, specifying areas o f study and an anticipated time frame for their completion. WRITING PRACTICES General Information W r i t i n g Practices is a unique one year, post-graduate certificate program offered by the Capilano Review Writing Institute, within the College system. The program offers advanced studies to writers with several years experience in writing or recent College or University graduates. Participants in the program have access to group Submissions are assessed by an adjudication panel o f faculty. Applications for the F a l l term must be submitted by A p r i l 30th, and those for the Spring term by September 30th. Contact the Humanities D i v i s i o n at 984-4957. Applications should be addressed to: The Convenor The Capilano Review Writing Institute Humanities D i v i s i o n 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver BC V7J3H5 discussions, tutorials, seminars, lectures, and readings given by Capilano College faculty, invited faculty, and a Writer-in-Residence, all o f w h o m are professionals in Fees their field. A major benefit of the program experience The 2000-2001 tuition fees are $1000 per term. There is the freedom to pursue a self-directed writing project are two terms per year. Some ancillary fees w i l l also with access to a variety o f writers with special exper- apply. tise in contemporary and current writing practices. A major component o f the program experience is the Advanced Options Courses Credits interchange among the participants, w h i c h may include critiques, encouragement o f work in progress, exposure T C R I 300 W r i t i n g Practices I 15.0 to new concepts and methods, and collaborative T C R I 301 W r i t i n g Practices II 15.0 writing. A l o n g with providing the writer a context o f challenge, stimulation and support, the program offers access to a community o f committed writers. Post-Graduate 188 Programs Continuing Education C o n t a c t : 984-4901, fax: 983:7545 ( L o w e r Mainland) Community Music School 892-5322, fax: 892-9274 (Howe Sound) 885-9310, fax: 885-9350 (Sunshine Coast) The Capilano College C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School offers group instruction for students o f voice, theory, and a Program Consultants J. B E R E Z O W S K Y , B A ( U A ) , general programs and contract services, Squamish campus wide variety of instruments. Group music instruction for children includes: Robert Pace Group Piano, Strings for Children, and K o d a l y - O r f f classes. The N . B O H N A , M M u s . , C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School Community M u s i c School also offers a C o m m u n i t y T. B Y R N E S , M A ( U V i c ) , Coordinator, Continuing Choir, a W o m e n ' s C h o i r — " C e c i l i a Ensemble," and Education vocal instruction classes. A d u l t instruction on instru- P. C R A S S , A b o r i g i n a l F i l m and Television ments includes piano, v i o l i n , guitar and others. Classes P. F O R S T , B . R e c . E d . ( U B C ) , general programs are held on campus and in other community locations. contract services, Sechelt Campus L . J E S T , M . E d . ( S F U ) , Director o f Continuing Education K . K O Z A R , C D F , Career Development Programs B . M O R R I S , M A ( U B C ) , F i l m Studies R. S T E C , B A , M A ( U V i c ) , Arts, Health, Languages, International Children's programs are advertised in the local media each M a y , and both children's and adults' courses are listed in the Continuing Education calendar published three times yearly. E - m a i l : cms@capcollege.bc.ca T. T H O M P S O N , Business, Computers, Occupational Certification M . D E J O N G W E S T M A N , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Natural History, Educational Tours Eldercollege Eldercollege is a year-round educational community open to men and women who are 55 and older. Eldercollege provides learning opportunities for older Support Staff adults who wish to enrich their lifestyle through self- Marianne Ketchen, Administrative Assistant directed education and contribute to the social and Barb Cooper, W e n d y Dansie, Brenda Soeder, C a c i l d a cultural development o f the community. Eldercollege . Tang, Program Assistants Shari Cohen, G a y l e Manktelow, Receptionists Lauren M u l h o l l a n d , Publicist participants design and offer quality educational activities to stimulate interest in learning and to provide a forum for sharing ideas and knowledge with others. Continuing Education level of proficiency is recommended for admission. Members can lead study groups, serve on the A d v i s o r y Board and its committees, and be study group participants. Activities are both planned and operated by members to maintain a high quality offering at a m i n i m u m cost. The majority o f continuing education offerings are an E - m a i l : eldercollege@capcollege.bc.ca The College offers a variety of continuing education courses and programs. There are no prerequisites for admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain outgrowth of the C o l l e g e ' s academic and career/ vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the Certified Financial Planner™ Program high level o f instructional competence of the programs. Courses and programs are drawn from the areas o f arts, Developed by the Canadian Institute o f Financial music, film studies, social sciences, natural sciences, Planning ( C I F P ) specifically for individuals who wish career development, business, computer science, to become qualified professional financial planners, the personal development, media, and modern languages. C F P program covers the full spectrum o f financial Educational study/travel tours are also available products, services and strategies. It is offered at through Continuing Education. Capilano College on the institute's behalf, with the approval o f The Financial Planners Standards C o u n c i l Continuing Education courses are not listed in the of Canada. After completing the program, students College Calendar — they are advertised i n seasonal with two years' work experience can write the profes- calendars distributed throughout the community and by sional proficiency examination in order to receive the direct mail. C F P certification mark. Continuing Education 191 College. The College can provide facilities, program Film Studies Continuing Education offers a variety o f evening and weekend courses i n F i l m Studies. Developed specifically to meet the industry's training needs, the program focuses on three areas identified through consultation design and administrative services and welcomes the opportunity to foster public understanding on social, business, artistic and technological issues. E - m a i l : partner@capcollege.bc.ca with unions, professional organizations and College faculty: • Custom-Designed Programs introductory workshops that offer students the most current and reliable information about the film industry; • courses i n production management, production crafts, directing, cinematography, grip, screenwriting, acting and other areas of interest; • a series o f upgrading workshops for industry professionals. Courses at Capilano College emphasize a "hands-on" approach to the skills needed to succeed i n the techni- F r o m time to time, the College offers specific programs designed to meet the needs o f particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In recent years, these included programs i n H o s p i t a l i t y / E S L , English Language Culture, Career Development Facilitator, Small Business Entrepreneurship and Career Transitions. Provincial Rafting Exams cal and creative areas o f f i l m , television, video and A l l commercial river rafting guides are required to be commercial production. W o r k i n g professionals from certified and licensed prior to conducting rafting trips the industry teach all courses and workshops. on rivers located in British C o l u m b i a . Certification and E-mail: fitc@capcollege.bc.ca Educational Travel: Natural History, Arts and Languages Continuing Education offers a wide variety of travel licensing are obtained by passing both a written an practical certification examination. E - m a i l : rafting@capcollege.bc.ca International Programs and study opportunities ranging from island-hopping i n International Programs provide training for Canadians the Galapagos to Summer Workshops in France at Paul and international students. International students may and Babette Deggan's Centre Estival des Arts. enrol in programs that offer short-term E S L and Canadian culture homestay, or E S L combined with Arts and Language tours include a trip through A n d a l u c i a in Southern Spain with popular Spanish career skills training in professional areas such as business administration, computers, tourism and others. instructor K i r k Mattson. Natural History tours vary from year to year, but may include a wildlife and wine appreciation tour o f the E - m a i l : intlconted@capcollege.bc.ca Okanagan in the fall or a rafting trip d o w n the Continuing Education Fee Policies Cheakamus and Squamish rivers to view the annual Fees congregation o f bald eagles. Continuing Education course fees vary from the The Special Lectures i n Science series is a very popular standard tuition fee and are outlined in Continuing community lecture series offered each term. Education calendars and brochures. E - m a i l : edtravel@capcollege.bc.ca Refund Policy Contracts and Educational Partnerships Fees paid for courses or workshops cancelled by the Various employment training and other programs College w i l l be refunded i n full. Applications for funded through the provincial and federal government withdrawal and refund w i l l only be accepted prior to may also be developed and administered through this the second session o f a course, except i n the case of office. Continuing Education works in partnership with workshops of short duration (up to three consecutive other faculties, colleges and community organizations days) for w h i c h withdrawal applications must be to jointly develop and deliver high-quality training and received at least 24 hours before the workshop begins. career development opportunities for the community. Tuition fees paid by cheque/cash w i l l be refunded by Organizations and societies are encouraged to co- cheque to the registered student. Refund o f tuition fees sponsor their educational activities with Capilano paid by credit card w i l l show as a credit to the account Continuing 192 Education of the credit card holder. A l l refunds are subject to a $20 processing fee plus any non-refundable charges such as those for texts, course materials, etc. Fees under $20 are non-refundable. A n y departure from the above policy w i l l be stated in the course/workshop description. T o apply for withdrawal and refund, c a l l 984-4901. Under no circumstances w i l l refunds be given after the end o f a course or workshop. Continuing Education 193 194 International Education A n International Outlook Strategic Alliances K n o w n for its innovative programs, some of w h i c h are Capilano College has developed a number o f strategic unique in Canada, Capilano College is committed to alliances and informal consortia with other institutions preparing students to effectively participate as respon- and organizations in British C o l u m b i a and the rest of sible citizens in a rapidly changing and diverse global Canada, w h i c h can provide a comprehensive range o f community. expertise and training to clients and partners. The College actively promotes international partner- The College is a founding member o f the British ships, programs and experiences for its students, staff, C o l u m b i a Centre for International Education ( B C C I E ) , faculty, clients and partners around the world. and a member of the Association of Canadian C o m m u - Capilano College has been involved in a wide variety nity Colleges ( A C C C ) , and the Canadian Bureau for of international development, consulting, educational International Education ( C B I E ) . projects and exchanges during its thirty-year history, w h i c h have enriched the College community and deepened its understanding o f different cultures. The focus geographically o f the College in international activities is: • China • Vietnam • Lebanon • Central/South A m e r i c a • Mexico • Japan • Other Pacific R i m Countries Consulting and Human Resource Development W i t h the funding support o f the Canadian International Development Agency ( C I D A ) and other international financial institutions and working in cooperation with N G O ' s such as the Association of Canadian C o m m u nity Colleges ( A C C C ) and the Canadian Bureau for International Education ( C B I E ) , Capilano College has experience working with, and in, Vietnam, Thailand, C h i n a , Indonesia, India, Lebanon and South A m e r i c a . International Linkages The College also provides custom designed training packages, corporate training and consulting in locations worldwide. Formal linkages and International Exchange Agree- Consulting and contract services offered include: ments have been developed with a number o f colleges • and universities worldwide including: • Needs Assessment • Dalian Nationalities University (China) • Institutional Strengthening • Dalian University (China) • Program and C u r r i c u l u m Development Technology Transfer • Beijing Capital University o f Economics (China) • Instructional Design • • K u s h i r o Public University (Japan) A i c h i Gakusen College (Japan) • Custom-designed training programs • H o C h i M i n h Open University (Vietnam) A n y inquiries should be directed to the International Office: • Hanoi Open University (Vietnam) • Rajamangala Institute of Technology (Thailand) International Education • Hariri Canadian University College o f Technology (Lebanon) North Vancouver, British C o l u m b i a Politechnico Grancolombiano (Columbia) V 7 J 3H5 • 2055 Purcell W a y Cooperation with these institutions facilitates student Telephone: (604) 990-7895 and faculty exchanges, permits collaboration on Fax: (604) 984-1743 international development projects i n other countries E - m a i l : international@capcollege.be.ca and enables the delivery of Capilano College courses and training in a variety o f locales. International Education 197 International Programs Dalian, China Capilano College, through its institute in C h i n a , Capilano Canadian Institute o f Higher Education ( C C I H E ) , offers a Business Administration program at Dalian Nationalities University in C h i n a . Short-Term ESL A n d Canadian Culture Homestay Programs These programs can be customized to meet the needs of any organization or group. Please contact the International Education department at international@capcollege.bc.ca or by telephone at (604) 990-7895 for information and pricing. Students who successfully complete two years o f fulltime study w i l l receive a diploma in International Business from Capilano College and C C I H E and a certificate from Dalian Nationalities University. Graduates o f the two year diploma program who want to continue their studies have the opportunity for advanced study toward a Business Administration university degree in Canada. Study Tours Capilano College, through the Continuing Education, department offers study tours i n Natural History and Arts and Language in locations throughout Europe, Central and South A m e r i c a . Enquiries can be directed to the Continuing Education Department at (604) 9844901. Business students studying at Capilano College in North Vancouver can choose to take a selection o f their fourth term courses at the College's Dalian, C h i n a , China Summer School location with Capilano College instructors. For the past seven years, Capilano College has offered Lebanon Beijing, C h i n a . Enquiries can be directed to the a three-week intensive Chinese M a n d a r i n program in Language Department at (604) 986-1911 (ext. 2423). Early in 1998 Capilano College entered into a contract with the Canadian Bureau o f International Education ( C B I E , Ottawa) and the Hariri Foundation ( H F ) o f Beirut, Lebanon under the auspices o f the Canadian International Development A g e n c y ( C I D A ) to develop and operate a new educational institution in Lebanon. F o l l o w i n g some sixteen months o f planning and development by all partners the Hariri Canadian University College o f Technology ( H C U C T ) was opened on September 15th, 1999, at an attractively renovated campus located 15 miles south o f Beirut overlooking the Mediterranean. H C U C T is operating with a combination o f carefully selected Capilano College and Lebanese ( H C U C T ) faculty who have trained together in order to deliver the three year C o - o p Business D i p l o m a curriculum that mirrors that o f Capilano College but is enhanced with Lebanese content. Students w i l l graduate with specialities in General Management, Accounting and Finance, Computing and Marketing, all with a co-op education designation. They w i l l then enter the workforce with a practical business education or continue their studies towards a B B A degree in L e b a non or at Capilano C o l l e g e in co-operation with the British C o l u m b i a Open University or others. In the future there should also be opportunities for Capilano College students to study some o f their Business courses in Lebanon at H C U C T . A continuing involvement with H C U C T w i l l lead to a further enhancement of our commitment to International Education at Capilano College. International 198 Education Course Descriptions Lab hours Lecture hours * Other hours Course Number N u m b e r o f credits f o r the course Department Name BIOL 105 (3) Environmental Biology (4,3,0) (S) T e r m in w h i c h t h e c o u r s e is u s u a l l y o f f e r e d * * F=Fall S = Spring Su = Summer Course N a m e * In some courses the d e p a r t m e n t may convert t h e f o u r t h lecture h o u r t o a n o t h e r scheduled instructional activity. W h e r e this occurs, students w i l l be advised by the course instructor a n d in t h e course o u t l i n e given o u t at t h e b e g i n n i n g of t h e t e r m . * * Please check t h e T i m e t a b l e t o c o n f i r m t h e t e r m o f f e r e d as this may c h a n g e after t h e C a l e n d a r is p r i n t e d . The n o m i n a l l e n g t h of a t e r m is 16 weeks. Please see the A c a d e m i c Schedule at t h e f r o n t o f this calendar f o r t h e first a n d last days of classes a n d f o r t h e dates of t h e e x a m i n a t i o n p e r i o d . ACTP 001 (3) (5,0,0) (F) Job Search and Maintenance Techniques The focus o f this course is to encourage students' needs to develop and use job search techniques and appropriate employment behaviours. Students w i l l also be encouraged to practice self-advocacy in terms o f their employment needs. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on developing interview skills w i t h confidence. ACTP 002 (3) (5.0,0) (F) Occupational Preparation and Safety in the Workplace The focus o f this course is to provide students with practical experience in a work situation including preparation prior to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. Emphasis w i l l be placed on making students aware of and knowledgeable about W H M I S , a variety o f media (eg. computer, printed words, signs). Class time is comprised o f discussions, talks, worksheets, field trips, role-plays and hands-on experience. Students w i l l be given instruction i n computer skills. Students w i l l be given opportunities to prepare resumes, cover letters and thank-you letters using the Microsoft W o r d software program. ACTP 006 Leisure Education (3) T o assist students to clarify their leisure interests and values and use their leisure time more constructively. Students w i l l be encouraged to become more aware o f their own feelings and beliefs about leisure so that future leisure decisions w i l l be by their own choice and from their own value system. Emphasis w i l l be placed on project work within the community. W C B rules and occupational health and safety. ACTP 005 (3) (5,0,0) (F) Visual and Print Communication Skills The focus of this course is to extend students' awareness, knowledge and understanding of communication skills required for obtaining employment and to improve their ability to communicate effectively using (5,0,0) (F) ACTP 007 Consumer Preparation (3) (5,0,0) (F) This course provides students with strategies and opportunities to practice and improve a range o f consumer related skills. F i e l d trips are incorporated in the program. Course Descriptions 201 ACTP 008 (3) Interpersonal Communications (5,0,0) (F) This course provides students with an opportunity to discuss and develop the skills involved with effectively communicating in a diverse range of interpersonal roles and relationships (friend, neighbour, consumer, citizen). ACTP 009 Work Experience (6) (25,0,0) (F) T o give the student a practical experience i n a work A E M . 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Arts and Entertainment Management I A n introduction to the skills and organizational systems necessary to run an arts and entertainment organization. A major emphasis w i l l be company and season marketing strategies. A E M . 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Arts and Entertainment Management II A continuation o f A E M . 140 with an emphasis on resource development. situation including preparation prior to placement and A E M . 142 (1.5) (0,0,4) (F) Arts and Entertainment Introductory Practicum I follow-up concluding the practicum. ACTS 100 (2) Working with the Director (4,0,0) This course w i l l explore the Actor/Director relationship which exists during the film making process. Particular attention is paid to the production of feature films, dramatic productions, movies o f the Prerequisite: interview. This is a practicum in which students w i l l rotate through various positions in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. Students i n this course w i l l work i n teams with senior students who w i l l head a particular area. week and filmed series. ACTS 101 The Working Actor (2) (4,0,0) Prerequisite: This course is designed to prepare the student to face the technical, personal and professional challenges o f developing a successful career in the competitive world o f acting i n f i l m and television. ACTS 102 (2) The History of Acting in Film A E M . 143 (3) (0,0,8) (S) Arts and Entertainment Introductory Practicum II (4,0,0) This course explores the historical development o f both the mutable nature o f film content and the evolution o f film acting techniques. This is a practicum in which students w i l l rotate through various positions in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. Students i n this course w i l l work i n teams with senior students who w i l l head a particular area. A E M . 144 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Computer Applications in Arts and Entertainment Administration Prerequisite: ACTS 103 (6) (4,0,8) Working with the Director (Advanced) This course continues the exploration o f the Actor/ Director relationship and includes opportunities to take interview. interview. This course teaches introductory applications for computers i n Arts and Entertainment Management. Students gain an understanding o f basic word processing, database/spreadsheet programs and desktop publishing. part in a series of student film productions. Students must have completed W o r k i n g W i t h The Director, Introduction to take this course. ACTS 104 (6) The Working Actor (Advanced) (4,0,8) A continuation o f the study o f what it takes to be successful in the "real" world of acting in film. A c t i n g students w i l l take part in productions by Professional F i l m Studies students. The W o r k i n g Actor, Introduction must be completed as a pre-requisite to taking this course. Course 202 Descriptions AEM. 240 (4.5) (0,0,12) (F) Internal Practicum in Arts and Entertainment Management I Prerequisite: interview. This is a seven-week practicum in which students rotate through various positions in the Capilano College Performing Arts Theatre. AEM. 241 (4.5) (0,0,12) (S) Internal Practicum in Arts and Entertainment Management II A E M . 247 (1.5) Financial Management in Arts and Entertainment Prerequisite: Prerequisite: interview. A continuation o f A E M . 240. A E M . 242 (6) (0,0,16) (F) Management Seminar and External Practicum I Prerequisite: interview This is a seven-week placement with a professional arts and entertainment organization i n w h i c h the students can apply the knowledge and skills they learned i n the classroom. A seminar is held at the end o f the practicums in w h i c h the students meet and share what they learned from their placement. (2,0,0) (S) interview. This course is designed to teach fundamental accounting procedures such as the preparation o f a general ledger, balance sheet, and income statement. Financial planning, budgeting, cash management, and payroll w i l l also be covered. AEM. 248 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Arts Advocacy, Grantsmanship and Fundraising Prerequisite: interview. This course teaches the skills necessary to become an effective advocate for the arts. The students learn how A E M . 243 (6) (0,0,16) (S) Management Seminar and External Practicum II Prerequisite: interview. A continuation o f A E M . 242. to successfully complete grant applications and how to plan and execute a successful fundraising campaign. AEM. 249 (1.5) Company and Tour Management Prerequisite: A E M . 244 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Computer Applications in Arts and Entertainment Administration Prerequisite: interview. This courses teaches applications for computers in Arts and Entertainment Management. Students gain an understanding of basic word processing, database/ spreadsheet programs and desktop publishing. (2,0,0) (S) interview. The purpose o f this course is to provide students with an understanding of how an arts and entertainment organization operates and how tours are planned and executed A E M . 340 (4.5) (0,0,12) (F) Internal Practicum in Arts and Entertainment Management I Prerequisite: interview. A E M . 245 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Public Relations, Marketing and Promotion This is a seven-week practicum in which students Prerequisite: College Performing Arts Theatre. interview. In this course students examine how the image presented by an arts and entertainment organization to the public affects their revenue potential. They learn how to shape that image and how to target and market to their potential audience. rotate through various positions in the Capilano AEM. 341 (4.5) (0,0,12) (S) Internal Practicum in Arts and Entertainment Management II Prerequisite: interview. A continuation of A E M . 340. A E M . 246 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Organizational Structures in Arts and Entertainment AEM. 342 (6) (0,0,16) (F) Management Seminar and External Practicum I Prerequisite: Prerequisite: interview. This course provides students with an understanding o f the organizational structures o f an arts and entertainment organization. It examines the role o f boards o f directors, volunteeers, and paid personnel, and teaches the skills necessary to build successful relationships between these sectors. interview This is a seven-week placement with a professional arts and entertainment organization i n which the students can apply the knowledge and skills they learned i n the classroom. A seminar is held at the end of the practicums in which the students meet and share what they learned from their placement. Course Descriptions 203 AEM. 343 (6) (0,0,16) (S) Management Seminar and External Practicum II Prerequisite: interview. A continuation of A E M . 342. AEM. 344 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Computer Applications in Arts and Entertainment Administration Prerequisite: interview. This courses teaches applications for computers in Arts and Entertainment Management. Students gain an understanding of basic word processing, database/ spreadsheet programs and desktop publishing. AEM. 345 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Public Relations, Marketing and Promotion Prerequisite: interview. In this course students examine how the image presented by an arts and entertainment organization to the public affects their revenue potential. They learn how to shape that image and how to target and market to their potential audience. A E M . 346 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Organizational Structures in Arts and Entertainment Prerequisite: interview. This course provides students with an understanding of the organizational structures of an arts and entertainment organization. It examines the role o f boards o f directors, volunteeers, and paid personnel, and teaches the skills necessary to build successful relationships between these sectors. AEM. 347 (1.5) Financial Management in Arts and Entertainment (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: interview. This course is designed to teach fundamental accounting procedures such as the preparation o f a general ledger, balance sheet, and income statement. Financial planning, budgeting, cash management, and payroll w i l l also be covered. AEM. 348 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Arts Advocacy, Grantsmanship and Fundraising Prerequisite: interview. This course teaches the skills necessary to become an effective advocate for the arts. The students learn how to successfully complete grant applications and how to plan and execute a successful fundraising campaign. Course 204 Descriptions AEM. 349 (1.5) Company and Tour Management (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: interview. The purpose of this course is to provide students with an understanding o f how an arts and entertainment organization operates and how tours are planned and executed. AHIS 100 The History of Art I (3) (4,0,0.) (F) This course studies the history o f art beginning with the pyramids of Egypt and concluding with the Gothic Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings of the H i g h M i d d l e A g e s i n Europe. A n understanding and appreciation of art are the aims of the course, and through lectures and class discussions, students w i l l develop an "eye" for seeing and appropriate terms to describe the works shown. O u r involvement with the art o f the past clearly reveals how changing styles i n architecture, painting, and sculpture are influenced by the historical context and the political, social, and religious thought of each period. AHIS 101 The History of Art II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Beginning with the art o f the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history of painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists including Leonardo, Michelangelo, Rembrandt, G o y a , V a n G o g h and Picasso are studied i n addition to the larger period styles. Because works of art so perfectly reflect their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas o f each period w i l l be closely considered. AHIS 104 (3) Introduction to Visual Culture I (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to encourage students to become visually literate and confident in the analysis/ interpretation of all aspects o f the visual arts. Confrontation with a wide range o f ideas, images and media w i l l stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding of the creative process. The purposes o f art w i l l be discussed and the relationships between art and society explored. The interdisciplinary nature o f art w i l l be examined as w e l l as the achievements o f Canadian artists. AHIS 105 (3) Introduction to Visual Culture II (4,0,0) (S) What is the impact o f advertising on the viewer? What are the achievements of women artists? What are the current issues concerning art and censorship? These and other topical subjects relating to the arts w i l l be addressed in this course. Attention w i l l also be given to such themes as magic and ritual in art, the body in art, the artist as observer, the landscape in art and aspects of photography. The material w i l l include the art of the past as w e l l as the current art scene. Consideration w i l l also be given to the achievements o f Canadian artists. This course is designed to help students decode their visual world and become visually literate. AHIS 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Pre-Columbian, African and Northwest Coast Art This course introduces the student to aspects of PreC o l u m b i a n art, Northwest Coast Indian art and African art. The art, architecture and performing arts o f indigenous peoples w i l l be examined in the context of cultural, religious and social issues. Students w i l l learn about civilizations that flourished i n M e x i c o prior to the Spanish Conquest. A section on the art of the Northwest Coast Indian w i l l illuminate the achievements o f local indigenous cultures and their inherent relationship with the environment. In the component on African art, students w i l l study the early history o f African art and later artistic developments in a variety of regions ranging from Senegal to Zaire. AHIS 107 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to the Art of India, China and Japan Explore exotic Indian temples, ancient Chinese burials and Japanese shrines in this introductory course to Asian art. Indian, Chinese and Japanese works o f art w i l l be examined i n the light o f cultural, religious, social and political issues to emphasize the close connections between art and society. In particular, the impact o f H i n d u i s m , Buddhism and Confucianism on the arts w i l l be examined. Students w i l l gain insights into the evolution o f important periods, styles and artistic traditions in A s i a n art. Consideration w i l l be given to a wide range o f art forms, including the performing arts and the Japanese tea ceremony. AHIS 210 (3) (4,0,0) (F) History of Modern Art (19th Century) This course studies the mainstreams of modern art beginning with the paintings o f Jacques L o u i s D a v i d produced during the French Revolution and concluding with the art of Cezanne. Emphasis is given to individual artists, and works by G o y a , Delacroix, Monet, V a n G o g h , Gauguin and others are studied in depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions are explored i n conjunction with the social and political upheavals of the 19th century, where issues of class, gender and race are considered. AHIS 211 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of Modern Art (20th Century) This history o f 20th century art begins with the work o f Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact o f revolutionary movements o f art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Dada, and Surrealism. A m e r i c a ' s post war contribution— Abstract Expressionism, Pop, M i n i m a l i s m , Conceptual and Earth A r t — i s studied, leading to a full discussion o f Post M o d e r n i s m and the art o f the 90's. The aim o f this course is to demystify modern art by studying the underlying concepts and theories, w h i c h w i l l reveal how closely art expresses the ethos o f contemporary life. AHIS 220 (3) Early Renaissance Art in Italy (4,0,0) (F) This course traces the origins o f the Early Renaissance in Italy, beginning with the art o f Giotto and focusing attention on the creators o f the new style, the architects, sculptors and painters of Florence, A r e z z o , Mantua and Venice. The intellectual, religious and political climate of the fifteenth century, linked to the expression in this new art, w i l l also be considered, as w i l l be the emerging importance o f private patronage. AHIS 221 (3) (4,0,0) (S) High Renaissance and Mannerist Art in Italy This course studies the art o f the H i g h Renaissance and the emerging view of the artist as sovereign genius. The work of Leonardo, Michelangelo and Raphael is examined in depth. Focus is then given to the artists of the Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and artificial style dominates the latter part of the 16th century. The contributions of the Venetians as w e l l as the architecture o f Palladio w i l l also be considered. AHIS 231 History of Textile Art I (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course first studies the textile traditions o f the Near East by considering Ancient Egypt and its great linen manufactories, and the silk guilds of the B y z a n tine Empire, as well as tracing the influence o f Sassanian designs. Cotton and the central role it played in the struggle for Indian independence is highlighted as we move further east to consider the evolution o f the Dragon Robes o f C h i n a and the kimonos of Japan. This study concludes with textile designs and tapestries produced i n M e d i e v a l and Renaissance Europe where the important contributions of such leading artists as Raphael and Rubens are fully considered. Course Descriptions 205 AHIS 232 History of Textile Art II (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course first explores the textile traditions o f A f r i c a and the Americas. The textiles o f the K u b a o f Africa, Ancient Andean cloth and Contemporary M a y a n textile designs are examined as important artistic expressions of these cultures. Navaho weaving and the great tradition o f the Chilkat Dancing Blanket o f the Pacific Northwest are studied as examples o f cross cultural expressions. Our attention then focuses on the effects of the Industrial Revolution on textile practices and the contributions o f W i l l i a m Morris and the Arts and Crafts Movement. The course concludes with a discussion o f 20th century textiles and explores the work of some o f the leading contemporary textile artists. ANIM 111 Animation Drawing I (6) (8,0,0) (F) A n introduction to creating animated movement. Basic animation timing skills, animation principles and procedures used to produce character animation w i l l be introduced. ANIM 112 Animation Design I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) Students w i l l learn design skills as they relate to commercial animation. Strong posing, drawing "on model", and character design w i l l be introduced. Perspective drawing w i l l be reviewed. ANIM 113 (3) Life Drawing For Animation I (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l demonstrate the importance o f life drawing in the creation o f animated movement. Students w i l l learn to accurately draw what they see. Human proportions and the human form i n action w i l l be studied. Q u i c k gesture drawing w i l l be practised intensively to build on the student's ability to create simple line drawings that communicate weight, structure and feeling. ANIM 114 (2.25) History of Character Animation (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l cover the development o f character animation from W i n s o r M c C a y to the present. E m p h a sis w i l l be on the Disney, Fleischer, Warner Brothers, M G M and U . P . A . studios o f the 1930's and 40's and w i l l include major developments and the work of important directors. Current trends i n animation w i l l be discussed. Course Descriptions 206 ANIM 121 Animation Drawing II (6) (8,0,0) (S) Students w i l l learn how to animate more complex movement o f more diverse characters. A n i m a t i o n timing is emphasized. Special effects animation w i l l be taught. A c t i n g i n animation and animating to prerecorded dialogue w i l l be introduced. ANIM 122 Animation Design II (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Students w i l l gain more practical experience in the posing o f animation and w i l l work with a wider range of characters. Bringing out the character's emotions w i l l be practised. In this course, the student w i l l learn to create a full design package for an animated production. ANIM 123 (3) Life Drawing for Animation II (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l build on the skills learned i n A N I M 113 and they w i l l increase their ability to accurately render the human form in movement. Structure and anatomy of humans w i l l be emphasized. A n i m a l anatomy and movement w i l l be studied. ANIM 124 Anatomy for Animation (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course introduces students to the anatomical design o f the human form. Students w i l l study the bones and muscles as w e l l as the relationships o f bone and muscle o f the human body i n action and at rest. ANIM 126 Layout Design I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Students w i l l be introduced to the skills o f animation background design. The animation camera stand and its functions w i l l be demonstrated. Design and composition skills w i l l be introduced and perspective drawing w i l l be developed further in order to produce complex and detailed layouts. ANIM 231 Animation Drawing III (4.5) (6,0,0) (F) A n i m a t i n g characters that act is the focus o f this course. Dialogue breakdown and animating to dialogue w i l l continue to be emphasized. A n i m a t i o n i n v o l v i n g several characters in the same scene w i l l be covered and students w i l l work with more complex and realistic character designs. ANIM 232 Storyboard Design (3) (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l be taught to create storyboards that communicate f i l m narratives effectively. In this class, students w i l l be expected to design animation sequences to be produced in the fourth term, eventually becoming a major part o f their demo tape. ANIM 233 (3) Life Drawing For Animation III (3) (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l be introduced to computer generated animation. The students w i l l use traditional animation and design skills acquired in the first two terms o f the program to create quality computer animation using 3D software. This course w i l l provide students with a strong foundation o f computer animation skills enabling them, i f they wish, to begin to focus on a career in computer animation. ANIM 236 Layout Design II (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l further develop the student's layout design skills, enabling them to produce finished animation layouts o f high quality. Technical skills concerning camera moves w i l l be included and students w i l l work to industry standards. Actual layout tests from major animation studios w i l l be part of the curriculum. ANIM 241 Animation Drawing IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course w i l l focus on the production o f students' demo tapes meant to showcase their animation skills. Students w i l l be focused on "feature-quality" key animation involving a variety of characters and actions. Character and personality in animation w i l l be emphasized. ANIM 242 Major Projects (3) (4,0,0) (S) Movement and sequential drawing studies w i l l be emphasized. The main objective o f this course w i l l be to make use of the skills and techniques learned in previous life drawing classes to create a diverse range of excellent portfolio pieces tailored to the expectations of the animation industry. (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l continue to improve their life drawing skills while w o r k i n g primarily with sequential studies. The ability to accurately depict emotion and mood, particularly o f the face, eyes and hands w i l l be the main objective o f this course. Practise in the use o f foreshortening and tone w i l l be included. ANIM 234 Computer Animation ANIM 243 (3) Life Drawing For Animation IV (4,0,0) (S) In this course, students w i l l be allowed to concentrate their efforts on a specific career such as layout artist, computer animator, character designer or key animator. W o r k i n g one-on-one with an instructor, students w i l l design and produce their o w n projects in order to achieve success in their specific fields in the industry. ANIM 245 Colour And Media (4,0,0) (S) (3) Basic colour theory w i l l be taught using a variety o f painting materials and techniques used i n the animation industry. Students w i l l learn the specific skills required of animation background painters and w i l l create finished backgrounds from original layout designs. ANTH 121 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Social Anthropology A survey of social anthropology to include the study o f communication, economic systems, kinship and family patterns, social control, political organization, religion, and the arts. A l s o includes understanding the methods and effects o f culture change. Examples o f different cultural practices w i l l be drawn from societies throughout the world. ANTH 123 (3) Introduction to Archaeology (4,0,0) (F or S) A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and methods o f Archaeology, including the techniques used to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. E x a m ples w i l l be drawn from archaeological research around the world. ANTH 124 Human Origins (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and evidence for human origins as presented by A r c h a e o l ogy and Physical Anthropology. The biological and cultural evolution of humankind as indicated through a study of evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, skeletal remains, and archaeological discoveries. ANTH 200 (3) Intermediate Social Anthropology (4,0,0) (F) A study of the social structure and organization o f various cultures of the world. Emphasis on the dynamics o f culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoretical issues in Anthropology. Course Descriptions 207 ANTH 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Anthropology and the Environment ANTH 241 (6) Archaeology Field School The study o f the interaction o f people, culture and environments, emphasizing human adaptive strategies. Focus of the course w i l l vary each semester, exploring such topics as subsistence patterns, systems of k n o w l edge in traditional cultures, modernization and globalization, and current issues. Prerequisite: ANTH 204 Ethnic Relations (3) (4,0,0) (F) (2,9,0) (Su) Permission o f the instructor. This practical field course focusses on the identification, recording and recovery o f archaelogical remains. The majority of the time is spent in the field. W h e n the course is offered during a seven week summer session, the course hours each week are doubled. ANTH 249 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology A study o f the relations between ethnic groups. The construction, maintenance and expression of ethnic boundaries and identities w i l l be examined within a variety of cultural contexts, including Canada. The course w i l l address the social construction of difference and w i l l offer perspectives on racial stereotyping, the politics o f representation, the expression o f ethnic popular culture and its wider consumption. Processes, such as de-colonization and globalization which have been involved in the rise o f ethnic consciousness w i l l be analysed, together with theoretical concepts through which ethnicity may be comprehended. APMC 503 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) International Career Management ANTH 205 Multiculturalism This course w i l l help students develop skills and an understanding for networking and w o r k i n g in an A s i a n environment. (3) (4,0,0) (S) The course w i l l examine multiculturalism within Canada and utilize comparative material from Australia and N e w Zealand. The creation and impact o f multiculturalism w i l l be addressed from historical and cultural perspectives. The scope w i l l move from broader Canadian issues to looking specifically at British C o l u m b i a n ethnic relations and the changing cultural landscape. ANTH 206 (3) (4.0,0) (F or S) First Nations of British Columbia A study o f the cultural history, diversity, and complexity o f the Native Peoples o f British C o l u m b i a . The archaeological past, traditional lifeways, and current issues are examined. ANTH 208 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Indigenous Peoples of North America A survey o f the cultural history and social organization of native peoples of the North American continent including Canada, the United States and M e x i c o . A n examination o f traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. Course 208 Descriptions Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor. A n interdisciplinary course to consider in depth a particular geographic area and its people. Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, contemporary issues, methods of observation and study. Students and instructor study in the field. APMC 505 Co-op Work Term (9) (12,0,0) (F,S,Su) This course covers the work expected during the W o r k Term. It has four major modules: 1) M i d - t e r m Conference; 2) International Career Development; 3) Sectoral Focus Groups; 4) N e w s Analysis. Associates w i l l be expected to maintain a high level o f c o m m u n i cation with the program through electronic means. Failure to pass each individual element of the course w i l l result i n failure o f the co-op term and thus the program. APMC 515 Directed Studies (.25) (.33,0,0) (S) This two-fold course allows students, through directed research and a written paper, to explore an area o f special interest or need. It also includes preparation for the final comprehensive exam. APMC 518 International Finance I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l aim at providing students with an understanding o f financial concepts and strategies that influence business in the conduct of international commerce. APMC 519 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Introduction to International Business and Trade APMC 540 (5.25) Asia Pacific Perspectives I This course provides students with an understanding of the basic concepts involved in marketing products and services, as well as with a familiarity with marketing terminology and the application of the "marketing concept". This series of courses is designed to introduce students to the historical and current social, political and cultural patterns o f the A s i a Pacific region. Students w i l l review and develop skills in cross-cultural c o m m u nication. They w i l l also develop skills i n regional analysis that w i l l help them understand relationships within A s i a and with the West. APMC 520 Economic Geography I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l introduce students to current concepts in socio-economic analysis and w i l l emphasize the spatial aspects o f economic processes. Emphasis is on the dynamism o f economic change and how this change interacts with local social, political and environmental matrices. The course w i l l be issue oriented. There w i l l be a mix of theoretical background, actual case studies, and training in analytical skills. APMC 524 (1.5) Business Development Projects (2,0,0) (S) These are supervised team projects working with Vancouver-based companies. Business plans and projects are prepared for A s i a n opportunities chosen in conjunction with the companies. APMC 525 (2.25) International Management I (3,0,0) (F) This course provides students with a broad understanding o f the management process and functions as well as with the interrelatedness o f these topics with human hehaviour in organizations. Students also study the application o f this learning in an international context particularly with respect to the A s i a Pacific region. APMC 541 (3.75) Asia Pacific Perspectives II (7,0,0) (F) (5,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation of A P M C 540. APMC 550 (1.5) Cross Cultural Communication (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l develop an understanding o f the process of communication, including appreciation o f the fact that communication is significantly affected by the culture, personality and experience of the c o m m u nicator. This course w i l l also develop an understanding of the students' o w n culture and its effects on behavior. APMC 560 Workshops (0) (0,0,0) (F,S) This series allows students to "customize" the program by selecting from a range o f courses w h i c h offer an opportunity to develop special skills or to study special issues concerning A s i a . APSC 120 (1) Introduction to Engineering (1,0,0) (F) This course is a continuation o f A P M C 518. This course uses guest speakers, videotaped material and field trips to provide students with an orientation to a career as a professional engineer. Attendance at scheduled activities is the only course requirement. Final "grades" are reported as C R (Credit Granted) or N C ( N o Credit Granted). APMC 532 Economic Geography II APSC 150 Engineering Graphics APMC 531 International Finance II (2.25) (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) (3,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f A P M C 520. APMC 533 (1.5) International Business and Trade (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l focus on case studies. APMC 534 (1.5) International Management II (2,0,0) (S) (3) (1.4,0) (F) A n introduction to engineering graphics emphasizing the development of spatial visualization and graphical communication skills; technical sketching and engineering drawing using projection and sectioning techniques; principles, practices and conventions o f engineering graphics; descriptive geometry and graphical solution methods to engineering problems; use of microcomputer based graphics tools. This course is a continuation o f A P M C 525, but places a greater emphasis on guest presentations by senior executives whose companies actually are operating in the A s i a Pacific region. Course Descriptions 209 BADM 101 Management (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Students study modern management practices, current events, ethics and problem solving. In addition, students w i l l study and practice effective business presentations and public speaking. The course instructors w i l l facilitate discussion and integrate topics through the use o f contemporary business issues. BADM 102 Quantitative Methods (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Prerequisite: Acceptance into a Business Administration full-time program or a m i n i m u m " C + " i n M a t h 11 or equivalent. This course provides a strong foundation in the mathematics o f finance and business. The student w i l l utilize standard financial models i n analysis, problem solving, and decision-making. Computer spreadsheet applications are utilized. BADM 103 Supervisory Skills (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) This is a study o f the human elements in organizations, with emphasis on group behaviour. Concepts include persuasion, guidance and understanding of the individual within the group. Students w i l l learn applications in human relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and informal organization, communications, conflict and the introduction of change. This course is offered at the Sechelt and Squamish campuses only. BADM 106 (3) Organizational Behaviour (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) essentially an overview o f the theoretical framework o f the task o f management. This course is currently offered at the Sechelt and Squamish campuses only. BADM 107 Business Law I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Students w i l l be introduced to the components o f the Canadian legal system, and w i l l examine the effect o f both c o m m o n and statute law on business relationships. A study o f the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l provide the foundation for a detailed examination o f Contract L a w , including the sale o f goods, consumer protection legislation, and employment and labour law, as well as an examination o f tort law, intellectual property, insurance, company and partnership law, and creditor remedies. BADM 201 Business Systems Prerequisite: " C " grade. (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) B C P T 121 or C O M P 101 with m i n i m u m Students w i l l be required to apply the concepts and theories learned in their first year courses to solve integrated business problems i n a logical and literate manner. The importance o f accurate, dependable, management information for problem solving w i l l be illustrated through case study analysis and a major group project. BADM 210 Business Statistics (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) This course provides a strong foundation in basic business statistics emphasizing analysis and decisionmaking in the face o f certainty and uncertainty. Spreadsheet applications o f descriptive, inferential, and bivariate models are utilized. The objective of this course is to allow the student to develop the necessary skills and conceptual tools to both understand and deal effectively with human behaviour i n organizations. These skills are of at least two kinds: A working knowledge of spreadsheets (Excel) is required. 1. interpersonal, that is, relating more effectively with other individuals and groups, and 2. analytical, to be able to perceive and understand situations accurately, and make effective decisions based on this understanding. Skills needed in problem solving and researching the small business environment w i l l be learned and applied. Business owners, managers and w o u l d be decision makers are encouraged to take this course. The instructor and guest lecturers from the business community w i l l lead students through detailed aspects of business from finance to human relations. The production o f the business plan w i l l be discussed and part of a plan w i l l be written. BADM 108 (3) Introduction to Business (4,0,0) This course w i l l explain the five key tasks i n managing an enterprise: Planning, Acquisition o f Resources, Organization, Activation and Control. In addition, the key organizational functions o f Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is Course Descriptions 210 BADM 268 (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) Entrepreneurship/Small Business Management BADM 299* Co-op Placement I (3) (4,0,0) (Su) The first co-op work experience is designed to provide students with a four-month, full-time work term in business, industry or government. The main thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects of the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic of the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry and to participate i n professional organizations. * B A D M 299 can be accepted as a lower level general business elective in D i p l o m a programs only. BADM 301 (3) Operations Management Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F,S) B A D M 210 with m i n i m u m " C + " grade. O f special interest to generalist managers and operators of small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student with the principles, practices and functions of production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills in production and control (inventory, quality and cost control) are examined using computing devices and procedures. BADM 302 (3) Human Resource Management Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F,S) 45 credits This course provides the student with a basic, functional understanding of current personnel/human resource-management concepts and applications in developing small and larger business. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on the concept of human resource management being the responsibility of A L L management, not just the personnel department. BADM 303 Industrial Relations Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,Su) 45 credits Prequisite: BADM 307 (3) Advanced Business Law II (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) 75 credits The student gains a basic understanding o f the concepts, purposes, and procedures of business policy, and an integrated view of the strategic management of business enterprise. (4,0.0) (S) Prerequisite: B A D M 107 or an introductory college or university course in commercial or contract law, or by permission of the instructor. A second law course w i l l examine the effect o f both common and statute law on business relationships. A review of the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l lead to the examination o f more complex contractual relationships such as discharge of contract, agency, bailment, real property, commercial tenancy, legal devices for securing credit including mortgages, and bankruptcy. Other topics include competition law, management and operation of a corporation and intellectual property. This course is available every second year. BADM 310 (3) Quantitative Methods III (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: B A D M 102 (Pass), B A D M 210 (C+), B C P T 122 (C-) This course provides the student with a practical understanding of the application and theoretical foundation o f commonly used techniques i n statistical modeling. It includes basic descriptive statistics, inferential statistics, regression and time-series analysis, and other quantitative models such as decisiontrees, multiple regression, and the fundamentals o f linear programming. The student w i l l analyse business situations in order to develop the appropriate statistical models, and w i l l apply spreadsheet software to develop solutions used in recommending appropriate management action. BADM 399 Co-op Placement II Prerequisite: This course introduces the student to labour unions and their relationship with management. Topics covered include the Labour Code, collective bargaining and dispute resolution. BADM 304 Strategic Management For accelerated, C o - o p D i p l o m a , A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a and British C o l u m b i a Open University students only. (3) (4.0,0) (S) B A D M 299 The second co-op work experience is designed to provide students with a four-month, full-time work term in business, industry or government. The main thrust o f this course is* the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects o f the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry and to participate in professional organizations. Participating in a practical business simulation game is a major component o f the course. Course Descriptions 211 BBIO 041 (1) Advanced Level Biology (F,S,Su) Prerequisite: B S C I 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as co-requisite. BCMP 041 (1) Advanced Level Computer Studies (F.S) Topics include cell structure and function, cell d i v i sion, evolution, microbe and plant structure and diversity, behavioural ecology, biosphere, ecosystems, human population concerns. Laboratory exercises are included. Prepares students for many career/vocational programs. A paced, graded course offering both an introduction to commonly used business software and essential computer concepts and terminology. Software used includes: word processing, spreadsheets, graphics, W i n d o w s and the Internet. Computer concepts include examination of: processors, storage devices, input/ output devices, computer communications, security, ethics, ergonomics, and purchasing considerations. BBIO 042 Provincial Level Biology BCMP 042 (1) Provincial Level Computer Science (1) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B S C I 032 or Science 10 and English 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as a co-requisite Topics include cell structure and function, cell d i v i sion, cell metabolism, human biology, including reproduction genetics, digestion, circulation, i m m u nity, respiration, excretion, nervous system, hormones. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college level post-secondary programs for w h i c h B i o l o g y 12 is a prerequisite. BCHM 041 (1) Advanced Level Chemistry (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or M a t h 10, and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Introduction to atomic theory, periodicity, bonding, naming compounds, mole concept, chemical reactions, gases, solutions. Optional topics include organic chemistry, nuclear chemistry, industrial chemistry. Includes laboratory exercises. Prepares students for college science courses and many career/vocational programs. BCHM 042 (1) (F.S.Su) Provincial Level Chemistry Prerequisite: B C H M 041 or Chemistry 11 Corequisite: B M T H 045 or Math 11 Topics include shapes o f molecules, thermochemistry, rates of reactions, chemical equilibrium, solubility, acids and bases, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry. Optional topics include nuclear chemistry, organic chemistry. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college chemistry and technology programs for w h i c h Chemistry 12 is a prerequisite. BCMP 031 (1) Intermediate Level Computer Studies (F.S) A paced, credit course offering an introduction to commonly used business software such as word processing, spreadsheets and the Internet. A l s o included is an introduction to Windows disk and file management. Course 212 Descriptions (S) Prerequisite: B C M P 041 and M a t h 10 or B M T H 031 with a m i n i m u m " B - " standing, or permission of the instructor. A paced, graded course offering an introduction to computer programming. Students w i l l analyse problems, design solutions, develop programs, test, debug and document the software they write. BCMP 043 (1) Provincial Level Computer Studies (S) Prerequisite: B C M P 041 with a m i n i m u m " B - " standing, or permission of the instructor. A paced, graded course offering an introduction to fundamentals o f the Internet. Topics include: e-mail, discussion groups, listservs, web search engines, and web page creation. BCOP 131 (3) Introduction to Programming and Programming Logic (4,0,0) (F) This is the foundation course for all programming skills developed by the program. Design techniques using hierarchy charts, flowchart, and pseudo code w i l l be studied. The course w i l l use a computer language to demonstrate the structured programming skills necessary for good programming. BCOP 171 (3) (4,0,0) (F) The Developmental Tools of Information Systems A traditional look at the systems life cycle process. M o d e l i n g and charting w i l l be included. The tools and methodology applied by the systems analyst w i l l be studied. The course covers an overview o f the system life cycle, system flow charting, Data F l o w Diagrams, Normalization, Bubble Diagrams, P E R T / C P M Networks. BCOP 204 Business Computing III (3) (4,0,0) (S) BCOP 231 Data Management (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 240 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: B C O P 171 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. This course extends the students knowledge o f O/S batch files to configure the modern P C for best performance. The course also provides more in depth instruction on graphic presentations and desktop publishing in the W i n d o w s environment. The structure, design and control of hierarchical, network and relational databases. Emphasis is on modeling tools as applied to business case studies. BCOP 205 (3) Applied Statistics for Business Prerequisites: Acceptance into the full-time B C O P (4,0.0) (F) This course provides a strong foundation in business statistical models and techniques emphasizing analysis and decision making in the face of certainty and uncertainty. Data Analysis software (SPSS) is utilized for applications of descriptive, inferential, bivariate and multiple regression models. (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 with m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission of the instructor. Study o f managerial and financial information requirements and controls necessary to support specific decisions with an emphasis on budgeting, forecasting, controlling and decision making. BCOP 214 Business Computing IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 240 with m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission of the instructor. Students w i l l explore advanced database concepts, including automation techniques, using popular Windows-based D B M S software. The following topics are included i n the course: the planning, creation and maintenance o f databases, the development of information retrieval techniques, the design and customization of forms, the creation and use o f macros and modules in an automated system. BCOP 215 Network I (3) (4,0,0) (F) program. Prerequisite: B C O P year one. BCOP 206 (3) Accounting for Managers BCOP 240 (3) Computer Hardware and Software (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B C P T 122 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to the field o f data communications and networking, covering networking hardware/ operating system concepts, modem, W A N , and L A N standards and protocols, with server installation. T o provide students with an understanding o f P C hardware and troubleshooting and its relationship with D O S and W i n d o w s operating system. The course w i l l be hands-on. Included in the course w i l l be " C o m m a n d line interface" commands and the hardware/software interface with operating systems. BCOP 304 Business Computing V (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B C O P 214 and B C O P 305 with m i n i mum " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. Development o f solutions to mission critical business problems using advanced development tools. BCOP 305 Network II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 215 and B C O P 305 with m i n i mum " C " grade or permission of the instructor. A computer industry certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks o f network administration. Topics include: client setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the fde system, establishing systems security, printing set-up, E - m a i l and backup. The successful student may apply their knowledge towards the optional certification exam. BCOP 325 Network III (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Prerequisite: B C O P 215 and B C O P 305 with m i n i mum " C " grade or permission of the instructor. A N o v e l l Certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks o f network administration using Netware 4.x. Topics include: client setup and maintenance, global directory services setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing systems security, and print setup. After the course, the student may write the optional 4.x C N A exam for their Certified N o v e l l Administrator designation. Course Descriptions 213 BCOP 329 Network IV (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B C O P 215 and B C O P 305 with minimum " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. This course is equivalent to Microsoft's N T Core Technologies. This course w i l l provide support professionals with the skills necessary to install, configure, customize, optimize, network, integrate and troubleshoot W i n d o w s N T 4.0. In addition, this course provides students with the knowledge and skills necessary to perform post-installation and day-to-day administration tasks in a single-domain and multipledomain W i n d o w s NT-based network. BCOP 331 Network V (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Supporting M S Server 4.0—Enterprise Technologies (MS#689) This course allows networking professionals to support Microsoft W i n d o w s N T i n an enterprise environment. Y o u w i l l learn to design, implement and support the W i n d o w s N T Server Network Operating System i n a multi-domain enterprise environment. BCOP 333 Network VI (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Prerequisites: B C O P 329 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission of the instructor. This course provides students with the knowledge and skills required to set-up, configure, use and support Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol ( T C P / IP) on W i n d o w s N T 4.0. This course w i l l discuss network IDs, host IDs, IP addressing, P I N G , I P C O N F I G , subnet masks, supernetting, IP routing, D H C P , W I N S , S N M P and D N S . BCOP 335 Network VII (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Creating and M a n a g i n g a W e b Server using M S IIS 4.0 (MS#936) Learning to install and configure a web server. Y o u w i l l gain an understanding of the product's architecture and perform the procedures to install, configure and support an Internet Information Server. BCPT 121 Business Computing I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) None A n introduction to the use of microcomputers i n business. This course provides hands-on experience with word processing, data management and graphic user interface software. It also looks at the operating system and its functions. Students w i l l examine the uses o f computers today and the selection process for acquiring hardware and software. BCPT 122 Business Computing II (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: B C P T 121 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or B T E C 146 with a m i n i m u m " B " , or by permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f B C P T 121, providing further uses of microcomputers in business. Students w i l l receive hands-on experience with spreadsheets and presentation graphics and graphical user interface software. BCPT 221 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Business Computing Presentation Graphics Prerequisite: better B C P T 122 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or This course is an introduction to sophisticated presentation, graphics and desktop publishing software, and related hardware, for the purpose o f producing high quality business presentations and advertising materials on a personal computer. BENG 011 (1) Basic Literacy Level English A course in basic reading and writing. Students focus on the composition o f words and basic sentences. BENG 021 (1) (F.S) Fundamental Level English: Essential Writing Skills, Spelling and Word Attack. A n introductory Fundamental course in reading and in writing o f sentences and short paragraphs. BENG 031 (1) (F,S,Su) Intermediate Level English: Mechanics, Basic Skills and Paragraph Writing. A n Intermediate course in writing. M o s t A B E students enter the E n g l i s h program at this level. Students write a series of paragraphs and two longer compositions. Course Descriptions 214 BENG 040 (1) (F.S.Su) Advanced Level English: Short Report Writing Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A short-report writing course with a vocational/ technical emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. Students develop the summarizing, notetaking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety o f sources into well-written reports. BENG 041 (1) (F.S.Su) Advanced English: Advanced Report Writing Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A n advanced course in short-report writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety of sources into well-written reports. B E N G 041 has a technical/academic emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing and includes introductory work in literary analysis and evaluation for students proceeding to B E N G 042. BENG 042 (1) (F.S.Su) Provincial Level English: Critical Reading and Essay Writing Prerequisite: 70% i n B E N G 041 A Provincial level course in essay writing. Students study and write a variety of essays to prepare for written work at the university-transfer level or equivalent i n diploma programs. B E N G 042 has an academic/ literary emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. BESC 041 (1) (F.S) Advanced Level Earth and Environmental Sciences Prerequisites: B S C I 032 or Science 10 A n introduction to the earth sciences, with environmental applications and a British C o l u m b i a emphasis. Areas of study include earth materials, notably minerals, rocks and mining; water, including sources, processes and contamination, and natural earth hazards, such as earthquakes and volcanoes, landslides and flooding. Laboratory investigations and field trips are involved. Prepares students for further courses in physical and social sciences. BFIN 141 Accounting (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) This course is an introduction to financial concepts and business principles. Students w i l l record business transactions and create financial statements. A l s o they w i l l be exposed to a broad range o f topics including legal compliance, asset management and financial statement analysis. This course is designed to prepare the student for courses in Managerial A c c o u n t i n g and Financial Management. W e recommend that students with weak math skills take B A D M 102 (Quantitative Methods) before, or at the same time as, B F I N 141. BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 with at least a C - grade or O T E C 217 with at least a C + grade. Students w i l l apply generally accepted accounting principles to the establishment and maintenance o f accounting systems, including the preparation, analysis and interpretation o f financial statements. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . transferable). BFIN 241 Finance for Managers Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) B F I N 141, B A D M 102 & C M N S 220. In this practical financial management course students study financial management techniques. They apply this knowledge to business decisions. Topics i n this course include: evaluating business performance, financial institutions and markets, valuation o f financial assets, obtaining financing, managing assets and international finance. Contemporary financial issues are discussed throughout this course.- BFIN 244 (3) Management Accounting Prerequisite: (4,0.0) (F.S) B F I N 141 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. This course introduces students to the specialized area of Management Accounting. It provides an overview of controls affected internally by management using the tools of budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an organization w i l l be examined from both the capital and operations perspectives. BFIN 249 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Accounting Microcomputer Applications Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. Students w i l l complete microcomputer accounting implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software. They w i l l be expected to demonstrate their understanding o f the practical constraints o f internal control in the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered w i l l include general ledger, A / R and A / P (inventory optional). There w i l l be additional costs for printing and disks. Students in this course should expect to spend approximately $75.00 for materials and group activities. Course Descriptions 215 BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. A study o f organizational decision making and planning using accounting tools. Topics include the nature of accounting controls, common control methods, measures o f management performance, and the role o f the management cost accountant. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . transferable with B F I N 342) BFIN 342 Cost Accounting II Prerequisite: (3) BFIN 350 (3) Advanced Financial Management (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B F I N 141 and B F I N 241 with a m i n i mum " C - " grade. The content of this course concentrates on the development o f analytical and conceptual skills for financial decision-making. The course places emphasis on capital asset pricing models, capital budgeting and capital structures. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . transferable with B F I N 241) (4,0,0) (S) B F I N 341 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. BFIN 351 Taxation (3) (4,0,0) (S) A more in-depth study of subjects covered in Cost Prerequisite: Accounting I. Cost determination for manufacturing This course familiarizes the student with the Canadian income tax system as it applies to corporations, share- . holders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the student can identify potential tax problem areas, complete the basic compliance forms, and appreciate its impact on some business decisions. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . transferable) operations, planning and cost control systems, performance evaluation methods, and strategic decisionmaking methods. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . transferable with B F I N 341) BFIN 344 (3) Personal Investment Management Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) B F I N 241. A central theme of this course is investors using securities to increase personal wealth. This is accomplished by studying such topics as: types of securities, security markets, modern portfolio theory, active asset management, balancing risk and return, and security valuation techniques. BFIN 346 Financial Accounting II (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement o f the material covered in B F I N 142. The course encompasses the study o f Financial Accounting at the intermediate level. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . transferable with B F I N 347) Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) B F I N 346 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. A sequel to B F I N 346 which examines current developments in financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . transferable with B F I N 346) Transferable to S F U . Course Descriptions 216 BGEO 042 (1) Provincial Level Geography (F and/or S) A study of interactions between the people o f B . C . and their geographic environment. Students w i l l discover the diverse regions o f B . C . and the set of geographic and human attributes that make each region distinct. Students w i l l assess the success o f people's adaptations to their geographic environment, with a focus on mutual sustainability o f land, air, water, l i v i n g and earth resources, and human populations. BHST 042 Provincial Level History (1) (S) A survey o f 20th century history including major issues in present day geopolitics. BIOL 104 Human Biology I Transferable to S F U . BFIN 347 Financial Accounting III B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m " C - " grade. Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F,Su) None This is the first term o f a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students not planning to take further courses i n biology. The basic concepts of human biology and the position o f man as an organism are examined. Major topics include: the evolution o f man, the structure and function of human cells and tissues, cell division, human genetics, human reproduction, development, digestion, and nutrition. B I O L 104 fulfils the entrance biology requirement for the Nursing program at B C I T . BIOL 105 Environmental Biology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S,Su) Prerequisite: None This course, designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for non-science students, examines a wide range of environmental issues from a biological perspective. Basic principles of ecology are developed and the impact of modern society on the environment is assessed. The overall focus is global; however, the basic ecological principles are developed using primarily British C o l u m b i a n and other Canadian examples. Major environmental issues relevant to Canada are also stressed. Major topics include: ecological concepts, conservation and endangered species, air pollution and global warming, water resources and water pollution. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit and, together with B I O L 104, as a prerequisite for B I O L 204 and 206. BIOL 106 (1.5) Basic Introductory Biology I Corequisite: (2,0,0) (F,Su) B I O L 107 This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m o f " C + " standing in B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion of B I O L 106 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 together are the same as for B I O L 110. BIOL 107 (3) Basic Introductory Biology II Corequisite: (4,3,0) (F, Su) B I O L 106 This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m o f " C + " standing in B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or who has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion of B I O L 106 and B I O L 107, students are qualified to take B I O L 111. The course topics for B I O L 106 and B I O L 107 are the same as for B I O L 110. i BIOL 110 Introductory Biology I BIOL 111 Introductory Biology II (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) with a m i n i m u m o f " C + " standing and Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041) or with permission o f the instructor. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses i n science. Major topics w i l l include biochemistry, the origin o f life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. (3) (4,0,0) (S,Su) B I O L 106/107 or 110. A continuation o f B I O L 106/107 or 110 which further develops the discussion o f biological concepts including development, biological systems, evolution and ecology. BIOL 113 Human Biology II Prerequisite: tor. (3) (4,0.0) (S) B I O L 104 or permission o f the instruc- A continuation of the study of human biology commenced in B I O L 104. The course focuses on the anatomy and physiology of the following organ systems: cardiovascular, respiratory, musculoskeletal, nervous, and urinary. Special emphasis w i l l be given to health and fitness as well as discussion o f disease and treatment. The laboratory sessions w i l l provide c o m plementary practical study o f the systems, and introduce techniques used to make physiological evaluations (e.g. heart rate, E K G , blood pressure, urine analysis). Completion o f B I O L 104 and B I O L 113 permits students upon entering Basic Health Sciences at B C I T to receive credit for B H S C 105. BIOL 200 Genetics I (3) (4,0.0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111; and C H E M 110/111. A n introduction to the principles and mechanisms o f heredity. Emphasis w i l l be placed on an analytical approach to transmission genetics, genetics of humans, introductory molecular genetics, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 201 Genetics II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B I O L 200. B I O L 214 and concurrent registration (if not already completed) i n B I O L 215 are recommended. A continuation of the principles and mechanisms o f heredity, with emphasis on the genetics o f microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and developmental genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. Course Descriptions 217 BIOL 204 Ecology I (3) Prerequisite: 104/105. (4,0,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111; or B I O L A n introduction to the principles o f ecology with emphasis on ecosystem and community dynamics and structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrelationships, energy flow and nutrient cycling. Introduction to vegetation analysis in the B . C . context. Both plants and animals w i l l be considered but plants w i l l be emphasized. W e e k l y field trips examine local biogeoclimatic zone structure and composition, while a southern B . C . field trip introduces several inland biogeoclimatic zones. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. (3) BIOL 205 Ecology II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) B I O L 204. A continuation of ecological principles, with the introduction and application of quantitative concepts. The emphasis w i l l be on animal ecology including population dynamics, animal behaviour, competition, predator-prey relationships, and other aspects o f interactions of plant and animal populations. W e e k l y field trips and a three-day field trip to the Pacific R i m National Park area w i l l be included in the course. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. BIOL 206 (3) Ecology of the Western Pacific (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111; or B I O L 104/105; or G E O G 112/114; or by permission of the B i o l o g y coordinator. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeography of the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. Basic principles of biogeography and ecology w i l l be presented with reference to the regions concerned. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic characteristics w i l l be discussed for the following regions: the A s i a n M a i n l a n d , with emphasis on Japan and China; the M a l a y Peninsula and Indonesia; and Australasia, focusing on Australia, Papua N e w Guinea and N e w Zealand. There is no lab for this course. BIOL 210 (3) Morphology of Vascular Plants Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111. A comparative study o f the vascular plant groups, the pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms with emphasis on the evolution, morphology, ecology and function of each of the groups. Discussions o f problems in plant morphology. Course 218 Descriptions BIOL 212 Invertebrate Zoology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111. A comparative survey o f the major phyla and classes o f invertebrates with emphasis upon phylogeny, adaptive biology and ecology o f each group. The course is designed around the major unifying concept o f evolution. Problems o f contemporary interest in the field o f invertebrate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station. BIOL 213 Vertebrate Zoology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111. A comparative survey o f the major classes o f vertebrates, emphasizing evolutionary trends especially i n development and morphology o f organ systems. Adaptive features in vertebrates are considered. The laboratory complements the lecture component with representative vertebrates being examined. The lab component includes several half day field trips. BIOL 214 Cell Biology (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111. Corequisite: C H E M 200 Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200/201. A n integrated study o f the structure and function o f cells and their components. Ultrastructure o f cell organelles as determined by electron microscopy w i l l be related to the molecular functions of cells. Emphasis w i l l also be placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolutionary origin o f cells and their components, and on comparisons between specialized cell structure and function. The laboratory exercises w i l l use modern methods o f microscopy and separation techniques i n a detailed study o f cell structures and their functions. BIOL 215 Biochemistry Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) B I O L 214 C H E M 201 A n examination of the fundamental principles and basic facts o f biochemistry starting with protein structure and enzyme functions. C e l l energetics, biosyntheses and mechanisms w h i c h control cell metabolism w i l l also be considered. The laboratory w i l l involve detailed experimental analyses, using the current techniques o f biochemistry, o f the molecular functions o f cells and tissues. BIOL 220 Microbiology I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: B I O L 106/107 or 110, and 111; C H E M 110/111. A comprehensive treatment o f introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and metabolism o f micro-organisms w i l l be discussed. The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. BIOL 221 Microbiology II (3) (4,0.0) (S) A continuation o f B I O L 220, emphasizing genetics, immunological aspects, and ecology of micro-organisms. The role of micro-organisms in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: Same as eligibility for E N G L 100, i.e. EDT=100 A n overview o f marketing as applied to computer and related markets and products. Students w i l l participate in class discussions related to product planning, research, promotion and distribution systems. Each student w i l l make a sales presentation. BMKT 161 Marketing (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Same as eligibility for E N G L 100, ie. EDT=100. This course covers the full spectrum of Canadian marketing o f consumer products and services including: Market segmentation, consumer behaviour, products, packaging, distribution and promotion. Students w i l l analyze case problems and prepare a strategic marketing plan. Videos, guest speakers and in-class discussion about marketing topics w i l l assist in the learning experience. BMKT 163 (3) Small Business Management II (2,0.0) (F) Prerequisite: B M K T 164. This course w i l l allow the student to develop a business plan utilizing workshops in specific areas o f sound business planning. U p o n completion o f this course the student w i l l have a plan ready for submission to financial advisors. (4,0.0) (S) Corequisite: R E C . 239. A n introduction to marketing, market research and financial record keeping. These foundation topics w i l l provide a base upon which students w i l l develop knowledge and skills related to operating a business o f their o w n . This course is available only within the Outdoor Recreation Management Program. BMKT 261 Advertising Prerequisite: B I O L 220 BMKT 160 Marketing BMKT 164 (3) Small Business Management I (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: B M K T 161 This course w i l l examine the Canadian and A m e r i c a n advertising industry from both micro and macro perspectives. It w i l l enable the student to grasp the basic theoretical and practical approaches to advertising and provide an insight into the various aspects of advertising history, creativity, communication systems, media choice, and other functions. This is not a course on designing, creating, and preparing specific types o f advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview o f what advertising is and how it relates to other marketing concepts and operations. Students w i l l participate in an advertising campaign simulation project. BMKT 263 (3) Professional Selling Skills (4.0,0) (F.S) Every business professional starts with an introduction to professional selling. Communication basics, including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity w i l l be covered. Specific techniques o f professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course w i l l also explore, in depth, the organization and management o f sales activities. BMKT 360 Marketing Research (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisites: B M K T 161 and B A D M 210. A n introductory course indicating how to make the most out o f marketing research. Through the practical applications o f a research project, students w i l l learn the elements o f research design, basic methods o f collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications o f Canadian and A m e r i c a n research w i l l be studied. This course is available only within the Outdoor Recreation Management Program. Course Descriptions 219 BMKT 362 (3) Event Marketing and Management (4,0,0) Prerequisite: B M K T 161 The trend in business today is to extend marketing dollars into the area o f event marketing. This course w i l l introduce students to the skills and concepts necessary to create, finance, and manage a special event. Students w i l l be expected to demonstrate an understanding of how to choose and develop a specific event, demonstrate a knowledge o f specific budget elements and their relationship to revenue generating, develop an understanding of event marketing and understand the administrative structure and skills necessary to manage a special event. BMKT 364 Consumer Behaviour (3) (4,0,0) (S) BMKT 365 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Marketing Strategies and Decisions (F,S,Su) W h o l e numbers, fractions, decimals, ratio and proportion, percent, powers and roots, averages and graphs. This course is designed to prepare students for an Intermediate course in mathematics. BMTH 031 (1) Intermediate Level Mathematics (F.S.Su) Introductory algebra and elementary plane and solid geometry. This course is designed to prepare students for an A d v a n c e d course in mathematics. BMTH 045 (1) Advanced Level Math — Algebra & Trigonometry Prerequisite: Prerequisite: B M K T 161, B M K T 360 preferred. Today, as never before, studying the behaviour of consumers is paramount for anyone pursuing a business career, especially i n the marketing area. A blend of both concepts and applications from the field o f consumer behaviour w i l l form the basis of this course. Students should find this subject very interesting and motivational when applied to several aspects o f business management including marketing research, creative advertising, team building and environmental marketing. Research projects, case discussions and problem solving w i l l be stressed in both individual and team activities. This course is offered every two years. Prerequisite: BMTH 021 (1) Fundamental Level Mathematics (F.S.Su) B M T H 031 or equivalent with at least a "B-" Review of real numbers, powers, laws of exponents; polynomials and rational expressions, factoring, quadratic equations, maxima and minima; functions and relations; quadratic functions; transformations o f relations; circle geometry, theorems and proofs; trigonometry, right and oblique triangles, functions of angles in standard position. A n A B E Advanced Certificate course, B M T H 045 is designed to prepare students for a precalculus course. It is the equivalent of M a t h 11 or Math 090/095. BMTH 046 (1) (F.S.Su) Provincial Level Math — Algebra and Trigonometry Prerequisite: B M T H 045 or equivalent with at least a " B - B M K T 161 This course w i l l explore in greater depth the concepts of values and lifestyles, product development, service marketing, positioning, strategic planning, tactical promotion, international marketing and marketing notfor-profit organizations. The focus w i l l be on analyzing marketing problems, developing strategic decisionmaking skills and applying "hands-on" tactical solutions for results. Guest lecturers, projects and a computer simulation w i l l be used to enhance the classroom components. Solving linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing functions, approximating the roots of polynomial; graphing rational functions; exponential and logarithmic functions; trigonometric functions, analytic trigonometry; series and sequences; complex numbers; conic sections. A n A B E Provincial Certificate course, B M T H 046 is a precalculus course for students intending to enrol in a first year program in sciences or mathematics. It is the equivalent o f M a t h 12 or M a t h 105. BMKT 367 (3) Promotion Strategy and Analysis BPHY 041 Advanced Level Physics Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) B M K T 261 This is a course dealing with the development o f an advertising campaign ( C A P - A D S ) . Students w i l l s t u d y campaign strategy including how it is planned and organized in cooperation with the production, marketing, sales and finance departments as well as the use o f outside agencies. Some time w i l l be spent with advertising research as a pre and post control factor. Course 220 Descriptions (1) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or Mathematics 10, and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Corequisite: B M T H 045 Introduces motion, forces, vectors, gravitation, momentum, work, power, energy, electricity, series and parallel circuits, electric fields, rotational motion, light, magnetism, waves, heat. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college courses and many career/ vocational programs. BPHY 042 Provincial Level Physics (1) (F.S.Su) BTEC 113 (4.5) (6,0,0) (S) Business English and Communications Prerequisites: B P H Y 041 or Physics 11 and Algebra 11 Corequisite: B M T H 045 or M a t h 11 This course w i l l train students in grammar, spelling, Topics include kinematics, dynamics, vectors, work and energy, circular motion, momentum, rotational motion, equilibrium, electrostatics, circuits and instruments, electromagnetic induction, waves, sound, electromagnetic waves, optics. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college physics and technology programs for which Physics 12 is a prerequisite. and business writing. BSCI 021 (1) Fundamental Level General Science (F.S.Su) A n introduction to the basic scientific concepts and language of general science. BSCI 032 (1) Intermediate Level General Science (F.S.Su) Basic scientific principles i n biology, chemistry and physics needed to progress to higher level science courses. BSOC 031 (1) Intermediate Level Social Studies A n introduction to the fundamental principles o f Economics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development o f analytical and interpretive skills. BSOC 041 (1) Advanced Level Social Studies (F) punctuation, correct w o r d usage, proofreading skills BTEC 115 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Business Systems and Procedures This course w i l l review basic math skills and train students to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. BTEC 117 (3) Accounting Procedures I (4,0,0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the theory o f accounting and to tasks performed i n the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and thoroughness as well as on independent decision making. BTEC 118 (1.5) (2,2,0) (S.Su) Introduction to Computerized Accounting A n introduction to Simply Accounting. This course provides hands on experience using G L , A P , A R and Payroll modules. BTEC 119 (4.5) Accounting Procedures I (6.4,0) (S) This course introduces E S L students to the theory o f accounting and the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and on independent decision making. A study o f economic, political, and social issues in Canada and i n some neighbouring countries. BTEC 124 (6) Microcomputer Applications Students w i l l learn basic skills of social analysis that w i l l enhance their ability to participate in decisions and policies that affect their economic, political and social interests. This course w i l l provide a survey o f M S Office 95 BTEC 111 Business English I (3) (4,0,0) (F) The course w i l l review the fundamental principles o f grammar, spelling, and punctuation. M e m o writing w i l l be covered. BTEC 112 (1.5) Language Skill Development (8,2,0) (S) ( W o r d 7, Access 7, E x c e l 7 and Power Point 7) and improve keyboarding skills. BTEC 140 (1.5) Administrative Procedures (2,0,0) (S,Su) This course w i l l introduce students to the basic office administrative procedures associated with the modern business office. Students w i l l apply their knowledge o f records control, time management and other procedures to a simulation. (2,0,0) (F) This course w i l l train students to apply the correct techniques of written communications to their proofreading, verifying, and editing. BTEC 143 (4.5) (6,4,0) (F) Introduction to Microcomputer Applications T o introduce students to some of the theoretical aspects of microcomputers, hardware and software, theory and practice o f w o r d processing, and correct keyboarding techniques to increase speed and accuracy on a microcomputer. Course Descriptions 221 BTEC 144 (4.5) Microcomputer Applications Prerequisite: (6,2,0) (S) O T E C 143 or B T E C 143 or equivalent. BTEC 215 (3) Computerized Accounting Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (Su) O T E C 117 or B T E C 117 or equivalent. This course provides students with an overview o f This course is designed to instruct the student i n the use technological advances in office automation, the use o f of the accounting application program, A C C P A C , for database and spreadsheet microcomputer applications. entering, storing and retrieving records, and producing standard financial reports. BTEC 146 (6) Microcomputer Applications I (8,2,0) (F) This course w i l l train students in the theory and practical applications o f a word processing software program and a database program. This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. BTEC 217 (3) Accounting Procedures II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S.Su) B T E C 117 with a m i n i m u m o f a " B " grade or permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f B T E C 117 with emphasis on accounting systems and procedures. Business BTEC 147 (4.5) Microcomputer Applications II Prerequisite: (6.2,0) (S) O T E C 146 or B T E C 146 or equivalent. Students w i l l become proficient i n the use of a word processing windows program. Students w i l l also be introduced to spreadsheet programs for both D O S and window environments. This course w i l l introduce students to technological developments and advances in office automation. BTEC 148 (3) Administrative Applications (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l apply their knowledge o f records control, time management, and other administrative procedures to office simulations. T h i s course w i l l provide reinforcement of procedures used in word processing by producing complex documents which require formatting, computer software operations, and language skill decisions. BTEC 149 (4.5) (4,2,0) (S) Microcomputer Business Applications The students w i l l review the math functions related to spreadsheets. In addition, the students w i l l become proficient users of spreadsheets in both D O S and window environments. Students w i l l also receive an overview o f technological advances i n office automation. BTEC 211 Business Writing Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) student's quality of grammar, spelling, and word usage, and to develop and/or improve composition skills. Course BTEC 218 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) Accounting — Comprehensive Project Students w i l l continue the study o f the accounting fundamentals begun i n B T E C 117 and 217. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the application o f these fundamentals to a comprehensive simulated business situation representative o f those encountered i n business. BTEC 220 (3) Accounting Procedures III Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) O T E C 117 or B T E C 117. This course provides students with business simulations handling accounts payable, accounts receivable, payroll bank reconciliations, and an integrated small business simulation. BTEC 230 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development This course w i l l build the student's keyboarding speed and accuracy using skill-building materials, timed writings and targeted corrective practice. BTEC 233 (3) (8,2,0) (Su) Web Page Design and Integrated Applications Prerequisites: O T E C 146 and O T E C 147, or B T E C 146 and B T E C 147 or equivalents. Students w i l l use the graphics capabilities of desktop publishing to enhance the appearance of letterheads, reports, tables, brochures, news releases, etc. O T E C 111 or B T E C 111 or equivalent. This course utilizes the computer to improve the 222 simulations are used extensively throughout the course. Descriptions BTEC 251 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence job performance. Students w i l l practice in-person and telephone responding, customer service and issue resolution skills in a supportive environment. BTEC 252 (3) Organizational Behaviour (4.0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding o f interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence performance on the job. This course w i l l also identify the positive administrative and supervisory skills that program graduates w i l l need as they wish to assume additional career responsibility in the future. BTEC 300 (1.5) Directed Work Experience (2,0,0) (S,Su) This course involves both lectures on job search techniques and resume preparation. In addition, at least a 30-hour work practicum must be completed in an industry placement related to the student's program o f study. CHEM 030 (3) Introduction to Chemistry (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in sciences. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. Balancing equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium, gas laws. CHEM 101 (3) Fundamentals of Chemistry (4,1.5,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: C h e m 11 or C H E M 030 or B C H M 041; Principles o f Math 11 required, Principles o f M a t h 12 preferred. A study o f chemical principles, nomenclature, stoichiometry and solutions, gases, chemical bonding, thermochemistry; an introduction to acids and bases, equilibrium and nuclear chemistry. CHEM 110 Bonding and Structure (3) (4.3,0) (F, S) Prerequisite: Completion within the last three years of: C h e m 12 (C+) and Principles o f M a t h 12; or C h e m 11 ( A ) and Principles o f M a t h 12 ( A or B ) ; or C H E M 101 (C) and Principles o f M a t h 12; or B C H M 042 (C+) and Principles o f M a t h 12. Corequisite: M A T H 105 or 116/117. A course for students who plan careers in science. A brief review o f stoichiometry, nomenclature and the gaseous state; atomic structure; periodic trends; chemical bonding and molecular structure; an introduction to organic chemistry; solutions and colligative properties. CHEM guided self-study available in 110/111 format; may be completed however, this option CHEM 111 (3) (4,3,0) (S,Su) Chemical Dynamics and Energetics Prerequisite: Corequisite: C H E M 110. M A T H 116/117. A course for students who plan a career in science. Kinetics; equilibrium; acids, bases, salts and buffers; thermodynamics; solubility; redox equations and electrochemistry; recovery o f metals from ores. CHEM 110/111 may be completed format; however, this option by guided is not available self-study in CHEM 151 (3) Chemical Dynamics and Energetics Prerequisite: Corequisite: 2000/2001. (4,0,0) (S) C H E M 110. M A T H 116/117. A course for engineering students only. Kinetics, equilibriums, acids, bases, salts and buffers; thermodynamics; solubility; redox equations and electrochemistry; recovery o f metals from ores. CHEM 200 Organic Chemistry I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: C H E M 111. A n y student who has attempted the course previously w i l l not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. A study o f nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy of organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, a l k y l halides; mechanisms and stereochemistry. CHEM 201 Organic Chemistry II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) C H E M 200 Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. CHEM 204 (3) Introduction to Physical Chemistry Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (F) C H E M 111, M A T H 126/127. This course is an introduction to chemical thermodynamics and its application to gas behaviour, chemical and phase equilibria, colligative properties, ionic solutions, electrochemistry and chemical kinetics. This course is not offered in 2000/2001. by is not 2000/2001. Course Descriptions • 223 CHEM 205 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry CHIN 103 (3) Introduction to Chinese II Prerequisite: For Asia Pacific Management C H E M 111. (4.0,0) (S) Cooperative program A n introduction to the properties, bonding, structure students only. and reactivity o f coordination complexes o f the first Prerequisite: row elements. M o d e r n spectroscopic methods and tor. chemical kinetics w i l l also be covered. The laboratory This course is a continuation o f C H I N 102 . C H I N 102 or permission of the instruc- component emphasizes the synthesis o f inorganic compounds and the use of modern analytical instruments. CHEM 206 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Introduction to Analytical Chemistry Prerequisite: C H E M 111. The basic principles and techniques of analytical chemistry, including neutralization, complex-formation and gravimetric reactions. Various types o f chromatog- (4,2,0) (F) CHIN 110 Basic Chinese I (3) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. This course introduces students to the basics of M a n d a rin. This course is designed to maximize the acquisition of oral fluency and comprehension. The course w i l l lay the foundation for further understanding and study in an immersion environment. raphy w i l l be introduced along with an introduction to visible and ultraviolet spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy and electrochemical methods o f analysis. CHIN 100 Beginning Chinese I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: C H I N 110 (4.2,0) (S) (3) CHIN 111 Basic Chinese II - For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. Introduction to Mandarin Chinese using the P i n y i n system of pronunciation in M a i n l a n d China. F o r complete beginners (spoken and written) in Chinese. This course starts with basic tones and pronunciation to prepare students to speak the language. It also teaches basic grammar and the writing o f about 150 Chinese characters. This course is a continuation of Chinese 110. CHIN 150 Spoken Mandarin I (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) This is a Mandarin conversational course for speakers of other Chinese dialects. Students should have a good command o f Chinese characters and grammar. T h i s CHIN 101 Beginning Chinese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) course is designed for students to gain fluency in spoken Mandarin Chinese, particularly in the areas o f C H I N 100 or permission of instructor. C H I N 101 takes students who have learned basic Mandarin phonetics and about 150 Chinese characters. This course stresses conversational skills and listening comprehension using situational dialogues. Students w i l l learn more grammatical structures and Chinese characters. They w i l l also learn how to use a Chinese dictionary as a tool for further study. aural comprehension and oral fluency. Not offered every year. CHIN 151 Spoken Mandarin II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0,) (Su) C H I N 150 or the equivalent or permis- sion o f instructor. students only. This conversational course continues with the development o f aural comprehension and oral fluency i n Mandarin for speakers o f other Chinese dialects. Contrasts between M a n d a r i n and other dialects w i l l be made. Perfection of Mandarin pronunciation o f " P i n y i n " w i l l be stressed. This course introduces A P M C P students to the basics o f Not offered every year. CHIN 102 (1.5) Introduction to Chinese I (2,0,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management program Cooperative Mandarin and develops basic communication skills through the study o f vocabulary, grammar, sentence structure and culture. Course 224 Descriptions CHIN 200 Intermediate Chinese I (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) Prerequisite: C H I N 101 or permission o f instructor. This course is for students who k n o w the basics o f Mandarin phonetics and grammar and approximately CMNS 110 Standard English Usage (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) A course i n grammar, spelling, punctuation, and diction. Students also gain experience in proofreading, correcting and revising short written assignments. 600 Chinese characters, or for those who have c o m pleted C H I N 100 and 101. It teaches more Chinese characters, focusing on reading and writing o f simple Chinese texts. Chinese literature is also introduced. Not offered every year. CHIN 201 Intermediate Chinese II (3) (4,1.75,0) (Su) Prerequisite: C H I N 200 or permission o f instructor. Continues the work o f C H I N 200. Offered in Summer 2000. CHIN 202 (1.5) Introduction to Chinese III (4,2,0) (F) CMNS 111 Administrative Writing (3) Intended for writers who work in corporate communications or administration, this course covers the basics o f memorandums, internal reports, evaluations, briefs, and proposals. Some attention to online communications, and strong emphasis on developing a clear writing style. CMNS 115 (3) Communications for Animation (3,0,1) (F) Students learn various communications skills necessary for success i n the animation industry. Content includes presentation, writing and research skills, and script writing for animation. For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. CMNS 120 (3) Effective Writing and Speech Prerequisite: Completion o f one year o f Chinese or instructor's permission. (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) (F) This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with functional Chinese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances i n C h i n a and other Mandarin-speaking countries and regions. A course emphasizing structure and style in spoken and written communication, with some review o f English basics as w e l l . B y writing and editing short essays, students develop a writing style both concise and precise. CHIN 203 (3) Introduction to Chinese IV CMNS 125 Communication Theory (4,2,0) (F,S) (1.5) (3,0,1) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program A survey o f principles influencing interpersonal c o m students only. munication as well as mass media: print, film, video, Prerequisite: C H I N 202 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f C H I N 202. CHIN 204 (3) Introduction to Chinese V (4,2,0) and audio. Exploration o f communication theory as it applies to digital media. CMNS 130 (3) (3.1,0) (F.S) Introductory Media Communications A n introduction to writing and speaking for M e d i a For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program Program students. students only. Prerequisite: C H I N 203 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f C H I N 203. CMNS 080 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) Career Program Communications Preparation for ESL Students A i m s at bridging the gap between E S L courses and Communications courses required by Career/Vocational programs. The course assignments include letters, memos, proposals and a resume. Emphasis throughout the course is on audience, style, tone and formats appropriate to business writing, with little focus on E n g l i s h mechanics. CMNS 136 (3) (4,0.0) (S) Introduction to Film & TV Scriptwriting in Canada A n application o f proven trends and strategies i n commercial scriptwriting with focus on the transfer o f the writer's concept into cinematic script. The goal is to apply techniques observed in screenings to the development of a Masterscene script intended for portfolio development. Marketing strategies in the Canadian f i l m , television and new media industries are also discussed. Course Descriptions 225 CMNS 137 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) Elements of Film and Television Scriptwriting CMNS 159 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Communications for the Legal Secretary A n examination o f successful Canadian trends and strategies in scriptwriting as demonstrated by accomplished cinematic artists. Focus is on understanding effective techniques required to transfer the writer's dramatic concept into a compelling cinematic script. Strong emphasis on E n g l i s h basics (grammar, spelling, CMNS 138 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) Workshop in Film and TV Scriptwriting for Canadian Markets Communications 165 is intended to foster writing and Prerequisite: C M N S 137 or the permission o f the instructor. A workshop in developing a Masterscene script. The focus is on applying concepts and observations from C M N S 137 in the development of a script for a personal portfolio. Marketing strategies are discussed. CMNS 145 (3) Writing for the Worldwide Web (3,0,1) (F,S) Writing, editing and revising information for the computer medium, especially hypertext for W e b sites. Attention to concise style, logical organization and the limitations of the computer screen. CMNS 146 (1.5) Introduction to Web Writing (4,0,0) (F.S) Basic principles o f writing and editing text to enhance its readability and effectiveness in the W e b environment. Students review W e b sites and write an article for W e b publication. CMNS 152 Report Writing (3) (3,0.1) (F.S) Writing for the workplace: letters, memorandums, and punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. CMNS 165 Technical Presentations (3) , (3,0,1) (F) presentation skills for work in the new media industries. CMNS 170 (3) Public Speaking Presentation Skills (4,0,0) (F) The dynamics o f organizing material, overcoming shyness and developing poise as a speaker in a variety o f contexts. Attention to research, voice training, nonverbal communication, and strategies for timing presentations. This course uses the television laboratory whenever possible, enabling students to see themselves on camera, as well as to benefit from feedback from others, as they refine their ability to project, to organize their thoughts, and to address audience needs. CMNS 179 Legal Communications (3) (4,0,0) (S) Communications skills involving listening, speaking and writing are requirements for a successful career in the legal field. This course helps students become confident and capable writers and communicators through exercises such as letter writing, short reports, transcription and editing of notes from speech, quizzes, and impromptu presentations. E a c h student prepares a resume package for practicum applications, and practices interviewing and being interviewed. reports. Review o f E n g l i s h basics in the context o f business writing. CMNS 153 (3) Communications and the Arts (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: C M N S 120 or proven English skills. The use o f language in combination with graphic and other arts. Attention to job-search strategies suitable for artists. A spoken presentation may be required. CMNS 154 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Communications in Outdoor Recreation and Tourism W r i t i n g related to Outdoor Recreation and Tourism Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, articles, briefs and proposals. Course 226 Descriptions CMNS 190 (3) Magazine Article Writing (3,0,1) (F.S) Researching and writing articles for publication in news media and magazines. A n a l y s i s o f magazine readership, techniques o f researching and interviewing, the current market for articles and development o f an effective prose style. Students write three articles in suitable format and submit them for publication in established print or electronic periodicals. CMNS 220 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S.Su) Advanced Business Writing and Editing Prerequisite: Successful completion o f E N G 100, or permission o f the instructor. Researching, organizing, writing and editing extensive business documents: reports, proposals, memorandums, press releases. Particular attention to clear style and logical organization. CMNS 250 (3) Introduction to Technical Writing (4,0,0) (S) Technical writing for science, engineering and the professions. Emphasis on definitions, process analysis, writing instructions, resume preparation, and an extended formal report. The course includes examination o f technical reports and study of the role of technical writing in corporate and scientific settings. CMNS 280 (3) Marketing Commercial Fiction (3,0,1) (F.S) Preparing short stories and novels i n commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion o f the market for such fiction in Canada and the U . S . Students submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) in marketable form. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. CMPT 154 (3) Object Oriented Programming II (4,0,0) (Su) Prerequisite: C M P T 153 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. Continuation of object-oriented programming and design using C + +. CMPT 155 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Quantitative Methods for Managers Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full-time program or permission o f the instructor. A survey o f the basic quantitative tools used to aid decision making. Financial and statistical concepts, methods and applications w i l l be examined. CMPT 180 (3) Microcomputer Applications I (4,0,0) (S) Provides an orientation to microcomputers in business; including word processing, communicating with CMNS 354 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Advanced Communications for Tourism Management Prerequisite: C M N S 154 or equivalent, plus computer literacy and Internet access. Intended for students registered in the Open University Tourism Management degree program, C M N S 354 is aimed at developing advanced skills in written and verbal communications, including technical writing, presentation skills, and information technology applications. operating systems and spreadsheets. CMPT 182 (3) Introduction to Systems (4,0,0) (S) Provides a basic understanding of systems concepts and development o f specific skills: form design, coding, flow charting, life-cycle phases and related written communication. CMPT 184 Visual Basic (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: B C O P 131 or C M P T 152 with a m i n i - CMNS 356 (3) Advanced Media Communications (3,0,1) (S) mum " C " grade or permission of the instructor. Application o f object oriented visual development A continuation o f C M N S 130 with emphasis on interviewing techniques in applied situations. The course also deals with public speaking and group leadership techniques. For M e d i a Program Students. techniques to produce W i n d o w s applications. A l s o a foundation o f the W i n d o w s programming tools. CMPT 191 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Accounting for Managers I CMPT 152 (3) Structured Programming (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to programming logic and program design. This course concentrates on planning, designing and charting programs for business related problems. The main part of the course is theory based with some hands-on practical work i n the latter weeks using a modern programming language. CMPT 153 (1.5) Object Oriented Programming I Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) C M P T 152 or B C O P 131 with a m i n i - mum " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to object oriented programming using V i s u a l Basic in the W i n d o w s environment. Develops an understanding o f the elements o f the accounting cycle. Introduces basic accounting concepts and procedures as a basis for financial decisions. Emphasis w i l l be placed on accounting information, systems and control. CMPT 222 (3) Microcomputer Applications II (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: C M P T 180 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. Provides a basic understanding o f microcomputer concepts, hardware and software selection criteria, and system and application software. Provides hands-on experience with W i n d o w s , spreadsheets, presentation graphics and data base management. Course Descriptions 227 CMPT 223 (3) Microcomputer Applications III Prerequisite: (4.0,0) (Su) C M P T 222 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or C O M M 291 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Applications of Statistics in Business Prerequisite: C - or better i n C O M M 290 permission of the instructor. The methods and applications o f statistics i n business; Students w i l l explore advanced database concepts, continuous random variables; sampling; estimation o f including automation techniques, using popular W i n - parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. dows-based D B M S software. The following topics are included i n the course: the planning, creation and maintenance of databases, the development of information retrieval techniques, the design and customization of forms, the creation and use o f macros and modules in an automated system. CMPT 224 (3) Microcomputer Applications IV Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F,Su) C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission of the instructor. This course covers the application o f graphics and desktop publishing development techniques i n the production of presentations in a Windows and web pages C O M M 292 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Principles of Organizational Behaviour Behaviour i n organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships with others, their performance in groups and their effectiveness at work. COMM 293 Financial Accounting (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the construction and interpretation of financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement o f retained earnings and the statement o f change in financial position. environment. A solid foundation in computer hardware and trouble shooting techniques is also included. CMPT 230 Operating Systems Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) C O M M 294 Managerial Accounting Prerequisite: (4) (6,0,0) (S) " C - " or better i n C O M M 293 Introduction to the development and use o f account- C M P T 184 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade ing, information for management planning and control and either B C O P 214 or C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m and the development o f cost information for financial ' C grade. reports. Comprehensive knowledge o f the widely used operating systems: U N I X , M S - D O S and W i n d o w s - N T . Some emphasis on fde structures and recovery from hardware/software errors as w e l l as the operating system's Job Control Language and web server installation. CMPT 276 (1.5) Projects in Industry — Practicum (4,0,0) (F) COMM 297 (3) Capital Markets and Institutions Introduction to the economic environment in which businesses operate including the role o f the Bank o f Canada. Analysis o f domestic and international money markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. W o r k experience with host companies for the purpose of applying knowledge to complete an industry-oriented project. CMPT 289 (3) Systems Implementation Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) A project based course where students implement an on-line computer system applying analysis and design concepts from the System Development L i f e C y c l e . COMM 290 (3) Quantitative Methods for Business (4,0,0)(F) A study o f standard quantitative methods used in business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study o f computer software packages is included. 228 COMM 392 Labour Relations (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to union-management relations w h i c h includes the study of trade union history and structure, the collective bargaining process and labour legislation. B C O P 231 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. Course (4.0.0) (S) Descriptions COMM 396 (4) Introduction to Marketing (6,0,0) (S) This course provides an introduction to all facets o f marketing including an analysis o f upcontrollable variables, and an investigation o f the marketing m i x , consumer behaviour and segmentation. COMP 101 (3) (3.0,1) (F.S.Su) Computers and their Applications COMP 127 (3) Principles of Computer Science Prerequisite: Principles o f M a t h 11 with at least a " B " grade, or Applications of M a t h 12 with at least a " C - " grade, or at least a " C - " grade in M a t h 095 or Math 096, or permission of the instructor. Prerequisite: C O M P 120 with at least a " C - " grade. Fundamental computing concepts w i l l be studied through the features o f a functional programming language. T o p i c s include recursion, complexity, abstraction, list processing, models of computation, object-oriented programming and design, programming paradigms, programming language evaluation and computation, and logic programming. N o t e : Although no formal Computing Science prerequisite is listed, students are expected to have reasonable keyboarding skills and to have some familiarity with the use of computers running Microsoft Windows. A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer hardware and software, operating systems, applications software and programming, and a study of some o f the social and ethical implications o f the increasing use o f computers. Students w i l l gain experience with a microcomputer operating system, various software packages including word processor and spreadsheet, and an interpreted programming language environment. Students w i l l be introduced to the Internet, web searching techniques and web page development. The course also includes an introduction to problem solving, algorithm design and computer programming. This course serves as a good science option for students in Arts or Commerce. COMP 120 (3) (4,0.1.3) (F.S.Su) Introduction to Computer Science Prerequisite: Principles o f M a t h 12 with at least a " B " or M A T H 105 with at least a " C - " . Keyboarding skills and familiarity with W i n d o w s environment required. A n introduction to the development o f algorithms, computer program design, program implementation and testing. The course also exposes students to the discipline o f computer science. Topics include computer hardware and software, programming languages, representation and manipulation o f data, numerical analysis, programming paradigms, and theory o f computation. COMP 125 (3) (4.0,1.3) (F.S) Fundamentals of Computer Science Prerequisite: C O M P 120 with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f software development, maintenance and documentation. Data abstraction and object-oriented programming are emphasized. Introduction to data structures, sorting and searching algorithms. The course further exposes students to the discipline of computer science. Topics include software engineering, modelling and simulation, programming paradigms, and theory of computation. COMP 210 (3) Data Structures and Abstraction (4,0,1.3) (S) (4,0,1.3) (F) Prerequisite: C O M P 125 with at least a " C - " grade or C O M P 127 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of frequently used data structures and algorithms for manipulating them. This course emphasizes abstract data types and generic abstraction in objectoriented programming. Topics include lists, stacks, queues, sets, tables, trees and graphs, recursion, searching, sorting and analysis o f algorithms. COMP 211 (3) (4,0,1.3) (F) Computer Design and Architecture I Prerequisite: C O M P 120 or C O M P 127 with at least a " C - " grade and M A T H 116 with at least a " C - " grade and M A T H 124 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to some fundamental concepts of computer design and architecture: data representation and coding, combinational and sequential digital logic, microprocessor operation, memory organizations and addressing schemes, instruction sets, assembly language, and operating system interfaces. COMP 212 (3) (4,0,1.3) (S) Computer Design and Architecture II Prerequisite: C O M P 211 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of the architecture and organization o f current microprocessor-based computers, relating the instruction set architecture at the programmer's level o f abstraction to the digital logic implementation at the hardware designer's level o f abstraction. COMP 213 (4) (4,0,1.3) (S) Introduction to Software Engineering Prerequisite: C O M P 210 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to the concepts and practice of software engineering: systems analysis, user interface design, debugging, profiling, and testing methods, operating system interface, support tools and scripting languages, project management, user and system documentation. V Course Descriptions 229 CRIM 101 (3) Introduction to Criminology (4,0,0) (F,S) CSSF 105 (3) College Reading and Study Skills (4,0,0) (F.S) This course is intended to introduce students to the analysis of the relationship between crime and society. The core concept is that "crime" is embedded in social structure and process and therefore must be understood in relation to rather than apart from " n o r m a l " social activity. A variety o f classical and contemporary perspectives on the definition, causes and consequences of crime w i l l be explored and student analysis o f contemporary issues involving crime i n Canadian society w i l l be encouraged. Students learn and adopt methods and attitudes that promote success i n college. T h i s course includes: memory techniques, time management, goal setting, presentation skills, critical thinking, test taking and note taking. The reading component addresses problems college students have with textbook comprehension, vocabulary, critical reading and retaining information from texts. CSS. 092 (1.5) (4,0,0) Success Strategies for the College Classroom CSSF110 Reading Dynamics Students registered i n this course w i l l be new students to Capilano College who are newcomers to Canada and who have English language skills at the College preparatory level. Through both personal development and study skills, this course w i l l help students to build toward success in their studies at Capilano College. Participants learn and practice flexible and efficient reading skills at the college level. Strategies for increasing speed, improving vocabulary, reading comprehension, memory and critical reading are also included. CSS. 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Academic and Personal Success Strategies This course is co-taught by a learning specialist and a counsellor. Topics include: time management, memory techniques, stress management, reading a textbook with improved retention, test taking tips, note taking strategies, goal setting, communication skills, using College resources, and career exploration. Students may not enrol in CSSF 100 and CSSF 105 concurrently. (3) DIGI311 (6) 3D Character Animation I (4,0,0) (F,S) (6,4,0) (F) Students w i l l learn basic animation principles and how to apply them to simple 3 D models. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on developing good timing and animation techniques including stretch and squash, arcs, weight, anticipation / action / reaction, overlapping and secondary action. Students w i l l complete short animation exercises demonstrating these principles. Students may not enrol in CSS. 100 and CSSF 105 (4.5) (6.0,0) (F) concurrently. DIGI312 3D Design I CSSF 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) First Nations Strategies for Student Success The focus o f this course is on the design and construc- This course is designed to prepare students to make the transition into college level programs. Topics include: time management, memory techniques, stress management, presentation skills, critical thinking, reading a textbook with increased retention, test taking tips, note taking strategies, goal setting and using College resources. Students w i l l learn the fundamental techniques o f 3 D Students may not enrol in CSS. 100 and CSSF 105 concurrently. tion o f three dimensional environments and characters. modeling, texturing and lighting. DIGI313 Drawing & Design I (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l help develop students' visualization, drawing and design skills related to animation production. Students w i l l create a variety o f w o r k including life drawings, character, prop and layout designs. DIGI314 Animation Principles (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l introduce the principles and techniques of classical animation. Students w i l l explore the role of traditional animation techniques and their importance i n computer generated films. Course 230 Descriptions DIGI315 Animation Production I (3) (2,4,0) (F) The changing role o f computers in animation production w i l l be examined. Students w i l l learn the fundamentals o f computer operating systems and explore the use o f technology in the development of animated productions. DIGI321 (6) 3D Character Animation II (6,4,0) (S) Students w i l l focus on the creation o f believable character movement through acting, emotion and story. Sound and L i p Sync w i l l be introduced to further develop students' animation techniques. A finished demo reel w i l l be produced showcasing each student's character animation potential. DIGI 322 3D Design II (4.5) (6,0,0) (S) Advanced problem solving, modeling, texturing and lighting w i l l build on the student's ability to design and create professional quality 3 D characters and scenes. Students w i l l create a design package o f 3 D characters, props and layouts. ECON 100 (3) Introduction to Economics This course traces the development of, and conflicting views on, the nature o f the capitalist economic system. It focuses on the historical development of capitalist society and the divergent interpretations o f the operation o f capitalism as found in the writings o f such economists as A d a m Smith, D a v i d Ricardo, K a r l M a r x , J . M . Keynes and M i l t o n Friedman. It deals with contemporary issues and such basic concepts as supply and demand. ECON 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S, Su) Principles of Microeconomic Theory This course presents a study o f the theoretical constructs of consumer behaviour and the operation o f business firms i n the market economy under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly and monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis o f the firm's equilibrium condition and the determinants of income distribution. ECON 112 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Principles of Macroeconomic Theory Prerequisite: DIGI 323 Drawing & Design II (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) Continued development o f good drawing and design skills is fundamental to becoming a good animation designer. These classes w i l l stress the creation o f original character, prop and layout designs. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on character posing and creating a professional drawing portfolio. DIGI 324 Animation Principles II (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) Students w i l l continue to work on the creation o f traditional and computer animation using a variety of animation principles. A n emphasis w i l l be placed on acting and character animation. DIGI 325 Animation Production II (3) (2,4,0) (S) Final production o f a short animated film and a demotape o f animation w i l l demonstrate the student's creative vision and artistic abilities. (4.0,0) (F,S) E C O N 111 This course presents the formal Keynesian theory of income determination and its contemporary critiques. Included is the study o f the possible causes and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance o f the international economy. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined in detail. ECON 207 Managerial Economics Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) E C O N 111 and 112. This course is an application o f microeconomics theory to a variety o f management and planning decisions such as output maximization and cost minimization given the constraints faced by firms. ECON 210 Money and Banking Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F) E C O N 111 and 112. This course is designed to facilitate an understanding of financial markets and financial institutions both in Canada and i n other major industrial countries. The course w i l l examine current issues in the regulation of financial institutions and analyze the factors behind the determination of exchange and interest rates. Course Descriptions 231 ECON 211 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis ECON 291 Public Policy II Prerequisite: Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, M A T H 108 or 116/ (3) (4,0,0) (F) E C O N 111 and 112. 117. The course involves an examination o f current govern- This course presents an in-depth look at such topics as ment macroeconomic policies, including fiscal and consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibr i u m o f the firm under different market structures, factor markets, and economic welfare. Not transferable to S F U . (Students registered in the Commerce program w i l l be given priority.) ECON 212 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 116/117. The course presents an in-depth look at such topics as income and employment theory, monetary theory, the open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. N o t transferable to S F U . monetary policies, debt management policies, international finance and exchange rate management, federal provincial relations, etc. EDUC 155 (4.5) Childhood Development (6,0,0) (F) Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical, cognitive, language, and social-emotional growth and development. A n introductory study o f theories, principles o f development, and child study techniques is included. EDUC 166 Child Development I (2.25) (3,0) (F) A n introductory study o f theories and principles o f ECON 250 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era development focusing on conception through 24 Prerequisite: EDUC 167 Child Development II E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the instructor. This course provides a broad sweep o f economic history from the O l d Stone A g e to the Industrial Revolution. The economics o f the prehistoric era, the R i v e r Civilizations, Classical Antiquity and Europe in the M i d d l e Ages are studied, while emphasis is placed on the transition from feudalism in Europe to early forms of capitalism. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 250 and the former 120.) ECON 252 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Economic History of the Industrial Era Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the months. (2.25) (3,0) (S) Theories, principles o f development and child study techniques focusing on physical, cognitive, language and social-emotional growth and development from 24 through 60 months. EDUC 170 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A n introductory course in which students focus on the development o f self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students w i l l learn basic c o m m u n i cation concepts and practice skills w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. instructor. tion and subsequent economic growth in the context o f EDUC 171 (1.5) Caring and Learning Environments This course provides a study o f the Industrial Revolu- (2,0,0) (F) several countries, including Canada. This course introduces the student to various programs Contrast is made between the paths o f development o f for young children. The role o f the Early C h i l d h o o d today's industrial economies and those nations now Educator, learning environments and the value o f play attempting to industrialize. (Students cannot receive are examined. credit for both E C O N 252 and the former E C O N 121.) ECON 290 Public Policy I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) E C O N 111 and 112. The course involves an examination o f current government microeconomic policies, including resource management, utility regulation and pricing, international trade, income distribution, taxation, education and health care. Course 232 Descriptions EDUC 172 (1.5) Guiding Young Children I (2,0,0) (F,S) This course develops a theoretical framework o f guidance principles and techniques which support children's optimal development. EDUC 173 (1.5) Curriculum Development I (2.4,0) (F.S) Based on the philosophy that play provides the foundation for children's growth and development, this experiential workshop course focuses on learning environments, curriculum planning and teaching strategies. EDUC 175 (1.5) Observing and Recording (2,0,0) (F) A course which develops skill in objectively observing and recording the behaviour of young children. W e e k l y supervised observations form the major part of the course. Different kinds of observational techniques are explored. The uses o f teacher observations are examined. EDUC 176 Applied Theory • (3) Practicum I (2,0,6) (F) EDUC 256 (1.5) Children in Inclusive Settings (2,0,0) (S,Su) This course reviews the major theories of human development and changes that occur during middle childhood in the areas o f physical, social-emotional and cognitive development. EDUC 262 Special Education (2) (3,0.0) (F) Students w i l l develop an awareness o f the early childhood educator's role and responsibility i n preparing a safe and healthy environment that meets the needs o f children requiring extra support. The course w i l l examine the history and current perspectives on inclusion and family centred approaches. EDUC 270 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) Introduction to Working with Families This course is designed to develop a beginning under- This introductory practicum is arranged by the College. It provides the student with opportunities to observe young children and, at a beginning level, to plan, implement and evaluate activities under the supervision of a qualified sponsor teacher. W e e k l y seminar discussions help students integrate theory and practice. standing o f an effective relationship between the Early C h i l d h o o d Educator and the c h i l d ' s family. C o m m u nity resources w i l l be researched. EDUC 271 (1.5) (2,0,0) (Su) Introduction to Centre Organization The student w i l l develop skill i n observing, recording and documenting the behaviour o f young children. Based on observations, the student w i l l begin to interpret behaviours and develop program strategies while participating in this introductory practicum. A n introductory look at some o f the administrative aspects of operating a centre for young children. This course assumes a knowledge of curriculum and daily program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children; e.g., handling finances, hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. Provincial legislation regulating child care is examined. Steps to opening a centre w i l l also be discussed. EDUC 220 (1.5) Health, Safety and Nutrition EDUC 272 (1.5) Guiding Young Children II EDUC 177 (4.5) Observing and Recording (6,0,0,) (Su) (Part-time programs only) (2,0,0) (F.S) Through the use of lecture, videos and assignments, the student w i l l be able to recognize the c o m m o n signs and symptoms of childhood illness and plan health care appropriate to a centre setting, recognizing situations requiring emergency care; understand the role o f healthy eating as it relates to normal child development within the context o f the preschooler's daily life and environment; and follow valid nutrition guidelines for their own optimum health. EDUC 254 (3) Theoretical Perspectives (4,0,0) (S) (2,0,0) (F.S) This course w i l l extend the student's repertoire o f guidance/teaching techniques. The focus is on responding to the needs of the individual child, on promoting a positive self concept and on fostering prosocial behaviour. EDUC 273 (1.5) Curriculum Development II (2,4,0) (F.S) The student w i l l acquire further knowledge, experience and s k i l l in planning, implementing and evaluating learning environments for groups of children. This course provides an introduction to the history and philosophy of E C C E . Major contemporary issues are examined. International childcare is discussed. Course Descriptions 233 EDUC 276 (4) Applied Theory — Practicum II EDUC 359 (1.5) Special Needs Practicum This is a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. W o r k i n g with a qualified Early Childhood Educator students extend their competencies in program planning and evaluation. W e e k l y seminar discussions focus on integrating theory and practice. This practicum focuses on w o r k i n g with parents and EDUC 277 (4) Applied Theory — Practicum III A n intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to meet the demands o f an academic college program. Curriculum w i l l evolve from the assessed needs o f the students. This course is not transferable to the universities. A student w i l l receive credit or no credit (not a letter grade) for the course. Certain sections of E N G L 010 are designed for the needs o f students o f E n g l i s h as a Second Language. This is, generally, a five-week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. In this practicum, students integrate and consolidate knowledge and skills gained throughout the program. The student w i l l be involved in all aspects of providing quality care and education for young children. EDUC 351 (2) Family, School and Community (3,0,0) (F) The teacher/family/community partnership w i l l be examined with the focus being on families with infants, toddlers and children who need extra support. EDUC 354 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Program Planning for Special Needs This course w i l l examine strategies for collaborating with parents, adapting programs, implementing individual intervention goals and helping children to communicate with one another. EDUC 356 (1.5) Infant and Toddler Practicum the student learns and practises how to protect, support and enrich the lives o f young children. (F.S) This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation of a quality program. These broader aspects of group care are central to the provision o f quality care for infants and toddlers. EDUC 358 (1.5) Special Needs Practicum (F.S) Under the guidance o f a qualified Special Needs Early Childhood Educator the student practises how to program activities which include children who need extra support. Course 234 Descriptions the evaluation o f a quality program. Students refine their skills o f inclusive programming for groups o f children. ENGL 010 Language Skills ENGL 100 Composition Prerequisite: Test. (3) (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) See information on English Diagnostic A course in the fundamentals of good writing, giving students intensive practice i n writing for a variety o f purposes, with emphasis on the essay form. Progressively increasing emphasis is given to effective organization and development of material. Research techniques and documentation are taught. Problems i n mechanics o f writing are dealt with individually, i n group discussion and by revision of essays. Certain sections o f E N G L 100 are designed for the needs o f students o f English as a second language. (F.S) Through work experience i n an infant/toddler centre EDUC 357 (1.5) Infant and Toddler Practicum (F.S) ENGL 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Studies in Contemporary Literature A study of selected and representative 20th century literature, including poetry, fiction, and drama. W o r k s studied w i l l be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit and may, i n certain sections, also reflect a particular theme o f significance in the contemporary world. (When material is selected for theme, the issue under consideration w i l l be announced during the registration period.) The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses i n w e l l developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 104 Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) A study o f selected 20th century short stories and novels of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 105 Poetry (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. (3) (y,o) (F.s) A study o f selected and representative plays primarily of the 20th century. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 190 Creative Writing (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) A n intensive workshop course designed to help students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship in poetry, fiction, and drama. Students must have good compositional skills and are required to write extensively in their chosen genre (approximately 10 hours per week). They w i l l also develop an awareness, through written practice, o f at least one o f the other genres. Students are required to submit their writing regularly for group discussion. Students w i l l be encouraged to develop their work to the point where it would become acceptable for publication. ENGL 191 Creative Writing A continuation of E N G L 190. (3) (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f texts in all major genres by representative authors, from the medieval period to the middle 17th century. This course w i l l provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference, and the opportunity to study selected major works i n detail. ENGL 201 (3) English Literature Since 1660 Prerequisite: A study o f selected major and significant minor 20th century poets whose poetry is o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. ENGL 106 Drama ENGL 200 (3) English Literature to 1660 (4,0,0) (S) A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course similar to E N G L 200, but covering the later period since 1660. ENGL 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Canadian Literature — Beginnings to Modernism Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f texts in all major genres from the origins o f Canadian literature into the modernist era. This course w i l l investigate various motifs and forms o f writing which have evolved through early Canadian literature and which continue in contemporary work. ENGL 203 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Canadian Literature — Modernism and Beyond Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. The continuation o f E N G L 202, becoming more intensive in the investigation of individual, major, contemporary authors o f poetry, novels and plays i n Canada . This course w i l l study the emergence o f significant contemporary motifs and approaches to writing. ENGL 205 (3) Modern American Literature (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A course which explores the works o f major representative authors from the late 19th century to the present day. Students w i l l closely examine selected texts as literary achievements and set them within the history of American literature and the framework o f American culture. Course Descriptions 235 ENGL 208 (3) Studies in Fiction (The Novel) Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study of the novel from various perspectives which consider the evolution and diversity of the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section. The aims o f the course are to give the student an awareness o f the cultural context in which the novel came into being and became popular, and to study selected texts closely. ENGL 209 Studies in Poetry (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f individual poets or schools o f poetry selected by the instructor and drawn from any era between Chaucer's time and the present. Prosody, poetic forms, and critical approaches w i l l be studied, as well as the historical and cultural contexts of the poems and o f poetic movements. The aims of the course are to increase the student's knowledge o f the craft of poetry and to study selected texts closely. ENGL 210 Studies in Drama (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) ENGL 212 (3) Traditions in Western Literature (4,0.0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the literary traditions i n which Western literature has developed. The course studies influential works o f literature (often in translation) from various periods and countries with reference to mythology, religion, and history. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the way in w h i c h these works have helped to form Western literary convention and a Western construction o f history. The aim of the course is to familiarize the student with these traditions so the student may understand how Western literature has evolved, and to present to the student an objective history o f literary convention against which to read literature. ENGL 213 (3) Readings in World Literature Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A course i n world literature beyond the Western tradition. The specific focus w i l l be announced at the time o f registration. ENGL 290 (3) Creative Writing — Poetry (4.0.0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. Prerequisites: E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written permission. A study o f dramatic literature from various perspectives: the examination o f dramatic types from various periods with reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, of sub-genres o f drama, of techniques in dramatic literature and performance, and of the relationship of literary text to performance. Major plays from various periods and national theatres w i l l be considered. The aim o f the course is to increase the student's knowledge o f drama as an art form which has evolved out o f literary and cultural history and out o f performance. A n intensive workshop i n the writing of poetry, concentrating on furthering the student's knowledge o f current poetic forms while at the same time increasing awareness o f her or his o w n voice, her or his individual ground for writing, and the development o f her or his o w n poetic. ENGL 211 Studies in Short Fiction ENGL 291 (3) Creative Writing — Fiction (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f contemporary work, both poems and statements that poets have made about their o w n poetics. Students w i l l have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: A n y combination of two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. Prerequisites: A study of the development of the short story and novella form, through an exploration o f the cultural and literary history in which the genre developed and through a detailed analysis o f representative texts. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries w i l l be studied. The aim of the course is to give the student an understanding o f the development o f the genre in context and o f writers o f major significance to the genre. A n intensive workshop i n the writing o f fiction. The course w i l l concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge of the state of current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness o f voice, rhythm, dialogue, diction, character, and point-ofview. Course 236 Descriptions E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written permission. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f works o f contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. They w i l l have the opportunity o f trying out these techniques i n both short and extended forms o f fiction. ENSC 500 Applied Ecology (4.5) (F) Approaches to applying ecological concepts to the critical analysis o f a variety of environmental issues and problems are examined through discussions, lectures, small group work, written assignments andfield/laboratory investigations. Teams o f students undertake field work in a nearby watershed to completean ecological profile o f the study area. A n i n depth assignment allows each student to focus on an environmental topic of personal interest. ENSC 501 (4.5) Environmental Toxicology and Waste Management (S) A n applied examination of the effects o f toxic substances on l i v i n g organisms with particular focus on the aquatic environment. Tools used to measure adverse effects and to predict harm to organisms are examined. Measurement, monitoring and remediation techniques for environmental contaminants in air and soil are also examined. The course includes laboratory, field and classroom components. ENSC 502 (3) Applied Environmental Ethics (F) A n examination of environmental ethics, environmental thought and environmental advocacy. Readings, class discussions and individual written assignments w i l l encourage students to explore the moral relationship o f humans to other life forms, nature, ecosystems and future generations. The course w i l l assist students in clarifying their personal ethical positions, identifying ethical issues i n their professional practice, and understanding the history and role o f environmental advocacy in the workplace. ENSC 503 Environmental Law (3) (F) This course deals with the law and legal issues associated with the environment. Aspects o f environmental law including jurisdictional issues, courts and the legal system, environmental regulation, environmental litigation and the evolving role o f First Nations are introduced. Skills necessary for legal research, critical analysis, written and verbal presentations and team work are emphasized and applied through student presentations on selected topics. Students w i l l be strongly encouraged to conduct their research and develop their presentations in innovative and imaginative ways. ENSC 504 (3) Environmental Planning and Project Management (S) A n introduction to basic management skills and approaches w h i c h have practical value in environmental planning and decision-making. Critical thinking, risk management, project planning, proposal preparation, budget management and community involvement in environmental planning w i l l be discussed. ENSC 505 (3) Environmental Impact Assessment (S) A n examination of the environmental impact assessment ( E I A ) process as a tool in environmental decision making. This course w i l l review current Canadian federal and provincial procedural requirements as w e l l as local and international applications. Representative field methods, the relationship between E I A and other regulatory processes, integration o f E I A and social issues, and the role o f public involvement w i l l also be discussed. Case studies and a field trip w i l l be used as focal points for discussion. ENSC 506 (3) Ecosystem Sustainability (S) Introduction to advanced tools for assessing complex ecosystem challenges. Students w i l l use applied systems analysis, simulation modelling, technical workshops, and other tools for tackling issues related to ecosystem sustainability. W o r k i n g as an integrated team, the class w i l l devise recommendations for improving sustainability i n a local watershed; results w i l l be presented in a variety of formats, including a public forum for local decision-makers and watershed residents. ENSC 507 (3) (F) Computer Applications in Environmental Science A n introduction to the use o f computers for network communication, simulation modelling and geographically-based information storage in environmental science. Students w i l l develop skills i n the use o f spreadsheets for recording and manipulating data, prepare a web page, work with simple simulation models, and learn the basics of geographic information systems (GIS) with applications to environmental information using P A M A P G I S in the computer lab. Course Descriptions 237 ENSC 508 (3) (F) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science I This seminar series is designed to provide a forum for discussion between faculty, students and invited guests. Topics w i l l be chosen on the basis o f student interest, current environmental issues and the availability o f guest speakers. Students w i l l be exposed to a wide range of current environmental topics and associated career opportunities. Skills directed towards identifying, communicating with and organizing presentations by key individuals involved i n environmental issues from a variety o f perspectives w i l l be emphasized. ENSC 509 (3) (S) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science II A continuation of E N S C 508. ENSC 510 Field Studies (4.5) (Su) Prerequisites: Successful completion o f E N S C 500 - E N S C 509. Practical experience in project development, data collection and analysis, and report preparation. W o r k ing at a site in the Vancouver area, small teams o f students prepare technical proposals to address specific environmental problems, undertake data collection and analysis i n the field and laboratory, and complete formal reports documenting their work and results. Study findings are also presented at a public forum. (Su) ENSC 511 Practicum (4.5) Prerequisites: Successful completion o f E N S C 500 - E N S C 509. A n opportunity to apply classroom theory through work experience. This is an in-depth assignment involving work placement or directed studies with a strong environmental focus in the private, public or non-profit sectors. Students work with the practicum coordinator throughout the year to identify potential practicum opportunities for the summer term. Students sponsored by a specific sector or employer may be able to fulfil this requirement under supervision in their normal place of employment. ENSJ 105, 155,205, 255, (1) 305, 355, 405, 455 Jazz Choir (by audition only) (3,0,*) (F,S) Rehearsal and performance in one o f Capilano C o l lege's Jazz Choirs. The intent of the class is to build group singing abilities i n such areas as phrasing, blending and intonation. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. Course 238 Descriptions ENSJ 120, 170 (1) Guitar/Bass Ensemble I, II (3,0,0) (F.S) Performance in guitar/bass ensemble for the development o f sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis w i l l be on single-note reading i n all areas o f the neck. Credit from this course is not applicable to the Degree progam. ENSJ 135, 185, 235, 285, (1) (3,0,*) (F,S) 335, 385, 435, 485 Jazz Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by audition only) Participation in the Capilano College large Jazz Ensemble for development o f phrasing and sight reading skills. *Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENSJ 136, 186,236, 286, (1) (2,0,*) (F,S) 336, 386, 436, 486 Instrumental Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by audition only) Students rehearse i n small "like instrument" ensembles under an instructor's supervision in preparation for a number o f performances. *Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENSJ 140, 190, 240, 290, (1) (4,0,*) (F.S) 340, 390, 440, 490 Percussion Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII A n ensemble comprised exclusively o f percussion instruments o f both definite and indefinite pitch. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. *Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENSJ 220, 270, 320, 370 (1) Guitar/Bass Ensemble III, IV, V, VI Prerequisite: (3,0,0) (F.S) E N S J 170 or audition A performance ensemble comprised primarily o f bassists and guitarists. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. ENSJ 306, 356, 406, 456 (1) (2,0,0) (F.S) Jazz Vocal Ensemble (by audition only) This course includes performance of various styles o f a cappella and accompanied vocal ensemble repertoire with an emphasis on j a z z literature and small group performance, i.e. one singer per part. ENSM 100 Choir Ensemble I (1) (4,0,0) (F) ideas, using the dictionary, using context clues, and understanding and stating pronoun referents. A n exploration o f choral music from the Renaissance to the present. Emphasis w i l l be placed on ensemble, tuning, tone quality, musical phrasing, balance, diction and professional presentation. A varied concert program w i l l be learned and several performances w i l l be given each semester. A n audition is required. This course prepares students with the grammar and writing skills required for higher level courses such as E S L . 049. ENSM 110 Orchestra I ESL. 041 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Speaking and Listening (1) (4,0,0) (F) ESL. 039 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Intermediate Writing and Grammar Rehearsal and performance o f concert repertoire. Prospective students must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an audition. Persons winning a position through audition w i l l be allowed to register. This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, impromptu speeches, oral reports, relaxed conversational forms, pronunciation, and listening practice. ENSM 150 Choir Ensemble II ESL. 048 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Reading and Vocabulary (1) (4.0,0) (S) A continuation o f E N S M 100. ENSM 160 Orchestra II (1) (4,0.0) (S) This course is designed to improve students' reading comprehension and vocabulary in preparation for the Advanced L e v e l . Course topics include identifying main ideas and details, vocabulary development, word families and context clues. (1) (4,0,0) (F) ESL. 049 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Writing and Grammar A continuation o f E N S M 110. ENSM 200 Choir Ensemble III This course helps students develop the grammar and A continuation o f E N S M 150. writing skills required for the Advanced L e v e l . Stress is ENSM 210 Orchestra III (1) (4,0.0) (F) assignments. A continuation o f E N S M 160. ENSM 250 Choir Ensemble IV (1) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation o f E N S M 200. ENSM 260 Orchestra IV on sentence structure, grammar, and short writing (1) (4,0.0) (S) A continuation of E N S M 210. ESL. 031 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) Lower Intermediate Speaking and Listening This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper Intermediate L e v e l . Course topics include idioms, formal/informal English, oral reports, listening practice, vocabulary and pronunciation. ESL. 038 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Intermediate Reading and Vocabulary The focus o f this course is on the development o f basic reading, comprehension and vocabulary skills while learning s k i m m i n g and scanning, identifying main ESL. 051 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) Lower Advanced Speaking and Listening This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for entry into the Upper Advanced L e v e l . The focus is on idioms, relaxed speech structures, listening to lectures and note taking, oral presentations, rhythm, stress and intonation. ESL. 054 (3) Intermediate Pronunciation (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) In this course students w i l l learn to discover, recognize and use English word stress, sentence stress, intonation patterns, and high frequency vowels and consonants. ESL. 058 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Reading and Vocabulary This course introduces students to reading skills and vocabulary development at the Advanced L e v e l . Stress w i l l be placed on improving comprehension, increasing reading speed, using context clues and making inferences. Course Descriptions 239 ESL. 059 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Lower Advanced Writing and Grammar ESL. 069 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Advanced Writing and Grammar This course introduces more complex grammatical structures used in controlled and free paragraph writing. It prepares students for the sentence and writing skills required for E S L . 069. The emphasis in this course is on composing at the paragraph level. The aim o f this course is to bring E S L students' writing skills up to the level required for College Preparatory English courses. ESL. 061 (3) (4.0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Advanced Speaking and Listening ESL. 071 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Speaking and Listening This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for entry into College Preparatory English courses. The focus w i l l be on the comprehension and discussion o f academic lecture material, idioms and relaxed speech structures, oral reports, debates, listening improvement, rhythm and intonation. ESL. 062 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Advanced Speaking and Listening for Business This course is only open to students in the Office Assistant program. This course assists students in improving their communications skills up to the level required for working in a business office environment. *ESL. 066 TOEFL Preparation I (3) This course helps students improve their oral and listening skills to prepare them for college studies. Students w i l l practise speaking through oral reports, summarizing, and debates. Through group work, both formal and informal speech patterns w i l l be explored. Vocabulary development w i l l also be stressed as students incorporate new words and expressions in their speech. ESL. 074 (3) Advanced Pronunciation (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) In this course students w i l l refine English word stress, sentence stress, intonation patterns, sound/spelling patterns, as well as production/recognition o f syllables and word endings. (4,0,0) (F.Su) This course helps students improve their T O E F L *ESL. 076 TOEFL Preparation II scores. Students w i l l learn how to enhance their A continuation of E S L . 066 (3) (4,0,0) (S.Su) grammar, as well as the listening and reading skills * This course is fully funded by tuition fees paid, and needed for the T O E F L test and other English profi- w i l l be offered only i f there are enough students. ciency tests. * This course is fully funded by tuition fees paid, and w i l l be offered only i f there are enough students. ESL. 067 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Advanced Reading and Vocabulary for Business This course is only open to students in the Office Assistant program. This course assists students in developing their vocabulary and reading skills up to the level required for working in a business office environment. ESL. 068 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Upper Advanced Reading and Vocabulary This course is designed to raise students' reading and vocabulary skills to the level where they can enter College Preparatory English courses. Focus w i l l be on recognizing different types o f writing, organizational patterns, identifying point-of-view and making inferences. Course 240 Descriptions ESL. 078 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Reading and Vocabulary This course introduces the E S L student to the basic reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational d i v i sions. Focus w i l l be on reading comprehension at the literary, inferential and critical levels. Course material w i l l include sample texts from various content areas. ESL. 079 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Writing and Grammar This course w i l l focus on the paragraph as the standard medium for written communications. It w i l l also introduce students to the essay as the standard medium for academic writing. The course w i l l continue to refine the usage of all grammatical structures. ESL. 081 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Speaking and Listening Students w i l l learn to gain confidence in public speaking and listening to academic lectures. Various rhetorical techniques, such as debating, w i l l be introduced. Through group work and formal presentations, students w i l l have many opportunities to become more effective speakers and listeners. ESL. 088 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Reading and Vocabulary This course continues the development of reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational divisions. The stress w i l l be on inferencing skills, context clues and critical reading. Students w i l l work with sample reading texts from various content areas. ESL. 089 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Writing and Grammar This course assists students in achieving proficiency in writing essays at pre-college and pre-university level with a m i n i m u m of E S L errors. Students w i l l develop strategies for a variety of essay requirements for college and university courses. ESL. 098 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Reading and Vocabulary The primary aim of this course is to provide E S L students with the necessary reading skills for entry into the University Transfer and Career/Vocational d i v i sions. The focus of this course w i l l be on academic reading strategies, determining an author's tone/point of view and critical reading. Sample readings from various content areas w i l l be used. ESL. 099 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Writing and Grammar This course refines students' awareness of the strategies for a variety of essay structures required for college and university courses. The course w i l l also focus on sequencing o f ideas, essay organization skills, summarizing, paraphrasing, critical reading, evaluating sources and preparing a 1,000-word processed research paper. ESLF020 (15) (20,0,0) (F.S) Upper Beginner Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the L o w e r Intermediate level. It includes reading (paragraphs, forms, materials from daily life), vocabulary building (word parts, using a dictionary), grammar (accurate and meaningful use o f structures), writing (at the sentence level), listening (comprehending simple questions, statements, commands and expressions of courtesy), speaking (basic communicative exchanges), and pronunciation (vowels, consonants, stress). ESLF030 (15) (20,0,0) (F.S) Lower Intermediate Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the Upper Intermediate level. It includes reading (skimming and scanning, predicting, drawing conclusions), vocabulary building (word structure, synonyms and antonyms), grammar (accurate and appropriate use of structures), writing (simple sentences), listening (learned elements in standard content areas), speaking (initiating and responding to simple statements, handling a variety o f task-oriented and social situations), and pronunciation (word stress, sentence stress, rhythm, intonation). ESLF040 (15) (20,0.0) (F.S) Upper Intermediate Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with basic language skills to the L o w e r A d v a n c e d level. It includes reading (skimming and scanning, predicting, drawing conclusions), vocabulary building (word structure, synonyms and antonyms), grammar (meaningful and appropriate use of structures), writing (compound sentences), listening (discussions on a variety of topics), speaking (general conversations, social situations, levels of speech), and pronunciation (vowels, consonants, word stress and rhythm). ESLF050 (15) (20,0,0) (F.S) Lower Advanced Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with language skills to the Upper A d v a n c e d level. It includes reading (improving comprehension, improving speed, using context clues), vocabulary building, grammar (form and appropriate use), writing (controlled and free paragraph writing), listening (lectures, note taking, understanding details o f discussions on a variety o f topics), speaking (idioms, relaxed speech structures, group discussions), and pronunciation (rhythm, stress and intonation). Course Descriptions 241 ESLF060 (15) (20,0,0) (F,S) Upper Advanced Intensive Course This intensive 20-hour-per-week course provides students with advanced language skills to the College Preparatory L e v e l I. It includes reading (relating reading to own knowledge, determining accuracy o f information), vocabulary building (expanding vocabulary recognition skills, context clue knowledge, making inferences), grammar (accurate and appropriate use o f structures), writing (complex sentences, narrative/ descriptive paragraphs), listening (lectures, note taking, oral presentations), speaking (handling complicated tasks and social situations, discussions, narration techniques, debates), and pronunciation (pause fillers, rate o f speech, improving diction). FILM 100 (2) Film Development and Production (3,0,0) (F) A n analysis of each phase of pre-production and production from story conception to the end of shooting. FILM 105 (4.5) Understanding Film Crafts (2,2,4) (S) Virtually all crafts employed in f i l m production are examined and students are given an opportunity for hands-on experience. Crafts studied include: G r i p , Gaffer, Scenic Painter, Production Coordination, Costuming, Script Supervision, Props, A r t Direction, Set Decoration, F i l m Make-up and more. FILM 106 (4.5) (2,2,4) (S) The Directors: Roles of the Assistant Directors A n examination of and experience with the roles o f the Third, Second and First Assistant Directors, Location Personnel and Production Managers on the working set. FILM 107 (4.5) (2,2,4) (S) Cinematography-Roles of the Camera Assistants A study o f the roles o f the First and Second Camera Assistants, Camera Operators, Directors o f FILM 101 Working in Film Crafts (4.5) (3,2,3) (F) This course provides the student with an understanding of the film industry's organizational structure, unions and their prerequisites for employment and issues related to self-employment and independent contracting. Photography and others involved in the camera department. FILM 110 (2) Lighting and Camera for Film (4,0,0) (F) This is a technical course that provides hands-on training in the use o f lighting, grip, and camera equipment in film production. FILM 102 Film Post Production (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) This course features an in-depth analysis o f each phase of post production. The process is followed as it moves through various stages including laboratory processing, film and video editing, sound editing, opticals and titles and re-recording. FILM 103 (2) (3,0,0) (F) Screenplay Analysis and Breakdown FREN 100 Beginning French I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) F R E N 100 is for absolute beginners and those who do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. It provides an intensive introduction to the French language, enhanced by computer practice, and an introduction to francophone culture. It aims to develop proficiency in all areas o f communication: listening, reading, speaking, and writing. W i t h F R E N 101, it constitutes Grade 11 French. A review o f how the screenwriter develops ideas and team analyzes the breaks down the screenplay for FREN 101 Beginning French II shooting. Prerequisite: forms them into a screenplay and how the production FILM 104 (2) The Business of Film Production (3,0,0) (F) A study o f the business practices, economics and the decision-making processes employed i n the film industry. Students w i l l examine organizational systems, structure and contractual relationships and analyze management practices, production planning, distribution, publicity and implications o f change in the industry. Course 242 Descriptions (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) F R E N 100. This course, together with F R E N 100, covers high school French Grades 8, 9, 10 and 11 and prepares the student for F R E N 120, equivalent to Grade 12 French. FREN 120 (3) University Preparatory French I (4,1.75,0) (F) FREN 270 (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Second Year University French I Prerequisite: F R E N 100/101 or French 11 or permission o f the instructor. Prerequisite: F R E N 170/171 with a grade o f " C " or better, or permission of the instructor. F R E N 120 together with F R E N 121 constitutes Grade 12 French. The comprehensive approach to this course consists o f instruction in basic grammar and the development of students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Computer and conversation practice are included as is familiarization with francophone culture. This advanced course, which corresponds to second year university French, is an introduction to a variety of fiction and non-fiction texts (short stories and poems) by francophone authors. It offers a review o f French grammar aimed at developing writing skills through practice in composition, translation and exercises. V i d e o s and music w i l l enhance students' awareness of francophone culture. FREN 121 (3) University Preparatory French II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: F R E N 120 (minimum Grade " C - " ) or permission o f the instructor. FREN 271 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Second Year University French II This course, together with F R E N 120, constitutes Grade 12 French. A continuation o f F R E N 120, this course is designed to give a limited fluency i n speaking and reading as well as writing skills. • Prerequisite: F R E N 270 with a grade o f " C " or better, or permission of the instructor. FREN 170 (3) First Year University French I (4,1.75,0) (F) Students registering in French 170 and French 171 should note that there are two different streams, and students M U S T select the class and conversation sections that best reflect their French knowledge. One section is reserved for students who have completed Grade 12 regular core French in high school and for students who were only in French immersion until Grade 7. The other section is for students from French immersion K - 1 2 or late immersion 6 - 1 2 , for students with native-like speaking abilities because of family/ travelling background and for students who have lived/ studied in a francophone province or country. Prerequisite: Grade 12 French, F R E N 120/121 or permission o f the instructor. F R E N 170 should be taken after Grade 12 French by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. It continues the linguistic development o f the student by means o f grammar revision, weekly written and oral exercises, compositions and appreciation o f francophone literature. W i t h F R E N 171 it corresponds to first year university French. FREN 171 (3) First Year University French II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: F R E N 170 (minimum Grade C - ) or permission o f the instructor. A continuation of the work done in F R E N 170. A continuation o f the work o f F R E N 270. FSCI 050 (1) Fish Habitat Assessment This workshop is designed to introduce participants to the Watershed Restoration program F i s h Habitat Assessment Procedure ( F H A P ) . The workshop is taught over a two day period and is offered at various locations throughout B . C . FSCI 100 (3) Introduction to Salmonid Biology Identification (adults and juveniles), external and internal structures and their functions, life cycles and reproduction, osmoregulation, food organisms, water quality requirements, habitat, ecological role. E m p h a sis on practical applications in the field. FSCI 101 Fish Culture I (3) A n introduction to the theory and techniques used i n the fresh water culture o f salmon and trout. Course content covers collection, incubation and rearing o f salmonids. The major emphasis is on hatchery production o f salmonids for commercial aquaculture and enhancement purposes. FSCI 102 Fish Culture II (3) A continuation of F S C I 101. This course examines the intensive culture o f salmonids reared in the marine environment. Content includes an introduction to the marine environment, smolt transport, salt water adaptation, cage culture and harvesting and processing. Course Descriptions 243 FSCI 103 Water Quality (3) A n introduction to water quality with respect to intensive salmonid culture. Course content examines water quality parameters that impact on fish production and methods for measuring these parameters. FSCI 105 (3) Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding and Growth A n introductory course in the applied aspects o f salmonid nutrition. Course content includes nutritional requirements of cultured salmonids, feed formulation and manufacture, feeding methods and strategies, biology of growth and growth estimation. FSCI 106 Fish Health (3) A n introduction to the science of fish health. This course examines the pathogens that frequently infect cultured salmonids. Course content examines the various groups o f pathogens and methods used to prevent, minimize the impact or treat these pathogens. FSCI 120 Computers in Fisheries (3) Introduction to W i n d o w s environment; basics o f word processing, spreadsheet and data management programs using an integrated package such as Microsoft Office. FSCI 140 Field Practicum I (3) Practicums involve the student working for a 10-day period at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved in the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. FSCI 141 Field Practicum II (3) Practicums involve the student working for a 10-day period at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved in the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. FSCI 150 (3) Streamkeepers (Introduction to Watershed Stewardship) Basic techniques for watershed mapping; stream survey; identification o f impacts; assessments of stream condition based on physical characteristics, water quality and invertebrates. Introduction to stream and riparian restoration. The emphasis is on urban stream environments and the methods to assess and develop management and rehabilitation strategies. Course 244 Descriptions FSCI 190 Fisheries Techniques I (4.5) A techniques course that introduces the student to methods and procedures used in the field to evaluate aquatic habitat and rearing salmonid populations. Topics include planning and procedures using current Resource Inventory Committee ( R I C ) standards; juvenile fish trapping; enhancement methods; recording and reporting data. Emphasis on practical applications in the field. FSCI 191 Fisheries Techniques II (4.5) A techniques course that introduces the student to methods and procedures used in the field to evaluate adult salmonid populations i n freshwater habitats. Topics include: adult enumeration and capture methods including tagging methods; spawning assessment and production potential; enhancement methods; recording and reporting data. Emphasis on practical applications i n the field. FSCI 192 (3) Aquatic Habitat Rehabilitation Review o f fish habitat requirements; installation o f boulder weirs; large woody debris, fry cover, spawning gravel, off-channel habitat, etc.; restoration methods for machine accessible and for remote locations; safety considerations; timing of work; preparation o f proposals; permitting process. FSCI 200 Biology of Salmonids (3) This course is designed to introduce the students to the biology o f the fish species found in the subfamily Salmoninae (Salmon, Trout and Charr). Course content w i l l deal with evolution, identification, life history, ecology, basic anatomy and physiology o f these animals. FSCI 210 (3) Intensive Salmonid Culture This course is designed to introduce the student to the art and science o f intensive salmonid culture. Course content deals with the theory and current techniques utilized i n modern salmonid culture. Students are exposed to practices currently used by governmental agencies for enhancement of salmon stocks as well as practices used in the commercial aquaculture industry. FSCI 211 (3) River Hydraulics and Habitats This 10-day field school w i l l focus on the hydraulics and habitats of flowing water. Course content emphasizes stream geomorphology, open channel hydraulics, stream habitat assessment and design. This workshop is offered at Sechelt and Squamish during August and September. GEOG 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures Different cultures in different landscapes are compared and contrasted to our o w n . T h i s course examines the many issues of human population, perception of the environment, diffusion of ideas, and cultural aspects of resource use and urban growth, to give students a view into the many concerns on the human side of geography. GEOG 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental Geography: Perception and Change There are numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. This course examines how we perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and how our attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include our use of water, the food we eat, herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use of energy. This is an excellent course for those concerned about the world we live in. Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audiovisual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and analyze some o f the most serious concerns in the world today. The environment is in jeopardy from our actions — what can we do about it? GEOG 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Geography: Global Concerns The focus of this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated regions; rather, they have become global crises. A c i d rain, the greenhouse effect, depletion of the world's resources are but a few of the examples illustrating the global scale of our environmental problems. Identifying and understanding the processes responsible for the problems are most important; however, finding solutions is also critical to this course. GEOG 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) British Columbia: A Regional Analysis A body o f information that is frequently missing from our education is that of the province in which we live. This course informs you about B . C . — its physical environment, the risks o f living in this province, the variety o f peoples, and the economics involved in its resources. F r o m an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems are frequently a function of the past. F o r those interested in business, teaching, or wanting a basic knowledge of B . C . , this is an excellent course. Note: This course also serves as Canadian Studies credit to SFU and is a component of the Professional Development Program for teachers. GEOG 108 (3) Canada: A Nation of Regions (4,0,0) (F,S) The understanding o f Canada and Canadians is becoming more and more important to our economic and social well being. This course examines Canadian problems and issues in terms o f the different regions i n Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as we focus on the Maritimes, Quebec, Ontario, the Western provinces, and the Northern frontier. Note: This course carries Canadian Studies credit to SFU and is a component of the Professional Development Program for teachers. GEOG 112 (3) (4,2,0) (F.S) Introduction to Earth Environments A n introductory, physical geography course about the earth's various landforms. Plate tectonics, volcanism, weathering and erosion w i l l be explained in order to understand how a landscape develops. Studies o f glacial, coastal and fluvial features w i l l be placed i n a Canadian context. Environmental changes due to human activities w i l l also be emphasized. Note: Both GEOG 112 and 114 are lab science courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 112 can be taken either prior to, or after, GEOG 114. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. GEOG 114 Weather and Climate (3) (4,2,0) (F.S) A n introductory, physical geography course about our atmosphere. Principles o f meteorology and climatology w i l l be explained in order to understand the weather we experience daily and seasonally. Further studies w i l l examine how the atmosphere is connected with the world's oceans and plant communities, and h o w humans are modifying these natural environments. Emphasis w i l l be placed on Canadian examples. Note: Both GEOG 114 and 112 are lab science courses and fulfil university science requirements. GEOG 114 can be taken prior to, or after, GEOG 112. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. Course Descriptions 245 GEOG 200 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Technology and Economic Environments GEOG 214 (3) Our Atmospheric Environment A n examination o f the concepts and themes o f economic geography in terms o f production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions in economic geography are reviewed in terms o f contemporary issues. The purpose of this course is to illustrate the importance o f economic processes and tools to understand our environment. Prerequisite: tor. GEOG 201 Urban Studies (3) (4,0,0) (S) M o r e and more of us are living i n an urban world. This course is designed to examine problems and issues that arise with urban l i v i n g ; including psychological problems, the cost o f housing, transportation issues, slums, suburban l i v i n g , and the future direction of cities. W h i l e this course uses local examples, it also draws on examples from other cities in the world. This course approaches these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, and field research. Urban studies leads to careers i n urban planning, real estate, land management, architecture, and urban politics as w e l l as giving general community awareness. GEOG 202 Urban Field Studies (1.5) (2,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor. Prerequisite or Corequisite: G E O G 201 The course is designed to engage students in the practical application o f urban planning. U s i n g principles from urban geography and urban planning, students w i l l become acquainted with the development of an Offical C o m m u n i t y Plan, while working in partnership with planners from the local district planning office. The course involves field study work and attendance at district public meetings. This is an excellent course for those interested i n urban and/or regional planning or those intending to continue i n Geography. GEOG 205 Asia Pacific Geography (3) (4.0,0) (S) This course examines the A s i a Pacific in terms o f its social, economic, physical, historical and political geography. The emphasis is placed on the historical development and present day relationships in both East and Southeast A s i a . This course introduces the concept of the Pacific Century and recognizes British C o l u m bia's position on the Pacific. This is an excellent course for those interested i n the past, present and future of the A s i a Pacific region and especially for those considering a business career in this region. Course 246 Descriptions (4,2,0) (S) G E O G 114 or permission o f the instruc- This course w i l l provide an intermediate understanding of the processes at work in our atmospheric environment. Broad topics to be covered are atmospheric energy, moisture, and winds. These concepts w i l l be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and E l Nino/Southern Oscillation on a global scale. This course w i l l involve lectures, labs, and field work. GEOG 221 (3) Map and Airphoto Interpretation Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) A t least one other Geography course. This is a second year course that is essential for those intending to make Geography their academic major. It is also appropriate for those considering careers in environmental studies, forestry, geology, archaeology, history and other disciplines that rely extensively on maps and air photos. This course uses lectures, computer labs and field work to cover the basic principles o f map and photo interpretation, surveying and satellite imaging. Both human and physical landscapes w i l l be analysed. Students w i l l undertake a research project on a L o w e r M a i n l a n d neighbourhood. The project w i l l involve archival research, census data analysis and field studies. It w i l l examine how this information can be displayed through the use of various mapping techniques. GEOL 110 Physical Geology (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: None. However, experience in secondary level chemistry and physics w i l l contribute greatly to mastering physical geology. This course views the Earth as a heat engine w h i c h continuously recycles air, water and solid earth materials. It examines how nature's recycling o f these materials results in both the origin and the eventual transformation of igneous; sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Next, it investigates how lithospheric plates interact with each other and with external recycling (atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles). F i n a l l y it considers ways people may best adapt to these everchanging Earth environments and act as stewards o f Earth's environments and resources. GEOL 111 Historical G e o l o g y (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: G E O L 110 or equivalent; or G E O G 112 with instructor recommendation. This course examines the methods geologists use to deduce the origin, age and evolution o f Earth and its life. These methods are then used to investigate how Earth's lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere evolved before giving rise to life, and how ever since, life has interacted with land, water and air. Next, the origin and growth o f our "home" continent and adjacent ocean basins are studied. Finally, the processes and events that shaped (and are still shaping) our immediate environment are looked at in more detail. Uses and abuses o f Earth resources and environments since the arrival of human beings also form part of the course. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. G E R M 100 Beginning German I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F.S) A comprehensive introduction to the German language: comprehension and speaking are reinforced through reading, writing and computer programs. Films, tapes, activities, etc. help develop an awareness o f the cultures of the German-speaking countries. G E R M 101 Beginning G e r m a n II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: G E R M 100 ( m i n i m u m Grade C ) , German 9 or 10, Beginner's German 11, or the equivalent with written permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f G E R M 100 and must be taken i n order to realize first year level college/ university German. G E R M 101 should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following G E R M 100. G E R M 200 Intermediate German I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: G E R M 101 ( m i n i m u m grade "C+"), Grade 11 or 12 German or the equivalent with written permission o f the instructor. Placement tests are available. G E R M 200 reviews basic German grammar and usage, and introduces students to modern German literature. It aims through the discussion o f the cultures and concerns o f the German-speaking peoples to increase the ability to communicate in the fullest sense o f the term. Not offered every year. G E R M 201 Intermediate G e r m a n II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) G E R M 200 (minimum grade " C " ) , German 12 (or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor.) Placement tests are available. Continues the review and development of German language skills at the Intermediate level. Together with G E R M 200 it completes the requirements for second year college/university German. Not offered every year. GRPH 152 Life D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) D r a w i n g from observation o f the human figure; exercises in developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study o f the proportions o f the human body. L i n e characteristics in pencil, pen, conte and charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, gesture and volume drawings from draped and undraped models. GRPH 154 General D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to representational drawing, mediums and techniques. Drawing as an expression of observation and perception of visual aspects o f environment and visual thinking. Study o f graphic means o f representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space and surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements for descriptive rendering i n pencil and charcoal. GRPH 155 (3) M e d i u m s a n d Techniques I (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to basic painting and illustration techniques. Field location drawing and wash studies using watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combinations o f the above. Developing location studies into more controlled, finished classroom works. GRPH 156 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Principles o f Visual Communications I Introduction of various graphic design styles, their historic significance, the social environments i n which these styles were conceived and technical innovations which designers used to advance modern graphic design. Application of selected styles to practical, contemporary assignments with techniques of conceptualizing and layout composition demonstrated in a lecture form. Introduction o f basic photography darkroom techniques (b/w print processing and the photogram). Students are introduced to various communication problems and solve these problems with specified b/w mediums. Course Descriptions 247 GRPH 157 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Principles of Visual Communications II GRPH 178 Design II Prerequisite: Prerequisite: G R P H 158 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation with more sophisticated design, composition and colour applications. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking/painting tools. A d v a n c e d design concepts are explained using various visual methods (videos — blackboard — paper — Macintosh computer using A d o b e Illustrator/Photoshop software — film, etc.). The class w i l l move toward actual design/communication problems and business procedures and verbal skills i n presentation w i l l be stressed. G R P H 156 with at least a " C " grade. The further study of graphic design styles and designers such as A r t D e c o , Post M o d e r n , Swiss and N e w Y o r k design movements are examined. Introduction to basic 35mm camera operations, basic b/w film processing, print enlarging and photo applications. Students are given specific problems to solve utilizing photography and various mediums. (3) GRPH 158 Design I (4,3,0) (F) Introduction to design elements and application to design projects w h i c h solve communication problems. A l l the beginning design exercises use black and white only. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking tools. C o l o u r studies involving the production o f colour charts w i l l be given with appropriate design projects, i n colour. The ability to verbally explain concepts w i l l be stressed throughout the semester. A n emphasis towards actual work situations w i l l be stressed. Graphic design business procedures w i l l be explained throughout the semester. GRPH 159 (3) Mediums and Techniques II Prerequisite: (4,0.0) (S) G R P H 155 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation with further drawing analysis techniques. Consideration and use of various mediums as they relate to specific subjects from location studies and classroom development of same. GRPH 164 General Drawing II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 154 with at least a " C " grade. Exploration o f drawing with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. Developing themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for both reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization are explored in relation to the study o f line, mass, value and contrast. Various pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on initiative in researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. GRPH 170 Studio Production I (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer hardware and software. Students w i l l gain experience with the operating system and programs for desktop publishing. This is an ideal first course for students with little or no computer experience and serves as the basis for future courses i n electronic composition, computer illustration, typography and pre-press. Course 248 Descriptions (3) GRPH 184 Life Drawing II Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 152 with at least a " C " grade. Further study o f drawing from direct observation o f the human figure. Exercises in perceiving and interpreting plane, mass, rhythm and form as they relate to perceptual elements of drawing media. Investigation o f more complex drawing techniques and materials; drawing from memory and imaginative reflection o f visual experience. GRPH 231 Typography I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Historical origins o f the alphabet, numerals and letter forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication i n pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive lettering indication and reproduction art to improve craftsmanship and drawing skills. GRPH 232 Graphic Design I (3) (4.0,0) (F) A n introduction to the pragmatic, formal, and contextual issues involved in the creation o f visual messages. A n emphasis is placed on the development o f a philosophical and practical foundation for critical, creative thinking as applied to visual problem solving. The grammar and the elements o f visual language are explored in relation to perception, semiotics, and psycholinguistics. Students gain experience using both traditional and desktop publishing methods. GRPH 233 (3) Drawing for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) The purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills necessary to draw with quality and creativity. Introduces the students to skills that must be developed i f they are to visually communicate consciously and effectively. Basic drawing and wash media w i l l be used. GRPH 234 A p p l i e d Design I Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) G R P H 178 with at least a " C " grade. components o f visual messages. Further exploration of the applications of computer technology i n contemporary graphic design. A n introduction to visual communication and the role of professional advertising, art directors and graphic designers. Design principles and layout techniques, with emphasis on concept and comprehensive finish using basic marker rendering skills. GRPH 235 (3) Painting for Illustration I (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: G R P H 159 with at least a " C " grade. This course offers expanded skills in perception, visualization and continued practice in control of various painting media. It gives the student the opportunity to develop similar styles to the o l d masters as w e l l as experiment with his/her o w n drawing and painting. GRPH 243 (3) D r a w i n g for Illustration II Prerequisite: G R P H 233 with at least a " C " grade. The students play an advanced role in the choices o f reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The skilful and imaginative use o f illustrative methods is stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct perception. Uses of drawing and wash mediums w i l l be expanded. A s well, the student w i l l be expected to become familiar with current uses of illustration. GRPH 244 (3) (4,0,0) (F) (3) (4,3,0) (S) A p p l i e d Design II Prerequisite: GRPH 236 (4.0,0) (S) G R P H 234 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation relating to presentation o f ideas at a C o m p u t e r Applications professional level representing real advertising agency Prerequisite: and client situations. M a k i n g rough layouts and finished G R P H 170 with at least a " C " grade. Introduction of computer software programs for the comprehensives of ideas that are evaluated against application o f electronic composition and imaging. established client criteria. Students w i l l use an advanced page layout program and GRPH 245 (3) Painting for Illustration II drawing program. GRPH 237 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: (4,0.0) (S) G R P H 235 with at least a " C " grade. Life D r a w i n g III The student's personal style o f drawing and painting is Prerequisite: pursued to a much finer degree. Structured tutorials in G R P H 184 with at least a " C " grade. Develop advanced drawing and painting skills in the use o f various mediums and student/instructor rendering and graphically interpreting the human figure criticisms of work-in-progress are emphasized. E x p e r i - from direct observation. Provide greater understanding mentation in both style and medium is encouraged. and enhanched abilities in figure illustration relevant to GRPH 246 (3) Visual Communications III a career i n a professional market. GRPH 241 T y p o g r a p h y II (3) (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 231 with at least a " C " grade. This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and graphic design. C o n struction o f various styles o f letter forms in pencil, felt marker and brush w i l l be studied. Basic application o f typography in advertising and graphic design using computers w i l l be investigated. GRPH 242 (3) (4,0.0) (F) Graphic Design II Prerequisite: G R P H 232 with at least a " C " grade. Further development of understanding and application of visual problem solving methods as related to graphic design; students explore ideas and concepts which precede the making o f design. A n emphasis is placed on application o f typography and photography as major (4,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. In this course students are introduced to colour photography applications and basic artificial lighting techniques. Students must solve communication problems using the 35mm camera and colour transparencies. A r t direction and conceptualization for assignments is stressed. Students are introduced to digital photography and computer photo imaging. GRPH 352 (3) Three Dimensional Graphic Design Prerequisite: " C " grade. (4,3,0) (S) G R P H 232 and G R P H 234 with at least a A n introduction into the procedures involved i n the design o f small retail environments such as boutiques and service shops in shopping centres and malls. Point of purchase design is introduced and model-building techniques are studied as well as the use o f colour in merchandising and display. Course Descriptions 249 GRPH 353 Illustration Media I Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F) G R P H 353 with at least a " C " grade. Further developing finished illustrations for advertis- a " C " grade. A continuation o f drawing skills needed to explore the mediums necessary for illustration. The course develops through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel v i n y l . The use o f the illustrator's tools and processes such as repellents, air brush, mixed media, etc., are reviewed. GRPH 354 Applied Design III Prerequisite: GRPH 363 Illustration Media II (4,3,0) (F) (3) ing, books, magazines, etc. A n expansion o f the uses o f mediums to include m i x e d media while concept is stressed as an emphasis on self-expression and relevant professional solutions. GRPH 364 Applied Design IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (S) G R P H 354 with at least a " C " grade. The interrelationship o f illustration, photography and G R P H 244 with at least a " C " grade. graphic design into advertising, packaging and point o f The application of design and rendering skills to the purchase with extensive consultation on student development o f solutions to print advertising. Explores portfolios and the needs of advertising agencies and companies, products, services, corporate identification graphic design studios. and their relationship to print advertising layouts and sives are developed with the computer as w e l l as GRPH 365 (3) Advertising Illustration II traditional approaches. Prerequisite: tight comps prepared for class critiques. Comprehen- (4.2,0) (S) G R P H 355 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration of advertising illustration tech- GRPH 355 (3) Advertising Illustration I Prerequisite: i (4,0,0) (F) niques with the emphasis on actual studio and advertising agency working methods. A bridge between the G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least educational experience and w o r k i n g in the field. a " C " grade. A comprehensive study o f contemporary advertising illustration styles, techniques and materials with projects developed from original concept to final presentation. Emphasis on working with an art director with attention to specifications, deadlines and professionalism. GRPH 356 Production Processes Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) press operations including preparation o f art, photos, typography, halftone screening, colour separations, image stripping, assembly and proofing; paper and its effect upon printing. Includes the use of Macintosh computers for digital pre-press production. GRPH 361 (3) Advanced Typographic Design G R P H 241 with at least a " C " grade. of thought i n advanced graphic forms, with emphasis on typography as a medium and message o f design. A d v a n c e d application o f the grid to facilitate the integration of both typography and visuals, underscored by sound use o f conceptual thinking. 250 (4,0,0) (S) H o w to establish and operate a free-lance design/ illustration business. Emphasis is upon client relations, suppliers contact, estimating, project management, taxation and accounting practices and industry ethics. The designer's role in an advertising agency, design studio and production or printing facility w i l l be investigated. Descriptions HIST 100 (3) History of the Ancient World (4.0.0) (F) This course examines a range o f topics including the origins of civilization in Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations o f Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins and development of Judaism and the early Christian Church. (4,1,0) (S) Assignments demonstrate visual concept and economy Course (3) G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. Familiarization with various print processes and pre- Prerequisite: GRPH 366 Business of Design HIST 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution A survey o f European history beginning with the 16th century Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the old regime and the French Revolution. HIST 103 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries HIST 208 (3) Canadian-American Relations Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise o f political ideologies, social classes, nationalism and imperialism, the Russian Revolution, the two world wars, and the inter-war period. This Canadian history course examines the major events and themes that have shaped the CanadianA m e r i c a n relationship. F r o m the A m e r i c a n Revolution, the war that ultimately created both countries, to recent years, we analyze the influence that the United States has had on Canada. HIST 108 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Issues and Themes in U.S. History: 1607 - 1877 American history from 1607 to 1877 examines the development of the United States from early settlement through the C i v i l W a r era. Emphasis is placed on the evolution o f American politics, race relations, economic and social trends, and western expansion. HIST 109 (3) (4.0,0) (S) Issues and Themes in U.S. History : 1865 Present U . S . history from 1865 to the present. A study of the development of A m e r i c a as a world power after the C i v i l War. Special emphasis is given to U . S . foreign policy, domestic politics, and urbanization. (4,0,0) (S) HIST 209 (3) (4,0.0) (Su) History of the Native Peoples of Canada U s i n g ethnohistorical approaches, this course examines the history o f Canadian Indian, Inuit and M e t i s peoples. It gives particular emphasis to the attitudes, practices, policies and experiences that have shaped native-white relations and affected native peoples from 1450 to the present. HORT 101 (5) Introductory Horticulture (6.4,0) (F) A study o f Aboriginal-European relations, N e w France and British North A m e r i c a . Special emphasis is placed on issues and ideas which have been significant in the creation o f Canada and, in particular, the making o f Canadian society before 1867. This course details commercial horticulture in B . C . , covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site safety and develops basic horticultural skills including the use and proper care of hand tools, power equipment, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and watering techniques. Students must participate in a three-day orientation field trip near the beginning of this course. Students also participate in a W C B certified Occupational First A i d L e v e l l and W H M I S training. HIST 111 (3) Canada Since Confederation HORT 102 Plant Materials I HIST 110 (3) Canada Before Confederation (4,0,0) (F) (4,0,0) (F,S) This course examines the development o f Canada since 1867. In particular it emphasizes prosperity and poverty; class, gender, aboriginal, and regional relations; French-English tensions; the influence o f the United States; and Canada in the world community. HIST 205 British Columbia (3) (4,0,0) (F) (5) (6,0,0) (F) A n introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This course emphasizes identification, landscape values and environmental requirements o f the plant materials studied. HORT 103 (2) Growing Media & Fertilizers (3,1,0) (F) F r o m the first contact between First Nations and Europeans i n the 18th century to the present, this course analyses the main issues that have affected British Columbians. It also examines some aspects o f the development o f the North Shore. This course is designed to provide students with the media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance of plants i n the greenhouse, nursery and landscape. HIST 207 (3) (4,0.0) (S) Europe in the Middle Ages and Renaissance HORT 105 Plant Production This course covers a colourful and creative period in European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late R o m a n E m p i r e and rise of Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal society and politics, the rise o f towns, the crusades, the Black Death, and the art, culture and society o f Renaissance Italy. Designed to acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery production systems and methods. Topics w i l l include: plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery stock production. Students w i l l successfully produce a number o f specific greenhouse and nursery crops. (2) (3,1,0) (F) Course Descriptions 251 HORT 106 (2) Landscape Irrigation and Drainage (3,1,0) (S) This course is designed to familiarize the student with the basics of turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. Domestic Dispenser and Landscape Applicator pesticide certification examinations. The majority o f the course time is spent on field installation and maintenance work. HORT 114 (0) (0,1,0) (S) Park & Tilford Gardens Practicum II A continuation of H O R T 107. HORT 107 (0) Park & Tilford Gardens Practicum I (0,1,0) (F) This is an optional landscape maintenance work experience at Park and Tilford Gardens. The objectives of the practicum are to develop a professional work ethic, to master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and in a timely manner. HORT 108 Landscape Design (1.5) (1.5,3,0) (S) A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials are presented by means of lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. HORT 109 Plant Materials II (4) (6.0,0) (S) A continuation o f H O R T 102 with the emphasis on conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. HORT 110 Turfgrass Management (3) (3,1,0) (S) A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the selection of grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and maintenance (includes fertilization, irrigation, m o w i n g , cultivation, pest control practices) for residential and large area turfs. HORT 111 Business Practices (D (3,1,0) (S) Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, job applications, resumes and interviews are also discussed. HORT 112 (5.0) (4.5,4,0) (S) Landscape Installation and Maintenance A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Landscape installation topics include: site preparation, use o f aggregates, and construction o f walks, steps, retaining walls, fences, trellises, and use of paving materials. Maintenance topics include: pruning, planting and transplanting, pest management, mulches, and methods of fertilization. Students write the B . C . government Course Descriptions 252 HORT 115 (1.5) Basic Landscape Drafting (1.5,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the basic drafting skills and site evaluation methods as they are used i n the landscaping industry. Course topics include: basic drafting skills and equipment, site measuring, plan reading, landscape graphic presentation and introductory quantity takeoffs. HSA. 110 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) Work Role Concepts in Home Support This course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role of the Home Support Worker. Students also learn home management skills needed for beginning home support practice. HSA. 112 (1.5) Special Needs in Home Support (2.0,0) (S) This course builds upon other course materials and provides an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved i n the care o f clients experiencing changes in mental functioning. Students also learn the role o f the Home Support Attendant in special needs family situations. HSRC 101 (3.75) (10.0,0) (F.S) Health and Healing: Concepts for Practice This course provides students with the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students w i l l examine significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings underlying competent practice as a home support/resident care attendant. The course w i l l focus on the concepts and principles related to health and healing across the lifespan, as well as aspects of caregiving that promote individual health and healing. HSRC 110 (1.0) (2,0,1) (F.S) Workrole: Introduction to Continuing Care This course provides students with an introduction to the role of the home support attendant and the resident care attendant in continuing care areas. The course builds on the content o f other courses and further develops the knowledge, attitudes and values required for competent practice as a home support/resident care attendant. HSRC 111 Clinical Skills (7.0) (0.6,150) (F.S) This practical course focuses on the acquisition and application o f caregiving skills aimed at maintaining and promoting comfort, safety and independence for individuals i n the home or in a continuing care facility. Students spend one day per week in the College health lab learning the practical skills needed to work with clients/residents. Field trips are included in the beginning o f this course to increase student's awareness o f community facilities. Students spend two weeks in an intermediate care facility and approximately 14 days on an extended care and home support practicum supervised by a clinical instructor. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work. A l l practicum and clinical placements are arranged by the College. HSRC 113 (4.75) (0,0,160) (F.S) Home Support/Resident Care Attendant Practicum This five-week practical course provides the student with an opportunity to work with a health care team i n selected continuing care and special care facilities, as well as home support agencies. Select supervised experiences w i l l emphasize the application and integration of knowledge and skills learned in other courses. The clinical experience provides an opportunity for the student to become better prepared to take on the role o f a home support/resident care attendant. Opportunities w i l l be provided for the learner to gain increased self confidence in the work setting and to become socialized as a member of the health care team. IBUS 321 International Business Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F,S) 45 credits This course w i l l be a blend of lectures, case studies and discussions o f current events affecting business. Students w i l l learn the terminology o f international business and the process managers go through in "internationalizing" their business, including how uncontrollable elements o f international markets can impact business. IBUS 334 (3) (4.0,0) (F.Su) Communication and Culture in International Business Prerequisite: 45 credits or permission of the instructor The objective of this course is to increase the student's cross-cultural awareness in business settings. It looks at IBUS 340 (3) International Trade Law Prerequisite: (4.0,0) (S) B A D M 107 International trade conventions and agreements, the legal processes of importing and exporting, and the challenge o f dealing with conflicting domestic laws between countries w i l l be studied. This course is available every second year. IBUS 357 (3) International Marketing Prerequisite: (4,0,0) I B U S 321, B M K T 161 This course is an in-depth study o f marketing internationally. It assumes the student understands uncontrollable variables i n a foreign market (as covered i n I B U S 321) and goes directly into the controllable variables and the management o f marketing programs. IBUS 399 (3) International Trade Opportunities (4,0,0) This course w i l l be delivered as a seminar series, and is designed to provide students with a broad perspective of the trade opportunities available and the strategies required to be successful in the world markets. Industry leaders as w e l l as government experts w i l l discuss topics which are relevant to the Canadian business people. Case studies w i l l be used to apply the concepts covered in the lectures. INDO 102 (1.5) Introduction to Indonesian I (4,2,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. This course helps prepare A P M C P students to function in daily life in Indonesia by helping them to master basic language skills, sensitizing them to cultural differences, and teaching them to begin to read and write Indonesian. INDO 103 (3) Introduction to Indonesian II (4,2,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. Prerequisite: I N D O 102 or permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation o f I N D O 102. INDO 110 Basic Indonesian I (3) (4,2,0) (F) This course develops basic oral and reading skills i n bahasa Indonesia through the study o f grammar, vocabulary and culture. how different cultures negotiate and regard contracts, interpret commitments and deal with suppliers and consumers. Course Descriptions 253 INDO 111 Basic Indonesian II (3) (4,2.0) (S) This course is a continuation o f I N D O 110. (.75) (4,0,0) (Su) Graphics production requires a combination of technological and aesthetic skills. Augmenting the graphics design skills developed so far, the student is introduced to advanced graphics production techniques and tools in this workshop-based course. INFO 139 Digitized Sound (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) A u d i o is an important component in computer-based multimedia. In addition to the fundamental concepts o f digital audio, students learn the techniques for digitizing and editing sound samples for use i n interactive multi-media presentations. INFO 145 (1.5) Internet Tools and Techniques (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l provide students with the necessary knowledge and experience with browsing and publishing on the Internet. INFO 148 (1.5) Time-Based Data Integration II (3,0,0) (S) Data capture, compression, assembly and editing techniques and the issue of synchronization are part of this course. INFO 150 (1.5) Contemporary Issues I ^ (3,0,0) (F) A study o f cultural, ethical, political, economic and aesthetic issues arising with the increasing use o f computers, as well as the impact o f new information systems on human understanding and society. Students survey print and electronic media to research current comment on these issues; synthesize and analyze their findings; and present their work in both written and spoken forms. INFO 151 (1.5) Interactive Communications I (3.0,0) (F) This course first examines the concept o f interactive communications—the active involvement o f a human mind with a computer—and the history o f developments i n the field to date. User interface design forms the basis for a model designed by each student. Course 254 Descriptions (3,0,0) (S) This project-based course expands on concepts covered in I N F O 151 and expands to include critical evaluation techniques for interactive communications products. Prerequisite: I N D O 110 INFO 138 Advanced Graphics INFO 155 (1.5) Interactive Communications II INFO 156 (1.5) Technical Support: Foundation (3,0,0) (F) This is an introduction to programming concepts. Students learn about components i n programming and the approaches to structured programming using these components. INFO 158 (1.5) Interactive Communications III (3,0,0) (S) A continuation o f I N F O 155, the concept o f Beta testing is introduced and applied. Students design, produce, test and revise projects using the authoring tool M a c r o m i n d Director in this course. INFO 160 Marketing (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) This course focuses on the basic principles o f marketing yourself and your ideas to the business community. It includes an overview o f marketing theory, application o f the theory into job market evaluation, preparation o f a personal marketing plan, and a selling skills workshop. INFO 161 Project Management (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) This course teaches skills necessary to manage and produce interactive communications projects. Students consider management issues such as administration, pre-production and production planning, copyright clearance, collaboration and team building. INFO 166 (1.5) Applied Telecommunications (3,0,0) (F) This course provides an introduction to the basics of modems, communications software, telecommunications protocols, the use o f electronic mail and bulletin board systems. INFO 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) This course familiarizes students with the design, structure and operation o f the Macintosh computer system software, the basic concepts and use o f local area networks, and related peripheral equipment. Students w i l l examine system-related utility programs and begin an introduction to data integration. INFO 171 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S.Su) Applied Production Management INFO 185 (1.5) 3-D Production for Multimedia This course w i l l allow the students to apply the project management skills they learned in I N F O 161 to integrated projects they undertake in the spring term. The students w i l l receive the benefit o f an instructor's expert experience, guidance and supervision throughout the planning and production o f these projects. This hands-on course introduces students to the world of 3-D graphics. Through a series o f projects, the course material w i l l present students with concepts o f modeling, lighting, textured creation and use, and 3-D animation. Finally, the students w i l l integrate the 3-D material into multimedia documents. INFO 172 (3.0) (3,0,0) (S.Su) Technical Support: Concentration INFO 192 (1.5) Applied Database Technology The focus o f this course is i n developing expertise i n the primary interactive multimedia authoring tool chosen for the program; currently, M a c r o m i n d Director is our choice. In addition to concentrating on the specifics o f this development tool, concepts in structured programming from I N F O 156 w i l l be applied in support of projects from I N F O 155/158. This course provides instruction in the key processes related to the development and maintenance o f database architectures and applications. Students are introduced to relational database technology and learn how to organize data i n a manner that facilitates easy maintenance, retrieval and reporting. INFO 173 (1.5) Technical Support: Augmentation (3,0,0) (F) After developing expertise in a primary multimedia • development tool, students w i l l be given the opportunity to expand their repertoire o f development tools. The focus is on the efficient application o f authoring knowledge from one environment to a different environment. Authorware is currently our choice o f development tool for courseware and computer-based training. B u i l d i n g on structure programming concepts gained in I N F O 156 and the expertise in Director developed in. I N F O 172), students turn their focus on Authorware. INFO 177 (4.5) Professional Development (3.0,0) (S,Su) This course prepares the student for work in the field o f information technology by establishing professional contacts, cultivating a professional work ethic, and developing a professional portfolio for presentation to the public. INFO 180 (3) (3,0,0) (S.Su) Computer Mediated Communications This course is designed to introduce the student to the various aspects and issues o f computer mediated communications. It w i l l enable the student to understand collaborative work in the world of telecomputing, experience a variety of planned computer mediated systems and link to other computer networks (via Internet and Telnet). INFO 193 (1.5) Systems Tools, Utilities II (3.0.0) (S) (3,0,0) (S.Su) (3,0,0) (S) This course is designed to provide the student with technical skills and knowledge to set up and maintain the W i n d o w s 98 operating system and to integrate their W i n d o w s 98 O S computer into the Infotec lab's computer network. INFO 194 (.75) Cross Platform Conversion (3,0,0) (S) The main objective of this course is to provide participants with the basic skills necessary for transferring computer-based interactive programs between the Macintosh and M S W i n d o w s operating environments. Additionally, this course aims at providing participants with the skill necessary to produce and deliver a M a c / P C hybrid C D - R O M . INFO 195 Interactive Graphics (3.0) (3,0,0) (F) This course provides a comprehensive introduction to digital graphics. Particular attention is given to the development of graphic objects and layouts suitable for interactive productions. Through exploration o f the chosen graphics application, students w i l l address issues concerning colour development, file optimization, and graphic sequencing as they investigate the various features of the software. INFO 196 Applied Design (1.5) (3.0,0) (S) In this course, students apply design concepts to the creation a major interactive multimedia projects. Course Descriptions 255 INFO 197 (1.5) Scripting for the Web Browser (4,0,0) (S) JavaScript coding is now as essential a skill for the web developer as H T M L ; it is becoming rare to encounter a website that doesn't make some use o f it. W i t h JavaScript, elements o f web pages such as images, forms, plug-ins and applets can be interconnected and controlled, allowing for interactive experiences that are impossible to achieve solely with H T M L . In this course, the structures and components o f the language w i l l be introduced along with their application to web content. INFO 198 (.75) Educational Technology (3,0,0) (S) This course provides an introduction to the application of interactive communication technologies in the field of education. JAPN 103 Beginning Japanese II (3) (4,2,0) (S) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. J A P N 103 is a continuation of J A P N 102. JAPN 110 Basic Japanese I (3) (4,2,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. This course develops basic oral and written c o m m u n i cative skills i n Japanese, through the study of vocabulary, grammar, culture, and introduction to word processing. JAPN 111 Basic Japanese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) J A P N 110 INFO 199 (.75) (3,0,0) (F) Interactive Project Planning and Design For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. This course provides an introduction to the key aspects of strategic planning as they relate to the implementation o f interactive communication systems. This course is a continuation o f Japanese 110. JAPN 100 Beginning Japanese I Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (F.Su) This course offers a comprehensive introduction to modern Japanese through the study o f vocabulary, grammar and culture. The beginning o f the course w i l l be devoted to learning the Japanese writing systems (hiragana and katakana). Fifty to 100 Chinese characters (kanji) w i l l also be taught. Students w i l l develop basic language skills in a socio-culturally functional way * This is a very demanding course which requires serious commitment. JAPN 101 Beginning Japanese II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) JAPN 200 Intermediate Japanese I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) J A P N 101 or the instructor's permission. This course provides students with further sociocultural knowledge at an intermediate level o f Japanese. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing a comprehensive knowledge o f modem Japanese through authentic materials and w i l l include reading and writing practice. JAPN 201 (3) Intermediate Japanese II Prerequisite: (4,1.75,0) (S) J A P N 200 or the instructor's permission. This course continues to develop higher skills at the intermediate level and provides the students with a solid foundation on which to base further study o f the language and to develop socio-culturally functional Prerequisite: J A P N 100 or the instructor's permission. competence. This course is a continuation of J A P N 100 and must be taken in order to complete First Y e a r level o f Japanese. Students w i l l learn more about the structure o f modern Japanese and further develop their language skills in a socio-culturally functional way. JAPN 102 Beginning Japanese I (1.5) (4,2,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. This course develops basic oral and written c o m m u n i cative skills in Japanese through the study of vocabulary, grammar and culture, including business culture. Course 256 Descriptions JAPN 202 (3) Introduction to Japanese III (4,2,0) (F) For Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program students only. Prerequisite: Equivalent of "Level III" (Advanced Beginner's Level) o f the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher, and instructor's permission. This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with intermediate practical Japanese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances i n Japan. JAPN 203 (3) Introduction to Japanese IV Asia Pacific students For only. Prerequisite: Management (4,2,0) (S) Cooperative Program J A P N 202 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation of J A P N 202. JAPN 280 (3) Introduction to Japanese V (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Equivalent of " L e v e l Three" (Advanced Beginners Level) of the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher and instructor's permission. A n intermediate course designed to provide students with functional Japanese communication skills. JAPN 281 (3) Introduction to Japanese VI Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) J A P N 280 This course is a continuation o f Japanese 280. JAZZ 103 The Language of Music Corequisites: 114. (3) (4,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 184 (or M U S . 112) and J A Z Z A n examination o f the basics o f tonal music including the study of the overtone series, intervals, scales, modes, chord symbols, figured bass, roman numeral analysis, melodic inharmonics, phrase structure, diatonic triads and voice leading. JAZZ 105 Rhythm Section Writing Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 103. Students w i l l undertake the study of score preparation, notation, basic musical terms and articulations, and writing for the rhythm section instruments. JAZZ 106 (1.5) (2.0.0) (S) Traditional Harmony and Composition Prerequisite: Corequisite: J A Z Z 103 or equivalent. J A Z Z 107. A study of traditional principles o f voice leading with harmonic vocabulary extending to the secondary dominant, b l l and A u g . 6th chords, and including tonicization, simple modulation and pivot chords. Binary and ternary forms w i l l be introduced. JAZZ 107 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition I Prerequisite: Corequisite: (2.0,0) (S) J A Z Z 103 or equivalent. J A Z Z 106. A n introduction to j a z z theory including: chord scales, extended chords, functional analysis o f chord progression, primary and secondary root motion, and analysis and composition o f music in the style of j a z z standards and the blues. JAZZ 114 Class Piano I Corequisite: I ATX (D (2.2,0) (F) 103. This course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered in class. Students practise on the department's pianos. JAZZ 115 Class Piano II (1) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 114. Corequisites: J A Z Z 106 and 107. (2,2,0) (S) A continuation o f J A Z Z 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. JAZZ 136 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class I (by audition (2,0,0) (F) only) A n introductory course intended to develop the student's solo vocal performance capabilities through exploration o f various popular and jazz musical styles. Material is prepared for performance with a keyboard accompanist. T h i s class is open to students not majoring in V o i c e . Vocalists who are judged to be at a sufficiently advanced level at their audition may substitute music electives for this course. Successful completion does not guarantee level vocal courses. acceptance JAZZ 137 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class II Prerequisite: into higher (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 136. A continuation o f J A Z Z 136. JAZZ 170 History of Jazz (3.0) (4,0,0) (F) A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots in Africa to the present. Course Descriptions 257 JAZZ 172 Arranging I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: JAZZ 103, to be taken with or after JAZZ 107 and 105. A study of four-part block harmonization arranging techniques. JAZZ 184 (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) Sight Singing/Ear Training I Corequisite: JAZZ 103 Aural and sight training concentrating on melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. JAZZ 185 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training II JAZZ 214 Class Piano III Prerequisite: For students who have taken JAZZ 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Emphasis will be on developing the skills necessary to use the piano as a tool in writing and arranging. (2,2,0) (S) Corequisite: JAZZ 106 and 107 A continuation of JAZZ 184. Prerequisite: (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) For all instruments, requirements include several hours of rehearsal a week plus a number of performances. The styles studied are varied. Students are expected to develop individual and ensemble performance abilities and a professional attitude to both performance and rehearsal. JAZZ 195 Small Ensemble II (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) A continuation of JAZZ 194. JAZZ 203 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition II Prerequisites: instructor. (2.0,0) (F) Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 203. Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of modern jazz chord progression, parallel harmony, 70s jazz theory of modal areas, modern voicing techniques, reharmonization. 258 Descriptions (2,0,0) (F) (by audition only) Prerequisite: JAZZ 137. A course designed to develop the student's studio performance ability through preparation and performance of selected solo and ensemble material in the College's recording studio. (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Studio Vocal Performance II JAZZ 236. A continuation of JAZZ 236. JAZZ 238 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class I (2,0,0) (F) (by audition only) Prerequisite: JAZZ 137. This course is intended to develop the live performance abilities of the student through the study of jazz repertoire. Students will study style and interpretation and perform with some of Vancouver's top jazz musicians. JAZZ 239 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class II Prerequisite: JAZZ 238. A continuation of JAZZ 238. Course (2,2,0) (S) JAZZ 214. JAZZ 236 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance I Prerequisite: Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of popular chord progression, mixed mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions. (D A continuation of JAZZ 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. JAZZ 237 JAZZ 106 and 107 or permission of the JAZZ 204 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition III (2.2,0) (F) JAZZ 115. JAZZ 215 Class Piano IV JAZZ 194 Small Ensemble I (1) (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 240 Form and Analysis (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 106 or M U S . 101. JAZZ 283 Improvisation II (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) A study of complete works exhibiting the most significant formal designs of the 18th and 19th centuries, using a variety o f visual means to clarify the roles o f harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic structure in the articulation o f musical form. A continuation o f J A Z Z 282. This term w i l l be devoted to analysis of chord progressions and more advanced chord-scale analysis. A t the end o f this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and learn to improvise on any "standard" jazz tune. JAZZ 241 Counterpoint JAZZ 284 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training III (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 106 or M U S . 101, J A Z Z 240, 203. A study o f tonal counterpoint emphasizing its use from late Baroque through the c o m m o n practice period. Prerequisite: J A Z Z 185. Corequisite: JAZZ 203. A continuation o f J A Z Z 185. Prerequisites: JAZZ 106, 170, E N G L 100 or 102 plus JAZZ 285 (1.5) Sight Singing/Ear Training IV Prerequisite: JAZZ 284. one o f E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106. Corequisite: J A Z Z 204. A chronological exploration of the repertoire, style, and social history of music to 1770 for undergraduate students i n the Jazz Studies program. Repertoire w i l l be contextualized both within the framework o f European cultural history and i n the broader context o f world music. A continuation of J A Z Z 284. JAZZ 271 Music History I JAZZ 272 Arranging II (3) (1.5) (4,0,0) (F) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisites: JAZZ 172 and J A Z Z 105. (2,2,0) (F) JAZZ 294 Small Ensemble III (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) (0,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: JAZZ 195. A t this level, the student w i l l receive instruction i n ensemble performance for the recording studio. Students w i l l perform and produce under supervision. L i v e performance w i l l include 'standard' repetoire. Corequisite: JAZZ 203. Arranging projects for various combinations o f instruments, plus a study of two and three-part writing. JAZZ 273 Music History II (3) (4.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 271 A continuation of History I covering the classical period through the 20th century. A s in M u s i c History I repertoire w i l l be contextualized both within the framework of European cultural history and in the broader context o f world music. JAZZ 282 Improvisation I (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 107, 115 and 185. A course to teach the basics o f improvisation on chord changes. The first term w i l l be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development o f technical exercises for basic chord progressions. JAZZ 295 Small Ensemble IV Prerequisite: JAZZ 294. (1.5) (0.3,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (S) A continuation o f J A Z Z 294. JAZZ 300 20th Century Theory Prerequisites: J A Z Z 240, 204. A survey of compositional techniques and theoretical principles utilized from 1890 to the present coupled with an examination o f various major composers and masterpieces of their music. JAZZ 310 Jazz Pedagogy Prerequisite: JAZZ 204. (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) Concepts, methods, and resources; examination and comparison o f textbooks, recordings, tapes, and materials related to the study of jazz. JAZZ 336 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance III Prerequisite: JAZZ Til. (2,0,0) (F) A continuation o f J A Z Z 237. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. Course Descriptions 259 JAZZ 337 (1.5) Studio Vocal Performance IV (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 394 Small Ensemble V (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 336. Prerequisite: J A Z Z 295. A continuation of J A Z Z 336. A variety of jazz styles ranging from 'bebop', ' m a i n stream', and 'current' w i l l be studied, and students w i l l perform, spontaneously, 'standard' repetoire. (1.5) JAZZ 338 Vocal Jazz Master Class III (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 239. A continuation o f V o c a l Jazz Master Class II instruction with more emphasis on individual contribution and responsibility. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. JAZZ 395 Small Ensemble VI (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 394. A continuation o f J A Z Z 394, with further emphasis on spontaneous performance of 'standard' repetoire. JAZZ 339 (1.5) Vocal Jazz Master Class IV (2,0,0) (S) JAZZ 410 Conducting I Prerequisite: J A Z Z 338. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisites: J A Z Z 204, 215, 240, 285. A continuation o f J A Z Z 338. A study o f basic conducting techniques. JAZZ 370 Jazz Styles (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) JAZZ 411 Conducting II Prerequisite: J A Z Z 170. A follow-up to J A Z Z 170. Detailed study o f the major figures in jazz from 1940 to the present, such as Charlie Parker, John Coltrane, B i l l Evans. JAZZ 372 Arranging III (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisites: JAZZ 204, 272. A study of vocal writing styles and techniques. This course is not always offered. JAZZ 382 Improvisation III (1.5) (2.2,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 283. This course contains both lecture and lab components. Content includes: melodic minor modes including the "altered" scale, whole-tone and diminished symmetrical chord scales, chromaticism and analysis and composition of solos in various styles. JAZZ 383 Improvisation IV (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 382. A continuation o f J A Z Z 382. Content w i l l include; exploration of the harmonic resources o f scales, chromatic approaches using pentatonic and altered pentatonic scales, 4th chord stacks, polychordal triad relationships, outside playing, and the philosophy o f free jazz. A continuation o f Conducting I with emphasis on vocal and instrumental approaches. JAZZ 460 (1.5) Commercial Relations in Music 260 (2,0,0) (F) A course involving aspects o f the music industry including copyright, contracts, performing rights organizations and the recording industry. JAZZ 470 World Music (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A study o f the musics o f the world outside the realm o f the Western European tradition. JAZZ 472 Arranging IV (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 272. Corequisite: J A Z Z 204. Course content includes writing techniques for large jazz ensemble. This course is not always offered . JAZZ 494 Small Ensemble VII (by audition only) (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) A j a z z performance ensemble for more advanced players. Students w i l l be required to perform in public several times during the semester. A continuation o f J A Z Z 494. Descriptions (2.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 410. JAZZ 495 Small Ensemble VIII Course (1.5) (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) KIN. 140 (3) Contemporary Health Issues (4,0,0) (Su) LAMP 506 Canadian Perspectives (0.75) (1.5,0,0.5) (F) Examination o f current health issues from a holistic perspective with emphasis on the role of personal behaviours and other factors influencing health. Critical analysis and evaluation o f health information w i l l also be covered. This course is designed as a review for Canadian students or as a primer for international students. It provides an overview o f Canadian history, geography, and current events from a comparative perspective. This course is not offered in LAMP 507 (1.5) International Marketing I 2000/2001. KIN. 142 (3) Introduction to Kinesiology (4,2,0) (S,Su) A n introduction to the range o f subject areas encompassed in the discipline o f kinesiology, with basic assessment procedures for individual status and performance according to growth and development, functional anatomy, biomechanics, exercise physiology, and motor learning. KIN. 143 Exercise Management (3) (2,2,0) (F.Su) A n introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques and fitness appraisal. LAMP 500 (6) Latin American Perspectives (6,0,2) (F) This course provides students with regional, economic, social, political and cultural knowledge and sensitivity to be able to become effective managers in Latin America. LAMP 501 International Finance (3) (3,0,1) (F) This course covers the finance principles and tools necessary for effective management in an international context. LAMP 502 (1.5) International Management Tools (3,0,1) (F) This course explores a range o f communications tools needed for effective management in a Latin American context. It includes presentation skills, computer applications, cross-cultural negotiation techniques and community relations strategies. LAMP 505 Strategic Planning (0.75) (1.5,0,0.5) (F) This course provides the theory and tools needed to undertake strategic planning for projects and organizations. (4,0,0) (F) This course presents the basic marketing principles, planning, and strategies. LAMP 520 (6) Latin American Perspectives II (8,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f L A M P 500. LAMP 522 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) International Management Tools II This course is a continuation o f L A M P 502. LAMP 523 (1.5) Latin American Legal Systems (4,0,0) (S) This course w i l l look at the basic legal concepts and systems relevant to doing business in a global environment, using Latin American case studies. LAMP 524 (1.5) (4,0,0) (S) International Human Resource Management This class w i l l provide basic knowledge o f the H u m a n Resource function and sensitivity to the similarities and differences of the H R function between North A m e r i c a and Latin A m e r i c a . LAMP 525 (1.5) International Project Management (4,0,0) (S) This course looks at the elements o f managing a project through all its stages, including comparisons between non-profit and private sector management. LAMP 526 (1.5) (4,0.0) (S) International Trade Principles and Logistics This course w i l l provide an understanding o f international trade flows, regional trading blocs in Latin A m e r i c a , trade terminology, and dispute resolution measures. LAMP 527 (1.5) International Marketing II (4,0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f L A M P 507, focusing on country selection and market entry strategies. Course Descriptions 261 LAMP 528 (1.5) (4.0,0) (S) International Business Development & Entrepreneurship This course w i l l focus on turning ideas into business plans. LGAS 151 Evidence (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the law o f evidence. A l t h o u g h some statutes w i l l be considered, emphasis w i l l be on case law and current developments i n the law. Transferable to S F U . LAMP 550 Workshops I (0.5) (0,0,1.5) (F) These workshops include topics like teambuilding, economics, tourism, computer applications, and crosscultural communication. A l s o includes career development seminars on resume-writing, career opportunities, and pre-departure preparation. LAMP 551 Workshops II (0.5) (0.0.1.5) (S) This course js a continuation o f Workshops I. LAMP 560 Co-op Work-Term (3.0) (Su.F.S) Students gain direct practical work experience through a 12-month paid co-op placement with an employer in Latin A m e r i c a . Students work in their preferred field in private, governmental, or the non-profit sector. A co-op advisor monitors the placement, and assists the employers and students i n evaluating the placement. Students are expected to write a final work term report. LAMP 570 (9.0) Co-op Parallel Academic Activities (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to procedures in the courts o f B . C . The course covers basic procedures i n pre-trial preparation of documents, and the use of precedents i n litigation. LGAS 153 (1.5) Basic Corporate Procedures (2,0,0) (S) A n examination of the B . C . Company A c t and the C . B . C . A . and the various documents required to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Differences between reporting and nonreporting companies w i l l be studied. LGAS 155 (1.5) Conveyancing Procedures (2,0.0) (S) Introduce students to basic conveyancing procedures in B . C . , including the role o f the conveyancing assistant, the structure o f a real estate sale, the system o f registration i n B . C . , and basic procedures when acting for a purchaser and/or vendor. (Su.F.S) This course covers the educational activities that are expected during the work-term. M u c h o f the learning takes place through electronic delivery. It has four major modules: 1) International Career development; 2) M i d - t e r m Conference; 3) Sectoral Focus Groups; and 4) Latin A m e r i c a n current affairs. LGAS 115 (1.5) Legal Document Processing LGAS 152 Litigation Procedures I (2,2,0) (F) Introduction to basic word processing applications in the law office using a W i n d o w s environment and state of the art software. Students w i l l apply technology to create and format standard legal documents. LGAS 156 (1.5) Introduction to Evidence (2,0,0) (S) This course is an introduction to the law o f evidence including relevancy, materiality, admissibility, opinion evidence, etc. LGAS 157 (3) Wills and Probate Procedures (4,0,0) (S) A n examination o f the W i l l s A c t , the Estate A d m i n i s tration A c t , and W i l l s Variation A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters o f Administration. Students w i l l also learn how to deal with assets after Letters Probate or Administration have been obtained. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 150 (3) Introduction to the Study of Law (4.0,0) (F) Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The course w i l l cover the historical development o f legal institutions and the principles o f common law and equity, the interpretation o f statutes, and an analysis o f the system; its strengths and weaknesses. Transferable to S F U . Course 262 Descriptions LGAS 164 Litigation Procedures IV Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) L G A S 152. A n introduction to Alternate Dispute Resolution, practice and procedure in the S m a l l C l a i m s Court, use of the Freedom o f Information and Privacy A c t as a tool for discovery, and Chambers practice and procedures i n the Supreme Court o f British C o l u m b i a . LGAS 170 Legal Research (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) LGAS 182 Creditors' Remedies (3) (4,0,0) (F) Provides the student with the techniques and methodology o f legal research and w i l l include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopedia, annotated reports, law reviews, case comments; locating decisions. Discussion of the principles, practice and information gathering procedures necessary to realize on j u d g ments. The case method w i l l be used and students are expected to be familiar with the documentation used i n the above process. LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I LGAS 199 Career Practicum (3) (4,0.0) (F) Course work includes drafting o f agreements, statements of claim and defences, letters and memos, and a study of the rules o f statutory interpretation. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing different writing styles, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge o f specific areas o f law. LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) 3.0 Cumulative G P A . This includes the work portion o f the Career Practicum w h i c h consists o f six months in a law firm. It also includes classroom seminars and instructor/student consultations. Students w i l l be assisted by the instructor i n finding a practicum, but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a practicum position. T h i s practicum must be commenced within two years o f completing the Legal Assistant course requirements. L G A S 172. A continuation of the work begun in L G A S 172; students w i l l draft more complex documentation. LGAS 176 Legal Office Procedures (3) (4,0,0) (F) Practical information about the organization o f legal offices. Instruction in timekeeping, filing and communications systems, use o f data processing equipment in law offices, ethical responsibility o f legal assistants and legal terminology w i l l be covered. LGAS 179 Legal Interviewing (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course w i l l give an understanding o f the role o f the legal assistant and o f the process o f legal interviewing. Students w i l l acquire skills in conducting various types o f interviews. LGAS 180 Contracts I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) LGAS 215 Law Office Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Practical information about the organization and management o f law offices. The course includes instruction on timekeeping, filing, diary and bring forward systems, communication systems and law office accounting procedures (including Trust A c counts). LGAS 252 Torts I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introductory study o f torts. Principal topic to be studied is the law of negligence. LGAS 253 Company Law (3) (4,0.0) (F) The law relating to business associations. A n examination of rights and duties of officers, directors, and shareholders, as well as an analysis of provincial securities practice. The objective o f this course is to give the students a general understanding o f the fundamental principles o f contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, intention, consideration, and privity. LGAS 254 Torts II LGAS 181 Contracts II This is a continuation o f L G A S 252. Recovery o f pure economic loss, nuisance, liability o f statutory authorities, intentional torts and other areas are studied. Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: (3) (4.0,0) (S) L G A S 252. L G A S 180. This course is a continuation of L G A S 180. Topics include misrepresentation, interpretation, mistake, duress, and remedies. LGAS 255 Real Property (3) (4,0,0) (S) A review o f the common law relating to real property as modified by legislation w i l l be studied in this course using the case analysis method. Course Descriptions 263 LGAS 256 Family Law (3) (4,0,0) (S) LGST 105 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S.Su) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development L a w and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights This course w i l l build keyboarding speed and accuracy and duties of spouses and parents; custody; access, skills using both general business and legal materials. guardianship, and adoption. LGAS 257 Wills and Estates (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) This course w i l l cover substantive law issues that arise in a wills and estates practice. Important practice issues w i l l also be covered, as well as a review o f applicable legislation. LGAS 262 Litigation Procedures III Prerequisites: (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course covers divorce, F a m i l y Relations A c t , and small claims procedures. (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n overview of Canadian insurance law including structure of the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. LGAS 265 Insurance Law II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Continuation o f L G A S 264 covering agents' duties and responsibilities; form and formation of the insurance contract; cover, including exceptions to cover; the claims process; I C B C insurance issues. LGAS 268 Criminal Law (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Substantive elements o f selected criminal offenses and consideration o f various defences. The effect o f The Charter of Rights on rights o f the accused w i l l be also studied. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 271 Administrative Law (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) The law relating to administrative tribunals in Canada. The rules of natural justice and fairness w i l l be examined as well as judicial review of decisions and administrative tribunals. Emphasis w i l l be on provincial administrative tribunals and the effect o f The Charter o f Rights in this area. Course 264 Descriptions (4,0,0) (S.Su) Students w i l l gain experience i n preparing legal materials on a microcomputer from recorded material w h i c h has been dictated as i f from the desk o f a lawyer to a competent legal secretary. LGST 108 Family Law Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to the procedures, rules and legislation applicable to divorce and family law litigation. L G A S 152. LGAS 264 Insurance Law I LGST 107 (3) Legal Machine Transcription LGST 109 Basic Litigation (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to court procedures in the Supreme Court of B . C . The course w i l l cover procedures in pre-trial preparation, the preparation o f documents, the use o f precedents in the Supreme Court. LGST 110 Corporate Procedures (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) A n examination o f the B . C . Companies A c t and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., w i l l also be covered. LGST 112 (3) (4,0,0) (S.Su) Basic Conveyance and Mortgage This course covers the contract o f purchase and sale, L a n d Title A c t requirements for registration o f title in B . C . , search procedures, preparation o f primary and secondary documents and forms involved in conveying title and registering charges. Emphasis w i l l be on preparing documents acceptable to the L a n d Title Office, such as transfers, mortgages, and related forms for a residential conveyance. LGST 114 (1.5) Wills and Probate Procedures (2,0,0) (F.S) A n examination o f the W i l l s A c t , and Estate A d m i n i s tration A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate in the Supreme Court of B . C . and be familiar with documentation required for issuance o f Letters of Administration. LGST 116 (1.5) Introduction to the Legal System (2,0,0) (F.S) This course acquaints students with a working k n o w l edge o f the Canadian and B . C . Court System, ethics o f the legal profession and the rules of the L a w Society relating to trust accounts, with added emphasis on legal vocabulary. LGST 117 Legal Office Procedures (1.5) (2,0.0) (S.Su) A course to prepare legal secretarial students for positions i n law offices. Instruction i n time keeping, diary systems, use of law library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the structure o f a law office, the differences between large and small offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice of law. LGST 119 Practicum (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) W o r k experience involving 24 lecture hours and at least 70 hours o f related office experience in the legal field. A l s o covered is the resume, job application, cover letter and interview. LGST 122 (3) (4,2,0) (S.Su) Computer Applications in the Legal Office The student w i l l learn to identify the components o f office automation. The student w i l l also require a practical knowledge and an understanding o f basic spreadsheet and data base concepts. LGST 123 (4.5) (6,3,0) (F.S) Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer U s i n g WordPerfect software on an I B M compatible microcomputer, the student w i l l be introduced to basic through advanced word processing concepts. Proficiency working with the program w i l l be acquired through the production o f various legal documents. LGST 124 (3) Organizational Behaviour (4,0,0) (F.S) This course looks at the effects o f individual and group behaviour i n organizations. Topics include leader behaviour and power, motivation, attitude development, perception, work stress and conflict. Students w i l l also learn how to apply communication, problem solving and conflict resolution skills toward an organization's overall effectiveness. LING 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure This course w i l l provide an introduction to the study of human language and ultimately the human mind. Linguistics 100 is designed to introduce the field of linguistics, and develops the core areas that are involved in the description and analysis o f language: morphology, syntax, phonetics and phonology. W e w i l l develop an understanding o f the concepts o f linguistics by looking at data from various languages around the world. LING 101 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use Prerequisite: L I N G 100 or permission of instructor. This course is a continuation of Linguistics 100 and explores the relationship of language to other systems — social, biological and cognitive. It explores the relationship between language and social systems (sociolinguistics), language change (historical linguistics), first and second language acquisition, language meaning and use (semantics and pragmatics), language typology and the nature o f writing systems. LSP. 100 (1.5) (S) Introduction: Economics for Trade Unionists A n economics course emphasizing both the simplicity of most economic ideas, and the relevance of economics to an understanding of the way Canadian society operates. It focuses on the reasons why economists disagree about free trade, the role o f government in the economy and the role o f unions, and isolates the political nature of most economic arguments. Topics discussed include the workings o f the market system, the idea o f competition and the reality of monopoly power, the potential benefits and costs o f "free trade", and the causes and consequences o f inflation and employment. LSP. 101 (1.5) (S) Labour Economics: Alternatives & Options This course builds on the material from L S P . 100 to provide information on alternative economic models including Marxist economic theory. Discussion focuses on the development and nature of capitalist economics and the causes of short and long term economic crises. LSP. 105 (1) Corporate Financial Statement Analysis (F.S) A general introduction to reading and understanding financial statements focusing on corporate income statements and balance sheets. There is discussion o f concepts such as the definition o f profit and investment return and how to determine the cost of employee benefits. Course Descriptions 265 LSP. 109 Legal Research Skills (1) (S) This course provides students with a general understanding of the fundamental principles o f legal research. Students learn the basics o f legal research by doing a series of specific research problems. The Labour Relations Board library and computers are used by the participants to undertake hands-on research assignments. LSP. 110 B.C. Labour Law (1.5) (F) A basic but comprehensive course designed to acquaint union members as well as officers and staff with the essentials of the provincial labour law. The course covers organizing, unfair labour practices, arbitration, strikes, lockouts and picketing, amongst other topics. The sessions include detailed examination of the Labour Relations Code, important Labour Relations Board decisions, as w e l l as court decisions dealing with labour law issues. LSP. 114 (1) Employment Standards Act (F.S) This course provides an in-depth review o f the E m p l o y ment Standards A c t with a view to understanding the requirements o f this A c t as it relates to collective agreements. Unions may not contract out o f the m i n i m u m standards but four sections o f the A c t allow collective agreements some flexibility. B y the end of the course, participants should have a good understanding o f whether a collective agreement has deficiencies when compared to the requirements of the A c t . LSP. 115 (1.5) Occupational Health and Safety (F) A general background to and overview of the main social, medical, economic, technical and legal issues facing B . C . workers i n the field o f health and safety. Special attention is given to the W o r k e r s ' Compensation Board. LSP. 116 (1) (F) Workers' Compensation Act and the WCB A broad examination o f the Code and decisions which affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction o f labour law research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed on the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect o f the collective agreement. The course provides a general understanding o f the Workers' Compensation A c t and the W C B The statutory and administrative framework o f the W o r k e r s ' Compensation Board and all phases o f claims handling are examined. Students are provided with information required to represent workers with compensation appeals with special emphasis on reviewing W C B claim files, securing evidence, presenting the evidence by written submissions and at oral hearings. LSP. 112 Arbitration Law LSP. 117 (1) Introduction to UIC Procedures LSP. 111 Canada Labour Code (1.5) (1.5) (S) (F) This course is designed to introduce trade unionists to the basics of labour arbitration law. The students w i l l acquire the knowledge and skills needed to identify the legal issues i n c o m m o n labour disputes, and to apply arbitration law to real or hypothetical cases, identify the essential facts i n dispute and what evidence can help prove them, and to create a closing argument, arguing both the facts and the law. LSP. 113 (1.5) (F,S) Public Service Staff Relations Act (PSSRA) A wide examination o f the federal labour laws dealing specifically with the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour law research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. Course Descriptions 266 (F.S) The Employment and Insurance A c t is a basic part o f Canada's "social safety net". H i g h unemployment makes employment insurance more important than ever to working people. This course is intended to help union officers and ordinary workers understand how employment insurance works. M a n y topics are covered, from the determination of insurable employments to types o f benefits, avoiding trouble with a claim, and termination. The complex appeal system is thoroughly discussed, and students are offered a chance to take part in a simulated Board o f Referees hearing at the final session. Students become familiar with the Employment and Insurance A c t and Regulations, policy manual, umpire's decisions, and other research tools. LSP. 118 Human Rights Law (1) (F,S) A n examination of the essential practices and procedures in human rights law focusing on sexual harassment and the duty to accommodate. This course offers up-to-date legal information from the provincial and federal jurisdictions. It provides an assessment o f legal protection under the H u m a n Rights Code of British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian H u m a n Rights A c t , and the Canadian Charter o f Rights and Freedoms, as well as collective agreements and institutional policies. The course provides the participant with a thorough understanding o f liability, the process of filing a complaint, and appropriate remedies in human rights law. LSP. 119 (1) Civil Rights and the Work Place (F,S) Specific c i v i l rights problems arising in the workplace, including issues of political, economic and legal rights of the worker; examination o f legal remedies available to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringement of c i v i l rights i n the work place; protection of c i v i l rights under the provincial and federal legislation through contracting and in collective agreements. A problem-solving format with discussions o f current c i v i l rights issues, "right-to-work" legislation, race and sex discrimination. LSP. 120 (1) Politics: Government Bureaucracy (F.S) A course which outlines how government operates i n various spheres, the impact it makes on the citizen, how to utilize procedures for redressing grievances that result from bureaucracy, and what channels are open for citizen participation. In addition, the course looks at the c i v i l servant and his/her relationship to other workers. LSP. 122 (1.5) Politics: Labour Policy in Canada (F.S) Provides a basic understanding o f the structures and processes o f policy making i n Canada with a direct focus on the formation o f labour policy. The participant gains a specific knowledge of the structures of government in Canada, learns the impact federalism has on policy formation, and becomes familiarized with channels o f policital input. LSP. 130 Sociology of Work (1.5) LSP. 131 (1.5) Race and Ethnic Relations (F.S) The issue o f racism has been used in the past to weaken and divide unions. This course w i l l help unionists become sensitive to complexities of race and ethnic relations; give practical advice on integrating minority workers into the union and develop techniques to deal with biases and prejudice at the work place and i n the . community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive effects of racism w i l l be discussed. LSP. 140 (1.5) (S) History of the Labour Movement in Canada A survey o f the history o f the labour movement in Canada from the formation of the working class in the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. B y looking at specific conflicts, a good overview is obtained o f the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to organize, obtain union recognition, bargain collectively and provide decent wages and working conditions. LSP. 141 (1) (F.S) Union Story: A Course in Practical History This is a companion course for the larger course i n Labour History, but it can be taken separately. It is designed to give some basic research skills, skills that can be applied toward learning the history of your union - its development, policies, past struggles and victories. It is meant to be a practical course: the participants learn how to use resources, how to apply them, and how to present the results to others. LSP. 142 (1.5) History of the Labour Movement in B.C. (S) The birth and growth o f trade unionism in B . C . Through a wide collection o f printed and visual materials participants analyze the raw and vital struggles between B . C . ' s working people and the industrialists who opposed them. The major economic and political issues o f the movement are traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the demand for the nine and eight-hour day, the problems o f racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for women's rights, political expression. (F.S) This course assists in the understanding of the social context in which work occurs. A n attempt to develop tools to understand the various social settings i n which work has been placed is undertaken. The different ways in which working people have been manipulated by the new social engineers is also studied. Course Descriptions 267 LSP. 150 (1) Women in the Work Force (S) This course focuses on the impacts of workplace restructuring and trends women face in the workforce. A fundamental restructuring has been taking place, with a shift away from manufacturing to service sector and a dramatic rise i n contract, temporary and part-time work. The course examines what these trends mean for the wage gap, for women's abilities to unionize and for women's unpaid work. These w i l l be put into a historical and global context. W o m e n ' s experiences i n B . C . w i l l be compared with the experiences o f other provinces and countries. The course explores the responses unions have made to these trends and women's organizing in communities, across the country and across borders. LSP. 151 (1) (F.S) Leadership Skills, Assertiveness and Advocacy Attempts not only to provide women with the skills they need to take a leadership role i n their trade union, but also takes a careful look at the way sex role stereotyping inhibits us from developing these skills. This course covers the following areas: W o m e n and Power, Assertiveness, A d v o c a c y , Organizing and Group Dynamics. LSP. 155 (1) (F,S) Indian Land Claims and Union Movement This course acquaints the participant with the position of native people on the issue of land claims. A n understanding of the implications of native land claims for the trade union movement and the history o f native people in Canada and British C o l u m b i a is gained. This history is studied in relation to the whole question o f land. LSP. 160 (3) Media for Trade Union Education and Organization (F,S) The objective o f this course is to become familiar with simple media production skills for use in the labour movement. The participant learns how to record and dub audio material, use an instamatic or 35 m m still camera for slides, produce a simple slide-audio show, use portable video equipment for basic recording, write news releases, pamphlets, and internal newsletters and edit audio and video tape. LSP. 161 (1.5) Working with Mass Media (F,S) This course is designed to acquaint trade unionists with the nature of print and electronic mass media with a view to improving techniques for relating to the media. Specific topics which emerge from the classes w i l l be Course 268 Descriptions dealt with, typical o f w h i c h might be media ownership and the process o f "newsmaking". LSP. 162 (1) (F.S) Working Culture and History of Labour Arts Since its beginning, Canadian labour has worked to build a cultural life supportive o f the concerns o f working people. A t the same time, visual artists, f i l m makers, dramatists, musicians, writers and other cultural workers have identified with the movement for social change embodied in organized labour. This course explores the history of Canadian labour culture, the influence of various ethnic and international currents in creating a rich cultural identity and the limits and possibilities opened by the advent of mass media. Examples o f f i l m , video, television, song, literature and visual art are used as focal points for discussion. LSP. 163 Media Workshop (1.5) (F,S) The aim o f this workshop is to acquaint learners with current multi-media presentation techniques. LSP. 170 (1.5) Communications: Public Speaking (F,S) A l l the skills and techniques necessary for effective communications in active union involvement. Designed to meet the needs o f active unionists and officers, this course combines principles and practice in a "learn while d o i n g " format. Training i n the following skills areas: 1. effective public speaking: including methods of oral communication, effective listening and response, confidence building, and style development. Role plays aid the participant in overcoming fears and speech anxiety while m a x i m i z i n g organization, objectives and analysis of impact. 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation of agendas, and building a good "process" with the assistance o f rules o f order. LSP.180 Stewards' Training (1.5) (F,S) This course is intended to assist stewards and union members in developing confidence i n their ability to adequately represent their fellow workers at the office or job site as well as provide the m i n i m u m technical skills i n advocacy and contract interpretation. In addition, the course provides a brief overview o f the history o f the North American labour movement and its institutions as they have developed. LSP. 181 Collective Bargaining (1.5) (F.S) LSP. 192 (1) (F.S) Introduction to Health & Welfare Benefits This course provides technical and practical information for the union negotiator. Includes instruction on the bargaining process including preparation and development of proposals; contract language and costing. Bargaining table advocacy skills are explored. Material is available for the specific needs o f public and private sector bargaining. A bargaining simulation is held as an integral part o f the course. This course has been developed to provide a working understanding of the various aspects of health & welfare/benefit plans. The following topics are incorporated: what is contained in a health & welfare plan; government involvement; designing a benefit plan, costing components; methods o f financing a benefit plan; benefit plan administration. LSP. 182 (1.5) Union Local Administration (F.S) This course is designed to provide union activists and local officers with basic skills in parliamentary procedures as well as the administrative duties o f officers and committee members in local unions. The course requires considerable student participation to develop debating and advocacy skills. LSP. 190 Contract Costing (D (F.S) This course evaluates the "numbers game" played at the bargaining table and in the media around bargaining issues. It deals with union and emplbyer approaches to costing the different elements o f bargaining proposals and settlements. Topics discussed include: • wages and benefits and the concept of total compensation; • the effects o f inflation and design of C O L A clauses; • sources of information for monetary negotiations and the uses and limitations of external comparisons. Participants also consider issues such as strategy, the public relations aspects o f costing, and the relationship of costing to pay equity. LSP. 191 (1) Introduction to Pension Plans (F.S) This course, useful for Pension Trustees, potential Trustees, union officers and pension plan administrative staff, is a thorough examination o f pension plans and pension issues. Topics developed and discussed include defined benefit and money purchase plans; regulation of pensions; the law o f trusts; investment principles and practices; the design, financing, administration and communication of pension plans; strategic planning for pensions. LSP. 212 (1.5) Advocacy Before Labour Tribunals (S) This course is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 110, 111 or 112. The course is also designed for trade unionists who have presented or assisted in hearings before grievance arbitration boards, labour relations boards and human rights tribunals. Students w i l l acquire a knowledge of advocacy techniques and skill, and the preparation requirements needed to effectively act as counsel at hearings before tribunals. Students w i l l have opportunities throughout the course to practice their advocacy skills. LSP. 216 (1.5) Workers' Compensation Appeals — Intermediate Level (F.S) This course is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 116 or have experience in representing workers with compensation appeals. The course provides an understanding of the Workers' Compensation appeals process with special emphasis on policies, procedures and practice by preparing and presenting appeals at the Workers' Compensation R e v i e w Board. Students are provided with practical skills for reviewing medical evidence and requesting medical legal opinions. A key part of the course is a case study that involves preparation of an appeal and the presentation of the appeal to a panel o f the W o r k e r s ' Compensation R e v i e w Board. LSP. 226 (1) (F.S) Advanced Workers' Compensation — Appeal Preparation The course is open to students who have previously completed L S P . 116, L S P . 216 or have experience i n representing workers with compensation at the appeal level. This course provides detailed review o f A d vanced W o r k e r s ' Compensation Appeals to the A p peals Tribunal (Commissioners) and to the M e d i c a l R e v i e w Panel. Students review appeals procedures and policies for advanced appeals and complete practical skills exercises. Course Descriptions 269 MATH 009 Arithmetic (1) (0,3*,0)(F,S,Su) A review of the basic arithmetic operations. A p p l i c a tions to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. * Students are generally required to attend three scheduled hours per week for this course. MATH 091 (1) (4*,0,0) (F.S.Su) Introductory Algebra Prerequisites: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) ; or Principles o f M a t h 11 or Applications of M a t h 12 with at least a " C - " grade. Develops the concepts o f introductory algebra with emphasis on the real number system, the algebra o f exponents, and polynomial arithmetic at the elementary level. This course is intended for students who require a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week for approximately four weeks. No duplicate creditfor MATH 090/091. MATH 096 (2) (4*,0,0)(F,S,Su) Intermediate Algebra with Functions Prerequisites: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past twelve months of: M A T H 090 or 091 with at least a " B - " grade; or B M T H 045 or Principles o f M a t h 11 or Applications of M a t h 12 with at least a " C + " grade. Develops the concepts o f intermediate algebra including polynomials, rational expressions, radical expressions, quadratic equations and an introduction to logarithms. This course is intended for students who have already completed a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week approximately ten weeks. No duplicate creditfor MATH 095/096. MATH 101 (3) Introduction to Statistics (4,0,0) (F.S) Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) ; or M A T H 090 or M A T H 091 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade; or Principles of M a t h 11 or Applications o f M a t h 12 with at least a " C " grade . A n introduction to the language o f statistics and some statistical methods, including random variables and their distribution; random sampling, normal distribution, estimation o f parameters and testing hypotheses. No duplicate creditfor MATH 101/204. MATH 102 Statistical Methods (3) Prerequisite: M A T H 101 with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f important statistical methods c o m m o n l y used i n the analysis of research data, including t-tests and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis of variance, chi-square tests and regression analysis. MATH 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Precalculus Mathematics Note: This course is not transferable to UBC except if combined with MATH 108 or 116 (for some faculties). Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past twelve months of: Principles o f M a t h 12 with at least a " C " grade; or B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 095 or M A T H 096 with at least a " C + " grade. Students who have completed within the past twelve months M A T H 095 or M A T H 096 with a " C - " or " C " grade are permitted to enrol in M A T H 105 only i f they enrol in M A T H 096 concurrently. A review o f algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a Principles o f M a t h 12 equivalent course. No duplicate creditfor MATH 105/107. MATH 107 (3) (4.0,0) (F,S) Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences Note: This course is not transferable to UBC unless combined with MATH 108 (for some faculties). Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m pletion within the past twelve months of: Principles o f M a t h 12 with at least a " C " grade; or B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 095 or M A T H 096 with at least a " C + " grade. Students who have completed within the past twelve months M A T H 095 or M A T H 096 with a " C - " or " C " grade are permitted to enrol in M A T H 107 only i f they enrol in M A T H 096 concurrently. The mathematical models/applications in this course w i l l be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems o f linear equations, functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and geometric progressions, compound interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. No duplicate credit for MATH 105/107. Course Descriptions 270 (4,0,0) (S) MATH 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Calculus I for Business and Social Sciences MATH 124 Discrete Mathematics I Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m pletion within the past twelve months of: Principles o f M a t h 12 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 105 or M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R c o m pletion within the past twelve months of: Principles o f M a t h 12 with an " A " grade; or Principles of M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to the mathematics o f change; the concepts of calculus and the application o f these concepts to business and the social sciences using a technology-based modelling approach; mathematical models o f data sets using continuous functions; using the derivative and integral to investigate change; interpreting and communicating results. (3) (4.0.0) (F.S.Su) A survey o f fundamental topics in discrete mathematics including: mathematical proofs using direct arguments, indirect arguments, and induction; the algebra o f sets; combinatorics; functions and relations; and graph theory. This course stresses the special role o f discrete mathematics i n computing science. No duplicate credit for MATH 108/116. MATH 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Calculus II for Business and Social Sciences Prerequisite: M A T H 108 or 116 with at least a " C - " grade. Trigonometric functions, applications o f the definite integral, integration techniques. Functions o f several independent variables, partial derivatives, extrema, Lagrange multipliers, multiple integrals, some techniques for solving differential equations, systems o f linear equations and matrix algebra. MATH 126 Calculus II (3) (4.0.0) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: M A T H 116 with at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: M A T H 127 A study of the anti-derivative, the integral, techniques of integration, applications o f the integral, differential equations, polar coordinates, sequences, infinite series and T a y l o r ' s Theorem. Continued emphasis on the geometric interpretation o f the concepts o f calculus. No duplicate creditfor MATH 109/126. No duplicate creditfor MATH 109/126. MATH 127 (1) Applications of Calculus II MATH 116 Calculus I Prerequisite: M A T H 117 with at least a " D " grade or permission of instructor. Corequisite: M A T H 126 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Prerequisites: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past twelve months of: Principles o f M a t h 12 with an " A " grade; or Principles of M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " grade in each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " grade. (1,1.0) (F,S,Su) Applications o f integral calculus with an emphasis on the use o f technology in mathematics. Topics include: numerical integration, introduction to a computer algebra system, applications in science, differential equations, sequences and series. Corequisite: M A T H 117 Limits, continuity, the derivative, rules of differentiation, implicit differentiation, parametric curves, related rates, curve sketching, optimization, linear approximations, transcendental functions, indeterminate forms, anti-differentiation. Throughout the course a strong emphasis is placed on the geometric interpretation o f the concepts o f calculus. No duplicate credit for MATH 108/116. MATH 117 (1) Applications of Calculus I (1.1,0) (F.S.Su) MATH 152 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Linear Algebra and Differential Equations Note: This course is intended for students in the Engineering program. Corequisite: M A T H 126 A n introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. The theory w i l l be applied to first order linear differential equations, first order linear systems and engineering topics. Corequisite: M A T H 116 Applications o f differential calculus with an emphasis on the use of technology i n mathematics. Topics include: models, curve fitting, Taylor polynomials, numerical stability, numerical derivatives, rates of change, optimization. Course Descriptions 271 MATH 190 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Mathematics for Elementary Teachers MATH 215 (3) Introduction to Analysis Prerequisite: Math Placement Test (MPT); or M A T H 090 or M A T H 091 or B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 095 or M A T H 096 with at least a " C - " grade; or Principles of Math 11 or Applications of Math 12 with at least a " C " grade. Prerequisite: M A T H 126 with at least a "C+" grade or permission of instructor. A study of selected topics in mathematics so that future elementary teachers gain an appreciation of the power, beauty, and importance of mathematics. Topics include: problem solving, number systems, geometry, measurement, probability and statistics. This course does not normally count for credit in science programs. A course for students who plan to proceed in mathematics. Logic, sets, functions, limits of sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, Riemann Integral. * M A T H 215 to be offered in the fall or spring term when sufficient student demand is evident. MATH 224 Discrete Mathematics II Prerequisite: The Math Department offers a full second- year university transfer program in math. Students planning to take 200 level math should seek advice from Math instructors. MATH 200 Linear Algebra Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) M A T H 126 with at least a " C - " grade. An introduction to systems of linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. Theorems and proofs are an important component of the course. MATH 204 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Probability and Statistics for Applications Prerequisite: M A T H 108 or 116 with at least a " C - " grade or permission of the instructor. An introduction to inferential statistical methods. Confidence intervals, t-tests, chi-square tests, correlation and regression. The emphasis will be on problem formulation, models, assumptions and interpretation. Regularly scheduled "labs" will introduce course participants to appropriate supporting statistical software. No duplicate credit for MATH 101/204. (4,0,0) (F,S)* (3) (4,0.0) (S) M A T H 124 with at least a " C - " grade. A continuation of the study of discrete mathematics from M A T H 124. The emphasis is on combinatorial analysis, including generating functions, set theory and graph theory, with applications to computing science including representations, algorithms, and complexity. MATH 230 Calculus III Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) M A T H 126 with at least a " C - " grade. M A T H 200 or M A T H 152. Analytical geometry of three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. MATH 231 Calculus IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M A T H 230 and M A T H 152 or 200 with at least a " C - " grade in each. Vector calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stokes's Theorem; applications. MATH 235 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Differential Equations Prerequisite: M A T H 200 or M A T H 152 and 230 with at least a " C - " grade in each. MATH 205 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Probability and Statistics An introduction to ordinary differential equations; first Prerequisite: tions; linear systems; power series techniques; Laplace M A T H 126 with at least a " C - " grade. A calculus-based study of probability, discrete and continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions, Central Limit Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing. Course 272 Descriptions order equations; higher order linear differential equatransform method; the phase plane, applications. MDIA 065 Media Studies (3) (3,0,1) (S) An introductory analysis and historical overview of media, especially film, combining aesthetic concepts, production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See admission requirements in the Media Resources Section. This is a Media Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 100 (3) Introduction to Video Production (3,0,1) (F) MDIA 172 Video Technology I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course concentrates on the basic skills involved in video production with an emphasis on camera techniques and visual sequencing. A n introduction to video systems, including a history (3,0,1) (S) MDIA 173 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Educational Media Applications: Audio This course is an introduction to digital technology and A n introduction to the fundamental principles o f sound generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, hardware, and systems related to audio components. Applications of audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis o f product specifications are given special emphasis. MDIA 101 New Media Literacy (3) multimedia. It w i l l introduce students to the characteristics, applications and analysis o f multimedia. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 102 (3) Introduction to Photography (4,0,0) (S) This course is an introduction to photographic skills, emphasizing fundamental skills in camera and image control. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. MDIA 105 Project Design (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A n introduction to project design. Through the analysis of media production, students learn how to write an effective design plan for a media project. MDIA 120 (1.5) Film Studies for Animation (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l familiarize students with structural elements and basic principles o f filmmaking. Students w i l l develop a " f i l m sense" w h i c h is a basic skill o f storyboard artists and filmmakers. MDIA 142 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Computer Managed Learning and Training This course examines the concepts underlying the learning process and how the computer can be used to enhance this process. The instructional design process w i l l be examined and w i l l provide a platform for the investigation and application of a process to plan, produce, implement, and evaluate computer-delivered learning and training strategies. MDIA 150 (3) Introduction to Animation (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the theory and application of animation techniques. Computer animation is the primary medium in this course. MDIA 156 Computers in Media (3) (3,0,1) (S) Basic computer skills in word processing and introductory training in graphics and desktop publishing applications as they relate to media production. This is a M e d i a Resources Certificate program course. of video technology, components o f a complete video system, and a comparison o f different formats. MDIA 181 Basic Audio Production (3) (3,0,1) (F) A n introduction to basic production techniques; components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, m i x i n g , and packaging. The course also covers the operation o f microphones, tape recorders and dub/ mix facilities. MDIA 182 (3) Advanced Audio Production (3,0,1) (S) The application o f production techniques in a variety o f situations, including multi-track recording and m i x i n g , documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film and video soundtracks and music recording, often using the department's sound production studio. MDIA 183 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Theory and Applications of Photographic Production A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materials and their control, and visual reproduction. MDIA 185 Advanced Photography (3) (3,0,1) (S) The application o f photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as well as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. MDIA 186 (3) Computers in Media Production (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the use o f computers in pre-production to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application in graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. Course Descriptions 273 MDIA 195 Photography (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) MDIA 299 Major Projects (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the areas o f darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and medium format copy camera, and relevant copying materials used in a variety of media applications. Students w i l l w o r k i n production groups to produce programs for outside clients. Students are responsible for all aspects of these productions from contact to completion. MDIA 200 Intermediate Video I MDIA 300 (6) Advanced Video Production (3) (3,0,1) (S) This course is designed to build on the basics of video recording and sequencing taught in M D I A 100. Students w i l l focus on lighting, audio recording and editing for single camera productions. Workshops and exercises w i l l form a major part o f this course as well as a final production which students w i l l produce i n production groups. (3,0,1) (F) This advanced production course develops students' basic production skills (taught i n M D I A 100, 200 & 202) to a level suitable to produce for cablecast, broadcast and instructional and corporate settings. MDIA 303 (3) (3,0,1) (S) The Media Specialist in Education and Training In this course students w i l l learn the fundamentals o f developing, writing, and presenting material suitable for basic video documentary productions. A course concerned with the uses o f media for motivation, information transmission, emotive learning, and self-awareness. A field practicum course exploring the relationship of the media specialist to education in general and the role o f the media generalist in educational and instructional communication. MDIA 231 (3) Digital Video Post Production MDIA 304 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Educational Media Applications: Computers MDIA 202 Intermediate Video II (3) (3,0,1) (S) (3,0,1) (S) This course provides the student with a hands on introduction to digital image manipulation for commercial video production. The A v i d non linear editing system w i l l be the main vehicle for teaching digital editing and effects. MDIA 250 (1.5) Documentary Scriptwriting (2,0,0) (F) MOA. 100 (3) Medical Document Processing I Prerequisite: A n overview o f the production planning process with an emphasis on the roles o f scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards i n documentary production. MDIA 263 Production Resources A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use o f computers i n education. Includes producing and evaluating computer-assisted instruction packages and computer-assisted video instruction. (4,2,0) (F) Keyboarding speed o f 35 w p m Keyboarding skill development and introduction to M S Office 97; basic to advanced applications ( W o r d 97, W i n d o w s 95, Powerpoint 97). (2,0,0) (S) MOA. 102 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) Keyboarding Skill and Speed Development The comparative study o f media technical systems and their operation; evaluation of various resources available i n the L o w e r M a i n l a n d ; design and/or modification o f systems for media production and delivery; and interface o f different types o f systems. Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed (1.5) MDIA 271 (3) Educational Television Systems (3,0,1) (F) This course assumes background i n basic portable video tape equipment and operations covered in M D I A 200 and 202 and is designed to develop the students' ability to effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the production o f educational programs. These programs are o f a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the K n o w l e d g e Network. Course Descriptions 274 writings to increase speed and accuracy i n medical keyboarding. MOA. 103 (3) Medical Machine Transcription Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) M O A . 100 & 111 Practice in transcribing medical consultation letters and hospital reports from dictation equipment. This course entails a mandatory two-hour lab. MOA. 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Medical Administrative Procedures I MOA. 115 (1.5) Directed Work Experience Students w i l l learn office procedures specific to the medical office including time management, medical ethics, appointments, patient record, filing, reception skills, and medical billing. Prerequisite: St. John's First A i d Enhanced or industry certificate (16 hours) MOA. 106 (0.75) (2,0,0) (S) Medical Administrative Procedures II Prerequisite: M O A . 105 Continuation o f M O A . 105. Students w i l l be able to perform financial recordkeeping specific to the medical office. (2,0,54) (S) F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f term two, a medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the work placement, the student w i l l be required to attend career preparation lectures w h i c h w i l l include practice sessions for the employment interview. MOA. 121 (1.5) Medical Document Processing II (2,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: M O A . 100 MOA. 107 Clinical Procedures I (1.5) (2,4,0) (F) Students w i l l learn about clinical procedures pertinent to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and mental health; medications and health products. Students w i l l learn how to use and maintain medical office equipment. There is a mandatory lab component. MOA. 108 (1.5) (2,4,0) (S) Clinical Procedures II and Pharmacology Prerequisite: M O A . 107 Continuation o f M O A . 107. There is a mandatory lab component. A d v a n c e d Office 97 applications are used i n a medical environment. MOA. 122 (1.5) Computers in Health Care (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M O A . 105, M O A . 100. Students w i l l be introduced to the use of computers i n the medical office. Students w i l l acquire skills using a microcomputer to gather patient demographic data, set up appointments, process claims for submission to M S P , process remittance reports and accounts receivable. M.T. 320 Improvisation I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) MOA. 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology I A n experiential study o f free and structured improvisa- A study o f structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems of the body. C o m m o n medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology w i l l be studied in conjunction with the systems. M.T. 330 Basic Clinical Skills MOA. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology II A continuation of M O A . 109. (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms c o m m o n to medical terminology. Students w i l l aquire the necessary skills to define, pronounce and correctly spell medical terms. MOA. 112 Medical Terminology II (3) (3) (3,15,0) (F) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks of introductory field work and in-class observations. M.T. 340 (1.5) Midi Synthesis Technology Prerequisite: M O A . 109 MOA. 111 Medical Terminology I tion forms for groups and solo work. (2,0,0) (F) A n introduction to the use o f m i d i technology for the therapeutic setting. M.T. 350 The Influence of Music (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study of the physical and psychological impact o f music, and its components for music therapy. A study of healing and music i n various cultures. (4,0,0) (3) Prerequisite: M O A . 111 Continuation, reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. M.T. 360 Music Therapy I (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course presents the development of music as therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the potential of music as a therapeutic medium. Course Descriptions 275 M.T. 361 Music Therapy II (3) (4,0,0) (S) M.T. 460 Music Therapy III (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course presents three music therapy styles with a focus o n theory, analysis, and practice. Included are Developmental M u s i c Therapy, Nordoff/Robbins improvisational style, and the use o f music therapy i n in-patient psychotherapy. A continuation o f the presentation of music therapy styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education and in healing, including the work of Helen B o n n y and M a r y Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning w i l l be covered i n depth. M.T. 364 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Disabling Conditions — Adulthood M.T. 461 Music Therapy IV A n introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal and abnormal, and practical elements o f standard treatment. This course focuses on professional attitudes, skills and awareness including a significant section on counselling skills for music therapists. Students learn job hunting/ creation skills and practise leading inservices and workshops. M.T. 370 (3) Disabling Conditions — Childhood (4,0,0) (S) A basic introduction to abnormal child development and some major intervention approaches. M.T. 380 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Interpersonal Skills for Music Therapists Communication and observation exercises to increase awareness of ingrained skills and habits, and to introduce new alternatives. M.T. 391 Practicum II (6) (2,72,0) (S) Field work, i n w h i c h students design, lead and document music therapy sessions, in consultation with staff supervision. W e e k l y seminars examine practicum issues. M.T. 462 Principles of Research (3) (3) (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to elementary research designs and basic statistical procedures. M.T. 480 Improvisation III (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A continuation of Improvisation II. M.T. 490 Practicum III (6) (2,72,0) (F) Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) M.T. 491 Practicum IV (6) (2,72,6) (S) F i e l d work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) M.T. 420 (1) Improvisation II — Guitar (1.33,0,0) (S) Group leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploring current popular styles and idioms. M.T. 510 Internship (9) (12,0,0) 1,000 hours of clinical field work, including monthly seminars. M.T. 450 (1.5) The Influence of Music II (2,0,0) (F) A continuation o f lecture and experiential exposure to MTEC 101 MAC Operating System (.40) (6,0,2) (F.S) the influence of music i n conjunction with the expres- (two 4-hour sessions) sive arts. A n introduction to the M a c operating system for students new to the Macintosh computer or i n need o f a M.T. 451 (1.5) Music and the Creative Arts (2,0,0) (S) A n experiential exposure to leading creative arts activities w h i c h can be used in conjunction with music: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. refresher course. MTEC 102 (.80) Welcome to the Internet (3,0,1) (F.S) (taught online over the internet) Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i g a tor v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. This course introduces the Internet and the W o r l d W i d e W e b including: protocols, ISPs, web browser configuration, and search engines. Course 276 Descriptions MTEC 103 (.80) Web Design Fundamentals (3,0.1) (F,S) MTEC 109 Photoshop for the Web (taught online over the internet) (four 4-hour sessions) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a (.80) (3.0,1) (F.S) M T E C 103 or equivalent experience. direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i - Experience with Macintosh or W i n d o w s operating gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail systems. address. Learn how to prepare J P E G and G I F graphics for the In this course students w i l l learn the fundamental web using A d o b e Photoshop. Covers basic features of design principles used when publishing on the W o r l d Photoshop including tools, layers, resolution and Wide Web. colour palettes. Includes an introduction to reflective and transparency image scanning. MTEC 104 Planning a Web Site (.40) (6,0,2) (F.S) (taught online over the internet) MTEC 110 HTML Authoring Prerequisite: (four 4-hour sessions) Access to a networthy computer with a (.80) (3,0.1) (F.S) direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i - Prerequisite: gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail A n intermediate course in web authoring. Learn the M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. address. HyperText M a r k - u p Language used to create web In this course students w i l l study content mapping, pages. Covers the following tags: anchors, links, image project planning and information design as it relates to maps, background and inline graphics, tables, frames, web site production. Students w i l l write a web site and embedded media. design plan suitable for a client. MTEC 105 Interface Design (.80) (6,0,2) (F.S) MTEC 112 Web Animation (.40) (3,0.1) (F.S) (two 4 -hour sessions) (taught online over the internet) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: operating systems and A d o b e Photoshop. Access to a networthy computer with a Experience with M a c i n t o s h or W i n d o w s direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i - Learn how to turn simple graphics into a G I F anima- gator v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail tion for your web page. U s i n g Photoshop and address. G I F B u i l d e r software you w i l l learn the basics o f Interface design involves the presentation of informa- animation and create a G I F animation. tion on the computer screen and the interaction o f the user with that information. This course examines the principles o f interface design as it relates to a web site. MTEC 113 (.80) (3,0,1) (F,S) Embedded Media Sound for the Web (four 4-hour sessions) MTEC 106 (.80) (3,0,1) (F.S) Introductory Web Site Production (four 4-hour Prerequisite: sessions) Prerequisite: M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. Increasingly, sound is being incorporated into web pages. Learn how to digitize, edit and compress audio basic computer skills and online experi- ence. for inclusion i n a web page using M a c r o m e d i a Sound Edit 16 software. This course teaches the web page authoring program page using this software and in the process learn the MTEC 115 (.80) Web Site Administration basics of web page production. (four 4-hour sessions) A d o b e Pagemill. Students w i l l create a personal web MTEC 108 (.80) Intermediate Web Design (3,0,1) (F.S) (four 4-hour sessions) Prerequisite: W e b Design Fundamentals M T E C 103 or previous experience. Co-requisite: Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F,S) M T E C 106 or equivalent experience. This course covers site administration including: locating a host ISP, D o m a i n Name registration, posting a site using F T P , analysing server logs and site security. Y o u sill also learn how to work with U N I X and N T web servers. M T E C 109 A n intermediate course in designing for the W e b screen. C o l o u r theory and palettes, image compression and screen layout are covered. Course Descriptions ill MTEC 116 Web-Site Marketing (.80) (3,0,1) (F,S) (taught online over the internet) MUS. 110 Class Strings I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A practical study of the v i o l i n family. Prerequisite: Access to a networthy computer with a tor v. 4 or Internet Explorer v. 4 and an e-mail address. MUS. 111 Class Strings II Marketing a web site is one of the most important A continuation of M U S . 110. direct or dial-up account with an ISP, Netscape N a v i g a - (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) aspects o f web publishing. In this course you w i l l learn how to write a marketing plan for your web site. MTEC 117 Javascript (.80) (3,0,1) (F.S) MUS. 112 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing I (3,0,0) (F) Corequisite: M U S . 100. Study o f the aural recognition o f intervals, chords, and (four 4-hour sessions) harmonic movement. The student w i l l learn to: tran- Prerequisite: M T E C 110 or equivalent experience. Javascript is a scripting language developed by scribe melodies and rhythms; sight sing using Solfege and scale degrees; read rhythms. Netscape used to include interactive components on a web page. In this course you w i l l learn how to write javascript and incorporate it into H T M L . MTEC 118 (.80) (3,0.1) (F.S) Advanced Photoshop for the Web (four 4-hour sessions) Prerequisite: M T E C 109 or equivalent experience. A n advanced course using Adobe Photoshop for web graphics. Includes image compositing and retouching, progressive J P E G and P N G graphic formats, masks and channels. MTEC 119 Advanced HTML (.80) (3,0,1) (F.S) (four 4-hour sessions) Prerequisite: M T E C 110 or equivalent experience. A n advanced course in H T M L coding. Learn how to add interactive components to your web page. Including forms, counters, calls to external media, secure sockets layer, embedding javascript and cookies. MUS. 113 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing II (3,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M U S . 112. Corequisite: M U S . 101. A continuation o f M U S . 112. MUS. 114 Class Piano I (1) (2,2,0) (F) This course is designed for students who w i s h to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered in class. Students practise on the department's pianos. MUS. 115 Class Piano II (D (2,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: M U S . 114. MUS. 100 Music Theory I (3) (4.0.0) (F) Corequisite: M U S . 112. A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an emphasis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. The student w i l l learn control of chord progression and voice leading. MUS. 101 Music Theory II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M U S . 100. Corequisite: M U S . 113. Continued study o f diatonic harmony, to include treatment of all diatonic triads and sevenths, principles of voice leading, and techniques o f contrapuntal expansion. Analysis o f works i n binary and ternary forms. Course 278 Descriptions A continuation of M U S . 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. MUS. 120 Music History I (3) (4,0,0*) (F) The study o f music as an acoustical and structural phenomenon. T o survey the major monuments o f world music history in relation to the function o f music in a given culture. The aim w i l l be to introduce music as a global concept, drawing on musics from Eastern and Western musical traditions. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 121 Music History II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0*) (S) M U S . 120. A study of music history of the M e d i e v a l and Renaissance periods. MUS. 213 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing IV Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3,0,0) (S) M U S . 212. M U S . 201. A continuation o f M U S . 212. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 122 (1.0) Lyric Diction: English and German (2,0,0) A n exploration of the application o f the principles o f diction for singers i n E n g l i s h and German through the medium o f the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). MUS. 123 (1.0) Lyric Diction: French and Italian (2,0,0) A n exploration of the application of the principles o f diction for singers i n French and Italian through the medium of the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). MUS. 200 Music Theory III Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) A study o f advanced tonal procedures: review o f nonchord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and V I I , diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study o f compound ternary and rondo forms. Investigation o f the fugue. Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) A study o f chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism i n larger contexts. A detailed study o f sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A continuation of M U S . 210. MUS. 212 (1.5) Ear Training & Sight Singing III Prerequisite: Corequisite: M U S . 113. M U S . 200. MUS. 215 Class Piano IV MUS. 218 Class Brass (1) (2,2,0) (S) (1.5) (3,0,0) (F) (3,0,0) (F) A practical study o f the brass family. MUS. 219 Class Percussion (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) A practical study o f the percussion family. Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0*) (F) M U S . 120 and M U S . 121. A survey o f music history of the Baroque period and Classical period. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 221 Music History IV Prerequisite: A practical study of the w o o d w i n d family. MUS. 211 Class Woodwinds II (2,2,0) (F) F o r students who have taken M U S . 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to c o m m o n idiomatic accompaniment patterns as w e l l as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application i n simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. MUS. 220 Music History III M U S . 200. M U S . 213. MUS. 210 Class Woodwinds I (1) A continuation o f M U S . 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. M U S . 101. M U S . 212. MUS. 201 Music Theory IV MUS. 214 Class Piano III (3) (4,0,0*) (S) M U S . 220. A survey o f music history o f the Romantic period and the 20th century. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. MUS. 360 Kodaly Methodology (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) This w i l l provide a knowledge o f K o d a l y methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method i n a classroom. A continuation of M U S . 113. Course Descriptions 279 MUS. 361 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Method Studies in Music Education: Orff Methodology This w i l l provide a knowledge of Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. NSCP 305 Network II (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) NSCP 333 Network VI (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Internetworking M S T C P / I P on W i n d o w s N T 4.0 ( M S #688). T C P / I P is "the" internetworking protocol and this course w i l l cover the fundamentals o f this protocol with Microsoft W i n d o w s N T . Topics include the subnet mask, static/dynamic IP routing, D H C P , W I N S , D N S , S N M P and more. Administering Microsoft N T Server ( M S #803). Learn and gain experience on the many features of the W i n d o w s N T server including user accounts, group NSCP 335 Network VII (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) accounts, file and folder permissions, shared folders, Creating and M a n a g i n g a W e b Server using M S IIS 4.0 printing, and security. ( M S #936). Learn to install and configure a web server. Y o u w i l l NSCP 325 Network III (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) perform the procedures to install, configure and N o v e l l 4.11 NetWare Administration ( N o v e l l #520). This course is your introduction to the field o f local area network administration, protocols and standards, hardware and software components and P C links. U p o n successful completion o f this course, you may elect to write your N o v e l l exam w h i c h grants a C N A — Certified NetWare Administrator — designation. NSCP 329 Network IV (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) W i n d o w s N T Core Technologies ( M S #922). This course provides the advanced skills to install, configure, optimize, administer and perform day-to-day management tasks i n a Microsoft W i n d o w s N T environment. Fault tolerance, NetWare integration and migration, server-based installation and troubleshooting w i l l be introduced together with advanced administration techniques. The student is also introduced to T C P / I P , D H C P , W I N S , D N S , R A S Server, and client administration. NSCP 331 Network V (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Supporting M S Server 4.0 — Enterprise Technologies ( M S #689). This course allows networking professionals to support Microsoft W i n d o w s N T i n an enterprise environment. Y o u w i l l learn to design, implement and support the W i n d o w s N T Server Network Operating System i n a multi-domain enterprise environment. Course 280 Descriptions gain an understanding o f the product's architecture and support an Internet Information Server. PADM 300 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Local Government Administration in B.C. Prerequisite: Current employment i n a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission of the instructor. This course w i l l include discussion o f the structures and administration o f local governments, as w e l l as current issues i n local governance. Topics include: the history and purposes of local government; how local governments are organized and administered, their powers and limitations; issues o f sustainability; relations with aboriginal governments; and issues o f public participation such as interest group lobbying and public consultation. PADM 301 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Local Government Services in B.C. Prerequisite: Current employment i n a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y and permission of the instructor. This course w i l l examine the services that municipalities provide to their citizens i n British C o l u m b i a . Services to be discussed include: Public W o r k s , Protective Services including Fire and Police, Regulatory Services, Water and Sewer Services, Refuse Collection and S o l i d Waste disposal, Recreation and Cultural Services, Environmental Protection Services, and Health Services. PADM 302 (3) Municipal Finance in B.C. (4,0,0) (F or S) PCAD 019 (1.5) Applied Theory: Practicum I (0,4,11) (F) Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission o f the instructor. The first part of the practicum course is a series of field This course w i l l examine the practices and issues of M u n i c i p a l Finance in British C o l u m b i a and w i l l include discussion o f the M u n i c i p a l A c t as it pertains to Financial Administration; the role o f provincial government in Financial Administration, the role of the M u n i c i p a l Finance Authority; the Finance Function at the M u n i c i p a l / R e g i o n a l levels; A c c o u n t i n g and Financial controls in Municipalities and Regional Districts; The Financial Planning Process including Short T e r m Budgets and L o n g T e r m Financial Planning; Financing Options; General Accounting/Treasury Functions; Assessment, Taxation, Collection. arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and trips designed to increase the student's awareness o f community resources. In the second part o f the course students spend two weeks in a practicum placement observes the student w o r k i n g i n the practicum setting. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work i n P C A D 013. PCAD 022 Human Relations II (2.0,0) (F) (1.5) This is the second course i n human relations, i n w h i c h the student continues to develop knowledge and skills related to the needs of clients with disabilities. Students w i l l explore behaviour, learning strategies, gentle teaching, I E P / I P P and community integration. PADM 303 Municipal Law in B. C. (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: Current employment in a M u n i c i p a l i t y , First Nations Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , and permission of the instructor. This course focuses on legal principles pertaining to municipal government, with particular emphasis on its status, functions, and legal powers and constraints. It w i l l also introduce the principles o f administrative law, how legislation is created, and the powers and duties of administrative agencies. PCAD 013 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction: Physical Disabilities Concepts This course enables students to understand the theoretical basis for the procedures needed by the personal care attendant w o r k i n g with people o f all ages with physical and/or developmental disabilities. The procedures include the principles o f body mechanics, medical asepsis, disabling conditions and their functional limitations. Both course content and assignments are integrated with lab and practicum placements i n P C A D 019 and P C A D 039 PCAD 014 (1.5) Ethics and Values in Health Care (2,0,0) (F) In this course the student w i l l develop the knowledge and skills required to fill the role of a personal care attendant in a professional, ethical and caring manner to ensure that people with disabilities are valued. This course assists facilitators to respect differences, demonstrate effective communication skills and articulate the principles o f normalization and integration. PCAD 023 (1.5) Growth and Development (2,0,0) (S) This course is designed to introduce students to the major changes which occur i n normal and abnormal development. The learner w i l l identify basic human needs, disabling conditions and techniques to empower people with mental handicaps and cognitive disorders. Course content includes role o f the family, sexuality, abuse and resources for support. PCAD 024 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Advanced Physical Disability Concepts This is a continuation o f P C A D 013. Students learn the theoretical basis o f advanced procedures essential to the role o f the personal care attendant. The course content is also integrated with lab and practicum placements i n P C A D 029 and P C A D 039. PCAD 029 (6) Applied Theory: Practicum II (0,35,0) (S) The student spends seven weeks i n three different practicum settings arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student While on practicum. Assignments are integrated with lab instruc-tion and course work i n P C A D 024 and P C A D 059. PCAD 049 Applied Theory: Lab I (2) (0,2.66,0) (F) This course exposes students through simulations and paper problems/case histories to the functional limitations of medical and physical conditions that may be encountered working as a personal care attendant. Students demonstrate and practice skills needed to work with clients who have a disability. Course Descriptions 281 PCAD 059 Applied Theory: Lab II (1) (0,1.33,2) (S) This course enables students to integrate and apply the knowledge and skills o f a personal care attendant working with people with disabilites. Students demonstrate, practice, and gain feedback on their skills. The purpose o f the lab is to prepare students for work with people with disabilities on practicum placements. PHIL 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introductory Philosophy: Ethics A n introduction to ethical theory and applied ethics. The course addresses questions such as: What are the origins of conscience? W h y should I be moral? A r e there objective moral values? What is good for human beings? What makes right actions right and wrong actions wrong? Issues o f applied ethics that may be addressed include capital punishment, abortion, assisted-suicide, c i v i l disobedience and environmental responsibility. The emphasis of the course varies among instructors. PHIL 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality A n introduction to the part of philosophy concerned with questions about the ultimate nature o f the world we live in and our knowledge of it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature o f G o d , the place o f human beings i n the universe, the nature o f reality, human nature, human knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship between mind and body, and others. The emphasis of the course varies from instructor to instructor. PHIL 110 Critical Thinking I (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n introduction to the basic rules o f clear and rational thought. The student w i l l be taught, through extensive examples, how to detect false reasoning, illegitimate appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that we can no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and can develop our o w n arguments with clarity and confidence. A t the instructor's discretion, the course may introduce students to classical syllogistic logic. There are no prerequisites, but P H I L 120 is a natural continuation of this course and is recommended for those who want a thorough introduction to the concepts and principles of rational thought. Course 282 Descriptions PHIL 120 Critical Thinking II (3) (4,0,0) This course focuses attention on the analysis and evaluation of inductive arguments. W e begin by exploring the basic principles o f inductive reasoning and then utilize these principles to explore such topics as rational decision making, the nature and testing o f scientific theories i n both the natural and social sciences, the differences between causal relations and correlations. Attention w i l l also be given to the fallacies involved i n the appeal to polls and statistics. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural continuation o f P H I L 110, and w i l l appeal especially to students who have an interest in either the natural or social sciences. PHIL 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy and Law: Canadian Law A general introduction to the fundamental principles o f jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions o f Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical questions as, "What is a law?", "Is it the case that law is what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and " H o w do y o u tell whether a law is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory o f Canadian law (including the development o f the Canadian Constitution), the system o f Canadian courts, and the roles of members o f the legal profession. A s w e l l , consideration is given to the nature of legal reasoning, the doctrine of precedent, and principles o f statutory interpretation, and an introduction is provided to the fields of contract, torts, administrative and family law, as w e l l as to the process of law reform. PHIL 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy and Law: Criminal Justice A n introduction to an analysis of theories of punishment and rehabilitation through an examination o f the operational practices o f the Canadian criminal justice system. In the course o f studying the structure and operations of the criminal justice system i n its various stages from the moment o f initial police involvement to the correctional disposition o f convicted offenders, the course focuses on both theoretical and practical decision making. Theoretical concerns include: i n d i vidual c i v i l liberties i n relation to police procedures, notions o f evidence, sentencing theory, and current correctional strategies. The above two courses are modelled on S F U ' s C r i m i nology 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy students and those interested i n pursuing further studies in the field o f criminology. PHIL 150 History of Philosophy I (3) (3,0,1) (F) This course covers the history of philosophy from the mythopeic traditions of Homer and Hesiod to the philosophy of Thomas Aquinas and the end of the medieval era. Among the other philosophers to be examined are Plato, Aristotle and Augustine. The focus will be on the metaphysical and epistemological views that have shaped the European intellectual heritage. We will also examine the extent to which Christianity has given shape to the peculiar character of philosophy in the medieval era. There are no prerequisites to this course and it is intended to appeal to a broad audience. A n y o n e with an interest in the intellectual traditions o f European heritage is welcome. PHIL 151 History of Philosophy II (3) (3,0,1) (S) This is course in the history of philosophy that covers the period from the Renaissance to the middle of the 20th Century. We shall examine the views of such prominent figures as Descartes, Spinoza, Locke, Hume, Kant and Sartre. Throughout, the focus will be on the metaphysical and epistemological views that have given shape to the European intellectual tradition. We will also examine the emergence of science and its method and the extent to which it has been shaped by, and given shape to, philosophical thought during this period. There are no prerequisites to this course and it is intended to appeal to a broad audience. A n y o n e with an interest in the intellectual traditions of European heritage is welcome. PHIL 200 Political Philosophy (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course provides an analysis o f the rationale for political institutions and action. Some o f the questions considered: A r e we really obliged to obey the law? C a n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation o f law in the policeman's holster? Does the state have good reason for involving itself i n compulsory programs o f education? This is not a study in the history of political thought and every effort is made to view problems from a contemporary perspective. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites, i PHIL 201 Political Philosophy (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course examines the values and assumptions behind the ideologies o f liberalism, communism, meritocracy, conservatism, democratic socialism and anarchism. Topics include liberty and equality, power and authority, private rights and the public good, sovereignty, democracy and justice. PHIL 202 (3) Introduction to Formal Logic (4,0,0) (F.S) A standard introduction to the formal techniques o f argument analysis. Formal logic was invented to mirror and evaluate mathematical reasoning and is now a branch o f Mathematics o f its own. O u r interest i n it w i l l , however, not be mathematical. Instead we w i l l concentrate on the relation of formal logic to everyday reasoning and language in general. The course is essential for students thinking o f majoring i n Philosophy, but also very useful to Computing Science and Mathematics majors. It is designed to transfer to S F U as their Philosophy 210 (required for both Philosophy and C o m p u t i n g Science majors), and to U B C as Philosophy 302. There are no prerequisites, although students may find Philosophy 110 provides useful background. Please note that this is not an introductory philosophy course, but one w h i c h introduces mathematical methods of argument analysis. It is not suitable for students merely seeking a general understanding o f what philosophy has to offer. PHIL 207 Business Ethics (3) (4.0.0) This course is an introduction to contemporary philosophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It covers such topics as the power o f multinational corporations, bribery and extortion in international business, the ethics of hiring practices, advertising and behaviour control, the conflict between employee loyalty and moral independence, and the responsibilities o f corporations and business professionals. The course w i l l also introduce students to a number of classical ethical theories and theories o f economic justice. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 208 Environmental Ethics (3) (4.0,0) This course deals with ethical and political issues arising from the relationship between humans and their natural surroundings. T y p i c a l questions that w i l l be addressed are: D o animals have rights? Is using animals for food and clothing morally wrong? D o we have an obligation to the natural environment such as an obligation to preserve species? What are our obligations to future generations? What is sustainable development? A r e environmental problems fundamentally personal or are they fundamentally political and social? Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. Course Descriptions 283 PHIL 209 Biomedical Ethics (3) (4,0,0) PHIL 222 (3) Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) (4.0,0) (S) This course w i l l focus on ethical issues that arise in the health sciences, especially i n medicine, but also in biology, psychology and other professions. A m o n g the topics to be considered are abortion and reproductive technology; euthanasia; paternalism and autonomy; resource allocation; involuntary hospitalization and behaviour control. A l l moral problems w i l l be examined from both an applied and theoretical point of view. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. A n introduction to philosophical analysis o f cultural works. The course w i l l provide an exploration o f aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works o f art as well as contemporary cultural productions i n a variety of media. One o f the objectives o f the course is to make sense of what a society is " s a y i n g " through its popular culture. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 210 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology I Founded on a wide range of philosophical readings, this course w i l l focus on questions such as: What is the good life and its relation to intimacy and family? What is the good person? A r e there different models for different genders? What constitutes a good relationship? H o w important are mutuality, respect, affection, sex, and interdependence to such a relationship? What counts as equality/equity? H o w should the answers to such questions influence our views on such social issues as affirmative action, prostitution and pornography? (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: A t least one Philosophy course or permission of the instructor. A n introduction to some o f the traditional problems of metaphysics and epistemology. Some of the questions considered are: Does G o d exist? What is the relationship between faith and reason? Does free w i l l exist? Is sense perception a reliable source o f knowledge? What is the nature o f causality? Is materialism true? What is the nature o f mind? W h a t is the relationship between mind and body? What is the scientific method? W h i l e this is not a course i n the history o f philosophy, it w i l l cover many o f the classical attempts to answer these questions. PHIL 211 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) P H I L 210 or permission of instructor. A continuation o f P H I L 210. PHIL 220 Philosophy in Literature (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n examination o f the lively relationship between philosophy and literature. Philosophical theories w i l l be approached and discussed v i a literary work w h i c h either embodies the theories or grounds them i n human experience. Textual sources w i l l range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 221 (3) Existentialism in Literature (4,0,0) This course is, i n spirit, a continuation o f P H I L 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy o f Existentialism i n literature. There w i l l be an introductory set o f lectures on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual'sources w i l l range from Dostoyevsky's "Notes from the Underground" to Sartre's "Nausea." Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. Course 284 Descriptions PHIL 240 (3) Philosophy and Gender Relations (4,0,0) The impact o f " W o m e n ' s Liberation" and the " M e n ' s Movement" w i l l be discussed, as w i l l varying suggestions for overcoming the "gender gap". This course should be of interest to men and women equally; indeed, it is assumed that the quality of class discussion w i l l be a function o f the degree to which the perspectives o f both genders are well represented. Open to anyone i n first or second year. PHYS 104 Principles of Physics (3) (4,2,0) (F,S) Prerequisite: N o physics prerequisite. Principles o f M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. M A T H 105 may be taken concurrently. This course serves as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background in the subject. Topics include mechanics, electricity and geometrical optics. PHYS 108 Basic Physics Prerequisite: (4.5) (6,2,0) (F) Principles o f M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 105. Corequisite: M A T H 116/117. The course covers the material of P H Y S 110, together with those topics from high school physics needed by a student with no previous background in physics. A student passing this course should be able to enter P H Y S 111 i n the Spring. PHYS 110 General Physics I Prerequisite: Corequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F) Physics 11 or B P H Y 042. M A T H 116/117. A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, statics, . kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. PHYS 111 General Physics II (3) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: 108. A t least a " C - " in either P H Y S 110 or Corequisite: M A T H 126/127. PHYS 200 (3) Thermal Physics and Waves (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: 115. A t least a " C - " in either P H Y S 111 or Corequisite: M A T H 230. Temperature, heat, the zeroth, first, second and third laws o f thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and a math- A n y student who has attempted P H Y S 111 within the last year w i l l not be allowed to register without the Electricity and magnetism, waves, physical optics, sound, and atomic physics. PHYS 114 Fundamental Physics I (3) (4,2,0) (F.S) Physics 12 or B P H Y 042 or P H Y S 104. M A T H 116/117. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, waves and special relativity. This course, together with P H Y S 115, is particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or engineering. PHYS 115 Fundamental Physics II (3) (4,2,0) (S) This course, together with P H Y S 201, 210, 211, 218 PHYS 201 (3) Electricity and Magnetism (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 230. Corequisite: P H Y S 211, M A T H 231 (recommended). The study of electric and magnetic fields; D C and A C circuits; L R , R C , L R C circuits; resonance; M a x w e l l ' s Equations, Fourier Analysis and electromagnetic waves. PHYS 210 Physics Laboratory I Corequisite: (D (0,3,0) (F) P H Y S 218. A weekly three-hour lab i n mathematical methods, thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechan- Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114 or with the permission o f the instructor. Corequisite: M A T H 126/127. Electricity and magnetism, A C circuits, physical optics, and atomic physics. PHYS 116 Fundamental Physics III ematical treatment of waves. and 222 is required for students majoring in physics. instructor's permission. Prerequisite: Corequisite: The Physics Department offers a full second-year university transfer program in physics. Students planning to continue in a physics program at university may wish to consult with a physics instructor. (3) (4.0,0) (S) Note: This course is intended for Engineering students transferring to UBC. program Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114, or with permission o f instructor, P H Y S 108 or 110. Corequisites: P H Y S 115 and M A T H 126/127. Statics of particles, force-couple systems and rigid body statics. Extension of principles from P H Y S 114 and application to practical and more advanced dynamics problems. Thermometry, thermal properties o f matter, heat. Geometrical optics. ics. PHYS 211 Physics Laboratory II (1) (0,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: A s for P H Y S 201, w h i c h must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab i n electricity and magnetism, electronics and mechanics. PHYS 218 Computational Physics Prerequisite: 115. Corequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) A t least a " C - " i n either P H Y S 111 or P H Y S 210, M A T H 200, 230. Use of computer software to solve numerical problems in physics. Applications include drag forces, the driven, damped oscillator, simulations o f chaotic systems, random variables, techniques for handling digital data and signal processing. Course Descriptions 285 PHYS 222 Mechanics (3) (4.0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " i n P H Y S 111 or 115; M A T H 200, 230. Newtonian mechanics o f particles and rigid bodies. Topics include rocket propulsion, collisions, central forces, rotating frames o f reference, and rotation o f rigid bodies. PMI. (Various Numbers) (2) (1.0.0) (F.S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit students to pursue study o f his/her own music specialty. The course consists o f a series of one-hour lessons. PMI. (Various Numbers) (1) (.5.0,0) (F.S) Secondary Private Music Instruction This course consists o f a series of half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument. Note: To enrol in any PMI. courses students must receive written permission from the program coordinator. PMI. Lab This lab involves attendance at a number of concerts and is intended to broaden the musical experience o f students by exposing them to performances in a variety of j a z z and popular styles. Attendance is mandatory for graduation in the Jazz Studies program. POL. 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Politics and Government This survey course is recommended for both Political Studies majors and those students interested in discovering how politics affects their lives and how they i n turn can affect politics. Students are introduced to the basic concepts of Political Theory, Comparative Politics, International Relations, Public Policy, and Canadian Government, offering Political Studies majors a firm foundation in the methods, approaches and issues inherent in the discipline. Non-majors w i l l find the course w i l l help them understand the local, national, and international political events which shape their world. (This course is required for all students planning to transfer into the Political Science Department at S F U . ) Course 286 Descriptions POL. 102 (3) Comparative Government (4.0.0) (F.S) Throughout history, humans have organized themselves into many different types of political systems, from tribes to empires, city-states to nation-states. This course w i l l introduce students to the wide range o f political systems that exist throughout the world today, be it A s i a , A f r i c a , Europe, or the Americas. B y studying these systems i n detail, students w i l l gain an appreciation for how political behaviour varies throughout the world, as w e l l as develop a better critical understanding o f their o w n . POL. 104 Canadian Government (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) This course introduces students to the formal institutional structures and processes o f Canadian government and politics. Topics to be explored w i l l include political culture, the constitution, federalism, Quebec sovereignty and Aboriginal self-government and an examination of the institutions o f government, political parties and their impact on the quality of Canada's parliamentary democracy. Regardless o f career goals or preferred disciplines, all students w i l l benefit from an exposure to the politics of their immediate society. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Western Political Thought A n introductory examination of the tradition o f Western political thought from the Ancient Greeks to the emergence of the Nation State. The significance and contributions o f Plato, Aristotle, the medieval thinkers, and M a c h i a v e l l i concerning fundamental questions about the relationship between the individual and the state w i l l be explored from an historical and philosophical perspective. This course is o f particular relevance to those i n the Humanities — literature, drama, fine arts, philosophy — as the shared themes provide for an interesting comprehensive analysis o f Western C i v i l i z a t i o n . POL. 111 (3) Contemporary Ideologies (4,0.0) (F.S) This course explores the historical development of the commonly recognized ideologies of the modern era: Liberalism, Conservatism, A n a r c h i s m , M a r x i s m , Fascism and Social Democracy. These underlying political ideas w i l l provide the backdrop for a critical discussion o f the more recent ideological formations such as F e m i n i s m , E c o l o g i s m , Nationalism and the different movements associated with religious fundamentalism. Students w i l l be encouraged to think critically about the role and impact o f political ideas in the world in which they live. POL. 201 International Relations (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) G l o b a l warming, the debt crisis, child poverty, militarism, human rights violations, c i v i l , regional and global war - what are the causes o f these international problems and what are the possible solutions? Students who take this course w i l l examine these and many other international issues i n detail. In short, International Relations is for those students wishing to explore events - and the explanations for those events - in a global system so much in flux since the collapse o f the C o l d W a r and the rise o f the global division o f labour. POL. 202 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Government and Politics of British Columbia This course w i l l provide an understanding o f the political institutions, dynamics, and socio-economic processes o f the provincial, regional, and municipal governments in B . C . Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students with the activities o f political parties and government institutions i n B . C . It is designed to develop students' skills in critically analyzing the B . C . political process from several methodological perspectives within the discipline o f political studies. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 203 (3) International Organizations (4,0,0) (F.S) M o r e and more these days, international organizations are no longer content with playing bit parts on the world stage. B e it the U N in Cambodia, N A T O in the former Yugoslavia, Greenpeace on the high seas, or the increased power o f regional organizations like the European U n i o n , A S E A N , and the O A S , international organizations seem to be challenging the sovereignty o f nation-states at every turn. But are international organizations really taking on a life o f their own? A r e new forms o f organization at the international level (such as international law or economic regimes) really taking root? O r is the state-centric system destined to continue as it has since 1648? These are some of the issues explored i n this, the complementary course to International Relations. POL. 204 Canadian Public Policy Prerequisites: (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) P O L . 100 or 104 recommended. The centre o f the political process o f any society is the creation o f public policy. H o w governments arrive at and select policies from the various competing demands placed upon them - in the areas of health, education, environment, economic development, immigration etc. - is the focus o f this course. Students are introduced to the basic concepts and theories associated with the making of public policy as w e l l as an analysis of the processes by w h i c h policy is defined, addressed and implemented. T h i s course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. POL. 206 (3) (4,0.0) (F) Scope and Methods of Political Analysis This course introduces the student to the variety o f approaches and tools available to those studying politics. Students w i l l become familiar with the nature of and debates inherent to contemporary political studies, as w e l l as the strengths and weaknesses o f the various methods employed by students of politics. B y developing their o w n research project, students w i l l struggle first-hand with the issues central to all types o f social science research: selecting from alternative models o f explanation, attempting to isolate variables, and dealing with questions o f cause and effect to name but a few. Students may have the opportunity to develop and work on a proto-type political studies journal as w e l l . N o t offered i n 1998/99. POL. 207 (3) (4.0,0) (S) Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory Prerequisite: P O L . 111. Current themes and controversies i n contemporary social and political thought is the subject o f this course. Topics w i l l shift from term to term to reflect either important issues or individual theorist's contributions to contemporary society. Areas of interest might include, for example, the role of the state in late capitalist societies, the significance o f the Frankfurt School, the contradictions o f the welfare state, the current debates in democratic theory, the role and place of "new" social movements i n contemporary society, an examination o f the meaning of liberty in complex societies, the renewal o f nationalism, the place o f religion (Islamic fundamentalism), the persistence o f violence in c i v i l society. Alternatively, or in conjunction with these themes, students w i l l develop a thorough analysis of a particular theorist: for example, Arendt, Gramsci, Marcuse, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, W i l l i a m s , Rawls, Rorty, Pateman, G o r z and M e l u c c i to name a few. This course transfers as a 300 level course at S F U . PORT 510 (3) (4.1,1) (F) Intermediate Portuguese for Managers I This course progresses from beginner to intermediate Portuguese, focusing on the practical language needed to function on and off the job in Latin A m e r i c a . Course Descriptions 287 PORT 511 (3) (4,1,1) (S) Intermediate Portuguese for Managers II This course is a continuation of P O R T 510. PSYC 201 Group Dynamics Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) P S Y C 100 and 101. Note: Restricted to Music Therapy Students only. PPMI (various numbers ) (3) (1.5,0,0) (F.S) Concentration Private Music Instruction for Performance Majors A study o f the behaviour o f individuals in social groups A course designed to permit students in the Performance Majors to pursue in-depth study of his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists o f a series o f one and one-half hour lessons or equivalent. tual and experiential approach to small group theory PSYC 100 (3) Introduction to Psychology (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology student to some o f the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding of human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Learning, development, and other selected issues are included. N o t e : Students transferring from other institutions with one semester of introductory Psychology should consult with Advising for transferability. PSYC 101 Theories of Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F,S,Su) and institutions, such as friendship groups, w o r k groups, and families. This course provides an intellecand allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills and leadership skills i n a supportive, small group setting. PSYC 203 History of Psychology Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. This course w i l l examine the development o f psychological thought to gain a critical understanding of contemporary psychology. Issues w i l l range from the mind-body problem, and the nature o f science, to an analysis of historical and contemporary schools i n psychology. PSYC 204 (3) Developmental Psychology Prerequisite: P S Y C 100. (3) (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study o f the c h i l d ' s development from infancy to A course for those students who desire a complete adolescence, including the development o f social survey of the basic areas of psychology (when c o m - behaviour, personality, language and cognitive proc- bined with P S Y C 100), before proceeding to an i n - esses. Students w i l l be encouraged to do research depth study o f particular areas. Course content may projects and observations. include topics such as research methods, biological basis o f behaviour, consciousness, health, psychological disorders, and therapeutic approaches. N o t e : Students transferring from other institutions with one semester of introductory Psychology should consult with Advising for transferability. PSYC 200 Social Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study of the dynamics and effects o f social influences on individual human behaviour. The course looks at such topics as attitudes and attitude changes, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, PSYC 205 (3) The Psychology of Aging Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) P S Y C 100 and 101. • A course dealing with the psychological development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context o f aging. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research i n the area, students w i l l be encouraged to develop an empathic understanding o f the aging process through such means as community projects. PSYC 206 Adolescent Psychology (3) (4,0,0) (F) prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological Prerequisite: effects of the physical environment. This course examines the biological, cognitive and social transitions of adolescence and how they affect such developmental areas as identity, autonomy, intimacy, sexuality and achievement. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research in the area, students w i l l be encouraged to explore their o w n identity development through group research. Course 288 Descriptions P S Y C 100 and 101. PSYC 212 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Research Methods in Psychology PSYC 230 Cognitive Psychology Prerequisite: Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101. A course for students who intend to major in one of the social sciences; psychology majors should take this course and P S Y C 213. This course w i l l introduce the student to current research methods in major areas o f psychology. Students should understand the principles of research methodology, and be able to evaluate, design and conduct research in psychology. PSYC 213 (3) (4,0,0) (F or S) Statistical Methods in Psychology Prerequisite: 101. M A T H 12 or equivalent, P S Y C 100, A course recommended for psychology majors. This course deals with descriptive and inferential statistics as applied in psychology. These w i l l be considered as they are used in psychological research. PSYC 220 Theories of Personality (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. This course w i l l examine theories o f personality from Freud and Feminist revisions to Humanistic approaches, including an Eastern tradition. Included w i l l be a consideration of the historical/cultural development o f the theory, what the theory says about the development, structure and dynamics o f personality and examples o f empirical research. PSYC 222 Abnormal Psychology Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) (4,0,0) (F or S) P S Y C 100 and 101. This course w i l l address many o f the issues relating to the thinking processes. Research into consciousness, memory, language, imagery, problem solving, creativity and artificial intelligence w i l l be examined, as w e l l as experiments in social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices (5,0,1) (F,S) This course provides an introduction to the concept o f health and the concepts of a health enhancing lifestyle. Students w i l l reflect on their own experiences o f health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 102 (1.5) Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications (5,0,0) (F,S) This course focuses on the development o f self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students w i l l explore basic communication concepts and practical skills which contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. RCAP 112 (3) Special Needs in Resident Care (6,0,0) (F.S) This course builds upon content in the other H S / R C A courses, to help students to understand concepts and approaches which apply to the care o f residents experiencing changes in mental functioning. P S Y C 100 and 101. A study o f the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns and treatment o f abnormal behaviour. Included w i l l be an examination o f the research as to how the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and biological school view normal and abnormal behaviour. This course w i l l also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. PSYC 225 (3) Biopsychology of Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) P S Y C 100 and 101. This course w i l l expand on material introduced i n introductory psychology dealing with the biological basis of behaviour. Students w i l l examine functions o f the nervous system, as w e l l as studying brain anatomy and brain chemistry i n relation to both normal and pathological behaviour. A s well, students w i l l discuss mind-body issues and develop an understanding o f broader ethical and other issues in neuroscience. REC. 120 Selective skills (0) During their time in the Outdoor Recreation Management program students are required to pursue two skills activities i n their particular areas o f interest. These selective skills help provide our graduates with work i n the outdoor recreation, adventure travel and ecotourism industries. REC. 139 (3) (3.0.1) (F) Computer Applications I for Outdoor Recreation This course provides the student with hands-on experience using computer technology to communicate using text, graphics and the internet. Course Descriptions 289 REC. 143 (3) (3,0.1) (F) Outdoor Recreation Delivery Systems A n introduction to various outdoor recreation delivery systems in British C o l u m b i a , the past and present issues influencing and affecting their direction, and their career opportunities. The course w i l l examine the inter-relationships o f the various delivery systems, including the role o f government. REC. 144 (3) (3,1.5.1) (S) Outdoor Recreation Program Planning Topics w i l l include: philosophy o f programming, concepts of planning, community interests inventory, the relationship of programming to customer service. REC. 151 (3) (3.1.5,1) (S) The Outdoor Recreation Environment REC. 169 (3) Landscape Interpretation Interpretation o f mountain and coastal environments, local geology and landforms. The course w i l l include field work. REC. 178 (3) Human Relations in Recreation REC. 239 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Computer Applications II for Outdoor Recreation Prerequisite: REC. 152 (3) Environmental Stewardship I REC. 252 (3) Environmental Stewardship II A n examination o f the role of the outdoor recreation professional in environmental stewardship. Topics include: conservation issues, environmental ethics, policy, planning and sustainability. The course includes field work. REC. 156 (3) (3.3,1) (F) Introduction to Environmental Studies A n introduction to ecological principles and their application to environmental issues. L o c a l ecosystems and their indicator species w i l l be examined through field work. REC.157 Applied Field Skills (3) (3,0,1) (F) Develops skills, knowledge and attitudes in overland travel, outdoor l i v i n g , navigation and trip planning i n a (3,0,1) (F) This course focuses on leadership, motivation, c o m m u nications and group dynamics. It also deals with human resource development including employee recruitment, selection, training and development, and performance appraisal. Students w i l l develop skills in the interpretation o f weather and climate and their impact on outdoor recreation activities. Mountain and marine weather and personal forecasting w i l l be examined using field work. (3,3,1) (F) (3.0,1) (F) R E C . 139 This course provides the student with hands-on experience using computer technology to process accounting transactions and to manage financial data. (3,3) (F) A n examination o f environmental stewardship concepts and issues, and the development o f nature interpretation skills. This course w i l l include a field trip. REC. 255 (9) Outdoor Recreation Practicum (9,0,0) (S) The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory with working experience i n the field. Students w i l l arrange with the faculty liaison person to spend three and one-half months i n an acceptable agency placement, and w i l l be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Students w i l l be provided with terms o f reference for the practicum experience. Student work performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty liaison person and agency supervisor, and students w i l l make a major presentation to the department at the conclusion o f the practicum. temperate climate. REC. 163 Wilderness First Aid I (3) (3,0.1) (S) Designed to meet the needs of the outdoor recreation leader or professional whose work takes them into isolated environments. Outdoor practical sessions play a large part in the delivery of the course content w h i c h addresses basic life support techniques, situation and patient assessment, recognition and treatment o f injuries, medical emergencies, and environmental emergencies. Course 290 Descriptions RMCP 155 (3) Retail Event Management (4,0,0) (S) The emphasis i n this course w i l l be to learn how to promote and produce a major event such as a trade show. This course w i l l involve the planning, execution and promotion of such a retail event. RMCP 164 (3) Creative Retail Strategies (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l learn visual marketing, colour and design, retail store design, and a full range o f merchandising skills. They w i l l relate product and placement within a store environment and learn to develop comprehensive display strategies. RMCP 172 (3) (4,0.0) (F) Retail Technology/Store Management I SART 150 Drawing I Retail Technology is the introductory segment to Store Management I. This course provides the student with a working knowledge o f cash register systems and point of sale terminals as w e l l as the latest i n Interac technology. A n investigation o f the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects o f the drawing process through a wide variety of methods, materials and stimuli. Design elements are a major component of this course. E x p e r i ences in current approaches and concerns, including representational, interpretive and experimental drawings in assorted media. Emphasis w i l l be on developing the student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control of media. Specifics to this course w i l l be: study o f design elements (line, tone etc.), media investigation, perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life study. Store Management I is a practical application to retail marketing. Students w i l l be entirely responsible for operating the student store. The students act as store managers. They w i l l do buying, display, promotion, accounting, scheduling and all those managerial skills involved i n operating a successful retail store. RMCP 173 (3) (4.0,0) (S) Retail Finance/Store Management II Prerequisite: R M C P 172 A continuation of Store Management I. This extension of the Store Management course exposes the student to daily systems analysis, banking procedures, monthly accounting practices and money management i n a practical setting. The students w i l l be responsible for making financial decisions as well as buying and promotional decisions for the student store. RMCP 181 Strategic Retail Buying (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course teaches the students to access their target and primary markets and to develop a strategy to enable them to be successful retail buyers. The retail buying component involves teaching the student to buy for department stores, chain stores, regional chain operations, and independent retail stores. What to buy, when to buy, from w h o m to buy, and how much to buy w i l l a l l be covered i n this course. RMCP 190 Co-op Work Placement (3) (4,0,0) (F) Students w i l l gain direct practical work experience through a paid co-op placement with an employer that is part o f our Retail Registry. D u r i n g December and January the student w i l l work some 200 hours in a business related to their preferred area of retailing, merchandising or marketing. A faculty member w i l l oversee this three credit course and both employers and the co-op employees w i l l complete written reports. Students w i l l return to their full-time studies at the end of the co-op placement. (3) SART 151 Drawing II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) (4,0.0) (S) S A R T 150. A continuation of S A R T 150, with the inclusion o f the following specifics: composition and further design exploration, colour, collage and image development. A n emphasis is placed on balance between control and expression. SART 163 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art I (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the use of clay as an expressive medium. H a n d construction and wheel forming w i l l be presented as w e l l as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory w i l l be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object and to general art applications. SART 165 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art II Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) S A R T 163. A continuation o f S A R T 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, mould making, glaze preparation and application and firing technology w i l l be fundamental aspects o f this course. Contemporary applications o f ceramics w i l l be explored. SART 167 3-D Studies: Sculpture I (3) (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to three-dimensional work as a means of expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques and materials w i l l be explored. These w i l l include wood assemblage, clay modelling, mould making and casting. Sculptural content and subject matter w i l l be considered in the context of the student's own work. A n examination o f historical sculpture developments w i l l be a feature o f the class; however, the emphasis w i l l be upon developing an understanding o f contemporary sculptural concerns. Course Descriptions 291 SART 171 2-D Studies: Painting I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Through a combination o f assigned studio work, personal research projects and an introduction to recent and current trends in the visual arts, students w i l l gain an understanding o f how both abstract and concrete concerns may be expressed i n terms o f imagery and through a variety of methods and materials. Participants w i l l learn about the dimensions of colour and how to effectively indentify and replicate colour and form. A c r y l i c s w i l l be the preferred medium but students w i l l be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities of other media according to their individual needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures w i l l be a feature of the course and both individual and group critiques w i l l be conducted at regular intervals. SART 172 2- D Studies: Painting II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 171. A continuation of S A R T 171 with added emphasis on developing personal areas o f interest and research in addition to designated painting problems which w i l l require students to express their ideas in multiple or mixed-media techniques o f a more ambitious nature. There w i l l be opportunities for students to relate their painting activities to other areas o f study within the program and to become more responsible for determining their o w n priorities and goals. There w i l l be further exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities i n the visual arts. SART 174 (3) 3- D Studies: Sculpture II Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) S A R T 167. A continuation o f S A R T 167, but with the inclusion o f the following materials and techniques: w o o d construction and jointing, steel welding, and plaster modelling. SART 182 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking I (4,1.5,0) (F) A foundation course for those with little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques o f hardground, softground, drypoint and aquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential o f printmaking and the creative processes in general w i l l be ongoing. Particular emphasis w i l l be given to the relationship between printmaking and painting with the student producing a number of pieces demonstrating technical competency and creative potential. M o s t work w i l l be executed i n black and white. Course 292 Descriptions SART 183 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking II Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (S) S A R T 182. A continuation o f S A R T 182 with emphasis on printing procedures both in black and white and colour. T h e student w i l l also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including lino/wood blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion o f historical and contemporary approaches to imagemaking w i l l be ongoing. (3) SART 250 2-D Studies: Painting III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) S A R T 172. Students w i l l be assigned painting problems relating to historically familiar genres; portrait, still life, landscape, figure and abstraction. W i t h i n these structured projects, students w i l l be given as much freedom as possible regarding content, methods, scale etc. Students w i l l be encouraged to re-define the painting process i n terms o f their o w n needs and priorities. Emphasis w i l l be placed on relating work i n this course to other areas of the program and to current trends i n the visual arts. SART 255 (3) 2- D Studies: Painting IV Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 250. A continuation of S A R T 250 but with an increased need for students to define their o w n areas o f interest and to extend their thinking in an innovative, selfchallenging fashion. A s in S A R T 250, guest speakers, field trips, slide lectures etc. w i l l be a feature o f the course. There w i l l be a continuing stress on relating work i n this course to contemporary activities i n the visual arts and to other areas of the program. E x p e r i ments with images, methods and materials w i l l be encouraged, with a view to the development o f personal modes of expression. Towards the end o f the course, students w i l l be required to define their o w n areas o f research and visual articulation as they embark on a thematically linked series o f work. SART 257 (3) 3- D Studies: Sculpture III Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (F) S A R T 174. A resumption of the investigation o f ideas, materiality and form, to broaden the participant's visual, tactile and conceptual abilities. Traditional and current sculptural ideologies and techniques w i l l be examined in the context o f 20th century developments. SART 262 Drawing III Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) S A R T 151. Prerequisite: Continued study of drawing as a means o f discovery, expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual and technical aspects of drawing w i l l be examined. Specifics to this course w i l l include advanced graphic elements, unconventional media, and objective/ subjective research. SART 263 Drawing IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 262. Further study of drawing with an emphasis on the development of personal modes of expression and image transformation. Orthographic drawings comprise a small portion o f the course. The work o f the three previous courses w i l l be reviewed, with the addition of perceptual exploration and portfolio presentation in the form o f a small series o f thematically linked work. SART 265 (3) 3-D Studies: Sculpture IV Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (F) S A R T 165. Students w i l l undertake further exploration o f processes and materials, including the development o f original glazes and manipulation of glaze characteristics. Students w i l l be encouraged to explore ways to bring to ceramic art their personal expressive interests within the context o f contemporary ceramic usage. SART 274 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art IV Prerequisite: S A R T 183. A comprehensive study of intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced printmaking student. Other areasthat come under consideration w i l l include collographs, uninked embossing and the practical application o f colour theory. Discussion o f current directions in printmaking and their relationship to painting and sculpture w i l l be ongoing. SART 283 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking IV Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (S) S A R T 282. Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern w i l l be combined colour printing techniques based upon the individual's need. A folio o f work w i l l be produced to document this research. Technical aspects that surface w i l l include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. SART 300 (12) (4,0,4) (F) Art Institute I — Sculpture and Printmaking S A R T 257. SART 273 (3) 3-D Studies: Ceramic Art (4,1.5,0) (S) (4,3,0) (S) A further study of historical and current sculptural ideologies. Assignments require individual strategies to respond to social/environmental and interactive issues. Participation i n group debates and critiques w i l l foster constructive dialogue and criticism. Prerequisite: SART 282 (3) 2-D Studies: Printmaking III (4,3,0) (S) S A R T 273. The course w i l l include an increased emphasis on craftsmanship and design o f functional and nonfunctional forms. Architectural ceramic applications w i l l be explored in greater depth. Glazes and other methods o f decoration w i l l continue to be examined. The Institute is designed to meet the needs o f students with several years o f experience in sculpture or printmaking or who have left college, art school or university and may no longer have access to specialized equipment and facilities. The A r t Institute w i l l emphasize access to w e l l equipped studios as w e l l as lectures, seminars and tutorials with instructors and invited professional artists. The format w i l l be one day o f class time and four or more days o f studio time. The studios are available during the evenings and weekends. SART 301 (12) (4,0,4) (S) Art Institute II — Sculpture and Printmaking A continuation o f S A R T 300. SART 310 (3) Advanced Ceramic Studies (4,0,0) (F) A post-diploma studio workshop course. F o r students with considerable previous experience o f wheel and hand building techniques. This course w i l l focus on the development o f clays and glazes i n soda and salt firings, as w e l l as over and underglaze and slip decoration. SART 311 (3) Advanced Ceramic Studies II (4,0,0) (S) A continuation o f S A R T 310 with the introduction of the formulation and development o f metallic lustres. Course Descriptions 293 SETA 100 (1.5) (3,0,0.) (F) History, Philosophy and Issues in Special Education A n overview of the history o f the field o f special education including key figures who have contributed to the development o f this field. This introductory course includes opportunities to discuss main ideas, social trends and controversies that have had an effect on special education with the intent o f helping students form their o w n philosophies around these issues. SETA 101 Working in Schools (1.5) (3.0.0.) (F) Introductory course provides an understanding of the SETA 105 (3.0) (4,0,0.) (F) Developmental Challenges for SETA's Students w i l l explore current issues emphasized i n inclusive education through definition, etiology and implications for learning i n the various areas o f exceptionality: challenging behaviours, depression, intellectual disabilities, F A S , A D H D , E S L , giftedness, communication disorders, physical and chronic health disorders, home, school and community issues such as abuse, homelessness etc. T w e l v e hours of practical skills; an introduction to physical transfer, lifting , feeding and medical management is included. SETA 106 Technology for SETA's (1.5) (3,0,0.) (F) public school system and the role o f the S E T A within that setting. Overviews of provincial policies, district and school-based proram at the elementary and secondary levels are discussed i n detail. SETA 102 (1.5) (3,0.0.) (S) Interpersonal Skills for Teachers' Assistants This course presents interactive communication techniques for w o r k i n g with both adults and children. Students w i l l learn about: • • • • types o f behaviour disorders and practical classroom behavioural management techniqes conflict resolution — diffusing and managing anger, negotiating and compromising, listening and summarizing multicultural communication skills communication skills to effectively work in a team environment SETA 103 (1.5) (3.0,0,) (S) Challenging Behaviours Students learn about various behaviour profiles and develop a practical understanding o f h o w to support children or adolescents with behavioural challenges in a school setting. SETA 104 (1.5) (3,0,0.) (S) Child Growth and Development for SETA's This course explores the social, emotional, physical, language and expressive stages from birth to adolescence. Students w i l l gain understanding o f the diversity i n learners and how observational and recording methods support critical documentation often used in the role of a S E T A in school settings. Course 294 Descriptions Students w i l l become familiar with the wide range o f low and high technology adaptations for students with disabilites. C o m m o n computer hardware and software used i n schools are explored. Students learn how the school system and related agencies assess the needs o f students with special needs and how to provide appropriate technological adaptations. Educational planning and implementation o f plans are also discussed. SETA 107 & 108 (3.0 8i 1.5) (F.Su) Instructional Strategies I & II (3.0,0,) These courses must be taken one after the other. They provide students with a range o f instructional strategies that w i l l assist i n meeting the learning needs o f the diverse population o f students in our classrooms. Students experience the application o f both teaching and learning strategies that facilitate the inclusion o f children into mainstream settings. SETA 109 Practicum (6.0) (0,30.0.) (F.S) A n intensive 120-hour period which provides opportunites for students to integrate and consolidate the theory and skills developed through the S E T A program in a classroom setting ( K - 1 2 ) working with children or adolescents who have special needs. Students are under the direct supervision o f a classroom teacher and practicum supervisor: and are required to attend one-on-one consultations and small group seminars. Students must have current Standard First A i d / C P R certificate, criminal records check and T B test prior to being placed i n practicum schools. SOC. 100 Social Structures (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) The course systematically covers major topics and issues of concern to anyone who wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with the modern world in a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme of the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine" or social or societal determinants. This structured aspect of society is comprised of institutions such as the family, religious institutions, the mass media, educational institutions, for example, as w e l l as rules, customs, laws, ideologies, etc. O u r society is also embedded with structural inequalities related to gender, social class and ethnicity. U t i l i z i n g what has been termed "the sociological imagination," the course looks at how we are influenced by these aspects o f society and i n turn how we react to these influences. B o t h S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major i n Sociology at S F U or U B C . SOC. 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Concepts and Theories of Society W i t h current social conditions i n mind, this course analyses the general development o f sociological thought i n the 19th and 20th centuries. W e w i l l look at a variety o f sociological theories and approaches to understanding society (structural functionalism, conflict theory, symbolic interactionism, feminism and others) and employ these approaches to analyze events of current interest, importance and impact i n society. B o t h S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major i n Sociology at S F U or U B C . SOC. 200 Canadian Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4.0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A n introduction to the study o f Canadian society and culture, including an analysis o f the major Canadian institutions studied on a national basis, with special emphasis on the dynamics of change i n a complex multicultural society. Issues that explore the intersection o f state, capital and labour with gender, class and ethnicity w i l l be discussed as they relate to such concerns as multiculturalism, A b o r i g i n a l peoples and Quebec society. SOC. 201 (3) British Columbia Society Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A sociological approach to the dynamics o f Canadian society with special emphasis on British C o l u m b i a . Close attention w i l l be given to economic, historical and cultural developments which have shaped British C o l u m b i a from its early years into a modern industrial society. Contemporary social questions surrounding such issues as education, health, labour, Native land claims and resource questions w i l l be discussed. SOC. 210 Current Social Issues Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A study of social concerns and cultural problems common to current conditions i n the 20th century i n our society and in global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts w i l l be used to examine current social issues in a global framework o f political, economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics of the arms race, the sociology o f war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are placed i n the context of the student's daily world, as it is happening now — this should develop the student's sociological imagination. This course can be taken by itself, or as a complement to S O C . 211, Sociology of the T h i r d W o r l d . SOC. 211 (3) Sociology of the Third World Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (F.S) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission of the A study of the major theories o f development and under development, social, cultural and political responses to under development, and the interrelationship of social institutions in and between the "developed" and "less developed" societies. This course w i l l provide students with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects o f under development. Both sociological and "non-sociological" literature on the impact o f globalization on T h i r d W o r l d societies w i l l be considered. This course may be taken by itself or as a complement to S O C . 210, Current Social Issues. Course Descriptions 295 SOC. 222 Sociology of the Arts Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101 or permission o f the A sociological study of art and artists i n western and non-western societies. The course w i l l relate the various art forms (painting, music, literature) to the social context i n w h i c h they exist and to their social production; hence it w i l l develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (aesthetic codes), social institutions, cultural politics and political economy. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 101 or 223. Not offered Fall 2000. compositions and extensive conversation practice. A l s o , the student w i l l be introduced to Hispanic Literature. SPAN 201 Intermediate Spanish II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) S P A N 200 with a m i n i m u m o f a " C " grade, or permission from the instructor. A continuation o f the work of S P A N 200. This course should be taken, wherever possible, i n the term following S P A N 200. SPAN 510 (3) (4,1,1) (F) Intermediate Spanish for Managers I This course progresses from intermediate to advanced SOC. 223 Media and Society Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Spanish, focusing on the practical language needed to function on and off the job i n Latin A m e r i c a . S O C . 100 or 101 or permission of the instructor. SPAN 511 (3) (4,1,1) (F) Intermediate Spanish for Managers II A n intensive study o f the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This w i l l encompass current forms of television, radio, magazines, all forms o f advertisement, news production and films. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 222 or 100. This is an accelerated course w h i c h w i l l develop the listening, speaking, reading, and writing skills needed to put the language to immediate use i n everyday life situations and/or i n a professional environment i n Latin A m e r i c a . It intends to broaden the student's knowledge of Latin A m e r i c a v i a language applications, enhancing the acquisition o f contextual cultural competency. SPAN 100 Beginning Spanish I SPAN 521 (3) Advanced Spanish for Managers II (3) (4,1.75,0) (F,S) This is a beginners' course which offers a comprehensive introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed on grammar and the development o f the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. This course is a continuation o f S P A N 510. TCPP 152 (3) Programing Logic and Design Prerequisite: SPAN 101 Beginning Spanish II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) (4,1,1) (F) (8,0,0) A m i n i m u m " C " grade i n prior program courses. A n introduction to standard programming structure, Prerequisite: S P A N 100, Grade 10 Spanish c o m pleted, or permission from instructor. A continuation of the work of S P A N 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following S P A N 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking S P A N 200 at a later date and need review work. standard techniques and programming aids i n relation to business applications using V i s u a l Basic. TCPP 182 (3) Introduction to Systems (8,0,0) Provides a basic understanding o f systems concepts and development o f specific skills: System L i f e C y c l e , flowcharting, process and data modeling. SPAN 200 Intermediate Spanish I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: S P A N 100/101, Grade 12 Spanish completed with a m i n i m u m of a " C " grade, or permission o f instructor. A review o f Spanish grammar with special emphasis on problematic areas normally encountered by students of the language. The reading, writing and oral fluency of the student w i l l be improved through translations, Course 296 Descriptions TCPP 200 IT Management (6) (4,0,0) Students w i l l gain a basic understanding o f current IT management issues. Topics include: financial management, project management, marketing and sales, and human resource management. TCPP215 Network I (3) (8,0,0) This course provides a foundation for understanding networking technologies including network procedures, design, architecture, standards, and protocols. TCPP 230 Operating Systems Prerequisite: (3) TCPP 289 (3) Systems Implementation Prerequisite: courses. (8,0,0) Successful completion of prior term's A project based course where students implement an (8,0,0) on-line computer system applying analysis and design concepts from the System Development Life C y c l e . (0,0,35) TCPP 300 Work Term (6) Comprehensive knowledge o f the widely used Prerequisite: Successful completion o f program operating systems: U N I X , M S - D O S , L I N U X and courses. W i n d o w s N T . Some emphasis on file structures and G a i n industry experience in a three-month work term. Successful completion o f prior program courses. recovery from hardware/software errors as well as the operating systems's Job Control Language and W e b server installation. TCPP 231 Data Management transition to employment. (3) (8,0,0) Prerequisite: T C P P 182 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade or permission o f the instructor. The structure, design and control o f hierarchical, network relational and object-oriented databases. Emphasis is on modeling tools as applied to business case studies. TCPP 233 (3) Server-Based Data Management Prerequisite: Seminars in job search skills, job retention, and career planning w i l l be conducted to assist students make the (8,0,0) TCPP 305 (3) (8,0,0) Network II — Network Administration Administering Microsoft N T Server ( M S #803) Learn and gain experience on the many features o f the W i n d o w s N T server including user accounts, group accounts, file and folder permissions, shared folders, printing, and security. TCPP 306 (3) Object Oriented Programming Prerequisite: T C P P 231 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade. A n introduction to S L Q - S e r v e r based data (8,0,0) Successful completion o f prior program courses with a m i n i m u m " C ' g r a d e . This course is an introduction to a programming management. Students w i l l install and administer S L Q - language such as C++ or Java. Topics include Server and the necessary middle-ware to enable data functions, structures, classes and arrays. access over the network. TCPP 240 (3) Computer Hardware and Software Prerequisite: (8,0,0) TCPP 325 Network III — NetWare (3) (8,0,0) N o v e l l 4.11 NetWare Administration ( N o v e l l #520) A d m i s s i o n to the T C P program. Prerequisite: Successful completion o f T C P P 215. To provide students with an understanding o f P C hardware and troubleshooting and its relationship with D O S and W i n d o w s operating system. The course w i l l be hands-on. Included in the course w i l l be " C o m m a n d line interface" commands and the hardware/software interface with operating systems. TCPP 252 (3) Visual Basic Programming Prerequisite: This course is an introduction to the field o f local area network administration, protocols and standards, hardware and software components and P C links. U p o n successful completion o f this course, students may elect to write N o v e l l exam, which grants a C N A — Certified NetWare Administrator — designation. (8,0,0) Successful completion of T C P P 152 with a m i n i m u m " C + " grade. A d v a n c e d V i s u a l Basic programming concepts, including file and data base handling. Concentrates on software development and data representation, including file and database handling. Course Descriptions 297 TCPP 329 Network IV — NT Core (3) (8,0,0) TCRI 300 Writing Practices I (15) (4,0,0) (F) W i n d o w s N T Core Technologies ( M S #922) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Successful completion o f T C P P 215 and T C P P 305 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade. This course shall provide instruction and mentorship for writers wishing to achieve a self determined project in writing, whether it be completion o f a manuscript or exploration o f new writing practices. W i t h the help o f visiting professional writers and Capilano faculty, students shall be encouraged to investigate a variety o f writing practices. In addition, students shall be motivated to give readings of their o w n work and to attend a number o f readings and lectures by faculty and ' visiting writers. This course provides the advanced skills to install, configure, optimize, administer and perform the dayto-day management tasks in a Microsoft W i n d o w s N T environment. Fault tolerance, NetWare integration and migration, server-based installation, and troubleshooting w i l l be introduced together with advanced administration techniques. The student is also introduced to T C P / I P , D H C P , W I N S , D N S , R A S Server, and client administration. TCPP 331 (3) Network V — NT Enterprise (8,0,0) Supporting Microsoft Server 4.0 — Enterprise T e c h nologies ( M S #689) Prerequisite: Successful completion o f prior program courses with a m i n i m u m " C " grade. This course allows networking professionals to support Microsoft W i n d o w s N T in an enterprise environment. Students w i l l learn to design, implement and support the W i n d o w s N T Server Network Operating System i n a multi-domain enterprise environment. TCPP 333 Network VI—TCP/IP (3) (8,0,0) Internetworking Microsoft T C P / I P on W i n d o w s N T 4.0 ( M S #688) Prerequisite: Successful completion o f T C P P 331 with a m i n i m u m " C " grade. T C P / I P is the Internet working protocol and this course w i l l cover the fundamentals of this protocol with Microsoft W i n d o w s N T . Topics include the subnet mask, static/dynamic IP routing, D H C P , W I N S , D N S , S N M P and more. TCPP 335 (3) Network VII — NT Web Server (8,0,0) Prerequisite: Successful completion o f T C P P 333 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade. Learn to install and configure a web server. and perform the procedure to install, configure and Course 298 Descriptions (4.0,0) (S) (15) In this continuation of W r i t i n g Practices 300, students shall continue to pursue their o w n self-defined writing projects, while receiving exposure to different distinguished professional writers, and Capilano faculty. (4,1.75,0) (F) THAI 100 Beginning Thai I (3) For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative Program This course provides instruction and practice both i n beginning language and i n the cultural background which is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic alphabet is used to avoid confusion o f sounds. The basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and common idioms are stressed as well. Students have time to practise all structures introduced, and are encouraged to initiate their o w n conversations. A t the end o f the course students have better than survival-level fluency, and use only Thai for basic classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. THAI 101 Beginnning Thai II (3) (4,2,0) (S) T H A I 100 or equivalent. For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative Program This course reviews the basic material o f T H A I 100, and introduces the script. Students learn how to write the words they already know. Students w i l l gain an understanding of the product's architecture support an Internet Information Server. TCRI 301 Writing Practices II Prerequisite: Creating and M a n a g i n g a W e b Server U s i n g Microsoft IIS 4.0 ( M S #936) B A , B F A or equivalent. M o r e complex structures are introduced, along with more idioms, c o m m o n expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost all i n T h a i , except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. A t the end o f the course students know how to respond to typical situations in Thai and to elicit basic everyday information from Thais. They can read simple Thai passages and the basic road signs and are at a level of reading and writing equivalent to Thai grade four students. THAI 102 Introduction to Thai I (1.5) For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative (4.2,0) (F) Program THAI 103 Introduction to Thai II (3) For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative (4,2,0) (S) This course is a continuation of T H A I 102. (3) (2,4,0) (F) A n introduction to a methodical approach to script, and the basic skills necessary to perform and stage contemporary monologues and scenes. THTR 101 Acting II (3) (2,4,0) (S) Develops skills in non-scripted theatre. Areas o f exploration include improvisation, mask work, and playmaking. Y o u w i l l perform self-created work in class. THTR 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction to Acting for the Camera A n introduction to acting with an emphasis on performing for the camera. THTR 120 Elements of Theatre I (4,0,0) (S) Plays in the context o f the history o f theatre from the Restoration to the beginnings o f modern theatre. Lectures, seminars, play reading and theatre attendance are part o f this course. THTR 150 (3) (2,4,0) (F) Introduction to Production & Design I A n introduction to the basic elements of technical (3) management, scenic carpentry, theatre lighting, and scenic design. THTR 151 (3) (2,4,0) (S) Introduction to Production & Design II A continuation o f T H T R 150. Topics include properties, sound, costumes, scenic painting, and makeup. Program T H A I 102 or instructor's permission. THTR 100 Acting I (3) theatre and theatre design. Topics include stage This course is designed to provide A P M C P students with basic Thai language skills and sensitize them to important cultural differences in concept and behaviour. Prerequisite: THTR 121 Elements of Theatre II (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to play study and the history of theatre from its ritual beginnings to the 17th century. Lectures, seminars, play reading, and theatre attendance are part of this course. T H T R 120 is normally taken with E N G L 100 in a THTR 152 Costuming I (3) (0,8,0) (F) A n introduction to the theory and practise o f the duties of the costume designer and other members o f the costume department in a producing theatre company. THTR 153 Costuming II (3) (0,8.0) (S) A continuation of T H T R 152 THTR 154 (3) Audio Engineering for the Stage I (2,0.4) (F) A n introduction to the theory and practise of audio engineering for the stage. THTR 155 (3) Audio Engineering for the Stage II (2,0,4) (S) A continuation of T H T R 154. THTR 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195 (1 each) (F.S) Practicum Prerequisite: Application to the coordinator at any time during the term. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature of the work and the amount o f credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation with the student. A l l who are cast in a department production or who are assigned to a production crew must register in this course. combined seminar. Course Descriptions 299 THTR 200 Script and Stage Prerequisite: tor. (3) (2,4,0) (F) T H T R 100 or permission of the instruc- A n intermediate scene study course focusing on text analysis and the performance o f scenes and very short one-act plays. THTR 201 Acting IV (3) Prerequisite: (2,4,0) (S) T H T R 200 or permission o f instructor. A scene study course w h i c h explores style in classical and contemporary plays . Scene study w i l l emphasize acting styles in groups of representative plays. Topics, set by the Department, w i l l vary each term. THTR 220 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I Prerequisite: course. T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100-level Arts A n in-depth study o f a specific theatre topic w h i c h w i l l be set each term by the Department. This is a thematic, rather than a chronological, approach to the study o f plays and theatre. Both theoretical and practical class methods may be used. THTR 221 (3) Conceptual Approaches II Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100-level Arts course. The same format as T H T R 220. This course studies a different topic. THTR 205 Bodywork (3) (2,4,0) (F) A course in movement techniques. Students focus on THTR 250 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Senior Production Responsibilities I body awareness, alignment, strength, flexibility and Prerequisite: coordination. Introduction to the duties o f senior production personnel including the Technical Director, Stage Manager, Stage Carpenter, Head Wardrobe, Head of Flys, and Head of Properties. THTR 207 Vocal Communication I (3) (2,4,0) (S) T H T R 150 or 151. A course in voice production and oral interpretation designed to free the speaking voice and develop expressive communication. THTR 210 (3) Acting for Film and Television Prerequisite: (2,4,0) (F.S) T H T R 100 or 101 or 110 or post- THTR 251 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Senior Production Responsibilities II Prerequisite: T H T R 150 or 151. A continuation o f T H T R 250. secondary acting experience. THTR 252 (1.5) Advanced Lighting & Sound I A n introduction to the acting techniques and technical Prerequisite: skills needed to perform for the camera. THTR 211 (3) Acting for Film and Television II Prerequisite: (2.4,0) (F.S) (2,4,0) (F) THTR 212 Film Acting I (3) For Professional Film Studies students only. A n introduction to the acting techniques and technical skills needed to perform for the camera. (2,4,0) (S) THTR 213 Film Acting II (3) For Professional Film Studies students only. T H T R 212. A continuation of T H T R 212. Topics include script Course Descriptions 300 the lighting and sound for both simple and complex shows. T H T R 210. interpretation and emotional portrayal. T H T R 150 or 151. Teaches the advanced skills required to design and run A continuation of T H T R 210. Topics include script interpretation and emotional portrayal. Prerequisite: (2.0,0) (F) THTR 253 (1.5) Advanced Lighting & Sound II Prerequisite: (2,0,0) (S) T H T R 150 or 151. A continuation of T H T R 252. THTR 254 (4.5) Technical Theatre/Design I Prerequisite: (0,12,0) (F) T H T R 150 or 151. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on the technical or design areas o f productions. THTR 255 (4.5) Technical Theatre/Design II Prerequisite: T H T R 150 or 151. A continuation of T H T R 254. (0,12,0) (S) THTR 260 (3) Analysis for Directing and Design (4,0,0) (F) Teaches script analysis for students o f directing and design. THTR 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295 (1 each)(F,S) Practicum VII - XII Prerequisite: Three credits o f T H T R 190 series and application to the coordinator at any time during the term. Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature of the w o r k and the amount of credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation with the student. A l l who are cast in a department production or who are assigned to a production crew, and who have three credits in the T H T R 190 series, must register i n this course. THTR 374 (12) (1,0.30) (F.S) Theatre Institute I — Production Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. This is part one o f the Theatre Institute program focusing on production and stage management. Students w i l l attend a tutorial production seminar, and complete their first and second projects. (The second project may be done in the second term.) THTR 375 (12) (1,0,30) (F,S) Theatre Institute II — Production Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. This is part two of the Theatre Institute program focusing on production and stage management. Students w i l l attend a tutorial production seminar, and complete their second (if not completed i n the previous term) and third projects. THTR 370 (12) Theatre Institute I — Directing (1,0,30) (F.S) Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. This is part one o f the Theatre Institute program focusing on directing. Students w i l l attend a tutorial seminar, direct scenes, and complete their first project as an assistant director or director. THTR 371 (12) Theatre Institute II — Directing This course w i l l include a general overview o f the coop work experience. The specific areas covered w i l l be goal setting, skills analysis, researching sectors and employers, j o b search techniques and preparation o f resume, cover letter and thank you letter. Assistance w i l l be given in job search by faculty. TOUR 111 (3) Tourism: An Industry Perspective This is part two o f the Theatre Institute program focusing on directing. Students w i l l attend a tutorial seminar, direct scenes, and complete their second project as an assistant director or director. (1,0,30) (F.S) Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. This is part one o f the Theatre Institute program focusing on acting. Students w i l l work on scene study through private acting instruction. They w i l l complete their first and second performance projects. (The second project may be done in the second term.) THTR 373 (12) Theatre Institute II — Acting (2,0,0) (S) (1.0,30) (F.S) Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. THTR 372 (12) Theatre Institute I — Acting TOUR 100 (1.5) Tourism Co-op Preparation (1,0,30) (F.S) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the key concepts, language, and issues facing the tourism industry. Trends, market profiles and demographic factors, key industry sectors, tourism geography and key regional products in B . C . , tourism's role in community development, social impacts of tourism, transportation, communication, and legal issues in tourism. TOUR 112 Tourism Marketing (3) (4,0,0) (S) The objectives of this course are to examine the existing tourism marketing system in Canada; to develop the student's understanding o f Canadian tourism marketing and the basics of consumer marketing; and to enable the student to relate to current aspects of tourism business and how they affect Canadian tourism marketing. Prerequisite: A u d i t i o n or interview. This is part two of the Theatre Institute program focusing on acting. Students w i l l work on scene study through private acting instruction. They w i l l complete their second (if not completed in the previous term) and third performance projects. TOUR 113 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Human Resource Management in Tourism Human resource issues, j o b analysis, recruitment, interviewing, orientation, training and development, performance management, legislation, and labourmanagement relations. Course Descriptions 301 TOUR 114 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Organizational Behaviour in Tourism TOUR 127 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Tourism Resource and Community Planning Individual behaviour, interpersonal communication skills, decision-making, group dynamics and team building, service management, conflict resolution, negotiation, and giving performance feedback. A n overview o f tourism resource management issues and approaches, including heritage and cultural tourism planning, tourism resource inventory and planning methods including G I S (Geographical Information System) techniques, community tourism planning, and sustainability issues i n tourism. TOUR 116 (3) Financial Planning in Tourism I (4,0,0) (F) Designed to provide future entrepreneurs and managers in the field o f tourism an introductory review o f the basic accounting and planning skills needed for small business operations. This course w i l l also cover basic financial statement analysis for the purpose o f providing information to meet the needs o f investors, owners and management. TOUR 118 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Special Events — Tourism Generators This course w i l l cover all aspects o f event management and event marketing: choosing the right event, designing a business (event) plan, event/cause marketing, sponsor proposals, managing the pre-event, event day(s) management, and post event activities. Students w i l l design a new special event and prepare a business plan for that event. The course w i l l also include case studies from existing events. TOUR 120 (3) Adventure and Eco-Tourism (4,0,0) (F) Adventure tourism products w i l l be examined; economic impact of the industry, selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and structure o f the industry, government's role in area and activity management, resource management issues, protecting resource areas, ecotourism issues, land use planning, and product opportunities. TOUR 123 Tourism Advertising (3) (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to give the student an understanding o f the major aspects of Canadian tourism advertising. The course w i l l cover advertising planning, creative strategies and execution as well as developing "real life" advertising campaigns. TOUR 125 (3) Financial Planning in Tourism II (4,0,0) (S) U s i n g financial and strategic planning techniques, students w i l l develop a comprehensive business plan and financing proposal for a tourism business. This is the major project for the course. In addition, students w i l l complete the study o f financial analysis and basic business accounting begun in T O U R 116. Course 302 Descriptions TOUR 130 (10.5) (0,0,13.5) (Su) Tourism Co-op Work Term The co-op work term is designed to apply classroom theory and skills through work experience. Students w i l l spend four and one-half months i n an acceptable industry placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific industry supervisor. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates who are better able to assume productive jobs. Summer work placements are sought by the students, with faculty co-op advisors assisting them to find placement. Students apply for positions and are selected by the employees and the College. Students' work performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor. U p o n completion o f the co-op work term, each student w i l l make a major presentation to the class and faculty at a department retreat. TOUR 131 (3) Tourism Product Development (4,0,0) (S) W i t h today's intense global competition for tourists combined with the subjective and tangible nature o f the tourism experience, operations and destinations are now compelled to analytically and methodically develop appropriate tourism products. This course w i l l examine how to effectively develop, package and position tourism products for success i n the marketplace. TOUR 139 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Computer Applications in Tourism II This course provides the student with hands-on experience using computer technology to communicate using text, graphics and the internet. TOUR 143 (3) Business Law in Tourism (4,0,0) (S) This course outlines Canadian L a w applicable to the tourism industry. Students w i l l be introduced to identifying areas prone to legal risk and the rights and liabilities o f relationships within the tourism industry. Topics include: constitutional law, contract law, liability, insurance, property law, human rights, labour and employment, liquor, licensing and safety o f guides and guests. TOUR 232 (3) (4,0,0) (S) International Tourism Policy and Planning TOUR 423 (3) Tourism Planning and Policy A geographical overview o f the Asia-Pacific region including demographics, physiography, environmental issues, tourism destinations and travel patterns. A review of politics i n tourism and Asia-Pacific region national tourism policies. Methodology and approach to tourism policy analysis, comparative tourism development case studies, regional tourism policy and planning. Role o f development agencies and tourism organizations. Use and apply planning and policy knowledge specific to tourism, including planning and policy negotiation skills, advanced policy and planning writing skills, and organization and leadership of planning initiatives. TOUR 233 Cross Cultural Tourism (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n overview Of cross-cultural issues i n tourism. The nature o f prejudice and racism is examined as are effective communication skills and behaviours in selected cultures: gender relationships, business and social customs, body language, negotiation skills and others. In addition to acquiring practical knowledge about culture i n general, participants research and present information on a variety o f specific cultures, with the link between cultural knowledge/skills and the success of Tourism or Outdoor Recreation activities being stressed. TOUR 239 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Advanced Computer Applications in Tourism This course provides the student with hands-on experience using computer technology to manage financial data and strategic information. TOUR 421 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Organizational Leadership in Tourism A d v a n c e d skills i n organizational leadership, including leadership approaches, motivation, understanding of organizational culture, and management of working relationships. TOUR 422 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) People Management — Human Relations in Tourism A d v a n c e d human resource management skills and professional knowledge for application to the tourism workforce including the "best practices" o f recruitment and selection, motivating and managing performance, compensation and benefits, and employee and labour relations techniques w h i c h align with the business strategy o f the tourism operation. TOUR 424 (3) Entrepreneurship in Tourism (4,0,0) (F,S) (4,0,0) (F.S) A d v a n c e d capabilities in tourism product development, including innovation within the entrepreneurial process and through existing organizations with the intrapreneurial process. TOUR 425 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) Financial Management in Tourism A p p l i e d financial management and planning capabilities, including financial ratios, budgets, pro forma statements, risk management, and working capital management. TOUR 426 (3) Cultural and Community Issues (4,0.0) (F.S) A b i l i t y to apply cross-cultural communications skills and knowledge, including conflict resolution and negotiation skills, with employees, clients and customers from different cultures. A b i l i t y to apply leadership and negotiation skills to community issues i n tourism. TOUR 427 (3) Marketing Research for Tourism (4,0,0) (F.S) A b i l i t y to use market research skills needed for the effective management of tourism operations, including survey techniques. TOUR 428 (3) International Tourism Marketing (4,0.0) (F.S) Students w i l l develop the capability to manage tourism operations in an international context — economic, political, legal, cultural, and financial environments. TOUR 440 Graduating Seminar (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Participants w i l l research and present a major graduating project with direct application to the tourism industry under the guidance o f a faculty supervisor. TOUR 441 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Advanced Tourism Product Development Students w i l l develop advanced skills in product development based on market and demographic research, including marketing, pricing, competitive analysis, and conceptualizing new products across a range of industry sectors. Course Descriptions 303 TOUR 442 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Environmental Stewardship for Tourism TXTL 160 (3) Textile Surface Design I Students w i l l review principled negotiation, the ethics of environmental stewardship, the environmental legislative regime and provincial resource policy, geographical information system applications, negotiations of land use agreements, co-management approaches, and sustainability issues using case studies. This is an introduction to traditional methods o f printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigment and dyes. B o u n d and tied resists w i l l also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes and discharge effects. Design possibilities w i l l be studied for each medium and traditional dye techniques from many cultures w i l l be examined. TOUR 443 (3) Cultural Tourism Management (4,0.0) This course deals with the management of cultural, heritage and entertainment tourism. Topics include negotiating agreements with municipalities, planning approaches, sponsorships, protection o f heritage properties, museum tourism, and performing arts and visual arts partnerships. TOUR 444 (3) International Eco-tourism (3,0.1) This comparative approach to eco-tourism i n different countries w i l l highlight issues of sustainability, planning, socio-cultural issues, and economic demand. TXTL 154 Introductory Drawing I (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course offers students drawing skills that w i l l be useful in their practice. Concentration w i l l be given to the study of primary drawing media and basic techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, marking pens, conte and pastel. It includes the study of perspective drawing from direct observation and representational rendering techniques o f objects, structures, surfaces and textures. Students w i l l learn how to visualize i n graphic terms, to symbolize and to stylize in terms of line and line characteristics, and to develop power o f observation and graphic sensibility. TXTL158 Design I (3) (4,0,0) (F) Basic design elements and principles o f colour theory w i l l be studied. Sources of inspiration and imagery w i l l be explored using a variety of materials and processes. Two-dimensional repeat design w i l l be studied for application to surface decoration and compositional elements w i l l be investigated and adapted for textiles. M a i n project w i l l be presented in textiles. Course 304 Descriptions (4,1.5,0) (F) TXTL 161 (3) Textile Surface Design II Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (S) T X T L 160. This is an introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques with rice paste resists w i l l be demonstrated. Applique and stitching techniques w i l l be used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium w i l l be explored. Fabrics from different cultures and time periods w i l l be studied. TXTL168 Weaving I (3) (4,1.5.0) (F) Introduction to Fibre Structures and Tapestry. This course is divided into two parts. One segment deals with basic fibre properties and construction techniques such as felting, yarn construction, dying and various off-loom weaving techniques. T w i n i n g and coiling for basketry w i l l be studied and historical as w e l l as contemporary objects from various cultures w i l l be discussed. Tapestry is the subject of the second half of the course. A sampler is woven to learn the basic vocabulary o f traditional techniques. A n a l y s i s o f techniques used by medieval and contemporary artists helps students to explore the application o f the basic techniques. Studies i n tapestry include the discussion of the great mural tapestries of medieval Europe and the rebirth o f tapestry during the 20th century. One finished piece is woven. TXTL169 Weaving II (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) This introduction to loom weaving includes warping the l o o m and drafting pattern weaves on four harnesses. Students weave samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, textures, and use o f different fibres. Controlled dye techniques w i l l be introduced and historical and contemporary weaving from different cultures w i l l be studied. TXTL 178 Design II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: T X T L 158. Elements o f 2 - D and 3-D design w i l l be explored. Concepts o f two-dimensional composing such as grid and other layout structures, creative uses o f positive negative space, issues of emphasis and colour theory as w e l l as text orientation with image and image on field w i l l be studied. Three-dimensional issues involving installation and materiality offer a broad perspective o f study. Cultural sources for new ideas in design including your own personal references w i l l form the backbone o f the course. A n optional introduction to computer design and image manipulation w i l l be included. M a i n projects w i l l be presented first on paper then in textile form. TXTL 230 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Professional and Business Skills in Arts and Crafts Prerequisites: One year full-time study in a visual arts program or equivalent experience. Students w i l l receive an overview, resources "and information, as w e l l as practical hands-on experience in setting up a self-employed business or professional practice in the arts. They w i l l learn basic self-management practices and gain a basic understanding o f business practices, marketing, financial management, legal and copyright issues and contracts. Students w i l l also find out about different galleries and granting agencies. A practicum with an artist, crafts person, arts organization or business is an integrated part of this course. Students w i l l also prepare a portfolio. TXTL 240 (3) 3-D Fibre Constructions II Prerequisite: tor. TXTL 267 Weaving III (4,0,0) (S) T X T L 168 or permission o f the instruc- Students w i l l use advanced fibre/textile construction techniques, paper making, felt making and simple j o i n i n g processes to create three dimensional functional and non-functional objects. Students w i l l acquire technical knowledge with many processes and the emphasis w i l l be on experimenting with traditional and non-traditional materials and in communicating artistic ideas. Students w i l l study traditional and contemporary work, including recent developments in 'Fiberarts'. (3) (4,1.5,0) (F) T X T L 169. Hand-manipulated structures, ikat and painted warps w i l l be explored. The first part o f the course emphasizes weave structures for use in three-dimensional work or for imagery, i.e. double weave and weft brocade; the second part looks at graphic imagery and weaving. Both technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed, and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and through research. TXTL 268 Weaving IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) T X T L 267. This is a further exploration of techniques and ideas i n weaving and/or combinations with other methods o f textile constructions. Students w i l l develop a personal focus and necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Techniques can include rug-weaving, advanced multi-harness weaving, supplementary warp/ weft, as well as advanced projects in felt, basketry and off-loom techniques. Critical discussions w i l l be encouraged in class. TXTL 284 (3) Textile Surface Design III Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (F) T X T L 161. This study o f screen printing techniques using paper, wax, screen filler and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety o f methods for producing a repeat design with different registration possibilities. There w i l l be an option for using photographic stencils for projects. Light sensitive dyes w i l l be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening techniques. TXTL 285 (3) Textile Surface Design IV Prerequisite: (4,1.5,0) (S) T X T L 284. Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities o f paper collage, cast paper, use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. Relief and 3-D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. C h e m i c a l processes w i l l be introduced which alter the structure o f the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts o f it. Course Descriptions 305 TXTL 290 Precision Dyeing Prerequisite: (3) (4,0.0) (F) First year o f Textile Arts program or equivalent. This course teaches precision dye methods with a range of synthetic and natural dyes for use with different yarns and fabrics. It provides technical knowledge for the safe use o f dyes, how to achieve a colour match and how to create various aged looks for applied situations in film or theatre or for a special project. TXTL 340 (3) 3-D Fibre Constructions III Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) Acceptance in A d v a n c e d Certificate Program. Students w i l l use advanced fibre/textile construction techniques, paper making, felt making and simple joining processes to create three dimensional functional and non-functional objects. Students w i l l acquire technical knowledge with many processes and the emphasis w i l l be on experimenting with traditional and non-traditional materials and in communicating artistic ideas. Students w i l l study traditional and contemporary work, including recent developments i n 'Fiberarts'. Students w i l l be encouraged to combine textile processes with other media processes i n order to develop a body o f work. TXTL 367 Weaving V (4.5) (4,1.5,1) (F) Prerequisite: Acceptance into A d v a n c e d Certificate Program. Students w i l l expand their knowledge o f basic weaves through experimental pieces and finished projects. Hand-manipulated structures, such as double weave and brocading, w i l l be explored as w e l l as working with colour through ikat, painted and printed warps. This course emphasizes graphic approaches to weaving; the use o f figurative and symbolic imagery or abstract patterning. Both technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and researched. TXTL 368 Weaving VI (4.5) (4,1.5,1) (S) Prerequisite: Program. Acceptance into A d v a n c e d Certificate ; This is a further exploration of techniques and ideas i n weaving and/or combinations with other methods o f textile constructions. Students w i l l develop necessary techniques for individually designed projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. Course 306 Descriptions Topics can include loom-weaving such as rug-weaving, computer assisted designing for advanced pattern weaving and special techniques designed for threedimensional weavings; non-woven techniques include felting, basketry and off-loom techniques. Students w i l l be encouraged to combine weaving with surface design processes and other media. TXTL 384 (4.5) Textile Surface Design V Prerequisite: Program. (4,1.5,1) (F) Acceptance into A d v a n c e d Certificate The study of screen printing using paper, wax and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety o f methods for producing 'single images as well as repeat designs with different registration possibilities. Photographic effects w i l l be explored i n combination with discharge and resist processes. Light sensitive chemicals w i l l be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting w i t h different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening techniques. TXTL 385 (4.5) Textile Surface Design VI Prerequisite: Program. (4,1.5,1) (S) Acceptance into A d v a n c e d Certificate Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. R e l i e f and 3-D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. C h e m i c a l processes w i l l be introduced w h i c h alter the structure o f the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts o f it. VIET 102 (1.5) Introduction to Vietnamese I For Asia Pacific Management students only. Cooperative (4,2,0) (F) Program This course is designed to offer A P M C P students a basic knowledge o f Vietnamese and to enable them to gain an appreciation o f the Vietnamese culture and society. VIET 103 (3) Introduction to Vietnamese II For Asia Pacific Management students only. Prerequisite: Cooperative (4,0,0) (S) Program V I E T 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation of V I E T 102. (4,2,0) (F) WMST 106 (3) (4,0,0) Contemporary American Women Writers This course introduces students to the basics o f Vietnamese conversation, culture, and language structure. A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness o f and appreciation o f contemporary and recent important A m e r i c a n women authors. There w i l l be brief consideration o f 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus w i l l be on works published since W W I I , including works o f the 1990's. A l t h o u g h the focus w i l l be on plays, stories, novels, and poetry, there w i l l be some exploration o f those biographical matters and issues o f critical status that mark the rise o f women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. VIET 110 Basic Vietnamese I VIET 111 Basic Vietnamese II (3) (3) (4.2,0) (S) Prerequisite: V I E T 110 This course is a continuation of Vietnamese 110. WMST 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Introduction to Women's Studies This course w i l l examine the status and role of women in Canadian society. Topics w i l l include the impact of W o m e n ' s Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the nature and origins o f patriarchy; women and work; reproductive rights, pornography and sexuality. It w i l l investigate issues o f power centering around race, class and sexuality. It w i l l trace the development o f gender role divisions in the family and other social institutions; examine the influence o f education, media and art on the development o f women's social and legal status. WMST 102 (3) Political Economy of Women (4,0,0) This course w i l l examine women's work from the preindustrial time until today. Topics such as participation in the workplace, inequality in the labour markets, exclusion o f household production in the system o f National Accounts and attempts to measure unpaid work w i l l be covered. The course w i l l also examine the impact o f free trade, technology, privatization, and economic restructuring on women. Topics w i l l also include an examination o f the effects o f the mounting debt and economic crisis on women i n the less developed countries. Issues o f current interest such as the comparable worth movement and the child care industry w i l l be discussed. WMST 104 (3) (4,0,0) Women Writers and Feminist Criticism A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden the students' awareness of, and appreciation for, literature produced by women writers with emphasis on contemporary writers. It w i l l also introduce students to current feminist literary theory. WMST 110 (3) Women and Psychology (4,0,0) In this course we examine the psychological construction o f gender-roles, their development i n childhood and maintenance in adulthood. The course w i l l examine current research in biology, socialization, personality and mental health, and w i l l include issues o f current interest such as sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender relations and the workplace. WMST 113 Women in Politics (3) (4,0,0) This introductory course i n W o m e n ' s Studies w i l l examine women's political participation i n the political process from a multidisciplinary feminist format. The course w i l l focus on Canadian examples and encourage students to examine the difficulties that affect women in particular. Students w i l l be encouraged to research possible solutions to increasing women's political participation. WMST 122 (3) Women in Anthropology (4,0,0) In this course the anthropological perspective w i l l be applied to women in different cultures of the world: their role i n economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems; exploration of the work o f women anthropologists and the effect o f theory on understanding women; women's experience in cultures o f the world. Course Descriptions 307 W M S T 130 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n and Art This course surveys the history of women's involvement in Western art. The position o f women in the visual arts and art history w i l l be discussed and the methodological issues involved in reclaiming the history of women artists explored. W o m e n ' s role as producers of art w i l l be considered from Antiquity to the 20th century and the social, cultural and economic background o f each period w i l l be examined in order to understand the conditions under w h i c h these artists worked. The image o f women in art w i l l be looked at to reveal the underlying ideologies o f each period. Students taking W M S T 130 w i l l not receive duplicate credit for A H I S 109. W M S T 140 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n , Science a n d T e c h n o l o g y This course w i l l provide an insight into the role that science and technology play in our society and their impact on the lives o f women. Topics w i l l include an historical review o f the role women have played in the development of science, investigation o f the reasons for the traditionally l o w participation o f women i n scientific and technical fields, the relationship between science and gender and discussion sessions on a variety of topics such as ecofeminism, ecology and the environment, reproductive technologies, sociobiology, information technology. W M S T 220 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey W e w i l l examine the lives of women in the western world from the ancient times to 20th century North A m e r i c a . Private lives as well as public and political activities w i l l be studied. Topics w i l l include the origins of patriarchy, the role of women in Early Christianity, women in monasticism, women and the family in pre-industrial Europe, the impact of industrialization, pioneers and pathbreakers, and the rise and nature of women's movements. Course 308 Descriptions Index Academic appeals Academic probation Academic schedule Accelerated Accounting Management program Accelerated General Management program Accelerated Marketing Management program Accounting Assistant program Accounting Support program Acting for the Camera program Add/drop period Administration Administrative Assistant program Admission/readmission Admission requirements Adult Basic Education Advanced placement Advising Centre Alternative Career Training , Animation Anthropology Application dates Applied Information Technology program Applied Fisheries and Forestry Science Art History Art Institute Arts and Entertainment Management program Asia Pacific Management Cooperative program Associate degree requirements Athletics and recreation Attendance Audio-Visual Services Awards 40 39 19 127 127 127 110 111 138 27 65 111 20 21 70 24 43 72 131,134 83 21 112 141 83 183 114 184 32 51 36 45 47 Bachelor of Business Administration Bachelor of Music in Jazz Studies Bachelor of Music Therapy Bachelor of Music Transfer Bachelor of Tourism Management Biology Bookstore Bursaries Business Administration Accelerated Diploma programs Advanced Certificate Advanced Diploma Certificate Co-operative Education Diploma program Degree Diploma programs Evening Certificate programs Business Computing Certificate Business Computing Co-operative Diploma Business Fundamentals program 120 147 101,164 99 179 84 53 48 116 126 126 121 126 120 120 123 125 126 123 131 Index 310 Cafeteria 54 Campus addresses 1 Campus maps 5,7,9 Canadian Studies Specialty 81 Cap Corner (student store) 53 Capilano Canadian Institute of Higher Education (China) 198 Capilano College Foundation 65 Capilano Courier 52 Capilano Review 52 Capilano Students' Union 52 Car pool 54 Career Access Centre 69 Career Resource Centre 51 Career/vocational programs 109 Certificate and diploma requirements 32 Certified Financial Planner program 128,191 Cheating and plagiarism policy 62 Chemistry 85 Child care 50 China, study in 198 Chinese 85 College Board 65 College Success Strategies (credit courses) 70 Commerce 86 Commercial Animation program 131 Communications 133 Community Music School 191 Computer Learning Centre 45 Computer Specialist program 128 Computer system, misuse policy 64 Computing Science 87 Conflict Resolution Advisor 50 Continuing Education 191 Contracts 192 Co-operative education 48,109 Copyright policy 64 Counselling 49 Course challenge 29 Course change procedures 28 Course descriptions 201 Course overload 29 Criminology 88 Dalian, study in Daycare Digital Animation program Diploma requirements Disabilities, student policy Disability Services Distance education Early Childhood Care and Education program Economics 198 see Child Care 134 32 56 43 48 135 88 Education Council Educational travel Eldercollege : Employment Centre Engineering English English as a Second Language English Diagnostic Test (EDT) English language requirements Enrolment status Environmental Science program Equivalence Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations program Examination period Exemption 65 192 191 47 89 91 73 27 21,74 36 186 37 81 36 37 Faculty see specific program/departments Fees 30 Film Studies 138,192 Financial aid and awards 47 First aid 50 First Nations College Preparation program : 74 First Nations Student Services 44 Fish Culture Technician program 48,141 Fisheries and Forestry Science 141 Fitness Centre 52 Food and beverage service 54 Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act 37 French 92 Geography Geology German Governance Graphic Design and Illustration program Grades Graduation 93 93 94 65 142 38 32 Hariri Canadian University College of Technology (Lebanon) Health Services History Home Support/Personal Care Attendant program Home Support/Resident Care Attendant program Humanities Division 198 50 94 144 146 79 Instructional year International education International exchanges International Student Centre International student information Infotec program 26 197 46 46 see Admission 112 Japanese Jazz Studies ..... 95 147 Kinesiology 95 Labour Studies program Landscape Horticulture program Latin American Management program Learning specialist Lebanon, study in Legal Assistant program Legal Secretarial program Library Linguistics Loans Local Government Administration Professional Certificate program Lost and found 155 156 187 45 198 48,157 160 44 96 47 Math Placement Test (MPT) Mathematics and Statistics Mathematics Learning Centre Media Production Services Media program Medical insurance Medical Office Assistant program Mission and values Music Therapy, Bachelor of Music Transfer, Bachelor of 26,97 96 46 45 161 20 163 13 101,164 99 129 54 Network Specialist program 129 Office Assistant program Online Publishing program Outdoor Recreation Management program 166 167 168 Parking Peer Support Centre Personal education number (PEN) Philosophy Physics Physiotherapy Plagiarism policy Policies Political Studies Post-graduate programs Pre-college level courses Preparatory programs Prior learning assessment Professional Accounting Transfer Package Professional Film Studies program Protection of privacy Provincial Rafting Exams Psychology Pure and Applied Sciences Division 53 50 37 101 50 62 36,55 102 142,183 69 69 25 127 138 37 192 103 79,82 Readmission Recreation Refunds Registrar's Office Registration Required to withdraw Retail Marketing Co-op program 20 51 see Fees 43 26 40 125 1 0 2 Index 311 SARAW program 76 Scholarships 48 Security 51 Sexual harassment policy 59 Social Science Division 79 Sociology 103 Spanish 104 Special Education Teacher Assistant program 170 Speech Assisted Reading and Writing program 76 Sports see Athletics Sports Medicine Clinic 50 Sportsplex 52 Streamkeepers Training 142 Students conduct policy 57 employment centre 47 loans 47 newspaper 52 records 36 rights and responsibilities 55 services 43 student-operated store 53 student union '• 52 students with disabilities 56 Studio Art program 171 Substitution 37 Summer session 26 Technical Computer Professional program Telephone numbers (departments) Textile Arts program Thai Theatre program Tourism Management Co-op program Transcripts (student records) Transfer credit Tuition 130 11 173 104 175 178 36 24,37 see Fees University transfer 79 Visual and Performing Arts Division 79 Watershed Restoration Technician program 141 Web site: www.capcollege.bc.ca Withdrawal period Women's Studies Writing Across the Curriculum Writing Centre Writing Practices program Capilano Col lew Bookstore Index 312 27 80,105 81 46 188